BRlJVf*7!  lLD,  1L 


OF  THE 

U N I VERS  ITY 
Of  ILLINOIS 


8+5V59 

OiE 

191- 


I 


Return  this  book  on  or  before  the 
Latest  Date  stamped  below.  A 
charge  is  made  on  all  overdue 
books. 

University  of  Illinois  Library 


V: 


fi IV  1 


N 


gy 


-'M  -5  iS$2 


MAS  -2136 


HAP  2 ?.  191A 

APR  1 7 J1I7A 


I'M 


ttAt 


- 8 19'P* 


'“if#’;;'. 


MAR  1 8 1985 

FEB  25  W 


WstmsZi 


M3  2 


J 


' ?■ 


A STRANGE  ADVENTURE.— Pag©  I7d 

167 


THE 


Mysterious  Jsland 


CONTAINING 

0 

••DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS, •• 

“ABANDONED,” 

“THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND, 

By  JULES  VERNE, 

Author  of  1,4  Twenty  Thousand  Leagues  Under  the  Seas,”  “ Tour 
q#  the  World  in  8o  Days,”  ‘‘The  Fur  Country, * 


NEW  YORK: 

HURST  & CO.,  P LfcB  LISHERSj 


122  NASSAU  STREET. 


S46'  V5? 
(b-c  £ 

ttl- 


Dropped  from  the.  Clouds. 


CHAPTER  X 


THE  STORM  OF  1865— VOICES  IN  THE  AIR— A BALLOON  CARRIED 
AWAY  BY  A WHIRLWIND  — FIVE  PASSENGERS  — WHAT  HAP' 
PENED  IN  THE  CAR. 

“Are  we  rising  again?”  “No.  On  the  contrary.”  “Are 
we  descending  ? ” “ Worse  than  that,  captain ! we  are  falling  ! ” 
“ For  Heaven’s  sake  heave  out  the  ballast ! ” “ There  ! the  last 
sack  is  empty ! ” “ Does  the  balloon  rise  ? ” “ No ! ” “I  hear 
a noise  like  the  dashing  of  waves ! ” “ The  sea  is  below  the 
car ! It  can  not  be  more  than  500  feet  from  us  ! ” “ Overboard 
with  every  weight ! —every  thing ! ” 

Such  were  the  loud  and  startling  words  wnich  resounded 
through  the  air,  above  the  vast  watery  desert  of  the  Pacific, 
about  four  o’clock  in  the  evening  of  the  23d  of  March,  1865. 

Few  can  possibly  have  forgotten  the  terrible  storm  from  the 
northeast,  in  the  middle  of  the  equinox  of  that  year.  The  tem- 
pest raged  without  intermission  from  the  18th  to  the  26th  of 
March.  Its  ravages  were  terrible  in  America,  Europe,  and  Asia, 
covering  a distance  of  eighteen  hundred  miles,  and  extending 
obliquely  to  the  equator  from  the  thirty-fifth  north  parallel  to 
the  fortieth  south  parallel.  Towns  were  overthrown,  forests 
uprooted,  coasts  devastated  by  the  mountains  of  water  which 
were  precipitated  on  them,  vessels  cast  on  the  shore,  which  the 
published  accounts  numbered  by  hmidreds,  whole  districts 
levelled  by  waterspouts  which  destroyed  every  thing  they 
passed  over,  several  thousand  people  crushed  on  land  or 
drowned  at  sea;  such  were  the  traces  of  its  fury,  left  by  this 
devastating  tempest.  It  surpassed  in  disasters  those  which  so 
frightfully  ravaged  Havannah  and  Guadaloupe,  one  on  the  2 5th 
of  October,  1810,  the  other  on  the  26th  of  July,  1825 
But  while  so  many  catastrophes  were  taking  place  on  k^ 

13 


14 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


and  at  sea,  a drama  not  less  exciting  was  being  enacted  in  the 
agitated  air. 

In  fact,  a balloon,  as  a ball  might  be  carried  on  the  summit 
of  a waterspout,  had  been  taken  into  the  circling  movement  of 
a column  of  air  and  had  traversed  space  at  the  rate  of  ninety 
miles  an  hour,  turning  round  and  round  as  if  seized  by  some 
aerial  maelstrom. 

Beneath  the  lower  point  of  the  balloon,  swung  a car,  contain- 
ing five  passengers,  scarcely  visible  in  the  midst  of  the  thick 
vapor  mingled  with  spray  which  hung  over  the  surface  of  the 
ocean. 

Whence,  it  may  be  asked,  had  come  that  plaything  of  the 
tempest  ? From  what  part  of  the  world  did  it  rise  ? It  surely 
could  not  have  started  during  the  storm.  But  the  storm  has 
raged  five  days  already,  and  the  first  symptoms  were  manifested 
on  the  18th.  It  can  not  be  doubted  that  the  balloon  came  from 
a great  distance,  for  it  could  not  have  traveled  less  than  two 
thousand  miles  in  twenty-four  hours. 

At  any  rate  the  passengers,  destitute  of  all  marks  for  their 
guidance,  could  not  have  possessed  the  means  of  reckoning  the 
route  traversed  since  their  departure.  It  was  a remarkable 
fact  that,  although  in  the  very  midst  of  the  furious  tempest, 
they  did  not  suffer  from  it.  They  were  thrown  about  and 
whirled  round  and  round  without  feeling  the  rotation  in  the 
slightest  degree,  or  being  sensible  that  they  were  removed  from 
a horizontal  position. 

Their  eyes  could  not  pierce  through  the  thick  mist  which  had 
gathered  beneath  the  car.  Dark  vapor  was  all  around  them. 
Such  was  the  density  of  the  atmosphere  that  they  could  not  be 
certain  whether  it  was  day  or  night.  No  reflection  of  light,  no 
sound  from  inhabited  land,  no  roaring  of  the  ocean  could  have 
reached  them,  through  the  obscurity,  whilst  suspended  in  those 
elevated  zones.  Their  rapid  descent  alone  had  informed  them 
of  the  dangers  which  they  ran  from  the  waves.  However,  the 
balloon,  lightened  of  heavy  articles,  such  as  ammunition,  arms, 
and  provisions,  had  risen  into  the  higher  layers  of  the  atmos- 
phere, to  a height  of  4,500  feet.  The  voyagers,  after  having 
discovered  that  the  sea  extended  beneath  them,  and  thinking 


DROPPED  THE  CLOUDS. 


15 


the  dangers  above  less  dreadful  than  those  below,  did  not  hesi- 
tate to  throw  overboard  even  their  most  useful  articles,  while 
they  endeavored  to  lose  no  more  of  that  fluid,  the  life  of  their 
enterprise,  which  sustained  them  above  the  abyss. 

The  night  passed  in  the  midst  of  alarms  which  would  have 
been  death  to  less  energetic  souls.  Again  the  day  appeared 
and  with  it  the  tempest  began  to  moderate.  From  the  begin- 
ning  of  that  day,  the  24th  of  March,  it  showed  symptoms  of 
abating.  At  dawn,  some  of  the  lighter  clouds  had  risen  into 
the  more  lofty  regions  of  the  air.  In  a few  hours  the  wind  had 
changed  from  a hurricane  to  a fresh  breeze,  that  is  to  say,  the 
rate  of  the  transit  of  the  atmospheric  layers  was  diminished  by 
half.  It  was  still  what  sailors  call  “a  close-reefed  topsail 
breeze,”  but  the  commotion  in  the  elements  had  not  the  less 
considerably  diminished. 

Towards  eleven  o’clock,  the  lower  region  of  the  air  was  sensi- 
bly clearer.  The  atmosphere  threw  off  that  chilly  dampness 
which  is  felt  after  the  passage  of  a great  meteor.  The  storm 
did  not  seem  to  have  gone  further  to  the  west.  It  appeared  to 
have  exhausted  itself.  Could  it'  have  passed  away  in  electric 
sheets,  as  is  sometimes  the  case  with  regard  to  the  typhoons  of 
the  Indian  Ocean. 

But  at  the  same  time,  it  was  also  evident  that  the  balloon  was 
again  slowly  descending  with  a regular  movement.  It  ap- 
peared as  if  it  were,  little  by  little,  collapsing,  and  that  its  case 
was  lengthening  and  extending,  passing  from  a spherical  to 
an  oval  form.  Towards  mid-day  the  balloon  was  hovering 
above  the  sea  at  a height  of  only  2,000  feet.  It  contained  50,000 
cubic  feet  of  gas,  and,  thanks  to  its  capacity,  it  could  maintain 
itself  a long  time  in  the  air,  although  it  should  reach  a great 
altitude  or  might  be  thrown  into  a horizontal  position. 

Perceiving  their  danger,  the  passengers  cast  away  the  last 
articles  which  still  weighed  down  the  car,  the  few  provisions 
they  had  kept,  every  thing,  even  to  their  pocket-knives,  and 
•ne  of  them,  having  hoisted  himself  on  to  the  circles  which 
united  the  cords  of  the  net,  tried  to  secure  more  firmly  the 
lower  point  of  the  balloon. 

It  wa3,  however,  evident  to  the  voyagers  that  the  gas  was 


16 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


failing,  and  that  the  balloon  could  no  longer  be  sustained  in 
the  higher  regions.  They  must  infallibly  perish ! ' 

There  was  not  a continent,  nor  even  an  island,  visible  be- 
neath them.  The  watery  expanse  did  not  present  a single 
speck  of  land,  not  a solid  surface  upon  which  their  anchor 
could  hold. 

It  was  the  open  sea,  whose  waves  were  still  dashing  with 
tremendous  violence  ! It  was  the  ocean,  without  any  visible 
limits,  even  for  those  whose  gaze,  from  their  commanding  po- 
sition, extend  over  a radius  of  forty  miles.  The  vast  liquid 
plain,  lashed  without  mercy  by  the  storm,  appeared  as  if  cov- 
ered with  herds  of  furious  chargers,  whose  white  and  dishev- 
elled crests  were  streaming  in  the  wind.  No  land  was  in  sight, 
not  a solitary  chip  could  be  seen.  It  was  necessary  at  any  cost 
to  arrest  their  downward  course,  and  to  prevent  the  balloon 
from  being  engulfed  in  the  waves.  The  voyagers  directed  all 
their  energies  to  this  urgent  work.  But,  notwithstanding 
their  efforts,  the  balloon  still  fell,  it  was  also  suddenly  over- 
thrown, following  the  direction  of  the  wind,  that  is  to  say,  from 
the  northeast  to  the  southwest. 

Frightful  indeed  was  the  situation  of  these  unfortunate  men. 
They  were  evidently  no  longer  masters  of  the  machine.  All 
their  attemptj  were  useless.  The  case  of  the  balloon  collapsed 
more  and  more.  The  gas  escaped  without  any  possibility  oi 
retaining  it.  Their  descent  was  visibly  accelerated,  and  soon 
after  mid-day  the  car  hung  within  600  feet  of  the  ocean. 

It  was  impossible  to  prevent  the  escape  of  gas,  which  rushed 
through  a large  rent  in  the  silk.  By  lightening  the  car  of  all 
the  articles  which  it  contained,  the  passengers  had  been  able 
to  prolong  their  suspension  in  the  air  for  a few  horns.  Bui 
the  inevitable  catastrophe  could  only  be  retarded,  and  if  land 
did  not  appear  before  night,  voyagers,  car,  and  balloon  must 
to  a certainty  vanish  beneath  the  waves. 

They  now  resorted  to  the  only  remaining  expedient.  They 
were  truly  dauntless  men,  who  knew  how  to  look  death  in  the 
face.  Not  a single  murmur  escaped  from  their  lips.  They 
were  determined  to  struggle  to  the  last  minute,  to  do  any 
thing  to  retard  their  fall.  The  car  was  only  a sort  of  willow* 


DROPPED  FROM  TR*i  CLOUDS. 


17 


basket,  unable  to  float,  and  there  was  not  the  slightest  possi- 
bility of  maintaining  it  on  the  surface  of  the  sea. 

Two  more  hours  passed  and  the  balloon  was  scarcely  400  feet 
above  the  water. 

At  that  moment  a loud  voice,  the  voice  of  a man  inaccessible 
to  fear,  was  heard.  To  this  voice  responded  others  not  less 
determined.  “Is  every  thing  thrown  out?”  “No,  here  are 
still  2,000  dollars  in  gold.”  A heavy  bag  immediately  plunged 
into  the  sea.  “ Does  the  balloon  rise  ? ” “A  little,  but  it  will 
not  be  long  before  it  falls  again.”  “What  still  remains  to  be 
thrown  out?”  “Nothing.”  “Yes ! the  ear !”  “Let  us  catch 
hold  of  the  net,  and  into  the  sea  with  the  car.” 

This  was,  in  fact,  the  last  and  only  mode  of  lightening  the 
balloon.  The  ropes  which  held  the  car  were  cut,  and  the 
balloon,  after  its  fall,  mounted  2,000  feet.  The  five  voyagers 
had  hoisted  themselves  into  the  net,  and  clung  to  the  meshes. 

The  delicate  sensibility  of  balloons  is  well  known.  It  is  suffi- 
cient to  throw  out  the  lightest  article  to  produce  a difference  in 
its  vertical  position.  The  apparatus  in  the  air  is  like  a balance 
of  mathematical  precision.  It  can  be  thus  easily  understood 
that  when  it  is  lightened  of  any  considerable  weight  its 
movement  will  be  impetuous  and  sudden.  So  it  happened 
on  this  occasion.  But  after  being  suspended  for  an  instant 
aloft,  the  balloon  began  to  redescend,  the  gas  escaping  by  the 
rent  which  it  was  impossible  to  repair.  The  men  had  done 
all  that  men  could  do.  No  human  efforts  could  save  them 
now.  They  must  trust  to  the  mercy  of  Him  who  rules  the  ele- 
ments. At  four  o’clock  the  balloon  was  only  500  feet  above 
the  surface  of  the  water.  A loud  barking  was  heard.  A dog 
accompanied  the  voyagers,  and  was  held  pressed  close  to  his 
master  in  the  meshes  of  the  net. 

“Top  has  seen  something,”  cried  one  of  the  men.  Then 
immediately  a loud  voice  shouted,— 

“Land!  land!”  The  balloon,  which  the  wind  still  drove 
towards  the  southwest,  had  since  daybreak  gone  a considerable 
distance,  which  might  be  reckoned  by  hundreds  of  miles,  and  a 
tolerably  high  land  had,  in  fact,  appeared  in  that  direction. 
But  this  land  was  still  thirty  miles  off.  It  would  not  take  less 
2 


18 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


than  an  hour  to  get  to  it,  and  then  there  was  the  chance  of 
falling  to  leeward. 

An  hour ! Might  not  the  balloon  before  that  be  emptied* 
of  all  the  fluid  it  yet  retained? 

Such  was  the  terrible  question!  The  voyagers  could  dis- 
tinctly see  that  solid  spot  which  they  must  reach  at  any  cost. 
They  were  ignorant  of  what  it  was,  whether  an  island  or  a 
continent,  for  they  did  not  know  to  what  part  of  the  world  the 
hurricane  had  driven  them.  But  they  must  reach  this  land, 
whether  inhabited  or  desolate,  whether  hospitable  or  not. 

It  was  evident  that  the  balloon  could  no  longer  support  it- 
self ! Several  times  already  had  the  crests  of  the  enormous 
billows  licked  the  bottom  of  the  net,  making  it  still  heavier, 
and  the  balloon  only  half  rose,  like  a bird  with  a wounded 
wing.  Half  an  hour  later  the  land  was  not  more  than  a mile 
off,  but  the  balloon,  exhausted,  flabby,  hanging  in  great  folds, 
had  gas  in  its  upper  part  alone.  The  voyagers,  clinging  to  the 
net,  were  still  too  heavy  for  it,  and  soon,  half  plunged  in  the 
sea,  they  were  beaten  by  the  furious  waves.  The  bailoon-case 
bulged  out  again,  and  the  wind,  taking  it,  drove  it  along  like  a 
vessel.  Might  it  not  possibly  thus  reach  the  land? 

But,  when  only  two  fathoms  off,  terrible  cries  resounded 
from  four  pairs  of  lungs  at  once.  The  balloon,  which  had  ap- 
peared as  if  it  would  never  again  rise,  suddenly  made  an 
unexpected  bound,  after  having  been  struck  by  a tremendous 
sea.  As  if  it  had  been  at  that  instant  relieved  of  a new  part  of 
its  weight,  it  mounted  to  a height  of  1,500  feet,  and  there  it 
met  a current  of  wind,  which  instead  of  taking  it  directly  to 
the  coast,  carried  it  in  a nearly  parallel  direction.  At  last,  two 
minutes  later,  it  reapproached  obliquely,  and  finally  fell  on  a 
sandy  beach,  out  cf  the  reach  of  the  waves. 

The  voyagers,  aiding  each  other,  managed  to  disengage 
themselves  from  the  meshes  of  the  net.  The  balloon,  relieved 
from  their  weight,  was  taken  by  the  wind,  and  like  a wounded 
bird  which  revives  for  a instant,  disappeared  into  space. 

But  the  car  had  contained  five  passengers,  with  a dog,  and 
the  balloon  only  left  four  on  the  shore. 

The  missing  person  had  evidently  been  swept  off  by  the 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


19 


sea,  which  had  just  struck  the  net,  and  it  was  owing  to  this 
circumstance  that  the  lightened  balloon  rose  for  the  last  time, 
and  then  soon  after  reached  the  land.  Scarcely  had  the  four 
castaways  set  foot  on  firm  ground,  than  they  all,  thinking  of 
the  absent  one,  simultaneously  exclaimed,  “Perhaps  he  will 
try  to  swim  to  land  I Let  us  save  him ! let  us  save  him  I” 


CHAPTER  II. 


AN  INCIDENT  IN  THE  WAR  OF  SECESSION— THE  ENGINEER  CYRUS 
HARDING — GIDEON  SPILETT— THE  NEGRO  NEB— PENCROFT 
THE  SAILOR— THE  NIGHT  RENDEZVOUS— DEPARTURE  IN  THE 
STORM. 

Those  whom  the  hurricane  had  just  thrown  on  this  coast 
were  neither  aeronauts  by  profession  nor  amateurs.  They 
were  prisoners  of  war  whose  boldness  had  induced  them  to 
escape  in  this  extraordinary  manner. 

A hundred  times  they  had  almost  perished ! A hundred 
times  they  had  almost  fallen  from  their  torn  balloon  into  the 
depths  of  the  ocean.  But  Heaven  had  reserved  them  for  a 
strange  destiny,  and  after  having,  on  the  20th  of  March, 
escaped  from  Richmond,  besieged  by  the  troops  of  General 
Ulysses  Grant,  they  found  themselves  seven  thousand  miles 
from  the  capital  of  Virginia,  which  was  the  principal  strong- 
hold of  the  South,  during  the  terrible  war  of  Secession.  Their 
aerial  voyage  had  lasted  five  days. 

The  curious  circumstances  which  led  to  the  escape  of  the 
prisoners  were  as  follows  : 

* That  same  year,  in  the  month  of  February,  1865,  in  one  of 
the  coups-de-main  by  which  General  Grant  attempted,  though 
in  vain,  to  possess  himself  of  Richmond,  several  of  his  officers 
fell  into  the  power  of  the  enemy  and  were  detained  in  the 
town.  One  of  the  most  distinguished  was  Captain  Cyrus  Hard- 
ing. He  was  a native  of  Massachusetts,  a first-class  engineer, 
to  whom  the  government  had  confided,  during  the  war,  the 
direction  of  the  railways,  which  were  so  important  at  that 
time.  A true  Northerner,  thin,  bony,  lean,  about  forty-five 
years  of  age;  his  close-cut  hair  and  his  beard,  of  which  he 
only  kept  a thick  moustache,  were  already  getting  gray.  He 

2P 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS.  21 

had  one  of  those  finely-developed  heads  which  appear  made 
to  be  struck  on  a medal,  piercing  eyes,  a serious  mouth,  the 
physiognomy  of  a clever  man  of  the  military  school.  He  was 
one  of  those  engineers  who  began  by  handling  the  hammer 
and  pickaxe,  like  generals  who  first  act  as  common  soldiers. 
Besides  mental  power,  he  also  possessed  great  manual  dexter- 
ity. His  muscles  exhibited  remarkable  proofs  of  tenacity.  A 
man  of  action  as  well  as  a man  of  thought,  all  he  did  was 
without  effort  to  one  of  his  vigorous  and  sanguine  temnera- 
ment.  Learned,  clear-headed,  and  practical,  he  fulfilled  in  all 
emergencies  those  three  conditions  which,  united,  ought  to 
injure  human  success,— activity  of  mind  and  body,  impetuous 
wishes,  and  powerful  will.  He  might  have  taken  for  his  motto 
that  of  William  of  Orange  in  the  17th  century  : “ I can  under- 
take and  persevere  even  without  hope  of  success.”  Cyrus 
Harding  was  courage  personified.  He  had  been  in  all  the 
battles  of  that  war.  After  having  begun  as  a volunteer  at 
Illinois,  under  Ulysses  Grant,  he  fought  at  Paducah,  Belmont, 
Pittsburg  Landing,  at  the  siege  of  Corinth,  Port  Gibson,"' 
Black  River,  Chattanooga,  Wilderness,  Potomac,  every  where 
and  valiantly,  a soldier  worthy  of  the  general  who  said,  “ I 
never  coimt  my  dead  !”  And  hundreds  of  times  Captain  Hard- 
ing had  almost  been  among  those  who  were  not  counted  by 
the  terrible  Grant;  but  in  these  combats  where  he  never 
spared  himself,  fortune  favored  him  till  the  moment  when  he 
was  wounded  and  taken  prisoner  on  the  field  of  battle  near 
Richmond.  At  the  same  time  and  on  the  same  day  another 
important  personage  fell  into  the  hands  of  the  Southerners., 
This  was  no  other  than  Gideon  Spilett,  a reporter  for  the  New 
York  Herald , who  had  been  ordered  to  follow  the  changes  of 
the  war  in  the  midst  of  the  northern  armies. 

Gideon  Spilett  was  one  of  that  race  of  indomitable  English 
or  American  chroniclers,  like  Stanley  and  others,  who  stop  at 
nothing  to  obtain  exact  information,  and  transmit  it  to  their 
journal  in  the  shortest  possible  time.  The  newspapers  of  the 
Union,  such  as  the  New  York  Herald , are  formed  of  actual 
powers,  and  their  reporters  are  their  representatives.  Gideon 
Spilett  ranked  among  the  first  of  those  reporters ; a man  of 


22 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


great  merit,  energetic,  prompt  and  ready  for  any  thing,  full  of 
ideas,  having  traveled  over  the  whole  world,  soldier  and 
artist,  enthusiastic  in  council,  resolute  in  action,  caring  neither 
for  trouble,  fatigue,  nor  danger,  when  in  pursuit  of  informa- 
tion, for  himself  first,  and  then  for  his  journal,  a perfect  treas 
ury  of  knowledge  on  all  sorts  of  curious  subjects,  of  the 
unpublished,  of  the  unknown,  and  of  the  impossible.  He 
was  one  of  those  intrepid  observers  who  write  under  fire, 
“reporting”  among  bullets,  and  to  whom  every  danger  is 
welcome. 

He  also  had  been  in  all  the  battles,  in  the  first  rank,  revolver 
in  one  hand,  note-book  in  the  other ; grape-shot  never  made  his 
pencil  tremble.  He  did  not  fatigue  the  wires  with  incessant 
telegrams,  like  those  who  speak  when  they  have  nothing  to 
say,  but  each  of  his  notes,  short,  decisive,  and  clear,  threw 
light  on  some  important  point.  Besides,  he  was  not  wanting 
in  humor.  It  was  he  who,  after  the  affair  of  the  Black  River, 
determined  at  any  cost  to  keep  his  place  at  the  wicket  of  the 
telegraph  office,  and  after  having  announced  to  his  journal 
the  result  of  the  battle,  telegraphed  for  two  hours  the  first 
chapter  of  the  Bible.  It  cost  the  New  York  Herald  two 
thousand  dollars,  but  the  New  York  Herald  published  the  first 
intelligence. 

Gideon  Spilett  was  tall.  He  was  rather  more  than  forty  years 
of  age.  Light  whiskers  bordering  on  red  surrounded  his  face. 
His  eye  was  steady,  lively,  rapid  in  its  changes.  It  was  the  eye 
of  a man  accustomed  to  take  in  at  a glance  all  the  details  of  a 
scene.  Well  built,  he  was  inured  to  all  climates,  like  a bar  of 
steel  hardened  in  cold  water. 

For  ten  years  Gideon  Spilett  had  been  the  reporter  of  the 
New  York  Herald , which  he  enriched  by  his  letters  and  draw- 
ings, for  he  was  as  skillful  in  the  use  of  the  pencil  as  of  the 
pen.  When  he  was  captured,  he  was  in  the  act  of  making  a 
description  and  sketch  of  the  battle.  The  last  words  in  his 
note-book  were  these  : “ A Southern  rifleman  has  just  taken 
aim  at  me,  but—”  The  Southerner  notwithstanding  missed 
Gideon  Spilett,  who,  with  his  usual  fortune,  came  out  of  this 
affair  without  a scratch. 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


25 


Cyrus  Harding  and  Gideon  Spilett,  who  did  not  know  each 
other  except  by  reputation,  had  both  been  carried  to  Rich- 
mond. The  engineer’s  wounds  rapidly  healed,  and  it  was 
during  his  convalescence  that  he  made  acquaintance  with  the 
reporter.  The  two  men  then  learned  to  appreciate  each  other. 
Soon  their  common  aim  had  but  one  object,  that  of  escaping, 
joining  Grant’s  army,  and  fighting  together  in  the  ranks  of 
the  Federate. 

The  two  Americans  had  from  the  first  determined  to  seize 
every  chance;  but  although  they  were  allowed  to  wander  at 
liberty  in  the  town,  Richmond  was  so  strictly  guarded,  that 
escape  appeared  impossible.  In  the  meanwhile  Captain  Hard- 
ing was  rejoined  by  a servant  who  was  devoted  to  him  in  life 
and  in  death.  This  intrepid  fellow  was  a negro  born  on  the 
engineer’s  estate,  of  a slave  father  and  mother,  but  to  whom 
Cyrus,  who  was  an  Abolitionist  from  conviction  and  heart,  had 
long  since  given  his  freedom.  The  once  slave,  though  free, 
would  not  leave  his  master.  He  would  have  died  for  him. 
He  was  a man  of  about  thirty,  vigorous^  active,  clever,  intel- 
ligent, gentle,  and  calm,  sometimes  naive,  always  merry,  oblig- 
ing, and  honest.  His  name  was  Nebuchadnezzar,  but  he  only 
answered  to  the  familiar  abbreviation  of  Neb. 

When  Neb  heard  that  his  master  had  been  made  prisoner,  he 
left  Massachusetts  without  hesitating  an  instant,  arrived  before 
Richmond,  and  by  dint  of  stratagem  and  shrewdness,  after 
having  risked  his  life  twenty  times  over,  managed  to  penetrate 
into  the  besieged  town.  The  pleasure  of  Harding  on  seeing 
his  servant,  and  the  joy  of  Neb  at  finding  his  master,  can 
scarcely  be  described. 

But  though  Neb  had  been  able  to  make  his  way  into  Rich- 
mond, it  was  quite  another  thing  to  get  out  again,  for  the 
Northern  prisoners  were  very  strictly  watched.  Some  extra- 
ordinary opportunity  was  needed  to  make  the  attempt  with  any 
chance  of  success,  and  this  opportunity  not  only  did  not  pre- 
sent itself,  but  was  very  difficult  to  find. 

Meanwhile  Grant  continued  his  energetic  operations.  The 
victory  of  Petersburg  had  been  very  dearly  bought.  His 
forces,  united  to  those  of  Butler,  had  as  yet  been  unsuccessful 


26 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


before  Richmond,  and  nothing  gave  the  prisoners  any  hope  of 
a speedy  deliverance. 

The  reporter,  to  whom  his  tedious  captivity  did  not  offer  a 
single  incident  worthy  of  note,  could  stand  it  no  longer.  His 
usually  active  mind  was  occupied  with  one  sole  thought — 
how  he  might  get  out  of  Richmond  at  any  cost.  Several  times 
had  he  even  made  the  attempt,  but  was  stopped  by  some 
insurmountable  obstacle.  However,  the  siege  continued;  and 
if  the  prisoners  were  anxious  to  escape  and  join  Grant’s  army, 
certain  of  the  besieged  were  no  iess  anxious  to  join  the 
Southern  forces.  Amongst  them  was  one  Jonathan  Forster, 
a determined  Southerner.  The  truth  was,  that  if  the  prisoners 
of  the  Secessionists  could  not  leave  the  town,  neither  could 
the  Secessionists  themselves  while  the  Northern  army  invested 
it.  The  Governor  of  Richmond  for  a long  time  had  been 
unable  to  communicate  with  General  Lee,  and  he  very  much 
wished  to  make  known  to  him  the  situation  of  the  town,  s^  as 
to  hasten  the  march  of  the  army  to  their  relief.  This  Jonathan 
Forster  accordingly  conceived  the  idea  of  rising  in  a balloon,  so 
as  to  pass  over  the  besieging  lines,  and  in  that  way  reach  the 
Secessionist  camp. 

The  Governor  authorized  the  attempt.  A balloon  was  manu- 
factured and  placed  at  the  disposal  of  Forster,  who  was  to  be 
accompanied  by  five  other  persons.  They  were  furnished  with 
arms  in  case  they  might  have  to  defend  themselves  when  they 
alighted,  and  provisions  in  the  event  of  their  aerial  voyage 
being  prolonged. 

The  departure  of  the  balloon  was  fixed  for  the  18th  of  March. 
It  should  be  effected  during  the  night,  with  a northwest  wind 
of  moderate  force,  and  the  aeronauts  calculated  that  they 
would  reach  General  Lee’s  camp  in  a few  hours. 

But  this  northwest  wind  was  not  a simple  breeze.  From 
the  18th  it  was  evident  that  it  was  changing  to  a hurricane. 
The  tempest  soon  became  such  that  Forster’s  departure  was 
deferred,  for  it  was  impossible  to  risk  the  balloon  and  those 
whom  it  carried  in  the  midst  of  the  furious  elements. 

The  balloon,  inflated  on  the  great  square  of  Richmond,  was 
ready  to  depart  on  the  first  abatement  of  the  wind,  and,  as 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


27 


r3iaybe  supposed,  the  impatience  among  the  besieged  to  see 
>,ae  storm  moderate  was  very  great. 

The  18th,  the  19th  of  March  passed  without  any  alteration  in 
the  weather.  There  was  even  great  difficulty  in  keeping  the 
balloon  fastened  to  the  ground,  as  the  squalls  dashed  it  furiously 
about.  The  night  of  the  19th  passed,  but  the  next  morning  the 
storm  blew  with  redoubled  force.  The  departure  of  the  balloon 
was  impossible. 

On  that  day  the  engineer,  Cyrus  Harding,  was  accosted  in 
one  of  the  streets  of  Richmond  by  a person  whom  he  did  not 
in  the  least  know.  This  was  a sailor  named  Pencroft,  a man 
of  about  thirty-five  or  forty  years  of  age,  strongly  built,  very 
sunburnt,  and  possessed  of  a pair  of  bright  sparkling  eyes  and 
a remarkably  good  physiognomy.  Pencroft  was  an  American 
from  the  North,  who  had  sailed  all  the  ocean  over,  and  who 
had  gone  through  every  possible  and  almost  impossible  adven- 
ture that  a being  with  two  feet  and  no  wings  could  encounter. 
It  is  needless  to  say  that  he  was  a bold,  dashing  fellow,  ready  to 
dare  any  thing  and  was  astonished  at  nothing.  Pencroft  at  the 
beginning  of  the  year  had  gone  to  Richmond  on  business,  with 
a young  boy  of  fifteen  from  New  Jersey,  son  of  a former  cap- 
tain, an  orphan,  whom  he  loved  as  if  he  had  been  his  own 
child.  Not  having  been  able  to  leave  the  town  before  the  first 
operations  of  the  siege,  he  found  himself  shut  up,  to  his  great 
disgust;  but,  not  accustomed  to  succumb  to  difficulties,  he 
resolved  to  escape  by  some  means  or  other.  He  knew  the 
engineer-officer  by  reputation;  he  knew  with  what  impatience 
that  determined  man  chafed  under  his  restraint.  On  his  day 
he  did  not,  therefore,  hesitate  to  accost  him,  saying,  without 
circumlocution,  “Have  you  had  enough  of  Richmond,  cap- 
tain ? ” 

The  engineer  looked  fixedly  at  the  man  who  spoke,  and 
who  added,  in  a low  voice,— 

“ Captain  Harding,  will  you  try  to  escape  ? ” 

“When?”  asked  the  engineer  quickly,  and  it  was  evident 
that  this  question  was  uttered  without  consideration,  for  he 
nad  not  yet  examined  the  stranger  who  addressed  him.  But 
after  having  with  a penetrating  eye  observed  the  open  face  of 


28 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


the  sailor,  lie  was  convinced  that  he  had  before  him  an  honest 
man. 

“ Who  are  yon  ? ” he  asked  briefly. 

Pencroft  made  himself  known. 

“Well,”  replied  Harding,  “and  in  what  way  do  you  propose 
to  escape  ? ” 

“By  that  lazy  balloon  which  is  left  there  doing  nothing,  and 
which  looks  to  me  as  if  it  was  waiting  on  purpose  for  us—” 

There  was  no  necessity  for  the  sailor  to  finish  his  sentence. 
The  engineer  understood  him  at  once.  He  seized  Pencroft  by 
the  arm,  and  dragged  him  to  his  house.  There  the  sailor  devel- 
oped his  project,  which  was  indeed  extremely  simple.  They 
risked  nothing  but  their  lives  in  its  execution.  The  hurricane 
was  in  >all  its  violence,  it  is  true,  but  so  clever  and  daring  an 
engineer  as  Cyrus  Harding,  knew  perfectly  well  how  to  man- 
age a balloon.  Had  he  himself  been  as  well  acquainted  with 
the  art  of  sailing  in  the  air  as  he  was  with  the  navigation  of  a 
ship,  Pencroft  would  not  have  hesitated  to  set  out,  of  course 
taking  his  young  friend  Herbert  with  him;  for,  accustomed  to 
brave  the  fiercest  tempests  of  the  ocean,  he  was  not  to  be  hin- 
dered on  account  of  the  hurricane. 

Captain  Harding  had  listened  to  the  sailor  without  saying  a 
word,  but  his  eyes  shone  with  satisfaction.  Here  was  the 
long-sought-for  opportunity— he  was  not  a man  to  let  it  pass. 
The  plan  was  feasible,  though,  it  must  be  confessed,  dangerous 
in  the  extreme.  In  the  night,  in  spite  of  their  guards,  they 
might  approach  the  balloon,  slip  into  the  car,  and  then  cut 
the  cords  which  held  it.  There  was  no  doubt  that  they  might 
be  killed;  but,  on  the  other  hand,  they  might  succeed,  and 
without  this  storm ! Without  this  storm  the  balloon  would 
have  started  already,  and  the  looked-for  opportunity  would 
not  have  then  presented  itself. 

“I  am  not  alone  !”  said  Harding  at  last. 

“ How  many  people  do  you  wish  to  bring  with  you?”  asked 
the  sailor. 

“ Two;  my  friend  Spilett,  and  my  servant  Neb.” 

“ That  will  be  three,”  replied  Pencroft;  “and  with  Herbert 
and  me,  five.  But  the  balloon  will  hold  six—” 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


31 


“ That  will  be  enough,  we  will  go,”  answered  Harding  in  a 
firm  voice. 

This  “we”  included  Spilett,  for  the  reporter,  as  his  friend 
well  knew,  was  not  a man  to  draw  back,  and  when  the 
project  was  communicated  to  him,  he  approved  of  it  unre- 
servedly. What  astonished  him  was,  that  so  simple  an  idea  had 
not  occurred  to  him  before.  As  to  Neb,  he  followed  his  master 
wherever  his  master  wished  to  go. 

“ This  evening,  then,”  said  Pencroft,  “ we  will  all  meet  out 
there.” 

“This  evening,  at  ten  o’clock,”  replied  Captain  Harding; 
“ and  Heaven  grant  that  the  storm  does  not  abate  before  our 
departure.” 

Pencroft  took  leave  of  the  two  friends,  and  retoned  to  his 
lodging,  where  young  Herbert  Brown  had  remained.  The 
courageous  boy  knew  of  the  sailor’s  plan,  and  it  was  not  with- 
out anxiety  that  he  awaited  the  result  of  the  proposal  being 
made  to  the  engineer.  Thus  five  determined  persons  were 
about  to  abandon  themselves  to  the  mercy  of  the  tempestuous 
elements ! 

No  ! the  storm  did  not  abate,  and  neither  Jonathan  Forster 
nor  his  companion  dreamt  of  confronting  it  in  that  frail  car. 

It  would  be  a terrible  journey.  The  engineer  only  feared 
one  thing,  it  was  that  the  balloon,  held  to  the  ground  and 
dashed  about  by  the  wind,  would  be  torn  into  shreds.  For 
several  hours  he  roamed  round  the  nearly  deserted  square, 
surveying  the  apparatus.  Pencroft  did  the  same  on  his  side, 
his  hands  in  his  pockets,  yawning  now  and  then  like  a man 
who  did  not  know  how  to  kill  the  time,  but  really  dreading, 
like  his  friend,  either  the  escape  or  destruction  of  the  balloon. 
Evening  arrived.  The  night  was  dark  in  the  extreme.  Thick 
mists  passed  like  clouds  close  to  the  ground.  Rain  fell  mingled 
with  snow.  It  was  very  cold.  A mist  hung  over  Richmond. 
It  seemed  as  if  the  violent  storm  had  produced  a truce  between 
the  besiegers  and  the  besieged,  and  that  the  cannon  were 
silenced  by  the  louder  detonations  of  the  storm.  The  streets 
of  the  town  were  deserted.  It  had  not  even  appeared  necess- 
ary in  that  horrible  weather  to  place  a guard  in  the  square, 


82 


TEE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


in  the  midst  of  which  plunged  the  balloon.  Every  thing 
favored  the  departure  of  the  prisoners,  but  what  might  possibly 
be  the  termination  of  the  hazardous  voyage  they  contemplated 
in  the  midst  of  the  furious  elements  ? 

“ Dirty  weather !”  exclaimed  Pencroft,  fixing  his  hat  firmly 
on  his  head  with  a blow  of  his  fist ; “but  pshaw,  we  shall 
succeed  all  the  same !” 

At  half -past  nine  Harding  and  his  companions  glided  from 
different  directions  into  the  square,  which  the  gas-lamps, 
extinguished  by  the  wind,  had  left  in  total  obscurity.  Even 
the  enormous  balloon,  almost  beaten  to  the  ground,  could  not 
be  seen.  Independently  of  the  sacks  of  ballast,  to  which  the 
cords  of  the  net  were  fastened,  the  car  was  held  by  a strong 
cable  passed  through  a ring  in  the  pavement.  The  five 
prisoners  met  by  the  car.  They  had  not  been  perceived,  and 
such  was  the  darkness  that  they,  could  not  even  see  each  other. 

Without  speaking  a word,  Harding,  Spilett,  Neb,  and  Herbert 
took  their  places  in  the  car,  whilst  Pencroft  by  the  engineer’s 
order  detached  successively  the  bags  of  ballast.  It  was  the 
work  of  a few  minutes  only,  and  the  sailor  rejoined  his  com- 
panions. 

The  balloon  was  then  only  held  by  the  cable,  and  the 
engineer  had  nothing  to  do  but  to  give  the  word. 

At  that  moment  a dog  sprang  with  a bound  into  the  car.  It 
was  Top,  a favorite  of  the  engineer.  The  faithful  creature, 
having  broken  his  chain,  had  followed  Ms  master.  He,  how- 
ever, fearing  that  its  additional  weight  might  impede  their 
ascent,  wished  to  send  away  the  animal. 

“One  more  will  make  but  little  difference,  poor  beast!” 
exclaimed  Pencroft,  heaving  out  two  bags  of  sand,  and  aS  he 
spoke  letting  go  the  cable;  the  balloon  ascending  in  an  oblique 
direction,  disappeared,  after  having  dashed  the  car  against  two 
chimneys,  which  it  threw  down  as  it  swept  by  them. 

Then,  indeed,  the  full  rage  of  the  hurricane  was  exhibited  to 
the  voyagers.  During  the  night  the  engineer  could  not  dream 
of  descending,  and  when  day  broke,  even  a glimpse  of  the 
earth  below  was  intercepted  by  fog. 

Five  days  had  passed,  when  a partial  clearing  allowed  them 


xrnOPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


33 


tu  the  vnav  extending  ocean  beneath  their  feet,  now  lashed 
into  the  maddest  fury  by  the  gale. 

Our  readers  will  recollect  what  befell  these  five  daring 
individuals  who  set  out  on  their  hazardous  expedition  in  the 
balloon  on  the  20th  of  March.  Five  days  afterwards  four  of 
them  were  thrown  on  a desert  coast,  seven  thousand  miles 
from  their  country  ! But  one  of  their  number  was  missing, 
the  man  who  was  to  be  their  guide,  their  leading  spirit,  the 
engineer,  Captain  Harding  ! The  instant  they  had  recovered 
their  feet,  they  all  hurried  to  the  beach  in  hopes  of  rendering 
him  assistance. 


CHAPTER  III 


FIVE  O’CLOCK  IN  THE  EVENING  — THE  MISSING  ONE  — NEB’S 
DESPAIR— SEARCH  TOWARDS  THE  NORTH  — THE  ISLET  — A 
DREADFUL  NIGHT  — A FOG  IN  THE  MORNING  — NEB  SWIMS 
— SIGHT  OF  LAND  — FORDING  THE  CHANNEL. 

The  engineer,  the  meshes  of  the  net  having  given  way, 
had  been  carried  off  by  a wave.  His  dog  also  had  disappeared. 
The  faithful  animal  had  voluntarily  leaped  out  to  help  his 
master.  “ Forward,”  cried  the  reporter  ; and  all  four,  Spilett, 
Herbert,  Pencroft,  and  Neb,  forgetting  their  fatigue,  began 
their  search.  Poor  Neb  shed  bitter  tears,  giving  way  to  despair 
at  the  thoughts  of  having  lost  the  only  being  he  loved  on  earth. 

Only  two  minutes  had  passed  from  the  time  when  Cyrus 
Harding  disappeared  to  the  moment  when  his  companions  set 
foot  on  the  ground.  They  had  hopes,  therefore,  of  arriving  in 
time  to  save  him.  “ Let  us  look  for  him  ! let  us  look  for  him ! ” 
cried  Neb. 

“ Yes,  Neb,”  replied  Gideon  Spilett,  44  and  we  will  find  him 
too ! ” 

44  Living,  I trust ! ” 

44  Still  living  ! ” 

44  Can  he  swim  ?”  asked  Pencroft. 

44  Yes,”  replied  Neb, 44  and  besides,  Top  is  there.”  The  sailor, 
observing  the  heavy  surf  on  the  shore,  shook  his  head. 

The  engineer  had  disappeared  to  the  north  of  the  shore,  and 
nearly  half  a mile  from  the  place  where  the  castaways  had 
landed.  The  nearest  point  of  the  beach  he  could  reach  was 
thus  fully  that  distance  off.  m 

It  was  then  nearly  six  o’clock.  A thick  fog  made  the  night 
very  dark.  The  castaways  proceeded  towards  the  north  of  the 
"and  on  which  chance  had  thrown  them,  an  unknown  region, 

34 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


35 


the  geographical  situation  of  which  they  could  not  even  guess. 
They  were  walking  upon  a sandy  soil,  mingled  with  stones, 
which  appeared  destitute  of  any  sort  of  vegetation.  The 
ground,  very  unequal  and  rough,  was  in  some  places  perfectly 
riddled  with  holes,  making  walking  extremely  painful.  From 
these  holes  escaped  every  minute  great  birds  of  clumsy  flight, 
which  flew  in  all  directions.  Others,  more  active,  rose  in  flocks 
and  passed  in  clouds  over  their  heads.  The  sailor  thought  he 
recognized  gulls  and  cormorants,  whose  shrill  cries  rose  above 
the  roaring  of  the  sea. 

From  time  to  time  the  castaways  stopped  and  shouted,  then 
listened  for  some  response  from  the  ocean,  for  they  thought 
that  if  the  engineer  had  landed,  and  they  had  been  near  to 
the  place,  they  would  have  heard  the  barking  of  the  dog  Top, 
even  should  Harding  himself  have  been  unable  to  give  any  sign 
of  existence.  They  stopped  to  listen,  but  no  sound  arose  above 
the  roaring  of  the  waves  and  the  dashing  of  the  surf.  The 
little  band  then  continued  their  march  forward,  searching  into 
every  hollow  of  the  shore. 

After  walking  for  twenty  minutes,  the  four  castaways  were 
suddenly  brought  to  a standstill  by  the  sight  of  foaming  bil- 
lows close  to  their  feet.  The  solid  ground  ended  here.  They 
found  themselves  at  the  extremity  of  a sharp  point  on  which 
the  sea  broke  furiously. 

“It  is  a promontory,”  said  the  sailor;  “we  must  retrace  our 
steps,  holding  towards  the  right,  and  we  shall  thus  gain  the 
mainland.” 

“ But  if  he  is  there,”  said  Neb,  pointing  to  the  ocean,  whose 
waves  shone  of  a snowy  white  in  the  darkness.  “Well,  let 
us  call  again,”  and  all  uniting  their  voices,  they  gave  a vigorous 
shout,  but  there  came  no  reply.  They  waited  for  a lull,  then 
began  again;  still  no  reply. 

The  castaways  accordingly  returned,  following  the  opposite 
side  of  the  promontory,  over  a soil  equally  sandy  and  rugged. 
However,  Pencroft  observed  that  the  shore  was  more  equal, 
that  the  ground  rose,  and  he  declared  that  it  was  joined  by  a 
iong  slope  to  a hill,  whose  massive  front  he  thought  that  he 
could  see  looming  indistinctly  through  the  mist.  The  birds 


36 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


were  less  numerous  on  this  part  of  the  shore;  the  sea  was  alsfr 
less  tumultuous,  and  they  observed  that  the  agitation  of  the 
waves  was  diminished.  The  noise  of  the  surf  was  scarcely 
heard.  This  side  of  the  promontory  evidently  formed  a semi- 
circular bay,  which  the  sharp  point  sheltered  from  the  breakers 
of  the  open  sea.  But  to  follow  this  direction  was  to  go  south, 
exactly  opposite  to  that  part  of  the  coast  where  Harding 
might  have  landed.  After  a walk  of  a mile  and  a half,  the 
shore  presented  no  curve  which  would  permit  them  to  return 
to  the  north.  This  promontory,  of  which  they  had  turned  the 
point,  must  be  attached  to  the  mainland.  The  castaways, 
although  their  strength  was  nearly  exhausted,  still  marched 
courageously  forward,  hoping  every  moment  to  meet  with  a 
sudden  angle  which  would  set  them  in  the  first  direction. 
What  was  their  disappointment,  when,  after  trudging  nearly 
two  miles,  having  reached  an  elevated  point  composed  of 
slippery  rocks,  they  found  themselves  again  stopped  by  the 
sea. 

“We  are  on  an  islet,”  said  Pencroft,  “and  we  have  surveyed 
it  from  one  extremity  to  the  other.” 

The  sailor  was  right;  they  had  been  thrown,  not  on  a conti- 
nent, not  even  on  an  island,  but  on  an  islet  which  was  no 
more  than  two  miles  in  length,  with  even  a less  breadth. 

Was  this  barren  spot  the  desolate  refuge  of  sea-birds,  strewn 
with  stones  and  destitute  of  vegetation,  attached  to  a more  im- 
portant archipelago?  It  was  impossible  to  say.  When  the 
voyagers  from  their  car  saw  the  land  through  the  mist,  they  had 
not  been  able  to  reconnoitre  it  sufficiently.  However,  Pen- 
croft, accustomed  with  his  sailor  eyes  to  pierce  through  the 
gloom,  was  almost  certain  that  he  could  clearly  distinguish  in 
the  west  confused  masses  which  indicated  an  elevated  coast. 
But  they  could  not  in  the  dark  determine  whether  it  was  a 
single  island,  or  connected  with  others.  They  could  not  leave 
it  either,  as  the  sea  surrounded  them;  they  must  therefore  put 
off  till  the  next  day  their  search  for  the  engineer,  from  whom, 
alas  ! not  a single  cry  had  reached  them  to  show  that  he  was 
still  in  existence. 

“ The  silence  of  our  friend  proves  nothing,”  said  the  reporter; 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


8? 


w Perhaps  he  has  fainted  or  is  wounded,  and  unable  to  reply 
directly,  so  we  will  not  despair.” 

The  reporter  then  proposed  to  light  a fire  on  a point  of  the 
islet,  which  would  serve  as  a signal  to  the  engineer.  But  they 
searched  in  vain  for  wood  or  dry  brambles;  nothing  but 
sand  and  stones  were  to  be  found.  The  grief  of  Neb  and  his 
companions,  who  were  all  strongly  attached  to  the  intrepid 
Harding,  can  be  better  pictured  than  described.  It  was  too 
evident  that  they  were  powerless  to  help  him.  They  must 
wait  with  what  patience  they  could  for  daylight.  Either  the 
engineer  had  been  able  to  save  himself,  and  had  already  found 
a refuge  on  some  point  of  the  coast,  or  he  was  lost  forever  ! 
The  long  and  painful  hours  passed  by.  The  cold  was  intense. 
The  castaways  suffered  cruelly,  but  they  scarcely  perceived  it. 
They  did  not  think  of  taking  a minute’s  rest.  Forgetting  every 
thing  but  their  chief,  hoping  or  wishing  to  hope  on,  they  con- 
tinued to  walk  up  and  down  on  this  sterile  spot,  always  return- 
ing to  its  northern  point,  where  they  could  approach  nearest 
to  the  scene  of  the  catastrophe.  They  listened,  they  called, 
and  then  uniting  their  voices,  they  endeavored  to  raise  even  a 
louder  shout  than  before,  which  would  be  transmitted  to  a 
great  distance.  The  wind  had  now  fallen  almost  to  a calm,  and 
the  noise  of  the  sea  began  also  to  subside.  One  of  Neb’s 
shouts  even  appeared  to  produce  an  echo.  Herbert  directed 
Pencroft’s  attention  to  it,  adding,  “ That  proves  that  there  is  a 
coast  to  the  west,  at  no  great  distance.”  The  sailor  nodded; 
besides,  his  eyes  could  not  deceive  him.  If  he  had  discovered 
land,  however  indistinct  it  might  appear,  land  was  sure  to  be 
there.  But  that  distant  echo  was  the  only  response  produced 
by  Neb’s  shouts,  while  a heavy  gloom  hung  over  all  the  part 
east  of  the  island. 

Meanwhile,  the  sky  was  clearing  little  by  little.  Towards 
midnight  the  stars  shone  out,  and  if  the  engineer  had  been 
there  with  his  companions  he  would  have  remarked  that  these 
stars  did  not  belong  to  the  Northern  hemisphere.  The  polar 
star  was  not  visible,  the  constellations  were  not  those  which 
they  had  been  accustomed  to  see  in  the  United  States  ; the 
''outhern  Cross  glittered  brightly  in  the  sky. 


88 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION, 


The  night  passed  away.  Towards  five  o^elock  in  the  morning 
of  the  25th  of  March,  the  sky  began  to  lighten;  the  horizon 
still  remained  dark,  but  with  daybreak  a thick  mist  rose  from 
the  sea,  so  that  the  eye  could  scarcely  penetrate  beyond  twenty 
feet  or  so  from  where  they  stood.  At  length  the  fog  gradually 
unrolled  itself  in  great  heavily  moving  waves. 

It  was  unfortunate,  however,  that  the  castaways  could  dis- 
tinguish nothing  around  them.  Whilst  the  gaze  of  the  reporter 
and  Neb  were  cast  upon  the  ocean,  the  sailor  and  Herbert 
looked  eagerly  for  the  coast  in  the  west.  But  not  a speck  of 
land  was  visible.  “ Never  mind,”  said  Pencrof t,  “ though  I do 
not  see  the  land,  I feel  it  ...  it  is  there  . . . there  ...  as 
sure  as  the  fact  that  we  are  no  longer  at  Richmond.”  But 
the  fog  was  not  long  in  rising.  It  was  only  a fine-weather 
mist.  A hot  sun  soon  penetrated  to  the  surface  of  the  island. 
About  half-past  six,  three-quarters  of  an  hour  after  sunrise,  the 
mist  became  more  transparent.  It  grew  thicker  above,  but 
cleared  away  below.  Soon  the  isle  appeared  as  if  it  had 
descended  from  a cloud,  then  the  sea  showed  itself  around 
them,  spreading  far  away  towards  the  east,  but  bounded  on 
the  west  by  an  abrupt  and  precipitous  coast. 

Yes ! the  land  was  there.  Their  safety  was  at  least  provision- 
ally insured.  The  islet  and  the  coast  were  separated  by  a 
channel  about  half  a mile  in  breadth,  through  which  rushed 
an  extremely  rapid  current. 

However,  one  of  the  castaways  followed  the  impulse  of  his 
heart,  immediately  cast  himself  into  the  current,  without  con- 
sulting his  companions,  without  saying  a single  word.  It  was 
Neb.  He  was  in  haste  to  be  on  the  other  side,  and  to  climb 
towards  the  north.  It  had  been  impossible  to  hold  him  back0 
Pencroft  called  him  in  vain.  The  reporter  prepared  to  follow 
him,  but  Pencroft  stopped  him.  “ Do  you  want  to  cross  the 
channel  ? ” he  asked.  “ Yes,”  replied  Spilett.  “ All  right ! ” 
said  the  seaman  ; “ wait  a bit ; Neb  is  well  able  to  carry  help  to 
his  master.  If  We  venture  into  the  channel,  we  risk  being 
carried  into  the  open  sea  by  the  current,  which  is  running  very 
strong ; but,  if  Pm  not  wrong,  it  is  ebbing.  See,  the  tide  is 
going  down  over  the  sand.  Let  us  have  patience,  an# 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


32 

low  water  it  is  possible  we  may  find  a fordable  passage.” 
“ You  are  right,”  replied  the  reporter,  “ we  will  not  separate 
more  than  we  can  help.” 

During  this  time  Neb  was  struggling  vigorously  against  the 
current.  He  was  crossing  in  an  oblique  direction.  His  black 
shoulders  could  be  seen  emerging  at  each  stroke.  He  was 
carried  down  very  quickly,  but  he  also  made  way  towards  the 
shore.  It  took  more  than  half  an  hour  to  cross  from  the  islet 
to  the  land,  and  he  reached  the  shore  several  hundred  feet  from 
the  place  which  was  opposite  to  the  point  from  which  he  had 
started. 

Landing  at  the  foot  of  a high  wall  of  granite,  he  shook  him- 
self vigorously  ; and  then,  setting  off  running,  soon  disap- 
peared behind  a rocky  point,  which  projected  to  nearly  the 
weight  of  the  northern  extremity  of  the  islet. 

Neb’s  companions  had  watched  his  daring  attempt  with 
painful  anxiety,  and  when  he  was  out  of  sight,  they  fixed  their 
attention  on  the  land  where  their  hope  of  safety  lay,  whilst 
eating  some  shell-fish  with  which  the  sand  was  strewn.  It 
was  a wretched  repast,  but  still  it  was  better  than  nothing. 
The  opposite  coast  formed  one  vast  bay,  terminating  on  the 
south  by  a very  sharp  point,  which  was  destitute  of  all  vege- 
tation, and  was  of  a very  wild  aspect.  This  point  abutted  on 
the  shore  in  a grotesque  outline  of  high  granite  rocks.  To- 
wards the  north,  on  the  contrary,  the  bay  widened,  and  a more 
rounded  coast  appeared,  trending  from  the  southwest  to  the 
northeast,  and  terminating  in  a slender  cape.  The  distance 
between  these  two  extremities,  which  made  the  bow  of  the 
bay,  was  about  eight  miles.  Half  a mile  from  the  shore  rose 
the  islet,  which  somewhat  resembled  the  carcase  of  a gigantic 
whale.  Its  extreme  breadth  was  not  more  than  a quarter  of  a 
mile. 

Opposite  the  islet,  the  beach  consisted  first  of  sand,  covered 
with  black  stones,  which  were  now  appearing  little  by  little 
abov*  the  retreating  tide.  The  second  level  was  separated  by  a 
perpendicular  granite  cliff,  terminating  at  the  top  by  an  un- 
equal edge  at  a height  of  at  least  300  feet.  It  continued  thus 
a length  of  three  miles,  ending  suddenly  on  the  right  with 


40 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


a precipice  which  looked  as  if  cut  by  the  hand  of  man.  On 
the  left,  above  the  promontory,  this  irregular  and  jagged  cliff 
descended  by  a long  slope  of  conglomerate  rocks  till  it  mingled 
with  the  ground  of  the  southern  point.  On  the  upper  plateau 
of  the  coast  not  a tree  appeared.  It  was  a flat  table-land  like 
that  above  Cape  Town  at  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope,  but  of 
reduced  proportions ; at  least  so  it  appeared  seen  from  the 
islet.  However,  verdure  was  not  wanting  to  the  right  beyond 
the  precipice.  They  could  easily  distinguish  a confused  mass 
of  great  trees,  which  extended  beyond  the  limit  of  their  view. 
This  verdure  relieved  the  eye,  so  long  wearied  by  the  continued 
ranges  of  granite.  Lastly,  beyond  and  above  the  plateau,  in 
a northwesterly  direction  and  at  a distance  of  at  least  seven 
miles,  glittered  a white  summit  which  reflected  the  sun’s  rays. 
It  was  that  of  a lofty  mountain,  capped  with  snow. 

The  question  could  not  at  present  be  decided  whether  this 
land  formed  an  island,  or  whether  it  belonged  to  a continent. 
But  on  beholding  the  convulsed  masses  heaped  up  on  the  left, 
no  geologist  would  have  hesitated  to  give  them  a volcanic 
origin,  for  they  were  unquestionably  the  work  of  subterranean 
convulsions,, 

Gideon  Spilett,  Pencroft  and  Herbert  attentively  examined 
this  land,  on  which  they  might  perhaps  have  to  live  many  long 
years;  on  which  indeed  they  might  even  die,  should  it  be  out 
of  the  usual  track  of  vessels,  as  was  too  likely  to  be  the  case. 

“Well,”  asked  Herbert,  “ what  do  you  say,  Pencroft  ?” 

“ There  is  some  good  and  some  bad,  as  in  every  thing,”  replied 
the  sailor.  “We  shall  see.  But  now  the  ebb  is  evidently 
making.  In  three  hours  we  will  attempt  the  passage,  and  once 
on  the  other  side  we  will  try  to  get  out  of  this  scrape,  and  I 
hope  may  find  the  captain.”  Pencroft  was  not  wrong  in  his 
anticipations.  Three  hours  later  at  low  tide,  the  greater  part 
of  the  sand  forming  the  bed  of  the  channel  was  uncovered. 
Between  the  islet  and  the  coast  there  only  remained  a narrow 
channel  which  would  no  doubt  be  easy  to  cross. 

About  ten  o’clock,  Gideon  Spilett  and  his  companions 
stripped  themselves  of  their  clothes,  which  they  placed  in 
bundles  on  their  heads,  and  then  ventured  into  the  water, 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS*  £1 

which  was  not  more  than  five  feet  deep.  Herbert,  for  whom 
it  was  too  deep,  swam  like  a fish,  and  got  through  capitally. 
All  three  arrived  without  difficulty  on  the  opposite  shore. 
Quickly  drying  themselves  in  the  sun,  they  put  on  their  clothes, 
which  they  had  preserved  from  contact  with  the  water,  and 
sat  down  to  take  counsel  together  what  to  do  nest 


CHAPTER  IV, 


XITADOMES— THE  RIVER’S  MOUTH— THE  CHIMNEYS— CONTINUED 
RESEARCHES — THE  FOREST  OF  EVERGREENS— WAITING  FOR 
THE  EBB— ON  THE  HEIGHTS— THE  RAFT— RETURN  TO  THE 
SHORE. 

All  at  once  the  reporter  sprang  up,  and  telling  the  sailor 
that  he  would  rejoin  them  at  that  same  place,  he  climbed  the 
cliff  in  the  direction  which  the  negro  Neb  had  taken  a few 
hours  before.  Anxiety  hastened  his  steps,  for  he  longed  to 
obtain  news  of  his  friend,  and  he  soon  disappeared  round  an 
angle  of  the  cliff.  Herbert  wished  to  accompany  him. 

“Stop  here,  my  boy,”  said  the  sailor;  “we  have  to  prepare 
an  encampment,  and  try  and  find  rather  better  grub  than  these 
shell-fish.  Our  friends  will  want  something  when  they  come 
back.  There  is  work  for  every  body.” 

“ I am  ready,”  replied  Herbert. 

“All  right,”  said  the  sailor;  “that  will  do.  We  must  set 
about  it  regularly.  We  are  tired,  cold,  and  hungry;  therefore 
we  must  have  shelter,  fire,  and  food.  There  is  wood  in  the 
forest,  and  eggs  in  nests;  we  have  only  to  find  a house.” 

“Very  well,”  returned  Herbert,  “I  will  look  for  a cave 
amongst  the  rocks,  and  I shall  be  sure  to  discover  some  hole 
into  which  we  can  creep.” 

“All  right,”  said  Pencroft;  “ go  on,  my  boy.” 

They  both  walked  to  the  foot  of  the  enormous  wall  over  the 
beach,  far  from  which  the  tide  had  now  retreated;  but  instead 
of  going  towards  the  north,  they  wTent  southwards.  Pencroft 
had  remarked,  several  hundred  feet  from  the  place  at  which 
they  landed,  a narrow  cutting,  out  of  which  he  thought  a river 
or  stream  might  issue.  Now,  on  the  one  hand  it  was  import- 
ant to  settle  themselves  in  the  neighborhood  of  a good  stream 

42 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


43 


water,  and  on  the  other  it  was  possible  that  the  current 
had  thrown  Cyrus  Harding  on  the  shore  there. 

The  cliff,  as  has  been  said,  rose  to  a height  of  three  hundred 
feet,  but  the  mass  was  unbroken  throughout,  and  even  at  its 
base,  scarcely  washed  by  the  sea,  it  did  not  offer  the  smallest 
fissure  which  would  serve  as  a dwelling.  It  was  a perpendicu- 
lar wall  of  very  hard  granite,  which  even  the  waves  had  not 
worn  away.  Towards  the  summit  fluttered  myriads  of  sea- 
fowl,  and  especially  those  of  the  web-footed  species,  with  long, 
flat,  pointed  beaks— a clamorous  tribe,  bold  in  the  presence  of 
man,  who  probably  for  the  first  time  thus  invaded  their 
domains.  Pencroft  recognized  the  skua  and  other  gulls  among 
them,  the  voracious  little  sea-mew,  which  in  great  numbers 
nestled  in  the  crevices  of  the  granite.  A shot  fired  among  this 
swarm  would  have  killed  a great  number,  but  to  fire  a shot  a 
gun  was  needed,  and  neither  Pencroft  nor  Herbert  had  one; 
besides  this,  gulls  and  sea-mews  are  scarcely  eatable,  and  even 
their  eggs  have  a detestable  taste.  However,  Herbert  who  had 
gone  forward  a little  more  to  the  left,  soon  came  upon  rocks 
covered  with  sea-weed,  which,  some  hours  later,  would  be 
hidden  by  the  high  tide.  On  these  rocks,  in  the  midst  of 
slippery  wrack,  abounded  bivalve  shell-fish,  not  to  be  despised 
by  starving  people.  Herbert  called  Pencroft,  who  ran  up 
hastily. 

“ Why  ! here  are  mussels  ? ” cried  the  sailor  ; “ these  will 
do  instead  of  eggs  !” 

“ They  are  not  mussels,”  replied  Herbert,  who  was  attentively 
examining  the  molluscs  attached  to  the  rocks  ; “ they  are  litho- 
domes.” 

“Are  they  good  to  eat?”  asked  Pencroft. 

“ Perfectly  so.” 

“ Then  let  us  eat  some  lithodomes.” 

The  sailor  could  rely  upon  Herbert ; the  young  boy  wa a well 
up  in  natural  history,  and  always  had  had  quite  a passion  for 
the  science.  His  father  had  encouraged  him  in  it,  by  letting 
him  attend  the  lectures  of  the  best  professors  in  Boston,  who 
were  very  fond  of  the  intelligent,  industrious  lad.  And  this 
harn  for  natural  history  was  more  than  once  in  the  course  of 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION, 


& 

time,  of  great  use,  and  he  was  not  mistaken  in  this  instance. 
These  lithodomes  were  oblong  shells,  suspended  in  clusters 
and  adhering  very  tightly  to  the  rocks.  They  belong  to  that 
species  of  molluscous  perforators  which  excavate  holes  in  the 
hardest  stones ; their  shell  is  rounded  at  both  ends,  a feature 
which  is  not  remarked  in  the  common  mussel. 

Pencroft  and  Herbert  made  a good  meal  of  the  lithodomes, 
which  were  then  half  opened  to  the  sun.  They  ate  them  as 
oysters,  and  as  they  had  a strong  peppery  taste,  they  were 
palatable  without  condiments  of  any  sort. 

Their  hunger  was  thus  appeased  for  the  time,  but  not  their 
thirst,  which  increased  after  eating  these  naturally -spiced 
molluscs.  They  had  then  to  find  fresh  water,  and  it  was  not 
likely  that  it  would  be  wanting  in  such  a capriciously  uneven 
region.  Pencroft  and  Herbert,  after  having  taken  the  pre- 
caution of  collecting  an  ample  supply  of  lithodomes,  with 
which  they  filled  their  pockets  and  handkerchiefs,  regained 
the  foot  of  the  cliff. 

Two  hundred  paces  farther  they  arrived  at  the  cutting, 
through  which,  as  Pencroft  had  guessed,  ran  a stream  of  water, 
whether  fresh  or  not  was  to  be  ascertained.  At  this  place  the 
wall  appeared  to  have  been  separated  by  some  violent  subter- 
ranean force.  At  its  base  was  hollowed  out  a little  creek; 
the  farthest  part  of  which  formed  a tolerably  sharp  angle. 
The  watercourse  at  that  part  measured  100  feet  in  breath, 
and  its  two  banks  on  each  side  were  scarcely  twenty  feet  high. 
The  river  became  strong  almost  directly  between  the  two 
walls  of  granite,  which  began  to  sink  above  the  mouth ; it 
then  suddenly  turned  and  disappeared  beneath  a wood  of 
stunted  trees  half  a mile  off. 

“ Here  is  the  water,  and  yonder  is  the  wood  we  require  ! ” 
said  Pencroft.  “ Well,  Herbert,  now  we  only  want  the  house.” 

The  water  of  the  river  was  limpid.  The  sailor  ascertained 
that  at  this  time— that  is  to  say,  at  low  tide,  when  the  rising 
floods  did  not  reach  it — it  was  sweet.  This  important  point 
established,  Herbert  looked  for  some  cavity  which  would  serve 
them  as  a retreat,  but  in  vain  ; every  where  the  wall  appeared 
smooth,  plain,  and  perpendicular. 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


45 


However,  at  the  mouth  of  the  watercourse  and  above  the 
reach  of  the  high  tide,  the  convulsions  of  nature  had  formed, 
not  a grotto,  but  a pile  of  enormous  rocks,  such  as  are  often 
met  with  in  granite  countries  and  which  bear  the  name  of 
“ Chimneys.” 

Pencroft  and  Herbert  penetrated  quite  far  in  amongst  the 
rocks,  by  sandy  passages  in  which  light  was  not  wanting,  for 
it  entered  through  the  openings  which  were  left  between  the 
blocks,  of  which  some  were  only  sustained  by  a miracle  of 
equilibrium  ; but  with  the  light  came  also  air  — a regular  cor- 
ridor-gale—and  with  the  wind  the  sharp  cold  from  the 
exterior.  However,  the  sailor  thought  that  by  stopping-up 
some  of  the  openings  with  a mixture  of  stones  and  sand,  the 
Chimneys  could  be  rendered  habitable.  Their  geometrical  plan 
represented  the  typographic  sign  “&,”  which  signifies  “ et 
ccetera  ” abridged,  but  by  isolating  the  upper  mouth  of  the 
sign,  through  which  the  south  and  west  winds  blew  so 
strongly,  they  could  succeed  in  making  the  lower  part  of  use. 

“Here’s  our  work,”  said  Pencroft,  “and  if  we  ever  see 
Captain  Harding  again,  he  will  know  how  to  make  something 
of  this  labyrinth.” 

“We  shall  see  him  again,  Pencroft,”  cried  Herbert,  “and 
when  he  returns  he  must  find  a tolerable  dwelling  here.  It 
will  be  so,  if  we  can  make  a fireplace  in  the  left  passage  and 
keep  an  opening  for  the  smoke.” 

“So  we  can,  my  boy,”  replied  the  sailor,  “and  these  Chim- 
neys will  serve  our  turn.  Let  us  set  to  work,  but  first  come 
and  get  a store  of  fuel.  I think  some  branches  will  be  very 
useful  in  stopping  up  these  openings,  through  which  the  wind 
shrieks  like  so  many  fiends.” 

Herbert  and  Pencroft  left  the  Chimneys,  and,  turning  the 
angle,  they  began  to  climb  the  left  bank  of  the  river.  The. 
current  here  was  quite  rapid,  and  drifted  down  some  dead 
wood.  The  rising  tide  — and  it  could  already  be  perceived  — 
must  drive  it  back  with  force  to  a considerable  distance.  The 
sailor  then  thought  that  they  could  utilize  this  flow  and  ebb  for 
the  transport  of  heavy  objects. 

After  having  walked  for  a quarter  of  an  hour,  the  sailor  and 


46 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


the  boy  arrived  at  the  angle  which  the  river  made  in  turning 
towards  the  left.  From  this  point  its  course  was  pursued 
through  a forest  of  magnificent  trees.  These  trees  still  retained 
their  venture  notwithstanding  the  advanced  season,  for  they 
belonged  to  the  family  of  “ coniferae,”  which  is  spread  over  all 
the  regions  of  the  globe,  from  northern  climates  to  the  tropics. 
The  young  naturalist  recognized  especially  the  “ doedara,” 
which  are  very  numerous  in  the  Himalayan  zone  and  which 
spread  round  them  amost  agreeable  odor.  Between  these 
beautiful  trees  sprang  up  clusters  of  firs,  whose  opaque  open 
parasol  boughs  spread  wide  around.  Among  the  long  grass, 
Pencroft  felt  that  his  feet  were  crushing  dry  branches  which 
crackled  like  fireworks. 

“Well,  my  boy,”  said  he  to  Herbert,  “if  I don’t  know  the 
name  of  these  trees,  at  any  rate  I reckon  that  we  may  call  them 
‘burning  wood,’  and  just  now  that’s  the  chief  thing  we  want.” 
“ Let  us  get  a supply,”  replied  Herbert,  who  immediately  set 
to  work. 

The  collection  was  easily  made.  It  was  not  even  necessary  to 
lop  the  trees,  for  enormous  quantities  of  dead  wood  were  lying 
at  their  feet ; but  if  fuel  was  not  wanting,  the  means  of 
transporting  it  was  not  yet  found.  The  wood,  being  very  dry, 
would  burn  rapidly;  it  was  therefore  necessary  to  carry  to  the 
Chimneys  a considerable  quantity,  and  the  loads  of  two  men 
would  not  be  sufficient.  Herbert  remarked  this. 

“ Well,  my  boy,”  replied  the  sailor,  “ there  must  be  some  way 
of  carrying  this  wood ; there  is  always  a way  of  doing  every 
thing.  If  we  had  a cart  or  a boat,  it  would  be  easy  enough.” 
“ But  we  have  the  river,”  said  Herbert. 

“ Bight,”  replied  Pencroft ; “ the  river  will  be  to  us  like  a 
road  which  carries  of  itself,  and  rafts  have  not  been  invented 
^>r  nothing.” 

“ Only,”  observed  Herbert,  “ at  this  moment  our  road  is  going 
the  wrong  way,  for  the  tide  is  rising  ! ” 

“We  shall  be  all  right  if  we  wait  till  it  ebbs,”  replied  the 
sailor,  “and  then  we  will  trust  it  to  carry  our  fuel  to  the 
Chimneys.  Let  us  get  the  raft  ready.” 

The  sailor,  followed  by  Herbert,  directed  his  steps  towards 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


47 


the  river.  They  both  carried,  each  in  proportion  to  his 
strength,  a load  of  wood  bound  in  faggots.  They  found  on 
the  bank  also  a great  quantity  of  dead  branches  in  the  midst 
of  grass,  among  which  the  foot  of  man  had  probably  never 
before  trod.  Pencroft  began  directly  to  make  his  raft.  In  a 
kind  of  little  bay,  created  by  a point  of  the  shore  which  broke 
the  current,  the  sailor  and  the  lad  placed  some  good-sized 
pieces  of  wood,  which  they  had  fastened  together  with  dry 
creepers.  A raft  was  thus  formed,  on  which  they  stacked  all 
they  had  collected,  sufficient,  indeed,  to  have  loaded  at  least 
twenty  men.  In  an  hour  the  work  was  finished,  and  the  raft, 
moored  to  the  bank,  awaited  the  turning  of  the  tide. 

There  were  still  several  hours  to  be  occupied,  and  with  one 
consent  Pencroft  and  Herbert  resolved  to  gain  the  upper 
plateau,  so  as  to  have  a more  extended  view  of  the  surrounding 
country. 

Exactly  two  hundred  feet  behind  the  angle  formed  by  the 
river,  the  wall,  terminated  by  a fall  of  rocks,  died  away  in  a 
gentle  slope  to  the  edge  of  the  forest.  It  was  a natural  stair- 
case. Herbert  and  the  sailor  began  their  ascent ; thanks  to 
the  vigor  of  their  muscles  they  reached  the  summit  in  a few 
minutes,  and  proceeded  to  the  point  above  the  mouth  of  the 
river. 

On  attaining  it,  their  first  look  was  cast  upon  the  ocean 
which  not  long  before  they  had  traversed  in  such  a terrible 
condition.  They  observed,  with  emotion,  all  that  part  to  the 
north  of  the  coast  on  which  the  catastrophe  had  taken  place. 
It  was  there  that  Cyrus  Harding  had  disappeared.  They 
looked  to  see  if  some  portion  of  their  balloon,  to  which  a man 
might  possibly  cling,  yet  existed.  Nothing ! The  sea  was  but 
one  vast  watery  desert.  As  to  the  coast,  it  was  solitary  also. 
Neither  the  reporter  nor  Neb  could  be  any  where  seen.  But  it 
was  possible  that  at  this  time  they  were  both  too  far  away  to 
be  perceived. 

“Something  tells  me,”  cried  Herbert,  “that  a man  as 
energetic  as  Captain  Harding  would  not  let  himself  be  drowned 
like  other  people.  He  must  have  reached  some  point  of  the 
shore;  don’t  you  think  so,  Pencroft  ? ” 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION* 


48 

The  sailor  shook  his  head  sadly.  He  little  expected  ever  to 
see  Cyrus  Harding  againj  but  wishing  to  leave  some  hope  to 
Herbert.  “Doubtless,  doubtless,”  said  he  ; “our  engineer  is  a 
man  who  would  get  out  of  a scrape  to  which  any  one  else 
would  yield.” 

In  the  meantime  he  examined  the  coast  with  great  attention* 
Stretched  out  below  them  was  the  sandy  shore,  bounded  on  the 
rigrit  of  the  river’s  mouth  by  lines  of  breakers.  The  rocks 
which  were  visible  appeared  like  amphibious  monsters  repos- 
ing in  the  surf.  Beyond  the  reef,  the  sea  sparkled  beneath 
the  sun’s  rays.  To  the  south  a sharp  point  closed  the  horizon, 
and  it  could  not  be  seen  if  the  land  was  prolonged  in  tha* 
direction,  or  if  it  ran  southeast  and  southwest,  which  would 
have  made  this  coast  a very  long  peninsula.  At  the  northern 
extremity  of  the  bay  the  outline  of  the  shore  was  continued 
to  a great  distance  in  a wider  curve.  There  the  shore  was  low, 
flat,  without  cliffs,  and  with  great  banks  of  sand,  which  the  tide 
left  uncovered.  Pencroft  and  Herbert  then  returned  towards 
the  west.  Their  attention  was  first  arrested  by  the  snow- 
topped  mountain  which  rose  at  a distance  of  six  or  seven 
miles.  From  its  first  declivities  to  within  two  miles  of  the  coast 
were  spread  vast  masses  of  wood,  relieved  by  large  green 
patches,  caused  by  the  presence  of  evergreen  trees.  Then 
from  the  edge  of  this  forest  to  the  shore  extended  a plain,  scat** 
tered  irregularly  with  groups  of  trees.  Here  and  there  on  the 
left  sparkled  through  glades  the  waters  of  the  little  river ; they 
could  trace  its  winding  course  back  towards  the  spurs  of  the 
mountain,  among  which  it  seemed  to  spring.  At  the  point 
where  the  sailor  had  left  his  raft  of  wood,  it  began  to  run 
between  the  two  high  granite  walls  ; but  if  on  the  left  of  the 
bank  the  wall  remained  clear  and  abrupt,  on  the  right  bank, 
on  the  contrary,  it  sank  gradually,  the  massive  sides  changed 
to  isolated  rocks,  the  rocks  to  stones,  the  stones  to  shingle, 
running  to  the  extremity  of  the  point. 

“ Are  we  on  an  island?”  murmured  the  sailor. 

“ At  any  rate,  it  seems  to  be  big  enough,”  replied  the  lad. 

“An  island,  ever  so  big,  is  an  island  all  the  same!”  said 
Pencroft. 


f DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


51 


But  this  important  question  could  not  yet  be  answered.  A 
more  perfect  survey  will  be  required  to  settle  the  point.  As  to 
the  land  itself,  island  or  continent,  it  appeared  fertile,  agree- 
able in  its  aspect,  and  varied  in  its  productions. 

“This  is  satisfactory,”  observed  Pencroft;  and  in  our  misfor- 
tune, we  must  thank  Providence  for  it.” 

“God  be  praised !”  responded  Herbert,  whose  pious  heart 
was  full  of  gratitude  to  the  Author  of  all  things. 

Pencroft  and  Herbert  examined  for  some  time  the  country 
on  which  they  had  been  cast;  but  it  was  difficult  to  guess  after 
so  hasty  an  inspection  what  the  future  had  in  store  for  them. 

They  then  returned,  following  the  southern  crest  of  the 
granite  platform,  bordered  by  a long  fringe  of  jagged  rocks, 
of  the  most  whimsical  shapes.  Some  hundreds  of  birds 
lived  there  nestled  in  the  holes  of  the  stone;  Herbert,  jumping 
over  the  rocks,  startled  a whole  flock  of  these  winged  creatures. 
“ Oh ! cried  he,  “ those  are  not  gulls  nor  seamews ! ” 

“What  are  they  then?”  asked  Pencroft. 

“ Upon  my  word,  one  would  say  they  were  pigeons  ! ” 

“ Just  so,  but  these  are  wild  or  rock  pigeons.  I recognize 
them  by  the  double  band  of  black  on  the  wing,  by  the  white 
tail,  and  by  their  slate- colored  plumage.  But  if  the  rock- 
pigeon  is  good  to  eat,  its  eggs  must  be  excellent,  and  we 
Will  soon  see  how  many  they  may  have  left  in  their  nests ! ” 
“We  will  not  give  them  time  to  hatch,  unless  it  is  in  the 
shape  of  an  omelette ! ” replied  Pencroft  merrily. 

“ But  what  will  you  make  your  omelette  in  ? ” replied  Herbert; 
“ in  your  hat  ? ” 

“ Well ! ” replied  the  sailor,  “ I am  not  quite  conjuror  enough 
for  that;  we  must  come  down  to  eggs  in  the  shell,  my  boy, 
and  I will  undertake  to  dispatch  the  hardest ! ” 

Pencroft  and  Herbert  attentively  examined  the  cavities  in  the 
granite,  and  they  really  found  eggs  in  some  of  the  hollows.  A 
few  dozen  being  collected,  were  packed  in  the  sailor’s  hand- 
kerchief, and  as  the  time  when  the  tide  would  be  full  was 
approaching,  Pencroft  and  Herbert  began  to  redescend  towards 
the  watercourse.  When  they  arrived  there,  it  was  an  hour 
after  mid-day.  The  tide  had  already  turned.  They  must  now 

u.  of  tu-  ub. 


e2 


THE  LAKESIDE  EBOTftN. 


avail  themselves  of  the  ebb  to  take  the  wood  to  the  mouth, 
Pencroft  did  not  intend  to  let  the  raft  go  away  in  the  current 
without  guidance,  neither  did  he  mean  to  embark  on  it  himself 
to  steer  it.  But  a sailor  is  never  at  a loss  when  there  is  a ques- 
tion of  cables  or  ropes,  and  Pencroft  rapidly  twisted  a cord,  a 
few  fathoms  long,  made  of  dry  creepers.  This  vegetable 
cable  was  fastened  to  the  after-part  of  the  raft,  and  the  sailor 
held  it  in  his  hand  while  Herbert,  pushing  off  the  raft  with  a 
long  pole,  kept  it  in  the  current.  This  succeeded  capitally. 
The  enormous  load  of  wood  drifted  down  with  the  current. 
The  bank  was  very  equal;  there  was  no  fear  that  the  raft  would 
run  aground,  and  before  two  o’clock  they  arrived  at  the  river’s 
mouth,  a few  paces  from  the  Chimneys. 


CHAPTER  V, 


ARRANGING  THE  CHIMNEYS— HOW  TO  PROCURE  FIRE— A BOX  OF 
MATCHES— SEARCH  ON  THE  SHORE— RETURN  OF  THE  RE- 
PORTER AND  NEB— A SINGLE  MATCH— A ROARING  FIRE— THE 
FIRST  SUPPER,  AND  NIGHT  ON  SHORE. 

Pencroft’s  first  care,  after  unloading  the  raft,  was  to  render 
the  cave  habitable  by  stopping  up  all  the  holes  which  made 
it  draughty.  Sand,  stones,  twisted  branches,  wet  clay,  closed 
up  the  galleries  open  to  the  south  winds.  One  narrow  and 
winding  opening  at  the  side  was  kept,  to  lead  out  the  smoke 
and  to  make  the  fire  draw.  The  cave  was  thus  divided  into 
three  or  four  rooms,  if  such  dark  dens  with  which  a donkey 
would  scarcely  have  been  contented  deserved  the  name.  But 
they  were  dry,  and  there  was  space  to  stand  upright,  at  least 
in  the  principal  room,  which  occupied  the  center.  The  floor 
was  covered  with  fine  sand,  and  taking  all  in  all  they  were 
well  pleased  with  it  for  want  of  a better. 

“Perhaps,”  said  Herbert,  while  he  and  Pencroft  were  work- 
ing, “ our  companions  have  found  a superior  place  to  ours.” 

“Very  likely,”  replied  the  seaman;  “but,  as  we  don’t  know, 
we  must  work  all  the  same.  Better  to  have  two  strings  to  one’s 
bow  than  no  string  at  all ! ” 

“ Oh ! ” exclaimed  Herbert,  “ how  jolly  it  will  be  if  they  were 
to  find  Captain  Harding  and  were  to  bring  him  back  with 
them!” 

“Yes,  indeed,”  said  Pencroft,  “that  was  a man  of  the  right 
sort.” 

“ Was ! ” exclaimed  Herbert,  “ do  you  despair  of  ever  seeing 
him  again  ? ” 

“ God  forbid !”  replied  the  sailor.  Their  work  was  soon 
done,  and  Pencroft  declared  himself  very  well  satisfied. 

63 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


m 

“Now,”  said  he,  “our  friends  can  come  back  when  they  like. 
They  will  find  a good  enough  shelter.” 

They  now  had  only  to  make  a fireplace  and  to  prepare  the 
supper— an  easy  task.  Large  flat  stones  were  placed  on 
the  ground  at  the  opening  of  the  narrow  passage  which  had 
been  kept.  This,  if  the  smoke  did  not  take  the  heat  out  with 
it,  would  be  enough  to  maintain  an  equal  temperature  inside. 
Their  wood  was  stowed  away  in  one  of  the  rooms,  and  the 
sailor  laid  in  the  fire-place  some  logs  and  brushwood.  The 
seaman  was  busy  with  this,  when  Herbert  asked  him  if  he  had 
any  matches. 

“ Certainly,”  replied  Pencroft,  “ and  I may  say  happily,  for 
without  matches  or  tinder  we  should  be  in  a fix.” 

“ Still  we  might  get  fire  as  the  savages  do,”  replied  Herbert, 
“ by  rubbing  two  bits  of  dry  stick  one  against  the  other.” 

“All  right;  try,  my  boy,  and  let’s  see  if  you  can  do  any  thing 
besides  exercising  your  arms.” 

“ Well,  it’s  a very  simple  proceeding,  and  much  used  in  the 
islands  of  the  Pacific.” 

“ I don’t  deny  it,”  replied  Pencroft,  “ but  the  savages  must 
know  bow  to  do  it  or  employ  a peculiar  kind  of  wood,  for 
more  than  once  I have  tried  to  get  fire  in  that  way,  but 
I could  never  manage  it.  I must  say  I prefer  matches.  By- 
the-by,  where  are  my  matches?” 

Pencroft  searched  in  his  waistcoat  pocket  for  the  box, 
which  was  always  there,  for  he  was  a confirmed  smoker.  He 
could  not  find  it;  he  rummaged  the  pockets  of  his  trousers, 
but,  to  his  horror,  he  could  nowhere  discover  the  box. 

“ Here’s  a go  ! ” said  he,  looking  at  Herbert.  “ The  box  must 
have  fallen  out  of  my  pocket  and  got  lost ! Surely,  Herbert, 
you  must  have  something — a tinder-box — any  thing  that  can 
possibly  make  fire !” 

“ No,  I haven’t,  Pencroft.” 

The  sailor  rushed  out,  followed  by  the  boy.  On  the  sand, 
among  the  rocks,  near  the  river’s  bank,  they  both  searched 
carefully,  but  in  vain.  The  box  was  of  copper,  and  therefore 
would  have  been  easily  seen.  “Pencroft,”  asked  Herbert, 
“ didn’t  you  throw  it  out  of  the  car  ? ” 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


55 


-I  knew  better  than  that,”  replied  the  sailor;  “but  such  a 
small  article  could  easily  disappear  in  the  tumbling  about  we 
have  gone  through.  I would  rather  even  have  lost  my  pipe  l 
Confound  the  box  I Where  can  it  be  ? ” 

“Look  here,  the  tide  is  going  down,”  said  Herbert;  “let’s  run 
to  the  place  where  we  landed.” 

It  was  scarcely  probable  that  they  would  find  the  box,  which 
the  waves  had  rolled  about  among  the  pebbles,  at  high  tide, 
but  it  was  as  well  to  try.  Herbert  and  Pencroft  walked  rapidly 
to  the  point  where  they  had  landed  the  day  before,  about  two 
hundred  feet  from  the  cave.  They  hunted  there,  amongst  the 
shingle,  in  the  clefts  of  the  rocks,  but  found  nothing.  If  the 
box  had  fallen  at  this  place  it  must  have  been  swept  away  by 
the  waves.  As  the  sea  went  down,  they  searched  every 
little  crevice  with  no  result.  It  was  a grave  loss  in  their  circum- 
stances, and  for  the  time  irreparable.  Pencroft  could  not  hide 
his  vexation;  he  looked  very  anxious,  but  said  not  a word. 
Herbert  tried  to  console  him  by  observing,  that  if  they  had 
found  the  matches,  they  would,  very  likely,  have  been  wetted 
by  the  sea  and  useless. 

“ No,  my  boy,”  replied  the  sailor;  “ they  were  in  a copper  box 
which  shut  very  tightly;  and  now  what  are  we  to  do?” 

“We  shall  certainly  find  some  way  of  making  a fire,”  said 
Herbert.  “ Captain  Harding  or  Mr.  Spilett  will  not  be  without 
tfiem.” 

{ “Yes,”  replied  Pencroft;  “but  in  the  meantime  we  are  with- 
out fire,  and  our  companions  will  find  but  a sorry  repast  on 
their  return.” 

“But,”  said  Herbert  quickly,  “do  you  think  it  possible  that 
they  have  no  tinder  or  matches?” 

“ I doubt  it,”  replied  the  sailor,  shaking  his  head,  “ for  neither 
Neb  nor  Captain  Harding  smoke,  and  I believe  that  Mr.  Spilett 
would  rather  keep  his  note-book  than  his  match-box.” 

Herbert  did  not  reply.  The  loss  of  the  box  was  certainly  to 
be  regretted,  but  the  boy  was  still  sure  of  procuring  fire  in 
some  way  or  other.  Pencroft,  more  experienced,  did  not  think 
so,  although  he  was  not  a man  to  trouble  himself  about  a small 
or  great  grievance.  At  any  rate,  there  was  only  one  thing  to 


66 


VHE  LAKESrC®  ITOnON. 


be  done— to  await  the  return  of  Neb  and  the  reporter;  but  they 
must  give  up  the  feast  of  hard  eggs  which  they  had  meant  to 
prepare,  and  a meal  of  raw  flesh  was  not  an  agreeable  pros* 
pect  either  for  themselves  or  for  the  others. 

Before  returning  to  the  cave,  the  sailor  and  Herbert,  in  the 
event  of  a fire  being  positively  unattainable,  collected  some 
more  shell-fish,  and  then  silently  retraced  their  steps  to  their 
dwelling. 

Pencroft,  his  eyes  fixed  on  the  ground,  still  looked  for  his 
box.  He  even  climbed  up  the  left  bank  of  the  river  from  its 
mouth  to  the  angle  where  the  raft  had  been  moored.  He 
returned  to  the  plateau,  went  over  it  in  every  direction, 
searched  amongst  the  high  grass  on  the  border  of  the  forest, 
all  in  vain. 

It  was  five  in  the  evening  when  he  and  Herbert  re-entered 
the  cave.  It  is  useless  to  say  that  the  darkest  corners  of  the 
passages  were  ransacked  before  they  were  obliged  to  give  it 
up  in  despair.  Toward  six  o’clock,  when  the  sun  was  dis- 
appearing behind  the  high  lands  of  the  west,  Herbert,  who 
was  walking  up  and  down  on  the  strand,  signalized  the  return 
of  Neb  and  Spilett.  They  were  returning  alone ! ...  . The 
boy’s  heart  sank;  the  sailor  had  not  been  deceived  in  his  fore- 
bodings; the  engineer,  Cyrus  Harding,  had  not  been  found ! 

The  reporter,  on  his  arrival,  sat  down  on  a rock,  without  say- 
ing any  thing.  Exhausted  with  fatigue,  dying  of  hunger, 
he  had  not  strength  to  utter  a word. 

As  to  Neb,  his  red  eyes  showed  how  he  had  cried,  and  the 
tears  which  he  could  not  restrain  told  too  plainly  that  he  had 
lost  all  hope. 

The  reporter  recounted  all  that  they  had  done  in  their 
attempt  to  recover  Cyrus  Harding.  He  and  Neb  had  surveyed 
the  coast  for  a distance  of  eight  miles,  and  consequently 
much  beyond  the  place  where  the  balloon  had  fallen  the  last 
time  but  one,  a fall  which  was  followed  by  the  disappearance 
of  the  engineer  and  the  dog  Top.  The  shore  was  solitary;  not 
a vestige  of  a mark.  Not  even  a pebble  recently  displaced;  not 
a trace  on  the  sand;  not  a human  footstep  on  all  that  part  of 
the  beach.  It  was  clear  that  that  portion  of  the  shore  had 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


57 


never  been  visited  by  a human  being.  The  sea  was  as  deserted 
as  the  land,  and  it  was  there,  a few  hundred  feet  from  the  coast, 
that  the  engineer  must  have  found  a tomb. 

As  Spilett  ended  his  account,  Neb  jumped  up,  exclaiming 
in  a voice  which  showed  how  hope  struggled  within  him, 
“No ! he  is  not  dead ! he  can’t  be  dead  ! It  might  happen  to 
any  one  else,  but  never  to  him ! He  could  get  out  of  any 
thing ! ” Then  his  strength  forsaking  him,  “ Oh  ! I can  do  no 
more  ! ” he  murmured. 

“Neb,”  said  Herbert  running  to  him,  “we  will  find  him! 
God  will  give  him  back  to  us  ! But  in  the  meantime  you  are 
hungry,  and  you  must  eat  something.” 

So  saying,  he  offered  the  poor  negro  a few  handfulls  of  shell- 
fish, which  was  indeed  wretched  and  insufficient  food.  Neb 
had  not  eaten  any  thing  for  several  hours,  but  he  refused  them. 
He  could  not,  would  not  live  without  his  master. 

As  to  Gideon  Spilett,  he  devoured  the  shell-fish,  then  he  laid 
himself  down  on  the  sand,  at  the  foot  of  the  rock.  He  was 
very  weak,  but  calm.  Herbert  went  up  to  him,  and  taking  his 
hand,  “ Sir,”  said  he,  we  have  found  a shelter,  which  will  be 
better  than  lying  here.  Night  is  advancing.  Come  and  rest  l 
To-morrow  we  will  search  farther.” 

The  reporter  got  up,  and  guided  by  the  boy  went  toward  the 
cave.  On  the  way,  Pencroft  asked  him  in  the  most  natural 
tone,  if  by  chance  he  happened  to  have  a match  or  two. 

The  reporter  stopped,  felt  in  his  pockets,  but  finding  nothing 
said,  “I  had  some,  but  I must  have  thrown  them  away.” 

The  seaman  then  put  the  same  question  to  Neb  and  received 
the  same  answer. 

“ Confound  it ! ” exclaimed  the  sailor. 

The  reporter  heard  him  and  seizing  his  arm,  “Have  you  no 
matches  ? ” he  asked. 

“Not  one,  and  no  fire  in  consequence  ! ” 

“ Ah  ! ” cried  Neb,  “ if  my  master  was  here  he  would  know 
what  to  do  ! ” 

The  four  castaways  remained  motionless,  looking  uneasily 
at  each  other.  Herbert  was  the  first  to  break  the  silence  by 
saying,  “Mr.  Spilett,  you  are  a smoker  and  always  have 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


& 

matches  about  you;  perhaps  you  haven’t  looked  well,  try  again* 
a single  match  will  be  enough  ! ” 

The  reporter  hunted  again  in  the  pockets  of  his  trousers, 
waistcoat,  and  great-coat,  and  at  last,  to  Pencroft’s  great  joy, 
not  less  to  his  extreme  surprise,  he  felt  a tiny  piece  of  wood 
entangled  in  the  lining  of  his  waistcoat.  He  seized  it  with 
his  fingers  through  the  stuff,  hut  he  could  not  get  it  out.  If 
this  was  a match,  and  a single  one,  it  was  of  great  importance 
not  to  rub  off  the  phosphorus. 

“Will  you  let  me  try?”  said  the  boy,  and  very  cleverly,  with- 
out breaking  it,  he  managed  to  draw  out  the  wretched  yet 
precious  little  hit  of  wood  which  was  of  such  great  importance 
to  these  poor  men.  It  was  unused. 

“Hurrah!”  cried  Pencroft;  “it  is  as  good  as  having  a 
whole  cargo ! ” He  took  the  match,  and,  followed  by  his  com- 
panions, entered  the  cave. 

This  small  piece  of  wood,  of  which  so  many  in  an  inhabited 
country  are  wasted  with  indifference,  and  are  of  no  value,  must 
here  be  used  with  the  greatest  caution. 

The  sailor  first  made  sure  that  it  was  quite  dry;  that  done, 
“We  must  have  some  paper,”  he  said. 

“ Here,”  replied  Spilett,  after  some  hesitation  tearing  a leaf 
out  of  his  note-book. 

Pencroft  took  the  piece  of  paper  which  the  reporter  held  out 
to  him,  and  knelt  down  before  the  fireplace.  Some  handfuls 
of  grass,  leaves,  and  dry  moss  were  placed  under  the  faggots 
and  disposed  in  such  a way  that  the  air  could  easily  circulate, 
and  the  dry  wood  would  rapidly  catch  fire. 

Pencroft  then  twisted  the  piece  of  paper  into  the  shape  of 
a cone,  as  smokers  do  in  a high  wind,  and  poked  it  in  among 
the  moss.  Taking  a small  stone,  he  wiped  it  carefully,  and 
with  a beating  heart,  holding  his  breath,  he  gently  rubbed  the 
match.  The  first  attempt  did  not  produce  any  effect.  Pen- 
croft had  not  struck  hard  enough,  fearing  to  rub  off  the 
phosphorus. 

“No,  I can’t  do  it,”  said  he,  “my  hand  trembles,  the  match 
has  missed  fire;  I can  not,  I will  not ! ” and  rising,  he  tbld  Hep 
bert  to  take  his  place. 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


Certainly  the  boy  had  never  in  all  his  life  been  so  nervous. 
Prometheus  going  to  steal  the  fire  from  heaven  could  not  have 
been  more  anxious.  He  did  not  hesitate,  however,  but  struck 
the  match  directly. 

A little  spluttering  was  heard  and  a tiny  blue  flame  sprang 
up,  making  a choking  smoke.  Herbert  quietly  turned  the 
match  so  as  to  augment  the  flame,  and  then  slipped  it  into  the 
paper  cone,  which  in  a few  seconds  too  caught  fire,  and  then 
the  moss. 

A minute  later  the  dry  wood  crackled,  and  a cheerful  flame, 
assisted  by  the  vigorous  blowing  of  the  sailor,  sprang  up  in  the 
midst  of  the  darkness. 

“At  last!”  cried  Pencroft,  getting  up;  “I  was  never  so 
nervous  before  in  all  my  life  ! ” 

The  flat  stones  made  a capital  fire  place.  The  smoke  went 
quite  easily  out  at  the  narrow  passage,  the  chimney  drew,  and 
an  agreeable  warmth  was  not  long  in  being  felt, 
s They  must  now  take  great  care  not  to  let  the  fire  go  out, 
and  always  to  keep  some  embers  alight.  It  only  needed  care 
and  attention,  as  they  had  plenty  of  wood,  and  could  renew 
their  store  at  any  time. 

Pencroft’s  first  thought  was  to  use  the  fire  by  preparing  a 
more  nourishing  supper  than  a dish  of  shell-fish.  Two  dozen 
eggs  were  brought  by  Herbert.  The  reporter,  leaning  up  in 
a corner,  watched  these  preparations  without  saying  any 
thing.  A threefold  thought  weighed  on  his  mind.  Was  Cyrus 
still  alive  ? If  he  was  alive,  where  was  he  ? If  he  had  sur- 
vived from  his  fall,  how  was  it  that  he  had  not  found  some 
means  of  making  known  his  existence.  As  to  Neb,  he  was 
roaming  about  the  shore.  He  was  like  a body  without  a soul. 

Pencroft  knew  fifty  ways  of  cooking  eggs,  but  his  time  he 
had  no  choice,  and  was  obliged  to  content  himself  with  roast- 
ing them  under  the  hot  cinders.  In  a few  minutes  the  cooking 
was  done,  and  the  seaman  invited  the  reporter  to  take  his 
share  of  the  supper.  Such  was  the  first  repast  of  the  casta- 
ways on  this  unknown  coast.  The  hard  eggs  were  excellent, 
and  as  eggs  contain  every  thing  indispensable  to  man’s 
nourishment,  these  poor  people  thought  themselves  well  off, 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


and  were  much  strengthened  by  them.  Oh  ! if  only  one  oi 
them  had  not  been  missing  at  this  meal ! If  the  five  prisoners 
who  escaped  from  Richmond  had  been  all  there,  under  the 
piled-up  rocks,  before  this  clear,  crackling  fire  on  the  dry 
sand,  what  thanksgivings  must  they  have  rendered  to  Heaven  ! 
But  the  most  ingenious,  the  most  learned,  he  who  was  their 
unquestioned  chief,  Cyrus  Harding,  was,  alas ! missing,  and 
his  body  had  not  even  obtained  a burial-place. 

Thus  passed  the  25th  of  March.  Night  had  come  on.  Out- 
side could  be  heard  the  howling  of  the  wind  and  the  monoton- 
ous sound  of  the  surf  breaking  on  the  shore.  The  waves 
rolled  the  shingle  backwards  and  forwards  with  a deafening 
noise. 

The  reporter  retired  into  a dark  corner  after  having  shortly 
noted  down  the  occurrences  of  the  day;  the  first  appearance  of 
this  new  land,  the  loss  of  their  leader,  the  exploration  of  the 
coast,  the  incident  of  the  matches,  etc.;  and  then,  overcome  by 
fatigue,  he  managed  to  forget  his  sorrow  in  sleep.  Herbert 
went  to  sleep  directly.  As  to  the  sailor,  he  passed  the  night 
with  one  eye  on  the  fire,  on  which  he  did  not  spare  fuel.  But 
one  of  the  castaways  did  not  sleep  in  the  cave.  The  incon- 
solable, despairing  Neb,  notwithstanding  all  his  companions 
could  say  to  induce  him  to  take  some  rest,  wandered  all  night 
long  on  the  shore,  calling  on  his  master. 


CHAPTER  VI. 


ffift  INVENTORY  OP  THE  CASTAWAYS  — NOTHING  — BURNT  LINEN 
— AN  EXPEDITION  TO  THE  FOREST  — FLIGHT  OF  THE 
JACAMAR  — TRACES  OF  DEER  — COUROUCOUS  — GROUSE  — A 
CURIOUS  FISHING-LINE. 

The  inventory  of  the  articles  possessed  by  these  castaways 
from  the  clouds,  thrown  upon  a coast  which  appeared  to  be 
uninhabited,  was  soon  made  out.  They  had  nothing,  save  the 
clothes  which  they  were  wearing  at  the  time  of  the  catas- 
trophe. We  must  mention,  however,  a note-book  and  a watch 
which  Gideon  Spilett  had  kept,  doubtless  by  inadvertence,  not  a 
weapon,  not  a tool,  not  even  a pocket-knife  ; for  while  in  the 
car  they  had  thrown  out  every  thing  to  lighten  the  balloon. 
The  imaginary  heroes  of  Daniel  De  Foe  or  of  Wyss,  as  well 
as  Selkirk  and  Raynal  shipwrecked  on  Juan  Fernandes  and 
on  the  archipelago  of  the  Aucklands,  were  never  in  such 
absolute  destitution.  Either  they  had  abundant  resources 
from  their  stranded  vessels,  in  grain,  cattle,  tools,  ammunition, 
or  else  some  thing  were  thrown  up  on  the  coast  which  sup- 
plied them  with  all  the  first  necessities  of  life.  But  here,  not 
any  instrument  whatever,  not  a utensil.  From  nothing  they 
must  supply  themselves  with  every  thing. 

And  yet,  if  Cyrus  Harding  had  been  with  them,  if  the  engi- 
neer could  have  brought  his  practical  science,  his  inventive 
mind  to  bear  on  their  situation,  perhaps  all  hope  would  not 
have  been  lost.  Alas  ! they  must  hope  no  longer  again  to  see 
Cyrus  Harding.  The  castaways  could  expect  nothing  but  from 
themselves  and  from  that  Providence  which  never  abandons 
those  whose  faith  is  sincere. 

But  ought  they  to  establish  themselves  on  this  part  of  the 
coast,  without  trying  to  know  to  what  continent  it  belonged, 

61 


62 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION, 


if  it  was  inhabited,  or  if  they  were  on  the  shore  of  a desert 
island  ? 

It  was  an  important  question,  and  should  be  solved  with 
the  shortest  possible  delay.  From  its  answer  they  would  know 
what  measures  to  take.  However,  according  to  Pencroft’s 
advice,  it  appeared  best  to  wait  a few  days  before  commencing 
an  exploration.  They  must,  in  fact,  prepare  some  provisions 
and  procure  more  strengthening  food  than  eggs  and  molluscs. 
The  explorers,  before  undertaking  new  fatigues,  must  first  of 
all  recruit  their  strength. 

The  Chimneys  offered  a retreat  sufficient  for  the  present. 
The  fire  was  lighted,  and  it  was  easy  to  preserve  some  embers. 
There  were  plenty  of  shell-fish  and  eggs  amongst  the  rocks  and 
on  the  beach.  It  would  be  easy  to  kill  a few  of  the  pigeons 
which  were  flying  by  hundreds  about  the  summit  of  the 
plateau,  either  with  sticks  or  stones.  Perhaps  the  trees  of 
the  neighboring  forest  would  supply  them  with  eatable  fruit. 
Lastly,  the  sweet  water  was  there. 

It  was  accordingly  settled  that  for  a few  days  they  would 
remain  at  the  Chimneys  so  as  to  prepare  themselves  for  an 
expedition,  either  along  the  shore  or  into  the  interior  of  the 
country.  This  plan  suited  Neb  particularly.  As  obstinate  in 
his  ideas  as  in  his  presentiments,  he  was  in  no  haste  to  aban- 
don this  part  of  the  coast,  the  scene  of  the  catastrophe.  He  did 
not,  he  would  not  believe  in  the  loss  of  Cyrus  Harding.  No,  it 
did  not  seem  to  him  possible  that  such  a man  had  ended  in 
this  vulgar  fashion,  carried  away  by  a wave,  drowned  in  the 
floods,  a few  hundred  feet  from  a shore.  As  long  as  the  waves 
had  not  cast  up  the  body  of  the  engineer,  as  long  as  he,  Neb, 
had  not  seen  with  Ills  eyes,  touched  with  his  hands  the  corpse 
of  his  master,  he  would  not  believe  in  his  death ! And  this 
idea  rooted  itself  deeper  than  ever  in  his  determined  heart. 
An  illusion  perhaps,  but  still  an  illusion  to  be  respected,  and 
one  which  the  sailor  did  not  wish  to  destroy.  As  for  him,  he 
hoped  no  Iv^er,  but  there  was  no  use  in  arguing  with  Neb. 
He  was  like  the  dog  who  will  not  leave  the  place  where  his 
master  is  buried,  and  his  grief  was  such  that  most  probably  he 
would  not  survive  him. 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


63 


This  same  morning,  the  26th  of  March,  at  daybreak,  Neb 
had  set  out  on  the  shore  in  a northerly  direction,  and  he  had 
returned  to  the  spot  where  the  sea,  no  doubt,  had  closed  over 
the  unfortunate  Harding. 

That  day’s  breakfast  was  composed  solely  of  pigeon’s  eggs 
and  lithodomes.  Herbert  had  found  some  salt  deposited  by 
evaporation  in  the  hollows  of  the  rocks,  and  this  mineral  was 
very  welcome. 

The  repast  ended,  Pencroft  asked  the  reporter  if  he  wished 
to  accompany  Herbert  and  himself  to  the  forest,  where  they 
were  going  to  try  to  hunt.  But  on  consideration,  it  was 
thought  necessary  that  some  one  should  remain  to  keep  in 
the  fire,  and  to  be  at  hand  in  the  highly  improbable  event 
of  Neb  requiring  aid.  The  reporter  accordingly  remained 
behind. 

“To  the  chase,  Herbert,”  said  the  sailor.  “We  shall  find 
ammunition  on  our  way,  and  cut  our  weapons  in  the  forest.” 
But  at  the  moment  of  starting,  Herbert  observed,  that  since 
they  had  no  tinder,  it  would  perhaps  be  prudent  to  replace  it 
by'another  substance. 

“ What  ? ” asked  Pencroft. 

W “ Burnt  linen,”  replied  the  boy.  “ That  could  in  case  of  need 
serve  for  tinder.” 

The  sailor  thought  it  very  sensible  advice.  Only  it  had  [the 
inconvenience  of  necessitating  the  sacrifice  of  a piece  of  hand- 
kerchief. Notwithstanding,  the  thing  was  well  worth  while 
trying,  and  a part  of  Pencroft’s  large  checked  handkerchief 
was  soon  reduced  to  the  state  of  a half-burnt  rag.  This 
inflammable  material  was  placed  in  the  central  chamber  at  the 
bottom  of  a little  cavity  in  the  rock,  sheltered  from  all  wind 
and  damp. 

It  was  nine  o’clock  in  the  morning.  The  weather  was  threat- 
ening and  the  breeze  blew  from  the  southeast.  Herbert  and 
Pencroft  turned  the  angle  of  the  Chimneys,  not  without  having 
cast  a look  at  the  smoke  which,  just  at  that  place,  curled  round 
a point  of  rock : they  ascended  the  left  bank  of  the  river. 

Arrived  at  the  forest,  Pencroft  broke  from  the  first  tree  two 
stout  branches  which  he  transformed  into  clubs,  the  ends  of 


64 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


which  Herbert  rubbed  smooth  on  a rock.  Oh  ! what  would 
they  not  have  given  for  a knife  ! 

The  two  hunters  now  advanced  among  the  long  grass,  fol- 
lowing the  bank.  From  the  turning  which  directed  its  course 
to  the  southwest,  the  river  narrowed  gradually  and  the  channel 
lay  between  high  banks,  over  which  the  trees  formed  a double 
arch.  Pencroft,  lest  they  should  lose  themselves,  resolved  to 
follow  the  course  of  the  stream,  which  would  always  lead 
them  back  to  the  point  from  which  they  started.  But  the 
bank  was  not  without  some  obstacles;  here,  the  flexible 
branches  of  the  trees  bent  level  with  the  current;  there, 
creepers  and  thorns  which  they  had  to  break  down  with 
their  sticks.  Herbert  often  glided  among  the  broken  stumps 
with  the  agility  of  a young  cat,  and  disappeared  in  the  under- 
wood. But  Pencroft  called  him  back  directly,  begging  him 
not  to  wander  away.  Meanwhile,  the  sailor  attentively  observed 
the  disposition  and  nature  of  the  surrounding  country.  On 
the  left  bank,  the  ground,  which  was  flat  and  marshy,  rose 
imperceptibly  towards  the  interior.  It  looked  there  like  a net- 
work of  liquid  threads  which  doubtless  reached  the  river  by 
some  underground  drain.  Sometimes  a stream  ran  through 
the  underwood,  which  they  crossed  without  difficulty.  The 
opposite  shore  appeared  to  be  more  uneven,  and  the  valley  of 
which  the  river  occupied  the  bottom,  was  more  clearly  visible. 
The  hill,  covered  with  trees  disposed  in  terraces,  intercepted 
the  view.  On  the  right  bank  walking  would  have  been  difficult, 
for  the  declivities  fell  suddenly,  and  the  trees  bending  over  the 
water  were  only  sustained  by  the  strength  of  their  roots. 

It  is  needless  to  add  that  this  forest,  as  well  as  the  coast 
already  surveyed,  was  destitute  of  any  sign  of  human  life. 
Pencroft  only  saw  traces  of  quadrupeds,  fresh  footprints  of 
animals,  of  which  he  could  not  recognize  the  species.  In  all 
probability,  and  such  was  also  Herbert’s  opinion,  some  had 
been  left  by  formidable  wild  beasts  which  doubtless  would 
give  them  some  trouble;  but  nowhere  did  they  observe  the 
mark  of  an  axe  on  the  trees,  nor  the  ashes  of  a fire,  nor  the 
impression  of  a human  foot.  On  this  they  might  probably 
congratulate  themselves,  for  on  any  land  in  the  middle  of  the 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


69 

Pacific  the  presence  of  man  was  perhaps  more  to  be  feared 
than  desired.  Herbert  and  Pencroft  speaking  little,  for  the 
difficulties  of  the  way  were  great,  advanced  very  slowly,  and 
after  walking  for  an  hour  they  had  scarcely  gone  more  than  a 
mile.  As  yet  the  hunt  had  not  been  successful.  However, 
some  birds  sang  and  fluttered  in  the  foliage,  and  appeared 
very  timid,  as  if  man  had  inspired  them  with  an  instinctive 
fear.  Amongst  others,  Herbert  described,  in  a marshy  part 
of  the  forest,  a bird  with  a long  pointed  beak,  closely  resem- 
bling the  king-fisher,  but  its  plumage  was  not  fine,  though  of 
a metallic  brilliancy. 

“ That  must  be  a jacamar,”  said  Herbert,  trying  to  get  nearer. 

“ This  will  be  a good  opportunity  to  taste  jacamar,”  replied 
the  sailor,  “ if  that  fellow  is  in  a humor  to  be  roasted  ! ” 

Just  then,  a stone  cleverly  thrown  by  the  boy,  struck  the 
creature  on  the  wing  but  the  blow  did  not  disable  it,  and  the 
jacamar  ran  off  and  disappeared  in  an  instant. 

“ How  clumsy  lam!”  cried  Herbert. 

“ No,  no,  my  boy ! ” replied  the  sailor.  “ The  blow  was  well 
aimed;  many  a one  would  have  missed  it  altogether  ! Come, 
don’t  be  vexed  with  yourself.  We  shall  catch  it  another  day ! ” 

As  the  hunters  advanced,  the  trees  were  found  to  be  more 
scattered,  many  being  magnificent,  but  none  bore  eatable  fruit. 
Pencroft  searched  in  vain  for  some  of  those  precious  palm- 
trees  which  are  employed  in  so  many  ways  in  domestic  life, 
and  which  have  been  found  as  far  as  the  fortieth  parallel  in 
the  northern  hemisphere,  and  to  the  thirty-fifth  only  in  the 
southern  hemisphere.  But  this  forest  was  only  composed  of 
coniferse,  such  as  deodaras,  already  recognized  by  Herbert, 
the  Douglas  pine,  similar  to  those  which  grow  on  the  north- 
west coast  of  America,  and  splendid  firs,  measuring  a hun- 
dred and  fifty  feet  in  height. 

At  this  moment  a flock  of  birds,  of  a small  size  and  pretty 
plumage,  with  long  glancing  tails,  dispersed  themselves  among 
the  branches  strewing  their  feathers,  which  covered  the  ground 
as  with  fine  down.  Herbert  picked  up  a few  of  these 
feathers,  and  after  having  examined  them, — 

“ These  are  couroucous,”  said  he. 

5 


66 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


“I  should  prefer  a moor-cock  or  guinea-fowl,”  replied  P«v 
croft,  “ still,  if  they  are  good  to  eat—” 

44  They  are  good  to  eat,  and  also  their  flesh  is  very  delicate,” 
replied  Herbert.  “Besides,  if  I don’t  mistake,  it  is  easy  to 
approach  and  kill  them  with  a stick.” 

The  sailor  and  the  lad,  creeping  amongst  the  grass,  arrived 
at  the  foot  of  a tree,  whose  lower  branches  were  covered 
with  little  birds.  The  couroucou3  were  waiting  the  passage 
of  insects  which  served  for  their  nourishment.  Their  feathery 
feet  could  be  seen  clasping  the  slender  twigs  which  supported 
them. 

The  hunters  then  rose,  and  using  their  sticks  like  scythes, 
they  mowed  down  whole  rows  of  these  couroucous,  who 
never  thought  of  flying  away,  and  stupidly  allowed  them- 
selves to  be  knocked  off.  A hundred  were  already  heaped  on 
the  ground,  before  the  others  made  up  their  minds  to  fly. 

“ Well,”  said  Pencroft,  “ here  fs  game,  which  is  quite  within 
the  reach  of  hunters  like  us.  We  have  only  to  put  out  our 
hands  and  take  it ! ” 

The  sailor  having  strung  the  couroucous  like  larks  on 
flexible  twigs,  they  then  continued  their  exploration.  The 
stream  here  made  a bend  towards  the  south,  but  this  detour 
was  probably  not  prolonged,  for  the  river  must  have  its  source 
in  the  mountain,  and  be  supplied  by  the  melting  of  the  snow 
which  covered  the  sides  of  the  central  cone. 

The  particular  object  of  their  expedition  was,  as  has  been 
said,  to  procure  the  greatest  possible  quantity  of  game  for  the 
inhabitants  of  the  Chimneys,  it  must  be  acknowledged  that 
as  yet  this  object  had  not  been  attained.  So  the  sailor  actively 
pursued  his  researches,  though  he  exclaimed,  when  some 
animal  which  he  had  not  even  time  to  recognize  fled  into  the 
long  grass,  “If  only  we  had  had  the  dog  Top !”  But  Top  had 
disappeared  at  the  same  time  as  his  master,  and  had  probably 
perished  with  him. 

Towards  three  o’clock  new  flocks  of  birds  were  seen  through 
certain  trees,  at  whose  aromatic  berries  they  were  pecking, 
those  of  the  juniper-tree  among  others.  Suddenly  a loud 
trumpet  call  resounded  through  the  forest.  This  strange  and 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  OLOIEBS. 


67 


sonorous  call  was  produced  by  the  ruffled  grouse  or  the  “ tetra  ” 
of  the  United  States.  They  soon  saw  several  couples,  whose 
plumage  was  rich  chestnut  - brown  mottled  with  dark  brown, 
and  tail  of  the  same  color.  Herbert  recognized  the  males  by 
the  two  wing-like  appendages  raised  on  the  neck.  Pencroft 
determined  to  get  hold  of  at  least  one  of  these  gallinacese, 
which  were  as  large  as  a fowl,  and  whose  flesh  is  better  than 
that  of  a pullet.  But  it  was  difficult,  for  they  would  not  allow 
themselves  to  be  approached.  After  several  fruitless  attempts, 
which  resulted  in  nothing  but  scaring  the  tetras,  the  sailor 
said  to  the  lad,— 

“ Decidedly,  since  we  can’t  kill  them  on  the  wing,  we  must 
try  to  take  them  with  a line.” 

“ Like  a fish  ? ” cried  Herbert,  much  surprised  at  the  pro 
posal. 

“Like  a fish,”  replied  the  sailor  quite  seriously.  Pencroft 
had  found  amongst  the  grass  half  a dozen  tetras’  nests,  each 
having  three  or  four  eggs.  He  took  great  care  not  to  touch 
these  nests,  to  which  their  proprietors  would  not  fail  to  return. 
It  was  around  these  that  he  meant  to  stretch  his  lines,  not 
snares,  but  real  fishing-lines.  He  took  Herbert  to  some  dis- 
tance from  the  nests,  and  there  prepared  his  singular  apparatus 
with  all  the  care  which  a disciple  of  Izaak  Walton  would  have 
used.  Herbert  watched  the  work  with  great  interest,  though 
rather  doubting  its  success.  The  fines  were  made  of  fine 
creepers,  fastened  one  to  the  other,  of  the  length  of  fifteen  or 
twenty  feet.  Thick,  strong  thorns,  the  points  bent  back,  which 
were  supplied  from  a dwarf  acacia  bush,  were  fastened  to  the 
ends  of  the  creepers,  by  way  of  hooks.  Large  red  worms, 
which  were  crawling  on  the  ground,  furnished  bait. 

This  done,  Pencroft,  passing  amongst  the  grass  and  conceal- 
ing himself  skilfully,  placed  the  end  of  his  fines  armed  with 
hooks  near  the  tetras’  nests;  then  he  returned,  took  the  other 
ends  and  hid  with  Herbert  behind  a large  tree.  There  they 
both  waited  patiently;  though,  it  must  be  said,  that  Herbert 
did  not  reckon  much  on  the  success  of  the  inventive  Pencroft. 

A whole  half  - hour  passed,  but  then,  as  the  sailor  had  sur- 
mised, several  couple  of  tetras  returned  to  their  nests.  They 


68 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


walked  along,  pecking  the  ground,  and  not  suspecting  in  any 
way  the  presence  of  the  hunters,  who,  besides,  had  taken  care 
to  place  themselves  to  leeward  of  the  gallinacese. 

The  lad  felt  at  this  moment  highly  interested.  He  held  his 
breath,  and  Pencroft,  his  eyes  staring,  his  mouth  open,  his  lips 
advanced,  as  if  about  to  taste  a piece  of  tetra,  scarcely  breathed. 

Meanwhile,  the  birds  walked  about  among  the  hooks,  with- 
out taking  any  notice  of  them.  Pencroft  then  gave  little  tugs 
which  moved  the  bait  as  if  the  worms  had  been  still  alive. 

The  sailor  undoubtedly  felt  much  greater  anxiety  than  does 
the  fisherman,  for  he  does  not  see  his  prey  coming  through  the 
water.  The  jerks  attracted  the  attention  of  the  gallinacese,  and 
they  attacked  the  hooks  with  their  beaks.  Three  voracious 
tetras  swallowed  at  the  same  moment  bait  and  hook.  Sud- 
denly with  a smart  jerk,  Pencroft  “struck”  his  line,  and  a 
flapping  of  wings  showed  that  the  birds  were  taken. 

“ Hurrah  ! ” he  cried,  rushing  towards  the  game,  of  which  he 
made  himself  master  in  an  instant. 

Herbert  clapped  his  hands.  It  was  the  first  time  that  he 
had  ever  seen  birds  taken  with  a line,  but  the  sailor  modestly 
confessed  that  it  was  not  his  first  attempt,  and  that  besides 
he  could  not  claim  the  merit  of  invention. 

“And  at  any  rale,”  added  he,  “situated  as  we  are,  we  must 
hope  to  hit  upon  many  other  contrivances.” 

The  tetras  were  fastened  by  their  claws,  and  Pencroft, 
delighted  at  not  having  to  appear  before  their  companions  with 
empty  hands,  and  observing  that  the  day  had  begun  to  decline, 
judged  it  best  to  return  to  their  dwelling. 

The  direction  was  indicated  by  the  river,  whose  course  they 
had  only  to  follow,  and,  towards  six  o’clock,  tired  enough  with 
their  excursion,  Herbert  and  Pencroft  arrived  at  the  Chimneys. 


CHAPTER  VII 


NEB  HAS  NOT  YET  RETURNED  — THE  REPORTER’S  REFLECTIONS 
— SUPPER — A THREATENING  NIGHT  — THE  TEMPEST  IS 
FRIGHTFUL  — THEY  RUSH  OUT  INTO  THE  NIGHT  — STRUGGLE 
AGAINST  THE  WIND  AND  RAIN  — EIGHT  MILES  FROM  THE 
FIRST  ENCAMPMENT. 

Gideon  Spilett  was  standing  motionless  on  the  shore,  his 
arms  crossed,  gazing  over  the  sea,  the  horizon  of  which  was 
lost  towards  the  east  in  a thick  black  cloud  which  was  spread- 
ing rapidly  towards  the  zenith.  The  wind  was  already  strong, 
and  increased  with  the  decline  of  day.  The  whole  sky  was  of  a 
threatening  aspect,  and  the  first  symptoms  of  a violent  storm 
were  clearly  visible. 

Herbert  entered  the  Chimneys,  and  Pencroft  went  towards 
the  reporter.  The  latter,  deeply  absorbed,  did  not  see  him 
approach. 

“ We  are  going  to  have  a dirty  night,  Mr.  Spilett !”  said  the 
sailor  ; “ Petrels  delight  in  wind  and  rain.” 

The  reporter,  turning  at  the  moment,  saw  Pencroft,  and  his 
first  words  were,— 

“ At  what  distance  from  the  coast  would  you  say  the  car  was, 
when  the  waves  carried  off  our  companion  ? ” 

The  sailor  had  not  expected  this  question.  He  reflected  an 
instant  and  replied,— 

“Two  cables’  length  at  the  most.” 

“ But  what  is  a cable’s  length  ? ” asked  Gideon  Spilett. 

“ About  a hundred  and  twenty  fathoms,  or  600  feet.” 

“ Then,”  said  the  reporter,  “ Cyrus  Harding  must  have  dis- 
appeared twelve  hundred  feet  at  the  most  from  the  shore  ? ” 

“ About  that,”  replied  Pencroft. 

“ And  his  dog  also  ? ” 


rry 


70 


THE  LACTTOK  EDITION, 


“Also” 

“What  astonishes  me,”  rejoined  the  reporter,  “while  ad- 
mitting that  our  companion  has  perished,  is  that  Top  has  also 
met  his  death,  and  that  neither  the  body  of  the  dog  nor  of  his 
master  has  been  cast  on  the  shore !” 

“ It  is  not  astonishing,  with  such  a heavy  sea,”  replied  the 
sailor.  “ Besides,  it  is  possible  that  currents  have  carried  them 
farther  down  the  coast.”  •, 

“Then,  it  is  your  opinion  that  our  friend  has  perished  in 
the  waves  ? ” again  asked  the  reporter. 

“ That  is  my  opinion.” 

“My  own  opinion,”  said  Gideon  Spilett,  “with  due  deference 
to  your  experience,  Pencroft,  is  that  in  the  double  fact  of  the 
absolute  disappearance  of  Cyrus  and  Top,  living  or  dead,  there 
is  something  unaccountable  and  unlikely.” 

“ I wish  I could  think  like  you,  Mr.  Spilett,”  replied  Pen- 
croft; “unhappily,  my  mind  is  made  up  on  this  point.”  Having 
said  this,  the  sailor  returned  to  the  Chimneys.  A good  fire 
crackled  on  the  hearth.  Herbert  had  just  thrown  on  an  arm- 
ful of  dry  wood,  and  the  flame  cast  a bright  light  into  the 
darkest  parts  of  the  passage. 

Pencroft  immediately  began  to  prepare  the  dinner.  It  ap- 
peared best  to  introduce  something  solid  into  the  bill  of  fare, 
for  all  needed  to  get  up  theii  strength.  The  strings  of  courou- 
cous  were  kept  for  the  next  day,  but  they  plucked  a couple  of 
tetras,  which  were  soon  spitted  on  a stick,  and  roasting  before 
a blazing  fire. 

At  seven  in  the  evening  Neb  had  not  returned.  The  pro- 
longed absence  of  the  negro  made  Pencroft  very  uneasy.  It 
was  to  be  feared  that  he  had  met  with  an  accident  on  this  urn 
known  land,  or  that  the  unhappy  fellow  had  been  driven  to 
some  act  of  despair.  But  Herbert  drew  very  different  conclu- 
sions from  this  absence.  According  to  him,  Neb’s  delay  was 
caused  by  some  new  circumstance  which  had  induced  him  to 
prolong  his  search.  Also,  every  thing  new  must  be  to  the 
advantage  or  Cyrus  Harding.  Why  had  Neb  not  returned 
unless  hope  still  aetained  him?  Perhaps  he  had  found  some 
mark,  a footstep,  a trace  which  had  put  him  in  the  right  path. 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  OLOUDS. 


n 


Perhaps  he  was  at  this  moment  on  a certain  track.  Perhaps 
even  he  was  near  his  master. 

Thus  the  lad  reasoned.  Thus  he  spoke.  His  companions 
let  him  talk.  The  reporter  alone  approved  with  a gesture. 
But  what  Pencroft  thought  most  probable  was,  that  Neb  had 
pushed  his  researches  on  the  shore  farther  than  the  day 
before,  and  that  he  had  not  as  yet  had  time  to  return. 

Herbert,  however,  agitated  by  vague  presentiments,  several 
times  manifested  an  intention  to  go  to  meet  Neb.  But  Pencroft 
assured  him  that  that  would  be  a useless  course,  that  in  the 
darkness  and  deplorable  weather  he  could  not  find  any  traces 
of  Neb,  and  that  it  would  be  much  better  to  wait.  If  Neb  had 
not  made  his  appearance  by  the  next  day,  Pencroft  would 
not  hesitate  to  join  him  in  his  search. 

Gideon  Spilett  approved  of  the  sailor’s  opinion  that  it  was 
best  not  to  divide,  and  Herbert  was  obliged  to  give  up  his 
project;  but  two  large  tears  fell  from  his  eyes. 

The  reporter  could  not  refrain  from  embracing  the  generous 
boy. 

Bad  weather  now  set  in.  A furious  gale  from  the  southeast 
passed  over  the  coast.  The  sea  roared  as  it  beat  over  the 
reef.  Heavy  rain  was  dashed  up  by  the  storm  into  particles 
like  dust.  Ragged  masses  of  vapor  drove  along  the  beach, 
on  which  the  tormented  shingles  sounded  as  if  poured  out 
in  cart-loads,  while  the  sand  raised  by  the  wind  added  as  it 
were  mineral  dust  to  that  which  was  liquid,  and  rendered  the 
united  attack  insupportable.  Between  the  river’s  mouth  and 
the  end  of  the  cliff,  eddies  of  wind  whirled  and  gusts  from 
this  maelstrom  lashed  the  water  which  ran  through  the  narrow 
valley.  The  smoke  from  the  fireplace  was  also  driven  back 
through  the  opening,  filling  the  passages  and  rendering  them 
uninhabitable. 

Therefore,  as  the  tetras  were  cooked,  Pencroft  let  the  fire 
die  away,  and  only  preserved  a few  embers  buried  under  the 
ashes. 

At  eight  o’clock  Neb  had  not  appeared,  but  there  was  no 
doubt  that  the  frightful  weather  alone  hindered  his  return, 
and  that  he  must  have  taken  refuge  in  some  cave,  to  await  the 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION 


72 

end  of  the  storm  or  at  least  the  return  of  day.  As  to  going  t* 
meet  him,  or  attempting  to  find  him,  it  was  impossible. 

The  game  constituted  the  only  dish  at  supper  ; the  meat 
was  excellent,  and  Pencrof t and  Herbert,  whose  long  excursion 
had  rendered  them  very  hungry,  devoured  it  with  infinite  satis- 
faction. 

Their  meal  concluded,  each  retired  to  the  corner  in  which 
he  had  rested  the  preceding  night,  and  Herbert  was  not  long 
in  going  to  sleep  near  the  sailor,  who  had  stretched  himself 
beside  the  fireplace. 

Outside,  as  the  night  advanced,  the  tempest  also  increased  in 
strength,  until  it  was  equal  to  that  which  had  carried  the 
prisoners  from  Richmond  to  this  land  in  the  Pacific.  The 
tempests  which  are  frequent  during  the  seasons  of  the 
equinox,  and  which  are  so  prolific  in  catastrophes,  are  above  all 
terrible  over  this  immense  ocean,  which  opposes  no  obstacle 
to  their  fury.  No  description  can  give  an  idea  of  the  terrific 
violence  of  the  gale  as  it  beat  upon  the  unprotected  coast. 

Happily  the  pile  of  rocks  which  formed  the  Chimneys  was 
solid.  It  was  composed  of  enormous  blocks  of  granite,  a few 
of  which,  insecurely  balanced,  seemed  to  tremble  on  their 
foundations,  and  Pencroft  could  feel  rapid  quiverings  under 
his  head  as  it  rested  on  the  rock.  But  he  repeated  to  himself, 
and  rightly,  that  there  was  nothing  to  fear,  and  that  their 
retreat  would  not  give  way.  However  he  heard  the  noise  of 
stones  torn  from  the  summit  of  the  plateau  by  the  wind, 
falling  down  on  to  the  beach.  A few  even  rolled  on  to  the 
upper  part  of  the  Chimneys,  or  flew  off  in  fragments  when 
they  were  projected  perpendicularly.  Twice  the  sailor  rose 
and  intrenched  himself  at  the  opening  of  the  passage,  so  as 
to  take  a look  in  safety  at  the  outside.  But  there  was  nothing 
to  be  feared  from  these  showers,  which  were  not  considerable, 
and  he  returned  to  his  couch  before  the  fireplace,  where  the 
embers  glowed  beneath  the  ashes. 

Notwithstanding  the  fury  of  the  hurricane,  the  uproar  of 
the  tempest,  the  thunder,  and  the  tumult,  Herbert  slept  pro- 
foundly. Sleep  at  last  took  possession  of  Pencroft,  whom  a 
seafaring  life  had  habituated  to  any  thing.  Gideon  Spilett 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


alone  was  kept  awake  by  anxiety.  He  reproached  himself 
with  not  having  accompanied  Neb.  It  was  evident  that  he 
had  not  abandoned  all  hope.  The  presentiments  which  had 
troubled  Herbert  did  not  cease  to  agitate  him  also.  His 
thoughts  were  concentrated  on  Neb.  Why  had  not  Neb 
returned?  He  tossed  about  on  his  sandy  couch,  scarcely 
giving  a thought  to  the  struggle  of  the  elements.  Now  and 
then,  his  eyes,  heavy  with  fatigue,  closed  for  an  instant,  but 
some  sudden  thought  reopened  them  almost  immediately. 

Meanwhile  the  night  advanced,  and  it  was  perhaps  two 
hours  from  morning,  when  Pencroft,  then  sound  asleep,  was 
vigorously  shaken. 

“What’s  the  matter  ?”  he  cried,  rousing  himself,  and  collect- 
ing his  ideas  with  the  promptitude  usual  to  seamen. 

The  reporter  was  leaning  over  him,  and  saying  : 

“Listen,  Pencroft,  listen ! ” 

The  sailor  strained  his  ears,  but  could  hear  no  noise  beyond 
those  caused  by  the  storm. 

“ It  is  the  wind,”  said  he. 

“No,”  replied  Gideon  Spilett,  listening  again,  “I  thought  I 
heard—” 

“What?” 

“ The  barking  of  a dog !” 

“ A dog  ! ” cried  Pencroft,  springing  up. 

“ Yes— barking— ” 

“ It’s  not  possible  ! ” replied  the  sailor.  “ And  besides,  how, 
in  the  roaring  of  the  storm—” 

“ Stop  — listen— ” said  the  reporter. 

Pencroft  listened  more  attentively,  and  really  thought  he 
heard,  during  a lull,  distant  barking. 

“ Well ! ” said  the  reporter,  pressing  the  sailor’s  hand. 

“ Yes  — yes  ! ” replied  Pencroft. 

“ It  is  Top  ! It  is  Top ! ” cried  Herbert,  who  had  just  awoke  ; 
and  all  three  rushed  towards  the  opening  of  the  Chimneys. 
They  had  great  difficulty  in  getting  out.  The  wind  drove  them 
back.  But  at  last  they  succeeded,  and  could  only  remain 
standing  by  leaning  against  the  rocks.  They  looked  about, 
but  could  not  speak.  The  darkness  was  intense.  The  sea,  the 


74 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


sky,  the  land  were  all  mingled  in  one  black  mass.  Not  a 
speck  of  light  was  visible. 

The  reporter  and  Ills  companions  remained  thus  for  a few 
minutes,  overwhelmed  by  the  wind,  drenched  by  the  rain, 
blinded  by  the  sand.  Then,  in  a pause  of  the  tumult,  they 
again  heard  the  barking,  which  they  fouDd  must  be  at  some 
distance. 

It  could  only  be  Top  ! But  was  he  alone  or  accompanied  ? 
He  was  most  probably  alone,  for,  if  Neb  had  been  with  him,  he 
would  have  made  his  way  more  directly  to  the  Chimneys. 
The  sailor  squeezed  the  reporter’s  hand,  for  he  could  not 
make  himself  heard,  in  a way  which  signified  “ Wait ! ” then 
he  re-eniered  the  passage. 

An  instant  after  he  issued  with  a lighted  faggot,  which  he 
threw  into  the  darkness,  whistling  shrilly. 

It  appeared  as  if  this  signal  had  been  waited  for  ; the  bark- 
ing immediately  came  nearer,  and  soon  a dog  bounded  into 
the  passage.  Pencroft,  Herbert,  and  Spilett,  entered  after  him. 

An  armful  of  dry  wood  was  thrown  on  the  embers.  The 
passage  was  lighted  up  with  a bright  flame. 

“ It  is  Top  ! ” cried  Herbert. 

It  was  indeed  Top,  a magnificent  Anglo-Norman,  who 
derived  from  these  two  races  crossed  the  swiftness  of  foot 
and  the  acuteness  of  smell  which  are  the  pre-eminent  qualitioi 
of  coursing  dogs.  It  was  the  dog  of  the  engineer  Cyrus  Har 
ding.  But  he  was  alone  ! Neither  Neb  nor  his  master  accom- 
panied him ! 

How  was  it  that  his  instinct  had  guided  him  straight  to  the 
Chimneys,  which  he  did  not  know  ? It  appeared  inexplicable, 
above  all,  in  the  midst  of  this  black  night  and  in  such  a tem- 
pest ! But  what  was  still  more  inexplicable  was,  that  Top 
was  neither  tired,  nor  exhausted,  nor  even  soiled  with  mud  or 
sand  !— Herbert  had  drawn  him  towards  him,  and  was  patting 
his  head,  the  dog  rubbing  his  neck  against  the  lad’s  hands. 

“ If  the  dog  is  found,  the  master  will  be  found  also  ? ’•  said 
the  reporter. 

“ God  grant  it ! ” responded  Herbert.  46  Let  us  set  off ! Toil 
will  guide  us  ! ” 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


75 


Pencroft  did  not  make  any  objection.  He  felt  that  Top’s 
arrival  contradicted  his  conjectures.  “ Come  along  then  ! ” 
said  he. 

Pencroft  carefully  covered  the  embers  on  the  hearth.  He 
placed  a few  pieces  of  wood  amongst  them,  so  as  to  keep  in 
the  fire  until  their  return.  Then,  preceded  by  the  dog,  who 
seemed  to  invite  them  by  short  barks  to  come  with  him, 
and  followed  by  the  reporter  and  the  boy,  he  dashed  out,  after 
having  put  up  in  his  handkerchief  the  remains  of  the  supper. 

The  storm  was  then  in  all  its  violence,  and  perhaps  at  its 
height.  Not  a single  ray  of  light  from  the  moon  pierced 
through  the  clouds.  To  follow  a straight  course  was  difficult. 
It  was  best  to  rely  on  Top’s  instinct.  They  did  so.  The  reporter 
and  Herbert  walked  behind  the  dog,  and  the  sailor  brought 
up  the  rear.  It  was  impossible  to  exchange  a word.  The 
rain  was  not  very  heavy,  but  the  wind  was  terrific. 

However,  one  circumstance  favored  the  seaman  and  his  two 
companions.  The  wind  being  southeast,  consequently  blew  on 
their  backs.  The  clouds  of  sand,  which  otherwise  would  have 
been  insupportable,  from  being  received  behind,  did  not  in 
consequence  impede  their  progress.  In  short,  they  sometimes 
went  faster  than  they  liked,  and  had  some  difficulty  in  keeping 
their  feet;  but  hope  gave  them  strength,  for  it  was  not  at  ran- 
dom  that  they  made  their  way  along  the  shore.  They  had 
no  doubt  that  Neb  had  found  his  master,  and  that  he  had  sent 
them  the  faithful  dog.  But  was  the  engineer  living,  or  had 
Neb  only  sent  for  his  companions  that  they  might  render  the 
last  duties  to  the  corpse  of  the  unfortunate  Harding  ? 

After  having  passed  the  precipice,  Herbert,  the  reporter,  and 
Pencroft  prudently  stepped  aside  to  stop  and  take  breath.  The 
turn  of  the  rocks  sheltered  them  from  the  wind,  and  they 
could  breathe  after  this  walk  or  rather  run  of  a quarter  of 
an  hour. 

They  could  now  hear  and  reply  to  each  other,  and  the  lad 
having  pronounced  the  name  of  Cyrus  Harding,  Top  gave  a 
few  short  barks,  as  much  as  to  say  that  his  master  was  saved. 

“ Saved,  isn’t  he  ? ” repeated  Herbert ; “ saved,  Top  ? ” 

And  the  dog  barked  in  reply. 


16 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


They  once  more  set  out.  The  tide  began  to  rise,  and  urged 
by  the  wind  it  threatened  to  be  unusually  high,  as  it  was  a 
spring  tide.  Great  billows  thundered  against  the  reef  with 
such  violence  that  they  probably  passed  entirely  over  the 
islet,  then  quite  invisible.  The  mole  no  longer  protected  the 
coast,  which  was  directly  exposed  to  the  attacks  of  the  open 
sea. 

As  soon  as  the  sailor  and  his  companions  left  the  precipice, 
the  wind  struck  them  again  with  renewed  fury.  Though 
bent  under  the  gale  they  walked  very  quickly,  following  Top, 
who  did  not  hesitate  as  to  what  direction  to  take. 

They  ascended  towards  the  north,  having  on  their  left  an 
interminable  extent  of  billows,  which  broke  with  a deafening 
noise,  and  on  their  right  a dark  country,  the  aspect  of  which  it 
was  impossible  to  guess.  But  they  felt  that  it  was  compar- 
atively flat,  for  the  wind  passed  completely  over  them,  without 
being  driven  back  as  it  was  when  it  came  in  contact  with  the 
cliff. 

At  four  o’clock  in  the  morning,  they  reckoned  that  they 
had  cleared  about  five  miles.  The  clouds  were  slightly  raised, 
and  the  wind,  though  less  damp,  was  very  sharp  and  cold. 
Insufficiently  protected  by  their  clothing,  Pencroft,  Herbert, 
and  Spilett  suffered  cruelly,  but  not  a complaint  escaped  their 
lips.  They  were  determined  to  follow  Top,  wherever  the 
intelligent  animal  wished  to  lead  them. 

Towards  five  o’clock  day  began  to  break.  At  the  zenith, 
where  the  fog  was  less  thick,  gray  shades  bordered  the 
clouds;  under  an  opaque  belt,  a luminous  line  clearly  traced 
the  horizon.  The  crests  of  the  billows  were  tipped  with  a wild 
light,  and  the  foam  regained  its  whiteness.  At  the  same  time 
on  the  left  the  hilly  parts  of  the  coast  could  be  seen,  though 
very  indistinctly. 

At  six  o’clock  day  had  broken.  The  clouds  rapidly  lifted. 
The  seaman  and  his  companions  were  then  about  six  miles 
from  the  Chimneys.  They  were  following  a very  flat  shore 
bounded  by  a reef  of  rocks,  whose  heads  scarcely  emerged 
from  the  sea,  for  they  were  in  deep  water.  On  the  left,  the 
country  appeared  to  be  one  vast  extent  of  sandy  downs, 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


77 


bristling  with  tiistles.  There  was  no  cliff,  and  the  shore 
offered  no  resistance  to  the  ocean  but  a chain  of  irregular 
hillocks.  Here  and  there  grew  two  or  three  trees,  inclined 
towards  the  west,  their  branches  projecting  in  that  direction. 
Quite  behind,  in  the  southwest,  extended  the  border  of  the 
forest. 

At  this  moment,  Top  became  very  excited.  He  ran  forward, 
then  returned,  and  seemed  to  entreat  them  to  hasten  their 
steps.  The  dog  then  left  the  beach,  and  guided  by  his  wonder- 
ful instinct,  without  showing  the  least  hesitation,  went  straight 
in  amongst  the  downs.  They  followed  him.  The  country 
appeared  an  absolute  desert.  Not  a living  creature  was  to  be 
seen. 

The  downs,  the  extent  of  which  was  large,  were  composed 
of  hillocks  and  even  of  hills,  very  irregularly  distributed.  They 
resembled  a Switzerland  modeled  in  sand,  and  only  an  amaz^ 
ing  instinct  could  have  possibly  recognized  the  way. 

Five  minutes  after  having  left  the  beach,  the  reporter  and 
his  two  companions  arrived  at  a sort  of  excavation,  hollowed 
out  at  the  back  of  a high  mound.  There  Top  stopped,  and 
gave  a loud  clear  bark.  Spilett,  Herbert,  and  Pencroft  dashed 
into  the  cave. 

Neb  was  there,  kneeling  beside  a body  extended  on  a bed  of 
grass— 

The  body  was  that  of  the  engineer,  Cyrus  Harding. 


CHAPTER  VIII 


SB  OYRtJS  HARDING  LIVING  ? — NEB’S  RECITAL  — FOOTPRINTS  — 
AN  UNANSWERABLE  QUESTION  — CYRUS  HARDING’S  FIRST 
WORDS  — IDENTIFYING  THE  FOOTSTEPS  — RETURN  TO  THE 
CHIMNEYS  — PENCROFT  STARTLED! 

Neb  did  not  move.  Pencroft  only  uttered  one  word. 

“ Living  ? ” he  cried. 

Neb  did  not  reply.  Spilett  and  the  sailor  turned  pale.  Her- 
bert clasped  his  hands,  and  remained  motionless.  The  poor 
negro,  absorbed  in  his  grief,  evidently  had  neither  seen  his 
companions  nor  heard  the  sailor  speak. 

The  reporter  knelt  down  beside  the  motionless  body,  and 
placed  his  ear  to  the  engineer’s  chest,  having  first  torn  open 
his  clothes.  A minute  — an  age ! — passed,  during  which  he 
endeavored  to  catch  the  faintest  throb  of  the  heart. 

Neb  had  raised  himself  a little  and  gazed  without  seeing. 
Despair  had  completely  changed  his  countenance.  He  could 
scarcely  be  recognized,  exhausted  with  fatigue,  broken  with 
grief.  He  believed  his  master  was  dead. 

Gideon  Spilett  at  last  rose,  after  a long  and  attentive  examin- 
ation. 

“ He  lives  ! ” said  he. 

Pencroft  knelt  in  his  turn  beside  the  engineer,  he  also  heard 
a throbbing,  and  even  felt  a slight  breath  on  his  cheek. 

Herbert  at  a word  from  the  reporter  ran  out  to  look  for 
water.  He  found,  a hundred  feet  off,  a limpid  stream,  which 
seemed  to  have  been  greatly  increased  by  the  rains,  and  which 
filtered  through  the  sand ; but  nothing  in  which  to  put  the 
water,  not  even  a shell  amongst  the  downs.  The  lad  was 
obliged  to  content  himself  with  dipping  his  handkerchief  in 
the  stream,  and  with  it  hastened  back  to  the  grotto. 

78 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


*29 


Happily  the  wet  handkerchief  was  enough  for  Gideon  Spilett, 
who  only  wished  to  wet  the  engineer’s  lips.  The  cold  water 
produced  an  almost  immediate  effect.  His  chest  heaved  and 
he  seemed  to  try  to  speak. 

* We  will  save  him  ! ” exclaimed  the  reporter. 

At  these  words  hope  revived  in  Neb’s  heart.  He  undressed 
his  master  to  see  if  he  was  wounded,  but  not  so  much  as  a 
bruise  was  to  be  found,  either  on  the  head,  body,  or  limbs, 
which  was  surprising,  as  he  must  have  been  dashed  against 
the  rocks  ; even  the  hands  were  uninjured,  and  it  was  difficult 
to  explain  how  the  engineer  showed  no  traces  of  the  efforts 
which  he  must  have  made  to  get  out  of  reach  of  the  breakers. 

But  the  explanation  would  come  later.  When  Cyrus  was 
able  to  speak,  he  would  say  what  had  happened.  For  the 
present  the  question  was,  how  to  recall  him  to  life,  and  it 
appeared  likely  that  rubbing  would  bring  this  about ; so  they 
set  to  work  with  the  sailor’s  jersey. 

The  engineer,  revived  by  this  rude  shampooing,  moved  his 
arm  slightly,  and  began  to  breathe  more  regularly.  He  was 
sinking  from  exhaustion,  and  certainly,  had  not  the  reporter 
and  his  companions  arrived,  it  would  have  been  all  over  with 
Cyrus  Harding. 

“ You  thought  your  master  was  dead,  didn’t  you  ? ” said  the 
seaman  to  Neb. 

“ Yes ! quite  dead ! ” replied  Neb,  “ and  if  Top  had  not 
found  you,  and  brought  you  here,  I should  have  buried  my 
master,  and  then  have  lain  down  on  his  grave  to  die  ! ” 

It  had  indeed  been  a narrow  escape  for  Cyrus  Harding ! 

Ned  then  recounted  what  had  happened.  The  day  before, 
after  having  left  the  Chimneys  at  daybreak,  he  had  ascended 
the  coast  in  a northerly  direction,  and  had  reached  that  part  of 
the  shore  which  he  had  already  visited. 

There,  without  any  hope,  he  acknowledged,  Neb  had 
searched  the  beach,  among  the  rocks,  on  the  sand,  for  the 
smallest  trace  to  guide  him.  He  examined  particularly  that 
part  of  the  beach  which  was  not  covered  by  the  high  tide,  for 
near  the  sea  the  water  would  have  obliterated  all  marks.  Neb 
did  not  expect  to  find  liis  master  living.  It  was  for  a corpse 


m 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


that  he  searched,  a corpse  which  he  wished  to  bury  with  his 
own  hands ! 

He  sought  long  in  vain.  This  desert  coast  appeared  never 
to  have  been  visited  by  a human  creature.  The  shells,  those 
which  the  sea  had  not  reached,  and  which  might  be  met  with 
by  millions  above  high-water  mark,  were  untouched.  Not  a 
shell  was  broken. 

Neb  then  resolved  to  walk  along  the  beach  for  some  mileso 
It  was  possible  that  the  waves  had  carried  the  body  to  quite  a 
distant  point.  When  a corpse  floats  a little  distance  from  a 
low  shore,  it  rarely  happens  that  the  tide  does  not  throw  it  up, 
sooner  or  later.  This  Neb  knew,  and  he  wished  to  see  his 
master  again  for  the  last  time. 

“I  went  along  the  coast  for  another  two  miles,  carefully 
examining  the  beach,  both  at  high  and  low  water,  and  I had 
despaired  of  finding  any  thing,  when  yesterday,  about  five  in 
the  evening,  I saw  footprints  on  the  sand.” 

“Footprints?”  exclaimed  Pencroft. 

“Yes!”  replied  Neb. 

“ Did  these  footprints  begin  at  the  water’s  edge  ? ” asked  the 
reporter. 

“No,”  replied  Neb,  “only  above  high-water  mark,  for  the 
others  must  have  been  washed  out  by  the  tide.” 

“ Go  on,  Neb,”  said  Spilett. 

“ I went  half  crazy  when  I saw  these  footprints.  They  were 
very  clear,  and  went  towards  the  downs.  I followed  them  for 
a quarter  of  a mile,  running,  but  taking  care  not  to  destroy 
them.  Five  minutes  after,  as  it  was  getting  dark,  I heard  the 
barking  of  a dog.  It  was  Top,  and  Top  brought  me  here  to  my 
master ! ” 

Neb  ended  his  account  by  saying  what  had  been  his  grief  at 
finding  the  inanimate  body,  in  which  he  vainly  sought  for  the 
least  sign  of  life.  Now  that  he  had  found  him  dead,  he  longed 
for  him  to  be  alive ! All  his  efforts  were  useless ! Nothing 
remained  to  be  done  but  to  render  the  last  duties  to  the  one 
whom  he  had  loved  so  much ! Neb  then  thought  of  his  com- 
panions. They,  no  doubt,  would  wish  to  see  the  unfortunate 
man  again.  Top  was  there.  Could  he  not  rely  on  the  sagacity 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


81 


of  the  faithful  animal?  Neb  several  times  pronounced  the 
name  of  the  reporter,  the  one  among  his  companions  whom 
Top  knew  best.  Then  he  pointed  to  the  south,  and  the  dog 
bounded  off  in  the  direction  indicated  to  him. 

We  have  heard  how,  guided  by  an  instinct  which  might  be 
looked  upon  almost  as  supernatural,  Top  had  found  them. 

Neb’s  companions  had  listened  with  great  attention  to  this 
account. 

It  was  unaccountable  to  them  how  Cyrus  Harding,  after  the 
efforts  which  he  must  have  made  to  escape  from  the  waves  by 
crossing  the  rocks,  had  not  received  even  a scratch.  And  what 
could  not  be  explained  either,  was  how  the  engineer  had 
managed  to  get  to  this  cave  in  the  downs,  more  than  a mile 
from  the  shore. 

“ So,  Neb,”  said  the  reporter,  “ it  was  not  you  who  brought 
your  master  to  this  place.” 

“ No,  it  was  not  I,”  replied  the  negro. 

“ It’s  very  clear  that  the  captain  came  here  by  himself,”  said 
Pencroft. 

“It  is  clear  in  reality,”  observed  Spilett,  “but  it  is  not 
credible  ! ” 

The  explanation  of  this  fact  could  only  be  procured  from  the 
engineer’s  own  lips,  and  they  must  wait  for  that  till  speech 
returned.  Rubbing  had  re-established  the  circulation  of  the 
blood.  Cyrus  Harding  moved  his  arm  again,  then  his  head, 
and  a few  incomprehensible  words  escaped  him. 

Neb,  who  was  bending  over  him,  spoke,  but  the  engineer  did 
not  appear  to  hear,  and  his  eyes  remained  closed.  Life  was 
only  exhibited  in  him  by  movement,  his  senses  had  not  as  yet 
been  restored. 

Pencroft  much  regretted  not  having  either  fire,  or  the  means 
of  procuring  it,  for  he  had,  unfortunately,  forgotten  to  bring 
the  burnt  linen,  which  would  easily  have  ignited  from  the 
spark  produced  by  striking  together  two  flints.  As  to  the 
engineer’s  pockets,  they  were  entirely  empty,  except  that  of 
his  waistcoat,  which  contained  his  watch.  It  was  necessary 
to  carry  Harding  to  the  Chimneys,  and  that  as  soon  as  possible. 
'5'his  was  the  opinion  of  all. 


82 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


Meanwhile,  the  care  which  was  lavished  on  the  engineer 
brought  him  back  to  consciousness  sooner  than  they  could 
have  expected.  The  water  with  which  they  wetted  his  lips 
revived  him  gradually.  Pencroft  also  thought  of  mixing  with 
the  water  some  moisture  from  the  tetra’s  flesh  which  he 
had  brought.  Herbert  ran  to  the  beach,  and  returned  with  two 
large  bivalve  shells.  The  sailor  concocted  something  which 
he  introduced  between  the  lips  of  the  engineer,  who,  eager!* 
drinking  it,  opened  his  eyes. 

Neb  and  the  reporter  were  leaning  over  him. 

“ My  master  ! my  master ! ” cried  Neb. 

The  engineer  heard  him.  He  recognized  Neb  and  Spile*! 
then  his  other  two  companions,  and  his  hand  slightly  pressed 
theirs. 

A few  words  again  escaped  him,  which  showed  what 
thoughts  were,  even  then,  troubling  his  brain.  This  time  he 
was  understood.  Undoubtedly  they  were  the  same  words  he 
had  before  attempted  to  utter. 

“ Island  or  continent  ? ” he  murmured. 

“Bother  the  continent,”  cried  Pencroft,  hastily, “ there  is 
time  enough  to  see  about  that,  captain  ! we  don’t  care  for  any 
thing,  provided  you  are  living.” 

The  engineer  nodded  faintly,  and  then  appeared  to  sleep. 

They  respected  this  sleep,  and  the  reporter  began  immedi- 
ately to  make  arrangements  for  transporting  Harding  to  a 
more  comfortable  place.  Neb,  Herbert,  and  Pencroft  left  the 
cave  and  directed  their  steps  towards  a high  mound  crowned 
with  a few  distorted  trees.  On  the  way  the  sailor  could  not 
help  repeating— 

“ Island  or  continent ! To  think  of  that  when  at  one’s  last 
gasp ! What  a man  ! ” 

Arrived  at  the  summit  of  the  mound,  Pencroft  and  his  two 
companions  set  to  work,  with  no  other  tools  than  their  hands, 
to  despoil  of  its  principal  branches  a rather  sickly  tree,  a sort 
of  marine  fir;  with  these  branches  they  made  a litter,  on  which, 
covered  with  grass  and  leaves,  they  could  carry  the  engineer. 
This  occupied  them  nearly  forty  minutes,  and  it  was  ten  o’clock 
when  they  returned  to  Cyrus  Harding,  whom  Spilett  had  not  left. 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


as 


The  engineer  was  just  awaking  from  the  sleep,  or  rather 
from  the  drowsiness,  in  which  they  had  found  him.  The  color 
was  returning  to  his  cheeks,  which  till  now  had  been  as  pale 
as  death.  He  raised  himself  a little,  looked  around  him,  and 
appeared  to  ask  where  he  was. 

“ Can  you  listen  to  me  without  fatigue,  Cyrus?”  asked  the 
reporter. 

“Yes,”  replied  the  engineer. 

“ It's  my  opinion,”  said  the  sailor,  “ that  Captain  Harding  will 
be  able  to  listen  to  you  still  better  if  he  will  have  some  more 
tetra  jelly— for  we  have  tetras,  captain,”  added  he,  presenting 
him  with  a little  of  this  jelly,  to  which  he  this  time  added 
some  of  the  flesh. 

Cyrus  Harding  ate  a little  of  the  tetra,  and  the  rest  was 
divided  among  his  companions,  who  found  it  but  a meagre 
breakfast,  for  they  were  suffering  extremely  from  hunger. 

“ Well !”  said  the  sailor,  “there  is  plenty  of  food  at  the  Chim- 
neys, for  you  must  know,  captain,  that  down  there,  in  the 
south,  we  have  a house,  with  rooms,  beds,  and  fireplace,  and 
in  the  pantry,  several  dozen  of  birds,  which  our  Herbert  call3 
couroucous.  Your  fitter  is  ready,  and  as  soon  as  you  feel 
strong  enough  we  will  carry  you  home.” 

“Thanks,  my  friend,”  replied  the  engineer;' “wait  another 
hour  or  two,  and  then  we  will  set  out.  And  now  speak, 
Spilett.” 

The  reporter  then  told  him  all  that  had  occurred.  He 
recounted  all  the  events  with  which  Cyrus  was  unacquainted, 
the  last  fall  of  the  balloon,  the  landing  on  this  unknown  land, 
which  appeared  a desert  (whatever  it  was,  whether  island  or 
continent),  the  discovery  of  the  Chimneys,  the  search  for  him, 
not  forgetting,  of  course,  Neb’s  devotion,  the  intelligence 
exhibited  by  the  faithful  Top,  as  well  as  many  other  matters. 

“But,”  asked  Harding,  in  a still  feeble  voice,  “you  did  not 
then  pick  me  up  on  the  beach  ? ” 

“No,”  replied  the  reporter. 

“And  did  you  not  bring  me  to  this  cave  ?” 

“No.” 

“ At  what  distance  is  this  cave  from  the  sea?  ” 


84 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION/. 


“ About  a mile,”  replied  Pencrof  t ; “ and  if  you  are  aston- 
ished, captain,  we  are  not  less  surprised  ourselves  at  seeing  you 
in  this  place  ! ” 

“ Indeed,”  said  the  engineer,  who  was  recovering  gradually, 
and  who  took  great  interest  in  these  details,  “ indeed  it  is  very 
singular ! ” 

“But,”  resumed  the  sailor,  “can  you  tell  us  what  happened 
after  you  were  carried  off  by  the  sea  ? ” 

Cyrus  Harding  considered.  He  knew  very  little.  The  waves 
had  torn  him  from  the  balloon  net.  He  sank  at  first  several 
fathoms.  On  returning  to  the  surface,  in  the  half  light,  he  felt 
a living  creature  struggling  near  him.  It  was  Top,  who  had 
sprung  to  his  help.  He  saw  nothing  of  the  balloon,  which, 
lightened  both  of  his  weight  and  that  of  the  dog,  had  darted 
away  like  an  arrow. 

There  he  was,  in  the  midst  of  the  angry  sea,  at  a distance 
which  could  not  be  less  than  half  a mile  from  the  shore.  He 
attempted  to  struggle  against  the  billows  by  swimming  vigor- 
ously. Top  held  him  up  by  his  clothes  ; but  a strong  current 
seized  him  and  drove  him  towards  the  north,  and  after  half 
an  hour  of  exertion,  he  sank,  dragging  Top  with  him  into  the 
depths.  From  that  moment  to,  the  moment  in  which  he 
recovered  to  find  himself  in  the  arms  of  his  friends  he 
remembered  nothing. 

“However,”  remarked  Pencroft,  “you  must  have  been 
thrown  on  to  the  beach,  and  you  must  have  had  strength  to 
walk  here,  since  Neb  found  your  footmarks ! ” 

“Yes  . . . of  course  . . . ” replied  the  engineer,  thoughtfully*, 
“ and  you  found  no  traces  of  human  beings  on  this  coast  ? ” 

“Not  a trace,”  replied  the  reporter;  “besides,  if  by  chance 
you  had  met  with  some  deliverer  there,  just  in  the  nick  of  time, 
why  should  he  have  abandoned  you  after  having  saved  you 
from  the  waves  ? ” 

“ You  are  right,  my  dear  Spilett.  Tell  me,  Neb,”  added  the 
engineer,  turning  to  his  servant,  “it  was  not  you  who  . . . 
you  can’t  have  had  a moment  of  unconsciousness  . . . dur- 
ing which  ...  no,  that’s  absurd  ....  Do  any  of  the  foot- 
steps still  remain  ? ” asked  Harding. 


DROPFB&  IftHDM  THE  CLOUDS. 


“ Yes,  master,”  replied  Web;  “here,  at  the  entrance,  at  the 
back  of  the  mound,  in  a place  sheltered  from  the  rain  and 
wind.  The  storm  has  destroyed  the  others.” 

“ Pencroft,”  said  Cyrus  Harding,  “ will  you  take  my  shoe  and 
see  if  it  fits  exactly  to  the  footprints  ? ” 

The  sailor  did  as  the  engineer  requested.  Whilst  he  and 
Herbert,  guided  by  Neb,  went  to  the  place  where  the  foot- 
prints were  to  be  found,  Cyrus  remarked  to  the  reporter,— 

“ It  is  a most  extraordinary  thing  ! ” 

“Perfectly  inexplicable ! ” replied  Gideon  Spilett. 

M But  do  not  dwell  upon  it  just  now,  my  dear  Spilett,  we  will 
talk  about  it  by-and-by.” 

A moment  after  the  others  entered. 

There  was  no  doubt  about  it.  The  engineer’s  shoe  fitted 
exactly  to  the  footmarks.  It  was  therefore  Cyrus  Harding  who 
had  left  them  on  the  sand. 

“ Come,”  said  he,  “ l must  have  experienced  this  unconscious- 
ness which  I attributed  to  Neb.  I must  have  walked  like  a 
somnambulist,  without  any  knowledge  of  my  steps,  and  Top 
must  have  guided  me  here,  after  having  dragged  me  from 
the  waves  . . . Come,  Top  ! Come,  old  dog  ! ” 

The  magnificent  animal  bounded  barking  to  his  master,  and 
caresses  were  lavished  on  him.  It  was  agreed  that  there  was 
no  other  way  of  accounting  for  the  rescue  of  Cyrus  Harding, 
and  that  Top  deserved  all  the  honor  of  the  affair. 

Towards  twelve  o’clock,  Pencroft  having  asked  the  engineer 
if  they  could  now  remove  him,  Harding,  instead  of  replying, 
and  by  an  effort  which  exhibited  the  most  energetic  will,  got 
up.  But  he  was  obliged  to  lean  on  the  sailor,  or  he  would  have 
fallen. 

“ Well  done  !”  said  Pencroft ; “ bring  the  captain’s  litter.” 
The  litter  was  brought ; the  transverse  branches  had  been 
covered  with  leaves  and  long  grass.  Harding  was  laid  on  it, 
and  Pencroft,  having  taken  his  place  at  one  end  and  Neb  at  the 
other,  they  started  towards  the  coast.  There  was  a distance  of 
eight  miles  to  be  accomplished ; but,  as  they  could  not  go  fast, 
and  it  would  perhaps  be  necessary  to  stop  frequently,  they 
reckoned  that  it  would  take  at  least  six  hours  to  reach  the 


80 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


Chimneys.  The  wind  was  still  strong,  but  fortunately  it  did 
not  rain.  Although  lying  down,  the  engineer,  leaning  on 
his  elbow,  observed  the  coast,  particularly  inland.  He  did  not 
speak,  but  he  gazed ; and  no  doubt,  the  appearance  of  the 
country,  with  its  inequalities  of  ground,  its  forests,  its  various 
productions,  were  impressed  on  his  mind.  However,  after 
traveling  for  two  hours,  fatigue  overcame  him,  and  he  slept. 

At  half-past  five  the  little  band  arrived  at  the  precipice,  and 
a short  time  after  at  the  Chimneys. 

They  stopped,  and  the  litter  was  placed  on  the  sand;  Cyrus 
Harding  was  sleeping  profoundly,  and  did  not  awake. 

Pencroft,  to  his  extreme  surprise,  found  that  the  terrible 
storm  had  quite  altered  the  aspect  of  the  place.  Important 
changes  had  occurred;  great  blocks  of  stone  lay  on  the  beach, 
which  was  also  covered  with  a thick  carpet  of  sea-weed,  algae, 
and  wrack.  Evidently  the  sea,  passing  over  the  islet,  had  been 
carried  right  up  to  the  foot  of  the  enormous  curtain  of  granite. 
The  soil  in  front  of  the  cave  had  been  torn  away  by  the  violence 
of  the  waves.  A horrid  presentiment  flashed  across  Pencroft’s 
mind.  He  rushed  into  the  passage,  but  returned  almost  im- 
mediately, and  stood  motionless,  staring  at  his  companions.  . . 
The  fire  was  out;  the  drowned  cinders  were  nothing  but  mud; 
the  burnt  linen,  which  was  to  have  served  as  tinder,  had  dis- 
appeared ! The  sea  had  penetrated  to  the  end  of  the  passages, 
and  every  thing  was  overthrown  and  destroyed  in  the  interior 
of  the  Chimneys ! 


CHAPTER  IX 


CIBUS  IS  here— pencroft’s  attempts— rubbing  wood— islanb 

OR  CONTINENT— THE  ENGINEER’S  PROJECTS— IN  WHAT  PART 
OF  THE  PACIFIC  OCEAN— IN  THE  MIDST  OF  THE  FORESTS— 
THE  STONE  >INE— CHASING  A CAPYBARA  — AN  AUSPICIOUS 
SMOKE. 

In  a few  words,  Gideon  Spilett,  Herbert,  and  Neb  were  made 
acquainted  with  what  had  happened.  This  accident,  which 
appeared  so  very  serious  to  Pencroft,  produced  different  effects 
on  the  companions  of  the  honest  sailor. 

Neb,  in  his  delight  at  having  found  his  master,  did  not  listen, 
or  rather,  did  not  care  to  trouble  himself  with  what  Pencroft 
was  saying. 

Herbert  shared  in  some  degree  the  sailor’s  feelings. 

As  to  the  reporter,  he  simply  replied,— 

“ Upon  my  word,  Pencroft,  it’s  perfectly  indifferent  to  me !” 
“But,  I repeat,  that  we  haven’t  any  tire !” 

“Pooh!” 

“ Nor  any  means  of  relighting  it  I ” 

“ Nonsense ! ” 

“But  I say,  Mr.  Spilett—” 

“ Isn’t  Cyrus  here  ? ” replied  the  reporter. 

“Is  not  our  engineer  alive  ? He  will  soon  find  some  way  of 
making  fire  for  us ! ” 

“ With  what  ? ” 

“With  nothing.” 

What  had  Pencroft  to  say  ? He  could  say  nothing,  for  in  the 
bottom  of  his  heart  he  shared  the  confidence  which  his  com- 
panions had  in  Cyrus  Harding.  The  engineer  was  to  them  a 
microcosm,  a compound  of  every  science,  a possessor  of  all 
human  knowledge.  It  was  better  to  be  with  Cyrus  in  a desert 

87 


88 


THE  LAKESHv^  fc«nON. 


island,  than  without  him  in  tho  tJourishing  town  in  the 
United  States.  With  him  they  couM  Want  nothing;  with  him 
they  would  never  despair.  If  these  brave  men  had  been  told 
that  a volcanic  eruption  would  destroy  the  land,  that  this  land 
would  be  engulfed  in  the  depths*  the  Pacific,  they  would 
have  imperturbably  replied,— 

“ Cyrus  is  here  ! ” 

While  in  the  palanquin,  however,  the  engineer  had  again 
relapsed  into  unconsciousnes,  which  the  jolting  to  which  he 
had  been  subjected  during  his  journey  had  brought  on,  so 
that  they  could  not  now  appeal  to  his  ingenuity.  The  supper 
must  necessarily  be  very  meagre.  In  fact,  all  the  tetra’s  flesh 
had  been  consumed,  and  there  no  longer  existed  any  means 
of  cooking  more  game.  Besides,  the  couroucous  which  had 
been  reserved  had  disappeared.  They  must  consider  what  was 
to  be  done. 

First  of  all,  Cyrus  Harding  was  carried  into  the  central  pass- 
age. There  they  managed  to  arrange  for  him  a couch  of  sea- 
weed which  still  remained  almost  dry.  The  deep  sleep  which 
had  overpowered  him  would  no  doubt  be  more  beneficial  to 
him  than  any  nourishment. 

Night  had  closed  in,  and  the  temperature,  which  had  modified 
when  the  wind  shifted  to  the  northwest,  again  became  ex- 
tremely cold.  Also,  the  sea  having  destroyed  the  partitions 
which  Pencroft  had  put  up  in  certain  places  in  the  passages, 
the  Chimneys,  on  account  of  the  draughts,  had  become  scarcely 
habitable.  The  engineer’s  condition,  would,  therefore,  have 
been  bad  enough,  if  his  companions  had  not  carefully  covered 
h'm  with  their  coats  and  waistcoats. 

Supper,  this  evening,  was  of  course  composed  of  the  inevi- 
table lithodomes,  of  which  Herbert  and  Neb  picked  up  a 
plentiful  supply  on  the  beach.  However,  to  these  moluscs,  the 
lad  added  some  edible  sea- weed,  which  he  gathered  on  high 
rocks,  whose  sides  were  only  washed  by  the  sea  at  the  time  of 
high  tides.  This  sea-weed,  which  belongs  to  the  order  of 
Sucacse,  of  the  genus  Sargussum,  produces,  when  dry,  a 
gelatinous  matter,  rich  and  nutritious.  The  reporter  and  his 
companions,  after  having  eateai  a quantity  of  lithodomes, 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


sucked  the  sargussum,  of  which  the  taste  was  very  tolerable. 
It  is  used  in  parts  of  the  East  very  considerably  by  the  natives. 
“ Never  mind  ! ” said  the  sailor,  '‘the  captain  will  help  us  soon.” 
Meanwhile  the  cold  became  very  severe,  and  unhappily  they 
had  no  means  of  defending  themselves  from  it. 

The  sailor,  extremely  vexed,  tried  in  all  sorts  of  ways  to  pro- 
cure a fire.  Neb  helped  him  do  this  work.  He  found  some 
dry  moss,  and  by  striking  together  two  pebbles  he  obtained 
some  sparks,  but  the  moss,  not  being  inflammable  enough,  did 
not  take  fire,  for  the  sparks  were  really  only  Incandescent,  and 
not  at  all  of  the  same  consistency  as  those  which  are  emitted 
from  flint  when  struck  in  the  same  manner.  The  experiment, 
therefore,  did  not  succeed. 

'Pencroft,  although  he  had  no  confidence  In  the  proceeding, 
then  tried  rubbing  two  pieces  of  dry  wood  together,  as  savages 
do.  Certainly,  the  movement  which  he  and  Neb  gave  them- 
selves, if  they  had  been  transformed  into  heat,  according  to  the 
new  theory,  would  have  been  enough  to  heat  the  boiler  of  a 
steamer  ! It  came  to  nothing.  The  bits  of  wood  became  hot, 
to  be  sure,  but  much  less  so  than  the  operators  themselves. 

After  working  an  hour,  Pencroft,  who  was  in  a complete 
state  of  perspiration,  threw  down  the  pieces  of  wood  in  disgust. 

“ I can  never  be  made  to  believe  that  savages  light  their  fires 
in  this  way,  let  them  say  what  they  will,”  he  exclaimed.  “ I 
could  sooner  light  my  arms  by  rubbing  them  against  each 
other ! ” 

The  sailor  was  wrong  to  despise  the  proceeding.  Savages 
often  kindle  wood  by  means  of  rapid  rubbing.  But  every  sort 
of  wood  does  not  answer  for  the  purpose,  and  besides,  there  is 
“ the  knack,”  following  the  usual  expression,  and  it  is  probable 
that  Pencroft  had  not  “ the  knack.” 

Pencroft’s  ill  humor  did  not  last  long.  Herbert  had  taken 
the  bits  of  wood  which  he  had  thrown  down,  and  was  exerting 
himself  to  rub  them.  The  hardy  sailor  could  not  restrain  a 
burst  of  laughter  on  seeing  the  efforts  of  the  lad  to  succeed 
where  he  had  failed. 

“Rub,  my  boy,  rub !”  said  he. 

“I  am  rubbing,”  replied  Herbert,  laughing,  “but  I don’t 


90 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


pretend  to  do  any  thing  else  but  warm  myself  instead  of 
shivering,  and  soon  I shall  be  as  hot  as  you  are,  my  good  Pea* 
croft ! ” 

This  soon  happened.  However,  they  were  obliged  to  give  it 
up,  for  this  night  at  least,  the  attempt  to  procure  fire.  Gideon 
Spilett  repeated,  for  the  twentieth  time,  that  Cyrus  Harding 
would  not  have  been  troubled  for  so  small  a difficulty.  And, 
in  the  meantime,  he  stretched  himself  in  one  of  the  passages  on 
his  bed  of  sand.  Herbert,  Neb,  and  Pencroft  did  the  same, 
whilst  Top  slept  at  his  master’s  feet. 

Next  day,  the  28th  of  March,  when  the  engineer  awoke, 
about  eight  in  the  morning,  he  saw  his  companions  around 
him  watching  his  sleep,  and,  as  on  the  day  before,  his  first 
Words  were : 

“ Island  or  continent  ? ” 

This  was  his  uppermost  thought. 

“ Well ! ” replied  Pencroft,  “ we  don’t  know  any  thing  about 
it,  captain ! ” 

“ You  don’t  know  yet?  ” 

“But  we  shall  know,” rejoined  Pencroft,  “when  you  have 
guided  us  into  the  country.” 

“ I think  I am  able  to  try  it,”  replied  the  engineer,  who,  with- 
out much  effort,  rose  and  stood  upright. 

EL  “ That’s  capital ! ” cried  the  sailor. 

“I  feel  dreadfully  weak,”  replied  Harding.  “Give  me  some- 
thing to  eat,  my  friends,  and  it  will  soon  go  off.  You  have  fire, 
haven’t  you  ? ” 

This  question  was  not  immediately  replied  to.  But,  in  a few 
seconds, 

“ Alas ! we  have  no  fire,”  said  Pencroft,  “ or  rather,  captain, 
we  have  it  no  longer !” 

And  the  sailor  recounted  all  that  had  passed  the  day  before. 
He  amused  the  engineer  by  the  history  of  the  single  match, 
then  his  abortive  attempt  to  procure  fire  in  the  savage’s  way. 

“We  shall  consider,”  replied  the  engineer, “and  if  we  do  not 
find  some  substance  similar  to  tinder  — ” 

“ Well  ? ” asked  the  sailor. 

“ Well,  we  will  make  matches.” 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDR, 


91 

**  Chemicals  ?” 

“Chemicals ! ” 

“ It  is  not  more  difficult  than  that* w cried  the  reporter,  strik- 
ing the  sailor  on  the  shoulder. 

The  latter  did  not  think  it  so  simple,  but  he  did  not  protest, 
All  went  out.  The  weather  had  become  very  fine.  The  sun 
was  rising  from  the  sea’s  horizon,  and  touched  with  golden 
spangles  the  prismatic  rugosities  of  the  huge  precipice. 

Having  thrown  a rapid  glance  around  him,  the  engineer 
seated  himself  on  a block  of  stone.  Herbert  offered  him  a few 
handfuls  of  shell-fish  and  sargussum,  saying,— 

“ It  is  all  that  we  have,  Captain  Harding.” 

“ Thanks,  my  boy,”  replied  Harding  ; “ it  will  do  — for  this 
morning  at  least.” 

He  ate  the  wretched  food  with  appetite,  and  washed  it  down 
with  a little  fresh  water,  drawn  from  the  river  in  an  immense 
shell.  His  companions  looked  at  him  without  speaking.  Then, 
feeling  somewhat  refreshed,  Cyrus  Harding  crossed  his  arms, 
and  said,— 

“ So,  my  friends,  you  do  not  know  yet  whether  fate  has 
thrown  us  on  an  island,  or  on  a continent  ? ” 

“ No,  captain,”  replied  the  boy. 

“ We  shall  know  to-morrow,”  said  the  engineer  ; “ till  then, 
there  is  nothing  to  be  done.” 

“ Yes,”  replied  Pencroft. 

“What?” 

“ Fire,”  said  the  sailor,  who,  also,  had  a fixed  idea. 

“ We  will  make  it,  Pencroft,”  replied  Harding. 

“ Whilst  you  were  carrying  me  yesterday,  did  I not  see  in 
the  west  a mountain  which  commands  the  country  ? ” 

“ Yes,”  replied  Spilett,  “ a mountain  which  must  be  rather 
high—” 

“Well,”  replied  the  engineer,  “we  will  climb  to  the  summit 
to-morrow,  and  then  we  shall  see  if  this  land  is  an  island  or  a 
continent.  Till  then,  I repeat,  there  is  nothing  to  be  done.” 

“ Yes,  fire  ! ” said  the  obstinate  sailor  again. 

“ But  he  will  make  us  a fire  ! ” replied  Gideon  Spilett,  “ only 
have  a little  patience,  Pencroft ! ” 


92 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


The  seaman  looked  at  Spilett  in  a way  which  seemed  t« 
say,  “ If  it  depended  upon  you  to  do  it,  we  wouldn’t  taste  roast 
meat  very  soon;”  but  he  was  silent. 

Meanwhile  Captain  Harding  had  made  no  reply.  He  ap- 
peared to  be  very  little  troubled  by  the  question  of  fire.  For  a 
few  minutes  he  remained  absorbed  in  thought;  then  again 
speaking,— 

“ My  friends,”  said  he,  “ our  situation  is,  perhaps,  deplorable  ; 
but,  at  any  rate,  it  is  very  plain.  Either  we  are  on  a continent, 
and  then,  at  the  expense  of  greater  or  less  fatigue,  we  shall 
reach  some  inhabited  place,  or  we  are  on  an  island.  In  the 
latter  case,  if  the  island  is  inhabited,  we  will  try  to  get  out  of 
the  scrape  with  the  help  of  its  inhabitants;  if  it  is  desert,  we 
will  try  to  get  out  of  the  scrape  by  ourselves.” 

“ Certainly,  nothing  could  be  plainer,”  replied  Pencroft. 

“ But,  whether  it  is  an  island  or  a continent,”  asked  Gideon 
Spilett,  “whereabouts  do  you  think,  Cyrus,  this  storm  has 
thrown  us  ? ” 

“ I can  not  say  exactly,”  replied  the  engineer,  “ but  I presume 
it  is  some  land  in  the  Pacific.  In  fact,  when  we  left  Richmond, 
the  wind  was  blowing  from  the  northeast,  and  its  very  violence 
greatly  proves  that  it  could  not  have  varied.  If  the  direction 
has  been  maintained  from  the  northeast  to  the  southwest,  we 
have  traversed  the  States  of  North  Carolina,  of  South  Carolina, 
of  Georgia,  the  Gulf  of  Mexico,  Mexico  itself,  in  its  narrow 
part,  then  a part  of  the  Pacific  Ocean.  I can  not  estimate  the 
distance  traversed  by  the  balloon  at  less  than  six  to  seven 
thousand  miles,  and,  even  supposing  that  the  wind  had  varied 
half  a quarter,  it  must  have  brought  us  either  to  the  archi- 
pelago of  Mendava,  either  on  the  Pomotous,  or  even,  if  it  had 
a greater  strength  than  I suppose,  to  the  land  of  New  Zealand. 
If  the  last  hypothesis  is  correct,  it  will  be  easy  enough  to  get 
home  again.  English  or  Maoris,  we  shall  always  find  some  one 
to  whom  we  can  speak.  If,  on  the  contrary,  this  is  the  coast  of 
a desert  island  in  some  tiny  archipelago,  perhaps  we  shall  be 
able  to  reconnoiter  it  from  the  summit  of  that  peak  which 
overlooks  the  country,  and  then  we  shall  see  how  best  to  estab- 
lish ourselves  here  as  if  we  are  never  to  go  away,” 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


13 


“Never  ?”  cried  the  reporter*  “You  say  ‘Never,’  my  dear 
Dyrus?” 

“ Better  to  put  things  at  the  worst  at  first,”  replied  the 
engineer,  “ and  rese  rve  the  best  for  a surprise.” 

“Well  said,”  remarked  Pencroft.  “It  is  to  be  hoped,  too, 
that  this  island,  if  it  be  one,  is  not  situated  just  out  of  the 
course  of  ships;  that  would  be  really  unlucky !” 

“ We  shall  not  know  what  we  have  to  rely  on  until  we  have 
first  made  the  ascent  of  the  mountain,”  replied  the  engineer. 

“ But  to-morrow,  captain,”  asked  Herbert,  “ shall  you  be  in  a 
state  to  bear  the  fatigue  of  the  ascent  ? ” 

“I  hope  so,”  replied  the  engineer,  “provided  you  and  Pen- 
croft, my  boy,  show  yourselves  quick  and  clever  hunters.” 

“ Captain,”  said  the  sailor,  “ since  you  are  speaking  of  game, 
if,  on  my  return,  I was  as  certain  of  being  able  to  roast  it  as 
I am  of  bringing  it  back  —” 

“ Bring  it  back  all  the  same,  Pencroft,”  replied  Harding. 

It  was  then  agreed  that  the  engineer  and  the  reporter  were 
to  pass  the  day  at  the  Chimneys,  so  as  to  examine  the  shore  and 
the  upper  plateau.  Neb,  Herbert,  and  the  sailor,  were  to  return 
to  the  forest,  renew  their  store  of  wood,  and  lay  violent  hands 
on  every  creature,  feathered  or  hairy,  which  might  come  within 
their  reach. 

They  set  out  accordingly  about  ten  o’clock  in  the  morning, 
Herbert  confident,  Neb  joyous,  Pencroft  murmuring  aside,— 

“ If,  on  my  return,  I find  a fire  at  the  house,  I shall  believe 
fliat  the  thunder  itself  came  to  light  it.”  All  three  climbed  the 
bank;  and  arrived  at  the  angle  made  by  the  river,  the  sailor, 
stopping  said  to  his  two  companions,— 

“ Shall  we  begin  by  being  hunters  or  woodmen  ? ” 
“Hunters,”  replied  Herbert.  “There  is  Top  already  in 
quest.” 

“ We  will  hunt,  then,”  said  the  sailor,  “ and  afterwards  we 
can  come  back  and  collect  our  wood.” 

This  agreed  to,  Herbert,  Neb,  and  Pencroft,  after  having  torn 
three  sticks  from  the  trunk  of  a young  fir,  followed  Top,  who 
was  bounding  about  amongst  the  long  grass. 

This  time,  the  hunters,  instead  of  following  the  course  of 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


the  river,  plunged  straight  into  the  heart  of  the  forest.  There 
were  still  the  same  trees,  belonging,  for  the  most  part,  to  the 
pine  family.  In  certain  places,  less  crowded,  growing  in 
clumps,  these  pines  exhibited  considerable  dimensions,  and 
appeared  to  indicate,  by  their  development,  that  the  country 
was  situated  in  a higher  latitude  than  the  engineer  had  sup- 
posed. Glades,  bristling  with  stumps  worn  away  by  time, 
were  covered  with  dry  wood,  which  formed  an  inexhaustible 
store  of  fuel.  Then,  the  glade  passed,  the  underwood  thickened 
again,  and  became  almost  impenetrable. 

It  was  difficult  enough  to  find  the  way  amongst  the  groups 
of  trees,  without  any  beaten  track.  So  the  sailor  from  time  to 
time  broke  off  branches  which  might  be  easily  recognized. 
But,  perhaps,  he  was  wrong  not  to  follow  the  watercourse,  as 
he  and  Herbert  had  done  bn  their  first  excursion,  for  after 
walking  an  hour  not  a creature  had  shown  itself.  Top,  run- 
ning under  the  branches,  only  roused  birds  which  could  not  be 
approached.  Even  the  couroucous  were  invisible,  and  it  was 
probable  that  the  sailor  would  be  obliged  to  return  to  the 
marshy  part  of  the  forest,  in  which  he  had  so  happily  per- 
formed his  tetra  fishing. 

“ Well,  Pencroft,”  said  Neb,  in  a slightly  sarcastic  tone,  “ if 
this  is  all  the  game  which  you  promised  to  bring  back  to  my 
master,  it  won’t  need  a large  fire  to  roast  it ! ” 

“ Have  patience,”  replied  the  sailor,  “ it  isn’t  the  game  which 
will  be  wanting  on  our  return.” 

“ Have  youjiot  confidence  in  Captain  Harding  ? ” 

« Yes  ” 

“ But  you  don’t  believe  that  he  will  make  fire ! ” 

“ I shall  believe  it  when  the  wood  is  blazing  in  the  fireplace*” 
“It  will  blaze,  since  my  master  has  said  so.” 

“We  shall  see!” 

Meanwhile,  the  sun  had  not  reached  the  highest  point  in  its 
course  above  the  horizon.  The  exploration,  therefore,  con- 
tinued, and  was  usefully  marked  by  a discovery  which  Herbert 
made  of  a tree  whose  fruit  was  edible.  This  was  the  stone- 
pine,  which  produces  an  excellent  almond,  very  much  esteemed 
in  the  temperate  regions  of  America  and  Europe.  These 


DROPPED  FROM  XHE  CLOUDS. 


95 


almonds  were  in  a perfect  state  of  maturity,  and  Herbert 
described  them  to  his  companions,  who  feasted  on  them. 

“ Come,”  said  Pencroft,  “sea- weed  by  way  of  bread,  raw 
mussels  for  meat,  and  almonds  for  dessert,  that’s  certainly  a 
good  dinner  for  those  who  have  not  a single  match  in  their 
pocket ! ” 

“We  mustn’t  complain,”  said  Herbert. 

“lain  not  complaining,  my  boy,”  replied  Pencroft,  “only  I 
repeat,  that  meat  is  a little  too  much  economized  in  this  sort  of 
meal.” 

“Top  has  found  something!”  cried  Neb,  who  ran  towards 
a thicket,  in  the  midst  of  which  the  dog  had  disappeared, 
barking.  With  Top’s  barking  were  mingled  curious  grunt- 
ings. 

The  sailor  and  Herbert  had  followed  Neb.  If  there  was 
game  there  this  was  not  the  time  to  discuss  how  it  was  to  be 
cooked,  but  rather,  how  they  were  to  get  hold  of  it. 

The  hunters  had  scarcely  entered  the  bushes  when  they  saw 
Top  engaged  in  a struggle  with  an  animal  which  he  was  hold- 
ing by  the  ear.  This  quadruped  was  a sort  of  pig  nearly  two 
feet  and  a long,  of  a blackish  brown  color,  lighter  below, 
having  hard  scanty  hair ; its  toes,  then  strongly  fixed  in  the 
ground,  seemed  to  be  united  by  a membrane.  Herbert  recog- 
nized in  this  animal  the  capybara,  that  is  to  say,  one  of  the 
largest  members  of  the  rodent  order. 

Meanwhile,  the  capybara  did  not  struggle  against  the  dog. 
It  stupidly  rolled  its  eyes,  deeply  buried  in  a thick  bed  of  fat. 
Perhaps  it  saw  men  for  the  first  time. 

. However,  Neb  having  tightened  his  grasp  on  his  stick,  was 
just  going  to  fell  the  pig,  when  the  latter,  tearing  itself  from 
Top’s  teeth,  by  which  it  was  only  held  by  the  tip  of  its  ear, 
uttered  a vigorous  grunt,  rushed  upon  Herbert,  almost  over- 
threw him,  and  disappeared  in  the  wood. 

“The  rascal ! ” cried  Pencroft, 

. All  three  directly  darted  after  Top,  but  at  the  moment  when 
they  joined  him  the  animal  had  disappeared  under  the  waters 
of  a large  pond  shaded  by  venerable  pines. 

Neb,  Herbert,  and  Pencroft  stopped,  motionless.  Top 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


plunged  into  the  water,  but  the  capybara,  hidden  at  the  bottom 
of  the  pond,  did  not  appear. 

“ Let  us  wait,”  said  the  boy,  “ for  he  will  soon  come  to  the 
surface  to  breathe.” 

“Won’t  he  drown?”  asked  Neb. 

“No,”  replied  Herbert,  “since  he  has  webbed  feet,  and  is 
almost  an  amphibious  animal.  But  watch  him.” 

Top  remained  in  the  water.  Bencroft  and  his  two  com- 
panions  went  to  different  parts  of  the  bank,  so  as  to  cut  off 
the  retreat  of  the  capybara,  winch  the  dog  was  looking  for 
beneath  the  water. 

Herbert  was  not  mistaken.  In  a few  minutes  the  animal 
appeared  on  the  surface  of  the  water.  Top  was  upon  it  in  a 
bound,  and  kept  it  from  plunging  again.  An  instant  later  the 
capybara,  dragged  to  the  bank ; was  killed  by  a blow  from 
Neb’s  stick. 

“ Hurrah  ! ” cried  Pencrof t,  who  was  always  ready  with  this 
cry  of  triumph. 

“ Give  me  but  a good  fire,  and  this  pig  shall  be  gnawed  to 
the  bones ! ” 

Pencrof t hoisted  the  capybara  on  his  shoulders,  and  judging 
by  the  height  of  the  sun  that  it  was  about  two  o’clock,  he 
gave  the  signal  to  return. 

Top’s  instinct  was  useful  to  the  hunters,  who,  thanks  to  the 
intelligent  animal,  were  enabled  to  discover  the  road  by  which 
they  had  come.  Half  an  hour  later  they  arrived  at  the  river. 

Pencroft  soon  made  a raft  of  wood,  as  he  had  done  before, 
though  if  there  was  no  fire  it  would  be  a useless  task,  and  the 
raft  following  the  current,  they  returned  towards  the  Chimneys. 

But  the  sailor  had  not  gone  fifty  paces  when  he  stopped,  and 
again  uttering  a tremendous  hurrah,  pointed  towards  the  angle 
of  the  cliff,— 

“ Herbert ! Neb  ! Look  ! ” he  shouted. 

Smoke  was  escaping  and  curling  up  amongst  the  rocka. 


CHAPTER  X, 


¥HE  ENGINEER’S  INVENTION— THE  QUESTION  WHICH  ENGROSSES 
THE  THOUGHTS  OF  CYRUS  HARDING— DEPARTURE  FOR  THE 
MOUNTAIN— VOLCANIC  SOIL— TRAGOPANS— SHEEP— THE  FIRST 
PLATEAU— ENCAMPMENT  FOR  THE  NIGHT— THE  SUMMIT  OF 
THE  CONE. 

In  a few  minutes  the  three  hunters  were  before  a crackling 
fire.  The  captain  and  the  reporter  were  there.  Pencroft 
looked  from  one  to  the  other,  his  capybara  in  his  hand,  without 
saying  a word. 

“ Well,  yes,  my  brave  fellow,”  cried  the  reporter. 

“ Fire,  real  fire,  which  will  roast  this  splendid  pig  perfectly, 
and  we  will  have  a feast  presently ! ” 

“But  who  lighted  it  ?”  asked  Pencroft. 

“The  sun!” 

Gideon  Spilett  was  quite  right  in  his  reply.  It  was  the  sun 
which  had  furnished  the  heat  which  so  astonished  Pencroft. 
The  sailor  could  scarcely  believe  his  eyes,  and  he  was  so  amazed 
that  he  did  not  think  of  questioning  the  engineer. 

“ Had  you  a burning-glass,  sir  ? ” asked  Herbert,  of  Harding. 

“ No,  my  boy,”  replied  he,  “ but  I made  one.” 

And  he  showed  the  apparatus  which  served  for  a burning- 
glass.  It  was  simply  two  glasses  which  he  had  taken  from 
his  own  and  the  reporter’  } watches.  Having  filled  them  with 
water  and  rendered  their  edges  adhesive  by  means  of  a little 
clay,  he  thus  fabricated  a regular  burning-glass,  which,  con- 
centrating the  solar  rays  on  some  very  dry  moss,  soon  caused 
it  to  blaze. 

The  sailor  considered  the  apparatus;  then  he  gazed  at  the 
engineer  without  saying  a word,  only  a look  plainly  expressed 
his  opinion  that  if  Cyrus  Harding  was  not  a magician,  he  was 

99 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION, 


m 

certainly  no  ordinary  man.  At  last  speech  returned  to  him, 
and  he  cried,— 

“ Note  that,  Mr.  Spilett,  note  that  down  on  your  paper ! ” 

“It  is  noted,”  replied  the  reporter. 

Then,  Neb  helping  him,  the  seaman  arranged  the  spit,  and 
the  capybara,  properly  cleaned,  was  soon  roasting  like  a suck- 
ing-pig before  a clear,  crackling  fire. 

The  Chimneys  had  again  become  more  habitable,  not  only 
because  the  passages  were  warmed  by  the  fire,  but  because  the 
partitions  of  wood  and  mud  had  been  re-established. 

It  was  evident  that  the  engineer  and  his  companions  had 
employed  their  day  well.  Cyrus  Harding  had  almost  entirely 
recovered  his  strength,  and  had  proved  it  by  climbing  to  the 
upper  plateau.  From  this  point  his  eye,  accustomed  to  estimate 
heights  and  distances,  was  fixed  for  a long  time  on  the  cone, 
the  summit  of  which  he  wished  to  reach  the  next  day.  The 
mountain,  situated  about  six  miles  to  the  northwest,  appeared 
to  him  to  measure  3,500  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea.  Con- 
sequently the  gaze  of  an  observer  posted  on  its  summit  would 
extend  over  a radius  of  at  least  fifty  miles.  Therefore  it  was 
probable  that  Harding  could  easily  solve  the  question  of 
“island  or  continent,”  to  which  he  attached  so  much  impor- 
tance. 

They  supped  capitally.  The  flesh  of  the  capybara  was 
declared  excellent.  The  sargussum  and  the  almonds  of  the 
stone-pine  completed  the  repast,  during  which  the  engineer 
spoke  little.  He  was  preoccupied  with  projects  for  the  next 
day. 

Once  or  twice  Pencroft  gave  forth  some  ideas  upon  what 
it  would  be  best  to  do;  but  Cyrus  Harding,  who  was  evidently 
of  a methodical  mind,  only  shook  his  head  without  uttering  a 
word. 

“ To-morrow,”  he  repeated,  “ we  shall  know  what  we  have  to 
depend  upon,  and  we  will  act  accordingly.” 

The  meal  ended,  fresh  armfuls  of  wood  were  thrown  on  the 
fire,  and  the  inhabitants  of  the  Chimneys,  including  the  faithful 
Top,  were  soon  buried  in  a deep  sleep.  No  incident  disturbed 
this  peaceful  night,  and  the  next  day,  the  29th  of  March,  fresh 


DECHPPED  m m THE  GLOBES. 


m 


Mi  active  they  awoke,  ready  to  undertake  the  excursion  which 
must  determine  their  fate. 

All  was  ready  for  the  start.  The  remains  of  the  capybara 
would  be  enough  to  sustain  Harding  and  his  companions  for 
at  least  twenty-four  hours.  Besides,  they  hoped  to  find  more 
food  on  the  way.  As  the  glasses  had  been  returned  to  the 
watches  of  the  engineer  and  reporter,  Pencroft  burned  a little 
linen  to  serve  as  tinder.  As  to  flint,  that  would  not  be  wanting 
in  these  regions  of  Plutonic  origin.  It  was  half-past  seven  in 
the  morning  when  the  explorers,  armed  with  sticks,  left  the 
Chimneys.  Following  Pencroft’s  advice,  it  appeared  best  to 
take  the  road  already  traversed  through  the  forest,  and  to 
return  by  another  route.  It  was  also  the  most  direct  way  to 
reach  the  mountain.  They  turned  the  south  angle  and  fol- 
lowed the  left  bank  of  the  river,  which  was  abandoned  at  the 
point  where  it  formed  an  elbow  towards  the  southwest.  The 
path,  already  trodden  under  the  evergreen  trees,  was  found, 
and  at  nine  o’clock  Cyrus  Harding  and  ta_  companions  had 
reached  the  western  border  of  the  forest.  The  ground,  till 
then,  very  little  undulated,  boggy  at  first,  dry  and  sandy  after- 
wards, had  a gentle  slope,  which  ascended  from  the  shore 
towards  the  interior  of  the  country.  A few  very  timid  animals 
were  seen  under  the  forest  trees.  Top  quickly  started  them, 
but  his  master  soon  called  him  back,  for  the  time  had  not  come 
to  commence  hunting;  that  would  be  attended  to  later.  The 
engineer  was  not  a man  who  would  allow  himself  to  be  diverted 
from  his  fixed  idea.  It  mightreven  have  been  said  that  he  did 
not  observe  the  country  at  all,  either  in  its  configuration,  or  in 
its  natural  productions,  his  great  aim  being  to  climb  the  moun- 
tain before  him,  and  therefore  straight  towards  it  he  went. 
At  ten  o’clock  a halt  of  a few  minutes  was  made.  On  leaving 
the  forest,  the  mountain  system  of  the  country  appeared  before 
the  explorers.  The  mountain  was  composed  of  two  cones;  the 
first,  truncated  at  a height  of  about  two  thousand  five  hundred 
feet,  was  sustained  by  buttresses,  which  appeared  to  branch 
out  like  the  talons  of  an  immense , claw  set  on  the  ground. 
.Between  these  were  narrow  valleys,  bristling  with  trees,  the 
test  clumps  of  which  rose  to  the  top  of  the  lowest  cone.  There 


m 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


appeared  to  be  less  vegetation  on  that  side  of  the  mountain 
which  was  exposed  to  the  northeast,  and  deep  fissures  could 
be  seen,  which,  no  doubt,  were  water-courses. 

On  the  first  cone  rested  a second,  slightly  rounded,  and 
placd  a little  on  one  side,  like  a great  round  hat  cocked  over 
the  ear.  A Scotchman  would  have  said,  “His  bonnet  was  a 
tliocht  ajee.”  It  appeared  formed  of  bare  earth,  here  and 
there  pierced  by  reddish  rocks. 

They  wished  to  reach  the  second  cone,  and  proceeding  along 
the  ridge  of  the  spurs  seemed  to  be  the  best  way  by  which  to 
gain  it. 

“ We  are  on  volcanic  ground,”  Cyrus  Harding  had  said,  and 
his  companions  following  him,  began  to  ascend  by  degrees  on 
the  back  of  a spur,  which,  by  a winding  and  consequently 
more  accessible  path,  joined  the  first  plateau. 

The  ground  had  evidently  been  convulsed  by  subterranean 
force.  Here  and  there  stray  blocks,  numerous  debris  of  basalt 
and  pumice-stone,  were  met  with.  In  isolated  groups  rose  fir 
trees,  which,  some  hundred  feet  lower,  at  the  bottom  of  the 
narrow  gorges,  formed  massive  shades  almost  impenetrable  to 
the  sun’s  rays. 

During  the  first  part  of  the  ascent,  Herbert  remarked  on 
the  footprints  which  indicated  the  recent  passage  of  large 
animals. 

“ Perhaps  these  beasts  will  not  let  us  pass  by  willingly,”  said 
Pencroft. 

“Well,”  replied  the  reporter,  who  had  already  hunted  the 
tiger  in  India,  and  the  lion  in  Africa,  “ we  shall  soon  learn  how 
successfully  to  encounter  them.  But  in  the  meantime  we  must 
be  upon  our  guard  ! ” 

They  ascended  but  slowly. 

The  distance,  increased  by  detours  and  obstacles  which  could 
not  be  surmounted  directly,  was  long.  Sometimes,  too,  the 
ground  suddenly  fell,  and  they  found  themselves  on  the  edge  of 
a deep  chasm  which  they  had  to  go  round.  Thus,  in  retracing 
their  steps  so  as  to  find  some  practicable  path,  much  time  was 
employed  and  fatigue  undergone  for  nothing.  At  twelve 
o’clock,  when  the  small  band  of  adventurers  halted  for  break- 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


103 


tact  ^ tho  tout  a large  group  of  firs,  near  a little  stream 
which  fell  in  cascades,  they  found  themselves  still  half  way 
from  the  first  plateau,  ;vhich  most  probably  they  would  not 
•each  till  nightfall.  From  this  point  the  view  of  the  sea  was 
much  extended,  but  on  the  . ight  the  high  promontory  pre- 
vented their  seeing  whether  there  was  land  beyond  it.  Qn  the 
left,  the  sight  extended  several  mi*  s to  the  north  ; but,  on  the 
northwest,  at  the  point  occupied  by  die  explorers,  it  was  cut 
short  by  the  ridge  of  a fantastically-shapv  d spur,  which  formed 
a powerful  support  of  the  central  cone. 

At  one  o’clock  the  ascent  was  continued.  They  slanted  more 
towards  the  southwest,  and  again  entered  amongst  thick 
bushes.  There  under  the  shade  of  the  trees  fluttered  several 
couple  of  gallinacese  belonging  to  the  pheasant  species.  They 
were  tragopans,  ornamented  by  a pendant  skin  which  hangs 
over  their  throats,  and  by  two  small  round  horns  planted 
behind  the  eyes.  Among  these  birds,  which  were  about  the 
size  of  a fowl,  the  female  was  uniformly  brown,  whilst  the 
male  was  gorgeous  in  his  red  plumage,  decorated  with  white 
spots.  Gideon  Spilett,  with  a stone  cleverly  and  vigorously 
thrown,  killed  one  of  these  tragopans,  on  which  Pencroft, 
made  hungry  by  the  fresh  air,  had  cast  greedy  eyes. 

After  leaving  the  region  of  bushes,  the  party,  assisted  by  rest- 
ing on  each  other’s  shoulders,  climbed  for  about  a hundred  feet 
up  a steep  acclivity,  and  reached  a level  place,  with  very  few 
trees,  where  the  soil  appeared  volcanic.  It  was  necessary  to 
ascend  by  zigzags  to  make  the  slope  more  easy,  for  it  was  very 
steep,  and  the  footing  being  exceedingly  precarious,  required 
the  greatest  caution.  Neb  and  Herbert  took  the  lead,  Pencroft 
the  rear,  the  captain  and  the  reporter  between  them.  The 
animals  which  frequented  these  heights  — and  there  were 
numerous  traces  of  them  — must  necessarily  belong  to  those 
races  of  sure  foot  and  supple  spine,  chamois  or  goat.  Several 
were  seen,  but  this  was  not  the  name  Pencroft  gave  them, 
for  all  of  a sudden  — 

“ Sheep  ! ” he  shouted. 

All  stopped  about  fifty  feet  from  half-a-dozen  animals  of  a 
large  size,  with  strong  horns  bent  back  and  flattened  towards 


m 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


the  point,  with  a woolly  fleece,  hidden  under  long  silky  hair  oi 

a tawny  color. 

They  were  not  ordinary  sheep,  hut  a species  usually  found  in 
the  mountainous  regions  of  the  temperate  zone,  to  which  Her- 
bert gave  the  name  of  the  musmon. 

“ Have  they  legs  and  chops  ?”  asked  the  sailor. 

“ Yes,”  replied  Herbert. 

“ Well,  then,  they  are  sheep  ! ” said  Pencroft. 

The  animals,  motionless  among  the  blocks  of  basalt,  gazed 
with  an  astonished  eye,  as  if  they  saw  human  bipeds  for  the 
first  time.  Then,  their  fears  suddenly  aroused,  they  dis- 
appeared, bounding  over  the  rocks. 

“ Good-bye,  till  we  meet  again ! ” cried  Pencroft,  as  he  watched 
them,  in  such  a comical  tone  that  Cyrus  Harding,  Gideon 
Spilett,  Herbert,  and  Neb  could  not  help  laughing. 

The  ascent  was  continued.  Here  and  there  were  traces  of 
lava.  Sulphur  springs  sometimes  stopped  their  way,  and  they 
had  to  go  round  them.  In  some  places  the  sulphur  had  formed 
crystals  among  other  substances,  such  as  whitish  cinders  made 
of  an  infinity  of  little  feldspar  crystals. 

In  approaching  the  first  plateau  formed  by  the  truncating  of 
the  lower  cone,  the  difficulties  of  the  ascent  were  very  great. 
Towards  four  o’clock  the  extreme  zone  of  the  trees  had  been 
passed.  There  only  remained  here  and  there  a few  twisted, 
stunted  pines,  which  must  have  had  a hard  life  in  resisting  at 
this  altitude  the  high  winds  from  the  open  sea.  Happily  for 
the  engineer  and  his  companions,  the  weather  was  beautiful, 
the  atmosphere  tranquil;  for  a high  breeze  at  an  elevation  of 
three  thousand  feet  would  have  hindered  their  proceedings. 
The  purity  of  the  sky  at  the  zenith  was  felt  through  the  trans- 
parent air.  A perfect  calm  reigned  around  them.  They  could 
not  see  the  sun,  then  hid  by  the  vast  screen  of  the  upper  cone, 
which  masked  the  half-horizon  of  the  west,  and  whose  enor- 
mous shadow  stretching  to  the  shore  increased  as  the  radiant 
luminary  sank  in  its  diurnal  course.  Vapors— mist  rather  than 
clouds— began  to  appear  in  the  east,  and  assume  all  the  pris- 
matic colors  under  the  influence  of  the  solar  rays. 

Mve  hundred  feet  only  separated  the  explorers  from  the 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


m 


plateau,  which  they  wished  to  reach  so  as  to  establish  there 
an  encampment  for  the  night,  but  these  five  hundred  feet  were 
increased  to  more  than  two  miles  by  the  zigzags  which  they 
had  to  describe.  The  soil,  as  it  were,  slid  under  their  feet. 
The  slope  often  presented  such  an  angle  that  they  slipped 
when  the  stones  worn  by  the  air  did  not  give  a sufficient  sup- 
port. Evening  came  on  by  degrees,  and  it  was  almost  night 
when  Cyrus  Harding  and  his  companions,  much  fatigued  by 
an  ascent  of  seven  hours,  arrived  at  the  plateau  of  the  first 
cone.  It  was  then  necessary  to  prepare  an  encampment,  and 
to  restore  their  strength  by  eating  first  and  sleeping  after- 
wards. This  second  stage  of  the  mountain  rose  on  a base  of 
rocks,  among  which  it  would  be  easy  to  find  a retreat.  Fuei 
was  not  abundant.  However,  a fire  could  be  made  by  means 
of  the  moss  and  dry  brushwood  which  covered  certain  parts 
of  the  plateau.  Whilst  the  sailor  was  preparing  his  hearth 
with  stones  which  he  put  to  this  use,  Neb  and  Herbert  occupied 
themselves  with  getting  a supply  of  fuel.  They  soon  re- 
turned with  a load  of  brushwood.  The  steel  was  struck,  the 
burnt  linen  caught  the  sparks  of  Hint,  and,  under  Neb’s  breath, 
a crackling  fire  showed  itself  in  a few  minutes  under  the  shel- 
ter of  the  rocks.  Their  object  in  lighting  a fire  was  only  to 
enable  them  to  withstand  the  cold  temperature  of  the  night, 
as  it  was  not  employed  in  cooking  the  bird,  which  Neb  kept 
for  the  next  day.  The  remains  of  the  capybara  and  some 
dozens  of  the  stone-pine  almonds  formed  their  supper.  It  was 
not  half-past  six  when  all  was  finished. 

Cyrus  Harding  then  thought  of  exploring  in  the  half-light 
the  large  circular  layer  which  supported  the  upper  cone  of  the 
mountain.  Before  taking  any  rest,  he  wished  to  know  if  it 
was  possible  to  get  round  the  base  of  the  cone  in  the  case  of 
its  sides  being  too  steep  and  its  summit  being  inaccessible. 
This  question  preoccupied  him,  for  it  was  possible  that  from 
the  way  the  hat  inclined,  that  is  to  say,  towards  the  north,  the 
plateau  was  not  practicable.  Also,  if  the  summit  of  the  moun- 
tain could  not  be  reached  on  one  side,  and  if,  on  the  other,  they 
could  not  get  round  the  base  of  the  cone,  it  would  be  impos- 
sible to  survey  the  western  part  of  the  country,  and  their  object 


106 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION, 


in  making  the  ascent  would  in  part  be  altogether  unafc 
tained. 

The  engineer,  accordingly,  regardless  of  fatigue,  leaving  Pen- 
croft  and  Neb  to  arrange  the  beds,  and  Gideon  Spilett  to  note 
the  incidents  of  the  day,  began  to  follow  the  edge  of  the 
plateau,  going  towards  the  north.  Herbert  accompanied  him. 

The  night  was  beautiful  and  still,  the  darkness  was  not  yet 
deep.  Cyrus  Harding  and  the  boy  walked  near  each  other, 
without  speaking.  In  some  places  the  plateau  opened  before 
them,  and  they  passed  without  hindrance.  In  others,  ob- 
structed by  rocks,  there  was  only  a narrow  path,  in  which 
two  persons  could  not  walk  abreast.  After  a walk  of  twenty 
minutes,  Cyrus  Harding  and  Herbert  were  obliged  to  stop. 
From  this  point  the  slope  of  the  two  cones  became  one.  No 
shoulder  here  separated  the  two  parts  of  the  mountain.  The 
slope,  being  inclined  almost  seventy  degrees,  the  path  became 
impracticable. 

But  if  the  engineer  and  the  boy  were  obliged  to  give  up 
thoughts  of  following  a circular  direction,  in  return  an 
opportunity  was  given  for  ascending  the  cone. 

In  fact,  before  them  opened  a deep  hollow.  It  was  the 
rugged  mouth  of  the  crater,  by  which  the  eruptive  liquid  mat- 
ter had  escaped  at  the  periods  when  the  volcano  was  still  in 
activity.  Hardened  lava  and  crusted  scoria  formed  a sort  ol 
natural  staircase  of  large  steps,  which  would  greatly  facilitate 
the  ascent  to  the  summit  of  the  mountain. 

Harding  took  all  this  in  at  a glance,  and  without  hesitating, 
followed  by  the  lad,  he  entered  the  enormous  chasm  in  the 
midst  of  an  increasing  obscurity. 

There  was  still  a height  of  a thousand  feet  to  overcome. 
Would  the  interior  acclivities  of  the  crater  be  practicable  ? 
It  would  soon  be  seen.  The  persevering  engineer  resolved  to 
continue  his  ascent  until  he  was  stopped.  Happily  these 
acclivities  wound  up  the  interior  of  the  volcano  and  favored 
their  ascent. 

As  to  the  volcano  itself,  it  could  not  be  doubted  that  it  was 
completely  extinct.  No  smoke  escaped  from  its  sides  ; not  a 
flame  could  be  seen  in  the  dark  hollows ; not  a roar,  not  a 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


107 


mutter,  no  trembling  even  issued  from  this  black  well,  whick 
perhaps  reached  far  into  the  bowels  of  the  earth.  The 
atmosphere  inside  the  crater  was  filled  with  no  sulphurous 
vapor.  It  was  more  than  the  sleep  of  a volcano ; it  was  its 
complete  extinction.  Cyrus  Harding’s  attempt  would  succeed. 

Little  by  little,  Herbert  and  he,  climbing  up  the  sides  of  the 
interior,  saw  the  crater  widen  above  their  heads.  The  radius 
of  this  circular  portion  of  the  sky,  framed  by  the  edge  of  the 
cone,  increased  obviously.  At  each  step,  as  it  were,  that  the 
explorers  made,  fresh  stars  entered  the  field  of  their  vision. 
The  magnificent  constellations  of  the  southern  sky  shone 
resplendently.  At  the  zenith  glittered  the  splendid  Antares  in 
the  Scorpion,  and  not  far  the  ft  in  the  Centaur,  which  is 
believed  to  be  the  nearest  star  to  the  terrestrial  globe.  Then, 
as  the  crater  widened,  appeared  Fomalhaut  of  the  Fish,  the 
Southern  Triangle,  and  lastly,  nearly  at  the  Antarctic  Pole,  the 
glittering  Southern  Cross,  which  replaces  the  Polar  Star  of  the 
Northern  Hemisphere. 

It  was  nearly  eight  o’clock  when  Cyrus  Harding  and  Herbert 
set  foot  on  the  highest  ridge  of  the  mountain  at  the  summit  of 
the  cone. 

It  was  then  perfectly  dark,  and  their  gaze  could  not  extend 
over  a radius  of  two  miles.  Did  the  sea  surround  this 
unknown  land,  or  was  it  connected  in  the  west  with  some 
continent  of  the  Pacific.  It  could  not  yet  be  made  out. 
Towards  the  west,  a cloudy  belt,  clearly  visible  at  the  horizon, 
increased  the  gloom,  and  the  eye  could  not  discover  if  the  sky 
and  water  were  blended  together  in  the  same  circular  line. 

But  at  one  point  of  the  horizon  a ^ague  light  suddenly 
appeared,  which  descended  slowly  in  proportion  as  the  cloud 
mounted  to  the  zenith. 

It  was  the  slender  crescent  moon,  already  almost  disappear- 
ing ; but  its  light  was  sufficient  to  show  clearly  the  horizontal 
line,  then  detached  from  the  cloud,  and  the  engineer  could  see 
its  reflection  trembling  for  an  instant  on  a liquid  surface. 
Cyrus  Harding  seized  the  lad’s  hand,  and  in  a grave  voice, — 

“An  island!”  said  he,,  at  the  moment  when  the  lunai 
crescent  disappeared  beneath  the  waves. 


CHAPTER  XI, 


AT  THE  SUMMIT  OF  THE  CONE  — THE  INTERIOR  OF  THE  CRATER 
— SEA  ALL  ROUND— NO  LAND  IN  SIGHT  — A BIRD’S-EYE  VIEW 
OF  THE  COAST  — HYDROGRAPHY  AND  OROLOGY  — IS  THE 
ISLAND  INHABITED  — CHRISTENING  THE  BAYS,  GULFS,  CAPEk 
RIVERS,  ETC.  — LINCOLN  ISLAND. 

Half  an  hour  later  Cyrus  Harding  and  Herbert  had  returned 
to  the  encampment.  The  engineer  merely  told  his  companions 
that  the  land  upon  which  fate  had  thrown  them  was  an  island, 
and  that  the  next  day  they  would  consult.  Then  each  settled 
himself  as  well  as  he  could  to  sleep,  and  in  that  rocky  hole,  at  a 
height  of  two  thousand  five  hundred  feet  above  the  level  of 
the  sea,  through  a peaceful  night,  the  islanders  enjoyed  pro- 
found repose. 

The  next  day,  the  80th  of  March,  after  a hasty  breakfast, 
Which  consisted  solely  of  the  roasted  tragopan,  the  engineer 
wished  to  climb  again  to  the  summit  of  the  volcano,  so  as  more 
attentively  to  survey  the  island  upon  which  he  and  his  com- 
panions were  imprisoned  for  life  perhaps,  should  the  island  be 
situated  at  a great  distance  from  any  land,  or  if  it  was  out  of 
the  course  of  vessels  which  visited  the  archipelagos  of  the 
Pacific  Ocean.  This  time  his  companions  followed  him  in  the 
new  exploration.  They  also  wished  to  see  the  island,  on  the 
productions  of  which  they  must  depend  for  the  supply  of  all 
their  wants- 

It  was  about  seven  o’clock  in  the  morning  when  Cyrus  Hard- 
ing, Herbert,  Pencroft,  Gideon  Spilett,  and  Neb  quitted  the 
encampment.  No  one  appeared  to  be  anxious  about  their 
situation.  They  had  faith  in  themselves,  doubtless,  but  it  must 
be  observed  that  the  basis  of  this  faith  was  not  the  same  with 
Harding  as  with  his  companions.  The  engineer  had  eoa- 

108 


DROPPED  FROM  I iE  CLOUDS. 


fidence,  because  he  felt  capable  of  extorting  from  this  wild 
country  every  thing  necessary  for  the  life  of  himself  and  his 
companions ; the  latter  feared  nothing,  just  because  Cyrus 
Harding  was  with  them.  Pencroft  especially,  since  the 
incident  of  the  relighted  fire,  would  not  have  despaired  for  an 
instant,  even  if  he  was  on  a bare  rock,  if  the  engineer  was  with 
him  on  the  rock. 

“ Pshaw ! ” said  he,  “ we  left  Richmond  without  permission 
from  the  authorities ! It  will  be  hard  if  we  don’t  manage  to 
get  away  some  day  or  other  from  a [place  where  certainly  no 
one  will  detain  us  !” 

Cyrus  Harding  followed  the  same  road  as  the  evening  before. 
They  went  round  the  cone  by  the  plateau  which  formed  the 
shoulder,  to  the  mouth  of  the  enormous  chasm.  The  weather 
was  magnificent.  The  sun  rose  in  a pure  sky  and  flooded 
with  his  rays  all  the  eastern  side  of  the  mountain. 

The  crater  was  reached.  It  was  just  what  the  engineer  had 
made  it  out  to  be  in  the  dark;  that  is  to  say,  a vast  funnel 
which  extended,  widening,  to  a height  of  a thousand  feet 
above  the  plateau.  Below  the  chasm,  large  thick  streaks  of 
lava  wound  over  the  sides  of  the  mountain,  and  thus  marked 
the  course  of  the  eruptive  matter  to  the  lower  valleys  which 
furrowed  the  northern  part  of  the  island. 

The  interior  of  the  crater,  whose  inclination  did  not  exceed 
thirty-five  to  forty  degrees,  presented  no  difficulties  nor  ob 
stacles  to  the  ascent.  Traces  of  very  ancient  lava  were  noticed, 
which  probably  had  overflowed  the  summit  of  the  cone, 
before  this  lateral  chasm  had  opened  a new  way  to  it. 

As  to  the  volcanic  chimney  which  established  a communica- 
tion between  the  subterranean  layers  and  the  crater,  its  depth 
could  not  be  calculated  with  the  eye,  for  it  was  lost  in  obscurity. 
But  there  was  no  doubt  as  to  the  complete  extinction  of  the 
volcano. 

Before  eight  o’clock  Harding  and  his  companions  were 
assembled  at  the  summit  of  the  crater,  on  a conical  mound 
which  swelled  the  northern  edge. 

“The  sea,  the  sea  every  where ! ” they  cried,  as  if  their  lips 
could  not  restrain  the  words  which  made  islanders  of  them. 


m 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITIOIT. 

The  sea,  indeed,  formed  an  immense  circular  sheet  c ,/atei 
all  around  them ! Perhaps,  on  climbing  again  to  the  summit 
of  the  cone,  Cyrus  Harding  had  had  a hope  of  discovering 
some  coast,  some  island  shore,  which  he  had  not  been  able 
to  perceive  in  the  dark  the  evening  before.  But  nothing 
appeared  on  the  farthest  verge  of  the  horizon,  that  is  to  say, 
over  a radius  of  more  than  fifty  miles.  No  land  in  sight.  Not 
a sail.  Over  all  this  immense  space  the  ocean  alone  was  visible 
— the  island  occupied  the  center  of  a circumference  which 
appeared  to  be  infinite. 

The  engineer  and  his  companions,  mute  and  motionless,  sur- 
veyed for  some  minutes  every  point  of  the  ocean,  examining  it 
to  its  most  extreme  limits.  Even  Pencroft,  who  possessed  a 
marvellous  power  of  sight,  saw  nothing;  and  certainly  if  there 
had  been  land  at  the  horizon,  if  it  appeared  only  as  an  indis- 
tinct vapor,  the  sailor  would  undoubtedly  have  found  it  out, 
for  nature  had  placed  regular  telescopes  under  his  eyebrows. 

From  the  ocean  their  gaze  returned  to  the  island  which  they 
commanded  entirely,  and  the  first  question  was  put  by  Gideon 
Spilett  in  these  terms 

“ About  what  size  is  this  island  ? ” 

Truly,  it  did  not  appear  large  in  the  midst  of  the  immense 
ocean. 

Cyrus  Harding  reflected  a few  minutes;  he  attentively  ob- 
served the  perimeter  of  the  island,  taking  into  consideration 
the  height  at  which  he  was  placed;  then,— 

“ My  friends,”  said  he,  “ I do  not  think  I am  mistaken  in 
giving  to  the  shore  of  the  island  a circumferance  of  more  than  a 
hundred  miles.” 

“ And  consequently  an  area  ? ” 

r “ That  is  difficult  to  estimate,”  replied  the  engineer,  “ for  it 
is  so  uneT  en.” 

If  Cyrus  Harding  was  not  mistaken  in  his  calculation,  the 
island  had  almost  the  extent  of  Malta  or  Zante,  in  the  Mediter- 
ranean, but  it  was  at  the  same  time  much  more  irregular  and 
less  rich  in  capes,  promontories,  points,  bays,  or  creeks.  Its 
strange  form  caught  the  eye,  and  when  Gideon  Spilett,  on  the 
engineer’s  advice,  had  drawn  the  outline,  they  found  that  it 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


Ill 


resembled  some  fantastic  animal,  a monstrous  leviathan,  which 
lay  sleeping  on  the  surface  of  the  Pacific. 

This  was  in  fact  the  exact  shape  of  the  island,  which  it  is  of 
consequence  to  know,  and  a tolerably  correct  map  of  it  wa9 
immediately  drawn  by  the  reporter. 

The  east  part  of  the  shore,  where  the  castaways  had  landed, 
formed  a wide  bay,  terminated  by  a sharp  cape,  which  had 
been  concealed  by  a high  point  from  Pencroft  on  his  first 
exploration.  At  the  northeast  two  other  capes  closed  the  bay, 
and  between  them  ran  a narrow  gulf,  which  looked  like  the 
half-open  jaws  of  a formidable  dog-fish. 

From  the  northeast  to  the  southwest  the  coast  was  rounded, 
like  the  flattened  cranium  of  an  animal,  rising  again,  forming  a 
sort  of  protuberance  which  did  not  give  any  particular  shape 
to  this  part  of  the  island,  of  which  the  centre  was  occupied 
by  the  volcano. 

From  this  point  the  shore  ran  pretty  regularly  north  and 
Bouth,  broken  at  two-thirds  of  its  perimeter  by  a narrow  creek, 
from  which  it  ended  in  a long  tail,  similar  to  the  caudal  append- 
age of  a gigantic  alligator. 

This  tail  formed  a regular  peninsula,  which  stretched 
more  than  thirty  miles  into  the  sea,  reckoning  from  the  cape 
southeast  of  the  island,  already  mentioned,  it  curled  round, 
making  an  open  roadstead,  which  marked  out  the  lower  shore 
of  this  strangely-formed  land. 

At  the  narrowest  part,  that  is  to  say,  between  the  Chimneys 
and  the  creek  on  the  western  shore,  which  corresponded  to  it 
in  latitude,  the  island  only  measured  ten  miles;  but  its  greatest 
length,  from  the  jaws  at  the  northeast  to  the  extremity  of  the 
tail  on  the  southwest,  was  not  less  than  thirty  miles. 

As  to  the  interior  of  the  island,  its  general  aspect  was  this, 
—very  woody  throughout  the  southern  part  of  the  mountain 
to  the  shore,  and  arid  and  sandy  in  the  northern  part.  Between 
the  volcano  and  the  east  coast  Cyrus  Harding  and  his  com- 
panions were  surprised  to  see  a lake,  bordered  with  green 
trees,  the  existence  of  which  they  had  not  suspected.  Seen 
from  this  height,  the  lake  appeared  to  be  on  the  same 
level  as  the  ocean,  but,  on  reflection,  the  engineer  explained 


112 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


to  his  companions  that  the  altitude  of  this  little  sheet  of  water 
must  be  about  three  hundred  feet,  because  the  plateau,  which 
was  its  basin,  was  but  a prolongation  of  the  coast. 

“ Is  it  a freshwater  lake  ? ” asked  Pencroft. 

“ Certainly,”  replied  the  engineer,  “ for  it  must  be  fed  by  the 
water  which  flows  from  the  mountain.” 

“ I see  a little  river  which  runs  into  it,”  said  Herbert,  pointing 
out  a narrow  stream,  which  evidently  took  its  source  somewhere 
in  the  west. 

“Yes,”  said  Harding;  “and  since  this  stream  feeds  the  lake, 
most  probably  on  the  side  near  the  sea  there  is  an  outlet  by 
which  the  surplus  water  escapes.  We  shall  see  that  on  our 
return.” 

This  little  winding  watercourse  and  the  river  already  men- 
tioned constituted  the  water-system,  at  least  such  as  it  was 
displayed  to  the  eyes  of  the  explorers.  However,  it  was  pos- 
sible that  under  the  masses  of  trees  which  covered  two-thirds 
of  the  island,  forming  an  immense  forest,  other  rivers  ran 
towards  the  sea.  It  might  even  be  inferred  that  such  was  the 
case,  so  rich  did  this  region  appear  in  the  most  magnificent 
specimens  of  the  flora  of  the  temperate  zones.  There  was  no 
indication  of  running  water  in  the  north,  though  perhaps  there 
might  be  stagnant  water  among  the  marshes  in  the  northeast; 
but  that  was  all,  in  addition  to  the  downs,  sand,  and  aridity 
which  contrasted  so  strongly  with  the  luxuriant  vegetation  of 
the  rest  of  the  island. 

The  volcano  did  not  occupy  the  central  part;  it  rose,  on  the 
contrary,  in  the  northwestern  region,  and  seemed  to  mark 
the  boundary  of  the  two  zones.  At  the  southwest,  at  the 
south,  and  the  southeast,  the  first  part  of  the  spurs  were 
hidden  under  masses  of  verdure.  At  the  north,  on  the  com 
trary,  one  could  follow  their  ramifications,  which  died  away 
on  the  sandy  plains.  It  was  on  this  side  that,  at  the  time  when 
the  mountain  was  in  a state  of  eruption,  the  discharge  had 
worn  away  a passage,  and  a large  heap  of  lava  had  spread 
to  the  narrow  jaw  which  formed  the  northeastern  gulf. 

Cyrus  Harding  and  his  companions  remained  an  hour  at  the 
to®  of  the  mountain.  The  island  was  displayed  under  their 


DBOPPED  FBOM  THE  CLOUDS, 


113 


eyes,  like  a plan  in  relief  with  different  tints,  green  for  the 
forests,  yellow  for  the  sand,  blue  for  the  water.  They  viewed 
it  in  its  tout-ensemble , nothing  remained  concealed  but  the 
ground  hidden  by  verdure,  the  hollows  of  the  valleys,  and  the 
interior  of  the  volcanic  chasms. 

One  important  question  remained  to  be  solved,  and  the 
answer  would  have  a ‘great  effect  upon  the  future  of  the  cast- 
aways. 

Was  the  island  inhabited  ? 

It  was  the  reporter  who  put  this  question,  to  which  after 
the  close  examination  they  had  just  made,  the  answer  seemed 
to  be  in  the  negative. 

Nowhere  could  the  work  of  a human  hand  be  perceived. 
Not  a group  of  huts,  not  a solitary  cabin,  nor  a fishery  on 
the  shore.  No  smoke  curling  in  the  air  betrayed  the  presence 
of  man.  It  is  true,  a distance  of  nearly  thirty  miles  separated 
the  observers  from  the  extreme  points,  that  is,  of  the  tail  which 
extended  to  the  southwest,  and  it  would  have  been  difficult, 
even  to  Pencroft’s  eyes,  to  discover  a habitation  there.  Neither 
could  the  curtain  of  verdure,  which  covered  three-quarters  of 
the  island,  be  raised  to  see  if  it  did  not  shelter  some  straggling 
village.  But  in  general  the  islanders  live  on  the  shores  of 
the  narrow  spaces  which  emerge  above  the  waters  of  the 
Pacific,  and  this  shore  appeared  to  be  an  absolute  desert. 

Until  a more  complete  exploration,  it  might  be  admitted  that 
the  island  was  uninhabited.  But  was  it  frequented,  at  least 
occasionally,  by  the  natives  of  neighboring  islands  ? It  was 
difficult  to  reply  to  this  question.  No  land  appeared  within  a 
radius  of  fifty  miles.  But  fifty  miles  could  be  easily  crossed, 
either  by  Malay  proas  or  by  the  large  Polynesian  canoes. 
Every  thing  depended  on  the  position  of  the  island,  of  its 
isolation  in  the  Pacific,  or  of  its  proximity  to  archipelagos. 
Would  Cyrus  Harding  be  able  to  find  out  their  latitude  and 
longitude  without  instruments  ? It  would  be  difficult.  In  the 
doubt,  it  was  best  to  take  precautions  against  a possible 
descent  of  neighboring  natives. 

The  exploration  of  the  island  was  finished,  its  shape  deter- 
mined, its  features  made  out,  its  extent  calculated,  the  water 
8 


114 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITIOH. 


and  mountain  systems  ascertained.  The  disposition  of  the 
forests  and  plains  had  been  marked  in  a general  way  on  the 
reporter’s  plan.  They  had  now  only  to  descend  the  mountain 
slopes  again,  and  explore  the  soil,  in  the  triple  point  of  view, 
of  its  mineral,  vegetable,  and  animal  resources. 

But  before  giving  his  companions  the  signal  for  departure, 
Cyrus  Harding  said  to  them  in  a calm,  grave  voice,— 

“ Here,  my  friends,  is  the  small  corner  of  land  upon  which 
the  hand  of  the  Almighty  has  thrown  us.  We  are  going  to  live 
Jiere;  a long  time,  perhaps.  Perhaps,  too,  unexpected  help 
will  arrive,  if  some  ship  passes  by  chance.  I say  by  chance, 
because  this  is  an  unimportant  island;  there  is  not  even  a 
port  in  which  ships  could  anchor,  and  it  is  to  be  feared  that 
it  is  situated  out  of  the  route  usually  followed,  that  is  to  say, 
too  much  to  the  south  for  the  ships  which  frequent  the  archi- 
pelagos of  the  Pacific,  and  too  much  to  the  north  for  those 
which  go  to  Australia  by  doubling  Cape  Horn.  I wish  to  hide 
nothing  of  our  position  from  you—” 

“And  you  are  right,  my  dear  Cyrus,”  replied  the  reporter, 
with  animation.  “You  have  to  deal  with  men.  They  have 
confidence  in  you,  and  you  can  depend  upon  them.  Is  it  not 
so,  my  friends  ? ” 

“ I will  obey  you  in  every  thing,  captain,”  said  Herbert,  seiz- 
ing the  engineer’s  hand. 

“My  master  always,  and  every  where !”  cried  Neb. 

‘As  for  me,”  said  the  sailor,  “ if  I ever  grumble  at  work,  my 
name’s  not  Jack  Pencroft,  and  if  you  like,  captain,  we  will 
make  a little  America  of  this  island ! We  will  build  towns, 
we  will  establish  railways,  start  telegraphs,  and  one  fine  day, 
when  it  is  quite  changed,  quite  put  in  order  and  quite  civil- 
ized, we  will  go  and  offer  it  to  the  government  of  the  Union. 
Only,  I asj£  one  thing.” 

“ What  is  that  ? ” said  the  reporter. 

“It  is,  that  we  do  not  consider  ourselves  castaways,  but  col- 
onists, who  have  come  here  to  settle.”  Harding  could  not 
help  smiling,  and  the  sailor’s  idea  was  adopted.  He  then 
thanked  his  companions,  and  added,  that  he  would  rely  on 
their  energy  and  on  the  aid  of  Heaven. 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


115 


“ Well,  now  let  us  set  off  to  the  Chimneys  ! ” cried  Pencroft. 

“ One  minute,  my  friends,”  said  the  engineer.  “ It  seems  to 
me  it  would  be  a good  thing  to  give  a name  to  this  island,  as 
well  as  to  the  capes,  promontories,  and  water-courses,  which 
we  can  see.” 

“ Very  good,”  said  the  reporter.  “ In  the  future,  that  will 
simplify  the  instructions  which  we  shall  have  to  give  and 
follow.” 

“Indeed,”  said  the  sailor,  “already  it  is  something  to  be  able 
to  say  where  one  is  going,  and  where  one  has  come  from.  At 
least,  it  looks  like  somewhere.” 

“ The  Chimneys,  for  example,”  said  Herbert. 

“Exactly!”  replied  Pencroft.  “That  name  was  the  most 
convenient,  and  it  came  to  me  quite  of  myself.  Shall  we  keep 
the  name  of  the  Chimneys  for  our  first  encampment,  captain  ? ” 
“Yes,  Pencroft,  since  you  have  so  christened  it.” 

“ Good ! as  for  the  others,  that  will  be  easy,”  returned  the 
Bailor,  who  was  in  high  spirits.  “ Let  us  give  them  names,  as 
(he  Robinsons  did,  whose  story  Herbert  has  often  read  to  me; 
Providence  Bay,  Whale  Point,  Cape  Disappointment ! ” 

“Or,  rather,  the  names  of  Captain  Harding,”  said  Herbert, 
“ of  Mr.  Spilett,  of  Neb  !— ” 

“My  name ! ” cried  Neb,  showing  his  sparkling  white  teeth. 
“Why  not?”  replied  Pencroft.  “Port  Neb,  that  would  do 
very  well ! And  Cape  Gideon—” 

“I  should  prefer  borrowing  names  from  our  country,”  said 
the  reporter,  “which  would  remind  us  of  America.” 

“Yes,  for  the  principal  ones,”  then  said  Cyrus  Harding; 
“ for  those  of  the  bays  and  seas,  I admit  it  willingly.  We  might 
give  to  that  vast  bay  on  the  east  the  name  of  Union  Bay,  for 
example  ; to  that  large  hollow  on  the  south,  Washington  Bay; 
to  the  mountain  upon  which  we  are  standing,  that  of  Mount 
Franklin;  to  that  lake  which  is  extended  under  our  eye,  that  of 
Lake  Grant;  nothing  could  be  better,  my  friends.  These  names 
Will  recall  our  country,  and  those  of  the  great  citizens  who 
have  honored  it;  but  for  the  rivers,  gulfs,  capes,  and  promon- 
tories, which  we  perceive  from  the  top  of  this  mountain, 
rather  let  us  choose  names  which  will  recall  their  particular 


110 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


shape.  They  will  impress  themselves  better  on  our  memory, 
and  at  the  same  time  will  be  more  practical.  The  shape  of  the 
island  is  so  strange  that  we  shall  not  be  troubled  to  imagine 
what  it  resembles.  As  to  the  streams  which  we  do  not  know 
as  yet,  in  different  parts  of  the  forest  which  we  shall  explore 
later,  the  creeks  which  afterward  will  be  discovered,  we 
can  christen  them  as  we  find  them.  What  do  you  think,  my 
friends  ? ” 

r The  engineer’s  proposal  was  unanimously  agreed  to  by  his 
companions.  The  island  was  spread  out  under  their  eyes  like  a 
map,  and  they  had  only  to  give  names  to  all  its  angles  and 
points.  Gideon  Spilett  would  write  them  down,  and  the 
geographical  nomenclature  of  the  island  would  be  definitively 
adopted.  First  of  all,  they  named  the  two  bays  and  the 
mountain,  Union  Bay,  Washington  Bay,  and  Mount  Franklin, 
as  the  engi-  neer  had  suggested. 

“Now,”  said  the  reporter,  “to  this  peninsula  at  the  south- 
west of  the  island,  I propose  to  give  the  name  of  Serpentine 
Peninsula,  and  that  of  Beptile-end  to  the  bent  tail  which  termi- 
nates it,  for  it  is  just  like  a reptile’s  tail.” 

“ Adopted,”  said  the  engineer. 

“ Now,”  said  Herbert,  pointing  to  the  other  extremity  of  the 
island,  “ let  us  call  this  gulf,  which  is  so  singularly  like  a pair 
of  open  jaws,  Shark  Gulf.” 

“ Capital ! ” cried  Pencroft,  “and  we  can  complete  the  resem- 
blance by  naming  the  two  parts  of  the  jaws  Mandible  Cape.” 

“ But  there  are  two  capes,”  observed  the  reporter. 

“Well,”  replied  Pencroft,  “we  can  have  North  Mandible 
Cape  and  South  Mandible  Cape.” 

“ They  are  inscribed,”  said  Spilett. 

“ There  is  only  the  point  at  the  southeasterly  extremity  of  the 
island  to  be  named,”  said  Pencroft. 

“ That  is,  the  extremity  of  Union  Bay  ? ” asked  Herbert. 

“ Claw  Cape,”  cried  Neb  directly,  who  also  wished  to  be  god- 
father to  some  part  of  his  domain. 

In  truth,  Neb  had  found  an  excellent  name,  for  this  cape 
was  very  like  the  powerful  claw  of  the  fantastic  animal 
which  this  singularly  shaped  island  represented. 


DROPFfcl*  rROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


ll* 

Pencroft  was  delighted  at  the  turn  things  had  taken,  and 
their  imagination  soon  gave  to  the  river  which  furnished  the 
settlers  with  chinking  water,  and  near  which  the  balloon  had 
thrown  them,  the  name  of  the  Mercy,  in  true  gratitude  to  Provi- 
dence. To  the  islet  upon  which  the  castaways  had  first  landed, 
the  name  of  Safety  Island;  to  the  plateau  which  crowned  the 
high  granite  precipice  above  the  Chimneys,  and  from  whence 
the  gaze  could  embrace  the  whole  of  the  vast  bay,  the  name 
of  Prospect  Heights. 

Lastly,  all  the  masses  of  impenetrable  wood  which  covered 
the  Serpentine  Peninsula  were  named  the  forests  of  the  Far 
West. 

The  nomenclature  of  the  visible  and  known  parts  of  the 
island  was  thus  finished,  and  later,  they  would  complete  it  as 
they  made  fresh  discoveries. 

As  to  the  points  of  the  compass,  the  engineer  had  roughly 
fixed  them  by  the  height  and  position  of  the  sun,  which  placed 
Union  Bay  and  Prospect  Heights  to  the  east.  But  the  next  day, 
by  taking  the  exact  hour  of  the  rising  and  setting  of  the  sun, 
and  by  marking  its  position  between  this  rising  and  setting, 
he  reckoned  to  fix  the  north  of  the  island  exactly,  for,  in  conse- 
quence of  its  situation  in  the  southern  hemisphere,  the  sun, 
at  the  precise  moment  of  its  culmination,  passed  in  the  north 
and  not  in  the  south,  as,  in  its  apparent  movement,  it  seems 
to  do,  to  those  places  situated  in  the  northern  hemisphere. 

Every  thing  was  finished,  and  the  settlers  had  only  to  descend 
Mount  Franklin  to  return  to  the  Chimneys,  when  Pencroft 
cried  out,— 

“ Well ! we  are  preciously  stupid ! ” 

“ Why  ? ” asked  Gideon  Spilett,  who  had  closed  his  note-book 
and  risen  to  depart. 

“ Why ! our  island ! we  have  forgotten  to  christen  it ! ” 

Herbert  was  going  to  propose  to  give  it  the  engineer’s  name, 
and  all  his  companions  would  have  applauded  him,  when 
Cyrus  Harding  said  simply,— 

“Let  us  give  it  the  name  of  a great  citizen,  my  friends;  of 
him  who  now  struggles  to  defend  the  unity  of  the  American 
Republic  l Let  us  call  it  Lincoln  Island ! ” 


120 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


And  the  engineer’s  proposal  was  replied  to  by  three  hurraha 
And  that  evening,  before  sleeping,  the  new  colonist* 
talked  of  their  absent  country;  they  spoke  of  the  terrible 
war  which  stained  it  with  blood;  they  could  not  doubt  that 
the  South  would  soon  be  subdued,  and  that  the  cause  of  the 
North,  the  cause  of  justice,  would  triumph,  thanks  to  Grant, 
thanks  to  Lincoln ! 

Now  this  happened  the  30th  of  March,  1865.  They  little 
knew  that  sixteen  days  afterward  a frightful  crime  would  be 
committed  in  Washington,  and  that  on  Good  Friday  Abraham 
Lincoln  would  fall  by  the  hand  of  a fanatic. 


CHAPTER  XII. 


REGULATING  THE  WATCHES— PENCROFT  IS  SATISFIED— A SUSPIC- 
IOUS SMOKE— COURSE  OF  RED  CREEK— THE  FLORA  OF  LINCOLN 
ISLAND  — THE  FAUNA  — MOUNTAIN  PHEASANTS  — CHASING 
KANGAROOS  — AN  AGOUTI  — LAKE  GRANT  — RETURN  TO  THE 
CHIMNEYS. 

They  now  began  the  descent  of  the  mountain.  Climbing 
down  the  crater,  they  went  round  the  cone  and  reached  their 
encampment  of  the  previous  night.  Pencroft  thought  it  must 
be  breakfast  time,  and  the  watches  of  the  reporter  and  engi- 
neer were  therefore  consulted  to  find  out  the  hour. 

That  of  Gideon  Spilett  had  been  preserved  from  the  sea- 
water, as  he  had  been  thrown  at  once  on  the  sand  out  of  reach 
of  the  waves.  It  was  an  instrument  of  excellent  quality,  a 
perfect  pocket  chronometer,  which  the  reporter  had  not  forgot- 
ten to  wind  up  carefully  every  day. 

As  to  the  engineer’s  watch,  it,  of  course,  had  stopped  during 
the  time  which  he  had  passed  on  the  downs. 

The  engineer  now  wound  it  up,  and  ascertaining  by  the 
height  of  the  sun  that  it  must  be  about  nine  o’clock  in  the 
morning,  he  put  his  watch  at  that  hour. 

Gideon  Spilett  was  about  to  do  the  same,  when  the  engineer, 
stopping  his  hand,  said,— 

“No,  my  dear  Spilett,  wait.  You  have  kept  the  Richmond 
time,  have  you  not  ? ” 

“ Yes,  Cyrus.” 

“Consequently  your  watch  is  set  by  the  meridian  of  that 
town,  which  is  almost  that  of  Washington  ? ” 

“ Undoubtedly.” 

“Very  well,  keep  it  thus.  Content  yourself  with  winding  it 
up  very  exactly,  but  do  not  touch  the  hands.  This  may  be  of 

use  to  us.” 


121 


122 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


“ What  will  be  the  good  of  that  ? ” thought  the  sailor. 

They  ate,  and  so  heartily,  that  the  store  of  game  and  a^*ond3 
was  totally  exhausted.  But  Pencroft  was  not  at  all  uneasy,  they 
would  supply  themselves  on  the  way.  Top,  whose  share  had 
been  very  much  to  his  taste,  would  know  how  to  find  some 
fresh  game  among  the  brushwood.  Moreover,  the  sailor 
thought  of  simply  asking  the  engineer  to  manufacture  some 
powder  and  one  or  two  fowling-pieces;  he  supposed  there 
would  be  no  difficulty  in  that. 

On  leaving  the  plateau,  the  captain  proposed  to  his  com- 
panions to  return  to  the  Chimneys  by  a new  way.  He  wished 
to  reconnoiter  Lake  Grant,  so  magnificiently  framed  in  trees. 
They  therefore  followed  the  crest  of  one  of  the  spurs,  between 
which  the  creek*  that  supplied  the  lake  probably  had  its 
source.  In  talking,  the  settlers  already  employed  the  names 
which  they  had  just  chosen,  which  singularly  facilitated  the 
exchange  of  their  ideas.  Herbert  and  Pencroft  — the  one 
young  and  the  other  very  boyish— were  enchanted,  and  whilst 
walking  the  sailor  said,— 

“ Hey,  Herbert ! how  capital  it  sounds  ! It  will  be  impos- 
sible to  lose  ourselves,  my  boy,  since,  whether  we  follow 
the  way  to  Lake  Grant,  or  whether  we  join  the  Mercy 
through  the  woods  of  the  Far  West,  we  shall  be  certain  to 
arrive  at  Prospect  Heights,  and,  consequently,  at  Union 
Bay ! ” 

It  had  been  agreed,  that  without  forming  a compact  band, 
the  settlers  should  not  stray  away  from  each  other.  It  was 
very  certain  that  the  thick  forests  of  the  island  were  inhabited 
by  dangerous  animals,  and  it  was  prudent  to  be  on  their  guard. 
In  general,  Pencroft,  Herbert,  and  Neb,  walked  first,  preceded 
by  Top,  who  poked  his  nose  into  every  bush.  The  reporter 
and  the  engineer  went  together,  Gideon  Spilett  ready  to  note 
every  incident,  the  engineer  silent  for  the  most  part,  and  only 
stepping  aside  to  pick  up  sometimes  one  thing,  sometimes 
another,  a mineral  or  vegetable  substance,  which  he  put  into 
his  pocket  without  making  any  remark. 

“ What  can  he  be  picking  up  ? ” muttered  Pencroft.  “ I 


* An  American  name  for  a small  watercourse. 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


128 


have  looked  in  vain  for  any  thing  that’s  worth  the  trouble  of 
stooping  for.” 

Toward  ten  o’clock  the  little  band  descended  the  last  declivi- 
ties of  Mount  Franklin.  As  yet  the  ground  was  scantily 
strewn  with  bushes  and  trees.  They  were  walking  over  yel- 
lowish calcinated  earth,  forming  a plain  of  nearly  a mile  long, 
which  extended  to  the  edge  of  the  wood.  Great  mocks  of  that 
basalt,  which,  according  to  Bischof,  takes  three  hundred  and 
fifty  mi -i  ions  of  years  to  cool,  strewed  the  plain,  very  confused 
in  some  places.  However,  there  were  here  no  traces  of  lava, 
which  was  spread  more  particularly  over  the  northern  slopes. 

Cyruu  Harding  expected  to  reach,  without  incident,  the 
course  vi  tne  creek,  which  he  supposed  flowed  under  the  trees 
at  the  border  of  the  plain,  when  he  saw  Herbert  running 
hastily  back,  whilst  Neb  and  the  sailor  were  hiding  behind  the 
rocks. 

“What’s  the  matter,  my  boy  ?”  asked  Spilett. 

“ Smoke,”  replied  Herbert.  “We  have  seen  smoke  amongst 
the  rocks,  a hundred  paces  from  us.” 

“ Men  in  this  place  ? ” cried  the  reporter. 

“We  must  avoid  showing  ourselves  before  knowing  with 
whom  we  have  to  deal,”  replied  Oyrus  Hardiiig.  “ I trust  that 
there  are  no  natives  on  this  island  ; I dread,  them  more  than 
any  thing  else.  Where  is  Top  ? n 

“ Top  is  on  before.” 

“And  he  doesn’t  bark  ‘ ~ 

“No.” 

“ That  is  strange.  However  must  try  to  call  him  back.” 

In  a few  moments  the  engineer,  Gideon  Spilett,  and  Herbert 
had  rejoined  their  two  companions,  and  like  them,  they  kept 
out  of  sight  behind  the  heaps  of  basalt. 

From  thence  they  clearly  saw  smoke  of  a yellowish  color 
rising  in  the  air. 

Top  was  recalled  by  a slight  whistle  from  his  master,  and  the 
latter,  signing  to  his  companions  to  wait  for  him,  glided  away 
among  the  rocks.  The  colonists,  motionless,  anxiously  awaited 
the  result  of  this  exploration,  when  a shout  from  the  engineer 
made  them  hasten  forward.  They  soon  joined  him,  e,nd  were 


124 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


at  once  struck  with  a disagreeable  odor  which  impregnated  the 
atmosphere. 

The  odor,  easily  recognized,  was  enough  for  the  engineer  to 
guess  what  the  smoke  was  which  at  first,  not  without  cause, 
had  startled  him. 

“ This  fire,”  said  he,  “ or,  rather,  this  smoke,  is  produced  by 
nature  alone.  There  is  a sulphur  spring  there,  which  will 
effectually  cure  all  our  sore  throats.” 

“ Captain ! ” cried  Pencroft.  “ What  a pity  that  I haven’t  got 
a cold ! ” 

The  settlers  then  directed  their  steps  towards  the  place  from 
which  the  smoke  escaped.  They  there  saw  a sulphur  spring 
which  flowed  abundantly  between  the  rocks,  and  its  waters 
discharged  a strong  sulphuric  acid  odor,  after  having  absorbed 
the  oxygen  of  the  air. 

Cyrus  Harding,  dipping  in  his  hand,  felt  the  water  oily  to 
the  touch.  He  tasted  it  and  found  it  rather  sweet.  As  to  its 
temperature,  that  he  estimated  at  ninety-five  degrees  Fahrern 
heit.  Herbert  having  asked  on  what  he  based  this  calculation  : 

“ It’s  quite  simple,  my  boy,”  said  he,  “ for,  in  plunging  my 
hand  into  the  water,  I felt  no  sensation  either  of  heat  or  cold. 
Therefore  it  has  the  same  temperature  as  the  human  body, 
which  is  about  ninety-five  degrees.” 

The  sulphur  spring  not  being  of  any  actual  use  to  the  set- 
tlers, they  proceeded  towards  the  thick  border  of  the  forest, 
which  began  some  hundred  paces  off. 

There,  as  they  had  conjectured,  the  waters  of  the  stream 
flowed  clear  and  limped  between  high  banks  of  red  earth,  the 
color  of  which  betrayed  the  presence  of  oxide  of  iron.  From 
this  color,  the  name  of  Red  Creek  was  immediately  given  to 
the  watercourse. 

It  was  only  a large  stream,  deep  and  clear,  formed  of  the 
mountain  water,  which,  half  river,  half  torrent,  here  rippling 
peacefully  over  the  sand,  there  chafing  against  the  rocks  or 
dashing  down  in  a cascade,  ran  towards  the  lake,  over  a dis- 
tance of  a mile  and  a half,  its  breadth  varying  from  thirty  to 
forty  feet.  Its  waters  were  sweet,  and  it  was  supposed  that 
those  of  the  lake  were  so  also.  A fort'\nate  circumstance,  in 


DROPPED  EROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


125 


the  event  of  their  finding  on  its  borders  a more  suitable  dwell- 
ing than  the  Chimneys. 

As  to  the  trees,  which  some  hundred  feet  downwards  shaded 
the  banks  of  the  creek,  they  belonged,  for  the  most  part,  to  the 
species  which  abound  in  the  temperate  zone  of  America  and 
Tasmania,  and  no  longer  to  those  coniferse  observed  in  that 
portion  of  the  island  already  explored  to  some  miles  from 
Prospect  Heights.  At  this  time  of  the  year,  at  the  commence- 
ment of  the  month  of  April,  which  represents  the  month  of 
October  in  this  hemisphere,  that  is,  the  beginning  of  autumn, 
they  were  still  in  full  leaf.  They  consisted  principally  of 
casuarinas  and  eucalypti,  some  of  which  next  year  would  yield 
a sweet  manna,  similar  to  the  manna  of  the  East.  Clumps  of 
Australian  cedars  rose  on  the  sloping  banks,  which  were  also 
covered  with  the  high  grass  called  “ tussac  ” in  New  Holland  ; 
but  the  cocoa-nut,  so  abundant  in  the  archipelagos  of  the 
Pacific,  seemed  to  be  wanting  in  the  island,  the  latitude,  doubt- 
less, being  too  low. 

“ What  a pity ! ” said  Herbert,  “ such  a useful  tree,  and  which 
has  such  beautiful  nuts.” 

As  to  the  birds,  they  swarmed  among  the  scanty  branches  of 
the  eucalypti  and  casuarinas,  which  did  not  hinder  the  display 
of  their  wings.  Black,  white,  or  gray  cookatoos,  paroquets, 
with  plumage  of  all  colors,  kingfishers  of  a sparkling  green 
and  crowned  with  red,  blue  lories,  and  various  other  birds, 
appeared  on  all  sides,  as  through  a prism,  fluttering  about, 
and  producing  a deafening  clamor.  Suddenly,  a strange 
concert  of  discordant  voices  resounded  in  the  midst  of  a 
thicket.  The  settlers  heard  successively  the  song  of  birds,  the 
cry  of  quadrupeds,  and  a sort  of  cackling  which  they  might 
have  believed  to  have  escaped  from  the  lips  of  a native.  Neb 
and  Herbert  rushed  towards  the  bush,  forgeting  even  the 
elementary  principles  of  prudence.  Happily,  they  found  there, 
neither  a formidable  wild  beast  nor  a dangerous  native,  but 
merely  half  a dozen  mocking  and  singing  birds,  known  as 
mountain  pheasants.  A few  skillful  blows  from  a stick  soon 
put  an  end  to  their  concert*  and  procured  excellent  food  for 
the  evening’s  dinner. 


m 


THE  LAKESIDE  ^ggSflON. 


Herbert  also  discovered  some  Munificent  pigeons  with 
bronzed  wings,  some  superbly  crested,  others  draped  in  green, 
like  their  congeners  at  Port-Macqimd©  ; but  it  was  impossible 
to  reach  them,  or  the  crows  and  magpies  which  flew  away  in 
flocks.  A charge  of  small  shot  would  have  made  great  slaughter 
amongst  these  birds,  but  the  hunters  were  still  limited  to  sticks 
and  stones,  and  these  primitive  weapons  proved  very  insuffi- 
cient. 

Their  insufficiency  was  still  more  clearly  shown  when  a troop 
of  quadrupeds,  jumping,  bounding,  making  leaps  of  thirty 
feet,  regular  flying  mamiferse,  fled  over  the  thickets,  so  quickly 
and  at  such  a height,  that  one  would  have  thought  that  they 
passed  from  one  tree  to  another  like  squirrels. 

“ Kangaroos  ! ” cried  Herbert. 

“Are  they  good  to  eat  ? 99  asked  Pencroft. 

“ Stewed,”  replied  the  reporter,  “ their  flesh  is  equal  to  the 
best  vension— ” 

Gideon  Spilett  had  not  finished  this  exciting  sentence  when 
the  sailor,  followed  by  Neb  and  Herbert,  darted  on  the  kanga- 
roo’s track.  Cyrus  Harding  called  them  back  in  vain.  But  it 
was  in  vain  too  for  the  hunters  to  pursue  such  agile  game, 
which  went  bounding  away  like  balls.  After  a chase  of  five 
minutes,  they  lost  their  breath,  and  at  the  same  time  all  sight 
cf  the  creatures,  which  disappeared  in  the  wood.  Top  was  not 
more  successful  than  his  masters. 

“ Captain,”  said  Pencroft,  when  the  engineer  and  the  reporter 
iiad  rejoined  them,  “ Captain,  you  see  quite  well  we  can’t  get 
on  unless  we  make  a few  guns.  Will  that  be  possible  ? ” 

“ Perhaps,”  replied  the  engineer,  “ but  we  will  begin  by  first 
manufacturing  some  bows  and  arrows,  and  I don’t  doubt  that 
you  will  become  as  clever  in  the  use  of  them  as  the  Australian 
hunters.” 

61  Bows  and  arrows ! ” said  Pencroft  scornfully.  “ That’s  all 
very  well  for  children  ! ” 

“ Don’t  be  proud,  friend  Pencroft,”  replied  the  reporter. 
**  Bows  and  arrows  were  sufficient  for  centuries  to  stain  the 
earth  with  blood.  Powder  is  but  a thing  of  yesterday,  and  war 
is  as  old  as  the  human  race- -unhappily  I ” 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


127 


“Faith,  that’s  true,  Mr.  Spilett,”  replied  the  sailor,  “and 
I always  speak  too  quickly.  You  must  excuse  me ! ” 

Meanwhile,  Herbert,  constant  to  his  favorite  science,  Natural 
History,  reverted  to  the  kangaroos,  saying  : 

“Besides,  we  had  to  deal  just  now  with  the  species  which 
is  most  difficult  to  catch.  They  were  giants  with  long  gray 
fur;  but  if  I am  not  mistaken,  there  exist  black  and  red 
kangaroos,  'rock  kangaroos,  and  rat  kangaroos,  which  are 
more  easy  to  get  hold  of.  It  is  reckoned  that  there  are  about  a 
dozen  species—” 

“ Herbert,”  replied  the  sailor  sententiously,  “ there  is  only  one 
species  of  kangaroo  to  me,  that  is  4 kangaroo  on  the  spit,’  and 
it’s  just  the  one  we  haven’t  got  this  evening ! ” 

They  could  not  help  laughing  at  Master  Pencroft’s  new 
classification.  The  honest  sailor  did  not  hide  his  regret  at  being 
reduced  for  dinner  to  the  singing  pheasants,  but  fortune 
once  more  showed  itself  obliging  to  him. 

In  fact.  Top,  who  felt  that  his  interest  was  concerned,  went 
and  ferreted  every  where  with  an  instinct  doubled  by  a fero- 
cious appetite.  It  was  even  probable  that  if  some  piece  of 
game  did  fall  into  his  clutches,  none  would  be  left  for  the 
hunters,  if  Top  was  hunting  on  his  own  account;  but  Neb 
watched  him  and  he  did  well. 

Towards  three  o’clock  the  dog  disappeared  in  the  brush- 
wood, and  grantings  showed  that  he  was  engaged  in  a 
struggle  with  some  animal.  Neb  rushed  after  him,  and  soon 
saw  Top  eagerly  devouring  a quadruped, . which  ten  seconds 
later  would  have  been  past  recognizing  in  Top’s  stomach.  But 
fortunately  the  dog  had  fallen  upon  a brood,  and  besides  the 
victim  he  was  devouring,  two  other  rodents— the  animals  in 
question  belonged  to  that  order— lay  strangled  on  the  turf. 

Neb  reappeared  triumphantly  holding  one  of  the  rodents 
in  each  hand.  Their  size  exceeded  that  of  a rabbit,  their 
hair  was  yellow,  mingled  with  greenish  spots,  and  they  had 
the  merest  rudiments  of  tails. 

The  citizens  of  the  Union  were  at  no  loss  for  the  right 
name  of  these  rodents.  They  were  maras,  a sort  of  agouti,  a 
little  larger  than  their  congeners  of  tropical  countries,  regular 


m 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


American  rabbits,  with  long  ears,  jaws  armed  on  each  side 
with  five  molars,  which  distinguish  the  agouti. 

“ Hurrah ! ” cried  Pencroft,  “ the  roast  has  arrived ! and  now 
we  can  go  home.” 

The  walk,  interrupted  for  an  instant,  was  resumed.  The 
limpid  waters  of  the  Red  Creek  flowed  under  an  arch  of 
casuarinas,  banksias,  and  gigantic  gum-trees.  Superb  lilacs 
rose  to  a height  of  twenty  feet.  Other  arborescent  species, 
unknown  to  the  young  naturalist,  bent  over  the  stream, 
which  could  be  heard  murmuring  beneath  the  bowers  of 
verdure. 

Meanwhile  the  stream  grew  much  wider,  and  Cyrus  Hard- 
ing supposed  that  they  would  soon  reach  its  mouth.  In  fact, 
on  emerging  from  beneath  a thick  clump  of  beautiful  trees, 
it  appeared  all  at  once. 

The  explorers  had  arrived  on  the  western  shore  of  Lake 
Grant.  The  place  was  well  worth  looking  at.  This  extent  of 
water,  of  a circumference  of  nearly  seven  miles  and  an  area 
of  two  hundred  and  fifty  acres,  reposed  in  a border  of  diversi- 
fied trees.  Towards  the  east,  through  a curtain  of  verdure, 
picturesquely  raised  in  some  places,  sparkled  an  horizon  of 
sea.  The  lake  was  curved  at  the  north,  which  contrasted  with 
the  sharp  outline  of  its  lower  part.  Numerous  aquatic  birds 
frequented  the  shores  of  this  little  Ontario,  in  which  the 
thousand  isles  of  its  American  namesake  were  representedjby 
a rock  which  emerged  from  its  surface,  some  hundred  feet 
from  the  southern  shore.  There  lived  in  harmony  several 
couples  of  kingfishers  perched  on  a stone,  grave,  motionless, 
watching  for  fish,  then  darting  down,  they  plunged  in  with  a 
sharp  cry,  and  reappeared  with  their  prey  in  their  beaks.  On 
the  shores  and  on  the  islets,  strutted  wild  ducks,  pelicans, 
waterhens,  red-beaks,  philedons,  furnished  with  a tongue 
like  a brush,  >nd  one  or  two  specimens  of  the  splendid 
menura,  the  tail  of  which  expands  gracefully  like  a lyre. 

As  to  the  water  of  the  lake,  it  was  sweet,  limpid,  rather  dark, 
and  from  certain  bubblings,  and  the  concentric  circles  which 
crossed  each  other  on  the  surface,  it  could  not  be  doubted  that 
it  abounded  in  fish. 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


“This  lake  is  really  beautiful!”  said  Gideon  SpiletL  “We 
could  live  on  its  borders  !” 

“ We  will  live  there  ! ” replied  Harding. 

The  settlers,  wishing  to  return  to  the  Chimneys  by  the  short- 
est way,  descended  towards  the  angle  formed  on  the  south  by 
the  junction  of  the  lake’s  bank.  It  was  not  without  difficulty 
that  they  broke  a path  through  the  thickets  and  brushwood 
which  had  never  been  put  aside  by  the  hand  of  man,  and 
they  thus  went  towards  the  shore,  so  as  to  arrive  at  the  north 
of  Prospect  Heights.  Two  miles  were  cleared  in  this  direction, 
and  then,  after  they  had  passed  the  last  curtain  of  trees,  ap- 
peared the  plateau,  carpeted  with  thick  turf,  and  beyond  that 
the  infinite  sea. 

To  return  to  the  Chimneys,  it  was  enough  to  cross  the 
plateau  obliquely  for  the  space  of  a mile,  and  then  to  descend 
to  the  elbow  formed  by  the  first  detour  of  the  Mercy.  But  the 
engineer  desired  to  know  how  and  where  the  overplus  of  the 
water  from  the  lake  escaped,  and  the  exploration  was  pro- 
longed under  the  trees  for  a mile  and  a half  towards  the 
north.  It  was  most  probable  that  an  overfall  existed  some- 
where, and  doubtless  through  a cleft  in  the  granite.  This  lake 
was  only,  in  short,  an  immense  centre  basin,  which  was  filled 
by  degrees  by  the  creek,  and  its  waters  must  necessarily  pass 
to  the  sea  by  some  fall.  If  it  was  so,  the  engineer  thought 
that  it  might  perhaps  be  possible  to  utilize  this  fall  and  borrow 
its  power,  actually  lost  without  profit  to  any  one.  They  con- 
tinued then  to  follow  the  shores  of  Lake  Grant  by  climbing  the 
plateau;  but,  after  having  gone  a mile  in  this  direction,  Cyrus 
Harding  had  not  been  able  to  discover  the  overfall,  which,  how- 
ever, must  exist  somewhere.  It  was  then  half-past  four.  In 
order  to  prepare  for  dinner  it  was  necessary  that  the  settlers 
should  return  to  their  dwelling.  The  little  band  retraced  their 
steps,  therefore,  and  by  the  left  bank  of  the  Mercy,  Cyrus 
Harding  and  his  companions  arrived  at  the  Chimneys. 

The  fire  was  lighted,  and  Neb  and  Pencroft,  on  whom  the 
functions  of  cooks  naturally  devolved,  to  the  one  in  his  quality 
of  negro,  to  the  other  in  that  of  sailor,  quickly  prepared 
some  broiled  agouti,  to  which  they  did  great  justice. 

9 


130 


TEE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


1 The  repast  at  length  terminated;  at  the  moment  when  each 
one  was  about  to  give  himself  up  to  sleep,  Cyrus  Harding 
drew  from  his  pocket  little  specimens  of  different  sorts  of 
minerals,  and  just  said,— 

“ My  friends,  this  is  iron  mineral,  this  a pyrite,  this  is  clay, 
this  is  lime,  and  this  is  coal.  Nature  gives  us  these  things.  It 
is  our  business  to  make  a right  use  of  them.  To-morrow  W6 
will  commence  operations.” 


CHAPTER  XIII. 


WHAT  IS  FOUND  UPON  TOP— MANUFACTURING  BOWS  AND  ARROWS 
—A  BRICK-FIELD— A POTTERY— DIFFERENT  COOKING  UTENSILS 
—THE  FIRST  BOILED  ME  AT  — WORMWOOD— THE  SOUTHERN 
CROSS— AN  IMPORTANT  ASTRONOMICAL  OBSERVATION. 

“Well,  Captain,  where  are  we  going  to  begin?”  asked  Pen- 
croft  next  morning  of  the  engineer. 

“ At  the  beginning,”  cried  Cyrus  Harding. 

And  in  fact,  the  settlers  were  compelled  to  begin  “ at  the  very 
beginning.”  They  did  not  possess  even  the  tools  necessary 
for  making  tools,  and  they  were  not  even  in  the  condition  of 
nature,  who,  “ having  time,  husbands  her  strength.”  They  had 
no  time,  since  they  had  to  provide  for  the  immediate  wants  of 
their  existence,  and  though,  profiting  by  acquired  experience, 
they  had  nothing  to  invent,  still  they  had  every  thing  to  make: 
their  iron  and  their  steel  were  as  yet  only  in  the  state  of  min- 
erals, their  earthenware  in  the  state  of  clay,  their  linen  and 
their  clothes  iD  the  state  of  textile  material. 

It  must  be  said,  however,  that  the  settlers  were  “men”ia 
the  complete  and  higher  sense  of  the  word.  The  engineer 
Harding  could  not  have  been  seconded  by  more  intelligent 
companions,  nor  with  more  devotion  and  zeal.  He  had  tried 
them.  He  knew  their  abilities. 

Gideon  Spiiett,  a talented  reporter,  having  learned  every 
thing  so  as  to  be  able  to  speak  of  every  thing,  would  con- 
tribute largely  with  his  head  and  hands  to  the  colonization  of 
the  island.  He  would  not  draw  back  from  any  task  : a deter- 
mined sportsman,  he  would  make  a business  of  what  till  then 
had  only  been  a pleasure  to  him. 

Herbert,  a gallant  boy,  already  remarkably  well  informed  in 

181 


132 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


the  natural  sciences,  would  render  great  service  to  the  common 
cause. 

Neb  was  devotion  personified.  Clever,  intelligent,  indefatig- 
able, robust,  with  iron  health,  he  knew  a little  about  the  work 
of  the  forge,  and  could  not  fail  to  be  very  useful  in  the  colony. 

As  to  Pencroft,  he  had  sailed  over  every  sea,  a carpenter  in 
the  dockyards  at  Brooklyn,  assistant  tailor  in  the  vessels  of  the 
state,  gardener,  cultivator,  during  his  holidays,  etc.,  and  like  all 
seamen,  fit  for  any  thing,  he  knew  how  to  do  every  thing. 

It  would  have  been  difficult  to  unite  five  men,  better  fitted  to 
struggle  against  fate,  more  certain  to  triumph  over  it. 

“At  the  beginning,”  Cyrus  Harding  had  said.  Now  this 
beginning  of  which  the  engineer  spoke  was  the  construction  of 
an  apparatus  which  would  serve  to  transform  the  natural  sub- 
stances. The  part  which  heat  plays  in  these  transformations 
is  known.  Now  fuel,  wood  or  coal,  was  ready  for  immediate 
use,  an  oven  must  be  built  to  use  it. 

“ What  is  this  oven  for  ? ” asked  Pencroft. 

“To  make  the  pottery  which  we  have  need  of,”  replied 
Harding. 

“ And  of  what  shall  we  make  the  oven  ?” 

“With  bricks.” 

“ And  the  bricks?  ” 

“With  clay.  Let  us  start,  my  friends.  To  save  trouble,  we 
will  establish  our  manufactory  at  the  place  of  production.  Neb 
will  bring  provisions,  and  there  will  be  no  lack  of  fire  to  cook 
the  food.” 

“ No,”  replied  the  reporter  ; “ but  if  there  is  a lack  of  food, 
for  want  of  instruments  for  the  chase  ? ” 

“ Ah,  if  we  only  had  a knife ! ” cried  the  sailor. 

“ Well  ? ” asked  Cyrus  Harding. 

“ Well ! I would  soon  make  a bow  and  arrows,  and  then 
there  would  be  plenty  of  game  in  the  larder  ! ” 

“ Yes,  a knife,  a sharp  blade—”  said  the  engineer,  as  if  he 
was  speaking  to  himself. 

At  this  moment  his  eyes  fell  upon  Top,  who  was  running 
about  on  the  shore.  Suddenly  Harding’s  face  became  ani- 
mated. 


CROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


138 


* Top,  hete?v*  said  he. 

The  dog  came  at  his  master’s  call.  The  latter  took  Top’s 
head  between  his  hands,  and  unfastening  the  collar  which  the 
animal  wore  round  his  neck,  he  broke  it  in  two,  saying,— 

“ There  are  two  knives,  Pencroft ! ” 

Two  hurrahs  from  the  sailor  was  the  reply.  Top’s  collar 
was  made  of  a thin  piece  of  tempered  steel.  They  had  only  to 
sharpen  it  on  a piece  of  sandstone,  then  to  raise  the  edge  on  a 
finer  stone.  Now  sandstone  was  abundant  on  the  beach,  and 
two  hours  after  the  stock  of  tools  in  the  colony  consisted  of  two 
sharp  blades,  which  were  easily  fixed  in  solid  handles. 

The  production  of  these  their  first  tools  was  hailed  as  a 
triumph.  It  was  indeed  a valuable  result  of  their  labor,  and 
a very  opportune  one.  Tney  set  out.  Cyrus  Harding  proposed 
that  they  should  return  to  the  western  shore  of  the  lake, 
where  the  day  before  he  had  noticed  the  clayey  ground  of 
which  he  possessed  a specimen.  They  therefore  rollowed  the 
bank  of  the  Mercy,  traversed  Prospect  Heights,  and  after  a walk 
of  five  miles  or  more  they  reached  a glade,  situated  two 
hundred  feet  from  Lake  Grant. 

On  the  way  Herbert  had  discovered  a tree,  the  branches  of 
which  the  Indians  of  South  America  employ  for  making  their 
bows.  It  was  the  crejimba,  of  the  palm  ramny,  which  does 
not  bear  edible  fruit.  Long  straight  brancnes  were  cut,  the 
leaves  stripped  off ; it  was  shaped,  stronger  in  the  middle, 
* more  slender  at  the  extremities,  and  nothing  remained  to  be 
done  but  to  find  a plant  fit  to  make  the  bow-string.  This  was 
the  “hibiscus  heterophyllus,”  which  furnishes  fibres  of  such 
remarkable  tenacity  that  they  have  been  compared  to  the 
tendons  of  animals.  Pen  croft  thus  obtained  bows  or  tolerable 
strength,  for  which  he  only  wanted  arrows.  These  were  easily 
made  with  straight  stiff  branches,  without  knots,  but  the  points 
with  which  they  must  be  armed,  that  is  to  say,  a substance  to 
serve  in  lieu  of  iron,  could  not  be  met  with  so  easily.  But 
Pencroft  said,  that  having  done  his  part  of  the  work,  chance 
would  do  the  rest. 

The  settlers  arrived  on  the  ground  which  had  been  discov- 
ered the  day  before.  Being  composed  of  the  sort  of  clay  which 


134 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


is  used  for  making  bricks  and  tiles,  it  was  very  useful  for  the 
work  in  question.  There  was  no  great  difficulty  in  it.  It  was 
enough  to  scour  the  clay  with  sand,  then  to  mould  the  bricks 
and  bake  them  by  the  heat  of  a wood  fire. 

Generally  bricks  are  formed  in  moulds,  but  the  engineer 
contented  himself  with  making  them  by  hand.  All  that  day 
and  the  day  following  were  employed  in  this  work.  The  clay, 
soaked  in  water,  was  mixed  by  the  feet  and  hands  of  the 
manipulators,  and  then  divided  into  pieces  of  equal  size.  A 
practised  workman  can  make,  without  a machine,  about  ten 
thousand  bricks  in  twelve  hours  ; but  in  their  two  days’  work 
the  five  brick-makers  on  Lincoln  Island  had  not  made  more 
than  three  thousand,  which  were  ranged  near  each  other, 
until  the  time  when  their  complete  desiccation  would  permit 
them  to  be  used  in  building  the  oven,  that  is  to  say,  in  three  or 
four  days. 

It  was  on  the  2nd  of  April  that  Harding  had  employed  him- 
self in  fixing  the  orientation  of  the  island,  or,  in  other  words, 
the  precise  spot  where  the  sun  rose.  The  day  before  he  had 
noted  exactly  the  hour  when  the  sun  disappeared  beneath  the 
horizon,  making  allowance  for  the  refraction.  This  morninct 
he  noted,  no  less  exactly,  the  hour  at  which  it  reappeared. 
Between  this  setting  and  rising  twelve  hours  twenty -four 
minutes  passed.  Then,  six  hours,  twelve  minutes  afhr  ^ 
rising,  the  sun  on  this  day  would  exactly  pass  the  meridian^ 
and  the  point  of  the  sky  which  it  occupied  at  this  mom 
would  be  the  north.* 

At  the  said  hour,  Cyrus  marked  V.r.z  point,  and  putting  ir*  ° 
line  with  the  sun  two  trees  which  would  serve  him  for  mar^  , 
he  thus  obtained  an  invariable  meridian  for  his  ulterior  op<n^ 
tions. 

The  settlers  employed  the  two  days  before  the  oven  was  built 
in  collecting  fuel.  Branches  were  cut  all  round  the  glai^ 
and  they  picked  up  all  tho  fallen  wood  under  the  trees.  They 
were  also  able  to  hunt  with  greater  success,  since  Pencroft  now 

* Indeed  at  this  time  of  the  year  and  in  this  latitude  the  sun  rises 
at  33  minutes  past  5 in  the  morning,  and  sets  at  IT  minutes  past  6 in 
the  evening. 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


135 


possessed  some  dozen  arrows  armed  with  sharp  points.  It  was 
Top  who  had  furnished  these  Bpoints,  by  bringing  in  a porcu- 
pine, rather  inferior  eating,  but  of  great  value,  thanks  to  the 
quills  with  which  it  bristled.  These  quills  were  fixed  firmly  at 
the  ends  of  the  arrows,  the  flight  of  which  was  made  more 
certain  by  some  cockatoos’  feathers.  The  reporter  and  Her- 
bert soon  became  very  skillful  archers.  Game  of  all  sorts  in 
consequence  abounded  at  the  Chimneys,  capybaras,  pigeons, 
agoutis,  grouse,  etc.  The  greater  part  of  these  animals  were 
killed  in  the  part  of  the  forest  on  the  left  bank  of  the  Mercy,  to 
which  they  gave  the  name  of  Jacamar  Wood,  in  remembrance 
of  the  bird  which  Pencroft  and  Herbert  had  pursued  when  on 
their  first  exploration. 

This  game  was  eaten  fresh,  but  they  preserved  some  capy- 
bara  hams,  by  smoking  them  above  a fire  of  green  wood,  after 
having  perfumed  them  with  sweet-smelling  leaves.  However, 
this  food,  although  very  strengthening,  was  always  roast  upon 
roast,  and  the  party  would  have  been  delighted  to  hear  some 
soup  bubbling  on  the  hearth,  but  they  must  wait  till  a pot  could 
be  made,  and,  consequently,  till  the  oven  was  built. 

During  these  excursions,  which  were  not  extended  far  from 
the  brick-field,  the  hunters  could  discern  the  recent  passage 
of  animals  of  a large  size,  armed  with  powerful  claws,  buu 
they  could  not  recognize  the  species.  Cyrus  Harding  advised 
them  to  be  careful,  as  the  forest  probably  enclosed  many  danger- 
ous beasts. 

And  he  did  right.  Indeed,  Gideon  Spilett  and  Herbert  one 
day  saw  an  animal  which  resembled  a jaguar.  Happily  the 
creature  did  not  attack  them,  or  they  might  not  have  escaped 
without  a severe  wound. 

As  soon  as  he  could  get  a regular  weapon,  that  is  to  say, 
one  of  the  guns  which  Pencroft  begged  for,  Gideon  Spilett 
resolved  to  make  desperate  war  against  the  ferocious  beasts, 
and  exterminate  them  from  the  island. 

The  Chimneys  during  these  few  days  was  not  made  more 
comfortable,  for  the  engineer  hoped  to  discover,  or  build  if 
necessary,  a more  convenient  dwelling.  They  contented  them- 
selves with  spreading  moss  and  dry  leaves  on  the  sand  of  the 


136 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


passages,  and  on  these  primitive  couches  the  tired  workers 
slept  soundly. 

They  also  reckoned  the  days  they  had  passed  on  Lincoln 
Island,  and  from  that  time  kept  a regular  account.  The  6th 
of  April,  which  was  Wednesday,  was  twelve  days  from  the  time 
when  the  wind  threw  the  castaways  on  this  shore. 

On  the  6th  of  April,  at  daybreak,  the  engineer  and  his  com- 
panions were  collected  in  the  glade,  at  the  place  where  they 
were  going  to  perform  the  operation  of  baking  the  bricks. 
Naturally  this  had  to  be  in  the  open  air,  and  not  in  a kiln,  or 
rather  the  agglomeration  of  bricks  made  an  enormous  kiln, 
which  would  bake  itself.  The  fuel,  made  of  well-prepared 
fagots,  was  laid  on  the  ground  and  surrounded  with  several 
rows  of  dried  bricks,  which  soon  formed  an  enormous  cube, 
to  the  exterior  of  which  they  contrived  air-holes.  The  work 
lasted  all  day,  and  it  was  not  till  the  evening  that  they  set  fire 
to  the  fagots.  None  slept  that  night,  all  watching  carefully 
to  keep  up  the  fire. 

The  operation  lasted  forty-eight  hours,  and  succeeded  per- 
fectly. It  then  became  necessary  to  leave  the  smoking  mass 
to  cool,  and  during  this  time  Neb  and  Pencroft,  guided 
by  Cyrus  Harding,  brought,  on  a hurdle  made  of  interlaced 
branches,  loads  of  carbonate  of  lime  and  common  stones,  which 
were  very  abundant,  to  the  north  of  the  lake.  These  stones, 
when  decomposed  by  heat,  made  a very  strong  quicklime, 
greatly  increased  by  slacking,  at  least  as  pure  as  if  it  had  been 
produced  by  the  calcination  of  chalk  or  marble.  Mixed  with 
sand  the  lime  made  excellent  mortar.  The  result  of  these 
different  works  was,  that,  on  the  9th  of  April,  the  engineer  had 
at  his  disposal  a quantity  of  prepared  lime  and  some  thousands 
of  bricks. 

Without  losing  an  instant,  therefore,  they  began  the  construc- 
tion of  a kiln  to  bake  the  pottery,  which  was  indispensable 
for  their  domestic  use.  They  succeeded  without  much  difficulty. 
Five  days  after,  the  kiln  was  supplied  with  coal,  which  the 
engineer  had  discovered  lying  open  to  the  sky  towards  the 
mouth  of  the  Red  Creek,  and  the  first  smoke  escaped  from  a 
chimney  twenty  feet  high.  The  glade  was  transformed  into  a 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


137 


manufactory,  and  Pencroft  was  not  far  wrong  in  believing 
that  from  this  kiln  would  issue  all  the  products  of  modern 
industry. 

In  the  meantime  what  the  settlers  first  manufactured  was 
a common  pottery  in  which  to  cook  their  food.  The  chief 
material  was  clay,  to  which  Harding  added  a little  lime  and 
quartz.  This  paste  made  regular  “ pipe-clay,”  with  which  they 
manufactured  bowls,  cups  moulded  on  stones  of  a proper  size, 
great  jars  and  pots  to  hold  water,  etc.  The  shape  of  these 
objects  was  clumsy  and  defective,  but  after  they  had  been 
baked  in  a high  temperature,  the  kitchen  of  the  Chimneys 
was  provided  with  a number  of  utensils,  as  precious  to  the 
settlers  as  the  most  beautifully  enameled  china.  We  must 
mention  here  that  Pencroft,  desirous  to  know  if  the  clay  thus 
prepared  was  worthy  of  its  name  of  pipe-clay,  made  some  large 
pipes,  which  he  thought  charming,  but  for  which,  alas  ! he  had 
no  tobacco,  and  that  was  a great  privation  to  Pencroft.  “ But 
tobacco  will  come,  like  every  thing  else !”  he  repeated,  in  a 
burst  of  absolute  confidence. 

This  work  lasted  till  the  15th  of  April,  and  the  time  was  well 
employed.  The  settlers,  having  become  potters,  made  nothing 
but  pottery.  When  it  suited  Cyrus  Harding  to  change  them 
into  smiths,  they  would  become  smiths.  But  the  next  day  being 
Sunday,  and  also  Easter  Sunday,  all  agreed  to  sanctify  the 
day  by  rest.  These  Americans  were  religious  men,  scrupulous 
observers  of  the  precepts  of  the  Bible,  and  their  situation  could 
not  but  develop  sentiments  of  confidence  towards  the  Author 
of  all  things. 

On  the  evening  of  the  15th  of  April  they  returned  to  the 
Chimneys,  carrying  with  them  the  pottery,  the  furnace  being 
extinguished  until  they  could  put  it  to  a new  use.  Their  re- 
turn was  marked  by  a fortunate  incident;  the  engineer  dis- 
covered a substance  which  replaced  tinder.  It  is  known  that 
a spungy,  velvety  flesh  is  procured  from  a certain  mushroom 
of  the  genus  polyporous.  Properly  prepared,  it  is  extremely 
inflammable,  especially  when  it  has  been  previously  saturated 
with  gunpowder,  or  boiled  in  a solution  of  nitrate  or  chlorate 
of  potash.  But,  till  then,  they  had  not  found  any  of  these 


188 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


polypores  or  even  any  of  the  morels  which  could  replace  them. 
On  this  day,  the  engineer,  seeing  a plant  belonging  to  the 
wormwood  genus,  the  principal  species  of  which  are  absinthe, 
balm-mint,  tarragon,  etc.,  gathered  several  tufts,  and,  present- 
ing them  to  the  sailor,  said,— 

“ Here,  Pencroft,  this  will  please  you.” 

Pencroft  looked  attentively  at  the  plant,  covered  with  long 
silky  hair,  the  leaves  being  clothed  with  soft  down. 

: “ What’s  that,  captain  ? ” asked  Pencroft.  “ Is  it  tobacco  V ” 
“No,”  replied  Harding,  “it  is  wormwood;  Chinese  worm- 
wood to  the  learned,  but  to  us  it  will  he  tinder.” 

When  the  wormwood  was  properly  dried  it  provided  them 
with  a very  inflammable  substance,  especially  afterwards  when 
the  engineer  had  impregnated  it  with  nitrate  of  potash,  of 
which  the  island  possessed  several  beds,  and  which  is  in 
truth  saltpetre. 

The  colonists  had  a good  supper  that  evening.  Neb  pre- 
pared some  agouti  soup,  a smoked  capybara  ham,  to  which 
was  added  the  boiled  tubercules  of  the  “caladium  macrorhi- 
zum,”  an  herbaceous  plant  of  the  arum  family.  They  had  an 
excellent  taste,  and  were  very  nutritious,  being  something 
similar  to  the  substance  which  is  sold  in  England  under  the 
name  of  “Portland  sago;”  they  were  also  a good  substitute  for 
bread,  which  the  settlers  in  Lincoln  Island  did  not  yet  possess. 

When  supper  was  finished,  before  sleeping,  Harding  and 
his  companions  went  to  take  the  air  on  the  beach.  It  was  eight 
o'clock  in  the  evening;  the  night  was  magnificent.  The  moon, 
which  had  been  full  five  days  before,  had  not  yet  risen,  but 
the  horizon  was  already  silvered  by  those  soft,  pale  shades 
which' might  be  called  the  dawn  of  the  moon.  At  the  southern 
zenith  glittered  the  circumpolar  constellations,  and  above  all 
the  Southern  Cross,  which  some  days  before  the  engineer  had 
greeted  on  the  summit  of  Mount  Franklin. 

Cyrus  Harding  gazed  for  some  lime  at  this  splendid  con- 
stellation, which  has  at  its  summit  and  at  its  base  two  stars 
of  the  first  magnitude,  at  its  left  arm  a star  of  the  second,  and 
at  its  right  arm  a star  of  the  third  magnitude. 

Then,  after  some  minutes’  thought— 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


189 


“Herbert,”  he  asked  of  the  lad,  “is  not  this  the  15th  of 
April  ?” 

“ Yes,  captain,”  replied  Herbert. 

“Well,  if  I am  not  mistaken,  to-morrow  will  be  one  of  the 
four  days  in  the  year  in  which  the  real  time  is  identical  with 
average  time ; that  is  to  say,  my  boy,  that  to-morrow,  to  within 
some  seconds,  the  sun  will  pass  the  meridian  just  at  mid-day 
by  the  clocks.  If  the  weather  is  fine  I think  that  I shall 
obtain  the  longitude  of  the  island  with  an  approximation  of 
some  degrees.” 

“ Without  instruments,  without  sextant  ? ” asked  Gideon 
Spilett. 

“Yes,”  replied  the  engineer.  “Also,  since  the  night  is  clear, 
I will  try,  this  very  evening,  to  obtain  our  latitude  by  cal- 
culating the  height  of  the  Southern  Cross,  that  is,  from  the 
southern  pole  above  the  horizon.  You  understand,  my  friends, 
that  before  undertaking  the  work  of  installation  in  earnest  it 
is  not  enough  to  have  found  out  that  this  land  is  an  island;  we 
must,  as.nearly  as  possible,  know  at  what  distance  it  is  situated, 
either  from  the  American  continent  or  Australia,  or  from  the 
principal  archipelagos  of  the  Pacific.” 

“ In  fact,”  said  the  reporter,  “ instead  of  building  a house  it 
would  be  more  important  to  build  a boat,  if  by  chance  we  are 
not  more  than  a hundred  miles  from  an  inhabited  coast.” 

“ That  is  why,”  returned  Harding,  “ I am  going  to  try  this 
evening  to  calculate  the  latitude  of  Lincoln  Island,  and  to-mor- 
row, at  mid-day,  I will  try  to  calculate  the  longitude.” 

If  the  engineer  had  possessed  a sextant,  an  apparatus  with 
which  the  angular  distance  of  objects  can  be  measured  with 
great  precision,  there  would  have  been  no  difficulty  in  the 
operation.  This  evening  by  the  height  of  the  pole,  the  next 
day  by  the  passing  of  the  sun  at  the  meridian,  he  would 
obtain  the  position  of  the  island.  But  as  they  had  not  one 
he  would  have  to  supply  the  deficiency. 

Harding  then  entered  the  Chimneys.  By  the  light  of  the 
fire  he  cut  two  little  flat  rulers,  which  he  joined  together  at 
one  end  so  as  to  form  a pair  of  compasses,  whose  legs  could 
eparate  or  come  together.  The  fastening  was  fixed  with  a 


140 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


strong  acacia  thorn  which  was  found  in  the  wood  pile.  This 
instrument  finished,  the  engineer  returned  to  the  beach,  but 
as  it  was  necessary  to  take  the  height  of  the  pole  from  above  a 
clear  horizon,  that  is,  a sea  horizon,  and  as  Claw  Cape  hid 
the  southern  horizon,  he  was  obliged  to  look  for  a more 
suitable  station.  The  best  would  evidently  have  been  the  shore 
exposed  directly  to  the  south  ; but  the  Mercy  would  have  to  be 
crossed,  and  that  was  a difficulty.  Harding  resolved,  in  conse- 
quence, to  make  his  observation  from  Prospect  Heights,  taking 
into  consideration  its  height  above  the  level  of  the  sea — a 
height  which  he  intended  to  calculate  next  day  by  a simple 
process  of  elementary  geometry. 

The  settlers,  therefore,  went  to  the  plateau,  ascending  the 
left  bank  of  the  Mercy,  and  placed  themselves  on  the  edge 
which  looked  northwest  and  southeast,  that  is,  above  the 
curiously-shaped  rocks  which  bordered  the  river. 

This  part  of  the  plateau  commanded  the  heights  of  the  left 
bank,  which  sloped  away  to  the  extremity  of  Claw  Cape,  and  to 
the  southern  side  of  the  island.  No  obstacle  intercepted  their 
gaze,  which  swept  the  horizon  in  a semi-circle  from  the  cape 
to  Reptile  End.  To  the  south  the  horizon,  lighted  by  the  first 
rays  of  the  moon,  was  very  clearly  defined  against  the  sky. 

At  this  moment  the  Southern  Cross  presented  itself  to  the 
observer  in  an  inverted  position,  the  star  Alpha  marking  its 
base,  which  is  nearer  to  the  southern  pole. 

This  constellation  is  not  situated  as  near  to  the  antarctic  pole 
as  the  Polar  Star  is  to  the  arctic  pole.  The  star  Alpha  is 
about  twenty-seven  degrees  from  it,  but  Cyrus  Harding  knew 
this  and  made  allowance  for  it  in  his  calculation.  He  took  care 
also  to  observe  the  moment  when  it  passed  the  meridian  below 
the  pole,  which  would  simplify  the  operation. 

Cyrus  Harding  pointed  one  leg  of  the  compasses  to  the  sea 
horizon,  the  other  to  Alpha,  and  the  space  between  the  two  legs 
gave  him  the  angular  distance  which  separated  Alpha  from 
the  horizon.  In  order  to  fix  the  angle  obtained,  he  fastened 
with  thorns  the  two  pieces  of  wood  on  a third  placed  trans, 
rersely,  so  that  their  separation  should  be  properly  maintained. 

That  done,  there  was  only  the  angle  to  calculate  by  bringing 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


141 


back  the  observation  to  the  level  of  the  sea,  taking  into  con- 
sideration the  depression  of  the  horizon,  which  would  neces- 
sitate measuring  the  height  of  the  cliff.  The  value  of  this 
angle  would  the  height  of  Alpha,  and  consequently  that  of 
the  pole  above  the  horizon,  that  is  to  say,  the  latitude  of  the 
island,  since  the  latitude  of  a point  of  the  Globe  is  always 
equal  to  the  height  of  the  pole  above  the  horizon  of  this  point. 
The  calculations  were  left  for  the  next  day,  and  at  ten  o’clock 
every  one  was  sleeping  soundly. 


CHAPTER  XIV 


MEASURING  THE  CLIFF  — AN  APPLICATION  OF  THE  THEOREM 
OF  SIMILAR  TRIANGLES— LATITUDE  OF  THE  ISLAND  — EX- 
CURSION TO  THE  NORTH— AN  OYSTER-BED— PLANS  FOR  THE 
FUTURE  — THE  SUN  PASSING  THE  MERIDIAN— THE  LONGI- 
TUDE OF  LINCOLN  ISLAND. 

The  next  day,  the  16th  of  April,  and  Easter  Sunday,  the  set- 
tlers issued  from  the  Chimneys  at  day-break,  and  proceeded  to 
wash  their  linen.  The  engineer  intended  to  manufacture 
soap  as  soon  as  he  could  procure  the  necessary  materials— 
soda  or  potash,  fat  or  oil.  The  important  question  of  renew- 
ing their  wardrobe  would  be  treated  of  in  the  proper  time  and 
place.  At  any  rate  their  clothes  would  last  at  least  six  months 
longer,  for  they  were  strong,  and  could  resist  the  wear  of 
manual  labor.  But  all  would  depend  on  the  situation  of 
the  island  with  regard  to  inhabited  land.  This  would  be  settled 
to-day  if  the  weather  permitted. 

The  sun  rising  above  a clear  horizon*  announced  a magnifi- 
cent day,  one  of  those  beautiful  autumn  days  which  are  like 
the  last  farewells  of  a warm  season. 

It  was  now  necessary  to  complete  the  observations  of  the 
evening  before  by  measuring  the  height  of  the  cliff  above 
the  level  of  the  sea. 

“Shall  you  not  need  an  instrument  similar  to  the  one  which 
you  used  yesterday?”  said  Herbert  to  the  engineer. 

“ No,  my  boy,”  replied  the  latter,  “ we  are  going  to  proceed 
differently,  but  in  as  precise  a way.” 

Herbert,  wishing  to  learn  every  thing  he  could,  followed 
the  engineer  to  the  beach.  Pencroft,  Neb,  and  the  reporter 
remained  behind  and  occupied  themselves  in  different  ways. 

Cyrus  Harding  had  provided  himself  with  a straight  stick, 

142 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


143 


twelve  feet  long,  which  he  had  measured  as  exactly  as  possible 
by  comparing  it  with  his  own  height,  which  he  knew  to  a 
hair.  Herbert  carried  a plumb-line  which  Harding  had  given 
him,  that  is  to  say,  a simple  stone  fastened  to  the  end  of  a 
flexible  fiber.  Having  reached  a spot  about  twenty  feet  from 
the  edge  of  the  beach,  and  nearly  five  hundred  feet  from  the 
cliff,  which  rose  perpendicularly,  Harding  thrust  the  pole 
two  feet  into  the  sand,  and  wedging  it  up  carefully,  he  managed 
by  means  of  the  plumb-line  to  hrect  it  perpendicularly  with 
the  plane  of  the  horizon. 

That  done,  he  retired  the  necessary  distance,  when,  lying  on 
the  sand,  his  eye  glanced  at  the  same  time  at  the  top  of  the 
pole  and  the  crest  of  the  cliff.  He  carefully  marked  the  place 
with  a little  stick. 

Then  addressing  Herbert— 

“ Do  you  know  the  first  principles  of  geometry?”  he  asked. 

“Slightly,  captain,”  replied  Herbert,  who  did  not  wish  to 
put  himself  forward. 

“You  remember  what  are  the  properties  of  two  similar 
triangles?” 

“Yes,”  replied  Herbert;  “their  homologous  sides  are  pro- 
portional.” 

“Well,  my  boy,  I have  just  constructed  two  similar  right- 
angled  triangles;  the  first,  the  smallest,  has  for  its  sides  the 
perpendicular  pole,  the  distance  which  separates  the  little  stick 
from  the  foot  of  thepoleyand  my  visual  ray  for  hypothenuse; 
the  second  has  for  its  sides  the  perpendicular  cliff,  the  height  of 
which  we  wish  to  measure,  the  distance  which  separates  the 
little  stick  from  the  bottom  of  the  cliff,  and  my  visual  ray  also 
forms  its  hypothenuse,  which  proves  to  be  the  prolongation  of 
that  of  the  first  triangle.” 

“ Ah,  captain,  I understand !”  cried  Herbert.  “ As  the  dis- 
tance from  the  stick  to  the  pole  is  to  the  distance  from  the  stick 
to  the  base  of  the  cliff,  so  is  the  height  of  the  pole  to  the  height 
of  the  cliff. 

“Just  so,  Herbert,”  replied  the  engineer;  “and  when  we 
have  measured  the  two  first  distances,  knowing  the  height 
of  the  pole,  we  shall  only  have  a sum  in  proportion  to  do, 


144 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


which  will  give  us  the  height  of  the  cliff,  and  Will  save  us  the 
trouble  of  measuring  it  directly.” 

The  two  horizontal  distances  were  found  out  by  means  of  the 
pole,  whose  length  above  the  sand  was  exactly  ten  feet. 

The  first  distance  was  fifteen  feet  between  the  stick  and  the 
place  where  the  pole  was  thrust  into  the  sand. 

The  second  distance  between  the  stick  and  the  bottom  of  the 
cliff  was  five  hundred  feet. 

These  measurements  finished,  Cyrus  Harding  and  the  lad 
returned  to  the  Chimneys. 

The  engineer  then  took  a fiat  stone  which  he  had  brought 
back  from  one  of  his  previous  excursions,  a sort  of  slate,  on 
which  it  was  easy  to  trace  figures  with  a sharp  shell.  He  then 
proved  the  following  proportions: — 

15  : 500  : : 10  : x 
500  x 10  = 5000 
5000 

= 833.3 

15 

From  which  it  was  proved  that  the  granite  cliff  measured  333 
feet  in  height. 

Cyrus  Harding  then  took  the  instrument  which  he  had 
made  the  evening  before,  the  space  between  its  two  legs 
giving  the  angular  distance  between  the  star  Alpha  and  the 
horizon.  He  measured,  very  exactly,  the  opening  of  this  angle 
on  a circumference  which  he  divided  into  360  equal  parts. 
Now,  this  angle,  by  adding  to  it  the  twenty-seven  degrees 
which  separated  Alpha  from  the  antarctic  pole,  and  by  re- 
ducing to  the  level  of  the  sea  the  height  of  the  cliff  on  which 
the  observation  had  been  made,  was  found  to  be  fifty-three 
degrees.  These  fifty-three  degrees  being  subtracted  from 
ninety  degrees — the  distance  from  the  pole  to  the  equator — 
there  remained  thirty-seven  degrees.  Cyrus  Harding  con- 
cluded, therefore,  that  Lincoln  Island  was  situated  on  the 
thirty-seventh  degree  of  the  southern  latitude,  or  taking  into 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


145 


consideration  through  the  imperfection  of  the  performance, 
an  error  of  five  degrees,  that  it  must  be  situated  between  the 
thirty-fifth  and  the  fortieth  parallel. 

There  was  only  the  longitude  to  be  obtained,  and  the 
position  of  the  island  would  be  determined.  The  engineer 
hoped  to  attempt  this  the  same  day,  at  twelve  o’clock,  at  which 
moment  the  sun  would  pass  the  meridian. 

It  was  decided  that  Sunday  should  be  spent  in  a walk,  or 
rather  an  exploring  expedition,  to  that  side  of  the  island  be- 
tween the  north  of  the  lake  and  Shark  Gulf,  and  if  there  was 
time  they  would  push  their  discoveries  to  the  northern  side  of 
Cape  South  Mandible.  They  would  breakfast  on  the  downs, 
and  not  return  till  evening. 

At  half-past  eight  the  little  band  was  following  the  edge  of 
the  channel.  On  the  other  side,  on  Safety  Islet,  numerous 
birds  were  gravely  strutting.  They  were  divers,  easily  recog- 
nized by  their  cry,  which  much  resembles  the  braying  of  a 
donkey.  Pencroft  only  considered  them  in  an  eatable  point  of 
view,  and  learnt  with  some  satisfaction  that  their  flesh,  though 
blackish,  is  not  bad  food. 

Great  amphibious  creatures  could  also  be  seen  crawling  on 
the  sand;  seals,  doubtless,  who  appeared  to  have  chosen  the 
islet  for  a place  of  refuge.  It  was  impossible  to  think  of 
those  animals  in  an  alimentary  point  of  view,  for  their  oily 
flesh  is  detestable;  however,  Cyrus  Harding  observed  them 
attentively,  and  without  making  known  his  idea,  he  announced 
to  his  companions  that  very  soon  they  would  pay  a visit  to  the 
islet.  The  beach  was  strewn  with  innumerable  shells,  some 
of  which  would  have  rejoiced  the  heart  of  a conchologist; 
there  were,  among  others,  the  phasianella,  the  terebratula, 
etc.  But  what  would  be  of  more  use,  was  the  discovery  by 
Neb,  at  low  tide,  of  a large  oyster-bed  among  the  rocks,  nearly 
five  miles  from  the  Chimneys. 

“ Neb  will  not  have  lost  his  day,”  cried  Pencroft,  looking  at 
the  spacious  oyster-bed. 

“ It  is  really  a fortunate  discovery,”  said  the  reporter,  “ and 
as  it  is  said  that  each  oyster  produces  yearly  from  fifty  to  sixty 
thousand  eggs,  we  shall  have  an  inexhaustible  supply  there.” 

10 


146 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


“ Only  I believe  that  the  oyster  is  not  very  nourishing,”  said 
Herbert. 

“No,”  replied  Harding.  “The  oyster  contains  very  little 
nitrogen,  and  if  a man  lived  exclusively  on  them,  he  would 
have  to  eat  not  less  than  fifteen  to  sixteen  dozen  a day.” 

“ Capital ! ” replied  Pencroft.  “ We  might  swallow  dozens 
and  dozens  without  exhausting  the  bed.  Shall  we  take  some 
for  breakfast  ? ” 

And  without  waiting  for  a reply  to  his  proposal,  knowing 
that  it  would  be  approved  of,  the  sailor  and  Neb  detached  a 
quantity  of  the  molluscs.  They  put  them  in  a sort  of  net  of 
hibiscus  fibre,  which  Neb  had  manufactured,  and  which  al- 
ready contained  food ; they  then  continued  to  climb  the 
coast  between  the  downs  and  the  sea. 

From  time  to  time  Harding  consulted  his  watch,  so  as  to  be 
prepared  in  time  for  the  solar  observation,  which  had  to  be 
made  exactly  at  mid-day. 

All  that  part  of  the  island  was  very  barren  as  far  as  the 
point  which  closed  Union  Bay,  and  which  had  received  the 
name  of  Cape  South  Mandible.  Nothing  could  be  seen  there 
but  sand  and  shells,  mingled  with  debris  of  lava.  A few 
sea-birds  frequented  this  desolate  coast,  gulls,  great  albatrosses, 
as  well  as  wild  duck,  for  which  Pencroft  had  a great  fancy. 
He  tried  to  knock  some  over  with  an  arrow,  but  without 
result,  for  they  seldom  perched,  and  he  could  not  hit  them  on 
the  wing. 

This  led  the  sailor  to  repeat  to  the  engineer: 

“ You  see,  captain,  so  long  as  we  have  not  got  one  or  two 
fowling-pieces,  we  shall  never  get  any  thing !” 

“ Doubtless,  Pencroft,”  replied  the  reporter,  “ but  it  depends 
on  you.  Procure  us  some  iron  for  the  barrels,  steel  for  the 
hammers,  saltpetre,  coal,  and  sulphur  for  powder,  mercury  and 
nitric  acid  for  the  fulminate,  and  lead  for  the  shot,  and  the 
captain  will  make  us  first-rate  guns.” 

“ Oh ! ” replied  the  engineer,  “ we  mi  t,  no  doubt,  find  all 
these  substances  on  the  island,  but  a gun  is  a delicate  instru- 
ment, and  needs  very  particular  tools.  However,  we  shall  see 
later ! ” 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


141 


“Why,”  cried  Pencroft,  “were  we  obliged  to  throw  over- 
board all  the  weapons  we  had  with  us  in  the  car,  all  our 
implements,  even  our  pocket-knives?” 

“ But  if  we  had  not  thrown  them  away,  Pencroft,  the  bah 
loon  would  have  thrown  us  to  the  bottom  of  the  sea!”  said 
Herbert. 

“ What  you  say  is  true,  my  boy,”  replied  the  sailor. 

Then  passing  to  another  idea: 

“Think,”  said  he,  “how  astounded  Jonathan  Forster  and  his 
companions  must  have  been  when,  next  morning,  they  found 
the  place  empty  and  the  machine  flown  away ! ” 

“ I am  utterly  indifferent  about  knowing  what  they  may 
have  thought,”  said  the  reporter. 

“ It  was  all  my  idea,  that ! ” said  Pencroft,  with  a satisfied  air. 
“A  splendid  idea,  Pencroft !”  replied  Gideon  Spilett,  laugh- 
ing, “ and  which  has  placed  us  where  we  are.” 

“I  would  rather  be  here  than  in  the  hands  of  the  South- 
erners,” cried  the  sailor,  “especially  since  the  captain  has  been 
Kind  enough  to  come  and  join  us  again.” 

“So  would  I,  truly!”  replied  the  reporter.  “Besides,  what 
do  we  want  ? Nothing.” 

“If  that  is  not— every  thing!”  replied  Pencroft,  laughing 
and  shrugging  his  shoulders.  “ But,  some  day  or  other,  we 
shall  find  means  of  going  away ! ” 

“ Sooner,  perhaps,  than  you  imagine,  my  friends,”  remarked 
the  engineer,  “if  Lincoln  Island  is  but  a medium  distance 
from  an  inhabited  island,  or  from  a continent.  We  shall  know 
in  an  hour.  I have  not  a map  of  the  Pacific,  but  my  memory 
has  preserved  a very  clear  recollection  of  its  southern  part. 
The  latitude  which  I obtained  yesterday  placed  New  Zealand  to 
the  west  of  Lincoln  Island,  and  the  coast  of  Chili  to  the  east. 
But  between  these  two  countries  there  is  a distance  of  at  least 
six  thousand  miles.  It  has,  therefore,  to  be  determined  what 
point  in  this  great  space  the  island  occupies,  and  this  the  lon- 
gitude will  give  us  presently,  with  a sufficient  approximation,  I 
hope.” 

“ Is  not  the  archipelago  of  the  Pomoutous  the  nearest  point 
to  us  in  latitude  ? ” asked  Herbert. 


148 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


“Yes,”  replied  the  engineer,  “but  the  distance  which  separ- 
ates us  from  it  is  more  than  twelve  hundred  miles.” 

“ And  that  way?”  asked  Neb,  who  followed  the  conversation 
with  extreme  interest,  pointing  to  the  south. 

' “ That  way,  nothing,”  replied  Pencroft. 

“ Nothing,  indeed,”  added  the  engineer. 

“Well,  Cyrus,”  asked  the  reporter,  “if  Lincoln  Island  is  not 
more  than  two  or  three  thousand  miles  from  New  Zealand  or 
Chili  ?” 

“Well,”  replied  the  engineer,  “ instead  of  building  a house 
we  will  build  a boat,  and  Master  Pencroft  shall  be  put  in  com- 
mand—” 

“Well  then,”  cried  the  sailor,  “I  am  quite  ready  to  be  captain 
—as  soon  as  you  can  make  a craft  that’s  able  to  keep  at  sea  ! ” 

“ We  shall  do  it,  if  it  is  necessary,”  replied  Cyrus  Harding. 

But  whilst  these  men,  who  really  hesitated  at  nothing,  were 
talking,  the  hour  approached  at  which  the  observation  was  to 
be  made.  What  Cyrus  Harding  was  to  do  to  ascertain  the 
passage  of  the  sun  at  the  meridian  of  the  island,  without  an 
instrument  of  any  sort,  Herbert  could  not  guess. 

The  observers  were  then  about  six  miles  from  the  Chimneys, 
not  far  from  that  part  of  the  downs  in  which  the  engineer  had 
been  found  after  his  enigmatical  preservation.  They  halted  at 
this  place  and  prepared  for  breakfast,  for  it  was  half-past 
eleven.  Herbert  went  for  some  fresh  water  from  a stream 
which  ran  near,  and  brought  it  back  in  a jug  which  Neb  had 
provided. 

During  these  preparations  Harding  arranged  every  thing  for 
his  astronomical  observation.  He  chose  a clear  place  on  the 
shore,  which  the  ebbing  tide  had  left  perfectly  level.  This  bed 
of  fine  sand  was  as  smooth  as  ice,  not  & grain  out  of  place. 
It  was  of  little  importance  whether  it  was  horizontal  or  not, 
and  it  did  not  matter  much  whether  the  stick,  six  feet  high, 
which  was  planted  there,  rose  perpendicularly.  On  the  con- 
trary, the  engineer  inclined  it  towards  the  south,  that  is  to  say, 
in  the  direction  of  the  coast  opposite  to  the  sun,  for  it  must  not 
be  forgotten  that  the  settlers  in  Lincoln  Island,  as  the  island 
was  situated  in  the  southern  hemisphere,  saw  the  radiant 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


149 


planet  describe  its  diurnal  arc  above  the  northern,  and  not 
above  the  southern  horizon. 

Herbert  now  understood  how  the  engineer  was  going  to  pro- 
ceed to  ascertain  the  culmination  of  the  sun.  that  is  to  say,  its 
passing  the  meridian  of  the  island,  or,  in  other  terms,  the  south 
of  the  place.  It  was  by  means  of  the  shadow  cast  on  the  sand 
by  the  stick,  a way  which,  for  want  of  an  instrument,  would 
give  him  a suitable  approach  to  the  result  which  he  wished  to 
obtain. 

In  fact,  the  moment  when  this  shadow  would  reach  its 
minimum  of  length  would  be  exactly  twelve  o’clock,  and  it 
would  be  enough  to  watch  the  extremity  of  the  shadow,  so  a3 
to  ascertain  the  instant  when,  after  having  successively  dimin- 
ished, it  began  to  lengthen.  By  inclining  his  stick  to  the  side 
opposite  to  the  sun,  Cyrus  Harding  made  the  shadow  longer., 
and  consequently  its  modifications  would  be  more  easily  ascer- 
tained. In  fact,  the  longer  the  needle  of  a dial  is,  the  more 
easily  can  the  movement  of  its  point  be  followed.  The  shadow 
©f  the  stick  was  nothing  but  the  needle  of  a dial. 

When  he  thought  the  moment  had  come,  Cyrus  Harding 
knelt  on  the  sand,  and  with  little  wooden  pegs,  which  he  stuck 
into  the  sand,  he  began  to  mark  the  successive  diminutions  of 
the  stick’s  shadow.  His  companions,  bending  over  him, 
watched  the  operation  with  extreme  interest.  The  reporter 
held  his  chronometer  in  his  hand,  ready  to  tell  the  hour  which 
it  marked  when  the  shadow  would  be  at  its  shortest.  More- 
over, as  Cyrus  Harding  was  working  on  the  16th  of  April,  the 
day  on  which  the  true  and  the  average  time  are  identical,  the 
hour  given  by  Gideon  Spilett  would  be  the  true  hour  then  at 
Washington,  which  would  simplify  the  calculation.  Mean- 
while, as  the  sun  slowly  advanced,  the  shadow  slowly  dimin- 
ished, and  when  it  appeared  to  Cyrus  Harding  that  it  was 
beginning  to  increase,  he  asked,  “ What  o’clock  is  it  ? ” 

“ One  minute  past  five,”  replied  Gideon  Spillett. 

They  had  now  only  to  calculate  the  operation.  Nothing  could 
be  easier.  It  could  be  seen  that  there  existed,  in  round  num- 
bers, a difference  of  five  hours  between  the  meridian  of  Wash- 
ington and  that  of  Lincoln  Island,  that  is  to  say,  it  was  mid-day 


150 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION, 


in  Lincoln  Island  when  it  was  already  five  o’clock  in  the 
evening  in  Washington.  Now  the  sun,  in  its  apparent  move- 
ment round  the  earth,  traverses  one  degree  in  four  minutes,  or 
fifteen  degrees  an  hour.  Fifteen  degrees  multiplied  by  five 
hours  give  seventy-five  degrees. 

Then,  since  Washington  is  77°  3'  11",  as  much  as  to  say 
seventy-seven  degrees  counted  from  the  meridian  of  Greenwich 
—which  the  Americans  take  for  their  starting-point  for  longi- 
tudes concurrently  with  the  English— it  followed  that  the  island 
must  be  situated  seventy-seven  and  seventy-five  degrees  west  of 
the  meridian  of  Greenwich,  that  is  to  say,  on  the  hundred  and 
fifty-second  degree  of  west  longitude. 

Cyrus  Harding  announced  this  result  to  his  companions,  and 
taking  into  consideration  errors  of  observation,  as  he  had  done 
for  the  latitude,  he  believed  he  could  positively  arffirm  that  the 
position  of  Lincoln  Island  was  between  the  thirty-fifth  and  the 
thirty-seventh  parallel,  and  between  the  hundred  and  fiftieth 
and  the  hundred  and  fifty-fifth  meridian  to  the  west  of  the 
meridian  of  Greenwich. 

The  possible  fault  which  he  attributed  to  errors  in  the 
observation  was,  it  may  be  seen,  of  five  degrees  on  both  sides, 
which,  at  sixty  miles  to  a degree,  would  give  an  error  of  three 
hundred  miles  in  latitude  and  longitude  for  the  exact  position. 

But  this  error  would  not  influence  the  determination  which 
it  was  necessary  to  take.  It  was  very  evident  that  Lincoln 
Island  was  at  such  a distance  from  every  country  or  island  that 
it  would  be  too  hazardous  to  attempt  to  reach  one  in  a frail 
boat. 

In  fact  this  calculation  placed  it  at  least  twelve  hundred 
miles  from  Tahiti  and  the  islands  of  the  archipelago  of  the 
Pomoutous,  more  than  eighteen  hundred  miles  from  New 
Zealand,  and  more  than  four  thousand  five  hundred  miles  from 
the  American  coast ! 

And  when  Cyrus  Harding  consulted  his  memory,  he  could 
not  remember  in  any  way  that  such  an  island  occupied,  in  that 
part  of  the  Pacific,  the  situation  assigned  to  Lincoln  Island. 


CHAPTER  XT 


IFF  IS  DECIDED  TO  WINTER  ON  THE  ISLAND— A METALLIC  QUES* 
TION  — EXPLORING  SAFETY  ISLAND— A SEAL  HUNT — CAPTURE 
OF  AN  ECHIDUA — A KOALA— WHAT  IS  CALLED  THE  CATALAN 
METHOD  — MANUFACTURING  IRON  — HOW  STEEL  IS  OBTAINED. 

The  next  day,  the  17th  of  April,  the  sailor’s  first  words  were 
addressed  to  Gideon  Spilett. 

“ Well,  sir,”  he  asked,  “ what  shall  we  do  to-day  ? ” 

“ What  the  captain  pleases,”  replied  the  reporter. 

Till  then  the  engineer’s  companions  had  been  brickmakers 
and  potters,  now  they  were  to  become  metallurgists. 

The  day  before,  after  breakfast,  they  had  explored  as  far 
as  the  point  of  Mandible  Cape,  seven  miles  distant  from  the 
Chimneys.  There,  the  long  series  of  downs  ended,  and  the  soil 
had  a volcanic  appearance.  There  were  no  longer  high  cliffs 
as  at  Prospect  Heights,  but  a strange  and  capricious  border 
which  surrounded  the  narrow  gulf  between  the  two  capes, 
formed  of  mineral  matter,  thrown  up  by  the  volcano.  Arrived 
at  this  point  the  settlers  retraced  their  steps,  and  at  nightfall 
entered  the  Chimneys  ; but  they  did  not  sleep  before  the  ques- 
tion of  knowing  whether  they  could  think  of  leaving  Lincoln 
Island  or  not  was  definitely  settled. 

The  twelve  hundred  miles  which  separated  the  island  from 
the  Pomoutou  Islands  was  a considerable  distance.  A boat 
could  not  cross  it,  especially  at  the  approach  of  the  bad  season. 
Pencroft  had  expressly  declared  this.  Now,  to  construct  a 
simple  boat,  even  with  the  necessary  tools,  was  a difficult  work, 
and  the  colonists  not  having  tools  they  must  begin  by  making 
hammers,  axes,  adzes,  saws,  augers,  planes,  etc.,  which  would 
take  some  time.  It  w’as  decided,  therefore,  that  they  would 
winter  at  Lincoln  Island,  and  that  they  would  seek  for  a more 

151 


152 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


comfortable  dwelling  than  the  Chimneys,  in  which  to  pass  th« 
winter  months. 

Before  any  thing  else  conld  be  done  it  was  necessary  to  make 
the  iron  ore,  of  which  the  engineers  had  observed  some  traces 
in  the  northwest  part  of  the  island,  fit  for  use  by  converting  it 
either  into  iron  or  into  steel. 

Metals  are  not  generally  found  in  the  ground  in  a pure  state. 
For  the  most  part  they  are  combined  with  oxygen  or  sulphur. 
Such  was  the  case  with  the  two  specimens  which  Cyrus  Hard- 
ing had  brought  back,  one  of  magnetic  iron,  not  carbonated, 
the  other  a pyrite,  also  called  sulphuret  of  iron.  It  was,  there- 
fore, the  first,  the  oxyde  of  iron,  which  they  must  reduce  with 
coal,  that  is  to  say,  get  rid  of  the  oxygen,  to  obtain  it  in  a pure 
state.  This  reduction  is  made  by  subjecting  the  ore  with  coal 
to  a high  temperature,  either  by  the  rapid  and  ea  y Catalan 
method,  which  has  the  advantage  of  transforming  the  ore  into 
iron  in  a single  operation,  or  by  the  blast  furnace,  which  first 
smelts  the  ore,  then  changes  it  into  iron,  by  carrying  away  the 
three  to  four  per  cent,  of  coal,  which  is  combined  with  it 

Now  Cyrus  Harding  wanted  iron,  and  he  wished  to  obtain  it 
as  soon  as  possible.  The  ore  which  he  had  picked  up  was  in 
itself  very  pure  and  rich.  It  was  the  oxydulous  iron,  which  is 
found  in  confused  masses  of  a deep  gray  color  ; it  gives  a black 
dust,  crystallized  in  the  form  of  the  regular  octahedron.  Native 
loadstones  consist  of  this  ore,  and  iron  of  the  first  quality  is 
made  in  Europe  from  that  with  which  Sweden  and  Norway 
are  so  abundantly  supplied.  Not  far  from  this  vein  was  the 
vein  of  coal  already  made  use  of  by  the  settlers.  The  ingre- 
dients for  the  manufacture  being  close  together  would  greatly 
facilitate  the  treatment  of  the  ore.  This  is  the  cause  of  the 
wealth  of  the  mines  in  Great  Britain,  where  the  coal  aids  the 
manufacture  of  the  metal  extracted  from  the  same  soil  at  the 
same  time  as  itself. 

“Then,  captain,”  said  Pencroft,  “we  are  going  to  work  iron 
ore  ? ” 

“ Yes,  my  friend,”  replied  the  engineer,  “ and  for  that— some- 
thing which  will  please  you— we  must  begin  by  having  a seal 
hunt  on  the  islet.” 


DKOFFtfb  THE  CLOUDS. 


153 

“A  seal  hunt!”  cried?  the  sailor,  turning  towards  Gideon 
Bpilett.  “ Are  seals  needed  to  make  iron  ? ” 

“ Since  Cyrus  has  said  so  ! ” replied  the  reporter. 

But  the  engineer  had  already  left  the  Chimneys,  and  Pen- 
croft  prepared  for  the  seal  hunt,  without  having  received  any 
other  explanation. 

Cyrus  Harding,  Herbert,  Gideon  Spilett,  Neb,  and  the  sailor 
were  soon  collected  on  the  shore,  at  a place  where  the  channel 
left  a ford  passable  at  low  tide.  The  hunters  could  therefore 
traverse  it  without  getting  wet  higher  than  the  knee. 

Harding  then  put  his  foot  on  the  islet  for  the  first,  and  his 
companions  for  the  second  time. 

On  their  landing  some  hundreds  of  penguins  looked  fear- 
lessly at  them.  The  hunters,  armed  with  sticks,  could  have 
killed  them  easily,  but  they  were  not  guilty  of  such  useless 
massacre,  as  it  was  important  not  to  frighten  the  seals,  who 
were  lying  on  the  sand  several  cable  lengths  off.  They  also 
respected  certain  innocent-looking  birds,  whose  wings  were 
reduced  to  the  state  of  stumps,  spread  out  like  fins,  ornament, ad 
with  feathers  of  a scaly  appearance.  The  settlers,  therefore 
prudently  advanced  towards  the  north  point,  walking  over 
ground  riddled  with  little  holes,  which  formed  nests  for  the 
sea-birds.  Towards  the  extremity  of  the  islet  appeared  great 
black  heads  floating  just  above  the  water,  having  exactly  the 
appearance  of  rocks  in  motion. 

These  were  the  seals  which  were  to  be  captured.  It  was 
necessary,  however,  first  to  allow  them  to  land,  for  with  their 
close,  short  hair,  and  their  fusiform  conformation,  being  excel- 
lent swimmers,  it  is  difficult  to  catch  them  in  the  sea,  whilst  on 
land  their  short,  webbed  feet  prevent  their  having  more  than  a 
slow,  waddling  movement. 

Pencroft  knew  the  habits  of  these  creatures,  and  he  advised 
waiting  till  they  were  stretched  on  the  sand,  when  the  sun, 
before  long,  would  send  them  to  sleep.  They  must  then  man- 
age to  cut  off  their  retreat  and  knock  them  on  the  head. 

The  hunters,  having  concealed  themselves  behind  th©  rocks, 
waited  silently. 

An  hour  passed  before  the  seals  came  to  play  on  the  sand. 


154 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


They  could  count  half  a dozen.  Pencroft  and  Herbert  then 
went  round  the  point  of  the  islet,  so  as  to  take  them  in  the 
rear,  and  cut  off  their  retreat.  During  this  time  Cyrus  Harding, 
Spilett,  and  Neb,  crawling  behind  the  rocks,  glided  towards  the 
future  scene  of  combat. 

All  at  once  the  tall  figure  of  the  sailor  appeared.  Pencroft 
shouted.  The  engineer  and  his  two  companions  threw  them- 
selves between  the  sea  and  the  seals.  Two  of  the  animals  soon 
lay  dead  on  the  sand,  but  the  rest  regained  the  sea  in  safety. 

“Here  are  the  seals  required,  captain!”  said  the  sailor, 
advancing  towards  the  engineer. 

“Capital,”  replied  Harding.  “We  will  make  bellows  of 
them ! ” 

“ Bellows  ! ” cried  Pencroft.  “ Well ! these  are  lucky  seals ! ” 

It  was,  in  fact,  a blowing-machine,  necessary  for  the  treat- 
ment of  the  ore  that  the  engineer  wished  to  manufacture  with 
the  skins  of  the  amphibious  creatures.  They  were  of  a 
medium  size,  for  their  length  did  not  exceed  six  feet.  They 
resembled  a dog  about  the  head. 

As  it  was  useless  to  burden  themselves  with  the  weight  of 
noth  the  animals,  Neb  and  Pencroft  resolved  to  skin  them  on 
the  spot,  whilst  Cyrus  Harding  and  the  reporter  continued  to 
explore  the  islet. 

The  sailor  and  the  negro  cleverly  performed  the  operation, 
and  three  hours  afterwards  Cyrus  Harding  had  at  his  disposal 
two  seals’  skins,  which  he  intended  to  use  in  this  state,  with- 
out subjecting  them  to  any  tanning  process. 

The  settlers  waited  till  the  tide  was  again  low,  and  crossing 
the  channel  they  entered  the  Chimneys. 

The  skins  had  then  to  be  stretched  on  a frame  of  wood,  and 
sewn  by  means  of  fibres  so  as  to  preserve  the  air  without  allow- 
ing too  much  to  escape.  Cyrus  Hard  mg  had  nothing  but  the 
two  steel  blades  from  Top's  collar,  and  yet  he  was  so  clever, 
and  his  companions  aided  him  with  so  much  intelligence,  that 
three  days  afterwards  the  little  colony’s  stock  of  tools  wa3 
augmented  by  a blowing-machine,  destined  to  inject  the  air 
into  the  midst  of  the  ore  when  it  should  be  subjected  to  heat 
'-an  indispensable  condition  to  the  success  of  the  operation. 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


155 


On  the  morning  of  the  20th  of  April  began  the  “ metallic 
period,”  as  the  reporter  called  it  in  his  notes.  The  engineer 
had  decided,  as  has  been  said,  to  operate  near  the  veins  both 
of  coal  and  ore.  Now,  according  to  his  observations,  these 
veins  were  situated  at  the  foot  of  the  northeast  spurs  of  Mount 
Franklin,  that  is  to  say,  a distance  of  six  miles  from  their  home. 
It  was  impossible,  therefore,  to  return  every  day  to  the  Chim- 
neys, and  it  was  agreed  that  the  little  colony  should  camp 
under  a hut  of  branches,  so  that  the  important  operation  could 
be  followed  night  and  day. 

This  settled,  they  set  out  in  the  morning.  Neb  and  Pencroft 
dragged  the  bellows  on  a hurdle ; also  a quantity  of  vegetables 
and  animals,  which  they  besides  could  renew  on  the  way. 

The  road  led  through  Jacamar  Wood,  which  they  traversed 
obliquely  from  southeast  to  northwest,  and  in  the  thickest  part. 
It  was  necessary  to  beat  a path,  which  would  in  the  future 
form  the  most  direct  road  to  Prospect  Heights  and  Mount 
Franklin.  The  trees,  belonging  to  the  species  already  discov- 
ered, were  magnificent.  Herbert  found  some  new  ones 
amongst  others  some  which  Pencroft  called  “sham  leeks;  ” fo$ 
in  spite  of  their  size,  they  were  of  the  same  liliaceous  family  as 
the  onion,  chive,  shalot,  or  asparagus.  These  trees  produce 
ligneous  roots  which,  when  cooked,  are  excellent;  from  them, 
by  fermentation,  a very  agreeable  liquor  is  made.  They  there* 
fore  made  a good  store  of  the  roots. 

The  journey  through  the  wood  was  long;  it  lasted  the 
whole  day,  and  so  allowed  plenty  of  time  for  examining  the 
flora  and  fauna.  Top,  who  took  special  charge  of  the  fauna, 
ran  through  the  grass  and  brushwood,  putting  up  all  sorts  of 
game.  Herbert  and  Gideon  Spilett  killed  two  kangaroos  with 
bows  and  arrows,  and  also  an  animal  which  strongly  resembled 
both  a hedgehog  and  an  ant-eater.  It  was  like  the  first  be- 
cause it  roled  itself  into  a ball,  and  bristled  with  spines,  and 
the  second  because  it  had  sharp  claws,  a long  slender  snout 
which  terminated  in  a bird’s  beak  and  an  extendible  tongue, 
covered  with  little  thorns  which  served  to  hold  the  insects. 

“And  when  it  is  in  the  pot,”  asked  Pencroft,  naturally* 
“ what  will  it  be  like  ? ” 


156 


THE  LAKESID*  iMlON. 


“ An  excellent  piece  of  beef,”  replied  Herbert. 

“ We  will  not  ask  more  from  it,”  replied  the  sailor. 

During  this  excursion  they  saw  several  wild  boars,  which 
however,  did  not  offer  to  attack  the  little  band,  and  it  appeared 
as  if  they  would  not  meet  with  any  dangerous  beasts;  when, 
in  a thick  part  of  the  wood,  the  reporter  thought  he  saw,  some 
paces  from  him,  among  the  lower  branches  of  a tree,  an  ani- 
mal which  he  took  for  a bear,  and  which  he  verj  tranquilly 
began  to  draw.  Happily  for  Gideon  Spilett,  the  animal  in 
question  did  not  belong  to  the  redoubtable  family  of  the 
plantigrades.  It  was  only  a koala,  better  known  under  the 
name  of  the  sloth,  being  about  the  size  of  a large  dog,  and 
having  stiff  hair  of  a dirty  color,  the  paws  armed  with  strong 
claws,  which  enabled  it  to  climb  trees  and  feed  on  the 
leaves.  Having  identified  the  animal,  which  they  did  not  dis- 
turb, Gideon  Spilett  erased  “bear”  from  the  title  of  his  sketch, 
putting  koala  in  its  place,  and  the  journey  was  resumed. 

At  five  o’clock  in  the  evening,  Cyrus  Harding  gave  the  signal 
to  halt.  They  were  now  outside  the  forest,  at  the  beginning  of 
the  powerful  spurs  which  supported  Mount  Franklin  towards 
the  west.  At  a distance  of  some  hundred  feet  flowed  the  Red 
Creek  and  consequently  plenty  of  fresh  water  was  within  their 
reach. 

The  camp  was  soon  organized.  In  less  than  an  hour,  on  the 
edge  of  the  forest,  among  the  trees,  a hut  of  branches  inter- 
laced with  creepers,  and  pasted  over  with  clay,  offered  a toler- 
able  shelter.  Their  geological  researches  were  put  off  till  the 
next  day.  Supper  was  prepared,  a good  fire  blazed  before  the 
hut,  the  roast  turned,  and  at  eight  o’clock,  whilst  one  of  the 
settlers  watched  to  keep  up  the  fire,  in  case  any  wild  beasts 
should  prowl  in  the  neighborhood,  the  others  slept  soundly. 

The  next  day,  the  21st  of  April,  Cyrus  Harding,  accompanied 
by  Herbert,  went  to  look  for  the  soil  of  ancient  formation,  on 
which  he  had  already  discovered  a specimen  of  ore.  They 
found  the  vein  above  ground,  near  the  source  of  the  creek,  at 
the  foot  of  one  of  the  northeastern  spurs.  This  ore,  very  rich 
in  iron,  enclosed  in  its  fusible  vein-stone,  was  perfectly  suited 
to  the  mode  s>f  reduction  which  the  engineer  intended  to 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


157 


employ;  that  is,  the  Catalan  method,  but  simplified,  as  it  is 
used  in  Corsica.  In  fact  the  Catalan  method,  properly  so 
called,  requires  the  construction  of  kilns  and  crucibles,  in 
which  the  ore  and  the  coal,  placed  in  alternate  layers,  are 
transformed  and  reduced.  But  Cyrus  Harding  intended  to 
economize  these  constructions,  and  wished  simply  to  form,  with 
the  ore  and  the  coal,  a cubic  mass,  to  the  center  of  which  he 
would  direct  the  wind  from  his  bellows.  Doubtless,  it  was  the 
proceeding  employed  by  Tubal  Cain,  and  th#  first  metallurgists 
of  the  inhabited  world.  Now  that  which  had  succeeded  with 
the  grandson  of  Adam,  and  which  still  yielded  good  results 
in  countries  rich  in  ore  and  fuel,  could  not  but  succeed  with 
the  settlers  in  Lincoln  Island. 

The  coal,  as  well  as  the  ore,  was  collected  without  trouble  on 
the  surface  of  the  ground.  They  first  broke  the  ore  into  little 
pieces,  and  cleansed  them  with  the  hand  from  the  impurities 
which  soiled  their  surface.  Then  coal  and  ore  were  arranged 
in  heaps  and  in  successive  layers,  as  the  charcoal-burner  does 
with  the  wood  which  he  wishes  to  carbonize.  In  this  way, 
under  the  influence  of  the  air  projected  by  the  blowing- 
machine,  the  coal  would  be  transformed  into  carbonic  acid* 
then  into  oxyde  of  carbon,  its  use  being  to  reduce  the  oxyde 
of  iron,  that  is  to  say,  to  rid  it  of  the  oxygen. 

Thus  the  engineer  proceeded.  The  bellows  of  sealskin,  fur- 
nished at  its  extremity  with  a nozzle  of  clay,  which  had  been 
previously  fabricated  in  the  pottery  kiln,  was  established  near 
the  heap  of  ore.  Moved  by  a mechanism  which  consisted  of 
a frame,  cords  of  fibre  and  counterpoise,  he  threw  into  the 
mass  an  abundance  of  air,  which  by  raising  the  temperature 
also  concurred  with  the  chemical  transformation  to  produce 
in  time  pure  iron. 

The  operation  was  difficult.  All  the  patience,  all  the  ingenu- 
ity of  the  settlers  was  needed;  but  at  last  it  succeeded,  and  the 
result  was  a lump  of  iron,  reduced  to  a spongy  state,  which  it 
was  necessary  to  shingle  and  fagot,  that  is  to  say,  to  forge  so 
as  to  expel  from  it  the  liquefied  veinstone.  These  amateur 
smiths  had,  of  course,  no  hammer;  but  they  were  in  no  worse 
a situation  than  the  first  metallurgist,  and  therefore  did  what, 


58 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


no  doubt,  he  had  to  do.  A handle  was  fixed  to  the  first  lump, 
and  was  used  as  a hammer  to  forge  the  second  on  a granite 
anvil,  and  thus  they  obtained  a coarse  but  useful  metal.  At 
length,  after  many  trials  and  much  fatigue,  on  the  25th  of 
April  several  bars  of  iron  were  forged,  and  transformed  into 
tools,  crow-bars,  pincers,  pickaxes,  spades,  etc.,  which  Pencroft 
and  Neb  declared  to  be  real  jewels. 

But  the  metal  was  not  yet  in  its  most  serviceable  state,  that 
is,  of  steel.  Now  steel  is  a combination  of  iron  and  coal,  which 
is  extracted,  either  from  the  liquid  ore,  by , taking  from  it  the 
excess  of  coal,  or  from  the  iron  by  adding  to  it  the  coal  which 
was  wanting.  The  first,  obtained  by  the  decarburation  of  the 
metal,  gives  natural  or  puddled  steel;  the  second,  produced 
by  the  carburation  of  the  iron,  gives  steel  of  cementation. 

It  was  the  last  which  Cyrus  Harding  intended  to  forge,  as 
he  possessed  iron  in  a pure  state.  He  succeeded  by  heating 
the  metal  with  powdered  coal  in  a crucible  which  had  pre- 
viously been  manufactured  from  clay  suitable  for  the  purpose. 

He  then  worked  this  steel,  which  is  malleable  both  when 
hot  or  cold,  with  the  hammer.  Neb  and  Pencroft,  cleverlj 
Erected,  made  hatchets,  which,  heated  red-hot,  and  plunged 
suddenly  into  cold  water,  acquired  an  excellent  temper. 

Other  instruments,  of  course  roughly  fashioned,  were  also 
manufactured  ; blades  for  planes,  axes,  hatchets,  pieces  of  steel 
to  be  transformed  into  saws,  chisels,  then  iron  for  spades,  pick- 
axes,  hammers,  nails,  etc.  At  last,  on  the  5th  of  May,  the 
metallic  period  ended,  the  smiths  returned  to  the  Chimneys, 
and  new  work  would  soon  authorize  them  to  take  a fresh  titl©0 


CHAPTER  XVI, 


IKE  QUESTION  OF  A DWELLING  IS  AGAIN  DISCUSSED  — PEN» 

croft’s  fancies  — exploring  to  the  north  of  the 

LAKE  — THE  NORTHERN  EDGE  OF  THE  PLATEAU— SNAKES— 
THE  EXTREMITY  OF  THE  LAKE  — TOP’S  UNEASINESS  — TOP 
SWIMMING— A COMBAT  UNDER  THE  WATER— THE  DUGONG. 

It  was  the  6th  of  May,  a day  which  corresponds  to  the  6th  (A 
November  in  the  countries  of  the  northern  hemisphere.  The 
sky  had  been  obscured  for  some  days,  and  it  was  of  impor- 
tance to  make  preparations  for  the  winter.  However,  the 
temperature  was  not  as  yet  much  lower,  and  a centigrade 
thermometer,  transported  to  Lincoln  Island,  would  still  have 
marked  an  average  of  ten  to  twelve  degrees  above  zero.  This 
was  not  surprising,  since  Lincoln  Island,  probably  situated 
between  the  thirty-fifth  and  fortieth  parallel,  would  be  subject, 
in  the  southern  hemisphere,  to  the  same  climate  as  Sicily  or 
Greece  in  the  northern  hemisphere.  But  as  Greece  and  Sicily 
have  severe  cold,  producing  snow  and  ice,  so  doubtless  would 
Lincoln  Island  in  the  severest  part  of  the  winter,  and  it  was 
advisable  to  provide  against  it. 

In  any  case  if  cold  did  not  yet  threaten  them,  the  rainy 
season  would  begin,  and  on  this  lonely  island,  exposed  to  all 
the  fury  of  the  elements,  in  mid  ocean,  bad  weather  would  be 
frequent,  and  probably  terrible.  The  question  of  a more  com- 
fortable dwelling  than  the  Chimneys  must  therefore  be  seri- 
ously considered  and  promptly  resolved  on. 

Pencroft,  naturally,  had  some  predilection  for  the  retreat 
which  he  had  discovered,  but  he  well  understood  that  another 
must  be  found.  The  Chimneys  had  been  already  visited  by  the 
sea,  under  circumstances  which  are  known,  and  it  would 
not  do  to  be  exposed  again  to  a similar  accident. 

159 


160 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


“ Besides,”  added  Cyrus  Harding,  who  this  day  was  talking  of 
these  things  with  his  companions,  “ we  have  some  precautions 
to  take.” 

“ Why  ? The  island  is  not  inhabited,”  said  the  reporter.  * 

“ That  is  probable,”  replied  the  engineer,  “ although  we  have 
not  yet  explored  the  interior  ; but  if  no  human  beings  are 
found,  I fear  that  dangerous  animals  may  abound.  It  is  neces- 
sary to  guard  against  a possible  attack,  so  that  we  shall  not  be 
obliged  to  watch  every  night,  or  to  keep  up  a fire.  And  then, 
my  friends,  we  must  foresee  every  thing.  We  are  here  in  a 
part  of  the  Pacific  often  frequented  by  Malay  pirates—” 

“ What ! ” said  Herbert,  “ at  such  a distance  from  land  ? ” 

“ Yes,  my  boy,”  replied  the  engineer.  “ These  pirates  are 
bold  sailors  as  well  as  formidable  enemies,  and  we  must  take 
measures  accordingly.” 

“ Well,”  replied  Pencroft,  “ we  will  fortify  ourselves  against 
savages  with  two  legs  as  well  as  against  savages  with  four. 
But,  captain,  will  it  not  be  best  to  explore  every  part  of  the 
island  before  undertaking  any  thing  else  ? ” 

“ That  would  be  best,”  added  Gideon  Spilett. 

“ Who  knows  if  we  might  not  find  on  the  opposite  side  one 
of  the  caverns  which  we  have  searched  for  in  vain  here  ? ” 
“That  is  true,”  replied  the  engineer,  “but  you  forget,  my 
friends,  that  it  will  be  necessary  to  establish  ourselves  in  the 
neighborhood  of  a watercourse,  and  that,  from  the  summit  of 
Mount  Franklin,  we  could  not  see  towards  the  west,  either 
stream  or  river.  Here,  on  the  contrary,  we  are  placed  between 
the  Mercy  and  Lake  Grant,  an  advantage  which  must  not  be 
neglected.  And,  besides,  this  side,  looking  towards  the  east,  is 
not  exposed  as  the  other  is  to  the  trade-winds,  which  in  this 
hemisphere  blow  from  the  northwest.” 

“ Then,  captain,”  replied  the  sailor,  “ let  us  build  a house  on 
the  edge  of  the  lake.  Neither  bricks  nor  tools  are  wanting 
now.  After  having  been  brickmakers,  potters,  smelters,  and 
smiths,  we  shall  surely  know  how  to  be  masons  !” 

“ Yes,  my  friend ; but  before  coming  to  any  decision  we 
must  consider  the  matter  thoroughly.  A natural  dwelling 
would  spare  us  much  work,  and  would  be  a surer  retreat,  for 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


161 


it  would  be  as  well  defended  against  enemies  from  the  interior 
as  those  from  outside.” 

“ That  is  true,  Cyrus,”  replied  the  reporter,  “ but  we  have 
already  examined  all  that  mass  of  granite,  and  there  is  not  a 
hole,  not  a cranny ! ” 

“No,  not  one!”  added  Pencroft.  “Ah,  if  we  were  able  to 
dig  out  a dwelling  in  that  cliff,  at  a good  height,  so  as  to  be 
out  of  the  reach  of  harm,  that  would  be  capital ! I can  see 
that  on  the  front  which  looks  seaward,  five  or  six  rooms—” 

“With  windows  to  light  them !”  said  Herbert,  laughing. 

“ And  a staircase  to  climb  up  to  them ! ” added  Neb. 

“ You  are  laughing,”  cried  the  sailor,  “ and  why  ? What  is 
there  impossible  in  what  I propose  ? Haven’t  we  got  pickaxes 
and  spades  ? Won’t  Captain  Harding  be  able  to  make  powder 
to  blow  up  the  mine  ? Isn’t  it  true,  captain,  that  you  will 
make  powder  the  very  day  we  want  it  ?” 

Cyrus  Harding  listened  to  the  enthusiastic  Pencroft  develop- 
ing his  fanciful  projects.  To  attack  this  mass  of  granite,  even 
by  a mine,  was  Herculean  work,  and  it  was  really  vexing  that 
nature  could  not  help  them  at  their  need.  But  the  engineer 
did  not  reply  to  the  sailor  except  by  proposing  to  examine  the 
cliff  more  attentively,  from  the  mouth  of  the  river  to  the  angle 
which  terminated  it  on  the  north. 

They  went  out,  therefore,  and  the  exploration  was  made 
With  extreme  care  over  an  extent  of  nearly  two  miles.  But  in 
no  place,  in  the  bare,  straight  cliff,  could  any  cavity  be  found, 
rhe  nests  of  the  rock  pigeons  which  fluttered  at  its  summit 
were  only,  in  reality,  holes  bored  at  the  very  top,  and  on  the 
irregular  edge  of  the  granite. 

It  was  a provoking  circumstance,  and  as  to  attacking  this 
cliff,  either  with  pickaxe  or  with  powder,  so  as  to  effect  a 
sufficient  excavation,  it  was  not  to  be  thought  of.  It  so  hap- 
pened that,  on  all  this  part  of  the  shore,  Pencroft  had  discov- 
ered the  only  habitable  shelter,  that  is  to  say,  the  Chimneys, 
which  now  had  to  be  abandoned. 

The  exploration  ended,  the  colonists  found  themselves  at  the 
north  angle  of  the  cliff,  where  it  terminated  in  long  slopes 
which  died  away  on  the  shore.  From  this  place,  to  its  extreme 
11 


162 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


limit  in  the  west,  it  only  formed  a sort  of  declivity,  a thick 
mass  of  stones,  earth,  and  sand,  bound  together  by  plants, 
bushes,  and  grass,  inclined  at  an  angle  of  only  forty-five 
degrees.  Clumps  of  trees  grew  on  these  slopes,  which  were 
also  carpeted  with  thick  grass.  But  the  vegetation  did  not 
extend  far,  and  a long,  sandy  plain,  which  began  at  the  foot  of 
these  slopes,  reached  to  the  beach. 

Cyrus  Harding  thought,  not  without  reason,  that  the  overplus 
of  the  lake  must  overflow  on  this  side.  The  excess  of  water 
furnished  by  the  Red  Creek  must  also  escape  by  some  channel 
or  other.  Now  the  engineer  had  not  found  this  channel  on 
any  part  of  the  shore  already  explored,  that  is  to  say,  from  the 
n\puth  of  the  stream  on  the  west  of  Prospect  Heights. 

The  engineer  now  proposed  to  his  companions  to  climb  the 
slope,  and  to  return  to  the  Chimneys  by  the  heights,  while 
exploring  the  northern  and  eastern  shores  of  the  lake.  The 
proposal  was  accepted,  and  in  a few  minutes  Herbert  and  Neb 
were  on  the  upper  plateau.  Cyrus  Harding,  Gideon  Spilett, 
and  Pencroft  followed  with  more  sedate  steps. 

The  beautiful  sheet  of  water  glittered  through  the  trees 
under  the  rays  of  the  sun.  In  this  direction  the  country  was 
charming.  The  eye  feasted  on  the  groups  of  trees.  Some  oltf 
trunks,  bent  with  age,  showed  black  against  the  verdant  grass 
which  covered  the  ground.  Crowds  of  brilliant  cockatoos 
screamed  among  the  branches,  moving  prisms,  hopping  from 
one  bough  to  another. 

The  settlers  instead  of  going  directly  to  the  north  bank  of 
the  lake,  made  a circuit  round  the  edge  of  the  plateau,  so  as  to 
join  the  mouth  of  the  creek  on  its  left  bank.  It  was  a detour 
of  more  than  a mile  and  a half.  Walking  was  easy,  for  the 
trees  widely  spread,  left  a considerable  space  between  them. 
The  fertile  zone  evidently  stopped  at  this  point,  and  vegetation 
would  be  less  vigorous  in  the  part  between  the  course  of  the 
Creek  and  the  Mercy. 

Cyrus  Harding  and  his  companions  walked  over  this  new 
ground  with  great  care.  Bows,  arrows,  and  sticks  with  sharp 
iron  points  were  their  only  weapons.  However,  no  wild  beast 
showed  itself,  and  it  was  probable  that  these  animals  frequented 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


165 


rather  the  thick  forests  in  the  south;  hut  the  settlers  had 
the  disagreeable  surprise  of  seeing  Top  stop  before  a snake 
of  great  size,  measuring  from  fourteen  to  fifteen  feet  in  length. 
Neb  killed  it  by  a blow  from  his  stick.  Cyrus  Harding  examined 
the  reptile,  and  declared  it  not  venomous,  for  it  belonged  to 
that  species  of  diamond  serpents  which  the  natives  of  New 
South  Wales  rear.  But  it  was  possible  that  others  existed 
whose  bite  was  mortal,  such  as  the  deaf  vipers  with  forked 
tails,  which  rise  up  under  the  feet,  or  those  winged  snakes, 
furnished  with  two  ears,  which  enable  them  to  proceed  with 
great  rapidity.  Top,  the  first  moment  of  surprise  over,  began 
a reptile  chase  with  such  eagerness,  that  they  feared  for  his 
safety.  His  master  called  him  back  directly. 

The  mouth  of  the  Bed  Creek,  at  the  place  where  it  entered 
into  the  lake,  was  soon  reached.  The  explorers  recognized 
on  the  opposite  shore  the  point  which  they  had  visited  on  their 
descent  from  Mount  Franklin.  Cyrus  Harding  ascertained  that 
the  flow  of  water  into  it  from  the  creek  was  considerable. 
Nature  must  therefore  have  provided  some  place  for  the  escape 
of  the  overplus.  This  doubtless  formed  a fall,  which,  if  it  could 
be  discovered,  would  be  of  great  use. 

The  colonists,  walking  apart,  but  not  straying  far  from  each 
other,  began  to  skirt  the  edge  of  the  lake,  which  was  very  steep. 
The  water  appeared  to  be  full  of  fish,  and  Pencroft  resolved 
to  make  some  fishing-rods,  so  as  to  try  and  catch  some. 

The  northeast  point  was  first  to  be  doubled.  It  might  have 
been  supposed  that  the  discharge  of  water  was  at  this  place, 
for  the  extremity  of  the  lake  was  almost  on  a level  with  the 
edge  of  the  plateau.  But  no  signs  of  this  were  discovered, 
and  the  colonists  continued  to  explore  the  bank,  which,  after 
a slight  bend,  descended  parallel  to  the  shore. 

On  this  side  the  banks  were  less  woody,  but  clumps  of 
trees,  here  and  there,  added  to  the  picturesqueness  of  the 
country.  Lake  Grant  was  viewed  from  thence  in  all  its  extent, 
and  no  breath  disturbed  the  surface  of  its  waters.  Top,  in  beat- 
ing the  bushes,  put  up  flocks  of  birds  of  different  kinds,  which 
Gideon  Spilett  and  Herbert  saluted  with  arrows.  One  was  hit 
by  the  lad,  and  fell  into  some  marshy  grass.  Top  rushed  for- 


166 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


ward,  and  brought  a beautiful  swimming  bird,  of  a slate  color, 
short  beak,  very  developed  frontal  plate,  and  wings  edged  with 
white.  It  was  a “ coot,”  the  size  of  a large  partridge,  belong- 
ing to  the  group  of  macrodacyles  wliich  form  the  transition 
between  the  order  of  wading  birds  and  that  of  palmipeds. 
Sorry  game,  in  truth,  and  its  flavor  is  far  from  pleasant.  But 
Top  was  not  so  particular  in  these  things  as  his  masters,  and  it 
was  agreed  that  the  coot  should  be  for  his  supper. 

The  settlers  were  now  following  the  eastern  bank  of  the 
lake,  and  they  would  not  be  long  in  reaching  the  part  which 
they  already  knew.  The  engineer  was  much  surprised  at  not 
seeing  any  indication  of  the  discharge  of  water.  The  reporter 
and  the  sailor  talked  with  him,  and  he  could  not  conceal  his 
astonishment. 

At  this  moment  Top,  who  had  been  very  quiet  till  then,  gave 
signs  of  agitation.  The  intelligent  animal  went  backwards 
and  forwards  on  the  shore,  stopped  suddenly,  and  looked  at 
the  water,  one  paw  raised,  as  if  he  was  pointing  at  some  in- 
visible game;  then  he  barked  furiously,  and  was  suddenly 
silent. 

Neither  Cyrus  Harding  nor  his  companions  had  at  first  paid 
any  attention  to  Top’s  behavior;  but  the  dog’s  barking  soon 
became  so  frequent  that  the  engineer  noticed  it. 

“What  is  there,  Top?”  he  asked. 

The  dog  bounded  towards  his  master,  seeming  to  be  very 
uneasy,  and  then  rushed  again  towards  the  bank.  Then,  all  at 
once,  he  plunged  into  the  lake. 

“ Here,  Top  !”  cried  Cyrus  Harding,  who  did  not  like  his  dog 
to  venture  into  the  treacherous  water. 

“What’s  happening  down  there?”  asked  Pencroft,  examin- 
ing the  surface  of  the  lake. 

“ Top  smells  some  amphibious  creature,”  replied  Herbert. 

“ An  aliigator,  perhaps,”  said  the  reporter. 

“ I do  not  think  so,”  replied  Harding.  “ Alligators  are  only 
met  with  in  regions  less  elevated  in  latitude.” 

Meanwhile  Top  had  returned  at  his  master’s  call,  and  had 
regained  the  shore;  but  he  could  not  stay  quiet;  he  plunged 
in  amongst  the  tall  grass,  and  guided  by  instinct,  he  appeared 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


im 

to  follow  some  invisible  being  which  was  slipping  along  under 
the  surface  of  the  water.  However,  the  water  was  calm,  not 
a ripple  disturbed  its  surface.  Several  times  the  settlers 
stopped  on  the  bank,  and  observed  it  attentively.  Nothing 
appeared.  There  was  some  mystery  there. 

The  engineer  was  puzzled. 

“Let  us  pursue  this  exploration  to  the  end,”  said  he. 

Half  an  hour  after  they  had  all  arrived  at  the  southeast  angle 
of  the  lake  on  Prospect  Heights.  At  this  point  the  examination 
of  the  banks  of  the  lake  was  considered  finished,  and  yet  the 
engineer  had  not  been  able  to  discover  how  and  where  the 
waters  were  discharged.  “There  is  no  doubt  this  overflow 
exists,”  he  repeated,  “and  since  it  is  not  visible  it  must  go 
through  the  granite  cliff  at  the  west !” 

“But  what  importance  do  you  attach  to  knowing  that,  my 
dear  Cyrus?”  asked  Gideon  Spilett. 

“Considerable  importance,”  replied  the  engineer;  “for  if 
it  flows  through  the  cliff  there  is  probably  some  cavity,  which 
it  would  be  easy  to  render  habitable  after  turning  away  the 
water.” 

“ But  is  it  not  possible,  captain,  that  the  water  flows  away  at 
the  bottom  of  the  lake,”  said  Herbert,  “and  that  it  reaches  the 
sea  by  some  subterranean  passage?  ” 

“That  might  be,”  replied  the  engineer,  “and  should  it  be 
so  we  shall  be  obliged  to  build  our  house  ourselves,  since  nature 
has  not  done  it  for  us.” 

The  colonists  were  about  to  begin  to  traverse  the  plateau  to 
return  to  the  Chimneys,  when  Top  gave  new  signs  of  agita- 
tion. He  barked  with  fury,  and  before  his  master  could  restrain 
him,  he  had  plunged  a second  time  into  the  lake. 

All  ran  towards  the  bank.  The  dog  was  already  more  than 
twenty  feet  off,  and  Cyrus  was  calling  him  back,  when  an 
enormous  head  emerged  from  the  water,  which  did  not  appear 
to  be  deep  in  that  place. 

Herbert  recognized  directly  the  species  of  amphibian  to 
which  the  tapering  head,  with  large  eyes,  and  adorned  with 
long  silky  mustaches,  belonged. 

“A  lamantin  !”  he  cried. 


170 


©HOPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


It  was  not  a lamantin,  but  one  of  that  species  of  the  order 
of  cetaceans,  which  bear  the  name  of  the  “ dugong for  its 
nostrils  were  open  at  the  upper  part  of  its  snout.  The  enor- 
mous animal  rushed  on  the  dog,  who  tried  to  escape  by  returning 
towards  the  shore.  His  master  could  do  nothing  to  save  him, 
and  before  Gideon  Spilett  or  Herbert  thought  of  bending  their 
bows,  Top,  seized  by  the  dugong,  had  disappeared  beneath  the 
water.  Neb,  his  iron-tipped  spear  in  his  hand,  wished  to  go  to 
Top’s  help,  and  attach  the  dangerous  animal  in  its  own  element. 

“No,  Neb,”  said  the  engineer,  restraining  his  courageous 
servant. 

Meanwhile  a struggle  was  going  on  beneath  the  water,  an 
inexplicable  struggle,  for  in  his  situation  Top  could  not  pos- 
sibly resist ; and  judging  by  the  bubbling  of  the  surface  it 
must  be  also  a terrible  struggle,  and  could  not  but  terminate 
in  the  death  of  the  dog!  But  suddenly,  in  the  middle  of  a 
foaming  circle,  Top  reappeared.  Thrown  in  the  air  by  some 
unknown  power,  he  rose  ten  feet  above  the  surface  of  the  lake, 
fell  again  into  the  midst  of  the  agitated  waters,  and  then  soon 
gained  the  shore,  without  any  severe  wounds,  miraculously 
saved. 

Cyrus  Harding  and  his  companions  could  not  understand 
it.  What  was  not  less  inexplicable  was  that  the  struggle  still 
appeared  to  be  going  on.  Doubtless,  the  dugong,  attacked  by 
some  powerful  animal,  after  having  released  the  dog,  was 
fighting  on  its  own  account.  But  it  did  not  last  long.  The 
water  became  red  with  blood,  and  the  body  of  the  dugong, 
emerging  from  the  sheet  of  scarlet  which  spread  around,  soon 
stranded  on  a little  beach  at  the  south  angle  of  the  lake.  The 
colonists  ran  towards  it.  The  dugong  was  dead.  It  was  an 
enormous  animal,  fifteen  or  sixteen  feet  long,  and  must  have 
weighed  from  three  to  four  thousand  pounds.  At  its  neck 
wa3  a wound,  which  appeared  to  have  been  produced  by  a 
sharp  blade. 

What  cculd  the  amphibious  creature  have  been,  who,  by  this 
terrible  blow  had  destroyed  the  formidable  dugong  ? No  one 
could  tell,  and  much  interested  in  this  incident,  Harding  axifl 
his  companions  returned  to  the  Chimneya 


CHAPTER  XVII 


■ym IT  TO  THE  LAKE— THE  INDICATING  CURRENT— CYRUS  HARD 
ING’S  PROJECTS  — THE  FAT  OF  THE  DUGONG  — EMPLOYING 
SHISTOSE  PYRITES— SULPHATE  OF  IRON— HOW  GLYCERINE  IS 
MADE— SOAP— SALTPETRE— SULPHURIC  ACID— AZOTIC  ACID— 
THE  NEW  FALL. 

The  next  day,  the  7th  of  May,  Harding  and^Gideon  Spilett, 
leaving  Neb  to  prepare  breakfast,  climbed  Prospect  Heights, 
whilst  Herbert  and  Pencroft  ascended  by  the  river,  to  renew 
their  store  of  wood. 

The  engineer  and  the  reporter  soon  reached  the  little  beach 
on  which  the  dugong  had  been  stranded.  Already  flocks 
of  birds  had  attacked  the  mass  of  flesh,  and  had  to  be  driven 
away  with  stones,  for  Cyrus  wished  to  keep  the  fat  for  the 
use  of  the  colony.  As  to  the  animal’s  flesh,  it  would  furnish 
excellent  food,  for  in  the  islands  of  the  Malay  archipelago  and 
elsewhere,  it  is  especially  reserved  for  the  table  of  the  native 
princes.  But  that  was  Neb’s  affair. 

At  this  moment  Cyrus  Harding  had  other  thoughts.  He 
was  much  interested  in  the  incident  of  the  day  before.  He 
wished  to  penetrate  the  mystery  of  that  submarine  combat, 
and  to  ascertain  what  monster  could  have  given  the  dugong 
so  strange  a wound.  He  remained  at  the  edge  of  the  lake,  look- 
ing, observing;  but  nothing  appeared  under  the  tranqui] 
Waters,  which  sparkled  in  the  first  rays  of  the  rising  sun. 

At  the  beach,  on  which  lay  the  body  of  the  dugong,  tho 
water  was  tolerably  shallow,  but  from  this  point  the  bottom  of 
the  lake  sloped  gradually,  and  it  was  probable  that  the  depth 
was  considerable  in  the  center.  The  lake  might  be  considered 
is  a large  center  basin,  which  was  filled  by  the  water  from 
the  Red  Creek. 


171 


172 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


“ Well,  Cyrus,”  said  the  reporter,  “ there  seems  to  be  nothing 
suspicious  in  this  water.” 

“ No,  my  dear  Spilett,”  replied  the  engineer,  “ and  I really 
do  not  know  how  to  account  for  the  incident  of  yesterday.” 

“ I acknowledge,”  returned  Spilett,  “ that  the  wound  given 
to  this  creature  is,  at  least,  very  strange,  and  I can  not  ex- 
plain either  how  Top  was  so  vigorously  cast  up  out  of  the 
water.  One  could  have  thought  that  a powerful  arm  hurled 
him  up,  and  that  the  same  arm  with  a dagger  killed  the 
dugong ! ” 

“Yes,”  replied  the  engineer,  who  had  become  thoughtful; 
“ there  is  something  there  that  I can  not  understand.  But  do 
you  better  understand  either,  my  dear  Spilett,  in  what  way  I 
was  saved  myselflr-how  I was  drawn  from  the  waves,  and 
carried  to  the  downs  ? No ! Is  it  not  true  ? Now,  I feel  sure 
that  there  is  some  mystery  there,  which,  doubtless,  we  shall 
discover  some  day.  Let  us  observe,  but  do  not  dwell  on  these 
singular  incidents  before  our  companions.  Let  us  keep  our 
remarks  to  ourselves,  and  continue  our  work.” 

It  will  be  remembered  that  the  engineer  had  not  as  yet 
been  able  to  discover  the  place  where  the  surplus  water 
escaped,  but  he  knew  it  must  exist  somewhere.  He  was  much 
surprised  to  see  a strong  current  at  this  place.  By  throwing 
in  some  bits  of  wood  he  found  that  it  set  towards  the  southern 
angle.  He  followed  the  current,  and  arrived  at  the  south  point 
of  the  lake. 

There  was  there  a sort  of  depression  in  the  water,  as  if 
it  was  suddenly  lost  in  some  fissure  in  the  ground. 

Harding  listened;  placing  his  ear  to  the  level  of  the  lake,  he 
very  distinctly  heard  the  noise  of  a subterranean  fall. 

“There,”  said  he,  rising,  “is  the  discharge  of  the  water; 
there,  doubtless,  by  a passage  in  the  granite  cliff,  it  joins  the 
sea,  through  cavities  which  we  can  use  to  our  profit.  Well,  I 
can  find  it ! ” 

The  engineer  cut  a long  branch,  stripped  it  of  its  leaves,  and, 
plunging  it  into  the  angles  between  the  two  banks,  he  found 
that  there  was  a large  hole  one  foot  only  beneath  the  surface 
of  tne  water.  This  noie  was  tne  opening  so  long  looked  for 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


in  vain,  and  the  force  of  the  current  was  such  that  the  branch 
was  torn  from  the  engineer’s  hands  and  disappeared. 

“There  is  no  doubt  about  it  now,”  repeated  Harding. 
“ There  is  the  outlet,  and  I will  lay  it  open  to  view ! ” 

“ How  ? ” asked  Gideon  Spilett. 

“ By  lowering  the  level  of  the  water  of  the  lake  three  feet.” 
“And  how  will  you  lower  the  level  ? ” 

“ By  opening  another  outlet  larger  than  this.” 

“At  what  place,  Cyrus  ?” 

“At  the  part  of  the  bank  nearest  the  coast.” 

“ But  it  is  a mass  of  granite,”  observed  Spilett. 

“ Well,”  replied  Cyrus  Harding,  “ I will  blow  up  the  granite, 
and  the  water  escaping,  will  subside,  so  as  to  lay  bare  this 
opening—” 

“ And  make  a waterfall,  by  falling  on  to  the  beach,”  added 
the  reporter. 

“ A fall  that  we  shall  make  use  of,”  replied  Cyrus.  “ Come 
come ! ” 

The  engineer  hurried  away  his  companion,  whose  confi- 
dence in  Harding  was  such  that  he  did  not  doubt  the  enter- 
prise would  succeed.  And  yet,  how  was  this  granite  wall  to 
be  opened  without  powder,  and  with  imperfect  instruments  ? 
Was  not  this  work  upon  which  the  engineer  was  so  bent 
above  their  strength  ? 

When  Harding  and  the  reporter  entered  the  Chimneys  they 
found  Herbert  and  Pencroft  unloading  their  raft  of  wood. 

“ The  woodmen  have  just  finished,  Captain,”  said  the  sailor, 
laughing,  “ and  when  you  want  masons—” 

“ Masons— no,  but  chemists,”  replied  the  engineer. 

“Yes,”  added  the  reporter,  “we  are  going  to  blow  up  the 
island—” 

“ Blow  up  the  island  ? ” cried  Pencroft. 

“ Part  of  it,  at  least,”  replied  Spilett. 

“Listen  to  me,  my  friends,”  said  the  engineer.  And  he  made 
known  to  them  the  result  of  his  observations. 

According  to  him,  a cavity,  more  or  less  considerable,  must 
exist  in  the  mass  of  granite  which  supported  Prospect  Heights, 
and  he  intended  to  penetrate  into  it.  To  do  this,  the  opening 


174 


•SME  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


through  which  the  water  rushed  must  first  be  cleared,  and 
the  level  lowered  by  making  a larger  outlet.  Therefore  an 
explosive  substance  must  be  manufactured,  which  would  make 
a deep  trench  in  some  other  part  of  the  shore.  This  was 
what  Harding  was  going  to  attempt  with  the  minerals  which 
nature  placed  at  his  disposal. 

It  is  useless  to  say  with  what  enthusiasm  all,  especially 
Pencroft,  received  this  project.  To  employ  great  means,  open 
the  granite,  create  a cascade,  that  suited  the  sailor.  And  he 
would  just  as  soon  be  a chemist  as  a mason  or  bootmaker, 
since  the  engineer  wanted  chemicals.  He  would  be  all  that 
they  liked,  “even  a professor  of  dancing  and  deportment,”  said 
he  to  Neb,  if  that  was  ever  necessary. 

Neb  and  Pencroft  were  first  of  all  told  to  extract  the  grease 
from  the  dugong,  and  to  keep  the  flesh,  which  was  destined  for 
food.  Such  perfect  confidence  had  they  in  the  engineer,  that 
they  set  out  directly,  without  even  asking  a question.  A few 
minutes  after  them,  Cyrus  Harding,  Herbert,  and  Gideon 
Spilett,  dragging  the  hurdle,  went  toward  the  vein  of  coals, 
where  those  shistose  pyrites  abound  which  are  met  with  in 
the  most  recent  transition  of  soil,  and  of  which  Harding  had 
already  found  a specimen.  All  the  day  being  employed  in 
carrying  a quantity  of  these  stones  in  the  Chimneys,  by  evening 
they  had  several  tons. 

The  next  day,  the  8th  of  May,  the  engineer  began  his  man- 
ipulations.  These  shistose  pyrites  being  composed  principally 
of  coal,  flint,  alumina,  and  sulphuret  of  iron  — the  latter  in 
excess — it  was  necessary  to  separate  the  sulphuret  of  iron,  and 
transform  it  into  sulphate  as  rapidly  as  possible.  The  sulphate 
obtained,  the  sulphuric  acid  could  then  be  extracted. 

This  was  the  object  to  be  attained.  Sulphuric  acid  is  one  of 
the  agents  the  most  frequently  employed,  and  the  manufactur- 
ing importance  of  a nation  can  be  measured  by  the  consump- 
tion which  is  made  of  it.  This  acid  would  later  be  of  great  use 
to  the  settlers,  in  the  manufacturing  of  candles,  tanning  skins, 
etc.,  but  this  time  the  engineer  reserved  it  for  another  use. 

Cyrus  Harding  chose,  behind  the  Chimneys,  a site  where 
the  ground  was  perfectly  level.  On  this  ground  he  placed  a 


DROPPED  PROM  THE  CLOUDS, 


pm 

layer  of  branches  and  chopped  wood,  on  which  were  piled 
some  pieces  of  shistose  pyrites,  buttressed  one  against  the  other, 
the  whole  being  covered  with  a thin  layer  of  pyrites,  previously 
reduced  to  the  size  of  a nut. 

This  done,  they  set  fire  to  the  wood,  the  heat  was  communi- 
cated to  the  shist,  which  soon  kindled,  since  it  contains  coal 
and  sulphur.  The  new  layers  of  bruised  pyrites  were  arranged 
so  as  to  form  an  immense  heap,  the  exterior  of  which  was 
covered  with  earth  and  grass,  several  air-holes  being  left,  as  if 
it  was  a stack  of  wood  which  was  to  be  carbonized  to  make 
charcoal. 

They  then  left  the  transformation  to  complete  itself,  and  it 
would  not  take  less  than  ten  or  twelve  days  for  the  sulphuret 
of  iron  to  be  changed  into  sulphate  of  iron  and  the  alumina 
into  sulphate  of  alumina,  two  equally  soluble  substances,  the 
others,  flint,  burnt  coal,  and  cinders,  not  being  so. 

While  this  chemical  work  was  going  on,  Cyrus  Harding  pro- 
ceeded with  other  operations,  which  were  pursued  with  more 
than  zeal— it  was  eagerneSs. 

Neb  and  Pencroft  had  taken  away  the  fat  from  the  dugong, 
and  placed  it  in  large  earthen  pots.  It  was  then  necessary  te 
separate  the  glycerine  from  the  fat  by  saponifying  it.  Now, 
to  obtain  this  result,  it  had  to  be  treated  either  with  soda  of 
lime.  In  fact,  one  or  other  of  these  substances,  after  having 
attacked  the  fat,  would  form  a soap  by  separating  the  gly- 
cerine, and  it  was  just  this  glycerine  which  the  engineer 
wished  to  obtain.  There  was  no  want  of  lime,  only  treatment 
by  lime  would  give  calcareous  soap,  insoluble,  and  conse- 
quently useless,  whilst  treatment  by  soda  would  furnish,  on 
the  contrary,  a soluble  soap,  which  could  be  put  to  domestic 
use.  Now,  a practical  man,  like  Cyrus  Harding,  would  rather 
try  to  obtain  soda.  Was  this  difficult  ? No;  for  marine  plants 
abounded  on  the  shore,  glass-wort,  ficoides,  and  all  those 
f ucacese  which  form  wrack.  A large  quantity  of  these  plants 
was  collected,  first  dried,  then  burnt  in  holes  in  the  open  air. 
The  combustion  of  these  plants  was  kept  up  for  several  days, 
and  the  result  was  a compact  gray  mass,  which  has  been 
long  known  under  th©  name  of  “ natural  soda.” 


m 


OTE  IAKESIDE  EDITION. 


This  obtained,  the  engineer  treated  the  fat  with  soda,  which 
gave  both  a soluble  soap  and  that  neutral  substance  glycerine. 

But  this  was  not  all.  Cyrus  Harding  still  needed,  in  view  of 
his  future  preparation,  another  substance,  azote  of  potash, 
which  is  better  known  under  the  name  of  salt  of  nitre,  or  of 
saltpetre. 

Cyrus  Harding  could  have  manufactured  this  substance  by 
treating  the  carbonate  of  potash,  which  would  be  easily  ex- 
tracted from  the  cinders  of  the  vegetables,  by  azotic  acid. 
But  this  acid  was  wanting,  and  he  would  have  been  in  some 
difficulty,  if  nature  had  not  happily  furnished  the  saltpetre, 
without  giving  them  any  further  trouble  than  that  of  picking 
it  up.  Herbert  found  a vein  of  it  at  the  foot  of  Mount  Frank- 
lin, and  they  had  nothing  to  do  but  purify  this  salt. 

These  different  works  lasted  a week.  They  were  finished 
before  the  transformation  of  the  sulphuret  into  sulphate  of 
iron  had  been  accomplished.  During  the  following  days  the 
settlers  had  time  to  construct  a furnace  of  bricks  of  a par- 
ticular arrangement  to  serve  for  the*  distillation  of  the  sul- 
phate of  iron  when  it  had  been  obtained.  All  this  was  finished 
about  the  18th  of  May,  nearly  at  the  time  when  the  chemical 
transformation  terminated.  Gideon  Spilett,  Herbert,  Neb,  and 
Pencroft,  skillfully  directed  by  the  engineer,  had  become 
most  clever  workmen.  Before  all  masters,  necessity  is  the  one 
most  listened  to,  and  who  teaches  the  best. 

When  the  heap  of  pyrites  had  been  entirely  reduced  by  fire, 
the  result  of  the  operation,  consisting  of  sulphate  of  iron, 
sulphate  of  alumina,  flint,  remains  of  coal,  and  cinders,  were 
placed  in  a basin  full  of  water.  They  stirred  this  mixture,  let 
it  settle,  then  decanted  it,  and  obtained  a clear  liquid,  contain- 
ing in  solution  sulphate  of  iron  and  sulphate  of  alumina,  the 
other  matters  remaining  solid  since  they  are  insoluble.  Lastly, 
this  liquid  being  partly  evaporated,  crystals  of  sulphate  of 
iron  were  deposited,  and  the  not  evaporated  liquid,  which  con- 
tained the  sulphate  of  alumina,  was  thrown  away. 

Cyrus  Harding  had  now  at  his  disposal  a large  quantity  of 
these  sulphate  of  iron  crystals,  from  which  the  sulphuric  acid 
had  to  be  extracted.  The  making  of  sulphuric  acid  is  a very 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


177 


expensive  manufacture.  Considerable  works  are  necessary — a 
special  set  of  tools,  an  apparatus  of  platina,  leaden  chambers, 
unassailable  by  the  acid,  and  in  which  the  transformation  is 
performed,  etc.  The  engineer  had  none  of  these  at  his  dis- 
posal, but  he  knew  that,  in  Bohemia  especially,  sulphuric  acid 
is  manufactured  by  very  simple  means,  which  have  also  the 
advantage  of  producing  it  to  a superior  degree  of  concentra- 
tion. It  is  thus  that  the  acid  known  under  the  name  of  the 
Nordhausen  acid  is  made. 

To  obtain  sulphuric  acid,  Cyrus  Harding  had  only  one  opera- 
tion to  make,  to  calcine  the  sulphate  of  iron  crystals  in  a close 
vase,  so  that  the  sulphuric  acid  should  distill  in  vapor,  which 
vapor,  by  condensation,  would  produce  the  acid. 

The  crystals  were  placed  in  pots,  and  the  heat  from  the  fur- 
nace would  distill  the  sulphuric  acid.  The  operation  was  suc- 
cessfully completed,  and  on  the  20th  of  May,  twelve  days  after 
commencing  it,  the  engineer  was  the  possessor  of  the  agent 
which  later  he  hoped  to  use  in  so  many  different  ways. 

Now,  why  did  he  wish  for  this  agent  ? Simply  to  produce 
azotic  acid;  and  that  was  easy,  since  saltpetre,  attacked  by 
sulphuric  acid,  gives  this  acid  by  distillation. 

But,  after  all,  how  was  he  going  to  employ  this  azotic  acid  ? 
His  companions  were  still  ignorant  of  this,  for  he  had  not 
informed  them  of  the  result  at  which  he  aimed. 

However,  the  engineer  had  nearly  accomplished  his  purpose, 
and  by  a last  operation  he  would  procure  the  substance 
which  had  given  so  much  trouble. 

Taking  some  azotic  acid,  he  mixed  it  with  glycerine,  which 
had  been  previously  concentrated  by  evaporation,  subjected  to 
the  water-bath,  and  he  obtained,  without  even  em’ploying  a 
refrigerant  mixture,  several  pints  of  an  oily  yellow  mixture. 

This  last  operation  Cyrus  Harding  had  made  alone,  in  a 
retired  place,  at  a distance  from  the  Chimneys,  for  he  feared 
the  danger  of  an  explosion,  and  when  he  showed  a bottle  of 
this  liquid  to  his  friends,  he  contented  himself  with  saying,— 

“Here  is  nitro-glycerine !” 

It  was  really  this  terrible  production,  of  which  the  explosive 
power  is  perhaps  tenfold  that  of  ordinary  powder,  and  which 

12 


178 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


has  already  caused  so  many  accidents.  However,  since  a way 
has  been  found  to  transform  it  into  dynamite,  that  is  to  say, 
to  mix  with  it  some  solid  substance,  clay  or  sugar,  porous 
enough  to  hold  it,  the  dangerous  liquid  has  been  used  with 
more  security.  But  dynamite  was  not  yet  known  at  the  time 
when  the  settlers  worked  in  Lincoln  Island. 

“ And  is  it  that  liquid  that  is  going  to  blow  up  our  rocks  ? ” 
said  Pencroft,  incredulously. 

“Yes,  my  friend,”  replied  the  engineer,  “and  this  nitro- 
glycerine will  produce  so  much  the  more  effect,  as  the  granite 
is  extremely  hard,  and  will  oppose  a greater  resistance  to  the 
explosion.” 

“And  when  shall  we  see  this,  captain.” 

“ To-morrow,  as  soon  as  we  have  dug  a hole  for  the  mine,” 
replied  the  engineer. 

The  next  day,  the  21st  of  May,  at  daybreak,  the  miners  went 
to  the  point  which  formed  the  eastern  shore  of  Lake  Grant, 
and  was  only  live  hundred  feet  from  the  coast.  At  this  place 
the  plateau  inclined  downwards  from  the  waters,  which  were 
only  restrained  by  their  granite  case.  Therefore,  if  this  case 
was  broken,  the  water  would  escape  by  the  opening  and  form 
a stream,  which,  flowing  over  the  inclined  surface  of  the 
plateau,  would  rush  on  to  the  beach.  Consequently,  the  level 
of  the  lake  would  be  greatly  lowered,  and  the  opening  where 
the  water  escaped  would  be  exposed,  which  was  them  final 
aim. 

Under  the  engineer’s  directions,  Pencroft,  armed  with  a pick- 
axe, which  he  handled  skillfully  and  vigorously,  attacked  the 
granite.  The  hole  was  made  on  the  point  of  the  shore, 
slanting,  so  that  it  should  meet  a much  lower  level  than  that  of 
the  water  of  the  lake.  In  this  way  the  explosive  force,  by  scat- 
tering the  rock,  would  open  a large  place  for  the  water  to  rush 
out. 

The  work  took  some  time,  for  the  engineer,  wishing  to  pro- 
duce a great  effect,  intended  to  devote  not  less  than  seven 
quarts  of  nitro-glycerine  to  the  operation.  But  Pencroft, 
relieved  by  Neb,  did  so  well,  that  towards  four  o’clock  in  the 
evening  the  mine  was  finished. 


DEOPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


179 


Now  the  question  of  setting  fire  to  the  explosive  substance 
was  raised.  Generally,  nitro-glycerine  is  ignited  by  amorces 
of  fulminate,  which  in  bursting  cause  the  explosion.  A shock 
is  therefore  needed  to  produce  the  explosion,  for,  simply  lighted, 
this  substance  would  burn  without  exploding. 

Cyrus  Harding  would  certainly  have  been  able  to  fabricate 
an  amorce.  In  default  of  fulminate,  he  could  easily  obtain  a 
substance  similar  to  gun-cotton,  since  he  had  azotic  acid  at 
his  disposal.  This  substance,  pressed  in  a cartridge,  and  intro- 
duced amongst  the  nitro-glycerine,  would  burst  means  of  a 
match,  and  cause  the  explosion. 

But  Cyrus  Harding  knew  that  nitro-glycerine  would  explode 
by  a shock.  He  resolved  to  employ  this  means,  and  try  an 
other  way  if  this  did  not  succeed. 

In  fact,  the  blow  of  a hammer  on  a few  drops  of  nitro- 
glycerine, spread  out  on  a hard  surface,  was  enough  to  create 
an  explosion.  But  the  operator  could  not  be  there  to  give  the 
blow  without  becoming  a victim  to  the  operation.  Harding, 
therefore,  thought  of  suspending  a mass  of  iron,  weighing 
several  pounds,  by  means  of  a fibre,  to  an  upright  just  above 
the  mine.  Another  long  fibre,  previously  impregnated  with 
sulphur,  was  attached  to  the  middle  of  the  first,  by  one  end, 
whilst  the  other  lay  on  the  ground  several  feet  distant  from 
the  mine.  The  second  fibre  being  set  on  fire,  it  would  burn  till 
it  reached  the  first.  This  catching  fire  in  its  turn,  would 
break, >nd  the  mass  of  iron  would  fall  on  the  nitro-glycerine. 
This  apparatus  being  then  arranged,  the  engineer,  after  having 
sent  his  companions  to  a distance,  filied  the  hole,  so  that  the 
nitro-glycerine  was  on  a level  with  the  opening;  then  he  threw 
a few  drops  of  it  on  the  surface  of  the  rock,  above  which  the 
mass  of  iron  was  already  suspended. 

This  done,  Harding  lit  the  end  of  the  sulphured  fibre,  and 
leaving  the  place,  he  returned  with  his  companions  to  the 
Chimneys. 

The  fibre  was  intended  to  burn  five  and  twenty  minutes, 
and,  in  fact,  five  and  twenty  minutes  afterwards  a most 
tremendous  explosion  was  heard.  The  island  appeared  to 
tremble  to  its  very  foundation.  Stones  were  projected  in  the 


180 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


air  as  if  by  the  eruption  of  a volcano.  The  shock  produced  by 
the  displacing  of  the  air  was  such  that  the  rocks  of  the  Chim- 
neys shook.  The  settlers,  although  they  were  more  than  two 
miles  from  the  mine,  were  thrown  on  the  ground. 

They  rose,  climbed  the  plateau,  and  ran  towards  the  place 
where  the  bank  of  the  lake  must  have  been  shattered  by  the 
explosion. 

A cheer  escaped  them ! A large  rent  was  seen  in  the 
granite  ! A rapid  stream  of  water  rushed  foaming  across  the 
plateau  and  dashed  down  a height  of  three  hundred  feet  on  to 
the  beach  I 


CHAPTER  XVIII 


PENCROFT  NOW  DOUBTS  NOTHING — THE  OUTLET  OF  THE  LAKE— 
A SUBTERRANEAN  DESCENT  — THE  WAY  THROUGH  THE 
GRANITE  — TOP  DISAPPEARS  — THE  CENTRAL  CAVERN  — THE 
LOWER  WELL— MYSTERY— USING  THE  PICKAXE— THE  RETURN. 

Cyrus  Harding’s  project  had  succeeded,  but,  according  to 
his  usuab  habit,  he  showed  no  satisfaction;  with  closed  lips 
and  a fixed  look,  he  remained  motionless.  Herbert  was  in 
ecstacies,  Neb  bounded  with  joy,  Pencroft  nodded  his  great 
head,  murmuring  these  words: 

“ Come,  our  engineer  gets  on  capitally  ! ” 

The  nitro-glycerine  had  indeed  acted  powerfully.  The 
opening  which  it  had  made  was  so  large  that  the  volume  of 
water  which  escaped  through  this  new  outlet  was  at  least 
treble  that  which  before  passed  through  the  old  one.  The 
result  was  that  a short  time  after  the  operation  the  level  of 
the  lake  would  be  lowered  two  feet  or  more. 

The  settlers  went  to  the  Chimneys,  to  take  some  pickaxes 
iron-tipped  spears,  string  made  of  fibres,  flint  and  steel;  they 
then  returned  to  the  plateau,  Top  accompanying  them. 

On  the  way  the  sailor  could  not  help  saying  to  the  engineer: 

“ Don’t  you  think,  captain,  that  by  means  of  that  charming 
liquid  you  have  made,  one  could  blow  up  the  whole  of  our 
island  ? ” 

“ Without  any  doubt,  the  island,  continents,  and  the  world 
itself,”  replied  the  engineer.  “It  is  only  a question  of 
quantity.” 

“ Then  could  you  not  use  this  nitro-glycerine  for  loading  fire- 
arms ?”  asked  the  sailor. 

“No,  Pencroft;  for  it  is  too  explosive  a substance.  But  it 
would  be  easy  to  make  some  gun-cotton,  or  even  ordinary  pow* 

181 


182 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


der,  as  we  have  azotic  acid,  saltpetre,  sulphur,  and  coal 
Unhappily,  it  is  the  guns  which  we  have  not  got.” 

* Oh,  captain,”  replied  the  sailor,  “ with  a little  determine 
tion— ” 

Pencroft  had  erased  the  word  “impossible”  from  the 
dictionary  of  Lincoln  Island. 

The  settlers,  having  arrived  at  Prospect  Heights,  went  im- 
mediately towards  that  point  of  the  lake  near  which  was  the 
old  opening  now  uncovered.  This  outlet  had  now  become* 
practicable,  since  the  water  no  longer  rushed  through  it,  and 
it  would  doubtless  be  easy  to  explore  the  interior. 

In  a few  minutes  the  settlers  had  reached  the  lower  point 
of  the  lake,  and  a glance  showed  them  that  the  object  had 
been  attained. 

In  fact,  in  the  side  of  the  lake,  and  now  above  the  surface  of 
the  water,  appeared  the  long-looked-for  opening.  A narrow 
ridge,  left  bare  by  the  retreat  of  the  water,  allowed  them  to 
approach  it.  This  orifice  was  nearly  twenty  feet  in  width, 
but  scarcely  two  in  height.  It  was  like  the  mouth  of  a drain 
at  the  edge  of  a pavement,  and  therefore  did  not  offer  an 
easy  passage  to  the  settlers;  but  Neb  and  Pencroft,  taking 
their  pickaxes,  soon  made  it  of  a suitable  height. 

The  engineer  then  approached,  and  found  that  the  sides  of 
the  opening,  in  its  upper  part  at  least,  had  not  a slope  of  more 
than  from  thirty  to  thirty-five  degrees.  It  was  therefore  practice 
able,  and,  provided  that  the  declivity  did  not  increase,  it  would 
be  easy  to  descend  even  to  the  level  of  the  sea.  If  then,  as  was 
probable,  some  vast  cavity  existed  in  the  interior  of  the  granite, 
it  might,  perhaps,  be  of  great  use. 

“ Well,  captain,  what  are  we  stopping  for  ? ” asked  the 
sailor,  impatient  to  enter  the  narrow  passage.  “ You  see  Top 
has  got  before  us  ! ” 

“ Very  well,”  replied  the  engineer.  “ But  we  must  see  oui 
way.  Neb,  go  and  cut  some  resinous  branches.” 

Neb  and  Herbert  ran  to  the  edge  of  the  lake,  shaded  with 
pines  and  other  green  trees,  and  soon  returned  with  some 
branches,  which  they  made  into  torches.  The  torches  were 
lighted  with  flint  and  steel,  and  Cyrus  Harding  leading,  the 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


189 


settlers  ventured  into  the  dark  passage,  which  the  overplus  of 
the  lake  had  formerly  filled. 

Contrary  to  what  might  have  been  supposed,  the  diameter  of 
the  passage  increased  as  the  explorers  proceeded,  so  that  they 
very  soon  were  able  to  stand  upright.  The  granite,  worn  by 
the  water  for  an  infinite  time,  was  very  slippery,  and  falls  were 
to  be  dreaded.  But  the  settlers  were  all  attached  to  each  other 
by  a cord,  as  is  frequently  done  in  ascending  mountains.  Hap- 
pily some  projections  of  the  granite,  forming  regular  steps, 
made  the  descent  less  perilous.  Drops,  still  hanging  from 5 the 
rocks,  shone  here  and  there  under  the  light  of  the  torches,  and 
the  explorers  guessed  that  the  sides  were  clothed  with  innum- 
erable stalactites.  The  engineer  examined  this  black  granite. 
There  was  not  a stratum,  not  a break  in  it.  The  mass  was 
compact,  and  of  an  extremely  close  grain.  The  passage  dated, 
then,  from  the  very  origin  of  the  island.  It  was  not  the  water 
which  little  by  little  had  hollowed  it.  Pluto,  and  not  Neptune 
had  bored  it  with  his  own  hand,  and  on  the  wall  traces  of 
an  eruptive  work  could  be  distinguished,  which  all  the  wash- 
ing of  the  water  had  not  been  able  totally  to  efface. 

The  settlers  descended  very  slowly.  They  could  not  but 
feel  a certain  awe,  in  thus  venturing  into  these  unknown 
depths,  for  the  first  time  visited  by  human  beings.  They 
did  not  speak,  but  they  thought ; and  the  thought  came  to 
more  than  one,  that  some  polypus  or  other  gigantic  cephalopod 
might  inhabit  the  interior  cavities,  which  were  in  communica- 
tion with  the  sea.  However,  Top  kept  at  the  head  of  the  little 
band,  and  they  could  rely  on  the  sagacity  of  the  dog,  who 
would  not  fail  to  give  the  alarm  if  there  was  any  need  for  it. 

After  having  descended  about  a hundred  feet,  following  a 
winding  road,  Harding,  who  was  walking  on  before,  stopped, 
and  his  companions  came  up  with  him.  The  place  where  they 
had  halted  was  wider,  so  as  to  form  a cavern  of  moderate 
dimensions.  Drops  of  water  fell  from  the  vault,  but  that  did 
not  prove  that  they  oozed  through  the  rock.  They  were  simply 
the  last  traces  left  by  the  torrent  which  had  so  long  thundered 
through  this  cavity,  and  the  air  there  was  pure  though  slightly 
damp,  but  producing  no  mephitic  exhalation. 


184 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION* 


“ Well,  ray  dear  Cyrus,”  said  Gideon  Spiletts  “ here  is  a very 
secure  retreat,  well  hid  in  the  depths  of  the  rock,  but  it  is, 
however,  uninhabitable.” 

“ Why  uninhabitable  ? ” asked  the  sailor. 

“ Because  it  is  too  small  and  too  dark.” 

“Couldn’t  we  enlarge  it,  hollow  it  out,  make  openings  to 
let  in  light  and  air  ? ” replied  Pencroft,  who  now  thought  noth- 
ing impossible. 

“ Let  us  go  on  with  our  exploration,”  said  Cyrus  Harding. 
* Perhaps  lower  down,  nature  will  have  spared  us  this  labor.” 

“ We  have  only  gone  a third  of  the  way,”  observed  Herbert. 

“ Nearly  a third,”  replied  Harding,  “ for  we  have  descended  u 
hundred  feet  from  the  opening,  and  it  is  not  impossible  that  ? 
hundred  feet  further  down—” 

“ Where  is  Top  ? ” asked  Neb,  interrupting  his  master. 

They  searched  the  cavern,  but  the  dog  was  not  there. 

“ Most  likely  he  has  gone  on,”  said  Pencroft. 

“ Let  us  join  him,”  replied  Harding. 

The  descent  was  continued.  The  engineer  carefully  observed 
all  the  deviations  of  the  passage,  and  notwithstanding  so  many 
detours,  he  could  easily  have  given  an  account  of  its  general 
direction,  which  went  towards  the  sea. 

The  settlers  had  gone  some  fifty  feet  farther,  when  their 
attention  was  attracted  by  distant  sounds  which  came  up 
from  the  depths.  They  stopped  and  listened.  These  sounds, 
carried  through  the  passage  as  through  an  acoustic  tube,  came 
clearly  to  the  ear. 

“ That  is  Top  barking  ! ” cried  Herbert. 

“ Yes,”  replied  Pencroft,  “ and  our  brave  dog  is  barking  furi- 
ously ! ” 

“We  have  our  iron-tipped  spears,”  said  Cyrus  Harding. 
“ Keep  on  your  guard,  and  forward  ! ” 

“It  is  becoming  more  and  more  interesting,”  murmured 
Gideon  Spilett  in  the  sailor’s  ear,  who  nodded.  Harding  and 
his  companions  rushed  to  the  help  of  their  dog.  Top’s  barking 
became  more  and  more  perceptible,  and  it  seemed  strangely 
fierce.  Was  he  engaged  in  a struggle  with  some  animal  whose 
retreat  he  had  disturbed  ? Without  thinking  of  the  danger  to 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


185 


winch  they  might  be  exposed,  the  explorers  were  now  impelled 
by  an  irresistible  curiosity,  and  in  a few  minutes,  sixteen  feet 
lower  they  rejoined  Top. 

There  the  passage  ended  in  a vast  and  magnificent  cavern. 
Top  was  running  backwards  and  forwards,  barking  furiously. 
Pencroft  and  Neb,  waving  their  torches,  threw  the  light  into 
every  crevice  ; and  at  the  same  time,  Harding,  Gideon  Spilett, 
and  Herbert,  their  spears  raised,  were  ready  for  any  emergency 
which  might  arise.  The  enormous  cavern  was  empty.  The 
settlers  explored  it  in  every  direction.  There  was  nothing 
there,  not  an  animal,  not  a human  being  ; and  yet  Top  con- 
tinued to  bark.  Neither  caresses  nor  threats  could  make  him 
be  silent. 

“ There  must  be  a place  somewhere,  by  which  the  waters 
of  the  lake  reached  the  sea,”  said  the  engineer. 

“ Of  course,”  replied  Pencroft,  “ and  we  must  take  care  not 
to  tumble  into  a hole.” 

“ Go,  Top,  go  ! ” cried  Harding. 

The  dog,  excited  by  his  master’s  words,  ran  towards  the 
extremity  of  the  cavern,  and  there  redoubled  his  barking. 

They  foi  lowed  him,  and  by  the  light  of  the  torches,  perceived 
the  mouth  of  a regular  well  in  the  granite.  It  was  by  this 
that  the  water  escaped  ; and  this  time  it  was  not  an  oblique 
and  practicable  passage,  but  a perpendicular  well,  into  which 
it  was  impossible  to  venture. 

The  torches  were  held  over  the  opening  : nothing  could  be 
seen.  Harding  took  a lighted  branch,  and  threw  it  into  the 
abyss.  The  blazing  resin,  whose  illuminating  power  increased 
still  more  by  the  rapidity  of  its  fall,  lighted  up  the  interior  of 
the  well,  but  yet  nothing  appeared.  The  flame  then  went  out 
with  a slight  hiss,  which  showed  that  it  had  reached  the  water, 
that  is  to  say,  the  level  of  the  sea. 

The  engineer,  calculating  the  time  employed  in  its  fall,  was 
able  to  calculate  the  depth  of  the  well,  which  wa3  found  to  be 
about  ninety  feet. 

The  floor  of  the  cavern  must  thus  be  situated  ninety  feet 
above  the  level  of  the  sea. 

“Here  is  our  dwelling,”  said  Cyrus  Harding. 


186 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


“But  it  was  occupied  by  some  creature”  replied  Gideon 
Spilett,  whose  curiosity  was  not  yet  satisfied. 

“ Well,  the  creature,  amphibious  or  otherwise,  has  made  off 
through  this  opening,”  replied  the  engineer,  “and  has  left  the 
place  for  us.” 

“ Never  mind,”  added  the  sailor,  “ 1 should  like  very  much 
to  be  Top,  just  for  a quarter  of  an  hour,  for  he  doesn’t  bark 
for  nothing ! ” 

Cyrus  Harding  looked  at  his  dog,  and  those  of  his  com- 
panions who  were  near  him,  might  have  heard  him  murmur 
these  words,— 

“Yes,  I believe  that  Top  knows  more  than  we  do  about  rm 
great  many  things.” 

However,  the  wishes  of  the  settlers  were  for  the  most  part 
satisfied.  Chance,  aided  by  the  marvellous  sagacity  of  their 
leader,  had  done  them  great  service.  They  had  now  at  their 
disposal  a vast  cavern,  the  size  of  which  could  not  be  properly 
calculated  by  the  feeble  light  of  their  torches,  but  it  would 
certainly  be  easy  to  divide  it  into  rooms,  by  means  of  brick 
partitions,  or  to  use  it,  if  not  as  a house,  at  least  as  a spacious 
apartment.  The  water  which  had  left  it  could  not  return. 
The  place  was  free. 

Two  difficulties  remained ; firstly,  the  possibility  of  lighting 
this  excavation  in  the  midst  of  solid  rock ; secondly,  the 
necessity  of  rendering  the  means  of  access  more  easy.  It 
was  useless  to  think  of  lighting  it  from  above,  because  of  the 
enormous  thickness  of  the  granite  which  composed  the  ceiling; 
but  perhaps  the  outer  wall  next  the  sea  might  be  pierced. 
Cyrus  Harding,  during  the  descent,  had  roughly  calculated  its 
obliqueness,  and  consequently  the  length  of  the  passage,  and 
was  therefore  led  to  believe  that  the  outer  wall  could  not  be 
very  thick.  If  light  was  thus  obtained,  so  would  a means  of 
access,  for  it  would  be  as  easy  to  pierce  a door  as  windows,  and 
to  establish  an  exterior  ladder. 

Harding  made  known  his  ideas  to  his  companions. 

“ Then,  captain,  let  us  set  to  work  ! ” replied  Pencroft.  “ I 
have  my  pickaxe,  and  I shall  soon  make  my  way  through  this 
wall.  Where  shall  I strike  ? ” 


DBOPFfcn*  rrtUM  THE  CLOUDS. 


187 


“Here,”  replied  the  engineer,  showing  the  sturdy  sailor  a 
jonsiderable  recess  in  the  side,  which  would  much  diminish 
the  thickness. 

Pencroft  attacked  the  granite,  and  for  half  an  hour,  by  the 
light  of  the  torches,  he  made  the  splinters  fly  around  him. 
Neb  relieved  him,  then  Gideon  Spilett  took  Neb’s  place. 

This  work  had  lasted  two  hours,  and  they  began  to  fear  that 
at  this  spot  the  wall  would  not  yield  to  the  pickaxe,  when  at 
a last  blow,  given  by  Gideon  Spilett,  the  instrument,  passing 
through  the  rock,  fell  outside. 

“ Hurrah  ! hurrah ! Evened  Pencroft. 

The  wall  only  measured  there  three  feet  in  thickness. 

Harding  applied  his  eye  to  the  aperture,  which  overlooked 
the  ground  from  a height  of  eighty  feet.  Before  him  was 
extended  the  sea- coast,  the  islet,  and  beyond  the  open  sea. 

Floods  of  light  entered  by  this  hole,  inundating  the  splendid 
cavern  and  producing  a magic  effect ! On  its  left  side  it  did 
not  measure  more  than  thirty  feet  in  height  and  breadth,  but 
on  the  right  it  was  enormous,  and  its  vaulted  roof  rose  to  a 
height  of  more  than  eighty  feet. 

In  some  places  granite  pillars,  irregularly  disposed,  sup- 
ported the  vaulted  roof,  as  those  in  the  nave  of  a cathedral, 
here  forming  lateral  piers,  there  elliptical  arches,  adorned  with 
pointed  mouldings,  losing  themselves  in  dark  bays,  amid  the 
fantastic  arches  of  which  glimpses  could  be  caught  in  the 
shade,  covered  with  a profusion  of  projections  formed  like  so 
many  pendants.  This  cavern  was  a picturesque  mixture  of  all 
the  styles  of  Byzantine,  Roman,  or  Gothic  architecture  ever 
produced  by  the  hand  of  man.  And  yet  this  was  only  the  work 
of  nature.  She  alone  had  hollowed  this  fairy  Alhambra  in  a 
mass  of  granite. 

The  settlers  were  overwhelmed  with  admiration.  Where 
they  had  only  expected  to  find  a narrow  cavity,  they  had 
found  a sort  of  marvellous  palace,  and  Neb  had  taken  off  hi® 
hat,  as  if  he  had  been  transported  into  a temple ! 

Cries  of  admiration  issued  from  every  mouth.  Hurrahs 
resounded,  and  the  echo  was  repeated  again  and  again  till  it 
died  away  in  the  dark  naves. 


188 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


“ Ah,  my  friends ! ” exclaimed  Cyrus  Harding,  “ when  we 
have  lighted  the  interior  of  this  place,  and  have  arranged  our 
rooms  and  storehouses  in  the  left  part,  we  shall  still  have  this 
splendid  cavern,  which  we  will  make  our  study  and  our 
museum  ! ” 

“And  we  will  call  it  asked  Herbert. 

“ Granite  House,”  replied  Harding  ; a name  which  his  com- 
panions again  saluted  with  a cheer.  The  torches  were  now 
almost  consumed,  and  as  they  were  obliged  to  return  by  the 
passage  to  reach  the  summit  of  the  plateau,  it  was  decided  to 
put  off  the  work  necessary  for  the  arrangement  of  their  new 
dwelling  till  the  next  day. 

Before  departing,  Cyrus  Harding  leant  once  more  over  the 
dark  well,  which  descended  perpendicularly  to  the  level  of  the 
sea.  He  listened  attentively.  No  noise  was  heard,  not  even 
that  of  the  water,  which  the  undulations  of  the  surge  must 
sometimes  agitate  in  its  depths.  A flaming  branch  was  again 
thrown  in.  The  sides  of  the  well  were  lighted  up  for  an 
instant,  but  as  at  the  first  time,  nothing  suspicious  was  seen. 

If  some  marine  monster  had  been  surprised  unawares  by  the 
retreat  of  the  water,  he  would  by  this  time  have  regained  the 
sea  by  the  subterranean  passage,  before  the  new  opening 
had  been  offered  to  him. 

Meanwhile,  the  engineer  was  standing  motionless,  his  eyes 
fixed  on  the  gulf,  without  uttering  a word. 

The  sailor  approached  him,  and  touching  his  arm,  “Cap- 
tain ! ” said  he. 

“ What  do  you  want,  my  friend  ? ” asked  the  engineer,  as  if 
he  had  returned  from  the  land  of  dreams. 

“ The  torches  will  soon  go  out.” 

“ Forward  ! ” replied  Cyrus  Harding. 

The  little  band  left  the  cavern  and  began  to  ascend  through 
the  dark  passage.  Top  closed  the  rear,  still  growling  every  now 
and  then.  The  ascent  was  painful  enough.  The  settlers  rested 
a few  minutes  in  the  upper  grotto,  which  made  a sort  of  land- 
ing-place half  way  up  the  long  granite  staircase.  Then  they 
began  to  climb  again. 

Boon  fresher  air  was  felt.  The  drops  of  water,  dried  by 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDSo 


189 


evaporation,  no  longer  sparkled  on  the  walls.  The  flaring 
torches  began  to  grow  dim.  The  one  which  Neb  carried  went 
out,  and  if  they  did  not  wish  to  find  their  way  in  the  dark, 
they  must  hasten. 

This  was  done,  and  a little  before  four  o’clock,  at  the  moment 
when  the  sailor’s  torch  went  out  in  its  turn,  Cyrus  Harding  and 
his  companions  passed  out  of  the  passage. 


CHAPTER  XIX, 


0YBUS  HARDING’S  PROJECT— THE  FRONT  OF  GRANITE  HOUSE  — 
— THE  ROPE  LADDER  — PEN CROFT’S  DREAMS  — AROMATIC 
HERBS  — A NATURAL  WARREN— WATER  FOR  THE  NEW 
DWELLING  — VIEW  FROM  THE  WINDOWS  OF  GRANITE  HOUSE. 

The  next  day,  the  22d  of  May,  the  arrangement  of  their  new 
dwelling  was  commenced.  In  fact,  the  settlers  longed  to 
exchange  the  insufficient  shelter  of  the  Chimneys  for  this  large 
and  healthy  retreat,  in  the  midst  of  solid  rock,  and  sheltered 
from  the  water  both  of  the  sea  and  sky.  Their  former  dwelling 
was  not,  however,  to  be  entirely  abandoned,  for  the  engineer 
intended  to  make  a manufactory  of  it  for  important  works. 
Cyrus  Harding’s  first  care  was  to  find  out  the  position  of  the 
front  of  Granite  House  from  the  outside.  He  went  to  the 
beach,  and  as  the  pickaxe  when  it  escaped  from  the  hands  of 
the  reporter  must  have  fallen  perpendicularly  to  the  foot  of 
the  cliff,  the  finding  it  would  be  sufficient  to  show  the  place 
where  the  hole  had  been  pierced  in  the  granite. 

The  pickaxe  was  easily  found,  and  the  hole  could  be  seen  in 
a perpendicular  line  above  the  spot  where  it  was  stuck  in  the 
sah%  Some  rock  pigeons  were  already  flying  in  and  out  of  the 
narrow  opening  ; they  evidently  thought  that  Granite  House 
had . been  discovered  on  purpose  for  them.  It  was  the  engi- 
neer’s intention  to  divide  the  right  portion  of  the  cavern  into 
several  rooms,  preceded  by  an  entrance  passage,  and  to  light  it 
by  means  of  five  windows  and  a door,  pierced  in  the  front. 
Pencroft  was  much  pleased  with  the  five  windows,  but  he 
could  not  understand  the  use  of  the  door,  since  the  passage 
offered  a natural  staircase,  through  which  it  would  always 
be  easy  to  enter  Granite  House. 

64 My  friend,”  replied  Harding,  “if  it  is  easy  for  us  to  reach 

190 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


19) 


our  dwelling  by  this  passage,  it  will  be  equally  easy  for  others 
besides  us.  I mean,  on  the  contrary,  to  block  up  that  opening, 
to  seal  it  hermetically,  and,  if  it  is  necessary,  to  completely 
hide  the  entrance,  by  making  a dam.  and  thus  causing  the 
waters  of  the  lake  to  rise.” 

“ And  how  shall  we  get  in  ? ” asked  the  sailor. 

“By  an  outside  ladder,”  replied  Cyrus  Harding,  “ a rope  lad- 
der, which,  once  drawn  up,  will  render  access  to  our  dwelling 
impossible.” 

“But  why  so  many  precautions  ? ” asked  Pencroft.  “ As  yet 
we  have  seen  no  dangerous  animals.  As  to  our  island  being 
inhabited  by  natives,  I don’t  believe  it ! ” 

“ Are  you  quite  sure  of  that  Pencroft  ? ” asked  the  engineer, 
looking  at  the  sailor. 

“ Of  course  we  shall  not  be  quite  sure,  till  we  have  explored 
It  in  every  direction,”  replied  Pencroft. 

“ Yes,”  said  Harding,  “ for  we  know  only  a small  portion  Df 
it  as  yet.  But  at  any  rate,  if  we  have  no  enemies  in  the  in- 
terior, they  may  come  from  the  exterior,  for  parts  of  the 
Pacific  are  very  dangerous.  We  must  be  provided  against 
every  contingency.” 

Cyrus  Harding  spoke  wisely;  and  without  making  any  fur- 
ther objections,  Pencroft  prepared  to  execute  his  orders. 

The  front  of  Granite  House  was  then  to  be  lighted  by  five 
windows  and  a door,  besides  a large  bay  window  and  some 
smaller  oval  ones,  which  would  admit  plenty  of  light  to  enter 
into  the  marvellous  nave  which  was  to  be  their  chief  room. 
This  facade,  situated  at  a height  of  eighty  feet  above  the 
ground,  was  exposed  to  the  east,  and  the  rising  sun  saluted  it 
with  his  first  rays.  It  was  found  to  be  just  at  that  part  of 
the  cliff  which  was  between  the  projection  at  the  mouth  of 
the  Mercy,  and  a perpendicular  line  traced  above  the  heap 
of  rocks  which  formed  the  Chimneys.  Thus  the  winds  from 
the  northeast  would  only  strike  it  obliquely,  for  it  was  pro- 
tected by  the  projection.  Besides,  until  the  window-frames 
were  made,  the  engineer  meant  to  close  the  openings  with 
thick  shutters,  which  would  prevent  either  wind  or  rain  from 
entering,  and  which  could  be  concealed  in  need 


192 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


The  first  work  was  to  make  the  openings.  This  would  have 
taken  too  long  with  the  pickaxe  alone,  and  it  is  known  that 
Harding  was  an  ingenious  man.  He  had  still  a quantity  of 
nitro-glycerine  at  his  disposal,  and  he  employed  it  usefully. 
B}  means  of  this  explosive  substance  the  rock  was  broken 
open  at  the  very  places  chosen  by  the  engineer.  Then,  with 
the  pickaxe  and  spade,  the  windows  and  doors  were  properly 
shaped,  the  jagged  edges  were  smoothed  off,  and  a few  days 
after  the  beginning  of  the  work,  Granite  House  was  abund- 
antly lighted  hi  the  rising  sun,  whose  rays  penetrated  into  its 
most  secret  recesses.  Following  the  plan  proposed  by  Cyrus 
Harding,  the  space  was  to  be  divided  into  five  compartments 
looking  out  on  the  sea;  to  the  right,  an  entry  with  a door, 
which  would  meet  the  ladder;  then  a kitchen,  thirty  feet 
long;  a dining-room  measuring  forty  feet;  a sleeping-room, 
of  equal  size;  and  lastly,  a “Visitor’s  room,”  petitioned  for 
by  Pencroft,  and  which  was  next  to  the  great  hall.  These 
rooms,  or  rather  this  suite  of  rooms,  would  not  occupy  all  the 
depth  of  the  cave.  There  would  be  also  a corridor  and  a store- 
house, in  which  their  tools,  provisions,  and  stores  would  be 
kept.  All  the  productions  of  the  island,  the  flora  as  well  as 
the  fauna,  were  to  be  there  in  the  best  possible  state  of  preser- 
vation, and  completely  sheltered  from  the  damp.  There  was 
no  want  of  space,  so  that  each  object  could  be  methodically 
arranged.  Besides,  the  colonists  had  still  at  their  disposal  the 
little  grotto  above  the  great  cavern,  which  was  like  the  garret 
of  the  new  dwelling. 

This  plan  settled,  it  had  only  to  be  put  into  execution. 
The  miners  became  brick-makers  again,  then  the  bricks  were 
brought  to  the  foot  of  Granite  House.  Till  then,  Harding 
and  his  companions  had  only  entered  the  cavern  by  the  long 
passage.  This  mode  of  communication  obliged  them  first  to 
climb  Prospect  Heights,  making  a detour  by  the  river’s  bank, 
and  then  to  descend  two  hundred  feet  through  the  passage, 
having  to  climb  as  far  when  they  wished  to  return  to  the 
plateau.  This  was  a great  loss  of  time,  and  was  also  very 
fatiguing.  Cyras  Harding,  therefore,  resolved  to  proceed  with- 
out any  furthu  ckelay  to  the  fabrication  of  a strong  rope  lad- 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS, 


193 


der,  which,  once  raised,  would  render  Granite  House  completely 
inaccessible. 

This  ladder  was  manufactured  with  extreme  care,  and  its 
uprights,  formed  of  the  twisted  fibres  of  a species  of  cane,  had 
the  strength  of  a thick  cable.  As  to  the  rounds,  they  were 
made  of  a sort  of  red  cedar,  with  light,  strong  branches;  and 
this  apparatus  was  wrought  by  the  masterly  hand  of  Pencroft. 

Other  ropes  were  made  with  vegetable  fibres,  and  a sort  of 
crane  with  a tackle  was  fixed  at  the  door.  In  this  way  bricks 
could  easily  be  raised  into  Granite  House.  The  transport  of 
the  materials  being  thus  simplified,  the  arrangement  of  the 
interior  could  begin  immediately.  There  was  no  want  of  lime, 
and  some  thousands  of  bricks  were  there  ready  to  be  used. 
The  framework  of  the  partitions  was  soon  raised,  very  roughly 
at  first,  and  in  a short  time,  the  cave  was  divided  into  rooms 
and  storehouses,  according  to  the  plan  agreed  upon. 

These  different  works  progressed  rapidly  under  the  direction 
of  the  engineer,  who  himself  handled  the  hammer  and  the 
trowel.  No  labor  came  amiss  to  Cyrus  Harding,  who  thus  set 
an  example  to  his  intelligent  and  zealous  companions.  They 
worked  with  confidence,  even  gaily,  Pencroft  always  having 
some  joke  to  crack,  sometimes  carpenter,  sometimes  rope- 
maker,  sometimes  mason,  while  he  communicated  his  good 
humor  to  all  the  members  of  their  little  world.  His  faith  in 
the  engineer  was  complete;  notliing  could  disturb  it.  H© 
believed  him  capable  of  undertaking  any  thing  and  succeeding 
in  every  thing.  The  question  of  boots  and  clothes— assuredly  a 
serious  question, — that  of  fight  during  the  winter  months, 
utilizing  the  fertile  parts  of  the  island,  transforming  the  wild 
flora  into  cultivated  flora,  it  all  appeared  easy  to  him;  Cyrus 
Harding  helping,  every  thing  would  be  done  in  time.  He 
dreamt  of  canals,  facilitating  the  transport  of  the  riches  of  the 
ground;  workings  of  quarries  and  mines;  machines  for  every 
industrial  manufacture;  railroads;  yes,  railroads!  of  which  a 
net- work  would  certainly  one  day  cover  Lincoln  Island. 

The  engineer  let  Pencroft  talk.  He  did  not  put  down  the 
aspirations  of  his  brave  heart.  He  knew  how  communicable 
confidence  is;  he  even  smiled  to  hear  him  speak,  and  said  noth- 
18 


m 


THE  LAiCBSl^Sb  fctfiJTON, 


ing  of  the  uneasiness  for  the  future  wmch  he  felt.  In  fact,  in 
that  part  of  the  Pacific,  out  of  course  of  vessels,  it  was  to 
be  feared  that  no  help  would  ever  eome  to  them.  It  was  on 
themselves,  on  themselves  alone,  that  the  settlers  must  depend, 
for  the  distance  of  Lincoln  Island  from  all  other  land  was 
such,  that  to  hazard  themselves  m a boat,  of  a necessarily 
inferior  construction,  would  be  a serious  and  perilous  thing. 

“ But,”  as  the  sailor  said,  “ they  quite  took  the  wind  out  of 
the  sails  of  the  Robinsons,  for  whom  every  thing  was  done  by  a 
miracle.” 

In  fact,  they  were  energetic;  an  energetic  man  will  succeed 
where  an  indolent  one  would  vegetate  and  inevitably  perish. 

Herbert  distinguished  himself  in  these  works.  He  was  in- 
telligent and  active;  understanding  quickly,  he  performed  well; 
and  Cyrus  Harding  became  more  and  more  attached  to  the 
boy.  Herbert  had  a lively  and  reverent  love  for  the  engineer. 
Pencroft  saw  the  close  sympathy  which  existed  between  the 
two,  but  he  was  not  in  the  least  jealous.  Neb  was  Neb;  he  was 
wlut  he  would  be  always,  courage,  zeal,  devotion,  self-denial 
personified.  He  had  the  same  faith  in  his  master  that  Pen- 
croft had,  but  he  showed  it  less  vehemently.  When  the 
sailor  was  enthusiastic,  Neb  always  looked  as  if  he  would  say, 
*6  Nothing  could  be  more  natural.”  Pencroft  and  he  were 
great  friends. 

As  to  Gideon  Spilett,  he  took  his  part  in  the  common  work, 
and  was  not  less  skillful  in  it  than  his  companions,  which 
always  rather  astonished  the  sailor.  A “journalist,”  clever,  not 
only  in  understanding,  but  in  performing  every  thing. 

The  ladder  was  finally  fixed  on  the  28th  of  May.  There  were 
not  less  than  a hundred  rounds  in  this  perpendicular  height  of 
eighty  feet.  Harding  had  been  able,  fortunately,  to  divide  it  in 
two  parts,  profiting  by  an  overhanging  of  the  cliff  which  made 
a projection  forty  feet  above  the  ground.  This  projection, 
carefully  levelled  by  the  pickaxe,  made  a sort  of  platform,  to 
which  they  fixed  the  first  ladder,  of  which  the  oscillation  was 
thus  diminished  one  half,  and  a rope  permitted  it  to  be  raised 
to  the  level  of  Granite  House.  As  to  the  second  ladder,  it 
was  secured  both  at  its  lower  part,  which  rested  on  the  pro* 


PROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUB3. 


195 


Jection,  and  at  its  upper  end,  which  was  fastened  to  the  door* 
In  short  the  ascent  had  been  made  much  easier.  Besides, 
Cyrus  Harding  hoped  later  to  establish  an  hydraulic  apparatus,, 
which  would  avoid  all  fatigue  and  loss  of  time,  for  the  inhabit- 
ants of  Granite  House. 

The  settlers  soon  became  habituated  to  the  use  of  this  lad- 
der. They  were  light  and  active,  and  Pencroft,  as  a sailor, 
accustomed  to  run  up  the  masts  and  shrouds,  was  able  to  give 
them  lessons.  But  it  was  also  necessary  to  give  them  to  Top. 
The  poor  dog,  with  his  four  paws,  was  not  formed  for  this  sort 
of  exercise.  But  Pencroft  was  such  a zealous  master,  that  Top 
ended  by  properly  performing  his  ascents,  and  soon  mounted 
the  ladder  as  readily  as  his  brethren  in  the  circus.  It  need  not 
be  said  that  the  sailor  was  proud  of  his  pupil.  However,  more 
than  once  Pencroft  hoisted  him  on  his  back,  which  Top  never 
complained  of. 

1't  must  be  mentioned  here,  that  during  these  works,  which 
were  actively  conducted,  for  the  bad  season  was  approaching, 
the  alimentary  question  was  not  neglected.  Every  day,  the 
reporter  and  Herbert,  who  had  been  voted  purveyors  to  the 
colony,  devoted  some  hours  to  the  chase.  As  yet,  they  only 
hunted  in  Jacamar  wood,  on  the  left  of  the  river,  because,  for 
want  of  a bridge  or  boat,  the  Mercy  had  not  yet  been  crossed. 
All  the  immense  woods,  to  which  the  name  of  the  Forests  of 
the  Far  West  had  been  given,  were  not  explored.  They 
reserved  this  important  excursion  for  the  first  fine  days  of  the 
next  spring.  But  Jacamar  wood  was  full  of  game ; kanga- 
roos and  boars  abounded,  and  the  hunters’  iron-tipped  spears 
and  bows  and  arrows  did  wonders.  Besides,  Herbert  discov- 
ered towards  the  southwest  point  of  the  lagoon  a natural  war- 
ren, a slightly  damp  meadow,  covered  with  willows  and 
aromatic  herbs  which  scented  the  air,  such  as  thyme,  basil, 
savory,  all  the  sweet-scented  species  of  the  labiated  plants, 
which  the  rabbits  appeared  to  be  particularly  fond  of. 

On  the  reporter  observing  that  since  the  table  was  spread  for 
the  rabbits,  it  was  strange  that  the  rabbits  themseives  should 
be  wanting,  the  two  sportsmen  carefully  explored  the  warren. 
At  any  rate,  it  produced  an  abundance  of  useful  plants,  and  a 


198 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


naturalist  would  have  had  a good  opportunity  of  studying 
many  specimens  of  the  vegetable  kingdom.  Herbert  gathered 
several  shoots  of  the  basil,  rosemary,  balm,  betony,  etc.,  which 
possess  different  medicinal  properties,  some  pectoral,  astring- 
ent, febrifuge,  others  anti  - spasmodic,  or  anti -rheumatic. 
When,  afterwards,  Pencroft  asked  the  use  of  this  collection  of 
herbs,— 

“ For  medicine,”  replied  the  lad,  “ to  treat  us  when  we  are  ill.” 

“ Why  Should  we  be  ill,  since  there  are  no  doctors  in  the 
island  ?”  asked  Pencroft  quite  seriously. 

There  was  no  reply  to  be  made  to  that,  but  the  lad  went  on 
with  his  collection  all  the  same,  and  it  was  well  received  at 
Granite  House.  Besides  these  medicinal  herbs,  he  added 
plant  known  in  North  America  as  “ Oswego  tea,”  which  made 
an  excellent  beverage.  ‘ 

At  last,  by  searching  thoroughly,  the  hunters  arrived  at  the 
real  site  of  the  warren.  There  the  ground  was  perforated  like 
a sieve. 

“ Here  are  the  burrows ! ” cried  Herbert. 

“Yes,”  replied  the  reporter,  “so  I see.” 

“ But  are  they  inhabited  ? ” 

“ That  is  the  question.” 

This  was  soon  answered.  Almost  immediately,  hundreds  of 
little  animals,  similar  to  rabbits,  fled  in  every  direction,  with 
such  rapidity  that  even  Top  could  not  overtake  them.  Hunters 
and  dog  ran  in  vain,  these  rodents  escaped  them  easily.  But 
the  reporter  resolved  not  to  leave  the  place,  until  he  had 
captured  at  least  half-a-dozen  of  the  quadrupeds.  He  wished 
to  stock  their  larder  first,  and  domesticate  those  which  they 
might  take  later.  It  would  not  have  been  difficult  to  do  this, 
with  a few  snares  stretched  at  the  openings  of  the  burrows. 
But  at  this  moment  they  had  neither  snares,  nor  any  thing  to 
make  them  of.  They  must,  therefore,  be  satisfied  with  visiting 
each  hole,  and  rummaging  in  it  with  a stick,  hoping  by  dint  of 
patience  to  do  what  could  not  be  done  in  any  other  way. 

At  last,  after  half  an  hour,  four  rodents  were  taken  in  their 
holes.  They  were  similar  to  their  European  brethren,  and  arc 
commonly  known  by  the  name  of  American  rabbits. 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


197 


This  produce  of  the  chase  wa3  brought  back  to  Granite 
House,  and  figured  at  the  evening  repast.  The  tenants  of  the 
warren  were  not  at  all  to  be  despised,  for  they  were  delicious. 
It  was  a valuable  resource  of  the  colony,  and  it  appeared  to  be 
inexhaustible. 

On  the  31st  of  May  the  partitions  were  finished.  The  rooms 
had  now  only  to  be  furnished,  and  this  would  be  work  for  the 
long  winter  days.  A chimney  was  established  in  the  first  room, 
which  served  as  a kitchen.  The  pipe  destined  to  conduct  the 
^moke  outside  gave  some  trouble  to  these  amateur  bricklayers. 
It  appeared  simplest  to  Harding  to  make  it  of  brick  clay ; as 
creating  an  outlet  for  it  to  the  upper  plateau  was  not  to  be 
thought  of,  a hole  was  pierced  in  the  granite  above  the  window 
of  the  kitchen,  and  the  pipe  met  it  like  that  of  an  iron  stove. 
Perhaps  the  winds  which  blew  directly  against  the  facade 
would  make  the  chimney  smoke,  but  these  winds  were  rare, 
and  besides,  Master  Neb,  the  cook,  was  not  so  very  particular 
about  that. 

When  these  interior  arrangements  were  finished,  the  engi- 
neer occupied  himself  in  blocking  up  the  outlet  by  the  lake,  so 
as  to  prevent  any  access  by  that  way.  Masses  of  rock  were 
rolled  to  the  entrance  and  strongly  cemented  together.  Cyrus 
Harding  did  not  yet  realize  his  plan  of  drowning  this  opening 
under  the  waters  of  the  lake,  by  restoring  them  to  their 
former  level  by  means  of  a dam.  He  contented  himself  with 
hiding  the  obstruction  with  grass  and  shrubs,  which  were 
planted  in  the  interstices  of  the  rocks,  and  which  next  spring 
would  sprout  thickly.  However,  he  used  the  waterfall  so  as  to 
lead  a small  stream  of  fresh  water  to  the  new  dwelling.  A 
little  trench,  made  below  their  level,  produced  this  result ; and 
this  derivation  from  a pure  and  inexhaustible  source  yielded 
twenty-five  or  thirty  gallons  a day.  There  would  never  be  any 
want  of  water  at  Granite  House.  At  last  all  was  finished,  and 
it  was  time,  for  the  bad  season  was  near.  Thick  shutters  closed 
the  windows  of  the  facade,  until  the  engineer  had  time  to 
make  glass. 

Gideon  Spilett  had  very  artistically  arranged  on  the  rocky 
proj-^ions  around  the  windows  plants  of  different  kinds,  as 


198 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


well  as  long  streaming  grass,  so  that  the  openings  were  pio 
turesquely  framed  in  green,  which  had  a pleasing  effect. 

The  inhabitants  of  this  solid,  healthy,  and  secure  dwelling, 
could  not  but  be  charmed  with  their  work.  The  view  from 
the  windows  extended  over  a boundless  horizon,  which  was 
closed  by  the  two  Mandible  Capes  on  the  north,  and  Claw 
Cape  on  the  south.  All  Union  Bay  was  spread  before  them. 
Yes,  our  brave  settlers  had  reason  to  be  satisfied,  and  Pencroft 
was  lavish  in  his  praise  of  what  he  humorously  called,  “ his 
apartments  on  the  fifth  floor  above  the  ground  i ” 


CHAPTER  XX. 


mE  RAINY  SEASON— THE  QUESTION  OF  CLOTHES— A SEAL  HUNT— 
MANUFACTURING  CANDLES— WORK  IN  GRANITE  HOUSE — THE 
TWO  BRIDGES— RETURN  FROM  A VISIT  TO  THE  OYSTER  BED— 
WHAT  HERBERT  FINDS  IN  HIS  POCKET. 

The  winter  season  set  in  with  the  month  of  June,  which 
corresponds  with  the  month  of  December  in  the  northern 
hemisphere.  It  began  with  showers  and  squalls,  which  suc- 
ceeded each  other  without  intermission.  The  tenants  of 
Granite  House  could  appreciate  the  advantages  of  a dwelling 
which  sheltered  them  from  the  inclement  weather.  The  Chim- 
neys would  have  been  quite  insufficient  to  protect  them  against 
the  rigor  of  winter,  and  it  was  to  be  feared  that  the  high  tides 
would  make  another  irruption.  Cyrus  Harding  had  taken  pre- 
cautions against  this  contingency,  so  as  to  preserve  as  much 
as  possible  the  forge  and  furnace  which  were  established 
there. 

During  the  whole  of  the  month  of  June  the  time  was  em- 
ployed in  different  occupations,  which  excluded  neither  hunting 
or  fishing,  the  larder  being  therefore  abundantly  supplied. 
Pencroft,  so  soon  as  he  had  leisure,  proposed  to  set  some 
traps,  from  which  he  expected  great  results.  He  soon  made 
some  snares  with  creepers,  by  the  aid  of  which  the  warren 
henceforth  every  day  furnished  its  quota  of  rodents.  Neb  em- 
ployed nearly  all  his  time  in  salting  or  smoking  meat,  which 
insured  their  always  having  plenty  of  provisions.  The  question 
of  clothes  was  now  seriously  discussed,  the  settlers  having  no 
other  garments  than  those  they  wore  when  the  balloon  threw 
them  on  the  island.  These  clothes  were  warm  and  good;  they 
had  taken  great  care  of  them  as  well  as  of  their  linen,  and  they 
were  perfectly  whole,  but  they  would  soon  need  to  be  replaced. 

199 


m 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION'. 


Moreover,  if  the  winter  was  severe,  the  settlers  would  suffei 
greatly  from  the  cold. 

On  this  subject  the  ingenuity  of  Harding  was  at  fault.  They 
must  provide  for  their  most  pressing  wants,  settle  their 
dwelling,  and  lay  in  a store  of  food ; thus  the  cold  might 
come  upon  them  before  the  question  of  clothes  had  been 
settled.  They  must  therefore  make  up  their  minds  to  pass  this 
first  winter  without  additional  clothing.  When  the  fine  season 
came  round  again,  they  would  regularly  hunt  those  musmons 
which  had  been  seen  on  the  expedition  to  Mount  Franklin, 
and  the  wool  once  collected,  the  engineer  would  know  how  to 
make  it  into  strong  warm  stuff.  . . How  ? he  would  consider. 

“ Well,  we  are  free  to  roast  ourselves  at  Granite  House ! ” 
said  Pencroft.  “There  are  heaps  of  fuel,  and  no  reason  for 
sparing  it.” 

“Besides,”  added  Gideon  Spilett,  “Lincoln  Island  is  not 
situated  under  a very  high  latitude,  and  probably  the  winters 
here  are  not  severe.  Did  you  not  say,  Cyrus,  that  this  thirty- 
fifth  parallel  corresponded  to  that  of  Spain  in  the  other  hemi- 
sphere ? ” 

“Doubtless,”  replied  the  engineer,  “but  some  winters  in 
Spain  are  very  cold  ! No  want  of  snow  and  ice;  and  perhaps 
Lincoln  Island  is  just  as  rigorously  tried.  However,  it  is  an 
island,  and  as  such,  I hope  that  the  temperature  will  be  more 
moderate.” 

“ Why,  captain?  ” asked  Herbert. 

“ Because  the  sea,  my  boy,  may  be  considered  as  an  immense 
reservoir,  in  which  is  stored  the  heat  of  the  summer.  When 
winter  comes,  it  restores  this  heat,  which  insures  for  the 
regions  near  the  ocean  a medium  temperature,  less  high  in 
summer,  but  less  low  in  winter.” 

“We  shall  prove  that,”  replied  Pencroft  “But  I don’t  want 
to  bother  myself  about  whether  it  will  be  cold  or  hot.  One 
thing  is  certain,  that  is,  that  the  days  are  already  short,  and  the 
evenings  long.  Suppose  we  talk  about  the  question  of  light.” 

“ Nothing  is  easier,”  replied  Harding. 

“To  talk  about  ? ” asked  the  sailor. 

54  To  settle.” 


PROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


m 


“ And  when  shall  we  begin 

“ To-morrow,  by  having  a seal  hunt” 

“ To  make  candles  ? ” 

“Yes” 

Such  was  the  engineer’s  project;  and  it  was  quite  feasible* 
since  he  had  lime  and  sulphuric  acid,  while  the  amphibians 
of  the  islet  would  furnish  the  fat  necessary  for  the  manu- 
facture. 

They  were  now  at  the  4th  of  June.  It  was  Whit  Sunday,  and 
they  agreed  to  observe  this  feast.  All  work  was  suspended, 
and  prayers  were  offered  to  Heaven.  But  these  prayers  were 
now  thanksgivings.  The  settlers  in  Lincoln  Island  were  no 
longer  the  miserable  castaways  thrown  on  the  islet.  They 
asked  for  nothing  more— they  gave  thanks.  The  next  day,  the 
5th  of  June,  in  rather  uncertain  weather,  they  set  out  for  the 
islet.  They  had  to  profit  by  the  low  tide  to  cross  the  Channel, 
and  it  was  agreed  that  they  would  construct,  for  this  purpose, 
as  well  as  they  could,  a boat  which  would  render  communica- 
tion so  much  easier,  and  would  also  permit  them  to  ascend  the 
Mercy,  at  the  time  of  their  grand  exploration  of  the  southwest 
of  the  island,  which  was  put  off  till  the  first  fine  days. 

The  seals  were  numerous,  and  the  hunters,  armed  with 
their  iron-tipped  spears,  easily  killed  half-a-dozen.  Neb  and 
Pencroft  skinned  them,  and  only  brought  back  to  Granite 
House  their  fat  and  skin,"  this  skin  being  intended  for  the 
manufacture  of  boots. 

The  result  of  the  hunt  was  this:  nearly  three  hundred 
pounds  of  fat,  all  to  be  employed  in  the  fabrication  of 
candles. 

The  operation  was  extremely  simple,  and  if  it  did  not  yield 
absolutely  perfect  results,  they  were  at  least  very  useful.  Cyrus 
Harding  would  only  have  had  at  his  disposal  sulphuric  acid, 
but  by  heating  this  acid  with  the  neutral  fatty  bodies,  he  could 
separate  the  glycerine;  then  from  this  new  combination  he 
easily  separated  the  olein,  the  margarin,  and  the  stearin,  by  em- 
ploying boiling  water.  But,  to  simplify  the  operation,  he 
preferred  to  saponify  the  fat  by  means  of  lime.  By  this  he  ob- 
tained a calcareous  soap,  easy  to  decompose  by  sulphuric  acid* 


2502 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


which  precipitated  the  lime  into  the  state  of  sulphate,  and 
liberated  the  fatty  acids. 

From  these  three  acids— oleic,  margaric,  and  stearic— the 
first,  being  liquid,  was  driven  out  by  a sufficient  pressure.  As 
to  the  two  others,  they  formed  the  very  substance  of  which 
the  candles  were  to  be  moulded. 

This  operation  did  not  last  more  than  four-and-twenty  hours. 
The  wicks,  after  several  trials,  were  made  of  vegetable  fibres, 
and  dipped  in  the  liquified  substance,  they  formed  regular 
stearic  candles,  moulded  by  the  hand,  which  only  wanted 
whiteness  and  polish.  They  would  not,  doubtless,  have  the 
advantage  of  the  wicks  which  are  impregnated  with  boracic 
acid,  and  which  vitrify  as  they  burn  and  are  entirely  consumed, 
but  Cyrus  Harding,  having  manufactured  a beautiful  pair  of 
snuffers,  these  candles  would  be  greatly  appreciated  during  the 
long  evenings  in  Granite  House. 

During  this  month  there  was  no  want  of  work  in  the  interior 
of  their  new  dwelling.  The  joiners  had  plenty  to  do.  They 
improved  their  tools,  which  were  very  rough,  and  added  others 
also. 

Scissors  were  made  among  other  things,  and  the  settlers 
were  at  last  able  to  cut  their  hair,  and  also  to  shave,  or  at  least 
trim  their  beards.  Herbert  had  none,  Neb  but  little,  but  their 
companions  were  bristling  in  a way  which  justified  the  making 
of  the  said  scissors. 

The  manufacture  of  a hand-saw  cost  infinite  trouble,  but  at 
last  an  instrument  was  obtained  which,  when  vigorously 
handled,  could  divide  the  ligneous  fibres  of  the  wood.  They 
then  made  tables,  seats,  cupboards,  to  furnish  the  principal 
rooms,  and  bedsteads,  of  which  all  the  bedding  consisted  of 
grass  mattrasses.  The  kitchen,  with  its  shelves,  on  which 
rested  the  cooking  utensils,  its  brick  stove,  looked  very  well, 
and  Neb  worked  away  there  as  earnestly  as  if  he  was  in  a 
chemist’s  laboratory. 

But  the  joiners  had  soon  to  be  replaced  by  carpenters.  In 
fact,  the  waterfall  created  by  the  explosion  rendered  the  con- 
struction of  two  bridges  necessary,  one  on  Prospect  Heights, 
the  other  on  the  shore.  Now  the  plateau  and  the  shore  were 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


20B 


transversely  divided  by  a watercourse,  which  had  to  be  crossed 
to  reach  the  northern  part  of  the  island.  To  avoid  it,  the 
colonists  had  been  obliged  to  make  a considerable  detour,  by 
climbing  up  to  the  source  of  the  Red  Creek.  The  simplest 
thing  was  to  establish  on  the  plateau,  and  on  the  shore,  two 
bridges  from  twenty  to  five-and-twenty  feet  in  length.  All  the 
carpenter’s  work  that  was  needed  was  to  clear  some  trees  of 
their  branches  ; this  was  a business  of  some  days.  Directly 
the  bridges  were  established,  Neb  and  Pencroft  profited  by 
them  to  go  to  the  oyster-bed  which  had  been  discovered  near 
the  downs.  They  dragged  with  them  a sort  of  rough  cart, 
which  replaced  the  former  inconvenient  hurdle,  and  brought 
back  some  thousands  of  oysters,  which  soon  increased  among 
the  rocks  and  formed  a bed  at  the  mouth  of  the  Mercy.  These 
molluscs  were  of  excellent  quality,  and  the  colonists  consumed 
some  daily. 

It  has  been  seen  that  Lincoln  Island,  although  its  inhabitants 
had  as  yet  only  explored  a small  portion  of  it,  already  con- 
tributed to  almost  all  their  wants.  It  was  probable  that  if  they 
hunted  into  its  most  secret  recesses,  in  all  the  wooded  part 
between  the  Mercy  and  Reptile  Point,  they  would  find  new 
treasures. 

The  settlers  in  Lincoln  Island  had  still  one  privation.  There 
was  no  want  of  meat  nor  of  vegetable  products  ; those  ligne- 
ous roots  which  they  had  fomid,  when  subjected  to  fermenta- 
tion, gave  them  an  acid  drink,  which  was  preferable  to  cold 
water  ; they  also  made  sugar,  without  canes  or  beetroots,  by 
collecting  the  liquor  which  distils  from  the  “ acer  saccharinum,” 
a sort  of  maple  tree,  which  flourishes  in  all  the  temperate 
zones,  and  of  which  the  island  possessed  a great  number ; 
ffhey  made  a very  agreeable  tea  by  employing  the  herbs  brought 
rrom  the  warren ; lastly,  they  had  an  abundance  of  salt,  the 
only  mineral  which  is  used  in  food,  . . . but  bread  was 
wanting. 

Perhaps  in  time  the  settlers  could  replace  this  want  by  some 
equivalent,  it  was  possible  that  they  might  find  the  sago  or  the 
bread-fruit  tree  amongst  the  forests  of  the  south,  but  they 
had  not  as  yet  met  with  these  precious  trees.  However, 


m 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION, 


Providence  came  directly  to  their  aid,  in  an  infinitessimal  pro 
portion,  it  is  true,  but  Cyrus  Harding,  with  all  his  intelligence, 
all  his  ingenuity,  would  never  have  been  able  to  produce  that 
which,  by  the  greatest  chance,  Herbert  one  day  found  in  the 
lining  of  his  waistcoat,  which  he  was  occupied  in  setting  to 
rights. 

On  this  day,  as  it  was  raining  in  torrents,  the  settlers  were 
assembled  in  the  great  hall  in  Granite  House,  when  the  lad 
cried  out  all  at  once  : 

“Look  here,  captain— a grain  of  corn  ! ” 

And  he  showed  his  companions  a grain— a single  grain— 
which  from  a hole  in  his  pocket  had]  got  into  the  lining  of  his 
waistcoat. 

The  presence  of  this  grain  was,  explained  by  the  fact  that 
Herbert,  when  at  Richmond,  used  to  feed  some  pigeons,  of 
which  Pencroft  had  made  him  a present. 

“ A grain  of  corn  ? ” said  the  engineer,  quickly. 

“ Yes  captain;  but  one,  only  one  ! ” 

“Well,  my  boy,”  said  Pencroft,  laughing,  “we’re  getting 
on  capitally,  upon  my  word  ! What  shall  we  make  with  one 
grain  of  corn  ? ” 

“ We  will  make  bread  of  it,”  replied  Cyrus  Harding. 

“Bread,  cakes,  tarts  !”  replied  the  sailor.  “Come,  the  bread 
that  this  grain  of  corn  will  make  won’t  choke  uo  very  soon  ! ” 

Herbert,  not  attaching  much  importance  to  his  discovery, 
was  going  to  throw  away  the  grain  in  question  ; but  Harding 
took  it,  examined  it,  found  that  it  was  in  good  condition,  and 
looking  the  sailor  full  in  the  face— “ Pencroft,”  he  asked  quietly, 
“ do  you  know  how  many  ears  one  grain  of  corn  can  pro- 
duce ? ” 

“ One,  I suppose  ! ” replied  the  sailor,  surprised  at  the  ques- 
tion. 

“ Ten,  Pencroft ! And  do  you  know  how  many  grains  one 
ear  bears  ? ” 

“ No,  upon  my  word.” 

“ About  eighty  ! ” said  Cyrus  Harding.  “ Then,  if  we  plant 
this  grain,  at  the  first  crop  we  shall  reap  eight  hundred  grains, 
which  at  the  second  will  produce  six  hundred  and  forty 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


205 


thousand  , at  the  third,  five  hundred  and  twelve  millions  ; at 
the  fourth,  more  than  four  hundred  thousands  of  millions ! 
There  is  the  proportion.”  Harding’s  companions  listened 
without  answering.  These  numbers  astonished  them.  They 
were  exact,  however. 

“ Yes,  my  friends,”  continued  the  engineer,  “ such  are  the 
arithmetical  progressions  of  prolific  nature;  and  yet  what  is 
this  multiplication  of  the  grain  of  corn,  of  which  the  ear  only 
bears  eight  hundred  grains,  compared  to  the  poppy-plant, 
which  bears  thirty-two  thousand  seeds;  to  the  tobacco-plant, 
which  produces  three  hundred  and  sixty  thousand?  In  a few 
years,  without  the  numerous  causes  of  destruction  which  arrest 
their  fecundity,  these  plants  would  overrun  the  earth.” 

But  the  engineer  had  not  finished  his  lecture. 

And  now,  Pencroft,”  he  continued,  “do  you  know  how 
many  bushels  four  hundred  thousand  millions  of  grains  would 
make  ? ” 

“ No,”  replied  the  sailor;  “but  what  I do  know  is,  that  I am 
nothing  better  than  a fool ! ” 

“ Well,  they  would  make  more  than  three-millions,  at  a hun- 
dred and  thirty  thousand  a bushel,  Pencroft.” 

“ Three  millions  ! ” cried  Pencroft. 

“Three  millions.” 

“In  four  years  ?” 

“ In  four  years,”  replied  Cyrus  Harding,  “ and  even  in  two 
years,  if,  as  I hope,  in  this  latitude  we  can  obtain  two  crops  a 
year.” 

At  that,  according  to  his  usual  custom,  Pencroft  could  not 
reply  otherwise  than  by  a tremendous  hurrah. 

“So,  Herbert,”  added  the  engineer,  “you  have  made  a dis- 
covery of  great  importance  to  us.  Every  thing,  my  friends, 
every  thing  can  serve  us  in  the  condition  in  which  we  are.  Do 
not  forget  that,  I beg  of  you.” 

“ No,  captain,  no,  we  shan’t  forget  it,”  replied  Pencroft;  “and 
if  ever  I find  one  of  those  tobacco  seeds,  which  multiply  by 
three  hundred  and  sixty  thousand,  I assure  you  I won’t  throw 
it  away.  And  now,  what  must  we  do  ? ” 

“We  must  plant  this  grain,”  replied  Herbert 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


“ Yes,”  replied  Gideon  Spilett,  “ and  with  every  possible  ears, 
for  it  bears  in  itself  our  future  harvests.” 

“ Provided  it  grows ! ” replied  the  sailor. 

“It  will  grow,”  replied  Cyrus  Harding. 

This  was  the  20th  of  June.  The  time  was  then  propitious 
for  sowing  this  single  precious  grain  of  corn.  It  was  first 
proposed  to  plant  it  in  a pot,  but  upon  reflection  it  was 
decided  to  leave  it  to  nature,  and  confide  it  to  the  earth. 
This  was  done  that  very  day,  and  it  is  needless  to  add,  that 
every  precaution  was  taken  that  the  experiment  might 
succeed. 

The  weather  having  cleared,  the  settlers  climbed  the  height 
above  Granite  House.  There,  on  the  plateau,  they  chose  a 
spot,  well  sheltered  from  the  wind,  and  exposed  to  all  the 
heat  of  the  mid-day  sun.  The  place  was  cleared,  carefully 
weeded,  and  searched  for  insects  and  worms;  then  a bed  of 
good  earth,  improved  with  a little  lime,  was  made;  it  was  sur- 
rounded by  a railing;  and  the  grain  was  buried  in  the  damp 
earth. 

Hid  it  not  seem  as  if  the  settlers  were  laying  the  first  stone 
of  some  edifice  ? It  recalled  to  Pencroft  the  day  on  which  he 
lighted  his  only  match,  and  all  the  anxiety  of  the  operation. 
But  this  time  the  thing  was  more  serious.  In  fact,  the  casta- 
ways would  have  been  always  able  to  procure  fire,  in  some 
mode  or  other,  but  no  human  power  could  supply  another 
grain  of  corn,  if  unfortunately  this  should  be  lost ! 


CHAPTER  XXI, 


SOME  DEGREES  BELOW  ZERO— EXPLORING  THE  MARSHY  PARI 
TO  THE  SOUTHEAST— THE  WOLF-FOX— VIEW  OF  THE  SEA— 
A CONVERSATION  ON  THE  FUTURE  OF  THE  PACIFIC  OCEAN— 
THE  INCESSANT  WORK  OF  THE  CORAL  INSECTS— WHAT  OUR 
GLOBE  WILL  BECOME— THE  CHASE— TADORN’S  FENS. 

From  this  time  Pencroft  did  not  let  a single  day  pass  without 
going  to  visit  what  he  gravely  called  his  “corn-field.”  And 
woe  to  the  insects  which  dared  to  venture  there ! No  mercy 
was  shown  to  them. 

Towards  the  end  of  the  month  of  June,  after  incessant  rain, 
the  weather  became  decidedly  colder,  and  on  the  29th  a Fahren- 
heit thermometer  would  certainly  have  announced  only  twenty 
degrees  above  zero,  that  is  considerably  below  the  freezing- 
point.  The  next  day,  the  30th  of  June,  the  day  which  cor- 
responds to  the  31st  of  December  in  the  northern  year,  was  a 
Friday.  Neb  remarked  that  the  year  finished  on  a bad  day, 
but  Pencroft  replied  that  naturally  the  next  would  begin  on  a 
good  one,  which  was  better. 

At  any  rate  it  commenced  by  very  severe  cold.  Ice  accumu- 
lated at  the  mouth  of  the  Mercy,  and  it  was  not  long  before 
the  whole  expanse  of  the  lake  was  frozen. 

The  settlers  had  frequently  been  obliged  to  renew  their  store 
of  wood.  Pencroft  also  had  wisely  not  waited  till  the  river 
was  frozen,  but  had  brought  enormous  rafts  of  wood  to  their 
destination.  The  current  was  an  indefatigable  moving  power, 
and  it  was  employed  in  conveying  the  floating  wood  to  the 
moment  when  the  frost  enchained  it.  To  the  fuel  which  was 
so  abundantly  supplied  by  the  forest,  they  added  several  cart- 
loads of  coal,  which  had  to  be  broflght  from  the  foot  of  the 
spurs  of  Mount  Franklin.  The  powerful  heat  of  the  coal  was 

207 


13£E  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


greatly  appreciated  in  the  low  temperature,  which  on  the  4th 
of  July  fell  to  eight  degrees  of  Fahrenheit,  that  is,  thirteen 
degrees  below  zero.  A second  fireplace  had  been  established 
in  the  dining-room,  where  they  all  worked  together  at  their 
different  avocations.  During  this  period  of  cold,  Cyrus  Hard- 
ing had  great  cause  to  congratulate  himself  on  having 
brought  to  Granite  House  the  little  stream  of  water  from 
Lake  Grant.  Taken  below  the  frozen  surface,  and  conducted 
through  the  passage,  it  preserved  its  fluidity,  and  arrived  at 
an  interior  reset  voir  which  had  been  hollowed  out  at  the  back 
part  of  the  store-room,  while  the  overflow  ran  through  the  well 
to  the  sea. 

About  this  time,  the  weather  being  extremely  dry,  the 
colonists,  clothed  as  warmly  as  possible,  resolved  to  devote  a 
day  to  the  exploration  of  that  part  of  the  island  between  the 
Mercy  and  Claw  Cape.  It  was  a wide  extent  of  marshy  land, 
and  they  would  probably  find  good  sport,  for  water-birds 
ought  to  swarm  there. 

They  reckoned  that  it  would  be  about  eight  or  nine  miles  to 
go  there,  and  as  much  to  return,  so  that  the  whole  of  the  day 
would  be  occupied.  As  an  unknown  part  of  the  island  was 
about  to  be  explored,  the  whole  colony  took  part  in  the  expedi- 
tion. Accordingly,  on  the  5th  of  July,  at  six  o’clock  in  the 
morning,  when  day  had  scarcely  broken,  Cyrus  Harding, 
Gideon  Spilett,  Herbert,  Neb,  and  Pencroft,  armed  with  spears, 
snares,  bows  and  arrows,  and  provided,  with  provisions,  left 
Granite  House,  preceded  by  Top,  who  bounded  before  them. 
Their  shortest  way  was  to  cross  the  Mercy  on  the  ice,  which 
then  covered  it. 

“ But,”  as  the  engineer  justly  observed,  “ that  could  not  take 
the  place  of  a regular  bridge ! ” So,  the  construction  of  a 
regular  bridge  was  noted  in  the  list  of  future  works. 

It  was  the  first  time  that  the  settlers  had  set  foot  on  the  right 
bank  of  the  Mercy,  and  ventured  into  the  midst  of  those 
gigantic  and  superb  coniferse  now  sprinkled  over  with  snow. 

But  they  had  not  gone  half  a mile  when  from  a thicket  a 
whole  family  of  quadrupeds,  who  had  made  a home  tkwe, 
disturbed  by  Top,  rushed  “forth  into  the  open  country. 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


209 


“ Ah  ! I should  say  those  are  foxes  ! ” cried  Herbert*  when  he 
saw  the  troop  rapidly  decamping. 

They  were  foxes,  but  of  a very  large  size,  who  uttered  a sort 
of  barking,  at  which  Top  seemed  to  be  very  much  astonished, 
for  he  stopped  short  in  the  chase,  and  gave  the  swift  animals 
time  to  disappear. 

The  dog  had  reason  to  be  surprised,  as  he  did  not  know 
Natural  History.  But,  by  their  barking,  these  foxes,  with  red*1 
dish-gray  hair,  black  tails  terminating  in  a white  tuft,  had 
betrayed  their  origin.  So  Herbert  was  able,  without  hesitat- 
ing, to  give  them  their  real  name  of  “Arctic  foxes.”  They  are 
frequently  met  with  in  Chili,  in  the  Falkland  Islands,  and  in  all 
parts  of  America  traversed  by  the  thirtieth  and  fortieth  paral- 
lels. Herbert  much  regretted  that  Top  had  not  been  able  to 
catch  one  of  these  carnivora. 

“ Are  they  good  to  eat  ? ” asked  Pencrof t,  who  only  regarded 
the  representatives  of  the  fauna  in  the  island  from  one  special 
point  of  view. 

“ No,”  replied  Herbert ; “ but  zoologists  have  not  yet  found 
out  if  the  eye  of  these  foxes  is  diurnal  or  nocturnal,  or  whether 
it  is  correct  to  class  them  in  the  genus  dog,  properly  so  called.” 

Harding  could  not  help  smiling  on  hearing  the  lad’s  reflec- 
tion, which  showed  a thoughtful  mind.  As  to  the  sailor,  from 
the  moment  when  he  found  that  the  foxes  were  not  classed  in 
the  genus  eatable,  they  were  nothing  to  him.  However,  when 
a poultry-yard  was  established  at  Granite  House,  he  observed 
that  it  would  be  best  to  take  some  precautions  against  a prob- 
able visit  from  these  four-legged  plunderers,  and  no  one 
disputed  this. 

After  having  turned  the  point,  the  settlers  saw  a long  beach 
washed  by  the  open  sea.  It  was  then  eight  o’clock  in  the 
morning.  The  sky  was  very  clear,  as  it  often  is  after  pro- 
longed cold  ; but  warmed  by  their  walk,  neither  Harding  nor 
his  companions  felt  the  sharpness  of  the  atmosphere  too 
severely.  Besides  there  was  no  wind,  which  made  it  much 
more  bearable.  A brilliant  sun,  but  without  any  caloric  action, 
was  just  issuing  from  the  ocean.  The  sea  was  as  tranquil  and 
blue  as  that  of  a Mediterranean  gulf,  when  the  sky  is  clear, 
14 


210 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


Claw  Cape,  bent  in  the  form  of  a yataghan,  tapered  away 
nearly  four  miles  to  the  southeast.  To  the  left  the  edge  of  the 
marsh  was  abruptly  ended  by  a little  point.  Certainly,  in  this 
part  of  Union  Bay,  which  nothing  sheltered  from  the  open  sea, 
not  even  a sand-bank,  ships  beaten  by  the  east  winds  would 
have  found  no  shelter.  They  perceived  by  the  tranquility 
of  the  sea,  in  which  no  shallows  troubled  the  waters,  by  its 
uniform  color,  which  was  stained  by  no  yellow  shades,  by  the 
absence  of  even  a reef,  that  the  coast  was  steep  and  that  the 
ocean  there  covered  a deep  abyss.  Behind  in  the  west,  but  at 
a distance  of  four  miles,  rose  the  first  trees  of  the  forests  of  the 
Far  West.  They  might  have  believed  themselves  to  be  on  the 
desolate  coast  of  some  island  in  the  Antarctic  regions  which 
the  ice  had  invaded.  The  colonists  halted  at  this  place  for 
breakfast.  A fire  of  brushwood  and  dried  seaweed  was  lighted, 
and  Neb  prepared  the  breakfast  of  cold  meat,  to  which  he 
added  some  cups  of  Oswego  tea. 

Whilst  eating  they  looked  around  them.  This  part  of 
Lincoln  Island  was  very  sterile,  and  contrasted  with  all  the 
western  part.  The  reporter  was  thus  led  to  observe  that  if 
chance  had  thrown  them  at  first  on  the  shore,  they  would  have 
had  but  a deplorable  idea  of  their  future  domain. 

“ I believe  that  we  should  not  have  been  able  to  reach  it,” 
replied  the  engineer,  “ for  the  sea  is  deep,  and  there  is  not  a 
rock  on  which  we  could  have  taken  refuge.  Before  Granite 
House,  at  least,  there  were  sandbanks,  an  islet,  which  multi- 
plied our  chances  of  safety.  Here,  nothing  but  the  depths  !” 

“ It  is  singular  enough,”  remarked  Spilett,  “ that  this  com- 
paratively small  island  should  present  such  varied  ground. 
This  diversity  of  aspect,  logically  only  belongs  to  continents  of 
a certain  extent.  One  would  really  say,  that  the  western  part 
of  Lincoln  Island,  so  rich  and  so  fertile,  is  washed  by  the 
warm  waters  of  the  Gulf  of  Mexico,  and  that  its  shores  to 
the  north  and  the  southeast  extend  over  a sort  of  Arctic 
sea. 

“ You  are  right,  my  dear  Spilett,”  replied  Cyrus  Harding,  “ I 
have  also  observed  this.  I think  the  form  and  also  the  nature 
Df  this  island  strange.  It  is  a summary  of  all  the  aspects 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS, 


m 


which  a continent  presents,  and  I should  not  be  surprised  it 
it  was  a continent  formerly.” 

“ What ! a continent  in  the  middle  of  the  Pacific  ? ” cried 
Pencroft. 

“Why  not?”  replied  Cyrus  Harding.  “Why  should  not 
Australia,  New  Ireland,  Australasia,  united  to  the  archipelagos 
of  the  Pacific,  have  once  formed  a sixth  part  of  the  world,  as 
important  as  Europe  or  Asia,  as  Africa  or  the  two  Americas  ? 
To  my  mind,  it  is  quite  possible  that  all  these  islands,  emerg- 
ing from  this  vast  ocean,  are  but  the  summits  of  a continent, 
now  submerged,  but  which  was  above  the  waters  at  an  ante- 
historic  period.” 

“ As  the  Atlantis  was  formerly,”  replied  Herbert. 

“ Yes,  my  boy  ...  if,  however,  it  has  existed.” 

“ And  would  Lincoln  Island  have  been  a part  of  that  conti- 
nent ? ” asked  Pencroft. 

“It  is  probable,”  replied  Cyrus  Harding,  “and  that  would 
sufficiently  explain  the  variety  of  productions  which  are  seen 
on  its  surface.” 

“ And  the  great  number  of  animals  which  still  inhabit  it,” 
added  Herbert. 

“ Yes,  my  boy,”  replied  the  engineer,  “ and  you  furnish  me 
with  an  argument  to  support  my  theory.  It  is  certain,  aftei 
what  we  have  seen,  that  animals  are  numerous  in  this  island, 
and  what  is  more  strange,  that  the  species  are  extremely 
varied.  There  is  a reason  for  that,  and  to  me  it  is  that  Lincoln 
Island  may  have  formerly  been  a part  of  some  vast  continent 
which  has  gradually  sunk  below  the  Pacific.” 

“ Then,  some  fine  day,”  said  Pencroft,  who  did  not  appear 
to  be  entirely  convinced,  “the  rest  of  this  ancient  continent 
may  disappear  in  its  turn,  and  there  will  be  nothing  between 
America  and  Asia.” 

“Yes,”  replied  Harding,  “there  will  be  new  continents 
which  millions  and  millions  of  animalculse  are  building  at  this 
moment.” 

“ And  what  are  these  masons  ? ” asked  Pencroft 

“ Coral  insects,”  replied  Cyrus  Harding.  “ By  constant  work 
they  made  the  island  of  Clermont-Tonnerre,  and  numerous 


212 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


other  coral-islands  in  the  Pacific  Ocean.  Forty-seven  millions 
of  these  insects  are  needed  to  weigh  a grain,  and  yet,  with 
the  sea  salt  they  absorb,  the  solid  elements  of  water  which 
they  assimilate,  these  animalculse  produce  limestone,  and  this 
limestone  forms  enormous  submarine  erections,  of  which  the 
hardness  and  solidity  equal  granite.  Formerly,  at  the  first 
periods  of  creation,  nature  employing  fire,  heaved  up  the  land, 
but  now  she  entrusts  to  these  microscopic  creatures  the  task 
of  replacing  this  agent,  of  which  the  dynamic  power  in  the 
interior  of  the  globe  has  evidently  diminished— which  is 
proved  by  the  number  of  volcanoes  on  the  surface  of  the  earth, 
now  actually  extinct.  And  I believe  that  centuries  succeeding 
to  centuries,  and  insects  to  insects,  this  Pacific  may  one  day  be 
changed  into  a vast  continent,  which  new  generations  will 
inhabit  and  civilize  in  their  turn.”  " 

“ That  will  take  a long  time,”  said  Pencroft. 

“ Nature  has  time  for  it,”  replied  the  engineer. 

“But  what  would  be  the  use  of  new  continents?”  asked 
Herbert.  “ It  appears  to  me  that  the  present  extent  of  habit- 
able countries  is  sufficient  for  humanity.  Yet  nature  does 
nothing  uselessly.” 

“Nothing  uselessly,  certainly,”  replied  the  engineer,  “but 
this  is  how  the  necessity  of  new  continents  for  the  future,  and 
exactly  on  the  tropical  zone  occupied  by  the  coral  islands,  may 
be  explained.  At  least  to  me  this  explanation  appears  plaus- 
ible.” 

“ We  are  listening,  captain,”  said  Herbert. 

“This  is  my  idea;  philosophers  generally  admit  that  some 
day  our  globe  will  end,  or  rather  that  animal  and  vegetable 
life  will  no  longer  be  possible  because  of  the  intense  cold  to 
which  it  will  be  subjected.  What  they  are  not  agreed  upon, 
is  the  cause  of  this  cold.  Some  think  that  it  will  arise  from 
the  falling  of  the  temperature,  which  the  sun  will  experience 
after  millions  of  years;  others,  from  the  gradual  extinction  of 
the  files  in  the  interior  of  our  globe,  which  have  a greater  in- 
fluence on  it  than  is  generally  supposed.  I hold  to  this  last 
hypothesis,  grounding  it  on  the  fact  that  the  moon  is  really  a 
cold  3tar,  which  is  no  longer  habitable,  although  the  sun 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


213 


continues  to  throw  on  its  surface  the  same  amount  of  heat.  If, 
then,  the  moon  has  become  cold,  it  is  because  the  interior  fires 
to  which,  as  do  all  the  stars  of  the  stellar  world,  it  owes  its 
origin,  are  completely  extinct.  Lastly,  whatever  may  be  the 
cause,  our  globe  will  become  cold  some  day,  but  this  cold  will 
only  operate  gradually.  What  will  happen,  then  ? The  tem- 
perate zones,  at  a more  or  less  distant  period,  will  not  be 
more  habitable  than  the  polar  regions  now  are.  Then  the 
population  of  men,  as  well  as  the  animals,  will  flow  towards 
the  latitudes  which  are  more  directly  under  the  solar  influence. 
An  immense  emigration  will  be  performed.  Europe,  Central 
Asia,  North  America,  will  gradually  be  abandoned,  as  well  as 
Australasia  and  the  lower  parts  of  South  America.  The  vege- 
tation will  follow  the  human  emigration.  The  flora  will 
retreat  towards  the  Equator  at  the  same  time  as  the  fauna. 
The  central  parts  of  South  America  and  Africa  will  be  the 
continents  chiefly  inhabited.  The  Laplanders  and  the  Somo- 
ides  will  find  the  climate  of  the  polar  regions  on  the  shores 
of  the  Mediterranean.  Who  can  say,  that  at  this  period,  the 
equatorial  regions  will  not  be  too  small,  to  contain  and 
nourish  terrestrial  humanity  ? Now,  may  not  provident 
nature,  so  as  to  give  refuge  to  all  the  vegetable  and  animal 
emigration,  be  at  present  laying  the  foundation  of  a new 
continent  under  the  Equator,  and  may  she  not  have  entrusted 
these  insects  with  the  construction  of  it?  I have  often 
thought  of  all  these  things,  my  friends,  and  I seriously  believe 
that  the  aspect  of  our  globe  will  some  day  be  completely 
changed;  that  by  the  raising  of  new  continents  the  sea  will 
cover  the  old,  and  that,  in  future  ages,  a Columbus  will  go  to 
discover  the  islands  of  Chimborazo,  of  the  Himalaya,  or  of  Mont 
Blanc,  remains  of  a submerged  America,  Asia,  and  Europe. 
Then  these  new  continents  will  become,  in  their  turn,  unin- 
habitable ; heat  will  die  away,  as  does  the  heat  from  a body 
when  the  soul  has  left  it;  and  life  will  disanpear  from  the 
globe,  if  not  for  ever,  at  least  for  a period.  Perhaps  then,  our 
spheroid  will  rest— will  be  left  to  death— to  revive  some  day 
under  superior  conditions!  But  all  that,  my  friends,  is  the 
secret  of  the  Author  of  all  things;  and  beginning  b.T  the 


214 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


work  of  the  insects,  I have  perhaps  let  myself  be  carried  to* 
far,  in  investigating  the  secrets  of  the  future.” 

“ My  dear  Cyrus,”  replied  Spilett,  u these  theories  are  pro- 
phecies to  me,  and  they  will  he  accomplished  some  day.” 

“ That  is  the  secret  of  God,”  said  the  engineer. 

“All  that  is  well  and  good,”  then  said  Pencroft,  who  had 
listened  with  all  his  might,  “ but  will  you  tell  me,  captain,  if 
Lincoln  Island  has  been  made  by  your  insects?  ” 

No,”  replied  Harding;  “it  is  of  a purely  volcanic  origin.” 

' Then  it  will  disappear  some  day  ? ” 

“ That  is  probable.” 

“ I hope  we  won’t  be  here  then.” 

“No,  don’t  be  uneasy,  Pencroft;  we  shall  not  be  here  then, 
as  we  have  no  wish  to  die  here,  and  hope  to  get  away  some 
time.” 

: “ In  tke  meantime,”  replied  Gideon  Spilett,  “ let  us  establish 
ourselves  here  as  if  for  ever.  There  is  no  use  in  doing  things 
by  halves.” 

This  ended  the  conversation.  Breakfast  was  finished,  the 
exploration  was  continued,  and  the  settlers  arrived  at  the  bor- 
der of  the  marshy  region.  It  was  a marsh  of  which  the  extent, 
to  the  rounded  coast  which  terminated  the  island  at  the 
southeast,  was  about  twenty  square  miles.  The  soil  was 
formed  of  clayey  flint-earth,  mingled  with  vegetable  matter, 
flich  as  the  remains  of  rushes,  reeds,  grass,  etc.  Here  and 
there  beds  of  grass,  thick  as  a carpet,  covered  it.  In  many 
places  icy  pools  sparkled  in  the  sun.  Neither  rain  nor  any 
river,  increased  by  a sudden  swelling,  could  supply  these  ponds, 
They  therefore  naturally  concluded  that  the  marsh  was  fed  by 
the  infiltrations  of  the  soil,  and  it  was  really  so.  It  was  also  to 
be  feared  that  during  the  heat  miasmas  would  arise,  which 
might  produce  fevers. 

Above  the  aquatic  plants,  on  the  surface  of  the  stagnant 
water,  fluttered  numbers  of  birds.  Wild  duck,  teal,  snipe  lived 
there  in  flocks,  and  those  fearless  birds  allowed  themselves 
to  be  easily  approached. 

One  shot  from  a gun  would  certainly  have  brought  down 
gome  dozen  of  the  birds,  they  were  so  close  together.  The 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUnS, 


215 


explorers  were,  however,  obliged  to  content  themselves  with 
bows  and  arrows.  The  result  was  less,  but  the  silent  arrow 
had  the  advantage  of  not  frightening  the  birds,  whilst  the 
noise  of  fire-arms  would  have  dispersed  them  to  all  parts  of  the 
marsh.  The  hunters  were  satisfied,  for  this  time,  with  a dozen 
ducks,  which  had  white  bodies  with  a band  of  cinnamon,  a 
green  head,  wings  black,  white,  and  red,  and  flattened  beak. 
Herbert  called  them  tadorns.  Top  helped  in  the  capture  of 
these  birds,  whose  name  was  given  to  this  marshy  part  of  the 
island.  The  settlers  had  here  an  abundant  reserve  of  aquatic 
game.  At  some  future  time  they  meant  to  explore  it  more 
carefully,  and  it  was  probable  that  some  of  the  birds  there 
might  be  domesticated,  or  at  least  brought  to  the  shores  of 
the  lake,  so  that  they  would  be  more  within  their  reach. 

About  five  o’clock  in  the  evening  Cyrus  Harding  and  his  com- 
panions retraced  their  steps  to  their  dwelling  by  traversing 
Tadorn’s  Fens,  and  crossed  the  Mercy  on  the  ice-bridge. 

At  eight  in  the  evening  they  all  entered  Granite  House. 


CHAPTER  XXII, 


-TRAPS  — FOXES  — PECCARIES  — THE  WIND  CHANGES  TO  THE 
NORTHWEST  — SNOW-STORM— BASKET- MAKERS  — THE  SEVER- 
EST COLD  — MAPLE  SUGAR— THE  MYSTERIOUS  WELL —AN 
EXPLORATION  PLANNED  — THE  LEADEN  BULLET. 

This  intense  cold  lasted  till  the  15th  of  August,  without, 
however,  passing  the  degree  of  Fahrenheit  already  mentioned 
When  the  atmosphere  was  calm,  the  low  temperature  was 
easily  borne,  but  when  the  wind  blew,  the  poor  settlers,  insuf- 
ficiently clothed,  felt  it  severely.  Pencroft  regretted  that 
Lincoln  island  was  not  the  home  of  a few  families  of  bears 
rather  than  of  so  many  foxes  and  seals. 

“ Bears,”  said  he,  “ are  generally  very  well  dressed,  and  I ask 
no  more  than  to  borrow  for  the  winter  the  warm  cloaks  which 
they  have  on  their  backs.” 

“ But,”  replied  Neb,  laughing,  “ perhaps  the  bears  would  not 
consent  to  give  you  their  cloaks,  Pencroft.  These  beasts  are 
not  St.  Martins.” 

“ We  would  make  them  do  it,  Neb,  we  would  make  them,” 
replied  Pencroft,  in  quite  an  authorative  tone. 

But  these  formidable  carnivora  did  not  exist  in  the  island,  or 
at  any  rate  they  had  not  as  yet  shown  themselves. 

In  the  meanwhile,  Herbert,  Pencroft,  and  the  reporter, 
occupied  themselves  with  making  traps  on  Prospect  Heights 
and  at  the  border  of  the  forest. 

According  to  the  sailor,  any  animal,  whatever  it  was,  would 
be  a lawful  prize,  and  the  rodents  or  carnivora  which  might 
get  into  the  new  snares  would  be  well  received  at  Granite 
House. 

The  traps  were  besides  extremely  simple  ; being  pits  dug  in 
the  ground,  a platform  of  branches  and  grass  above,  which 

216 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


217 


concealed  the  opening,  and  at  the  bottom  some  bait,  the  scent 
of  which  would  attract  animals.  It  must  be  mentioned,  also, 
that  they  had  not  been  dug  at  random,  but  at  certain  places 
where  numerous  footprints  showed  that  quadrupeds  fre- 
quented the  ground.  They  were  visited  every  day,  and  at  three 
different  times  during  the  first  days,  specimens  of  those  Antarc- 
tic foxes  which  they  had  already  seen  on  the  right  bank  of  the 
Mercy  were  found  in  them. 

44  Why,  there  are  nothing  but  foxes  in  this  country  ! ” cried 
Pencroft,  when  for  the  third  time  he  drew  one  of  the  animals 
out  of  the  pit.  Looking  at  it  in  great  disgust,  he  added, 
“ beasts  which  are  good  for  nothing  ! ” 

<4Yes,”  said  Gideon  Spilett,  “they  are  good  for  something !” 

“ And  what  is  that  ? ” 

44  To  make'bait  to  attract  other  creatures  ! ” 

The  reporter  was  right,  and  the  traps  were  henceforward 
Waited  with  the  foxes’  carcases. 

The  sailor  had  also  made  snares  from  the  long  tough  fibers 
of  a certain  plant,  and  they  were  even  more  successful  than 
the  traps.  Rarely  a day  passed  without  some  rabbits  from 
the  warren  being  caught.  It  was  always  rabbit,  but  Neb 
knew  how  to  vary  his  sauces,  and  the  settlers  did  not  think  of 
complaining. 

However,  once  or  twice  in  the  second  week  of  August,  the 
traps  supplied  the  hunters  with  other  animals  more  useful  than 
foxes,  namely,  several  of  those  small  wild  boars  which  had 
already  been  seen  to  the  north  of  the  lake.  Pencroft  had  no 
need  to  ask  if  these  beasts  were  eatable.  He  could  see  that  by 
their  resemblance  to  the  pig  of  America  and  Europe. 

44  But  these  are  not  pigs,”  said  Herbert  to  him, 44 1 warn  you. 
of  that,  Pencroft.” 

“My  boy,”  replied  the  sailor,  bending  over  the  trap  and 
drawing  out  one  of  these  representatives  of  the  family  of  sus  by 
the  little  appendage  which  served  it  as  a tail, 44  let  me  believe 
that  these  are  pigs  ! ” 

“Why?” 

“ Because  that  pleases  me  I ” 

44  Are  you  very  fond  of  pig,  then,  Pencroft  ?” 


218 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


“ I am  very  fond  of  pig,”  replied  the  sailor,  “ particularly  of 
its  feet,  and  if  it  had  eight  instead  of  four,  I should  like  them 
twice  as  much  ! ” 

As  to  the  animals  in  question,  they  were  peccaries  belonging 
to  one  of  the  four  species  which  are  included  in  the  family, 
and  they  were  also  of  the  species  of  Tajacu,  recognizable  by 
their  deep  color  and  the  absence  of  those  long  teeth  with 
which  the  mouths  of  their  congeners  are  armed.  These  pec- 
caries generally  live  in  herds,  and  it  was  probable  that  they 
abounded  in  the  woody  part  of  the  island. 

At  any  rate,  they  were  eatable  from  head  to  foot,  and  Pen- 
croft  did  not  ask  more  from  them. 

Toward  the  15th  of  August,  the  state  of  the  atmosphere  was 
suddenly  moderated  by  the  wind  shifting  to  the  northwest. 
The  temperature  rose  some  degrees,  and  the  accumulated 
vapor  in  the  air  was  not  long  in  resolving  into  snow.  All  the 
island  was  covered  with  a sheet  of  white,  and  showed  itself  to  # 
its  inhabitants  under  a new  aspect.  The  snow  fell  abundantly 
for  several  days,  and  it  soon  reached  a thickness  of  two 
feet. 

The  wind  also  blew  with  great  violence,  and  at  the  height  of 
Granite  House  the  sea  could  be  heard  thundering  against  the 
reefs.  In  some  places,  the  wind,  eddying  round  the  corners, 
formed  the  snow  into  tall  whirling  columns,  resembling  those 
waterspouts  which  turn  round  on  their  base,  and  which  vessels 
attack  with  a shot  from  a gun.  However,  the  storm,  coming 
from  the  northwest,  blew  across  the  island,  and  the  position  of 
Granite  House  preserved  it  from  a direct  attack. 

But  in  the  midst  of  this  snow-storm,  as  terrible  as  if  it  had 
been  produced  in  some  polar  country,  neither  Cyrus  Harding 
nor  his  companions  could,  notwithstanding  their  wish  for  it, 
venture  forth,  and  they  remained  shut  up  for  five  days,  from 
the  20th  to  the  25th  of  August.  They  could  hear  the  tempest 
raging  in  Jacamar  woods,  which  would  surely  suffer  from  it. 
Many  of  the  trees  would  no  doubt  be  tom  up  by  the  roots,  but 
Pencroft  consoled  himself  by  thinking  that  he  would  not  have 
the  trouble  of  cutting  them  down. 

44  The  wind  is  turning  woodman,  let  it  alone,”  he  repeated* 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  OLOUDS. 


219 

Besides,  there  was  no  way  of  stopping  it,  if  they  had  wished 
to  do  so. 

How  grateful  the  inhabitants  of  Granite  House  then  were  to 
Heaven  for  having  prepared  for  them  this  solid  and  immovable 
retreat ! Cyrus  Harding  had  also  his  legitimate  share  of 
thanks,  but,  after  all,  it  was  Nature  who  had  hollowed  out  this 
vast  cavern,  and  he  had  only  discovered  it.  There  all  were  in 
safety,  and  the  tempest  could  not  reach  them.  If  they  had 
constructed  a house  of  bricks  and  wood  on  Prospect  Heights,  it 
certainly  would  not  have  resisted  the  fury  of  this  storm.  As  to 
the  Chimneys,  it  must  have  been  absolutely  uninhabitable,  for 
the  sea,  passing  over  the  islet,  would  beat  furiously  against  it. 
But  here,  in  Granite  House,  in  the  middle  of  a solid  mass,  over 
which  neither  the  sea  nor  air  had  any  influence,  there  was 
nothing  to  fear. 

During  these  days  of  seclusion  the  settlers  did  not  remain* 
inactive. 

There  was  no  want  of  wood,  cut  up  into  planks,  in  the  stores 
room,  and  little  by  little  they  completed  their  furnishing  ; con- 
structing the  most  solid  of  tables  and  chairs,  for  material  was 
not  spared.  Neb  and  Pencroft  were  very  proud  of  this  rather 
heavy  furniture,  which  they  would  not  have  changed  on 
any  account, 

Then  the  carpenters  became  basket-makers,  and  they  did  not 
succeed  badly  in  this  new  manufacture.  At  the  point  of  the 
lake  which  projected  to  the  north,  they  had  discovered  an 
osier-bed  in  which  grew  a lar£e  number  of  purple  osiers.  Be- 
fore the  rainy  season,  Pencroft  and  Herbert  had  cut  down 
these  useful  shrubs,  and  their  branches,  well  prepared,  could 
now  be  effectively  employed.  The  first  attempts  were  some* 
what  prude,  but  in  consequence  of  the  cleverness  and  inteili* 
gence  of  the  workmen,  by  consulting,  and  recalling  the 
models  which  they  had  seen,  and  by  emulating  each  other, 
the  possessions  of  the  colony  were  soon  increased  by  several 
baskets  of  different  sizes.  The  store-room  was  provided  with 
them,  and  in  special  baskets  Neb  placed  his  collections  of 
rhizomes,  stone-pine  almonds,  etc. 

During  the  last  week  of  the  month  of  August  the  weathei 


220 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


moderated  again.  The  temperature  fell  a little  and  the  cera* 
pest  abated.  The  colonists  sallied  out  directly.  There  was 
certainly  two  feet  of  snow  on  the  shore,  but  they  were  able  it 
walk  without  much  difficulty  on  the  hardened  surface. 

m 

Cyrus  Harding  and  his  companions  climbed  Prospect  Heights. 

What  a change ! The  woods,  which  they  had  left  green, 
especially  in  the  part  at  which  the  firs  predominated,  had 
disappeared  under  a uniform  color.  All  was  white,  from  the 
summit  of  Mount  Franklin  to  the  shore,  the  forests,  the 
plains,  the  lake,  the  river.  The  waters  of  the  Mercy  flowed 
under  a roof  of  ice,  which,  at  each  rising  and  ebbing  of  the  tide, 
broke  up  with  loud  crashes.  Numerous  birds  fluttered  over 
the  frozen  surface  of  the  lake.  Ducks  and  snipe,  teal  and 
guillemots  were  assembled  in  thousands.  The  rocks  among 
which  the  cascade  flowed  were  bristling  with  icicles.  One 
might  have  said  that  the  water  escaped  by  a monstrous 
gargoyle,  ornamented  as  grotesquely  as  an  artist  of  the 
Renaissance.  As  to  the  damage  caused  by  the  storm  in  the 
forest,  that  could  not  as  yet  be  ascertained,  they  must  wait  till 
the  snowy  covering  was  dissipated. 

Gideon  Spilett,  Pencroft,  and  Herbert  did  not  miss  this 
opportunity  of  going  to  visit  their  traps.  They  did  not  find 
them  easily,  under  the  snow  with  which  they  were  covered. 
They  had  also  to  be  careful  not  to  fall  into  one  or  other  of 
them,  which  would  have  been  both  dangerous  and  humiliat- 
ing; to  be  taken  in  their  own  snares ! But  happily  they  avoided 
this  unpleasantness,  and  found  their  traps  perfectly  intact. 
No  animal  had  fallen  into  them,  and  yet  the  footprints  in  the 
neighborhood  were  very  numerous,  amongst  others,  certain 
very  clear  marks  of  claws.  Herbert  did  not  hesitate  to  affirm 
that  some  animal  of  the  feline  species  had  passed  there,  which 
justified  the  engineer’s  opinion  that  dangerous  beasts  existed 
in  Lincoln  Island.  These  animals  doubtless  generally  lived 
in  the  forests  of  the  Far  West,  but  pressed  by  hunger,  they 
had  ventured  as  far  as  Prospect  Heights.  Perhaps  they  had 
smelt  out  the  inhabitants  of  Granite  House. 

“ Now,  what  are  these  feline  creatures  ? ” asked  Pencroft 

“ They  are  tigers,”  replied  Herbert. 


DBOPFJftL,  S^5M  THE  CLQtfm 


%21 


*‘I  thought  those  beasts  were  only  found  In  hot  countries  ?” 

“ On  the  new  continent,”  replied  the  lad,  “ they  are  found 
from  Mexico  to  the  Pampas  of  Buenos  Ayres.  Now,  as  Lincoln 
Island  is  nearly  under  the  same  latitude  as  the  provinces  of 
La  Plata,  it  is  not  surprising  that  tigers  are  to  be  met  with  in 
it.” 

“Well,  we  must  look  out  for  them,”  replied  Pencroft. 

However,  the  snow  soon  disappeared,  quickly  dissolving 
under  the  influence  of  the  rising  temperature.  Rain  fell,  and 
the  sheet  of  white  soon  vanished.  Notwithstanding  the  bad 
weather,  the  settlers  renewed  their  stores  of  different  things, 
stone-pine  almonds,  rhizomes,  syrup  from  the  maple  tree,  for 
the  vegetable  part;  rabbits  from  the  warren,  agouties,  and 
kangaroos  for  the  animal  part.  This  necessitated  several  ex- 
cursions into  the  forest,  and  they  found  that  a great  number  of 
trees  had  been  blown  down  by  the  last  hurricane.  Pencroft 
and  Neb  also  pushed  with  the  cart  as  far  as  the  vein  of  coal, 
and  brought  back  several  tons  of  fuel.  They  saw  in  passing 
that  the  pottery  kiln  had  been  severely  damaged  by  the  wind, 
at  least  six  feet  of  it  having  been  blown  off. 

At  the  same  time  as  the  coal,  the  store  of  wood  was  renewed 
at  Granite  House,  and  they  profited  by  the  current  of  the 
Mercy  having  again  become  free,  to  float  down  several  rafts. 
They  could  see  that  the  cold  period  was  not  ended. 

A visit  was  also  paid  to  the  Chimneys,  and  the  settlers  could 
not  but  congratulate  themselves  on  not  having  been  living 
there  during  the  hurricane.  The  sea  had  left  unquestionable 
traces  of  its  ravages.  Sweeping  over  the  islet,  it  had  furiously 
assailed  the  passages,  half  filling  them  with  sand,  while  thick 
beds  of  sea-weed  covered  the  rocks.  Whilst  Neb,  Herbert,  and 
Pencroft  hunted  or  collected  wood,  Cyrus  Harding  and  Gideon 
Spilett  busied  themselves  in  putting  the  Chimneys  to  rights, 
and  they  found  the  forge  and  the  bellows  almost  unhurt,  pro- 
tected as  they  had  been  from  the  first  by  the  heaps  of  sand. 

The  store  of  fuel  had  not  been  made  uselessly.  The  settlers 
had  not  done  with  the  rigorous  cold.  It  is  known  that,  in  the 
northern  hemisphere,  the  month  of  February  is  principally 
distinguished  by  rapid  fallings  of  the  temperature.  It  is  the 


222 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITiON, 


same  in  the  southern  hemisphere,  and  the  end  of  the  month  of 
August,  which  is  the  February  of  North  America,  does  not 
escape  this  climatic  law. 

About  the  25th,  after  another  change  from  snow  to  rain,  the 
wind  shifted  to  the  southeast,  and  the  cold  became,  suddenly, 
very  severe.  According  to  the  engineer’s  calculation,  the 
mercurial  column  of  a Fahrenheit  thermometer  would  not  have 
marked  less  than  eight  degrees  below  zero,  and  this  intense 
cold,  rendered  still  more  painful  by  a sharp  gale,  lasted  for 
several  days.  The  colonists  were  again  shut  up  in  Granite 
House,  and  as  it  was  necessary  to  hermetically  seal  all  the 
openings  of  the  facade,  only  leaving  a narrow  passage  for 
renewing  the  air,  the  consumption  of  candles  was  considerable. 
To  economize  them,  the  cavern  was  often  only  lighted  by  the 
blazing  hearths,  on  which  fuel  was  not  spared.  Several  times, 
one  or  other  of  the  settlers  descended  to  the  beach  in  the  midst 
of  ice  which  the  waves  heaped  up  at  each  tide,  but  they  soon 
climbed  up  again  to  Granite  House,  and  it  was  not  without 
pain  and  difficulty  that  their  hands  could  hold  to  the  rounds  of 
the  ladder.  In  consequence  of  the  intense  cold,  their  fingers 
felt  as  if  burnt  when  they  touched  the  rounds.  To  occupy  the 
leisure  hours,  which  the  tenants  of  Granite  House  now  had  at 
their  disposal,  Cyrus  Harding  undertook  an  operation  which 
could  be  performed  in-doors. 

We  know  that  the  settlers  had  no  other  sugar  at  their  dis- 
posal than  the  liquid  substance  which  they  drew  from  the 
maple,  by  making  deep  incisions  in  the  tree.  They  contented 
themselves  with  collecting  this  liquor  in  jars  and  employing 
it  in  thi3  state  for  different  culinary  purposes,  and  the  more  so, 
as  on  growing  old,  this  liquid  began  to  become  white  and  to 
be  of  a syrupy  consistency. 

But  there  was  something  better  to  be  made  of  it,  and  one  day 
Cyrus  Harding  announced  to  his  companions  that  they  were 
going  to  turn  into  refiners. 

“ Refiners  ! ” replied  Pencroft.  “ That  is  rather  a warm 
trade,  I think.” 

“ Very  warm,”  answered  the  engineer. 

‘‘Then  it  will  be  seasonable ! ” said  the  sailor. 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


This  word  refining  need  not  awake  in  the  mind  thoughts  o l 
an  elaborate  manufactory  with  apparatus  and  numerous  work- 
men. No ! to  crystali^e  this  liquor,  only  an  extremely  easy 
operation  is  required.  Placed  on  the  fire  in  large  earthen  pots, 
it  was  simply  subjected  to  evaporation,  and  soon  a scum  arose 
to  its  surface.  As  soon  as  this  began  to  thicken,  Neb  carefully 
removed  it  with  a wooden  spatula;  tins  accelerated  the  evapora^ 
tion,  and  at  the  same  time  prevented  it  from  contracting  an 
empyreumatic  flavor. 

After  boiling  for  several  hours  on  a hot  fire,  which  did  as 
much  good  to  the  operators  as  the  substance  operated  upon, 
the  latter  was  transformed  into  a thick  syrup.  This  syrup  was 
poured  into  clay  moulds,  previously  fabricated  in  the  kitchen 
stove,  and  to  which  they  had  given  various  shapes.  The  next 
day  this  syrup  had  become  cold  and  formed  cakes  and  tablets. 
This  was  sugar  of  rather  a reddish  color,  but  nearly  transpar- 
ent and  of  a delicious  taste. 

The  cold  continued  to  the  middle  of  September,  and  the 
prisoners  in  Granite  House  began  to  find  their  captivity  rather 
tedious.  Nearly  every  day  they  attempted  sorties  which  they 
could  not  prolong.  They  constantly  worked  at  the  improve- 
ment of  their  dwelling.  They  talked  whilst  working.  Harding 
instructed  his  companions  in  many  things,  principally  explain- 
ing to  them  the  practical  applications  of  science.  The  colonists 
had  no  library  at  their  disposal ; but  the  engineer  was  a book 
which  was  always  at  hand,  always  open  at  the  page  which  one 
wanted,  a book  which  answered  all  their  questions,  and  which 
they  often  consulted.  The  time  thus  passed  away  pleasantly, 
timse  brave  men  not  appearing  to  have  any  fears  for  the  future. 

However,  all  were  anxious  to  see,  if  not  the  fine  season,  at 
least  the  cessation  of  the  insupportable  cold.  If  only  they  had 
been  clothed  in  a way  to  meet  it,  how  many  excursions  they 
would  have  attempted,  either  to  the  downs  or  to  Tadorm> 
Fens!  Game  would  have  been  easily  approached,  and  the 
chase  would  certainly  have  been  most  productive.  But  Cyrus 
Harding  considered  it  of  importance  that  no  one  should  injure 
his  health,  for  he  had  need  of  all  his  hands,  and  his  advice 
was  followed^  Bui  it  must  bd  said,  that  the  one  who  was  most 


m 


THE  LAKESIDE  tfSSfriON. 


impatient  of  this  imprisonment,  after  Pencroft  perhaps,  was 
Top.  The  faithful  dog  found  Granite  House  very  narrow.  He 
ran  backwards  and  forwards  from  one  room  to  another,  show- 
ing in  his  way  how  weary  he  was  of  being  shut  up.  Harding 
often  remarked  that  when  he  approached  the  dark  well  which 
communicated  with  the  sea,  and  of  which  the  orifice  opened  at 
the  back  of  the  store-room,  Tcp  uttered  singular  growlings. 
He  ran  round  and  round  this  hole,  which  had  been  covered 
with  a wooden  lid.  Sometimes  even  he  tried  to  put  his  paws 
under  the  lid,  as  if  he  wished  to  raise  it.  He  then  yelped  in  a 
peculiar  way,  which  showed  at  once  anger  and  uneasiness. 
The  engineer  observed  this  manoeuvre  several  times. 

What  could  there  be  in  this  abyss  to  make  such  an  impres- 
sion on  the  intelligent  animal  ? The  well  led  to  the  sea,  that 
was  certain.  Could  narrow  passages  spread  from  it  through 
the  foundations  of  the  island?  Did  some  marine  monster 
come,  from  time  to  time,  to  breathe  at  the  bottom  of  this  well ! 
The  engineer  did  not  know  what  to  think,  and  could  not 
yefrain  from  dreaming  of  many  strange  improbabilities. 
Accustomed  to  go  far  into  the  regions  of  scientific  reality,  he 
would  not  allow  himself  to  be  drawn  into  the  regions  of  the 
strange  and  almost  of  the  supernatural;  but  yet  how  to  explain 
why  Top,  one  of  those  sensible  dogs  who  never  waste  their 
time  in  barking  at  the  moon,  should  persist  in  trying  with 
scent  and  hearing  to  fathom  this  abyss,  if  there  was  nothing 
there  to  cause  his  uneasiness  ? Top’s  conduct  puzzled  Cyrus 
Harding  even  more  than  he  cared  to  acknowledge  to  himself. 

At  all  events,  the  engineer  only  communicated  his  impres- 
sions to  Gideon  Spilett,  for  he  thought  it  useless  to  explain  to 
his  companions  the  suspicions  .which  arose  from  what  per- 
haps was  only  Top’s  fancy. 

At  last  the  cold  ceased.  There  had  been  rain,  squalls 
mingled  with  snow,  hailstorms,  gusts  of  wind,  but  these  in- 
clemencies did  not  last.  The  ice  melted,  the  snow  disappeared; 
the  shore,  the  plateau,  the  banks  of  the  Mercy,  the  forest,  again 
became  practicable.  This  return  of  spring  delighted  the  tenants 
of  Granite  House,  and  they  soon  only  passed  in  it  the  hours 
necessary  for  eating  and  sleeping.  They  hunted  much  in  the 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


225 


second  part  of  September,  which  led  Pencroft  to  again  entreat 
for  the  fire-arms,  which  he  asserted  had  been  promised  by 
Cyrus  Harding.  The  latter,  knowing  well  that  without  special 
tools  it  would  be  nearly  impossible  for  him  to  manufacture  a 
gun  which  would  be  of  any  use,  still  drew  back  and  put  off 
the  operation  to  some  future  time,  observing  in  his  usual  dry 
way,  that  Herbert  and  Spilett  had  become  very  skillful  archers, 
so  that  many  sorts  of  excellent  animals,  agouties,  kangaroos, 
capybaras,  pigeons,  bustards,  wild  ducks,  snipes,  in  short, 
game  both  with  fur  and  feathers,  fell  victims  to  their  arrows, 
and  that,  consequently,  they  could  wait.  But  the  obstinate 
sailor  would  listen  to  nothing  of  this,  and  he  would  give  the 
engineer  no  peace  till  he  promised  to  satisfy  his  desire. 
Gideon  Spilett,  however,  supported  Pencroft. 

“If,  which  may  be  doubted,”  said  he,  “the  island  is  inhabited 
by  wild  beasts,  we  must  think  how  to  fight  with  and  extermi- 
nate them.  A time  may  come  when  this  will  be  our  first  duty.” 

But  at  this  period,  it  was  not  the  question  of  fire-arms  which 
occupied  Harding,  but  that  of  clothes.  Those  which  the 
settlers  wore  had  passed  this  winter,  but  they  would  not  last 
until  next  winter.  Skins  of  carnivora,  or  the  wool  of  rumi- 
nants must  oe  procured  at  any  price,  and  since  there  were 
plenty  of  musmons,  it  was  agreed  to  consult  on  the  means  of 
forming  a flock  which  might  be  brought  up  for  the  use  of  the 
colony.  An  enclosure'  for  the  domestic  animals,  a poultry-yard 
for  the  birds,  in  a word  to  establish  a sort  of  farm  in  the  Island, 
such  were  the  two  important  projects  for  the  fine  season. 

In  consequence  and  in  view  of  these  future  establishments, 
it  became  of  much  importance  that  they  should  penetrate  into 
all  the  yet  unknown  parts  of  Lincoln  Island,  that  is  to  say, 
through  that  thick  forest  which  extended  on  the  right  bank  of 
the  Mercy,  from  its  mouth  to  the  extremity  of  the  Serpentine 
peninsula,  as  well  as  on  the  whole  of  its  western  side.  But  this 
needed  settled  weather,  and  a month  must  pass  before  this 
exploration  could  be  profitably  undertaken. 

They  therefore  waited  with  some  impatience,  when  an 
incident  occurred  which  increased  the  desire  the  settlers  had 
to  visit  the  whole  of  their  domain. 

15 


m 


THE  LAKESIDE  DICTION. 


It  was  the  24th  of  October.  On  this  day,  Pencroft  had  gone 
to  visit  his  traps,  which  he  aways  kept  properly  baited.  In 
one  of  them  he  found  three  animals  which  would  be  very 
welcome  for  the  larder.  They  were  a female  peccary  and  her 
two  young  ones. 

Pencroft  then  returned  to  Granite  House,  enchanted  with 
his  capture,  and  as  usual,  he  made  a great  show  of  his  game. 

“ Come,  we  shall  have  a grand  feast,  captain  ! ” he  exclaimed, 
“ And  you  too,  Mr.  Spilett,  you  will  eat  some  ! ” 

“I  shall  be  very  happy,”  replied  the  reporter;  “but  what  is 
it  that  I am  going  to  eat  ? ” 

“ Sucking-pig.” 

“ Oh,  indeed,  sucking-pig,  Pencroft  ? To  hear  you,  I thought 
you  were  bringing  back  a young  partridge  stuffed  with 
truffles ! ” 

“ What  ? ” cried  Pencroft.  “ Do  you  mean  to  say  that  you 
turn  up  your  nose  at  sucking-pig  ? ” 

“ No,”  replied  Gideon  Spilett,  without  showing  any  enthus- 
iasm ; “ provided  one  doesn’t  eat  too  much—” 

“That’s  right,  that’s  right,”  returned  the  sailor,  who  was 
not  pleased  whenever  he  heard  his  chase  made  light  of.  “ You 
.Ske  to  make  objections.  Seven  months  ago,  when  we  landed 
on  the  island,  you  would  have  been  only  too  glad  to  have  met 
with  such  game !” 

“Well,  well,”  replied  the  reporter,  “man  is  never  perfect* 
nor  contented.” 

“Now,”  said  Pencroft,  “I  hope  that  Neb  will  distinguish 
himself.  Look  here ! These  two  little  peccaries  are  not  more 
tnan  three  months  old ! They  will  be  as  tender  as  quails ! 
Come  along,  Neb,  come  ! I will  look  after  the  cooking  myself.” 

And  the  sailor,  followed  by  Neb,  entered  the  kitchen, 
where  they  were  soon  absorbed  in  their  culinary  labors. 

They  were  allowed  to  do  it  in  their  own  way.  Neb,  there- 
fore, prepared  a magnificent  repast— -the  two  little  peccaries, 
kangaroo  soup,  a smoked  ham,  stone-pine  almonds,  Oswego 
tea;  in  fact,  all  the  best  that  they  had,  but  amongst  all  the 
dishes  figured  in  the  the  first  rank  the  savory  peccaries. 

At  five  o’clock  dinner  was  served  in  the  dining-room  of 


DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS. 


227 


Granite  House.  Thekangaroo  soup  was  smoking  on  the  table. 
They  found  it  excellent. 

To  the  soup  succeeded  the  peccaries,  which  Pencroft  insisted 
•on  carving  himself,  and  of  which  he  served  out  monstrous 
portions  to  each. 

These  sucking-pigs  were  really  delicious,  and  Pencroft  was 
devouring  his  share  with  great  gusto,  when  all  at  once  a cry 
and  an  oath  escaped  him. 

“ What’s  the  matter  ? ” asked  Cyrus  Harding. 

“The  matter?  the  matter  is  that  I have  just  broken  a tooth !” 
replied  the  sailor. 

“What,  are  there  pebbles  in  your  peccaries?”  said  Gideon 
Spilett. 

“ I suppose  so,”  replied  Pencroft,  drawing  from  his  lips  the 
object  which  had  cost  him  a grinder  !— 

At  was  not  a pebble— it  was  a leaden  bullet  I 

END  OF. “DROPPED  FROM  THE  CLOUDS” 


The  Abandoned 


CHAPTER  I. 

CONVERSATION  ON  THE  SUBJECT  OF  THE  BULLET  — CONSTRUCTION 
OF  A CANOE— HUNTING— AT  THE  TOP  OF  A KAURI— NOTHING 
TO  ATTEST  THE  PRESENCE  OF  MAN  — NEB  AND  HERBERT’S 
PRIZE— TURNING  A TURTLE— THE  TURTLE  DISAPPEARS— CYRUS 
HARDING’S  EXPLANATION. 

..ID' 

It  was  now  exactly  seven  months  since  the  balloon  voyagers 
had  been  thrown  on  Lincoln  Island.  During  that  time,  not- 
withstanding the  researches  they  had  made,  no  human  being 
had  been  discovered.  No  smoke  even  had  betrayed  the  pres- 
ence of  man  on  the  surface  of  the  island.  No  vestiges  of 
liis  handiwork  showed  that  either  at  an  early  or  at  a late 
period  had  man  lived  there.  Not  only  did  it  now  appear  to 
be  uninhabited  by  any  but  themselves,  but  the  colonists  were 
compelled  to  believe  that  it  never  had  been  inhabited.  And 
now,  all  this  scatfolding  of  reasonings  fell  before  a simple  bal/ 
of  metal,  found  in  the  body  of  an  inoffensive  rodent ! In  fact* 
this  bullet  must  have  been  issued  from  a fire-arm,  and  who 
but  a human  being  could  have  used  such  a weapon  ? 

When  Pencroft  had  placed  the  bullet  on  the  table,  his  com- 
panions looked  at  it  with  intense  astonishment.  All  the  conse- 
quences likely  to  result  from  this  incident,  notwithstanding  its 
apparent  insignificance,  immediately  took  possession  of  their 
minds.  The  sudden  apparition  of  a supernatural  being  could 
not  have  startled  them  more  completely. 

Cyrus  Harding  did  not  hesitate  to  give  utterance  to  the 
suggestions  which  this  fact,  at  once  surprising  and  unexpected, 
could  not  fail  to  raise  in  his  mind.  He  took  the  bullet,  turned 
it  over  and  over,  rolled  it  between  his  finger  and  thumb ; 
then,  turning  to  Pencroft,  he  asked  : 

“Are  you  sure  that  the  peccary  wounded  by  this  bullet  was 
not  more  than  three  months  old  ? ” 

281 


232 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


“ Not  more,  captain,”  replied  Pencrof t.  “ It  was  still  sucking 
its  mother  when  I found  it  in  the  trap.” 

“Well,”  said  the  engineer,  “that  proves  that  within  three 
months  a gun-shot  was  fired  in  Lincoln  Island.” 

“And  that  a bullet,”  added  Gideon  Spilett,  “wounded, 
though  not  mortally,  this  little  animal.” 

“ That  is  unquestionable,”  said  Cyrus  Harding,  “ and 
these  are  the  deductions  which  must  be  drawn  from  this 
incident : that  the  island  was  inhabited  before  our  arrival,  or 
that  men  have  landed  ,here  within  three  months.  Did  these 
men  arrive  here  voluntarily  or  involuntarily,  by  disembarking 
on  the  shore  or  by  being  wrecked  ? This  point  can  only  be 
cleared  up  later.  As  to  what  they  were,  Europeans  or  Malays, 
enemies  or  friends  of  our  race,  we  can  not  possibly  guess;  ana 
if  they  still  inhabit  the  island,  or  if  they  have  left  it,  we  know 
not.  But  these  questions  are  of  too  much  importance  to  be 
allowed  to  remain  long  unsettled.” 

“ No  ! a hundred  times  no  ! a thousand  times  no  ! ” cried 
the  sailor,  springing  up  from  the  table.  “ There  are  no  other 
men  than  ourselves  on  Lincoln  island!  By  my  faith!  The 
island  isn’t  large,  and  if  it  had  been  inhabited,  we  should  have 
seen  some  of  the  inhabitants  long  before  this ! ” 

“In  fact,  the  contrary  would  be  very  astonishing,”  said 
Herbert. 

“ But  it  would  be  much  more  astonishing,  I should  think,” 
observed  the  reporter,  “that  this  peccary  should  have  been 
born  with  a bullet  in  its  inside  \ ” 

“ At  least,”  said  Neb,  seriously,  “ if  Pencroft  has  not  had—” 
“Look  here,  Neb,”  burst  out  Pencroft.  “Do  you  think  I 
could  have  a bullet  in  my  jaw  for  five  or  six  months  without 
finding  it  out  ? Where  could  it  be  hidden  ? ” he  asked,  opening 
his  mouth  to  show  the  two-and-thirty  teeth  with  which  it  was 
furnished.  “ Look  well,  Neb,  and  if  you  find  one  hollow  tooth 
in  this  set,  I will  let  you  pull  out  half  a dozen ! ” 

“Neb’s  supposition  is  certainly  inadmissible,”  replied  Hard- 
ing, who,  notwithstanding  the  gravity  of  his  thoughts,  could 
not  restrain  a smile.  “ It  is  certain  that  a gun  has  been  fired  in 
the  island,  within  thn  e months  at  most.  But  I am  inclined  to 


the  abandoned. 


m 


think  that  the  people  who  landed  on  this  coast  were  only  here 
a very  short  time  ago,  or  that  they  just  touched  here;  for  if, 
when  we  surveyed  the  island  from  the  summit  of  Mount  Frank- 
lin, it  had  been  inhabited,  we  should  have  seen  them  or  we 
should  have  been  seen  ourselves.  It  is  therefore  probable  that 
witMn  only  a few  weeks  castaways  have  been  thrown  by  a 
storm  on  some  part  of  the  coast.  However  that  may  be,  it  is  of 
consequence  to  us  to  have  this  point  settled.” 

“ I think  that  we  should  act  with  caution,”  said  the  reporter. 
“ Such  is  my  advice,”  replied  Cyrus  Harding,  “ for  it  is  to 
be  feared  that  Malay  pirates  have  landed  on  the  island  ! ” 

“ Captain,”  asked  the  sailor,  “ would  it  not  be  a good  plan, 
before  setting  out,  to  build  a canoe  in  which  we  could  either 
ascend  the  river,  or,  if  we  liked,  coast  round  the  island  ? It 
will  not  do  to  be  unprovided.” 

“Your  idea  is  good,  Pencroft,”  replied  the  engineer,  “but 
we  can  not  wait  for  that.  It  would  take  at  least  a month 
to  build  a boat.” 

“Yes,  a real  boat,”  replied  the  sailor;  “but  we  do  not  want 
one  for  a sea  voyage,  and  in  five  days  at  the  most,  I will  under" 
take  to  construct  a canoe  fit  to  navigate  the  Mercy.” 

“ Five  days,”  cried  Neb,  “ to  build  a boat  ? ” 

“Yes,  Neb;  a boat  in  the  Indian  fashion.” 

“ Of  wood  ? ” asked  the  negro,  looking  still  unconvinced. 

“ Of  wood,”  replied  Pencroft,  “ or  rather  of  bark.  I repeat, 
captain,  that  in  five  days  the  work  will  be  finished ! ” 

“ In  five  days,  then,  be  it,”  replied  the  engineer. 

“ But  till  that  time  we  must  be  very  watchful,”  said  Herbert. 
“Very  watchful  indeed,  my  friends,”  replied  Harding;  “and 
I beg  you  to  confine  your  hunting  excursions  to  the  neighbor- 
hood of  Granite  House.” 

The  dinner  ended  less  gaily  than  Pencroft  had  hoped. 

So,  then,  the  island  was,  or  had  been,  inhabited  by  others 
than  the  settlers.  Proved  as  it  was  by  the  incident  of  the  bullet, 
it  was  hereafter  an  unquestionable  fact,  arid  such  a discovery 
could  not  but  cause  great  uneasiness  amongst  the  colonists. 

Cyrus  Harding  and  Gideon  Spilett,  before  sleeping,  conversed 
long  about  the  matter.  They  asked  themselves  if  by  chance 


m 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


this  incident  might  not  have  some  connection  with  the  inex- 
plicable way  in  which  the  engineer  had  been  saved,  and  the 
other  peculiar  circumstances  which  had  struck  them  at  dif- 
ferent times.  However,  Cyrus  Harding,  after  having  discussed 
the  pros  and  cons  of  the  question,  ended  by  saying,— 

“In  short,  would  you  like  to  know  my  opinion,  nfy  dear 
Spilett?”  “Yes,  Cyrus.” 

“ Well,  then,  it  is  this : however  minutely  we  explore  the 
island,  we  shall  find  nothing.” 

The  next  day  Pencroft  set  to  work.  He  did  not  mean  to  build 
a boat  with  boards  and  planking,  but  simply  a flat-bottomed 
canoe,  which  would  be  well  suited  for  navigating  the  Mercy — 
above  all,  for  approaching  its  source,  where  the  water  would 
naturally  be  shallow.  Pieces  of  bark,  fastened  one  to  the  other, 
would  form  a light  boat;  and  in  case  of  natural  obstacles,  which 
would  render  a portage  necessary,  it  would  be  easily  carried. 
Pencroft  intended  to  secure  the  pieces  of  bark  by  means  of 
nails,  to  insure  the  canoe  being  water-tight. 

It  was  first  necessary  to  select  the  trees  which  would  afford 
a strong  and  supple  bark  for  the  work.  Now  the  last  storm 
had  brought  down  a number  of  large  birch-trees,  the  bark 
of  which  would  be  perfectly  suited  for  their  purpose.  Some  of 
these  trees  lay  on  the  ground,  and  they  had  only  to  he  barked, 
which  was  the  most  difficult  thing  of  all,  owing  to  the  im- 
perfect tools  which  the  settlers  possessed.  However,  they  over- 
came all  difficulties. 

Whilst  the  sailor,  seconded  by  the  engineer,  thus  occupied 
himself  without  losing  an  hour,  Gideon  Spilett  and  Herbert 
were  not  idle.  They  were  made  purveyors  to  the  colony.  The 
reporter  could  not  but  admire  the  boy,  who  had  acquired  great 
skill  in  handling  the  bow  and  spear.  Herbert  also  showed 
great  courage  and  much  of  that  presence  of  mind  which  may 
justly  be  called  “ the  reasoning  of  bravery.”  These  two  comr 
panions  of  the  chase,  remembering  Cyrus  Harding’s  recom- 
mendations, did  not  go  beyond  a radius  of  two  miles  round 
Granite  House;  but  the  borders  of  the  forest  furnished  a 
sufficient  tribute  of  agoutis,  capyaras,  kangaroos,  peccaries, 
etc.;  and,  if  the  result  from  the  traps  was  less  than  during 


THE  ABANDONED. 


235 


the  cold,  still  the  warren  yielded  its  accustomed  quota,  which 
might  have  fed  all  the  colony  in  Lincoln  Island. 

Often  during  these  excursions,  Herbert  talked  with  Gideon 
Spilett  on  the  incident  of  the  bullet,  and  the  deductions  which 
the  engineer  drew  from  it,  and  one  day— it  was  the  26th  of 
October— he  said,— 

“ But,  Mr.  Spilett,  do  you  not  think  it  very  extraordinary  that, 
if  any  castaways  have  landed  on  the  island,  they  have  not  yet 
shown  themselves  near  Granite  House?” 

“Very  astonishing  if  they  are  still  here,”  replied  the  reporter, 
“ but  not  astonishing  at  ail  if  they  are  here  no  longer ! ” 

“So  you  think  that  these  people  have  already  quitted  the 
island  ?”  returned  Herbert. 

“It  is  more  than  probable,  my  boy;  for,  if  their  stay  was 
prolonged,  and,  above  all  if  they  were  still  here,  some  acci- 
dent would  have  at  last  betrayed  their  presence.” 

“ But  if  they  were  able  to  go  away,”  observed  the  lad,  “ they 
Could  not  have  been  castaways.” 

“No,  Herbert;  or,  at  least,  they  were  what  might  be  called 
provisional  castaways.  It  is  very  possible  that  a storm  may  have 
driven  them  to  the  island  without  destroying  their  vessel,  and 
that,  the  storm  over,  they  went  away  again.” 

“ I must  acknowledge  one  thing,”  said  Herbert,  “it  is  that 
Captain  Harding  appears  rather  to  fear  than  desire  the  pres- 
ence of  human  beings  on  our  island.” 

“ In  short,”  responded  the  reporter,  “ there  are  only  Malays 
who  frequent  these  seas,  and  those  fellows  are  ruffians  which 
it  is  best  to  avoid.” 

“ It  is  not  impossible,  Mr.  Spilett,”  said  Herbert,  “ that  some 
day  or  other  we  may  find  traces  of  their  landing.” 

“ I do  not  say  no,  my  boy.  A deserted  camp— the  ashes  of  a 
fire  would  put  us  on  the  track,  and  this  is  what  we  will  look 
for  in  our  next  expedition.” 

The  day  on  which  the  hunters  spoke  thus,  they  were  in  a 
part  of  the  forest  near  the  Mercy,  remarkable  for  its  beautiful 
trees.  There,  among  others,  rose,  to  a height  of  nearly  two 
hundred  feet  above  the  ground,  some  of  the  superb  conifers 
t to  which*  in  New  Zealand,  the  natives  give  the  name  of  Kauria 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


“I  have  an  idea,  Mr.  Spilett,”  said  Herbert.  “If  I were  te 
climb  to  the  top  of  one  of  these  kauris,  I could  survey  the 
country  for  an  immense  distance  round.” 

“The  idea  is  good,”  replied  the  reporter;  “but  could  you 
climb  to  the  top  of  those  giants  ?” 

“ I can  at  least  try,”  replied  Herbert. 

The  light  and  active  boy  then  sprang  on  the  first  branches, 
the  arrangement  of  which  made  the  ascent  of  the  kauri  easy, 
and  in  a few  minutes  he  arrived  at  the  summit,  which  emerged 
from  the  immense  plain  of  verdure. 

From  this  elevated  situation  his  gaze  extended  over  all  the 
southern  portion  of  the  island,  from  Claw  Cape  on  the  south- 
east, to  Reptile  End  on  the  southwest.  To  the  northwest 
rose  Mount  Franklin,  which  concealed  a great  part  of  the 
horizon. 

But  Herbert,  from  the  height  of  his  observatory,  could  exam- 
ine all  the  yet  unknown  portion  of  the  island  which  might 
have  given  shelter  to  the  strangers  whose  presence  they 
suspected. 

The  lad  looked  attentively.  There  was  nothing  in  sight  on 
the  sea — not  a sail,  neither  on  the  horizon  nor  near  the 
island.  However,  as  a bank  of  trees  hid  the  shore,  it  was  pos- 
sible that  a vessel,  especially  if  deprived  of  her  masts,  might  lie 
close  to  the  land,  and  thus  be  invisible  to  Herbert. 

Neither  in  the  forests  of  the  Far  West  was  any  thing  to  be 
seen.  The  wood  formed  an  impenetrable  screen,  measuring 
several  square  miles,  without  a break  or  an  opening.  It  was 
impossible  even  to  follow  the  course  of  the  Mercy,  or  to  ascer- 
tain in  what  part  of  the  mountain  it  took  its  source.  Perhaps 
other  creeks  also  ran  towards  the  west,  but  they  could  not  be 
seen. 

But  at  last,  if  all  indication  of  an  encampment  escaped  Her- 
bert’s sight,  could  he  not  even  catch  a glimpse  of  smoke,  the 
faintest  trace  of  which  would  be  easily  discernible  in  the 
pure  atmosphere  ? 

For  an  instant  Herbert  thought  he  could  perceive  a slight 
smoke  in  the  west,  but  a more  attentive  examination  showed 
that  he  was  mistaken.  He  strained  his  eyes  in  every  direction, 


THE  ABANDONED. 


287 


and  his  sight  was  excellent.  No,  decidedly  there  was  nothing 
there. 

Herbert  descended  to  the  foot  of  the  kauri,  and  the  two 
sportsmen  returned  to  Granite  House.  There  Cyrus  Harding 
listened  to  the  lad’s  account,  shook  his  head  and  said  nothing. 
It  was  very  evident  that  no  decided  opinion  could  be  pro- 
nounced on  this  question  until  after  a complete  exploration  of 
the  island. 

Two  days  after— the  28th  of  October— another  incident  oc- 
curred, for  which  an  explanation  was  again  required. 

Whilst  strolling  along  the  shore,  about  two  miles  from 
Granite  House,  Herbert  and  Neb  were  fortunate  enough  to 
capture  a magnificent  specimen  of  the  order  of  Cheionia.  It 
was  a turtle  of  the  species  Midas,  the  edible  green  turtle,  so 
called  from  the  color  both  of  its  shell  and  fat. 

Herbert  caught  sight  of  this  turtle  as  it  was  crawling  among 
the  rocks  to  reach  the  sea. 

“Help,  Neb,  help ! ” he  cried. 

Neb  ran  up. 

“What  a fine  animal ! ” said  Neb:  “ but  how  are  we  to  catch 
it?” 

“ Nothing  is  easier,  Neb,”  replied  Herbert.  “We  have  only  to 
turn  the  turtle  on  its  back  and  it  can  not  possibly  get  away. 
Take  your  spear  and  do  as  I do.” 

The  reptile,  aware  of  danger,  had  retired  between  its  cara- 
pace and  plastron.  They  no  longer  saw  its  head  or  feet, 
and  it  was  motionless  as  a rock. 

Herbert  and  Neb  then  drove  their  sticks  underneath  the 
animal,  and  by  their  united  efforts  managed  without  diffi- 
culty to  turn  it  on  its  back.  The  turtle,  which  was  three  feet 
in  length,  would  have  at  least  weighed  four  hundred  pounds. 

“Capital ! ” cried  Neb;  “ this  is  something  which  will  rejoice 
friend  Pencroft’s  heart.” 

In  fact,  the  heart  of  friend  Pencroft  could  not  fail  to  be 
rejoiced,  for  the  flesh  of  the  turtle,  which  feeds  on  wrackgrass, 
is  extremely  savory.  At  this  moment  the  creature’s  head 
could  be  seen,  which  was  small,  fiat,  but  widened  behind  by 
the  large  temporal  fossse  hidden  under  the  long  roof. 


288 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


“ And  now,  what  shall  we  do  with  our  prize  ? ” said  KeU 
“We  can’t  drag® it  to  Granite  House  ! ” 

“ Leave  it  here,  since  it  can  not  turn  over,”  replied  Her- 
Dert,  “ and  we  will  come  back  with  the  cart  to  fetch  it  ” 

“ That  is  the  best  plan.” 

However,  for  greater  precaution,  Herbert  took  the  trouble, 
which  Neb  deemed  superfluous,  to  wedge  up  the  animal  with 
great  stones  ; after  which  the  two  hunters  returned  to  Granite 
House,  following  the  beach,  which  the  tide  had  left  uncovered. 
Herbert,  wishing  to  surpri  e Pencroft,  said  nothing  about  the 
“superb  specimen  of  a chelonian”  which  they  had  turned  over 
on  the  sand;  but,  two  hours  later,  he  and  Neb  returned  with 
the  cart  to  the  place  where  they  had  left  it.  The  “superb 
specimen  of  a chelonian  ” was  no  longer  there  ! 

Neb  and  Herbert  stared  at  each  other  first ; then  they  stared 
about  them.  It  was  just  at  this  spot  that  the  turtle  had  been 
left.  The  lad  even  found  the  stones  which  he  had  used,  and 
therefore  he  was  certain  of  not  being  mistaken. 

“Well!”  said  Neb,  “these  beasts  can  turn  themselves  over, 
then?” 

“It  appears  so,”  replied  Herbert,  who  could  not  under 
stand  it  at  all,  and  was  gazing  at  the  stones  scattered  on  the 
sand. 

“ Well,  Pencroft  will  be  disgusted  ! ” 

“ And  Captain  Harding  will  perhaps  be  very  perplexed  how 
to  explain  this  disappearance,”  thought  Herbert. 

“ Look  here,”  said  Neb,  who  wished  to  hide  his  ill-luck,  “ we 
won’t  speak  about  it.” 

“On  the  contrary,  Neb,  we  must  speak  about  it,”  replied 
Herbert. 

And  the  two,  taking  the  cart,  which  there  was  now  no  use 
for,  returned  to  Granite  House. 

Arrived  at  the  dockyard,  where  the  engineer  and  the  sailor 
were  working  together,  Herbert  recounted  what  had  hap- 
pened. 

“ Oh ! the  stupids ! ” cried  the  sailor,  “ to  have  let  at  least 
fifty  meals  escape ! ” 

“ But,  Pencroft,”  replied  Neb,  “ it  wasn’t  our  fault  that  the 


THE  ABANDONED. 


beast  got  away,  as  I tell  you,  we  had  turned  it  over  on  its 
back ! ” 

“Then  you  didn’t  turn  It  over  enough!”  returned  the 
obstinate  sailor. 

“ Not  enough  ! ” cried  Herbert. 

And  he  told  how  he  had  taken  care  to  wedge  up  the  turtle 
with  stones. 

“ It  is  a miracle,  then ! ” replied  Pencroft. 

“I  thought,  captain,”  said  Herbert,  “that turtles  once  placed 
on  their  backs,  could  not  regain  their  feet,  especially  when 
they  are  of  a large  size  ? ” 

“ That  is  true,  my  boy,”  replied  Cyrus  Harding. 

“ Then  how  did  it  manage  ?” 

“ At  what  distance  from  the  sea  did  you  leave  this  turtle  ? ” 
asked  the  engineer,  who,  having  suspended  his  work,  was 
reflecting  on  this  incident. 

“ Fifteen  feet  at  the  most,”  replied  Herbert. 

“ And  the  tide  was  low  at  the  time  ?” 

“ Yes,  captain.” 

“ Well,”  replied  the  engineer,  “ what  the  turtle  could  not  do 
on  the  sand  it  - might  have  been  able  to  do  in  the  water.  It 
turned  over  when  the  tide  overtook  it,  and  then  quietly 
returned  to  the  deep  sea.” 

“ Oh ! what  stupids  we  were  ! ” cried  Neb. 

“ That  is  precisely  what  I had  the  honor  of  telling  you 
before ! ” returned  the  sailor. 

Cyrus  Harding  had  given  this  explanation,  which,  no  doubt, 
was  admissible.  But  was  he  himself  convinced  of  the  accuracy 
of  this  explanation  ? It  can  not  be  said  that  he  was. 


CHAPTER  II 


FIRST  TRIAL  OF  THE  CANOE  — A WRECK  ON  THE  COAST  — 
TOWING  — FLOTSAM  POINT  — INVENTORY  OF  THE  CASE  l 
TOOLS,  WEAPONS,  INSTRUMENTS,  CLOTHES,  BOOKS,  UTENSILS — 
WHAT  PENCROFT  MISSES— THE  GOSPEL— A VERSE  FROM  THE 
SACRED  BOOK. 

On  the  9th  of  October  the  bark  canoe  was  entirely  finished. 
Pencroft  had  kept  his  promise,  and  a fight  boat,  the  shell  of 
which  was  joined  together  by  the  flexible  twigs  of  the 
cr^ jimba,  had  been  constructed  in  five  days.  A seat  in  the 
stern,  a second  seat  in  the  middle  to  preserve  the  equilibrium,  a 
third  seat  in  the  bows,  rowlocks  for  the  two  oars,  a scull  to 
steer  with,  completed  the  little  craft,  which  was  twelve  feet 
long,  and  did  not  weigh  more  than  200  pounds. 

The  operation  of  launching  it  was  extremely  simple.  The 
canoe  was  carried  to  the  beach  and  laid  on  the  sand  before 
Granite  House,  and  the  rising  tide  floated  it.  Pencroft,  who 
leapt  in  directly,  manoeuvred  it  with  the  scull  and  declared  it 
to  be  just  the  thing  for  the  purpose  to  which  they  wished  to 
put  it. 

“ Hurrah ! ” cried  the  sailor,  who  did  not  disdain  to  celebrate 
thus  his  own  triumph.  “ With  this  we  could  go  round—” 

“ The  world  ?”  asked  Gideon  Spilett. 

“ No,  the  island.  Some  stones  for  ballast,  a mast  and  a sail, 
which  the  captain  will  make  for  us  some  day,  and  we  shall  go 
splendidly ! Well,  captain— and  you,  Mr.  Spilett ; and  you, 
Herbert ; and  you,  Neb— aren’t  you  coming  to  try  our  new 
vessel  ? Come  along  I we  must  see  if  it  will  carry  all  five  of 
us!” 

This  was  certainly  a trial  which  ought  to  be  made.  Pencroft 
soon  brought  the  canoe  to  the  shore  by  a narrow  passage 

m 


THE  ABANDONED. 


241 


among  the  rocks,  and  it  was  agreed  that  they  should  make  a 
trial  of  the  boat  that  day  by  following  the  shore  as  far  as  the 
first  point  at  which  the  rocks  of  the  south  ended0 
As  they  embarked,  Neb  cried,— 

“ But  your  boat  leaks  rather,  Pencroft.” 

“ That’s  nothing,  Neb,”  replied  the  sailor  ; “ the  wood  wilt 
get  seasoned.  In  two  days  there  won’t  be  a single  leak,  and 
our  boat  will  have  no  more  water  in  her  than  there  is  in  the 
stomach  of  a drunkard.  Jump  in ! ” 

They  were  soon  all  seated,  and  Pencroft  shoved  off.  The 
weather  was  magnificent,  the  sea  as  calm  as  if  its  waters  were 
contained  within  the  narrow  limits  of  a lake.  Thus  the  boat 
could  proceed  with  as  much  security  as  if  it  was  ascending  the 
tranquil  current  of  the  Mercy. 

Neb  took  one  of  the  oars,  Herbert  the  other,  and  Pencroft 
remained  in  the  stern  in  order  to  use  the  scull. 

The  sailor  first  crossed  the  channel,  and  steered  close  to  the 
southern  point  of  the  islet.  A light  breeze  blew  from  the 
south.  No  roughness  was  found  either  in  the  channel  or  the 
green  sea.  A long  swell  which  the  canoe  scarcely  felt,  as  it 
was  heavily  laden,  rolled  regularly  over  the  surface  of  the 
water.  They  pulled  out  about  half  a mile  distant  from  the 
shore,  that  they  might  have  a good  view  of  Mount  Franklin. 

Pencroft  afterwards  returned  towards  the  mouth  of  the  river. 
The  boat  then  skirted  the  shoie,  which,  extending  to  the 
extreme  point,  hid  all.  Tadorn’s  Fens. 

1 This  point,  of  which  the  distance  was  increased  by  the  irreg- 
ularity of  the  coast,  was  nearly  three  miles  from  the  Mercy. 
The  settlers  resolved  to  go  to  its  extremity,  and  only  go  beyond 
it  as  much  as  was  necessary  to  take  a rapid  survey  of  the 
coast  as  far  as  Claw  Cape. 

The  canoe  followed  the  windings  of  the  shore,  avoiding  the 
rocks  which  fringed  it,  and  which  the  rising  tide  began  to 
cover.  The  cliff  gradually  sloped  away  from  the  mouth  of  the 
liver  to  the  point.  This  was  formed  of  granite  rocks,  capric- 
iously distributed,  very  different  from  the  cliff  at  Prospect 
Heights,  and  of  an  extremely  wild  aspect.  It  might  have  been 
said  that  an  immense  cartload  of  rocks  had  been  emptied  out 
IS 


m 


THU  LAKESIDE  EDITION, 


there.  There  was  no  vegetation  on  this  sharp  promontory; 
which  projected  two  miles  from  the  forest,  and  it  thus  repre- 
sented a giant’s  arm  stretched  out  from  a leafy  sleeve. 

The  canoe,  impelled  by  the  two  oars,  advanced  without  diffi- 
culty. Gideon  Spilett,  pencil  in  one  hand  and  note-book  in  the 
other,  sketched  the  coast  in  bold  strokes.  Neb,  Herbert,  and 
Pencroft  chatted,  whilst  examining  this  part  of  their  domain, 
which  was  new  to  them,  and,  in  proportion  as  the  canoe  pro- 
ceeded towards  the  south,  the  two  Mandible  Capes  appeared  to 
move,  and  surround  Union  Bay  more  closely. 

As  to  Cyrus  Harding,  he  did  not  speak;  he  simply  gazed,  and 
by  the  mistrust  which  his  look  expressed,  it  appeared  that 
he  was  examining  some  strange  country. 

In  the  meanwhile,  after  a voyage  of  three  quarters  of  an 
hour,  the  canoe  reached  the  extremity  of  the  point,  and  Pen- 
croft was  preparing  to  return  when  Herbert,  rising,  pointed  to 
a black  object,  saying, - 
"‘What  do  I see  down  there  on  the  beach  ? ” 

All  eyes  turned  towards  the  point  indicated. 

“ Why,”  said  the  reporter,  “ there  is  something,  It  looted  like 
part  of  a wreck  half  buried  in  the  sand.” 

“ Ah ! ” cried  Pencroft,  “ I see  what  it  is ! ” 

“What?”  asked  Neb. 

“ Barrels,  barrels,  which  perhaps  are  full,”  replied  the  sailor 
“ Pull  to  the  shore,  Pencroft ! ” said  Cyrus. 

A few  strokes  of  the  oar  brought  the  canoe  into  a little 
creek,  and  its  passengers  leapt  on  shore. 

Pencroft  was  not  mistaken.  Two  barrels  were  there,  half 
buried  in  the  sand,  but  still  firmly  attached  to  a large  chest, 
which,  sustained  by  them,  had  floated  to  the  moment  when  it 
stranded  on  the  beach. 

“There  has  been  a wreck,  then,  in  some  part  of  the  island,” 
said  Herbert. 

“ Evidently,”  replied  Spilett. 

“But  what’s  in  this  chest?  ” cried  Pencroft  with  very  natural 
impatience.  “ What’s  In  this  chest  ? It  is  shut  up,  and  noth- 
ing to  open  it  with  ! Well,  perhaps  a stone—” 

And  the  sailor,  raising  a heavy  block,  was  about  to  break  in 


THE  ABANDONED. 


248 


on©  of  the  sides  of  the  chest,  when  the  engineer  arrested  his 
hand. 

“Pen croft,”  said  he,  “can  you  restrain  your  impatience  for 
one  hour  only  ?” 

“But,  captain,  just  think!  Perhaps  there  is  every  thing  we 
want  in  there ! ” 

“We  shall  find  that  out,  Pencroft,”  replied  the  engineer; 
“ but  trust  to  me,  and  do  not  break  the  chest,  which  may  be 
useful  to  us.  We  must  convey  it  to  Granite  House,  where 
we  can  open  it  easily,  and  without  breaking  it.  It  is  quite 
prepared  for  a voyage ; and,  since  it  has  floated  here,  it  may 
just  as  well  float  to  the  mouth  of  the  river.” 

“ You  are  right,  captain,  and  I was  wrong,  as  usual,”  replied 
the  sailor. 

The  engineer’s  advice  was  good.  In  fact,  the  canoe  probably 
would  not  have  been  able  to  contain  the  articles  possibly  en- 
closed in  the  chest,  which  doubtless  was  heavy,  since  two  empty 
barrels  were  required  to  buoy  it  up.  It  was,  therefore,  much 
better  to  tow  it  to  the  beach  at  Granite  House. 

And  now,  whence  had  this  chest  come?  That  was  the  im- 
portant question.  Cyrus  Harding  and  his  companions  looked 
attentively  around  them,  and  examined  the  shore  for  several 
hundred  steps.  No  other  articles  or  pieces  of  week  could  be 
found.  Herbert  and  Neb  climbed  a high  rock  to  survey  the  sea, 
but  there  was  nothing  in  sight— neither  a dismasted  vessel  nor 
a ship  under  sail. 

However,  there  was  no  doubt  that  there  had  been  a wreck. 
Perhaps  this  incident  was  connected  with  that  of  the  bullet? 
Perhaps  strangers  had  landed  on  another  part  of  the  island? 
Perhaps  they  were  still  there?  But  the  thought  which  came 
naturally  to  the  settlers  was,  that  these  strangers  could  not 
be  Malay  pirates,  for  the  chest  was  evidently  of  American  or 
European  make. 

All  the  party  returned  to  the  chest,  which  was  of  an  unusually 
large  size.  It  was  made  of  oak  wood,  very  carefully  closed 
and  covered  with  a thick  hide,  which  was  secured  by  copper 
nails.  The  two  great  barrels,  hermetically  sealed,  but  which 
sounded  hollow  and  empty,  were  fastened  to  its  sides  by 


244 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


strong  ropes,  knotted  with  a skill  which  Pencroft  directly  pro- 
nonneed  sailors  alone  could  exhibit.  It  appeared  to  be  in  a 
perfect  state  of  preservation,  which  was  explained  by  the 
fact  that  it  had  stranded  on  a sandy  beach,  and  not  among 
rocks.  They  had  no  doubt  whatever,  on  examining  it  care- 
fully, that  it  had  not  been  long  in  the  water,  and  that  its 
arrival  on  this  coast  was  recent.  The  water  did  not  appear  to 
have  penetrated  to  the  inside,  and  the  articles  which  it  con- 
tained were  no  doubt  uninjured. 

It  was  evident  that  this  chest  had  been  thrown  overboard 
from  some  dismantled  vessel  driven  towards  the  island,  and 
that,  in  the  hope  that  it  would  reach  the  land,  where  they 
might  afterwards  find  it,  the  passengers  had  taken  the  pre- 
caution to  buoy  it  up  by  means  of  this  floating  apparatus. 

“ We  will  tow  this  chest  to  Granite  House,”  said  the  engi- 
neer, “where  we  can  make  an  inventory  of  its  contents;  then, 
if  we  discover  any  of  the  survivors  from  the  supposed  wreck, 
we  can  return  it  to  those  to  whom  it  belongs.  If  we  find  no 
one—” 

“ We  will  keep  it  for  ourselves ! ” cried  Pencroft.  “ But  what 
in  the  world  can  there  be  in  it  ? ” 

The  sea  was  already  approaching  the  chest,  and  the  high 
tide  would  evidently  float  it.  On3  of  the  ropes  which  fastened 
the  barrels  was  partly  unlashed  and  used  as  a cable  to  unite 
ihe  floating  apparatus  with  the  canoe.  Pencroft  and  Neb  then 
dug  away  the  sand  with  their  oars,  so  as  to  facilitate  the  moving 
of  the  chest,  towing  which  the  boat  soon  began  to  double  the 
point,  to  which  the  name  of  Flotsam  Point  was  given. 

The  chest  was  heavy,  and  the  barrels  were  scarcely  sufficient 
to  keep  it  above  water.  The  sailor  also  feared  every  instant 
that  it  would  get  loose  and  sink  to  the  bottom  of  the  sea.  But 
happily  his  fears  were  not  realized,  and  an  hour  and  a half 
after  they  set  out— all  that  time  had  been  taken  up  in  going  a 
distance  of  three  miles  — the  boat  touched  the  beach  below 
Granite  House. 

Canoe  and  chest  were  then  hauled  up  on  thfe  sand;  and  as 
the  tide  was  then  going  out,  they  were  soon  left  high  and  dry. 
Neb,  hurrying  home,  brought  back  some  tools  with  which  to 


THE  ABANDONED. 


247 


open  the  chest  in  such  a way  that  it  might  be  injured  as  little 
as  possible,  and  they  proceeded  to  its  inventory.  Peneroft  did 
not  try  to  hide  that  he  was  greatly  excited. 

The  sailor  began  by  detaching  the  two  barrels,  which,  being 
in  good  condition,  would  of  course  be  of  use.  Then  the  locks 
were  forced  with  a cold  chisel  and  hammer,  and  the  lid  thrown 
back.  A second  casing  of  zinc  lined  the  interior  of  the  chest, 
which  had  been  evidently  arranged  that  the  articles  which  it 
enclosed  might  under  any  circumstances  be  sheltered  from 
damp. 

“Oh !”  cried  Neb,  “suppose  it’s  jam ! ” 

“I  hope  not,”  replied  the  reporter. 

“ If  only  there  was—”  said  the  sailor  in  a low  voice. 

“What?”  asked  Neb,  who  overheard  him. 

“ Nothing!” 

The  covering  of  zinc  was  torn  off  and  thrown  back  over  the 
sides  of  the  chest,  and  by  degrees  numerous  articles  of  very 
varied  character  were  produced  and  strewn  about  on  the  sand. 
At  each  new  object  Peneroft  uttered  fresh  hurrahs,  Herbert 
clapped  his  hands,  and  Neb  danced— like  a nigger.  There  were 
books  which  made  Herbert  wild  with  joy,  and  cooking  utensils 
which  Neb  covered  with  kisses ! 

In  short,  the  colonists  had  reason  to  be  extremely  satisfied,  for 
this  chest  contained  tools,  weapons, instruments,  clothes,  books; 
and  this  is  the  exact  list  of  them  as  stated  in  Gideon  Spilett’s 
note-book 

Tools : — 3 knives  with  several  blades,  2 woodmen’s  axes, 
2 carpenter’s  hatchets,  8 planes,  2 adzes,  1 twibil  or  mattock, 
6 chisels,  2 files,  3 hammers,  3 gimlets,  2 augers,  10  bags 
of  nails  and  screws,  3 saws  of  different  sizes,  2 boxes  of 
needles. 

Weapons  2 flint-lock  guns,  2 for  percussion  caps,  2 breech- 
loader carbines,  5 boarding  autlasses,  4 sabers,  2 barrels  of 
powder,  each  containing  twenty-five  pounds;  12  boxes  of  per- 
cussion caps. 

Instruments  : — 1 sextant,  1 double  opera-glass,  1 telescope, 
1 box  of  mathematical  instruments,  1 mariner’s  compass,  1 
Fahrenheit  thermometer,  1 aneroid  barometer,  1 box  contain- 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


Ing  a photographic  apparatus,  object-glass,  plates,  chemicals, 
etc. 

Clothes  : — 2 dozen  shirts  of  a peculiar  material  resembling 
wool,  but  evidently  of  vegetable  origin;  3' dozen  stockings  of 
the  same  material. 

Utensils : — 1 iron  pot,  6 copper  saucepans,  3 iron  dishes,  10 
metal  plates,  2 kettles,  1 portable  stove,  6 table-knives. 

Books  : — 1 Bible,  1 atlas,  1 dictionary  of  the  different  Poly- 
nesian idioms,  1 dictionary  of  natural  science,  in  six  volumes; 
3 reams  of  white  paper,  2 books  with  blank  pages. 

“ It  must  be  allowed,”  said  the  reporter,  after  the  inventory 
had  been  made,  “that  the  owner  of  this  chest  was  a practical 
man  ! Tools,  weapons,  instruments,  clothes,  utensils,  books— 
nothing  is  wanting ! It  might  really  be  said  that  he  expected 
to  be  wrecked,  and  had  prepared  for  it  beforehand.” 

“Nothing  is  wanting,  indeed,”  murmured  Cyrus  Harding 
thoughtfully. 

“ And  for  a certainty,”  added  Herbert,  “ the  vessel  which 
carried  this  chest  and  its  owner  was  not  a Malay  pirate  ! ” 

“ Unless,”  said  Pencrof t,  “ the  owner  had  been  taken  prisoner 
by  pirates—” 

“ That  is  not  admissible,”  replied  the  reporter.  “ It  is  more 
probable  that  an  American  or  European  vessel  has  been  driven 
into  this  quarter,  and  that  her  passengers,  wishing  to  save 
necessaries  at  least,  prepared  this  chest  and  threw  it  over- 
board.” 

“ Is  that  your  opinion,  captain  ? ” asked  Herbert. 

“ Yes,  my  boy,”  replied  the  engineer,  “ that  may  have  been 
the  case.  It  is  possible  that  at  the  moment,  or  in  expectation 
of  a wreck,  they  collected  into  this  chest  different  articles  of 
the  greatest  use  in  hopes  of  finding  it  again  on  the  coast—” 

“ Even  the  photographic  box ! ” exclaimed  the  sailor  incredu- 
lously. 

“ As  to  that  apparatus,”  replied  Harding,  “ I do  not  quite  see 
the  use  of  it ; and  a more  complete  supply  of  clothes  or  more 
abundant  ammunition  would  have  been  more  valuable  to  us  as 
well  as  to  any  other  castaways ! ” 

“ But  isn’t  there  any  mark  or  direction  on  these  instruments, 


THE  ABANDONED. 


m 


tools,  or  books,  which  would  tell  us  something  about  them  ?* 
asked  Gideon  Spilett. 

That  might  be  ascertained.  Each  article  was  carefully 
examined,  especially  the  books,  instruments  and  weapons. 
Neither  the  weapons  nor  the  instruments,  contrary  to  the 
usual  custom,  bore  the  name  of  the  maker;  they  were,  besides, 
in  a perfect  state,  and  did  not  appear  to  have  been  used.  The 
same  peculiarity  marked  the  tools  and  utensils;  all  were  new, 
which  proved  that  the  articles  had  not  been  taken  by  chance 
and  thrown  into  the  chest,  but,  on  the  contrary,  that  the 
choice  of  the  things  had  been  well  considered  and  arranged 
with  care.  This  was  also  indicated  by  the  second  case  of 
metal  which  had  preserved  them  from  damp,  and  which  could 
not  have  been  soldered  in  a moment  of  haste. 

As  to  the  dictionaries  of  natural  science  and  Polynesian 
idioms,  both  were  English  ; but  they  neither  bore  the  name  of 
the  publisher  nor  the  date  of  publication. 

The  same  with  the  Bible  printed  in  English,  in  quarto, 
Remarkable  in  a typographical  point  of  view,  and  which 
appeared  to  have  been  often  used. 

The  atlas  was  a magnificent  work,  comprising  maps  of  every 
country  in  the  world,  and  several  planispheres  arranged  upon 
Mercator’s  projection,  and  of  which  the  nomenclature  was  in 
French  — but  which  also  bore  neither  date  nor  name  of 
publisher. 

There  was  nothing,  therefore,  on  these  different  articles  by 
which  they  could  be  traced,  and  nothing  consequently  of  a 
nature  to  show  the  nationality  of  the  vessel  which  must  have 
recently  passed  these  shores. 

But,  wherever  the  chest  might  have  come  from,  it  was  a 
treasure  to  the  settlers  on  Lincoln  Island.  Till  then,  by  mak- 
ing use  of  the  productions  of  nature,  they  had  created  every 
thing  for  themselves,  and,  thanks  to  their  intelligence,  they 
had  managed  without  difficulty.  But  did  it  not  appear  as  if 
Providence  had  wished  to  reward  them  by  sending  them  these 
productions  of  human  industry  ? Their  thanks  rose  unani* 
mously  to  Heaven. 

However,  one  of  them  was  not  quite  satisfied  : it  was  Pen* 


250 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


croft.  It  appeared  that  the  chest  did  not  contain  something 
which  he  evidently  held  in  great  esteem,  for  in  proportion  as 
they  approached  the  bottom  of  the  box,  his  hurrahs  diminished 
in  heartiness,  and,  the  inventory  finished,  he  was  heard  to 
mutter  these  words 

“ That’s  all  very  fine,  but  you  can  see  that  there  is  nothing 
for  me  in  that  box ! ” 

This  led  Neb  to  say,— 

“Why,  friend  Pencroft,  what  more  do  you  expect  ?” 

“Half  a pound  of  tobacco,”  replied  Pencroft  seriously,  “and 
nothing  would  have  been  wanting  to  complete  my  happiness  !” 
No  one  could  help  laughing  at  this  speech  of  the  sailor’s.  , 
But  the  result  of  this  discovery  of  the  chest  was,  that  it  was 
now  more  than  ever  necessary  to  explore  the  island  thor- 
oughly. It  was  therefore  agreed  that  the  next  morning  at 
break  of  day  they  should  set  out,  by  ascending  the  Mercy  so  as 
to  reach  the  western  shore.  If  any  castaways  had  landed  on 
the  coast,  it  was  to  be  feared  they  were  without  resources,  and 
it  was  therefore  the  more  necessary  to  carry  help  to  them 
without  delay. 

During  the  day  the  different  articles  were  carried  to  Granite 
House,  where  they  were  methodically  arranged  in  the  great  hall 
This  day — the  29th  of  October— happened  to  be  a Sunday, 
and,  before  going  to  bed,  Herbert  asked  the  engineer  if  he 
would  not  read  them  something  from  the  Gospel. 

“ Willingly,”  replied  Cyrus  Harding. 

He  took  the  sacred  volume,  and  was  about  to  open  it,  when 
Pencroft  stopped  him,  saying,— 

“ Captain,  I am  superstitious.  Open  at  random  and  read  the 
first  verse  which  your  eye  falls  upon.  We  will  see  if  it  applies 
to  our  situation.” 

Cyrus  Harding  smiled  at  the  sailor’s  idea,  and,  yielding  to  his 
wish,  he  opened  exactly  at  a place  where  the  leaves  were 
separated  by  a marker.  Immediately  his  eyes  were  attracted  by 
a cross  which,  made  with  a pencil,  was  placed  against  the 
eighth  verse  of  the  seventh  chapter  of  the  Gospel  of  St.  Matthew. 
He  read  the  verse,  which  was  this  : “ For  every  one  that  asketh 
receiveth;  and  he  that  seeketh  findeth,” 


CHAPTER  III, 


TSH  START— THE  RISING  TIDE— ELMS  AND  DIFFERENT  PLANTS 
—THE  JACAMAR  — ASPECT  OF  THE  FOREST  — GIGANTIC 
EUCALYPTI— THE  REASON  THEY  ARE  CALLED  “FEVER  TREES ” 
— TROOPS  OF  MONKEYS— A WATER-FALL— THE  NIGHT  ENCAMP- 
MENT. 

The  next  day,  the  30th  of  October,  all  was  ready  for  the  pro- 
posed exploring  expedition,  which  recent  events  had  rendered 
so  necessary.  In  fact,  things  had  so  come  about  that  the  set- 
tlers in  Lincoln  Island  no  longer  needed  help  for  themselves, 
but  were  even  able  to  carry  it  to  others. 

It  was  therefore  agreed  that  they  should  ascend  the  Mercy  as 
far  as  the  river  was  navigable.  A great  part  of  the  distance 
would  thus  be  traversed  without  fatigue,  and  the  explorers 
could  transport  their  provisions  and  arms  to  an  advanced  point 
in  the  west  of  the  island. 

It  was  necessary  to  think  not  only  of  the  things  which  they 
should  take  with  them,  but  also  of  those  which  they  might 
have  by  chance  to  bring  back  to  Granite  House.  If  there  had 
been  a wreck  on  the  coast,  as  was  supposed,  there  would  be 
many  things  cast  up,  which  would  be  lawfully  their  prizes. 
In  the  event  of  this,  the  cart  would  have  been  of  more  use  than 
the  light  canoe,  but  it  was  heavy  and  clumsy  to  drag,  and 
therefore  more  difficult  to  use  : this  led  Pencroft  to  express  his 
regret  that  the  chest  had  not  contained,  besides  “his  half- 
pound  of  tobacco,”  a pair  of  strong  New  Jersey  horses,  which 
would  have  been  very  useful  to  the  colony ! 

The  provisions,  which  Neb  had  already  packed  up,  consisted 
of  a store  of  meat  and  of  several  gallons  of  beer,  that  is  to  say, 
enough  to  sustain  them  for  three  days,  the  time  which  Harding 
assigned  for  the  expedition.  They  hoped  besides  to  supply 

251 


252 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


themselves  on  the  road,  and  Neb  took  care  not  to  forget  the 
portable  stove. 

The  only  tools  the  settlers  took  were  the  two  woodmen’s 
axes,  which  they  could  use  to  cut  a path  through  the  thick 
forests,  as  also  the  instruments,  the  telescope  and  pocket-com- 
pass. 

For  weapons  they  selected  the  two  flint-lock  guns,  which 
were  likely  to  be  more  useful  to  them  than  the  percussion 
fowling-pieces,  the  first  only  requiring  flints  which  could  be 
easily  replaced,  and  the  latter  requiring  fulminating  caps,  a 
frequent  use  of  which  would  soon  exhaust  their  limited  stock. 
However,  they  took  also  one  of  the  carbines  and  some  cart- 
ridges. As  to  the  powder,  of  which  there  was  about  fifty 
pounds  in  the  barrel,  a small  supply  of  it  had  to  be  taken, 
but  the  engineer  hoped  to  manufacture  an  explosive  sub- 
stance which  would  allow  them  to  husband  it.  To  the  fire- 
arms were  added  the  five  cutlasses  well  sheathed  in  leather, 
and,  thus  supplied,  the  settlers  could  venture  into  the  vast 
forest  with  some  chance  of  success. 

It  is  useless  to  add  that  Pencroft,  Herbert,  and  Neb,  thus 
armed,  were  at  the  summit  of  their  happiness,  although  Cyrus 
Harding  made  them  promise  not  to  fire  a shot  unless  it  was 
necessary. 

At  six  in  the  morning  the  canoe  put  off  from  the  shore 
all  had  embarked,  including  Top,  and  they  proceeded  to  the 
mouth  of  the  Mercy. 

The  tide  had  begun  to  come  up  half  an  hour  before.  For 
several  hours,  therefore,  there  would  be  a current,  which  it  was 
well  to  profit  by,  for  later  the  ebb  would  make  it  difficult  to 
ascend  the  river.  The  tide  was  already  strong,  for  in  three 
days  the  moon  would  be  full,  and  it  was  enough  to  keep  the 
boat  in  the  center  of  the  current,  where  it  floated  swiftly 
along  between  the  high  banks  without  its  being  necessary  to 
increase  its  speed  by  the  aid  of  the  oars.  In  a few  minutes 
the  explorers  arrived  at  the  angle  formed  by  the  Mercy,  and 
exactly  at  the  place  where,  seven  months  before,  Pencroft  had 
made  his  first  raft  of  wood.  After  this  sudden  angle  the  rivei 
widened  and  flowed  under  the  shade  of  great  evergreen  firs0 


THE  ABANDONED. 


25$ 


The  aspect  of  the  hanks  was  magnificent.  Cyrus  Harding 
and  his  companions  could  not  but  admire  the  lovely  effects  so 
easily  produced  by  nature  with  water  and  trees.  As  they 
advanced  the  forest  element  diminished.  On  the  right  bank  of 
the  river  grew  magnificent  specimens  of  the  ulmacese  tribe, 
the  precious  elm,  so  valuable  to  builders,  and  which  withstands 
well  the  action  of  water.  Then  there  were  numerous  groups 
belonging  to  the  same  family,  amongst  others  one  in  particular, 
the  fruit  of  which  produces  a very  useful  oil.  Further  on, 
Herbert  remarked  the  lardizabala,  a twining  shrub  which, 
when  bruised  in  water,  furnishes  excellent  cordage  ; and  two 
er  three  ebony  trees  of  a beautiful  black,  crossed  with  capric- 
ious veins. 

From  time  to  time,  in  certain  places  where  the  landing  was 
easy,  the  canoe  was  stopped,  when  Gideon  Spile tt,  Herbert  and 
Pencroft,  their  guns  in  their  hands,  and  preceded  by  Top, 
jumped  on  shore.  Without  expecting  game,  some  useful 
plant  might  be  met  with,  and  the  young  naturalist  was 
delighted  with  discovering  a sort  of  wild  spinage,  belonging  to 
the  order  of  chenopodiaceae,  and  numerous  specimens  of 
cruciferae,  belonging  to  the  cabbage  tribe,  which  it  would  cer- 
tainly be  possible  to  cultivate  by  transplanting.  There  were 
cresses,  horse-radish,  turnips,  and  lastly,  little  branching  hairy 
stalks,  scarcely  more  than  three  feet  high,  which  produced 
brownish  grains. 

“Do  you  know  what  this  plant  is?”  asked  Herbert  of  the 
sailor. 

“ Tobacco !”  cried  Pencroft,  who  evidently  had  never  seen  his 
favorite  plant  except  in  the  bowl  of  his  pipe. 

“ No,  Pencroft,”  replied  Herbert ; “ this  is  not  tobacco,  it  is 
mustard.” 

“ Mustard  be  hanged  1 ” returned  the  sailor ; “ but  if  by 
chance  you  happen  to  come  across  a tobacco-plant,  my  boy. 
pray  don’t  scorn  that ! ” 

“ We  shall  find  it  some  day ! ‘s'  said  Gideon  Spilett. 

“ Well,”  exclaimed  Pencroft,  “ when  the  day  comes,  I do  not 
know  what  more  will  be  wanting  in  our  island  ! ” 

These  different  plants,  which  had  been  carefully  rooted  up, 


254 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


were  carried  to  the  canoe,  where  Cyrus  Harding  had  remained 
buried  in  thought. 

The  reporter,  Herbert  and  Pencroft  in  this  manner  frequently 
disembarked,  sometimes  on  the  right  bank,  sometimes  on  the 
left  bank  of  the  Mercy. 

The  latter  was  less  abrupt,  but  the  former  more  wooded. 
The  engineer  ascertained  by  consulting  his  pocket  compass 
that  the  direction  of  the  river  from  the  first  turn  was  obviously 
southwest  and  northeast,  and  nearly  straight  for  a length 
of  about  three  miles.  But  it  was  to  be  supposed  that  this  direc- 
tion changed  beyond  that  point,  and  that  the  Mercy  continued 
to  the  northwest  towards  the  spurs  of  Mount  Franklin,  among 
which  the  river  rose. 

During  one  of  these  excursions,  Gideon  Spilett  managed  to 
get  hold  of  two  couples  of  living  gallinacese.  They  were  birds 
with  long,  thin  beaks,  lengthened  necks,  short  wings,  and 
without  any  appearance  of  a tail.  Herbert  rightly  gave  them 
the  name  of  tinamons,  and  it  was  resolved  that  they  should  be 
the  first  tenants  of  their  future  poultry-yard. 

But  till  then  the  guns  had  not  spoken,  and  the  first  report 
Which  awoke  the  echoes  of  the  forest  of  the  Far  West  was 
provoked  by  the  appearance  of  a beautiful  bird,  resembling  the 
kingfisher. 

“ I recognize  him ! ” cried  Pencroft,  and  it  seemed  as  if  his 
gun  went  off  by  itself. 

“ What  do  you  recognize  ? ” asked  the  reporter. 

“ The  bird  which  escaped  us  on  our  first  excursion,  and  from 
which  we  gave  the  name  to  that  part  of  the  forest.” 

“ A jacamar ! ” cried  Herbert. 

It  was  indeed  a jacamar,  of  which  the  plumage  shines  with  a 
metallic  luster.  A shot  brought  it  to  the  ground,  and  Top  car- 
ried it  to  the  canoe.  At  the  same  time  half  a dozen  lories 
were  brought  down.  The  lory  is  of  the  size  of  a pigeon,  the 
plumage  dashed  with  green,  part  of  the  wings  with  crimson, 
and  its  crest  bordered  with  white.  To  the  young  boy  belonged 
the  honor  of  this  shot,  and  he  was  proud  enough  of  it.  Lories 
are  better  food  than  the  jacamar,  the  flesh  of  which  is  rather 
tough,  but  it  was  difficult  to  persuade  Pencroft  that  he  had  not 


abandoned. 


m 


killed  the  king  of  eatable  birds.  It  was  ten  o’clock  in  the 
morning  when  the  canoe  reached  the  second  angle  of  the 
Mercy,  nearly  five  miles  from  its  mouth.  Here  a halt  was 
made  for  breakfast  under  the  shade  of  some  splendid  trees. 
The  river  still  measured  from  sixty  to  seventy  feet  in  breadth, 
and  its  bed  from  five  to  six  feet  in  depth.  The  engineer  had 
observed  that  it  was  increased  by  numerous  affluents,  but  they 
were  unnavigable,  being  pimply  little  streams.  As  to  the 
forest,  including  Jacamar  Wood,  as  well  as  the  forests  of  the 
Far  West,  it  extended  as  far  as  the  eye  could  reach.  In  no 
place,  either  in  the  depths  of  the  forest  or  under  the  trees  on 
the  banks  of  the  Mercy,  was  the  presence  of  man  revealed. 
The  explorers  could  not  discover  one  suspicious  trace.  It  was 
evident  that  the  woodman’s  axe  had  never  touched  these  trees, 
that  the  pioneer’s  knife  had  never  severed  the  creepers  hang- 
ing from  one  trunk  to  another  in  the  midst  of  tangled  brush- 
wood and  long  grass.  If  castaways  had  landed  on  the  island, 
they  could  not  have  yet  quitted  the  shore,  and  it  was  not  in 
the  woods  that  the  survivors  of  the  supposed  shipwreck  should 
be  should  be  sought. 

The  engineer  therefore  manifested  some  impatience  to  reach 
the  western  coast  of  Lincoln  Island,  which  was  at  least  five 
miles  distant  according  to  his  estimation. 

The  voyage  was  continued,  and  as  the  Mercy  appeared  to 
flow  not  towards  the  shore,  but  rather  towards  Mount  Frank- 
lin, it  was  decided  that  they  should  use  the  boat  as  long  as 
there  was  enough  water  under  its  keel  to  float  it.  It  was  both 
fatigue  spared  and  time  gained,  for  they  would  Lave  been 
obliged  to  cut  a path  through  the  thick  wood  with  their  axes. 
But  soon  the  flow  completely  failed  them,  either  the  tide  wa3 
going  down,  and  it  was  about  the  hour,  or  it  could  no  longer 
be  felt  at  this  distance  from  the  mouth  of  the  Mercy.  They 
had  therefore  to  make  use  of  the  oars,  Herbert  and  Neb  each 
took  one,  and  Pencrof t took  the  scull.  The  forest  soon  became 
less  dense,  the  trees  grew  further  apart  and  often  quite  isolated. 
But  the  further  they  were  from  each  other  the  more  magnifi- 
cent they  appeared,  profiting,  as  they  did,  by  the  free  pure 
air  which  circulated  around  them. 


256 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


What  splendid  specimens  of  the  Flora  of  tMs  latitude ! Cer- 
tainly the';r  presence  would  have  been  enough  for  a botanist 
to  name  without  hesitation  the  parallel  which  traversed 
Lincoln  Island. 

64  Eucalypti ! ” cried  Herbert. 

They  were,  in  fact,  those  splendid  trees,  the  giants  of  the 
extra-tropical  zone,  the  congeners  of  the  Australian  and 
New  Zealand  eucalyptus,  both  situated  under  the  same  lati- 
tude as  Lincoln  Island.  Some  rose  to  a height  of  two  hun- 
dred feet.  Their  trunks  at  the  base  measured  twenty  feet  in 
circumference,  and  their  bark  was  covered  by  a net  work  of 
furrows  containing  a red,  sweet-smelling  gum.  Nothing  is 
more  wonderful  or  more  singular  than  those  enormous  speci- 
mens of  the  order  of  the  myrtacese,  with  their  leaves  placed 
vertically  and  not  horizontally,  so  that  an  edge  and  not  a sur- 
face looks  upwards,  the  effect  being  that  the  sun’s  rays  pene- 
trate more  freely  among  the  trees. 

The  ground  at  the  foot  of  the  eucalypti  was  carpeted  with 
grass,  and  from  the  bushes  escaped  flights  of  little  birds,  which 
glittered  in  the  sunlight  like  winged  rubies. 

44  These  are  something  like  trees ! ” cried  Neb  ; 44  but  are 
they  good  for  any  thing  ? ” 

“Pooh!”  replied  Pencroft.  44  Of  course  there  are  vegetable 
giants  as  well  as  human  giants,  and  they  are  no  good,  except  to 
show  themselves  at  fairs ! ” 

44 1 think  that  you  are  mistaken,  Pencroft,”  replied  Gideon 
Spilett, 44  and  that  the  wood  of  the  eucalyptus  has  begun  to  be 
very  advantageously  employed  in  cabinet-making.” 

44  And  I may  add,”  said  Herbert, 44  that  the  eucalyptus  belongs 
to  a family  which  comprises  many  useful  members  ; the  guava 
tree,  from  whose  fruit  guava  jelly  is  made  ; the  clove- tree, 
which  produces  the  spice  ; the  pomegranate-tree,  which  bears 
the  pomegranates;  th  Eugeacia  Caulifiora,  the  fruit  of  which 
is  used  in  making  a t lerable  wine  ; the  Ugui  myrtle,  which 
contains  an  excellent  alcoholic  liquor;  the  Caryophyllus 
myrtle,  of  which  the  bark  forms  an  esteemed  cinnamon  ; 
the  Eugenia  Pimenta,  from  whence  comes  Jamaica  pepper ; 
the  common  myrtle,  from  whose  buds  and  berries  spice  is  some* 


THE  ABANDONED. 


m 


times  made  ; the  Eucalyptus  manifera,  which  yields  a sweet 
sort  of  manna;  the  Guinea  Eucalyptus,  the  sap  of  which  is 
transformed  into  beer  b T fermentation;  in  short,  all  those  trees 
known  under  the  name  of  gum-trees  or  iron-bark  trees  in 
Australia,  belong  to  this  family  of  the  myrtaceae,  which  con- 
tains forty-six  genera  and  thirteen  hundred  species ! ” 

The  lad  was  allowed  to  run  on,  and  he  delivered  his  little 
botanical  lecture  with  great  animation.  Cyrus " Harding 
listened  smiling,  and  Pencroft  with  an  indescribable  feeling 
of  pride. 

“Very  good,  Herbert,”  replied  Pencroft,  “but  I could  swear 
that  all  those  us  ful  specimens  you  have  ju3t  told  us  about 
are  none  of  them  giants  like  these  ! ” 

“ That  is  true,  Pencroft.” 

“ That  supports  what  I said,”  returned  the  sailor,  “ namely, 
that  these  giants  are  good  for  nothing ! ” 

“ There  you  are  wrong,  Pencroft,”  said  the  engineer  ; “ these 
gigantic  eucalypti,  which  shelter  us,  are  good  for  something.” 

“ And  what  is  that  ? ” 

“To  render  the  countries  which  they  inhabit  healthy.  Do 
you  know  what  they  are  called  in  Australia  and  New  Zealand?’7 
“ No,  captain.” 

“ They  are  called  ‘ fever  trees.’  ” 

“ Because  they  give  fevers  ? ” 

“ No,  because  they  prevent  them  ! ” 

“ Good.  I must  note  that,”  said  the  reporter. 

“Note  it  then,  my  dear  Spilett;  for  it  appears  proved  that 
the  presence  of  the  eucalyptus  is  enough  to  neutralize  miasmas. 
This  natural  antidote  has  been  tried  in  certain  countries  in 
the  middle  of  Europe  and  the  North  of  Africa,  where  the  soil 
was  absolutely  unhealthy,  and  the  sanitary  condition  of  the 
inhabitants  has  been  gradually  ameliorated.  No  more  inter- 
mittent fevers  prevail  in  the  regions  now  covered  with  forests 
of  the  myrtacese.  This  fact  is  now  beyond  doubt,  and  it  is  a 
happy  circumstance  for  us  settlers,  in  Lincoln  Island.” 

“Ah ! what  an  Island  ! What  a blessed  island  ! ” cried  Pen- 
croft. “ I tell  you,  it  wants  nothing— unless  it  is—” 

“That  will  come,  Pencroft,  that  will  be  found,”  replied  the 
17 


258 


THE  LAKESIM  I^KlTON. 


engineer;  “but  now  we  must  contone  our  voyage  and  pusto 
on  as  far  as  the  river  will  carry  our  boat ! ” 

The  exploration  was  therefore  continued  for  another  two 
miles  in  the  midst  of  country  covered  with  eucalypti,  which 
predominated  in  the  woods  of  this  portion  of  the  island.  The 
space  which  they  occupied  extended  as  far  as  the  eye  could 
reach  on  each  side  of  the  Mercy,  which  wound  along  between 
high  green  banks.  The  bed  was  often  obstructed  by  long 
weeds,  and  even  by  pointed  rocks,  which  rendered  the  naviga- 
tion very  difficult.  The  action  of  the  oars  was  ^prevented,  and 
Pencroft  was  obliged  to  push  with  a pole.  They  found  also 
that  the  water  was  becoming  shallower  and  shallower,  and 
that  the  canoe  must  soon  stop.  The  sun  was  already  sinking 
towards  the  horizon,  and  the  trees  threw  long  shadows  on  the 
ground.  Cyrus  Harding,  seeing  that  he  could  not  hope  to 
reach  the  western  coast  of  the  island  in  one  journey,  resolved 
to  camp  at  the  place  where  any  further  navigation  was  pre- 
vented by  want  of  water.  He  calculated  that  they  were  still 
five  or  six  miles  from  the  coast,  and  this  distance  was  too  great 
for  them  to  attempt  traversing  during  the  night  in  the  midst  of 
unknown  woods. 

The  boat  was  pushed  on  through  the  forest,  which  gradually 
became  thicker  again,  and  appeared  also  to  have  more  in- 
habitants; for  if  the  eyes  of  the  sailor  did  not  deceive  him,  he 
thought  he  saw  bands  of  monkeys  springing  among  the 
trees.  Sometimes  even  two  or  three  of  these  animals  stopped 
at  a little  distance  from  the  canoe  and  gazed  at  the  settlers 
without  manifesting  any  terror,  as  if,  seeing  men  for  the  first 
time,  they  had  not  yet  learned  to  fear  them.  It  would  have 
been  easy  to  bring  down  one  of  these  quadrumani  with  a gun- 
shot, and  Pencroft  was  greatly  tempted  to  fire,  but  Harding 
opposed  so  useless  a massacre.  This  was  prudent,  for  the 
monkeys,  or  apes  rather,  appearing  to  be  very  powerful  and 
extremely  active,  it  was  useless  to  provoke  an  unnecessary 
aggression,  and  the  creatures  might,  ignorant  of  the  power 
of  the  explorers’  fire-arms,  have  attacked  them.  It  is  true  that 
the  sailor  considered  the  monkeys  from  a purely  alimentary 
point  of  view,  for  those  animals  which  are  herbivorous 


THE  ABANDONEE. 


m 


make  very  excellent  game;  but  since  they  had  an  abundant 
supply  of  provisions,  it  was  a pity  to  waste  their  ammunition. 

Towards  four  o’clock,  the  navigation  of  the  Mercy  became 
exceedingly  difficult,  for  its  course  was  obstructed  by  aquatic 
plants  and  rocks.  The  banks  rose  higher  and  higher,  and 
already  they  were  approaching  the  spurs  of  Mount  Franklin. 
The  source  could  not  be  far  off,  since  it  was  fed  by  the  water 
from  the  southern  slopes  of  the  mountain. 

“In  a quarter  of  an  hour,”  said  the  sailor,  “we  shall  be 
obliged  to  stop,  captain.” 

“ Very  well,  we  will  stop,  Pencroft,  and  we  will  make  our 
encampment  for  the  night.” 

“ At  what  distance  are  we  from  Granite  House  ? ” asked 
Herbert. 

“ About  seven  miles,”  said  the  engineer,  “ taking  into  calcula- 
tion, however,  the  detours  of  the  river,  which  has  carried  us 
to  the  northwest.” 

“ Shall  we  go  on?  ” asked  the  reporter. 

“ Yes,  as  long  as  we  can,”  replied  Cyrus  Harding.  “ To-mor- 
row, at  break  of  day,  we  will  leave  the  canoe,  and  in  two 
hours  I hope  we  shall  cross  the  distance  which  separates  us 
from  the  coast,  and  then  we  shall  have  the  whole  day  in 
which  to  explore  the  shore.” 

“Go-ahead ! ” replied  Pencroft. 

But  soon  the  boat  grated  on  the  stony  bottom  of  the  river, 
which  tfas  now  not  more  than  twenty  feet  in  breadth.  The 
trees  met  like  a bower  overhead,  and  caused  a half-darkness. 
They  also  heard  the  noise  of  a waterfall,  which  showed  that  a 
few  hundred  feet  up  the  river  there  was  a natural  barrier. 
Presently,  after  a sudden  turn  of  the  river,  a cascade  appeared 
through  the  trees.  The  canoe  again  touched  the  bottom,  and 
in  a few  minutes  it  was  moored  to  a trunk  near  the  right 
bank. 

It  was  nearly  five  o’clock.  The  last  rays  of  the  sun  gleamed 
through  the  thick  foliage  and  glanced  on  the  little  waterfall, 
making  the  spray  sparkle  with  all  the  colors  of  the  rainbow. 
Beyond  that,  the  Mercy  was  lost  in  the  brushwood,  where  it  was 
fed  from  some  hidden  source.  The  different  streams  which 


260 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


flowed  into  it  increased  it  to  a regular  river  further  down,  but 
here  it  was  simply  a shallow,  limpid  brook. 

It  was  agreed  to  camp  here,  as  the  place  was  charming. 
The  colonists  disembarked,  and  a lire  was  soon  lighted  under 
a clump  of  trees,  among  the  branches  -of  which  Cyrus  Hard- 
ing and  his  companions  could,  if  it  was  necessary,  take  refuge 
for  the  night. 

Supper  was  quickly  devoured,  for  they  were  very  hungry,  and 
then  there  was  only  sleeping  to  think  of.  But,  as  roarings  of 
rather  a suspicious  nature  had  been  heard  during  the  even- 
ing, a good  fire  was  made  up  for  the  night,  so  as  to  protect  the 
sleepers  with  its  crackling  flames.  Neb  and  Pencroft  also 
watched  by  turns,  and  did  not  spare  fuel.  They  thought  they 
saw  the  dark  forms  of  some  wild  animals  prowling  round 
the  camp  among  the  bushes,  but  the  night  passed  without 
incident,  a»d  the  next  day,  the  31st  of  October,  at  five  o’clock 
<ji  the  mornihg,  all  were  on  foot,  ready  for  a start, 


CHAPTER  IV. 


JOURNEY  TO  THE  COAST— TROOPS  OF  MONKEYS— A NEW  RIVER— 
THE  REASON  THE  TIDE  WAS  NOT  FELT— A WOODY  SHORE  — 
REPTILE  PROMONTORY  — HERBERT  ENVIES  GIDEON  SPILETT 
— EXPLOSION  OF  BAMBOOS. 

It  was  six  o’clock  in  the  morning  when  the  settlers,  after  a 
hasty  breakfast,  set  out  to  reach  by  the  shortest  way  the  western 
coast  of  the  island.  And  how  long  would  it  take  to  do  this? 
Cyrus  Harding  had  said  two  hours,  but  of  course  that  depended 
on  the  nature  of  the  obstacles  they  might  meet  with.  ^As  it 
was  probable  that  they  would  have  to  cut  a path  through 
the  grass,  shrubs,  and  creepers,  they  marched  axe  in  hand,  and 
with  guns  also  ready,  wisely  taking  warning  from  the  cries  of 
the  wild  beasts  heard  in  the  night. 

The  exact  position  of  the  encampment  could  be  determined 
by  the  bearing  of  Mount  Franklin,  and  as  the  volcano  arose 
in  the  north  at  a distance  of  less  than  three  miles,  they  had 
only  to  go  straight  towards  the  southwest  to  reach  the  western 
coast.  They  set  out,  having  first  carefully  secured  the  canoe. 
Pencroft  and  Neb  carried  sufficient  provisions  for  the  little 
band  for  at  least  two  days.  It  would  not  thus  be  necessary 
to  hunt.  The  engineer  advised  his  companions  to  refrain 
from  firing,  that  their  presence  might  not  be  betrayed  to  any 
one  near  the  shore.  The  first  natchet  blows  were  given 
among  the  brushwood  in  the  midst  of  some  mastick-trees,  a 
little  above  the  cascade;  and  his  compass  in  his  hand,  Cyrus 
Harding  led  the  way. 

The  forest  here  was  composed  for  the  most  part  of  trees 
which  had  already  been  met  with  near  the  lake  and  on  Prospect 
Heights.  There  were  deodars,  Douglas  firs,  casuarinas,  gum- 
trees,  eucalypti,  hibiscus,  cedars,  and  other  trees,  generally  of 
a moderate  size,  for  their  number  prevented  their  growth. 

261 


262 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION, 


Since  their  departure,  the  settlers  had  descended  the  slopes 
which  constituted  the  mountain  system  of  the  island,  on  to  a 
dry  soil,  but  the  luxuriant  vegetation  of  which  indicated  it 
to  be  watered  either  by  some  subterranean  marsh  or  by  some 
stream.  However,  Cyrus  Harding  did  not  remember  to  have 
seen,  at  the  time  of  his  excursion  to  the  crater,  any  other 
watercourses  but  the  Red  Creek  and  the  Mercy. 

During  the  first  part  of  their  excursion,  they  saw  numerous 
troops  of  monkeys  who  exhibited  great  astonishment  at  the 
sight  of  men,  whose  appearance  was  so  new  to  them.  Gideon 
Spilett  jokingly  asked  whether  these  active  and  merry  quadru- 
peds did  not  consider  him  and  his  companions  as  degenerate 
brothers. 

And  certainly,  pedestrians,  hindered  at  each  step  by  bushes, 
caught  by  creepers,  barred  by  trunks  of  trees,  did  not  shine 
beside  those  supple  animals,  who,  bounding  from  branch  to 
branch,  were  hindered  by  nothing  on  their  course.  The 
monkeys  were  numerous  but  happily  they  did  not  manifest  any 
hostile  disposition. 

Several  pigs,  agoutis,  kangaroos,  and  other  rodents  were 
seen,  also  two  or  three  kaolas,  at  which  Pencroft  longed  to  have 
a shot. 

“But,”  said  he,  “ you  may  jump  and  play  just  now;  we  shall 
have  one  or  two  words  to  say  to  you  on  our  way  back !” 

At  half-past  nine  the  way  was  suddenly  found  to  be  barred 
by  an  unknown  stream,  from  thirty  to  forty  feet  broad,  whose 
rapid  current  dashed  foaming  over  the  numerous  rocks  which 
interrupted  its  course.  This  creek  was  deep  and  clear,  but  it 
was  absolutely  unnavigable. 

“We  are  cut  off!”  cried  Neb. 

“ No,”  replied  Herbert,  “ it  is  only  a stream,  and  we  can  easily 
swim  over.” 

“What  would  be  the  use  of  that?”  returned  Harding.  “ This 
creek  evidently  runs  to  the  sea.  Let  us  remain  on  this  side  and 
follow  the  bank,  and  I shall  be  much  astonished  if  it  does  not 
lead  us  very  quickly  to  the  coast.  Forward  !” 

“ One  minute,”  said  the  reporter.  “ The  name  of  this  creek, 
my  friends?  Do  not  let  us  leave  our  geography  incomplete.” 


THE  ABANDONED. 


263 


“All  right !”  said  Pencroft. 

5 Name  it,  my  boy,”  said  the  engineer,  addressing  the  lad. 

“ Will  it  not  be  better  to  wait  until  we  have  explored  it  to 
»*ts  mouth?”  answered  Herbert. 

“Very  well,”  replied  Cyrus  Harding.  “Let  us  follow  it  as 
fast  as  we  can  without  stopping.” 

“Still  another  minute  !”  said  Pencroft 

“ What’s  the  matter?”  asked  the  reporter. 

“ Though  hunting  is  forbidden,  fishing  is  allowed,  I suppose,” 
said  the  sailor. 

“We  have  no  time  to  lose,”  replied  the  engineer. 

“ Oh  ! five  minutes !”  replied  Pencroft,  “ I only  ask  for  five 
nrnutes  to  use  in  the  interest  of  our  breakfast !” 

And  Pencroft,  lying  down  on  the  bank,  plunged  his  arm  into 
the  water,  and  soon  pulled  up  several  dozen  of  fine  crawfish 
from  among  the  stones. 

“ These  will  be  good !”  cried  Neb,  going  to  the  sailor’s  aid. 

“ As  I said,  there  is  every  thing  in  this  island,  except  tobacco  I” 
muttered  Pencroft  with  a sigh. 

The  fishing  did  not  take  five  minutes,  for  the  crayfish  were 
swarming  in  the  creek.  A bag  was  filled  with  the  crustacese, 
whose  shells  were  of  a cobalt  blue.  The  settlers  then  pushed  on. 

They  advanced  more  rapidly  and  easily  along  the  bank  of 
the  river  than  in  the  forest.  From  time  To  time  they  came 
upon  the  traces  of  animals  of  a large  size  who  had  come  to 
quench  their  thirst  at  the  stream,  but  none  were  actually  seen, 
and  it  was  evidently  not  in  this  part  of  the  forest  that  the  pec- 
cary had  received  the  bullet  which  had  cost  Pencroft  a grinder. 

In  the  meanwhile,  considering  the  rapid  current,  Harding 
was  led  to  suppose  that  he  and  his  companions  were  much 
farther  from  the  western  coast  than  they  had  at  first  supposed. 
In  fact,  at  this  hour,  the  rising  tide  would  have  turned  back 
the  current  of  the  creek,  if  its  mouth  had  only  been  a few 
miles  distant.  Now,  this  effect  was  not  produced,  and  the 
water  pursued  its  natural  course.  The  engineer  was  much 
astonished  at  this,  and  frequently  consulted  his  compass,  to 
assure  mmself  that  some  turn  of  the  river  was  not  leading 
them  again  into  the  Far  West. 


264 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


However,  the  creek  gradually  widened  and  its  waters 
became  less  tumultuous.  The  trees  on  the  right  bank  were  as 
close  together  as  on  the  left  bank,  and  it  was  impossible  to 
distinguish  any  thing  beyond  them ; but  these  masses  of  wood 
were  evidently  uninhabited,  for  Top  did  not  bark,  and  the 
intelligent  animal  would  not  have  failed  to  signal  the  presence 
of  any  stranger  in  the  neighborhood. 

At  half-past  ten,  to  the  great  surprise  of  Cyrus  Harding, 
Herbert,  who  was  a little  in  front,  suddenly  stopped  and 
exclaimed, 

“ The  sea!” 

In  a few  minutes  more,  the  whole  western  shore  of  the  island 
lay  extended  before  the  eyes  of  the  settlers. 

But  what  a contrast  between  this  and  the  eastern  coast,  upon 
which  chance  had  first  thrown  them ! No  granite  cliff,  no 
rocks,  not  even  a sandy  beach ! The  forest  reached  the  shore, 
and  the  tall  trees,  bending  over  the  water,  were  beaten  by  the 
waves.  It  was  not  such  a shore  as  is  usually  formed  by  nature, 
either  by  extending  a vast  carpet  of  sand,  or  by  grouping 
masses  of  rock,  but  a beautiful  border  consisting  of  the  most 
splendid  trees.  The  bank  was  raised  a little  above  the  level  of 
the  sea,  and  on  this  luxuriant  soil,  supported  by  a granite  base, 
the  pine  forest  trees  seemed  to  be  as  firmly  planted  as  in  the 
interior  of  the  island. 

The  colonists  were  then  on  the  shore  of  an  unimportant 
little  harbor,  which  would  scarcely  have  contained  even  two  or 
three  fishing-boats.  It  served  as  a neck  to  the  new  creek,  of 
which  the  curious  thing  was  that  its  waters,  instead  of  joining 
the  sea  by  a gentle  slope,  fell  from  a height  of  more  than  forty 
feet,  which  explained  why  the  rising  tide  was  not  felt  up  the 
stream.  In  fact,  the  tides  of  the  Pacific,  even  at  their  maximum 
of  elevation,  could  never  reach  the  level  of  the  river,  and, 
doubtless,  millions  of  years  would  pass  before  the  water  would 
have  worn  away  the  granite  and  hollowed  a practicable  mouth. 

It  was  settled  that  the  name  of  Falls  Biver  should  be  given 
to  this  stream.  Beyond,  towards  the  north,  the  forest  border 
was  prolonged  for  a space  of  nearly  two  miles  ; then  the  trees 
became  scarcei,  and  beyond  that  again  the  picturesque  heights 


THE  ABANDONED. 


266 


described  a nearly  straight  line,  which  ran  north  and  south. 
On  the  contrary,  all  the  part  of  the  shore  between  Falls  River 
and  Reptile  End  was  a mass  of  wood  — magnificent  trees,  some 
straight,  others  bent,  so  that  the  long  sea-swell  bathed  their 
roots.  Now,  it  was  this  coast,  that  is,  all  the  Serpentine  penin- 
sula, that  was  to  be  explored,  for  this  part  of  the  shore  offered 
a refuge  to  castaways,  which  the  other  wild  and  barren  side 
must  have  refused. 

The  weather  was  fine  and  clear,  and  from  the  height  of  a 
hillock  on  which  Neb  and  Pencroft  had  arranged  breakfast,  a 
wide  view  was  obtained.  There  was,  however,  not  a sail  in 
sight ; nothing  could  be  seen  along  the  shore  as  far  as  the 
eye  could  reach.  But  the  engineer  would  take  nothing  for 
granted  until  he  had  explored  the  coast  to  the  very  extremity 
of  the  Serpentine  peninsula.  Breakfast  was  soon  despatched, 
and  at  half-past  eleven  the  captain  gave  the  signal  for  depar- 
ture. Instead  of  proceeding  over  the  summit  of  a cliff  or  along 
a sandy  beach,  the  settlers  were  obliged  to  remain  under  cover 
of  the  trees  so  that  they  might  continue  on  the  shore. 

The  distance  which  separated  Falls  River  from  Reptile  End 
was  about  twelve  miles.  It  would  have  taken  the  settlers  four 
hours  to  do  this,  on  a clear  ground  and  without  hurrying 
themselves  ; but  as  it  was  they  needed  double  the  time,  for 
what  witb^rees  to  go  round,  bushes  to  cut  down,  and  creepers 
to  chop  away,  they  were  impeded  at  every  step,  these  obstacles 
greatly  lengthening  their  journey. 

There  was,  however,  nothing  to  show  that  a shipwreck 
had  taken  place  recently.  It  is  true  that,  as  Gideon  Spilett 
observed,  any  remains  of  it  might  have  drifted  out  to  sea,  and 
they  must  not  take  it  for  granted  that  because  they  could  find 
no  traces  of  it,  a ship  had  not  been  cast  away  on  the  coast. 

The  reporter’s  argument  was  just,  and  besides,  the  incident 
of  the  bullet  proved  that  a shot  must  have  been  fired  in 
Lincoln  Island  within  three  months. 

It  was  already  five  o’clock,  and  there  were  still  two  miles 
between  the  settlers  and  the  extremity  of  the  Serpentine 
peninsula.  It  was  evident  that,  after  having  reached  Reptile 
ond,  Harding  and  his  companions  would  not  have  time  to 


266 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


return  before  dark  to  their  encampment  near  the  source  of  the 
Mercy.  It  would  therefore  be  necessary  to  pass  the  night  on 
the  promontory.  But  they  had  no  lack  of  provisions,  which 
was  lucky,  for  there  were  no  animals  on  the  shore,  though 
birds,  on  the  contrary,  abounded— jacamars,  couroucoos,  trago- 
pans,  grouse,  lories,  parrots,  cockatoos,  pheasants,  pigeons,  and 
a hundred  others.  There  was  not  a tree  without  a nest,  and 
not  a nest  which  was  not  full  of  flapping  wings. 

Towards  seven  o’clock  the  weary  explorer  arrived  at  Reptile 
End.  Here  the  seaside  forest  ended,  and  the  shore  resumed 
the  customary  appearance  of  a coast,  with  rocks,  reefs  and 
sands.  It  was  possible  that  something  might  be  found  here, 
but  darkness  came  on,  and  the  further  exploration  had  to  be 
put  off  to  the  next  day. 

Pencroft  and  Herbert  hastened  on  to  find  a suitable  place  for 
their  camp.  Amongst  the  last  trees  of  the  forest  of  the  Far 
West,  the  boy  found  several  thick  clumps  of  bamboos. 

“ Hood  ! ” said  he;  “ this  is  a valuable  discovery.” 

“ Valuable  ? ” returned  Pencroft. 

“ Certainly,”  replied  Herbert.  “ I may  say,  Pencroft,  that  the 
bark  of  the  bamboo,  cut  into  flexible  laths,  is  used  for  making 
baskets  ; that  this  bark,  mashed  into  a paste,  is  used  for  the 
manufacture  of  Chinese  paper ; that  the  stalks  furnish,  accord- 
ing to  their  size,  canes  and  pipes,  and  are  used  for  conducting 
water  ; that  large  bamboos  make  excellent  material  for  build- 
ing, being  light  and  strong,  and  being  never  attacked  by 
insects.  I will  add  that  by  sawing  the  bamboo  in  two  at  the 
joint,  keeping  for  the  bottom  the  part  of  the  transverse  film 
which  forms  the  joint,  useful  cups  are  obtained,  which  are 
much  in  use  among  the  Chinese.  No  ! you  don’t  care  for  that. 
But—” 

“ But  what  ? ” 

“But  I can  tell  you,  if  you  are  ignorant  of  it,  that  in 
India  these  bamboos  are  eaten  like  asparagus.” 

“Asparagus  thirty  feet  high!”  exclaimed  the  sailor.  “And 
are  they  good  ? ” 

“ Excellent,”  replied  Herbert.  “Only  it  is  not  the  stems  of 
thirty  feet  high  which  are  eaten,  but  the  young  shoot9.” 


TELE  ABANDONED. 


2ft* 

“Perfect,  my  boy,  perfect ! ” replied  Pencroft. 

u I will  also  add  that  the  pith  of  the  young  stalks,  preserved 
in  vinegar,  makes  a good  pickle.” 

“ Better  and  better,  Herbert ! ” 

“And  lastly,  that  the  bamboos  exude  a sweet  liquor,  which 
can  be  made  into  a very  agreeable  drink.” 

“ Is  that  all?  ” asked  the  sailor. 

“That  is  all!” 

“ And  they  don’t  happen  to  do  for  smoking  ? ” 

“ No,  my  poor  Pencroft.” 

Herbert  and  the  sailor  had  not  to  look  long  for  a place  in 
which  to  pass  the  night.  The  rocks,  which  must  have  been 
violently  beaten  by  the  sea  under  the  influence  of  the  winds  of 
the  southwest,  presented  many  cavities  in  which  shelter  could 
be  found  against  the  night  air.  But  just  as  they  were  about  to 
enter  one  of  these  caves  a loud  roaring  arrested  them. 

“ Back  ! ” cried  Pencroft.  “ Our  guns  are  only  loaded  with 
small  shot,  and  beasts  which  can  roar  as  loud  as  that  would 
care  no  more  for  it  than  for  grains  of  salt ! ” And  the  sailor, 
seizing  Herbert  by  the  arm,  dragged  him  behind  a rock,  just  as 
a magnificent  animal  showed  itself  at  the  entrance  of  the 
cavern. 

It  was  a jaguar  of  a size  at  least  equal  to  its  Asiatic 
congeners,  that  is  to  say,  it  measured  five  feet  from  the 
extremity  of  its  head  to  the  beginning  of  its  tail.  The  yellow 
color  of  its  hair  was  relieved  by  streaks  and  regular  oblong 
spots  of  black,  which  contrasted  with  the  white  of  its  chest. 
Herbert  recognized  it  as  the  ferocious  rival  of  the  tiger,  as» 
formidable  as  the  puma,  which  is  the  rival  of  the  largest 
wolf ! 

The  jaguar  advanced  and  gazed  around  him  with  blazing 
eyes,  his  hair  bristling  as  if  this  was  not  the  first  time  he  had 
scented  men. 

At  this  moment  the  reporter  appeared  round  a rock,  and 
Herbert,  thinking  that  he  had  not  seen  the  jaguar,  was  about 
to  rush  towards  him,  when  Gideon  Spilett  signed  to  him  to 
remain  where  he  was.  This  was  not  his  first  tiger,  and  ad- 
vancing to  within  ten  feet  of  the  animal  he  remained  motion- 


I 


2(58  THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 

less,  his  gun  to  his  shoulder,  without  moving  a muscle.  The 
jaguar  collected  itself  for  a spring,  but  at  that  moment  a shot 
struck  it  in  the  eye,  and  it  fell  dead. 

Herbert  and  Pencroft  rushed  towards  the  jaguar.  Neb  and 
Harding  also  ran  up,  and  they  remained  for  some  instants  con- 
templating the  animal  as  it  lay  stretched  on  the  ground,  think- 
ing that  its  magnificent  skin  would  be  a great  ornament  to 
the  hall  at  Granite  House. 

“ Oh,  Mr.  Spilett,  how  I admire  and  envy  you !”  cried  Herbert, 
in  a fit  of  very  natural  enthusiasm. 

“ Well,  my  boy,”  replied  the  reporter,  “ you  could  have  done 
the  same.” 

“ I ! with  such  coolness  !— ” 

“ Imagine  to  yourself,  Herbert,  that  the  jaguar  is  only  a 
hare,  and  you  would  fire  as  quietly  as  possible.” 

“ That  is,”  rejoined  Pencroft,  “ that  it  is  not  more  dangerous 
than  a hare !” 

“And  now,”  said  Gideon  Spilett,  “since  the  jaguar  had 
left  its  abode,  I do  not  see,  my  friends,  why  we  should  not  take 
possession  of  it  for  the  night.” 

“ But  others  may  come,”  said  Pencroft. 

“It  will  be  enough  to  light  a fire  at  the  entrance  of  the 
cavern,”  said  the  reporter,  “ and  no  wild  beasts  will  dare  to 
cross  the  threshold.” 

“ Into  the  jaguar’s  house,  then !”  replied  the  sailor,  drag- 
ging after  him  the  body  of  the  animal. 

Whilst  Neb  skinned  the  jaguar,  his  companions  collected  an 
abundant  supply  of  dry  wood  from  the  forest,  which  they 
heaped  up  at  the  cave. 

Cyrus  Harding,  seeing  the  clump  of  bamboos,  cut  a quantity5 
which  he  mingled  with  the  other  fuel. 

This  done,  they  entered  the  grotto,  of  which  the  floor  was 
strewn  with  bones,  the  guns  were  carefully  loaded,  in  case 
of  a sudden  attack,  they  had  supper,  and  then  just  before 
they  lay  down  to  rest,  the  heap  of  wood  piled  at  the  entrance 
was  set  fire  to.  Immediately,  a regular  explosion,  or  rather,  a 
series  of  reports,  broke  the  silence ! The  noise  was  caused 
by  the  bamboos,  which,  as  the  flames  reached  them,  exploded 


.HE  ABANDONED. 


26£ 


like  fireworks.  The  noise  was  enough  to  terrify  even  the 
boldest  of  wild  beasts. 

It  was  not  the  engineer  who  had  invented  this  way  of  caus- 
ing loud  explosions,  for,  according  to  Marco  Polo,  the  Tartars 
have  employed  it  for  many  centuries  to  drive  away  from  their 
encampments  the  formidable  wild  beasts  of  Central  Asia. 


CHAPTER  V, 


PROPOSAL  TO  RETURN  BY  THE  SOUTHERN  SHORE— CONFIGURATION 
OF  THE  COAST— SEARCHING  FOR  THE  SUPPOSED  WRECK— A 
WRECK  IN  THE  AIR— DISCOVERY  OF  A SMALL  NATURAL  FORT 
—AT  MIDNIGHT  ON  THE  BANKS  OF  THE  MERCY— THE  CANOE 
ADRIFT. 

Cyrus  Harding  and  his  companions  slept  like  innocent  mar- 
mots in  the  cave  which  the  jaguar  had  so  politely  left  at  their 
disposal. 

At  sunrise  all  were  on  the  shore  at  the  extremity  of  the  prom- 
ontory, and  their  gaze  was  directed  towards  the  horizon,  of 
which  two-thirds  of  the  circumference  were  visible.  For  the 
last  time  the  engineer  could  ascertain  that  not  a sail  nor  the 
wreck  of  a ship  was  on  the  sea,  and  even  with -the  telescope 
nothing  suspicious  could  be  discovered. 

There  was  nothing  either  on  the  shore,  at  least,  in  the 
straight  line  of  three  miles  which  formed  the  south  side  of  the 
promontory,  for  beyond  that,  rising  ground  hid  the  rest  of  the 
coast,  and  even  from  the  extremity  of  the  Serpentine  peninsula 
Cape  Claw  could  not  be  seen. 

The  southern  coast  of  the  island  slill  remained  to  be  explored. 
Now  should  they  undertake  it  immediately,  and  devote  this 
day  to  it? 

This  was  not  included  in  their  first  plan.  In  fact,  when  the 
boat  was  abandoned  at  the  sources  of  the  Mercy,  it  had  been 
agreed  that  after  having  surveyed  the  west  coast,  they  should 
go  back  to  it,  and  return  to  Granite  House  by  the  Mercy.  Hard- 
ing then  thought  that  the  western  coast  would  have  offered 
refuge,  either  to  a ship  in  distress,  or  to  a vessel  in  her  regular 
course;  but  now,  as  he  saw  that  this  coast  presented  no  good 

270 


THE  ABANDONED. 


271 


anchorage,  he  wished  to  seek  on  the  south  what  they  had 
not  been  able  to  find  on  the  west. 

Gideon  Spilett  proposed  to  continue  the  exploration,  that  the 
question  of  the  supposed  wreck  might  be  completely  settled, 
and  he  asked  at  what  distance  Claw  Cape  might  be  from  the 
extremity  of  the  peninsula. 

“About  thirty  miles,”  replied  the  engineer,  “if  we  take  into 
consideration  the  curvings  of  the  coast.” 

“ Thirty  miles !”  returned  Spilett.  “ That  would  be  a long 
day’s  march.  Nevertheless,  I think  that  we  should  return  to 
Granite  House  by  the  south  coast.” 

“ But,”  observed  Herbert,  “ from  Claw  Cape  to  Granite  House 
there  must  be  at  least  another  ten  miles.” 

“ Make  it  forty  miles  in  all,”  replied  the  engineer,  “ and  do  not 
hesitate  to  do  it.  At  least  we  should  survey  the  unknown 
shore,  and  then  we  shall  not  have  to  begin  the  exploration 
again.” 

“ Very  good,”  said  Pencroft.  “ But  the  boat?” 

“ The  boat  has  remained  by  itself  for  one  day  at  the  sources 
of  the  Mercy,”  replied  Gideon  Spilett;  “ it  may  just  as  well  stay 
there  two  days ! As  yet,  we  have  had  no  reason  to  think  that 
the  island  is  infested  by  thieves !” 

“Yet,”  said  the  sailor, “when  I remember  the  history  of  the 
turtle,  I am  far  from  confident  of  that.” 

“ The  turtle ! the  turtle  !”  replied  the  reporter.  “ Don’t  you 
know  that  the  sea  turned  it  over?” 

“ Who  knows?”  murmured  the  engineer. 

“But—”  said  Neb. 

Neb  had  evidently  something  to  say,  for  he  opened  his  mouth 
to  speak  and  yet  said  nothing. 

“What  do  you  want  to  say,  Neb  ? ” asked  the  engineer. 

“If  we  return  by  the  shore  to  Claw  Cape,”  replied  Neb, 
“ after  having  doubled  the  Cape,  we  shall  be  stopped—” 

“ By  the  Mercy ! of  course,”  replied  Herbert,  “ and  we  shall 
have  neither  bridge  nor  boat  by  which  to  cross.” 

“ But,  captain,”  added  Pencroft,  “ with  a few  floating  trunks 
we  shall  have  no  difficulty  in  crossing  the  river.” 

“Never  mind,”  said  Spileit,  “it  will  be  useful  to  construct 


272 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


a bridge  if  we  wish  to  have  an  easy  access  to  the  Far 
West !” 

“A  bridge  !”  cried  Pencroft.  “Well,  is  not  the  captain  the 
best  engineer  in  his  profession?  He  will  make  us  a bridge 
when  we  want  one.  As  to  transporting  you  this  evening  to  the 
other  side  of  the  Mercy,  and  that  without  wetting  one  thread  of 
your  clothes,  I will  take  care  of  that.  We  have  provisions  for 
another  day,  and  besides  we  can  get  plenty  of  game.  Forward !” 

The  reporter’s  proposal,  so  strongly  seconded  by  the  sailor, 
received  general  approbation,  for  eacl:  wished  to  have  their 
doubts  set  at  rest,  and  by  returning  by  Claw  Cape  the  explo- 
ration would  be  ended.  But  there  was  not  an  hour  to  lose, 
for  lorty  miles  was  a long  march,  and  they  could  not  hope  to 
reach  Granite  House  before  night. 

At  six  o’clock  in  the  morning  the  little  band  set  out.  As  a 
precaution  the  guns  were  loaded  with  ball,  and  Top,  who  led 
the  van,  received  orders  to  beat  about  the  edge  of  the  forest. 

From  the  extremity  of  the  promontory  which  formed  the 
tail  of  the  peninsula  the  coast  was  rounded  for  a distance  of 
five  miles,  which  was  rapidly  passed  over,  without  even  the 
most  minute  investigations  bringing  to  light  the  least  trace  of 
any  old  or  recent  landings;  no  debris , no  mark  of  an  encamp- 
ment, no  cinders  of  a fire,  nor  even  a footprint ! 

From  the  point  of  the  peninsula  on  which  the  settlers  now 
were  their  gaze  could  extend  along  the  southwest.  Twenty- 
dve  miles  off  the  coast  terminated  in  the  Claw  Cape,  which 
J'oomed  dimly  through  the  morning  mist,  and  which,  by  the 
phenomenon  of  the  mirage,  appeared  as  if  suspended  between 
^and  and  water. 

Between  the  place  occupied  by  the  colonists  and  the  other 
dde  of  the  immense  bay,  the  shore  was  composed,  first,  of  a 
tract  of  low  land,  bordered  in  the  background  by  trees;  then 
the  shore  became  more  irregular,  projecting  sharp  points  into  * 
the  sea,  and  finally  ended  in  the  black  rocks  which,  accumu- 
lated in  picturesque  disorder,  formed  Claw  Cape. 

Such  was  the  development  of  this  part  of  the  island,  which 
the  settlers  took  in  at  a glance,  whilst  stopping  for  an  instant. 

“If  a vessel  ran  in  here,”  said  Pencroft,  “she  would  cen 


THE  ABANDONED. 


m 


bainly  be  lost.  Sandbanks  and  reefs  every  where  ! Bad  quar 
ters ! ” 

“ But  at  least  something  would  be  left  of  the  ship,”  observed 
the  reporter. 

“ There  might  be  pieces  of  wood  on  the  rocks,  but  nothing 
on  the  sands,”  replied  the  sailor. 

“Why?” 

“Because  the  sands  are  still  more  dangerous  than  the  rocks, 
for  they  swallow  up  every  thing  that  is.  thrown  on  them.  In  a 
few  days  the  hull  of  a ship  of  several  hundred  tons  would 
disappear  entirely  in  there  ! ” 

“ So,  Pencroft,”  asked  the  engineer,  “ if  a ship  has  been 
wrecked  on  these  banks,  is  it  not  astonishing  that  there  is 
now  no  trace  of  her  remaining  ? ” 

“ No,  captain,  with  the  aid  of  time  and  tempest.  However, 
it  would  be  surprising,  even  in  this  case,  that  some  of  the 
masts  or  spars  should  not  have  been  thrown  on  the  beach, 
out  of  reach  of  the  waves.” 

“Let  us  go  on  with  our  search,  then,”  returned  Cyrus 
Harding. 

At  one  o’clock  the  colonists  arrived  at  the  other  side  of 
Washington  Bay,  they  having  now  gone  a distance  of  twenty 
miles. 

They  then  halted  for  breakfast. 

Here  began  the  irregular  coast,  covered  with  lines  of  rocks 
and  sandbanks.  The  long  sea-swell  could  be  seen  breaking 
over  the  rocks  in  the  bay,  forming  a foamy  fringe.  From  this 
point  to  Claw  Cape  the  beach  was  very  narrow  between  the 
edge  of  the  forest  and  the  reefs. 

Walking  was  now  more  difficult,  on  account  of  the  numerous 
rocks  which  encumbered  the  beach.  The  granite  cliff  also 
gradually  increased  in  height,  and  only  the  green  tops  of  the 
trees  which  crowned  it  could  be  seen. 

After  half  an  hour’s  rest,  the  settlers  resumed  their  journey, 
and  not  a spot  among  the  rocks  was  left  unexamined.  Pen- 
croft and  Neb  even  rushed  into  the  surf  whenever  any  object 
attracted  their  attention.  But  they  found  nothing,  some 
curious  formations  of  the  rocks  having  deceived  them.  They 
18 


274 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


ascertained,  however,  that  eatable  shell  - fish  abounded  there, 
but  these  could  not  be  of  any  great  advantage  to  them  until 
some  easy  means  of  communication  had  been  established  be- 
tween the  two  banks  of  the  Mercy,  and  until  the  means  of 
transport  had  been  perfected. 

Nothing  therefore  which  threw  any  light  on  the  supposed 
wreck  could  be  found  on  this  shore,  yet  an  object  of  any  im- 
portance, such  as  the  hull  of  a ship,  would  have  been  seen 
directly,  or  any  of  her  masts  and  spars  would  have  been  washed 
on  shore,  just  as  the  chest  had  been,  which  was  found  twenty 
miles  from  here.  But  there  was  nothing. 

Towards  three  o’clock  Harding  and  his  companions  arrived 
at  a snug  little  creek.  It  formed  quite  a natural  harbor,  in- 
visible from  the  sea,  and  was  entered  by  a narrow  channel. 

At  the  back  of  this  creek  some  violent  convulsion  had  torn  up 
the  rocky  border,  and  a cutting,  by  a gentle  slope,  gave  access 
to  an  upper  plateau,  which  might  be  situated  at  least  ten 
miles  from  Claw  Cape,  and  consequently  four  miles  in  a 
straight  line  from  Prospect  Heights.  Gideon  Spilett  proposed 
to  his  companions  that  they  should  make  a halt  here.  They 
agreed  readily,  for  their  walk  had  sharpened  their  appetites; 
and  although  it  was  not  their  usual  dinner-hour,  no  one  refused 
to  strengthen  himself  with  a piece  of  venison.  This  luncheon 
would  sustain  them  till  their  supper,  which  they  intended  to 
take  at  Granite  House. 

In  a few  minutes  the  settlers,  seated  under  a clump  of  fine 
sea-pines,  were  devouring  the  provisions  which  Neb  produced 
from  his  bag. 

This  spot  was  raised  from  fifty  to  sixty  feet  above  the  level  of 
the  sea.  The  view  was  very  extensive,  but  beyond  the  cape  it 
ended  in  Union  Bay.  Neither  the  islet  nor  Prospect  Heights 
were  visible,  and  could  not  be  from  thence,  for  the  rising 
ground  and  the  curtain  of  trees  closed  the  northern  h rizon. 

It  is  useless  to  add  that  notwithstanding  the  w>  <e  extent 
of  sea  which  the  explorers  could  survey,  and  th‘  ugh  the 
engineer  swept  the  horizon  with  his  glass,  no  vessel  could  be 
found. 

The  shore  was  of  course  examined  with  th£  same  care 


THE  ABANDONED. 


275 


jom  the  edge  of  the  water  to  the  cliff,  and  nothing  could  be 

iscovered  even  with  the  aid  of  the  instrument. 

“ Well,”  said  Gideon  Spilett,  “ it  seems  we  must  make  up  our 
minds  to  console  ourselves  with  thinking  that  no  one  will  come 
to  dispute  with  us  the  possession  of  Lincoln  Island ! ” 

“But  the  bullet,”  cried  Herbert.  “That  was  not  imaginary, 
I suppose ! ” 

“ Hang  it,  no  !”  exclaimed  Pencroft,  thinking  of  his  absent 
tooth. 

“Then  what  conclusion  may  be  drawn  ?”  asked  the  reporter. 

“This,”  replied  the  engineer,  “that  three  months  or  more 
ago,  a vessel,  either  voluntarily  or  not,  came  here.” 

“ What ! then  you  admit,  Cyrus,  that  she  was  swallowed  up 
without  leaving  any  trace  ? ” cried  the  reporter. 

“No,  my  dear  Spilett;  but  jou  see  that  if  it  is  certain  that  a 
human  being  set  foot  on  the  island,  it  appears  no  less  certain 
that  he  has  now  left  it.” 

“Then,  if  I understand  you  right,  captain,”  said  Herbert, 
“ the  vessel  has  left  again  ? ” 

“ Evidently.” 

“And  we  have  lost  an  opportunity  to  get  back  to  our 
country  ?”  said  Neb. 

“ I fear  so.” 

“Very  well,  since  the  opportunity  is  lost,  let  us  go  on;  it 
can’t  be  helped,”  said  Pencroft,  who  felt  home-sickness  for 
Granite  House. 

But  just  as  they  were  rising,  Top  was  heard  loudly  barking  ; 
and  the  dog  issued  from  the  wood,  holding  in  his  mouth  a rag 
soiled  with  mud. 

Neb  seized  it.  It  was  a piece  of  strong  cloth  ! 

Top  still  barked,  and  by  his  going  and  coming,  seemed  to 
invite  his  master  to  follow  him  into  the  forest. 

“ Now  there’s  something  to  explain  the  bullet!”  exclaimed 
Pencroft. 

“ A castaway  ! ” replied  Herbert. 

“ Wounded,  perhaps  ! ” said  Neb. 

“ Or  dead ! ” added  the  reporter. 

All  ran  after  the  dog,  among  the  tall  pines  on  the  border  ot 


276 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


the  forest*  Harding  and  his  companions  made  ready  their  fire* 
arms,  in  case  of  an  emergency. 

They  advanced  some  way  into  the  wood,  but  to  their  great 
disappointment,  they  as  yet  saw  no  signs  of  any  human  being 
having  passed  that  way.  Shrubs  and  creepers  were  uninjured, 
and  they  had  even  to  cut  them  away  with  the  axe,  as  they  had 
done  in  the  deepest  recesses  of  the  forest.  It  was  difficult  to 
fancy  that  any  human  creature  had  ever  passed  there,  but 
yet  Top  went  backwards  and  forwards,  not  like  a dog  who 
searches  at  random,  but  like  a being  endowed  with  a mind, 
who  is  following  up  an  idea. 

In  about  seven  or  eight  minutes  Top  stopped  in  a glade  sur- 
rounded with  tall  trees.  The  settlers  gazed  around  them,  but 
saw  nothing,  neither  under  the  bushes  nor  among  the  trees. 

“ What  is  the  matter,  Top  ? ” said  Cyrus  Harding. 

Top  barked  louder,  bounding  about  at  the  foot  of  a gigantic 
pine.  All  at  once  Pencrof t shouted. 

“ Ho,  splendid ! capital ! ” 

“ What  is  it  ?”  asked  Spilett. 

“We  have  been  looking  for  a wreck  at  sea  or  on  land ! ” 

“Well?” 

“ Well;  and  here  we’ve  found  one  in  the  air ! ” 

And  the  sailor  pointed  to  a great  white  rag,  caught  in 
the  top  of  the  pine,  a fallen  scrap  of  which  the  dog  had 
brought  to  them. 

“ But  that  is  not  a wreck  ! ” cried  Gideon  Spilett. 

“ I beg  your  pardon ! ” returned  Pencroft. 

“Why?  is  it — ? ” 

“It  is  all  that  remains  of  our  airy  boat,  of  our  balloon, 
which  has  been  caught  up  aloft  there,  at  the  top  of  that  tree  ! ” 

Pencroft  was  not  mistaken,  and  he  gave  vent  to  his  feelings 
in  a tremendous  hurrah,  adding,— 

“ There  is  good  cloth  ! There  is  what  will  furnish  us  with 
linen  for  years.  There  is  what  will  make  us  handkerchiefs 
and  shirts ! Ha,  ha,  Mr.  Spilett,  what  do  you  say  to  an  island 
where  shirts  grow  on  the  trees  ? ” 

It  was  certainly  a lucky  circumstance  for  the  settlers  in 
Lincoln  Island  that  the  balloon,  after  having  made  its  last 


THE  ABANDONED. 


277 


bound  into  the  air,  had  fallen  on  the  Island  and  thus  given 
them  the  opportunity  of  finding  it  again,  whether  they  kept 
the  case  under  its  present  form,  or  whether  they  wished  to 
attempt  another  escape  by  it,  or  whether  they  usefully  em- 
ployed the  several  hundred  yards  of  cotton,  which  was  of  fine 
quality.  Pencroft’s  joy  was  therefore  shared  by  all. 

But  it  was  necessary  to  bring  down  the  remains  of  the  bal- 
loon from  the  tree,  to  place  it  in  security,  and  this  was  no 
slight  task.  Neb,  Herbert,  and  the  sailor,  climbing  to  the  sum- 
mit of  the  tree,  used  all  their  skill  to  disengage  the  now  re- 
duced balloon. 

The  operation  lasted  two  hours,  and  then  not  only  the  case, 
with  its  valve,  its  springs,  its  brass-work,  lay  on  the  ground, 
but  the  net,  that  is  to  say,  a considerable  quantity  of  ropes  and 
cordage,  and  the  circle  and  the  anchor.  The  case,  except  for 
the  fracture,  was  in  good  condition,  only  the  lower  portion 
being  torn. 

It  was  a fortune  which  had  fallen  from  the  sky. 

“All  the  same,  captain,”  said  the  sailor;  “if  we  ever  decide 
to  leave  the  island,  it  won’t  be  in  a balloon,  will  it?  These 
air-boats  won't  go  where  we  want  them  to  go,  and  we  have 
bad  some  experience  in  that  way ! Look  here,  we  will  build 
a craft  of  some  twenty  tons,  and  then  we  can  make  a main- sail, 
a fore-sail,  and  a jib  out  of  that  cloth.  As  to  the  rest  of  it,  that 
will  help  to  dress  us.” 

“ We  shall  see,  Pencroft,”  replied  Cyrus  Harding;  “we  shall 
see.” 

“In  the  meantime,  we  must  put  it  in  a safe  place,”  said 
Neb. 

They  certainly  could  not  think  of  carrying  this  load  of  cloth, 
ropes,  and  cordage,  to  Granite  House,  for  the  weight  of  it 
was  very  considerable,  and  whilst  waiting  for  a suitable  vehicle 
in  which  to  convey  it,  it  was  of  importance  that  this  treasure 
should  not  be  left  longer  exposed  to  the  mercies  of  the  first 
storm.  The  settlers  uniting  their  efforts,  managed  to  drag  it 
as  far  as  the  shore,  where  they  discovered  a large  rocky  cavity, 
which  owing  to  its  position  could  not  be  visited  either  by  the 
wind  or  rain. 


278 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


“We  needed  a locker,  and  now  we  have  one,”  said  Pencroft; 
“ but  as  we  can  not  lock  it  up,  it  will  be  prudent  to  hide  the 
opening.  I don’t  mean  from  two-legged  thieves,  but  from 
those  with  four  paws ! ” 

At  six  o’clock,  all  was  stowed  away,  and  after  having  given 
the  creek  the  very  suitable  name  of  “ Port  Balloon,”  the  settlers 
pursued  their  way  along  Claw  Cape.  Pencroft  and  the  engi- 
neer talked  of  the  different  projects  which  it  was  agreed  to  put 
into  execution  with  the  briefest  possible  delay.  It  was  neces- 
sary first  of  all  to  throw  a bridge  over  the  Mercy,  so  as  to 
establish  an  easy  communication  with  the  south  of  the  island; 
then  the  cart  must  be  taken  to  bring  back  the  balloon,  for  the 
canoe  alone  could  not  carry  it,  then  they  would  build  a decked 
boat,  and  Pencroft  would  rig  it  as  a cutter,  and  they  would 
be  able  to  undertake  voyages  of  circumnavigation  round  the 
island,  etc. 

In  the  meanwhile  night  came  on,  and  it  was  already  dark 
when  the  settlers  reached  Flotsam  Point,  the  place  where 
they  had  discovered  the  precious  chest. 

The  distance  between  Flotsam  Point  and  Granite  House  was 
another  four  miles,  and  it  was  midnight  when,  after  having 
followed  the  shore  to  the  mouth  of  the  Mercy,  the  settlers 
arrived  at  the  first  angle  formed  by  the  Mercy. 

There  the  river  was  eighty  feet  in  breadth,  which  was  awk- 
ward to  cross,  but  as  Pencroft  had  taken  upon  himself  to 
conquer  this  difficulty,  he  was  compelled  to  do  it.  The  settlers 
certainly  had  reason  to  be  pretty  tired.  The  journey  had  been 
long,  and  the  task  of  getting  down  the  balloon  had  not  rested 
either  their  arms  or  legs.  They  were  anxious  to  reach  Granite 
House  to  eat  and  sleep,  and  if  the  bridge  had  been  constructed, 
in  a quarter  of  an  hour  they  would  have  been  at  home. 

The  night  was  very  dark.  Pencroft  prepared  to  keep  his 
promise  by  constructing  a sort  of  raft,  on  which  to  make  the 
passage  of  the  Mercy.  He  and  Neb,  armed  with  axes,  chose 
two  trees  near  the  water,  and  began  to  attack  them  at  the  base. 

Cyrus  Harding  and  Spilett,  seated  on  the  bank,  waited  till 
their  companions  were  ready  for  their  help,  whilst  Herbert 
warned  about,  though  without  going  to  any  distance.  All  at 


THE  ABANDONED. 


279 


once,  the  lad,  who  had  strolled  by  the  river,  came  running 
back,  and,  pointing  up  the  Mercy,  exclaimed,— 

“ What  is  floating  there  ? ” 

Pencroft  stopped  working,  and  seeing  an  indistinct  ^object 
moving  through  the  gloom, — 

“ A canoe  ! ” he  cried. 

All  approached,  and  saw,  to  their  extreme  surprise,  a boat 
floating  down  the  current. 

“Boat  ahoy!”  shouted  the  sailor,  without  thinking  that  per- 
haps it  would  be  best  to  keep  silence. 

No  reply.  The  boat  still  drifted  onwards,  and  it  was  not 
more  than  twelve  feet  off,  when  the  sailor  exclaimed,— 

“ But  it  is  our  own  boat ! she  has  broken  her  moorings, 
and  floated  down  the  current.  I must  say  she  has  arrived 
very  opportunely.” 

“ Our  boat  ? ” murmured  the  engineer. 

Pencroft  was  right.  It  was  indeed  the  canoe,  of  which  the 
rope  had  undoubtedly  broken,  and  which  had  come  alone  from 
the  sources  of  the  Mercy.  It  was  very  important  to  seize  it 
before  the  rapid  current  should  have  swept  it  away  out  of 
the  mouth  of  the  river,  but  Neb  and  Pencroft  cleverly  managed 
this  by  means  of  a long  pole. 

The  canoe  touched  the  shore.  The  engineer  leapt  in  first, 
and  found,  on  examining  the  rope,  that  it  had  been  really 
worn  through  by  rubbing  against  the  rocks. 

“Well,”  said  the  reporter  to  him,  in  a low  voice;  “this  is  a 
strange  thing.” 

“Strange  indeed  ! ” returned  Cyrus  Harding. 

Strange  or  not,  it  was  very  fortunate.  Herbert,  the  reporter, 
Neb,  and  Pencroft,  embarked  in  turn.  There  was  no  doubt 
about  the  rope  having  been  worn  through,  but  the  astonish- 
ing part  of  the  affair  was,  that  the  boat  should  have  arrived 
just  at  the  moment  when  the  settlers  were  there  to  seize  it  on 
its  way,  for  a quarter  of  an  hour  earlier  or  later  it  would  have 
been  lost  in  the  sea.  If  they  had  been  living  in  the  time  of  the 
genii,  this  incident  would  have  given  them  the  right  to  think 
that  the  island  was  haunted  by  some  supernatural  being,  who 
Used  his  power  in  the  service  of  the  castaways  I 


28Q 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


A few  strokes  of  the  oar  brought  the  settlers  to  the  mouth 
of  the  Mercy.  The  canoe  was  hauled  up  on  the  beach  near 
the  Chimneys,  and  all  proceeded  towards  the  ladder  of  Granite 
House. 

But  at  that  moment,  Top  barked  angrily,  and  Neb,  who 
was  looking  for  the  first  steps,  uttered  a cry. 

There  was  no  longer  a ladder ! 


CHAPTER  VI, 


ifENCROFT’S  HALLOOS— A NIGHT  IN  THE  CHIMNEYS— HERBERT^ 
ARROWS  — THE  CAPTAIN’S  PROJECT  — AN  UNEXPECTED  EX- 
PLANATION — WHAT  HAS  HAPPENED  IN  GRANITE  HOUSE  — 
HOW  A NEW  SERVANT  ENTERS  THE  SERVICE  OF  THE  COL- 
ONISTS. 

Cyrus  Harding  stood  still,  without  saying  a word.  His  com- 
panions searched  in  the  darkness  on  the  wall,  in  case  the 
wind  should  have  moved  the  ladder,  and  on  the  ground,  think- 
ing that  it  might  have  fallen  down But  the  ladder  had 

quite  disappeared.  As  to  ascertaining  if  a squall  had  blown 
it  on  to  the  landing-place,  half  way  up,  that  was  impossible  in 
the  dark.. 

“ If  it  is  a joke,”  cried  Pencroft,  “ it  is  a very  stupid  one ; 
to  come  home  and  find  no  staircase  to  go  up  to  your  room  by  ; 
for  weary  men,  there  is  nothing  to  laugh  at  that  I can  see.” 

Neb  could  do  nothing  but  cry  out  “ Oh ! oh ! oh ! ” 

••  I begin  to  think  that  very  curious  things  happen  in  Lincoln 
Island ! ” said  Pencroft. 

“.Curious?”  replied  Gideon  Spilett,  “not  at  all,  Pencroft, 
nothing  can  be  more  natural.  Some  one  has  come  during  our 
absence,  taken  possession  of  our  dwelling  and  drawn  up  the 
ladder.” 

“ Some  one,”  cried  the  sailor.  “ But  who  ? ” 

“Who  but  the  hunter  who  fired  the  bullet?”  replied  the 
reporter. 

“ Well,  if  there  is  any  one  up  there,”  replied  Pencroft,  who 
began  to  lose  patience,  “ I will  give  them  a hail,  and  they  must 
answer.” 

And  in  a stentorian  voice  the  sailor  gave  a prolonged  “Hal- 

281 


282 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


loo ! ” which  was  echoed  again  and  again  from  the  cliff  and 
rocks. 

The  settlers  listened  and  they  thought  they  heard  a sort  of 
chuckling  laugh,  of  which  they  could  not  guess  the  origin. 
But  no  voice  replied  to  Pencroft,  who  in  vain  repeated  his 
vigorous  shouts. 

There  was  something  indeed  in  this  to  astonish  the  most 
apathetic  of  men,  and  the  settlers  were  not  men  of  that 
description.  In  their  situation  every  incident  had  its  impor- 
tance, and,  certainly,  during  the  seven  months  which  they  had 
spent  on  the  island,  they  had  not  before  met  with  any  thing  of 
so  surprising  a character. 

Be  that  as  it  may,  forgetting  their  fatigue  in  the  singu- 
larity of  the  event,  they  remained  below  Granite  House,  not 
knowing  what  to  think,  not  knowing  what  to  do,  questioning 
each  other  without  any  hope  of  a satisfactory  reply,  every  one 
starting  some  supposition  each  more  unlikely  than  the  last. 
Neb  bewailed  himself,  much  disappointed  at  not  being  able  to 
get  into  his  kitchen,  for  the  provisions  which  they  had  had  on 
their  expedition  were  exhausted,  and  they  had  no  means  of 
renewing  them. 

“ My  friends,”  at  last  said  Cyrus  Harding,  “ there  is  only  one 
thing  to  be  done  at  present,  wait  for  day,  and  then  act  accord- 
ing to  circumstances.  But  let  us  go  to  the  Chimneys.  There 
we  shall  be  under  shelter,  and  if  we  can  not  eat,  we  can  at 
least  sleep.” 

M But  who  is  it  that  has  played  us  this  cool  trick?”  again 
asked  Pencroft,  unable  to  make  up  his  mind  to  retire  from  the 
spot. 

Whoever  it  was,  the  only  thing  practicable  was  to  do  as  the 
engineer  proposed,  to  go  to  the  Chimneys  and  there  wait  for 
day.  In  the  meanwhile  Top  was  ordered  to  mount  guard 
below  the  windows  of  Granite  House,  and  when  Top  received 
an  order  he  obeyed  it  without  any  questioning.  The  brave  dog 
therefore  remained  at  the  foot  of  the  cliff  whilst  his  master 
with  his  companions  sought  a refuge  among  the  rocks. 

To  say  that  the  settlers,  notwithstanding  their  fatigue,  slept 
well  on  the  sandy  floor  of  the  Chimneys  would  not  be  true.  It 


THE  ABANDONED. 


was  not  only  that  they  were  extremely  anxious  to  find  out  the 
cause  of  what  had  happened,  whether  it  was  the  result  of  an 
accident  which  would  be  discovered  at  the  return  of  day,  or 
whether  on  the  contrary  it  was  the  work  of  a human  being  ; 
but  they  also  had  very  uncomfortable  bejds.  That  could  not  be 
helped,  however,  for  in  some  way  or  other  at  that  moment  their 
dwelling  was  occupied,  and  they  could  not  possibly  enter  it. 

Now  Granite  House  was  more  than  their  dwelling,  it  was 
their  warehouse.  There  were  all  the  stores  belonging  to  the 
colony,  weapons,  instruments,  tools,  ammunition,  provisions, 
etc.  To  think  that  all  that  might  be  pillaged  and  that  the 
settlers  would  have  all  their  work  to  do  over  again,  fresh 
weapons  and  tools  to  make,  was  a serious  matter.  Their 
aneasiness  led  one  or  other  of  them  also  to  go  out  every  few 
minutes  to  see  if  Top  was  keeping  good  watch.  Cyrus  Hard- 
ing alone  waited  with  his  habitual  patience,  although  his 
strong  mind  was  exasperated  at  being  confronted  with  such 
an  inexplicable  fact,  and  he  was  provoked  at  himself  for  allow- 
ing a feeling  to  which  he  could  not  give  a name,  to  gain  an 
influence  over  him.  Gideon  Spilett  shared  his  feelings  in  this 
respect,  and  the  two  conversed  together  in  whispers  of  the 
inexplicable  circumstance  which  baffled  even  their  intelligence 
and  experience. 

“ It  is  a joke,”  said  Pencroft ; “ it  is  a trick  some  one  has 
played  us.  Well,  .1  don’t  like  such  jokes,  and  the  joker  had 
better  look  out  for  himself,  if  he  falls  into  my  hands,  I can  tell 
him.” 

As  soon  as  the  first  gleam  of  light  appeared  in  the  east,  the 
colonists,  suitably  armed,  repaired  to  the  beach  under  Granite 
House.  The  rising  sun  now  shone  on  the  cliff  and  they  could 
see  the  windows,  the  shutters  of  which  were  closed,  through 
the  curtains  of  foliage. 

All  here  was  in  order  ; but  a cry  escaped  the  colonists  when 
they  saw  that  the  door,  which  they  had  closed  on  their  depart- 
ure, was  now  wide  open. 

Some  one  had  entered  Granite  House— there  could  be  no 
more  doubt  about  that. 

The  upper  ladder,  which  generally  hung  from  the  door  to 


284 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


the  landing,  was  in  its  place,  but  the  lower  ladder  was  drawn 
up  and  raised  to  the  threshold.  It  was  evident  that  the 
intruders  had  wished  to  guard  themselves  against  a surprise, 

Pencrof t'  hailed  again. 

No  reply. 

“ The  beggars,”  exclaimed  the  sailor.  “ There  they  are  sleep- 
ing quietly  as  if  they  were  in  their  own  house.  Hallo  there, 
you  pirates,  brigands,  robbers,  sons  of  John  Bull !” 

When  Pencroft,  being  a Yankee,  treated  any  one  to  the 
epithet  of  “ son  of  John  Bull,”  he  considered  he  hac1  reached 
the  last  limits  of  insult. 

The  sun  had  now  completely  risen,  and  the  whole  facade 
of  Granite  House  became  illuminated  by  his  rays  ; but  in  the 
interior  as  well  as  on  the  exterior  all  was  quiet  and  calm. 

The  settlers  asked  if  Granite  House  was  inhabited  or  not, 
and  yet  the  position  of  the  ladder  was  sufficient  to  show  that  it 
was ; it  was  also  certain  that  the  inhabitants,  whoever  they 
might  be,  had  not  been  able  to  escape.  But  how  were  they  to 
be  got  at  ? 

Herbert  then  thought  of  fastening  a cord  to  an  arrow,  and 
shooting  the  arrow  so  that  it  should  pass  between  the  first 
rounds  of  the  ladder  which  hung  from  the  threshold.  By 
means  of  the  cord  they  would  then  be  able  to  draw  down  the 
ladder  to  the  ground,  and  so  re-establish  the  communication 
between  the  beach  and  Granite  House.  There  was  evidently 
nothing  else  to  be  done,  and,  with  a little  skill,  this  method 
might  succeed.  Very  fortunately  bows  and  arrows  had  been 
left  at  the  Chimneys,  where  they  also  found  a quantity  of  light 
hibiscus  cord.  Pencroft  fastened  this  to  a well  - feathered 
arrow.  Then  Herbert  fixing  it  to  his  bow,  took  a careful  aim 
for  the  lower  part  of  the  ladder. 

Cyrus  Harding,  Gideon  Spilett,  Pencroft,  and  Neb  drew 
back,  so  as  to  see  if  any  tiling  appeared  at  the  windows.  The 
reporter  lifted  his  gun  to  his  shoulder  and  covered  the  door. 

The  bow  was  bent,  the  arrow  flew,  taking  the  cord  with  it, 
and  passed  between  the  two  last  rounds. 

The  operation  had  succeeded. 

Herbert  immediately  seized  the  end  of  the  cord,  but,  at  that 


THE  ABANDONED. 


moment  when  _ he  gave  it  a pull  to  bring  down  the  ladder, 
an  arm,  thrust  suddenly  out  between  the  wall  and  the  door, 
grasped  it  and  dragged  it  inside  Granite  House. 

“The  rascals !”  shouted  the  sailor.  “If  a ball  can  do  any 
thing  for  you,  you  shall  not  have  long  to  wait  for  it.” 

“ But  who  was  it  ? ” asked  Neb. 

“ Who  was  it  ? Didn’t  you  see?” 

“No.” 

“It  was  a monkey,  a sapago,  an  orang-outang,  a baboon,  a 
gorilla,  a sagoin.  Our  dwelling  has  been  invaded  by  monkeys, 
who  climbed  up  the  ladder  during  our  absence.” 

And,  at  this  moment,  as  if  to  bear  witness  to  the  truth  of  the 
sailor’s  words,  two  or  three  quadrumana  showed  themselves 
at  the  windows,  from  which  they  had  pushed  back  the  shut- 
ters, and  saluted  the  real  proprietors  of  the  place  with  a 
thousand  hideous  grimaces. 

“I  knew  that  it  was  only  a joke,”  cried  Pencroft;  “but  one 
of  the  jokers  shall  pay  the  penalty  for  the  rest.” 

So  saying,  the  sailor,  raising  his  piece,  took  a rapid  aim  at 
one  of  the  monkeys  and  fired.  All  disappeared,  except  one 
who  fell  mortally  wounded  on  the  beach.  This  monkey,  which 
was  of  a large  size,  evidently  belonged  to  the  first  order  of  the 
quadrumana.  Whether  this  was  a chimpanzee,  an  orang- 
outang, or  a gorilla,  he  took  rank  among  the  anthropoid  apes, 
who  are  so  called  from  their  resemblance  to  the  human  race. 
However,  Herbert  declared  it  to  be  an  orang-outang. 

“ What  a magnificent  beast ! ” cried  Neb. 

“Magnificent,  if  you  like,”  replied  Pencroft;  “but  still  I 
do  not  see  how  we  are  to  get  into  our  house.” 

“ Herbert  is  a good  marksman,”  said  the  reporter,  “ and 
his  bow  is  here.  He  can  try  again.” 

“Why,  these  apes  are  so  cunning,”  returned  Pencroft; 
“ they  won’t  show  themselves  again  at  the  windows  and  so  we 
can’t  kill  them;  and  when  I think  of  the  mischief  they  may  do 
in  the  rooms  and  storehouse—” 

“ Have  patience,”  replied  Harding;  “ these  creatures  can  not 
keep  us  long  at  bay.” 

“I  shall  not  be  sure  of  that  till  I see  them  down  here,” 


286 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


replied  the  sailor.  “And  now,  captain,  do  you  know  how 
many  dozens  of  these  fellows  are  up  there  ? ” 

It  was  difficult  to  reply  to  Pencroft,  and  as  for  the  young 
boy  making  another  attempt,  that  was  not  easy;  for  the  lower 
part  of  the  ladder  had  been  drawn  again  into  the  door,  and 
when  another  pull  was  given,  the  line  broke  and  the  ladder 
remained  firm.  The  case  was  really  perplexing.  Pencroft 
stormed.  There  was  a comic  side  to  the  situation,  but  he  did 
not  think  it  funny  at  all.  It  was  certain  that  the  settlers  would 
end  by  reinstating  themselves  in  their  domicile  and  driving 
out  the  intruders,  but  when  and  how  ? this  is  what  they  were 
not  able  to  say. 

Two  hours  passed,  during  which  the  apes  took  care  not  to 
show  themselves,  but  they  were  still  there,  and  three  or  four 
times  a nose  or  a paw  was  poked  out  at  the  door  or  windows, 
and  was  immediately  saluted  by  a gun-shot. 

“Let  us  hide  ourselves,”  at  last  said  the  engineer.  “Per- 
haps the  apes  will  think  we  have  gone  quite  away  and  will 
show  themselves  again.  Let  Spilett  and  Herbert  conceal  them- 
selves behind  those  rocks  and  fire  on  all  that  may  appear.” 
The  engineer’s  orders  were  obeyed,  and  whilst  the  reporter 
and  the  lad,  the  best  marksmen  in  the  colony,  posted  them- 
selves in  a good  position,  but  out  of  the  monkeys’  sight,  Neb, 
Pencroft,  and  Cyrus  climbed  the  plateau  and  entered  the 
forest  in  order  to  kill  some  game,  for  it  was  now  time  for 
breakfast  and  they  had  no  provisions  remaining. 

In  half  an  hour  the  hunters  returned  with  a few  rock  pigeons, 
which  they  roasted  as  well  as  they  could.  Not  an  ape  had  ap- 
peared. Gideon  Spilett  and  Herbert  went  to  take  their  share 
of  the  breakfast,  leaving  Top  to  watch  under  the  windows. 
They  then,  having  eaten,  returned  to  their  post. 

Two  horn's  later,  their  situation  was  in  no  degree  improved. 
The  quadrumana  gave  no  sign  of  existence,  and  it  might  have 
been  supposed  that  they  had  disappeared;  but  what  seemed 
more  probable  was  that,  terrified  by  the  death  of  one  of  their 
companions,  and  frightened  by  the  noise  of  the  fire-arms,  they 
had  retreated  to  the  back  part  of  the  house  or  probably  even 
into  the  store-room.  And  when  they  thought  of  the  valuables 


Tftfc  &rfANIX>NKD. 


2$7 

whieh  this  store-room  oaitainecJ,  the  patience  so  much  recom- 
mended by  the  engineer,  fast  changed  into  great  Irritation,  and 
there  certainly  was  room  for  it. 

“Decidedly  it  is  too  bad,”  said  the  reporter;  “and  the  worst 
of  it  is,  there  is  no  way  of  putting  an  end  to  it.” 

“But  we  must  drive  these  vagabonds  out  somehow,”  cried 
the  sailor.  “We  could  soon  get  the  better  of  them,  even  if 
there  are  twenty  of  the  rascals;  but  for  that,  we  must  meet 
them  hand  to  hand.  Come  now,  is  there  no  way  of  getting 
at  them  ? ” 

“Let  us  try  to  enter  Granite  House  by  the  old  opening  at  the 
lake,”  replied  the  engineer. 

“ Oh  ! ” shouted  the  sailor,  “ and  I never  thought  of  that.” 

This  was  in  reality  the  only  way  by  which  to  penetrate  into 
the  Granite  House  so  as  to  fight  with  and  drive  out  the  in- 
truders. The  opening  was,  it  is  true,  closed  up  with  a wall  o T 
cemented  stones,  which  it  would  be  necessary  to  sacrifice,  but 
that  could  easily  be  rebuilt.  Fortunately,  Cyrus  Harding  had 
not  as  yet  effected  his  project  of  hiding  this  opening  by  raising 
the  waters  of  the  lake,  for  the  operation  would  then  have 
taken  some  time. 

It  was  already  past  twelve  o’clock,  when  the  colonists,  well 
armed  and  provided  with  picks  and  spades,  left  the  Chimneys, 
passed  beneath  the  windows  of  Granite  House,  after  telling 
Top  to  remain  at  his  post,  and  began  to  ascend  the  left  bank 
of  the  Mercy,  so  as  to  reach  Prospect  Heights. 

But  they  had  not  made  fifty  steps  in  this  direction,  when  they 
heard  the  dog  barking  furiously. 

And  all  rushed  down  the  bank  again. 

Arrived  at  the  turning,  they  saw  that  the  situation  had 
changed. 

In  fact,  the  apes,  seized  with  a sudden  panic,  from  some 
unknown  cause,  were  trying  to  escape.  Two  or  three  ran  and 
clambered  from  one  window  to  another  with  the  agility  of 
acrobats.  They  were  not  even  trying  to  replace  the  ladder, 
by  which  it  would  have  been  easy  to  descend;  perhaps  in 
their  terror  they  had  forgotten  this  way  of  escape.  The 
colonists,  now  being  able  to  take  aim  without  difficulty,  fired 


m 


TOE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


Some,  wounded  or  killed,  fell  back  into  the  rooms,  uttering 
piereing  cries.  The  rest,  throwing  themselves  out,  were  dashed 
to  pieces  in  their  fall,  and  in  a few  minutes,  so  far  as  they 
knew,  there  was  not  a living  quadrumana  in  Granite  House. 

At  this  moment  the  ladder  was  seen  to  slip  over  the  thres- 
hold, then  unroll  and  fall  to  the  ground. 

“ Hullo  ! ” cried  the  sailor,  “ this  is  queer ! ” 

“ Very  strange  !”  murmured  the  engineer,  leaping  first  up 
the  ladder. 

“ Take  care,  captain  ! ” cried  Pencroft,  “ perhaps  there  are 
still  some  of  these  rascals  * * ” 

44  We  shall  soon  see,”  replied  the  engineer,  without  stopping, 
however. 

All  his  companions  followed  him,  and  in  a minute  they  had 
arrived  at  the  threshold.  They  searched  everywhere.  There 
was  no  one  in  the  rooms  nor  in  the  storehouse,  which  had 
been  respected  by  the  band  of  quadrumana. 

“Well  now,  and  the  ladder,”  cried  the  sailor;  44 who  can  the 
gentleman  have  been  who  sent  us  that  down  ? ” 

But  at  that  moment  a cry  was  heard,  and  a great  orang,  who 
had  hidden  himself  in  the  passage,  rushed  into  the  room,  pur- 
sued by  Neb. 

44  Ah,  the  robber  ! ” cried  Pencroft. 

And  hatchet  in  hand,,  he  was  about  to  cleave  the  head  of  the 
animal,  when  Cyrus  Harding  seized  his  arm,  saying,— 

44  Spare  him,  Pencroft.” 

44  Pardon  this  rascal  ? ” 

44  Yes  ! it  was  he  who  threw  us  the  ladder ! ” 

And  the  engineer  said  this  in  such  a peculiar  voice  that 
it  was  difficult  to  know  whether  he  spoke  seriously  or  not. 

Nevertheless,  they  threw  themselves  on  the  orang,  who 
defended  himself  gallantly,  but  was  soon  overpowered  and 
bound. 

“There!”  said  Pencroft.  44 And  what  shall  we  make  of 
him,  now  we’ve  got  him  ? ” 

44  A servant !”  replied  Herbert. 

The  lad  was  not  joking  in  saying  this,  for  lie  knew  hew 
this  intelligent  race  could  be  turned  to  account. 


THE  ABANDONED. 


289 


The  settlers  then  approached  the  ape  and  gazed  at  it  atten- 
tively. He  belonged  to  the  family  of  anthropoid  apes,  of  which 
the  facial  angle  is  not  much  inferior  to  that  of  the  Australians 
and  Hottentots.  It  was  an  orang-outang,  and  as  such,  had 
neither  the  ferocity  of  the  gorilla,  nor  the  stupidity  of  the  ba- 
boon. It  is  to  this  family  of  the  anthropoid  apes  that  so  many 
characteristics  belong  which  prove  them  to  be  possessed  of  an 
almost  human  intelligence.  Employed  in  houses,  they  can 
wait  at  table,  sweep  rooms,  brush  clothes,  clean  boots,  handle  a 
knife,  fork,  and  spoon  properly,  and  even  drink  wine,  . . . 

doing  every  thing  as  well  as  the  best  servant  that  ever  walked 
upon  two  legs.  Buffon  possessed  one  of  these  apes,  who 
served  him  for  a long  time  as  a faithful  and  zealous  ser- 
vant. 

The  one  which  had  been  seized  in  the  hall  of  Granite 
House  was  a great  fellow,  six  feet  high,  with  an  admirably 
proportioned  frame,  a broad  chest,  head  of  a moderate  size, 
the  facial  angle  reaching  sixty-five  degrees,  round  skull,  pro- 
jecting nose,  skin  covered  with  soft  glossy  hair,  in  short,  a 
fine  specimen  of  the  anthropoids.  His  eyes,  rather  smaller 
than  human  eyes,  sparkled  with  intelligence;  his  white  teeth 
glittered  under  his  moustache,  and  he  wore  a little  curly  brown 
beard. 

“A  handsome  fellow!”  said  Pencroft;  “if  we  only  knew 
his  language,  we  could  talk  to  him.” 

“ But,  master,”  said  Neb,  “ are  you  serious  ? Are  we  going  to 
take  him  as  a servant  ? ” 

“ Yes,  Neb,”  replied  the  engineer,  smiling.  “ But  you  must 
not  be  jealous.” 

“And  I hope  he  will  make  an  excellent  servant,”  added 
Herbert.  “He  appears  young,  and  will  be  easy  to  educate, 
and  we  shall  not  be  obliged  to  use  force  to  subdue  him,  nor 
draw  his  teeth,  as  is  sometimes  done.  He  will  soon  grow  fond 
of  his  masters  if  they  are  kind  to  him.” 

“And  they  will  be,”  replied  Pencroft,  who  had  forgotten 
all  his  rancor  against  “ the  jokers.” 

Then,  approaching  the  orang,— 

“ Well,  old  boy ! ” he  asked,  “ how  are  you  ? 99 

It 


290 


THE  LAKESIBk** 


The  orang  replied  by  a little  grtml  which  did  not  show  any 
anger. 

“You  wish  to  join  the  colony?®  fgain  asked  the  sailor. 
“You  are  going  to  enter  the  seme©  of  Captain  Cyrus  Hard- 
ing ? ” 

Another  respondent  grunt  was  uttered  by  the  ape. 

“ And  you  will  be  satisfied  with  ©$*  *)ther  wages  than  your 
food?” 

Third  affirmative  grunt. 

“ This  conversation  is  slightly  monotonous,”  observed 
Gideon  Spilett. 

“So  much  the  better,”  replied  Pencroft;  “the  best  servants 
are  those  who  talk  the  least.  And  then,  no  wages,  do  you 
hear  my  boy  ? We  will  give  you  no  wages  at  first,  but  we 
will  double  them  afterward,  if  we  are  pleased  with  you.” 

Thus  the  colony  was  increased  by  a new  member.  As  to  his 
name,  the  sailor  begged  that  in  memory  of  another  ape  which 
he  had  known,  he  might  be  called  Jupiter,  and  Jup  for  short. 

And  so,  without  more  ceremony,  Master  Jup  was  installed  in 
Granite  House. 


CHAPTER  VII, 


WANS— ABRIDGE  OVER  THE  MERCY — MODE  ADOPTED  FOR  MAKING 
AN  ISLAND  OF  PROSPECT  HEIGHTS— THE  DRAW-BRIDGE — * 
HARVEST— THE  STREAM— THE  POULTRY  YARD— A PIGEON- 
HOUSE— THE  TWO  ONAGAS— THE  CART— EXCURSION  TO  PORT 
BALLOON. 

The  settlers  in  Lincoln  Island  had  now  regained  their  dwell- 
ing, without  having  been  obliged  to  reach  it  by  the  old  open- 
ing, and  were  therefore  spared  the  trouble  of  mason’s  work. 
It  was  certainly  lucky,  that  at  the  moment  they  were  about 
to  set  out  to  do  so,  the  apes  had  been  seized  with  that  terror, 
no  less  sudden  than  inexplicable,  which  had  driven  them 
out  of  Granite  House.  Had  the  animals  discovered  that  they 
were  about  to  be  attacked  from  another  direction?  This  was 
the  only  explanation  of  their  sudden  retreat.  During  the  day 
the  bodies  of  the  apes  were  carried  into  the  wood,  where  they 
were  buried;  then  the  settlers  busied  themselves  in  repairing 
the  disorder  caused  by  the  intruders,  disorder  but  not  damage, 
for  although  they  had  turned  every  thing  in  the  rooms  topsy- 
turvy, yet  they  had  broken  nothing.  Neb  relighted  his  stove, 
and  the  stores  in  the  larder  furnished  a substantial  repast, 
to  which  all  did  ample  justice. 

Jup  was  not  forgotten,  and  he  ate  with  relish  some  stone- 
pine  almonds,  and  rhizome  roots,  with  which  he  was  abun- 
dantly supplied.  Pencroft  had  unfastened  his  arms,  but 
judged  it  best  to  have  his  legs  tied  until  they  were  more  sure  of 
his  submission. 

Then,  before  retiring  to  rest,  Harding  and  his  companions 
seated  round  their  table,  discussed  those  plans,  the  execution 
©f  which  was  most  pressing.  The  most  important  and  most 
urgent  was  she  establishment  of  a bridge  over  the  Mercy,  so  as 

293 


m 


•J&E  l aseside  edition. 


to  form  a communication  with  the  southern  part  of  the  Island 
and  Granite  House ; then  the  making  an  inclosure  for  the 
musmons  or  other  woolly  animals  which  they  wished  to  capture. 

These  two  projects  would  help  to  solve  the  difficulty  as  to 
their  clothing,  which  was  now  serious.  The  bridge  would 
render  easy  the  transport  of  the  balloon  case,  which  would 
furnish  them  with  linen,  and  the  inhabitants  of  the  inclosure 
would  yield  wool  which  would  supply  them  with  winter 
clothes. 

As  to  the  enclosure,  it  was  Cyrus  Harding’s  intention  to 
establish  it  at  the  sources  of  the  Red  Creek,  where  the  rumi- 
nants would  find  fresh  and  abundant  pasture.  The  road 
between  Prospect  Heights  and  the  sources  of  the  stream  was 
already  partly  beaten,  and  with  a better  cart  than  the  first,  the 
material  could  be  easily  conveyed  to  the  spot,  especially  if  they 
could  manage  to  capture  some  animals  to  draw  it. 

But  though  there  might  be  no  inconvenience  in  the  enclos- 
ure being  so  far  from  Granite  House,  it  would  not  be  the 
same  with  the  poultry-yard,  to  which  Neb  called  the  attention 
of  the  colonists.  It  was  indeed  necessary  that  the  birds  should 
be  close  within  reach  of  the  cook,  and  no  place  appeared  more 
favorable  for  the  establishment  of  the  said  poultry-yard  than 
that  portion  of  the  banks  of  the  lake  which  was  close  to  the 
old  opening. 

Water-birds  would  prosper  there  as  well  as  others,  and  the 
couple  of  tinamous  taken  in  their  last  excursion  would  be  the 
first  to  be  domesticated. 

The  next  day,  the  Bd  of  November,  the  new  works  were 
begun  by  the  construction  of  the  bridge,  and  all  hands  were 
required  for  this  important  task.  Saws,  hatchets,  and  hammers 
were  shouldered  by  the  settlers,  who,  now  transformed  into 
carpenters,  descended  to  the  shore. 

There  Pencroft  observed,— 

“Suppose,  that  during  our  absence,  Master  Jup  takes  it  into 
his  head  to  draw  up  the  ladder  which  he  so  politely  returned  to 
us  yesterday?” 

‘Let  us  tie  its  lower  end  down  firmly,”  replied  Cyrus  Hard- 

ing. 


THE  ABANDONED. 


295 


This  was  done  by  means  of  two  stakes  securely  fixed  in  the 
6and.  Then  the  settlers,  ascending  the  left  bank  of  the  Mercy, 
soon  arrived  at  the  angle  formed  by  the  river. 

There,  they  halted,  in  order  to  ascertain  if  the  bridge  could 
be  thrown  across.  The  place  appeared  suitable. 

In  fact,  from  this  spot  to  Port  Balloon,  discovered  the  day 
before  on  the  southern  coast,  there  was  only  a distance  of 
three  miles  and  a half,  and  from  the  bridge  to  the  port,  it 
would  be  easy  to  make  a good  cart-road  which  would  render 
the  communication  between  Granite  House  and  the  south  of 
the  island  extremely  easy. 

Cyrus  Harding  now  imparted  to  his  companions  a scheme  for 
completely  isolating  Prospect  Heights  so  as  to  shelter  it  from 
the  attacks  both  of  quadrupeds  and  quadrumana.  In  this  way, 
Granite  House,  the  Chimneys,  the  poultry-yard,  and  all  the 
upper  part  of  the  plateau  which  was  to  be  used  for  cultivation, 
would  be  protected  against  the  depredations  of  animals. 

Nothing  could  be  easier  than  to  execute  this  project,  and  this 
is  how  the  engineer  intended  to  set  to  work  : 

The  plateau  was  already  defended  on  three  sides  by  water- 
courses, either  artificial  or  natural.  On  the  northwest,  by  the 
shores  of  Lake  Grant,  from  the  entrance  of  the  passage  to  the 
breach  made  in  the  banks  of  the  lake  by  the  escape  of  the 
water. 

On  the  north,  from  this  breach  to  the  sea,  by  the  new  water- 
course which  had  hollowed  out  a bed  for  itself  across  the 
plateau  and  shore,  above  and  below  the  fall,  and  it  would  be 
enough  to  dig  the  bed  of  this  creek  a little  deeper  to  make  it 
impracticable  for  animals,  on  all  the  eastern  border  by  the  sea 
itself,  from  the  mouth  of  the  aforesaid  creek  to  the  mouth  of 
the  Mercy.  Lastly,  on  the  south,  from  the  mouth  to  the  turn 
of  the  Mercy  where  the  bridge  was  to  be  established. 

The  western  border  of  the  plateau  now  remained  between 
the  turn  of  the  river  and  the  southern  angle  of  the  lake,  a 
distance  of  about  a mile,  which  was  open  to  all  comers.  But 
nothing  could  be  easier  than  to  dig  a broad  deep  difch,  which 
could  be  filled  from  the  lake,  and  the  overflow  of  which  would 
throw  itself  by  a rapid  fall  into  the  bed  of  the  Mercy.  The 


296 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


level  of  the  lake  would,  no  doubt,  be  somewhat  lowered  by 
this  fresh  discharge  of  its  waters,  but  Cyrus  Harding  had 
ascertained  that  the  volume  of  water  in  the  Red  Creek  was 
considerable  enough  to  allow  of  the  execution  of  this  pro- 
ject 

“So  then,”  added  the  engineer,  “Prospect  Heights  will 
become  a regular  island,  being  surrounded  with  water  on  all 
sides,  and  only  communicating  with  the  rest  of  our  domain  by 
the  bridge  which  we  are  about  to  throw  across  the  Mercy,  the 
two  little  bridges  already  established  above  and  below  the  fall ; 
and,  lastly,  two  other  little  bridges  which  must  be  constructed, 
one  over  the  canal  which  I propose  to  dig,  the  other  across  to 
the  left  bank  of  the  Mercy.  Now,  if  these  bridges  can  be 
raised  at  will,  Prospect  Heights  will  be  guarded  from  any  sur- 
prise.” 

The  bridge  was  the  most  urgent  work.  Trees  were  selected, 
cut  down,  stripped  of  their  branches,  and  cut  into  beams,  joists, 
and  planks.  The  end  of  the  bridge  which  rested  on  the  right 
bank  of  the  Mercy  was  to  be  firm,  but  the  other  end  on  the  left 
bank  was  to  be  moveable,  so  that  it  might  be  raised  by  means 
of  a counterpoise,  as  some  canal  bridges  are  managed. 

This  was  certainly  a considerable  work,  and  though  it  was 
skillfully  conducted,  it  took  some  time,  for  the  Mercy  at  this 
place  was  eighty  feet  wide.  It  was  therefore  necessary  to  fix 
piles  in  the  bed  of  the  river  so  as  to  sustain  the  floor  of  the 
bridge  and  establish  a pile-driver  to  act  on  the  tops  of  these 
piles,  which  would  thus  form  two  arches  and  allow  the  bridge 
to  support  heavy  loads. 

Happily  there  was  no  want  of  tools  with  which  to  shape  the 
wood,  nor  of  iron-work  to  make  it  firm,  nor  of  the  ingenuity 
of  a man  who  had  a marvellous  knowledge  of  the  work,  nor 
lastly,  the  zeal  of  his  companions,  who  in  seven  months  had 
necessarily  acquired  great  skill  in  the  use  of  their  tools;  and  it 
must  be  said  that  not  the  least  skillful  was  Gideon  Spilett,  who 
in  dexterity  almost  equalled  the  sailor  himself.  “Who  would 
ever  have  expected  so  much  from  a newspaper  man  I”  thought 
Pencrofh 

The  construction  of  the  Mercy  bridge  lasted  three  weeks  of 


THE  ABANDONED. 


m 


regular  hard  work.  They  even  breakfasted  on  the  scene  of 
their  labors,  and  the  weather  being  magnificent,  they  only 
returned  to  Granite  House  to  sleep. 

During  this  period  it  may  be  stated  that  Master  Jup  grew 
more  accustomed  to  his  new  masters,  whose  movements  he 
always  watched  with  very  inquisitive  eyes.  However,  as  a 
precautionary  measure,  Pencroft  did  not  as  yet  allow  him 
complete  liberty,  rightly  wishing  to  wait  until  the  limits  of 
the  plateau  should  be  settled  by  the  projected  works.  Top  and 
Jup  were  good  friends  and  played  willingly  together,  but  Jup 
did  every  thing  solemnly. 

On  the  26th  of  November  the  bridge  was  finished.  The  move- 
able  part,  balanced  by  the  counterpoise,  swung  easily,  and  only 
a slight  effort  was  needed  to  raise  it;  between  its  hinge  and 
the  last  cross-bar  on  which  it  rested  when  closed  there  existed 
a space  cf  twenty  feet,  which  was  sufficiently  wide  to  prevent 
any  animals  from  crossing. 

The  settlers  now  began  to  talk  of  fetching  the  balloon-case, 
which  they  were  anxious  to  place  in  perfect  security;  but  to 
bring  it,  it  would  be  necessary  to  take  a cart  to  Port  Balloon, 
and  consequently  necessary  to  beat  a road  through  the  dense 
forests  of  the  Ear  West.  This  would  take  some  time.  Also, 
Neb  and  Pencroft  having  gone  to  examine  into  the  state  of 
things  at  Port  Balloon,  and  reported  that  the  stock  of  cloth 
would  suffer  no  damage  in  the  grotto  where  it  was  stored,  it 
was  decided  that  the  work  at  Prospect  Heights  should  not 
be  discontinued. 

“ That,”  observed  Pencroft,  “ will  enable  us  to  establish  our 
poultry- yard  under  better  conditions,  since  we  need  have  no 
fear  of  visits  from  foxes  nor  the  attacks  of  other  beasts.” 

“ Then,”  added  Neb,  “ we  can  clear  the  plateau,  and  trans- 
plant wild  plants  to  it.” 

“ And  prepare  our  second  cornfield  F’  cried  the  sailor  with 
a triumphant  air. 

In  fact,  the  first  corn-field  sown  with  a single  grain  had 
prospered  admirably,  thanks  to  Pencroft’s  care.  It  had  pro- 
duced the  ten  ears  foretold  by  the  engineer,  and  each  ear 
containing  eighty  grains,  the  colony  found  itself  in  possession 


m 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


of  eight  hundred  grains,  in  six  months,  which  promised  a double 
harvest  each  year. 

These  eight  hundred  grains,  except  fifty,  which  were  pru- 
dently reserved,  were  to  be  sown  in  a new  field,  but  with  no 
less  care  than  was  bestowed  on  the  single  grain. 

The  field  was  prepared,  then  surrounded  with  a strong 
palisade,  high  and  pointed,  which  quadrupeds  would  have 
found  difficulty  in  leaping.  As  to  birds,  some  scarecrows,  due 
to  Pencroft’s  ingenious  brain,  were  enough  to  frighten  them. 
The  seven  hundred  and  fifty  grains  deposited  in  very  regular 
furrows,  were  then  left  for  nature  to  do  the  rest. 

On  the  21st  of  November,  Cyrus  Harding  began  to  plan 
the  canal  which  was  to  close  the  plateau  on  the  west,  from 
the  south  angle  of  Lake  Grant  to  the  angle  of  the  Mercy.  There 
was  there  two  or  three  feet  of  vegetable  earth,  and  below  that 
granite.  It  was  therefore  necessary  to  manufacture  some  more 
nitro-glycerine,  and  the  nitro-glycerine  did  its  accustomed 
work.  In  less  than  a fortnight  a ditch,  twelve  feet  wide  and 
six  deep,  was  dug  out  in  the  hard  ground  of  the  plateau.  A 
new  trench  was  made  by  the  same  means  in  the  rocky  border 
of  the  lake,  forming  a small  stream*,  to  which  they  gave  the 
name  of  Creek  Glycerine,  and  which  was  thus  an  affluent  of 
the  Mercy.  As  the  engineer  had  predicted,  the  level  of  the 
lake  was  lowered,  though  very  slightly.  To  complete  the 
enclosure  the  bed  of  the  stream  on  the  beach  was  considerably 
enlarged,  and  the  sand  supported  by  means  of  stakes. 

By  the  end  of  the  first  fortnight  of  December  these  works 
were  finished,  and  Prospect  Heights— that  is  to  say,  a sort  of 
irregular  pentagon,  having  a perimeter  of  nearly  four  miles, 
surrounded  by  a liquid  belt— was  completely  protected  from 
depredators  of  every  description. 

During  the  month  of  December,  the  heat  was  very  great. 
In  spite  of  it,  however,  the  settlers  continued  their  work,  and 
as  they  were  anxious  to  possess  a poultry-yard  they  forth- 
with commenced  it. 

It  is  useless  to  say  that  since  the  enclosing  of  the  plateau  had 
been  completed,  Master  Jup  had  been  set  at  liberty.  He  diL 
not  leave  his  masters,  and  evinced  no  wish  to  escapee  He  was 


THE  ABANDONED. 


290 


a gentle  animal,  though  very  powerful  and  wonderfully  active. 
He  was  already  taught  to  make  himself  useful  by  drawing 
loads  of  wood  and  carting  away  the  stones  which  were 
extracted  from  the  bed  of  Creek  Glycerine. 

The  poultry-yard  occupied  an  area  of  two  hundred  square 
yards,  on  the  southeastern  bank  of  the  lakd  It  was  surrounded 
by  a palisade,  and  in  it  were  constructed  various  shelters  for 
the  birds  which  were  to  populate  it.  These  were  simply  built 
of  branches  and  divided  into  compartments,  made  ready  for 
the  expected  guests.  - 

The  first  were  the  two  tinamous,  which  were,  not  long  in 
having  a number  of  young  ones;  they  had  for  companions  half 
a dozen  ducks,  accustomed  to  the  borders  of  the  lake.  Some 
belonged  to  the  Chinese  species,  of  which  the  wings  open  like  a 
fan,  and  which  by  the  brilliancy  of  their  plumage  rival  the 
golden  pheasants.  A few  days  afterwards,  Herbert  snared  a 
couple  of  gallinacese,  with  spreading  tails  composed  of  long 
feathers,  magnificent  alectors,.  which  soon  became  tame.  As  to 
pelicans,  kingfishers,  water-hens,  they  came  of  themselves  to 
the  shores  of  the  poultry-yard,  and  this  little  community,  after 
some  disputes,  cooing,  screaming,  clucking,  ended  by  settling 
down  peacefully,  and  increased  in  encouraging  proportion  for 
the  future  use  of  the  colony. 

Cyrus  Harding,  wishing  to  complete  his  performance, 
established  a pigeon-house  in  a corner  of  the  poultry-yard. 
There  he  lodged  a dozen  of  those  pigeons  which  frequented 
the  rocks  of  the  plateau.  These  birds  soon  became  accustomed 
to  returning  every  evening  to  their  new  dwelling,  and  showed 
more  disposition  to  domesticate  themselves  than  their  con- 
geners, the  wood-pigeons. 

Lastly,  the  time  had  come  for  turning  the  balloon-case  to 
use,  by  cutting  it  up  to  make  shirts  and  other  articles;  for  as 
to  keeping  it  in  its  present  form,  and  risking  themselves  in  a 
balloon  filled  with  gas,  above  a sea  of  the  limits  of  which  they 
had  no  idea,  it  was  not  to  be  thought  of. 

It  was  necessary  to  bring  the  case  to  Granite  House,  and 
the  colonists  employed  themselves  in  rendering  their  heavy 
cart  lighter  and  more  manageable. 


300 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


But  though  they  had  a vehicle,  the  moving  power  was  yet  to 
be  found. 

But  did  there  not  exist  in  the  island  some  animal  which 
might  gupply  the  place  of  the  horse,  ass,  or  ox?  That  was 
the  question. 

“Certainly,”  said  Pencroft,  “a  beast  of  burden  would  be 
very  useful  to  us  until  the  captain  has  made  a steam  cart,  or 
even  an  engine,  for  some  day  we  shall  have  a railroad  from 
Granite  House  to  Port  Balloon,  with  a branch  line  to  Mount 
Franklin ! ” 

One  day,  the  23rd  of  December,  Neb  and  Top  were  heard 
shouting  and  barking,  each  apparently  trying  who  could 
make  the  most  noise.  The  settlers,  who  were  busy  at  the 
Chimneys,  ran,  fearing  some  vexatious  incident. 

What  did  they  see  ? Two  fine  animals  of  a large  size,  who 
had  imprudently  ventured  on  the  plateau,  when  the  bridges 
were  open.  One  would  have  said  they  were  horses,  or  at 
ieast  donkeys,  male  and  female,  of  a fine  shape,  dove-colored, 
the  legs  and  tail  white,  striped  with  black  on  the  head  and 
neck.  They  advanced  quietly  without  showing  any  uneasiness, 
and  gazed  at  the  men,  in  whom  they  could  not  as  yet  re- 
cognize their  future  masters. 

“These  are  onagas!”  -cried  Herbert,  “animals  something 
between  the  zebra  and  the  conaga ! ” 

“ Why  not  donkeys  ? ” asked  Neb. 

“Because  they  have  not  long  ears,  and  their  shape  is  more 
graceful.” 

“Donkeys  or  horses,”  interrupted  Pencroft,  “they  are 
‘ moving  powers,’  as  the  captain  would  say,  and  as  such  must 
be  captured ! ” 

The  sailor,  without  frightening  the  animals,  crept  through 
the  grass  to  the  bridge  over  Creek  Glycerine,  lowered  it,  ana 
the  onagas  were  prisoners. 

Now,  should  they  seize  them  with  violence  and  master  them 
by  force  ? No.  It  was  decided  that  for  a few  days  they  should 
be  allowed  to  roam  freely  about  the  plateau,  where  there 
was  au  abundance  of  grass,  and  the  engineer  immediately 
began  tc  prepare  a stable  near  the  poultry-yard,  in  which  the 


THE  ABANDONED. 


801 


onagas  might  find  food,  with  a good  litter,  and  shelter  during 
the  night. 

This  done,  the  movements  of  the  two  magnificent  creatures 
were  left  entirely  free,  and  the  settlers  avoided  even  approach- 
ing them  so  as  to  terrify  them.  Several  times,  however,  the 
onagas  appeared  to  wish  to  leave  the  plateau,  too  confined  for 
animals  accustomed  to  the  plains  and  forests.  They  were  then 
seen  following  the  water-barrier  which  every  where  presented 
itself  before  them,  uttering  short  neighs,  then  galloping  through 
the  grass,  and  becoming  calmer,  they  would  remain  entire 
hours  gazing  at  the  woods,  from  which  they  were  cut  off  for 
ever ! In  the  meantime  harness  of  vegetable  fiber  had  been 
manufactured,  and  some  days  after  the  capture  of  the  onagas, 
not  only  the  cart  was  ready,  but  a straight  road,  or  rather  a 
cutting,  had  been  made  through  the  forests  of  the  Far  West, 
from  the  angle  of  the  Mercy  to  Port  Balloon.  The  cart  might 
then  be  driven  there,  and  towards  the  end  of  December  they 
tried  the  onagas  for  the  first  time. 

Pencroft  had  already  coaxed  the  animals  to  come  and  eat 
out  of  his  hand,  and  they  allowed  him  to  approach  without 
making  any  difficulty,  but  once  harnessed  they  reared  and 
could  with  difficulty  be  held  in.  However,  it  was  not  long 
before  they  submitted  to  this  new  service,  for  the  onaga,  being 
less  refractory  than  the  zebra,  is  frequently  put  in  harness  in 
the  mountainous  regions  of  Southern  Africa,  and  it  has  even 
been  acclimatized  in  Europe,  under  zones  of  a relative  coolness. 
On  this  day  all  the  colony,  except  Pencroft  who  walked  at 
the  animals’  heads,  mounted  the  cart,  and  set  out  on  the  road 
to  Port  Balloon. 

Of  course  they  were  jolted  over  the  somewhat  rough  road, 
but  the  vehicle  arrived  without  any  accident,  and  was  soon 
loaded  with  the  case  and  rigging  of  the  balloon. 

At  eight  o’clock  that  evening  the  cart,  after  passing  over  the 
Mercy  bridge,  descended  the  left  bank  of  the  river,  and  stopped 
on  the  beach.  The  onagas  being  unharnessed,  were  thence 
led  to  their  stable,  and  Pencroft  before  going  to  sleep  gave 
vent  to  his  feelings  in  a deep  sigh  of  satisfaction  that  awoke 
all  the  echoes  of  Granite  House. 


CHAPTER  VIII 


LINEN — SHOES  OF  SEAL-LEATHER— MANUFACTURE  OF  PYROXYLE— 
GARDENING  — FISHING  — TURTLE-EGGS  — IMPROVEMENT  OF 
MASTER  JUP— THE  CORRAL  — MUSMON  HUNT  — NEW  ANIMAL 
AND  VEGETABLE  POSSESSIONS  — RECOLLECTIONS  OF  THEIR 
NATIVE  LAND. 

The  first  week  of  January  was  devoted  to  the  manufacture 
of  the  linen  garments  required  by  the  colony.  The  needles 
found  in  the  box  were  used  by  sturdy  if  not  delicate  fingers, 
and  we  may  be  sure  that  what  was  sewn  was  sewn  firmly. 

There  was  no  lack  of  thread,  thanks  to  Cyrus  Harding’s  idea 
of  re- employing  that  which  had  been  already  used  in  the  cov- 
ering of  the  balloon.  This  with  admirable  patience  was  all 
unpicked  by  Gideon  Spilett  and  Herbert,  for  Pencroft  had  been 
obliged  to  give  this  work  up,  as  it  irritated  him  beyond 
measure ; but  he  had  no  equal  in  the  sewing  part  of  the  busi- 
ness. Indeed,  every  body  knows  that  sailors  have  a remark- 
able aptitude  for  tailoring. 

The  cloth  of  which  the  balloon-case  was  made  was  then 
cleansed  by  means  of  soda  and  potash,  obtained  by  the  inciner- 
ation of  plants,  in  such  a way  that  the  cotton,  having  got  rid 
of  the  varnish,  resumed  its  natural  softness  and  elasticity; 
then,  exposed  to  the  action  of  the  atmosphere,  it  soon  became 
perfectly  white.  Some  dozen  shirts  hnd  socks— the  latter  not 
knitted  of  course,  but  made  of  cotton — were  thus  manufac- 
tured. "What  a comfort  it  was  to  the  settlers  to  clothe  them- 
selves again  in  clean  linen,  which  was  doubtless  rather  rough, 
but  they  were  not  troubled  about  that ! and  then  to  go  to  sleep 
between  sheets,  which  made  the  couches  at  Granite  House  into 
quite  comfortable  beds ! 

It  was  about  this  time  also  that  they  made  boots  of  seal 

802 


THE  ABANDONED. 


303 


leather,  which  were  greatly  needed  to  replace  the  shoes 
and  boots  brought  from  America.  We  may  be  sure  that 
these  new  shoes  were  large  enough  and  never  pinched  the 
feet  of  the  wearers. 

With  the  beginning  of  the  year  1866  the  heat  was  very  great, 
but  the  hunting  in  the  forests  did  not  stand  still.  Agoutis, 
peccaries,  capybaras,  kangaroos,  game  of  all  sorts,  actually 
swarmed  there,  and  Spillet  and  Herbert  were  too  good  marks- 
men ever  to  throw  away  their  shot  uselessly. 

Cyrus  Harding  still  recommended  them  to  husband  the 
ammunition,  and  he  took  measures  to  replace  the  powder  and 
shot  which  had  been  found  in  the  box,  and  which  he  wished 
to  reserve  for  the  future.  How  did  he  know  where  chance 
might  one  day  cast  his  companions  and  himself  in  the  event  of 
their  leaving  their  domain  ? They  should,  then,  prepare  for 
the  unknown  future  by  husbanding  their  ammunition  and  by 
substituting  for  it  some  easily  renewable  substance. 

To  replace  lead,  of  which  Harding  had  found  no  traces  in  the 
island,  he  employed  granulated  iron,  which  was  easy  to  manu- 
facture. These  bullets,  not  having  the  weight  of  leaden 
bullets,  were  made  larger,  and  each  charge  contained  less,  but 
the  skill  of  the  sportsmen  made  up  this  deficiency.  As  to 
powder,  Cyrus  Harding  would  have  been  able  to  make  that 
also,  for  he  had  at  his  disposal  saltpetre,  sulphur,  and  coal ; 
but  this  preparation  requires  extreme  care,  and  without 
special  tools  it  is  difficult  to  produce  it  of  a good  quality. 
Harding  preferred,  therefore,  to  manufacture  pvroxyle,  that  is 
to  say,  gun-cotton,  a substance  in  which  cotton  is  not  indispen- 
sable, as  the  elementary  tissue  of  vegetables  may  be  used,  and 
this  is  found  in  an  almost  pure  state,  not  only  in  cotton,  but  in 
the  textile  fibres  of  hemp  and  flax,  in  paper,  the  pith  of  the 
elder,  etc.  Now,  the  elder  abounded  in  the  island  towards  the 
mouth  of  Red  Creek,  and  the  colonists  had  already  made  coffee 
of  the  berries  of  these  shrubs,  which  belong  to  the  family  of 
the  caprifoliacese. 

The  only  thing  to  be  collected,  therefore,  was  elder-pith,  for 
as  to  the  other  substance  necessary  for  the  manufacture  of 
pyroxyle,  it  was  only  fuming  azolic  acid.  Now,  Harding  having 


804 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


sulphuric  acid  at  his  disposal,  had  already  been  easily  able 
produce  azotic  acid  by  attacking  the  saltpetre  with  which 
nature  supplied  him.  He  accordingly  resolved  to  manufacture 
and  employ  pyroxyle,  although  it  had  some  inconveniencesi 
that  is  to  say,  a great  inequality  of  effect,  an  excessive  in- 
flammability, since  it  takes  fire  at  one  hundred  and  seventy 
degrees  instead  of  two  hundred  and  forty,  and  lastly,  an 
instantaneous  deflagration  which  might  damage  the  fire-arms. 
On  the  other  hand,  the  advantages  of  pyroxyle  consist  in  this, 
that  it  is  not  injured  by  damp,  that  it  does  not  make  the  gun- 
barrels  dirty,  and  that  its  force  is  four  times  that  of  ordinary 
powder. 

To  make  pyroxyle,  the  cotton  must  be  immersed  in  the 
fuming  azotic  acid  for  a quarter  of  an  hour,  then  washed  in  cold 
water  and  dried.  Nothing  could  be  more  simple. 

Cyrus  Harding  had  only  at  his  disposal  the  ordinary  azotic 
acid  and  not  the  fuming  or  monohydrate  azotic  acid,  that  is  to 
say,  acid  which  emits  white  vapors  when  it  comes  in  contact 
with  damp  air ; but  by  substituting  for  the  latter  ordinary 
azotic  acid,  mixed,  in  the  proportion  of  from  three  to  five 
volumes  of  concentrated  sulphuric  acid,  the  engineer  obtained 
the  same  result.  The  sportsmen  of  the  island  therefore  soon 
had  a perfectly  prepared  substance,  which,  employed  discreetly, 
produced  admirable  results. 

About  this  time  the  settlers  cleared  three  acres  of  the 
plateau,  and  the  rest  was  preserved  in  a wild  state,  for  the 
benefit  of  the  onagas.  Several  excursions  were  made  into  the 
Jacamar  woods  and  forests  of  the  Far  West,  and  they  brought 
back  from  thence  a large  collection  of  wild  vegetables, 
spinage,  cress,  radishes,  and  turnips,  which  careful  culture 
would  soon  improve,  and  which  would  temper  the  regimen 
on  which  the  settlers  had  till  then  subsisted.  Supplies  of  wood 
and  coal  were  also  carted.  Each  excursion  was  at  the  same 
time  a means  of  improving  the  roads,  which  gradually  became 
smoother  under  the  wheels  of  the  cart. 

The  rabbit-warren  still  continued  to  supply  the  larder  of 
Granite  House.  As  fortunately  it  was  situated  on  the  othei 
side  of  Creek  Glycerine,  its  inhabitants  could  not  reach  the 


THE  ABANDONED. 


305 


plateau  nor  ravage  the  newly-made  plantation.  The  oyster-bed 
among  the  rocks  were  frequently  renewed,  and  furnished 
excellent  molluscs.  Besides  that,  the  fishing,  either  in  the 
lake  or  the  Mercy,  was  very  profitable,  for  Pencroft  had  made 
some  lines,  armed  with  iron  hooks,  with  which  they  frequently 
caught  fine  trout,  and  a species  of  fish  whose  silvery  sides  were 
speckled  with  yellow,  and  which  were  also  extremely  savory. 
Master  Neb,  who  was  skilled  in  the  culinary  art,  knew  how  to 
vary  agreeably  the  bill  of  fare.  Bread  alone  was  wanting  at 
the  table  of  the  settlers,  and  as  has  been  said,  they  felt  this 
privation  greatly. 

The  settlers  hunted  too  the  turtles  which  frequented  the 
shores  of  Cape  Mandible.  At  this  place  the  beach  was  covered 
with  little  mounds,  concealing  perfectly  spherical  turtles’  eggs, 
with  white  hard  shells,  the  albumen  of  which  does  not  coagu- 
late as  that  of  birds’  eggs.  They  were  hatched  by  the  sun,  and 
their  number  was  naturally  considerable,  as  each  turtle  can  lay 
annually  two  hundred  and  fifty. 

“A  regular  egg-field,”  observed  Gideon  Spilett,  “and  we 
have  nothing  to  do  but  to  pick  them  up.” 

But  not  being  contented  with  simply  the  produce,  they 
made  chase  after  the  producers,  the  result  of  which  was  that 
they  were  able  to  bring  back  to  Granite  House  a dozen  of  these 
chelonians,  which  were  really  valuable  in  an  alimentary  point 
of  view.  The  turtle  soup,  flavored  with  aromatic  herbs,  often 
gained  well-merited  praises  for  its  preparer,  Neb. 

We  must  here  mention  another  fortunate  circumstance  by 
which  new  stores  for  the  winter  were  laid  in.  Shoals  of 
salmon  entered  the  Mercy,  and  ascended  the  country  for  several 
miles.  It  was  the  time  at  which  the  females,  going  to  find 
suitable  places  in  which  to  spawn,  precede  the  males  and 
make  a great  noise  through  the  fresh  water.  A thousand  of 
these  fish,  which  measured  about  two  feet  and  a half  in  length, 
came  up  the  river,  and  a large  quantity  were  retained  by  fixing 
dams  across'  the  stream.  More  than  a hundred  were  thus 
taken,  which  were  salted  and  stored  for  the  time  when  winter, 
freezing  up  the  streams,  would  render  fishing  impracticable. 
By  this  time  the  intelligent  Jup  was  raised  to  the  duty  of  valet, 
20 


806 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


He  had  been  dressed  in  a jacket,  white  linen  breeches,  and  an 
apron,  the  pockets  of  which  were  his  delight.  The  clever 
orang  had  been  marvellously  trained  by  Neb,  and  any  one 
would  have  said  that  the  negro  and  the  ape  understood  each 
other  when  they  talked  together.  Jup  had  besides  a real 
affection  for  Neb,  and  Neb  returned  it.  When  his  services  were 
not  required,  either  for  carrying  wood  or  for  climbing  to  the 
top  of  some  tree,  Jup  passed  the  greatest  part  of  his  time  in  the 
kitchen,  where  he  endeavored  to  imitate  Neb  in  all  that  he 
saw  him  do.  The  black  showed  the  greatest  patience  and 
even  extreme  zeal  in  instructing  his  pupil,  and  the  pupil 
exhibited  remarkable  intelligence  in  profiting  by  the  lessons  he 
received  from  his  master. 

Judge  then  of  the  pleasure  Master  Jup  gave  to  the  inhabi- 
tants of  Granite  House  when,  without  their  having  had  any 
idea  of  it,  he  appeared  one  day,  napkin  on  his  arm,  ready  to 
wait  at  table.  Quick,  attentive,  he  acquitted  himself  perfectly, 
changing  the  plates,  bringing  dishes,  pouring  out  water,  all 
with  a gravity  which  gave  intense  amusement  to  the  settler^ 
and  which  enraptured  Pencroft. 

“ Jup,  some  soup ! ” 

“Jup,  a little  agouti  I” 

“ Jup,  a plate ! ” 

“ Jup  ! Good  Jup ! Honest  Jup ! 99 

Nothing  was  heard  but  that,  and  Jup  without  ever  being 
disconcerted,  replied  to  every  one,  watched  for  every  thing,  and 
he  shook  his  head  in  a knowing  way  when  Pencroft,  referring 
to  his  joke  of  the  first  day,  said  to  him,— 

“ Decidedly,  Jup,  your  wages  must  be  doubled.” 

It  is  useless  to  say  that  the  orang  was  now  thoroughly 
domesticated  at  Granite  House,  and  that  he  often  accompanied 
his  masters  to  the  forest  without  showing  any  wish  to  leave 
them.  It  was  most  amusing  to  see  him  walking  with  a stick 
which  Pencroft  had  given  him,  and  which  he  carried  on  his 
shoulder  like  a gun.  If  they  wished  to  gather  some  fruit  from 
the  summit  of  a tree,  how  quickly  he  climbed  for  it.  If  the 
wheel  of  the  cart  stuck  in  the  mud,  with  what  energy  did 
Jup  with  a single  heave  of  his  shoulder  put  it  right  again. 


THE  ABANDONED. 


807 


“ What  a jolly  fellow  he  is ! ” cried  Pencroft  often.  “ If 
he  was  as  mischievous  as  he  is  good,  there  would  be  no  doing 
any  thing  with  him ! ” 

It  was  towards  the  end  of  January  the  colonists  began  their 
labors  in  the  center  of  the  island.  It  had  been  decided  that  a 
corral  should  be  established  near  the  sources  of  the  Red  Creek, 
at  the  foot  of  Mount  Franklin,  destined  to  contain  the  rumin- 
ants, whose  presence  would  have  been  troublesome  at  Granite 
House,  and  especially  for  the  musmons,  who  were  to  supply 
the  wool  for  the  settlers’  winter  garments. 

Each  morning,  the  colony,  sometimes  entire,  but  more  often 
represented  only  by  Harding,  Herbert,  and  Pencroft,  proceeded 
to  the  sources  of  the  Creek,  a distance  of  not  more  than  five 
miles,  by  the  newly  beaten  road  tow  hich  the  name  of  Corral 
Road  had  been  given. 

There  a site  was  chosen,  at  the  back  of  the  southern  ridge 
of  the  mountain.  It  was  a meadow  land,  dotted  here  and  there 
with  clumps  of  trees,  and  watered  by  a little  stream,  which 
sprung  from  the  slopes  which  closed  it  in  on  one  side.  The 
grass  was  fresh,  and  it  was  not  too  much  shaded  by  the  trees 
which  grew  about  it.  This  meadow  was  to  be  surrounded 
by  a palisade,  high  enough  to  prevent  even  the  most  agile  ani- 
mals from  leaping  over.  This  enclosure  would  be  large  enough 
to  contain  a hundred  musmons  and  wild  goats,  with  all  the 
young  ones  they  might  produce. 

The  perimeter  of  the  corral  was  then  traced  by  the  engineer, 
and  they  would  then  have  proceeded  to  fell  the  trees  necessary 
for  the  construction  of  the  palisade,  but  as  the  opening  up 
of  the  road  had  already  necessitated  the  sacrifice  of  a consider- 
able number,  those  were  brought  and  supplied  a hundred 
stakes,  which  were  firmly  fixed  in  the  ground. 

At  the  front  part  of  the  palisade  a large  entrance  was  re- 
served, and  closed  with  strong  folding-doors. 

The  construction  of  this  corral  did  not  take  less  than  three 
weeks,  for  besides  the  palisade,  Cyrus  Harding  built  large 
sheds,  in  which  the  animals  could  take  shelter.  These  build- 
ings had  also  to  be  made  very  strong,  for  musmons  are  power- 
ful animals,  and  their  first  fury  was  to  be  feared.  The  stakes, 


r THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


sharpened  at  their  upper  end  and  hardened  by  fire,  had  been 
fixed  by  means  of  cross-bars,  and  at  regular  distances  props 
assured  the  solidity  of  the  whole. 

The  corral  finished,  a raid  had  to  be  made  on  the  pastures 
frequented  by  the  ruminants.  This  was  done  on  the  7th  of 
February,  on  a beautiful  summer’s  day,  and  every  one  took 
part  in  it.  The  onagas,  already  well  trained,  were  ridden  by 
Spilett  and  Herbert,  and  were  of  great  use. 

The  manoeuvre  consisted  simply  in  surrounding  the  mus- 
mons  and  goats,  and  gradually  narrowing  the  circle  around 
them.  Cyrus  Harding,  Pencroft,  Neb,  and  Jup,  posted  them- 
selves in  different  parts  of  the  wood,  whilst  the  two  cavaliers 
and  Top  galloped  in  a radius  of  half  a mile  round  the  corral. 

The  musmons  were  very  numerous  in  this  part  of  the  island. 
These  fine  animals  were  as  large  as  deer;  their  horns  were 
stronger  than  those  of  the  ram,  and  dheir  gray-colored  fleece 
was  mixed  with  long  hair. 

This  hunting  day  was  very  fatiguing.  Such  going  and 
coming,  and  running  and  riding  and  shouting ! Of  a hun- 
dred musmons  which  had  been  surrounded,  more  than  two- 
thirds  escaped,  but  at  last,  thirty  of  these  animals  and  ten 
wild  goats  were  gradually  driven  back  towards  the  corral, 
the  opening  door  of  which  appearing  to  offer  a means  of 
escape,  they  rushed  in  and  were  prisoners. 

In  short,  the  result  was  satisfactory,  and  the  settlers  had 
no  reason  to  complain.  There  was  no  doubt  that  the  flock 
would  prosper,  and  that  at  no  distant  time  not  only  wool  but 
hides  would  be  abundant. 

That  evening  the  hunters  returned  to  Granite  House  quite 
exhausted.  However,  notwithstanding  their  fatigue,  they  re- 
turned the  next  day  to  visit  the  corral.  The  prisoners  had 
been  trying  to  overthrow  the  palisade,  but  of  course  had  not 
succeeded,  and  were  not  long  in  becoming  more  tranquil. 

During  the  month  of  February,  no  event  of  any  importance 
occurred.  The  daily  labors  were  pursued  methodically,  and,  as 
well  as  improving  the  roads  to  the  corral  and  to  Port  Balloon, 
a third  was  commenced,  which,  starting  from  the  enclosure, 
proceeded  towards  the  western  coast.  The  yet  unknown  pop 


'fHE  ABANDONED. 


lion  of  Lin  corn  Island  was  that  of  the  wood-covered  Serpentine 
Peninsula,  which  sheltered  the  wild  beasts,  from  which 
Gideon  Spilett  was  so  anxious  to  clear  their  domain. 

Before  the  cold  season  should  appear  the  most  assiduous 
care  was  given  to  the  cultivation  of  the  wild  plants  which  had 
been  transplanted  from  the  forest  to  Prospect  Heights.  Her- 
bert never  returned  from  an  excursion  without  bringing  home 
some  useful  vegetable.  One  day,  it  was  some  specimens  of 
the  chicory  tribe,  the  seeds  of  which  by  pressure  yield  an  excel- 
lent oil;  another,  it  was  some  common  sorrel,  whose  anti- 
scorbutic qualities  were  not  to  be  despised;  then,  some  of 
those  precious  tubers,  which  have  at  all  times  been  cultivated 
in  South  America,  potatoes,  of  which  more  than  two  hundred 
species  are  now  known.  The  kitchen  garden,  now  well 
stocked  and  carefully  defended  from  the  birds,  was  divided  into 
small  beds,  where  grew  lettuces,  kidney  potatoes,  sorrel,  tur- 
nips, radishes,  and  other  cruciferse.  The  soil  on  the  plateau 
was  particularly  fertile,  and  it  was  hoped  that  the  harvests 
would  be  abundant. 

They  had  also  a variety  of  different  beverages,  and  so  long 
as  they  did  not  demand  wine,  the  most  hard  to  please  would 
>ave  had  no  reason  to  complain.  To  the  Oswego  tea,  and  the 
fermented  liquor  extracted  from  the  roots  of  the  draggonnier, 
Harding  had  added  a regular  beer,  made  from  the  young 
shoots  of  the  spruce-fir,  which,  after  having  been  boiled  and 
fermented  made  that  agreeable  drink,  called  by  the  Anglo- 
Americans  spring-beer. 

Towards  the  end  of  the  summer,  the  poultry-yard  was  pos- 
sessed of  a couple  of  fine  bustards,  which  belonged  to  the 
houbara  species,  characterized  by  a sort  of  feathery  mantle ; a 
dozen  shovellers,  whose  upper  mandible  was  prolonged  on 
each  side  oy  a membraneous  appendage ; and  also  some  mag- 
nificent cocks,  similar  to  the  Mozambique  cocks,  the  comb, 
caruncle,  and  epidermis  being  black.  So  far,  every  thing  had 
succeeded,  thanks  do  the  activity  of  these  courageous  and  in- 
telligent men.  Nature  did  much  for  them,  doubtless;  but 
faithful  to  the  great  precept,  they  made  a right  use  of  what  a 
bountiful  Providence  gave  fh^o. 


810 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


After  the  heat  of  these  warm  summer  days,  in  the  evening 
when  their  work  was  finished  and  the  sea  breeze  began  to 
blow,  they  liked  to  sit  on  the  edge  of  Prospect  Heights,  in  a 
sort  of  veranda,  covered  with  creepers,  which  Neb  had  made 
with  his  own  hands.  There  they  talked,  they  instructed  each 
other,  they  made  plans,  and  the  rough  good-humor  of  the 
sailor  always  amused  this  little  world,  in  which  the  most 
perfect  harmony  had  never  ceased  to  reign. 

They  often  spoke  of  their  country,  of  their  dear  and  great 
America.  What  was  the  result  of  the  War  of  Secession?  It 
could  not  have  been  greatly  prolonged.  Richmond  had  doubt- 
less soon  fallen  into  the  hands  of  General  Grant.  The  taking 
of  the  capital  of  the  Confederates  must  have  been  the  last 
action  of  tins  terrible  struggle.  Now  the  North  had  triumphed 
in  the  good  cause,  how  welcome  would  have  been  a news- 
paper to  the  exiles  in  Lincoln  Island  ! For  eleven  months  all 
communication  between  them  and  the  rest  of  their  fellow- 
creatures  had  been  interrupted,  and  in  a short  time  the  24th 
of  March  would  arrive,  the  anniversary  of  the  day  on  which 
the  balloon  had  thrown  them  on  this  unknown  coast.  They 
were  then  mere  castaways,  not  even  knowing  how  they  should 
preserve  their  miserable  lives  from  the  fury  of  the  elements! 
And  now,  thanks  to  the  knowledge  of  their  captain,  and  their 
own  intelligence,  they  were  regular  colonists,  furnished  with 
arms,  tools,  and  instruments;  they  had  been  able  to  turn  to 
their  profit  the  animals,  plants,  and  minerals  of  the  island, 
that  is  to  say,  the  three  kingdoms  of  Nature. 

Yes;  they  often  talked  of  all  these  things  and  formed  still 
more  plans  for  the  future. 

As  to  Cyrus  Harding  he  was  for  the  most  part  silent,  and 
listened  to  his  companions  more  often  than  he  spoke  to  them. 
Sometimes  he  smiled  at  Herbert’s  ideas  or  Pencroft’s  nonsense, 
but  always  and  every  where  he  pondered  over  those  inexplic- 
able facts,  that  strange  enigma,  of  which  the  secret  still  escaped 
him  I 


CHAPTER  IX< 


SAD  WEATHER— THE  HYDRAULIC  LIFT— MANUFACTURE  OF  GLASSh 
WARE— THE  BREAD-TREE— FREQUENT  VISITS  TO  THE  CORRAI, 
—INCREASE  OF  THE  FLOCK— THE  REPORTER’S  QUESTION — > 
EXACT  POSITION  OF  LINCOLN  ISLAND— PENCROFT’S  PROPOSAL. 

The  weather  changed  during  the  first  week  of  March.  There 
had  been  a full  moon  at  the  commencement  of  the  month,  and 
the  heat  was  still  excessive.  The  atmosphere  was  felt  to  he 
full  of  electricity,  and  a period  of  some  length  of  tempestuous 
weather  was  to  be  feared. 

Indeed,  on  the  2d,  peals  of  thunder  were  heard,  the  wind 
blew  from  the  east,  and  hail  rattled  against  the  facade  of 
Granite  House  like  volleys  of  grape-shot.  The  door  and 
windows  were  immediately  closed,  or  every  thing  in  the  rooms 
would  have  been  drenched.  On  seeing  these  hailstones,  some 
of  which  were  the  size  of  a pigeon’s  egg,  Pencroft’s  first 
thought  was  that  his  corn -field  was  in  serious  danger. 

He  directly  rushed  to  his  field,  where  little  green  heads  were 
already  appearing,  and,  by  means  of  a great  cloth,  he  managed 
to  protect  his  crop. 

This  bad  weather  lasted  a week,  during  which  time  the 
thunder  rolled  without  cessation  in  the  depths  of  the  sky. 

The  colonists,  not  having  any  pressing  work  out  of  doors, 
profited  by  the  bad  weather  to  work  at  the  interior  of  Granite 
House,  the  arrangement  of  which  was  becoming  more  com- 
plete from  day  to  day.  The  engineer  made  a turning-lathe, 
with  which  he  turned  several  articles  both  for  the  toilet  and 
the  kitchen,  particularly  buttons,  the  want  of  which  was 
greatly  felt.  A gun-rack  had  been  made  for  the  fire-arms, 
which  were  kept  with  extreme  care,  and  neither  tables  nor 
cupboards  -were  left  incomplete.  They  sawed,  they  planed, 

311 


312 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


they  filed,  they  turned;  and  during  the  whole  of  this  bad 
season*  nothing  was  heard  but  the  grinding  of  tools  or  the 
humming  of  the  burning-lathe  which  responded  to  the  growl- 
ing of  the  thunder. 

Master  Jup  had  not  been  forgotten,  and  he  occupied  a room 
at  the  back,  near  the  store-room,  a sort  of  cabin  with  a cot 
always  full  of  good  litter,  which  perfectly  suited  his  taste. 

“With  good  old  Jup  there  is  never  any  quarrelling,”  often 
repeated  Pencroft,  “never  any  improper  reply.  What  a 
servant,  Neb,  what  a servant ! ” 

Of  course  Jup  was  now  well  used  to  service.  He  brushed 
their  clothes,  he  turned  the  spit,  he  waited  at  table,  he  swept 
the  rooms,  he  gathered  wood,  and  he  performed  another 
admirable  piece  of  service  which  delighted  Pencroft— he  never 
went  to  sleep  without  first  coming  to  tuck  up  the  worthy  sailor 
in  his  bed. 

As  to  the  health  of  the  members  of  the  colony,  bipeds  or 
bimana,  quadrumana  or  quadrupeds,  it  left  nothing  to  be 
desired.  With  their  life  in  the  open  air,  on  this  salubrious 
soil,  under  that  temperate  zone,  working  with  both  head  and 
hands,  they  could  not  suppose  that  illness  would  ever  attach 
them. 

All  were  indeed  wonderfully  well.  Herbert  had  already 
grown  two  inches  in  the  year.  His  figure  was  forming  and 
becoming  more  manly,  and  he  promised  to  be  an  accomplished 
man,  physically  as  well  as  morally.  Besides  he  improved  him- 
self during  the  leisure  hours  which  manual  occupations  left 
to  him;  he  read  the  books  found  in  the  case;  and  after  the 
practical  lessons  which  were  taught  by  the  very  necessity  of 
their  position,  he  found  in  the  engineer^  for  science,  and  the 
reporter  for  languages,  masters  who  were  delighted  to  com- 
plete his  education. 

The  tempest  ended  about  the  9th  of  March,  but  the  sky 
remained  covered  with  clouds  during  the  whole  of  this  last 
summer  month.  The  atmosphere,  violently  agitated  by  the 
electric  commotion^  could  not  recover  its  former  purity,  and 
there  was  almost  invariably  rain  and  fog,  except  for  *hree  or 
four  fine  day^  mi  which  several  excursions  vvere  made.  Abau*< 


THE  ABANDONED. 


31S 


this  time  the  female  onaga  gave  birth  to  a young  one  which 
belonged  to  the  same  sex  as  its  mother,  and  which  throve 
capitally.  In  the  corral,  the  flock  of  musmons  had  also  in- 
creased, and  several  lambs  already  bleated  in  the  sheds,  to  the 
great  delight  of  Neb  a.#d  Herbert,  who  had  each  their  favorite 
among  these  new-comers.  An  attempt  was  also  made  for  the 
domestication  of  the  peccaries,  which  succeeded  well.  A sty 
was  constructed  near  the  poultry-yard,  and  soon  contained 
several  young  ones  in  the  way  to  become  civilized,  that  is  to 
say,  to  become  fat  under  Neb’s  care.  Master  Jup,  entrusted 
with  carrying  them  their  daily  nourishment,  leavings  from 
the  kitchen,  etc.,  acquitted  himself  conscientiously  of  his  task. 
He  sometimes  amused  himself  at  the  expense  of  his  little 
pensioners  by  tweaking  their  tails;  but  this  was  mischief,  and 
not  wickedness,  for  these  little  twisted  tails  amused  him  like  a 
plaything,  and  his  instinct  was  that  of  a child.  One  day  in 
this  month  of  March,  Pencroft,  talking  to  the  engineer,  re- 
minded Cyrus  Harding  of  a promise  which  the  latter  had  not 
as  yet  lad  time  to  fulfil. 

“You  once  spoke  of  an  apparatus  which  would  take  the 
place  of  the  long  ladders  at  Granite  House,  captain,”  said 
he;  “won’t  you  make  it  some  day  ?” 

“Nothing  will  be  easier;  but  is  this  a really  useful  thing  ?” 
“Certainly,  captain.  After  we  have  given  ourselves  neces- 
saries, let  us  think  a little  of  luxury.  For  us  it  may  be  luxury, 
if  you  like,  but  for  things  it  is  necessary.  It  isn’t  very  con- 
venient to  climb  up  a long  ladder  when  one  is  heavily  loaded.” 
“Well,  Pencroft,  we  will  try  to  please  you,”  replied  Cyrus 
Harding. 

“But  you  have  no  machine  at  your  disposal.” 

“ We  will  make  one.” 

“ A steam  machine  ? ” 

“ No,  a water  machine.” 

And,  indeed,  to  work  his  apparatus  there  was  already  a 
natural  force  at  the  disposal  of  the  engineer  which  could  be 
used  without  great  difficulty.  For  this,  it  was  enough  to 
augment  the  flow  of  the  little  stream  which  supplied  the  in- 
terior of  Granite  House  with  water.  The  opening  among  the 


$14 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


stones  and  grass  was  then  increased,  thus  producing  a strong 
fall  at  the  bottom  of  the  passage,  the  overflow  from  which 
escaped  by  the  inner  well.  Below  this  fall  the  engineer  fixed 
a cylinder  with  paddles,  which  was  joined  on  the  exterior 
with  a strong  cable  rolled  on  a wheel,  supporting  a basket.  In 
this  way,  by  means  of  a long  rope  reaching  to  the  ground, 
which  enabled  them  to  regulate  the  motive  power,  they  could 
rise  in  the  basket  to  the  door  of  Granite  House. 

It  was  on  the  17th  of  March  that  the  lift  acted  for  the  first 
time,  and  gave  universal  satisfaction.  Henceforward  all  the 
loads,  wood,  coal,  provisions,  and  even  the  settlers  themselves 
were  hoisted  by  this  simple  system,  which  replaced  the  prim- 
itive ladder,  and,  as  may  be  supposed,  no  one  thought  of  regret- 
ting the  change.  Top  particularly  was  enchanted  with  this 
improvement,  for  he  had  not,  and  never  could  have  possessed 
Master  Jup’s  skill  in  climbing  ladders,  and  often  it  was  on 
Neb’s  back,  or  even  on  that  of  the  orang  that  he  had  been 
obliged  to  make  the  ascent  to  Granite  House.  About  th's 
time,  too,  Cyrus  Harding  attempted  to  manufacture  glass,  and 
ie  at  first  put  the  old  pottery-kiln  to  this  new  use.  There 
were  some  difficulties  to  be  encountered;  but,  after  several 
fruitless  attempts,  he  succeeded  in  setting  up  a glass  manu- 
factory, which  Gideon  Spilett  and  Herbert,  his  usual  assist- 
ants, did  not  leave  for  several  days.  As  to  the  substances  used 
in  the  composition  of  glass,  they  are  simply  sand,  chalk,  and 
soda,  either  carbonate  or  sulphate.  Now  the  beach  supplied 
sand,  lime  supplied  chalk,  sea-weeds  supplied  soda,  pyrites 
supplied  sulphuric  acid,  and  the  ground  supplied  coal  to  heat 
the  kiln  to  the  wished-for  temperature.  Cyrus  Harding  thus 
soon  had  every  thing  ready  for  setting  to  work. 

The  tool,  the  manufacture  of  which  presented  the  most 
difficulty, was  the  pipe  of  the  glass-maker,  an  iron  tube,  five 
or  six  feet  long,  which  collects  on  one  end  the  material  in  a 
state  of  fusion.  But  by  means  of  a long,  thin  piece  of  iron 
rolled  up  like  the  barrel  of  a gun,  Pencroft  succeeded  in  mak- 
ing a tube  soon  ready  for  use. 

On  the  28th  of  March  the  tube  was  heated.  A hundred  parts 
of  sand,  thirty-five  of  chalk,  forty  of  sulphate  of  soda,  mixed 


THE  ABANDONED. 


315 


with  two  or  three  parts  of  powdered  coal,  composed  the  sub- 
stance, which  was  placed  in  crucibles.  When  the  high  tem- 
perature of  the  oven  had  reduced  it  to  a liquid,  or  rather  a 
pasty  state,  Cyrus  Harding  collected  with  the  tube  a quantity 
of  the  paste  : he  turned  it  about  on  a metal  plate,  previously 
arranged,  so  as  to  give  it  a form  suitable  for  blowing,  then  he 
passed  the  tube  to  Herbert,  telling  him  to  blow  at  the  other 
extremity. 

And  Herbert,  swelling  out  his  cheeks,  blew  so  much  and  so 
well  into  the  tube— taking  care  to  twirl  it  round  at  the  same 
time— that  his  breath  dilated  the  glassy  mass.  Other  quantities 
of  the  substance  in  a state  of  fusion  were  added  to  the  first, 
and  in  a short  time  the  result  was  a bubble  which  measured  a 
foot  in  diameter.  Harding  then  took  the  tube  out  of  Herbert’s 
hands,  and,  giving  to  it  a pendulous  motion,  he  ended  by 
lengthening  the  malleable  bubble  so  as  to  give  it  a cylindro- 
conic  shape. 

The  blowing  operation  had  given  a cylinder  of  glass 
terminated  by  two  hemispheric  caps,  which  were  easily 
detached  by  means  of  a sharp  iron  dipped  in  cold  water  ; 
then,  by  the  same  proceeding,  this  cylinder  was  cut  length- 
ways, and  after  having  been  rendered  malleable  by  a second 
heating,  it  was  extended  on  a plate  and  spread  out  with  a 
wooden  roller. 

The  first  pane  was  thus  manufactured,  and  they  had  only  to 
perform  this  operation  fifty  times  to  have  fifty  panes.  The 
windows  at  Granite  House  were  soon  furnished  with  panes  ; 
not  very  white,  perhaps,  but  still  sufficiently  transparent. 

As  to  bottles  and  tumblers,  that  was  only  play.  They  were 
satisfied  with  them,  besides,  just  as  they  came  from  the  end  of 
the  tube.  Pencroft  had  asked  to  be  allowed  to  “ blow  ” in  his 
turn,  and  it  was  great  fun  for  him;  but  he  blew  so  hard  that 
his  productions  took  the  most  ridiculous  shapes,  which  he 
admired  immensely. 

Cyrus  Harding  and  Herbert,  whilst  hunting  one  day,  had 
entered  the  forest  of  the  Far  West,  on  the  left  bank  of  the 
Mercy,  and,  as  usual,  the  lad  was  asking  a thousand  questions 
of  the  engineer,  who  answered  them  heartily.  Now,  as  Hard- 


316 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITIONo 


ing  ,was  not  a sportsman,  and  as,  on  the  other  side,  Herbert 
was  talking  chemistry  and  natural  philosophy,  numbers  of 
kangaroos,  capybaras,  and  agouties  came  within  range,  which, 
however,  escaped  the  lad’s  gun  ; the  consequence  was  that  the 
day  was  already  advanced,  and  the  two  hunters  were  in  danger 
of  having  made  a useless  excursion,  when  Herbert,  stopping, 
and  uttering  a cry  of  joy,  exclaimed,— 

“Oh,  Captain  Harding,  do  you  see  that  tree?”  and  he 
pointed  to  a shrub,  rather  than  a tree,  for  it  was  composed  of 
a single  stem,  covered  with  a scaly  bark,  which  bore  leaves 
streaked  with  little  parallel  veins. 

“And  what  is  this  tree  which  resembles  a little  palm?” 
asked  Harding. 

“ It  is  4 cycas  revoluta,’  of  which  I have  a picture  in  our 
dictionary  of  Natural  History ! ” said  Herbert. 

“ But  I can’t  see  any  fruit  on  this  shrub ! ” observed  his  com- 
panion. 

“ No,  captain,”  replied  Herbert ; “ but  its  stem  contains  a 
flour  with  which  nature  has  provided  us  all  ready  ground  ” 

“ It  is,  then,  the  bread-tree  ? ” 

“ Yes,  the  bread-tree.” 

“Well,  my  boy,”  replied  the  engineer,  “ this  is  a valuable  dis* 
covery,  since  our  wheat  harvest  is  not  yet  ripe  ; I hope  that 
you  are  not  mistaken ! ” 

Herbert  was  not  mistaken:  he  broke  the  stem  of  a cycas, 
which,  was  composed  of  a glandulous  tissue,  containing  a 
quantity  of  floury  pith,  traversed  with  woody  fiber,  separated 
by  rings  of  the  same  substance,  arranged  concentrically.  With 
this  fecula  was  mingled  a mucilaginous  juice  of  disagreeable 
flavor,  but  which  it  would  be  easy  to  get  rid  of  by  pressure. 
This  cellular  substance  was  regular  flour  of  a superior  quality, 
extremely  nourishing  ; its  exportation  was  formerly  forbidden 
by  the  Japanese  laws. 

Cyrus  Harding  and  Herbert,  after  having  examined  that 
part  of  the  Far  West  where  the  cycas  grew,  took  their  bear- 
ings, and  returned  to  Granite  House,  where  they  made  known 
their  discovery.  The  next  day  the  settlers  went  to  collect  some, 
and  returned  to  Granite  House  with  an  ample  supply  of  cycas 


THE  ABANDONED. 


m 

etems.  The  engineer  constructed  a press,  with  which  to 
extract  the  mucilaginous  juice  mingled  with  fecula,  and  he 
obtained  a large  quantity  of  flour,  which  Neb  soon  transformed 
into  cakes  and  puddings.  This  was  not  quite  real  wheaten 
bread,  but  it  was  very  like  it. 

Now,  too,  the  onaga,  the  goats,  and  the  sheep  in  the  corral 
furnished  daily  the  milk  necessary  to  the  colony.  The  cart, 
or  rather  a sort  of  light  carriole  which  had  replaced  it,  made 
frequent  journeys  to  the  corral,  and  when  it  was  Pencroft’s 
turn  to  go  he  took  Jup,  and  let  him  drive,  and  Jup,  crack- 
ing his  whip,  acquitted  himself  with  his  customary  intelli- 
gence. 

Every  thing  prospered,  as  well  in  the  corral  as  in  Granite 
House,'  and  certainly  the  settlers,  if  it  had  not  been  that  they 
were  so  far  from  their  native  land,  had  no  reason  to  com- 
plain. They  were  so  well  suited  to  this  life,  and  were, 
besides,  so  accustomed  to  the  island,  that  they  could  not  have 
left  its  hospitable  soil  without  regret ! 

And  yet  so  deeply  is  the  love  of  his  country  implanted  in 
the  heart  of  man,  that  if  a ship  had  unexpectedly  come  in 
sight  of  the  island,  the  colonists  would  have  made  signals, 
would  have  attracted  her  attention,  and  would  have  departed  ! 

It  was  the  1st  of  April,  a Sunday,  Easter  Bay,  which  Hard- 
ing and  his  companions  sanctified  by  rest  and  prayer.  The 
day  was  fine,  such  as  an  October  day  in  the  northern  4hemis- 
phere  might  be. 

All,  towards  the  evening  after  dinner,  were  seated  under  the 
verandah  on  the  edge  of  Prospect  Heights,  and  they  were 
watching  the  darkness  creeping  up  from  the  horizon.  Some 
cups  of  the  infusion  of  elder- berries,  which  took  the  place  of 
coffee,  had  been  served  by  Neb.  They  were  speaking  of  the 
island  and  of  its  isolated  situation  in  the  Pacific,  which  led 
Gideon  Spilett  to  say,— 

“My  dear  Cyrus,  have  you  ever,  since  you  possessed  the 
sextant  found  in  the  case,  again  taken  the  position  of  our 
island?” 

“ No,”  replied  the  engineer. 

•‘But  it  would  perhaps  be  a good  thing  to  do  it  with  this 


818 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


instrument,  which  is  more  perfect  than  that  which  you  before 
used.” 

“ What  is  the  good  ? ” said  Pencrof t.  “ The  island  is  quite 
comfortable  where  it  is ! ” 

“ Well,  who  knows,”  returned  the  reporter,  “ who  knows  but 
that  we  may  be  much  nearer  inhabited  land  than  we  think  ? ,r 

“ We  shall  know  to-morrow,”  replied  Cyrus  Harding,  “ and  if 
it  had  not  been  for  the  occupations  which  left  me  no  leisure, 
we  should  have  known  it  already.” 

“Good!”  said  Pencrof t.  “The  captain  is  too  good  an 

observer  to  be  mistaken,  and,  if  it  has  not  moved  from  its  place, 
the  island  is  just  where  he  put  it.” 

“We  shall  see.” 

On  the  next  day,  therefore,  by  means  of  the  sextant,  the  engi- 
neer made  the  necessary  observations  to  verify  the  position 
which  he  had  already  obtained,  and  this  was  the  result  of  his 
operation.  His  first  observation  had  given  him  for  the  situa* 
tion  of  Lincoln  Island,— 

In  west  longitude  : from  150°  to  155° ; 

In  south  latitude  : from  30*  to  35°. 

The  second  gave  exactly  : % 

In  longitude  : 150°  30', 

In  south  latitude  : 34°  57'. 

So  then,  nowithstanding  the  imperfection  of  his  apparatus, 
Cyrus  Harding  had  operated  with  so  much  skill  that  his 
error  did  not  exceed  five  degrees. 

“Now,”  said  Gideon  Spilett,  “since  we  possess  an  atlas  as 
well  as  a sextant,  let  us  see,  my  dear  Cyrus,  the  exact  position 
which  Lincoln  Island  occupies  in  the  Pacific.” 

Herbert  fetched  the  atlas,  and  the  map  of  the  Pacific  was 
opened,  and  the  engineer,  compass  in  hand,  prepared  to  deter 
mine  their  position. 

Suddenly  the  compasses  stopped,  and  he  exclaimed,— 

“ But  an  island  exists  in  this  part  of  the  Pacific  already ! ” 

“ An  island  ? ” cried  Pencroft. 


THE  ABANDONED. 


319 


“ Tabor  Island.” 

“ An  important  island  ? ” 

“No,  an  islet  lost  in  the  Pacific,  and  which  perhaps  has  never 
been  visited.” 

“ Well,  we  will  visit  it,”  said  Pencroft. 

“We?” 

“Yes,  captain.  We  will  build  a decked  boat,  and  I will 
undertake  to  steer  her.  At  what  distance  are  we  from  this 
Tabor  Island  ? ” 

“ About  a hundred  and  fifty  miles  to  the  northeast,”  replied 
Harding. 

“ A hundred  and  fifty  miles ! And  what’s  that  ? ” returned 
Pencroft.  “ In  forty-eight  hours,  with  a good  wind,  we  should 
sight  it ! ” 

And,  on  this  reply,  it  was  decided  that  a vessel  should  be 
constructed  in  time  to  be  launched  towards  the  month  of 
next  October,  on  the  return  of  the  fine  season. 


CHAPTER  X 


BOAT-BUILDING— SECOND  CROP  OF  CORN  — HUNTING  KOALAS— A 
NEW  PLANT,  MORE  PLEASANT  THAN  USEFUL— WHALE  IN 
SIGHT— A HARPOON  FROM  THE  VINEYARD— CUTTING  UP  THE 
WHALE— USE  FOR  THE  BONES— END  OF  THE  MONTH  OF  MAY 
— PENCROFT  HAS  NOTHING  LEFT  TO  WISH  FOR. 

When  Pencroft  had  once  got  a plan  into  his  head,  he  had 
no  peace  till  it  was  executed.  Now  he  wished  to  visit  Tabor 
Island,  and  as  a boat  of  a certain  size  was  necessary  for  tills 
voyage,  he  determined  to  build  one. 

What  wood  should  be  employed  ? Elm  or  fir,  both  of  which 
abounded  in  the  island  ? They  decided  for  the  fir,  as  being 
easy  to  work,  but  which  stands  water  as  well  as  the  elm. 

These  details  settled,  it  was  agreed  that  since  the  fine 
season  would  not  return  before  six  months,  Cyrus  Harding 
and  Pencroft  should  work  alone  at  the  boat.  Gideon  Spilett 
and  Herbert  were  to  continue  to  hunt,  and  neither  Neb  nor 
Master  Jup  his  assistant  were  to  leave  the  domestic  duties 
which  had  devolved  upon  them. 

Directly  the  trees  were  chosen,  they  were  felled,  stripped  of 
their  branches,  and  sawn  into  planks  as  well  as  sawyers  would 
have  been  able  to  do  it.  A week  after,  in  the  recess  between 
the  Chimneys  and  cliff,  a dockyard  was  prepared,  and  a keel 
five-and-thirty  feet  long,  furnished  with  a stern-post  at  the 
stern  and  a stem  at  the  bows,  lay  along  the  sand. 

Cyrus  Harding  was  not  working  in  the  dark  at  this  new 
Grade.  He  knew  as  much  about  ship-building  as  about  nearly 
every  thing  else,  and  he  had  at  first  drawn  the  model  of  his  ship 
on  paper.  Besides,  he  was  ably  seconded  by  Pencroft,  who, 
having  worked  for  several  years  in  a dockyard  at  Brooklyn, 
knew  the  practical  part  of  the  trade.  It  was  not  until  after 

820 


^ANDONED. 


321 


careful  calculation  and  deep  thought  that  the  timbers  were 
laid  on  the  keel. 

Pencroft,  as  may  be  believed,  was  all  eagerness  to  carry  out 
his  new  enterprise,  and  would  not  leave  his  work  for  an 
instant. 

A single  thing  had  the  honor  of  drawing  him,  but  for  one 
day  only,  from  his  dockyard.  This  was  the  second  wheat-har- 
vest, which  was  gathered  in  on  the  15th  of  April.  It  was  as 
much  a success  as  the  first,  and  yielded  the  number  of  grains 
which  had  been  predicted. 

“ Five  bushels,  captain,”  said  Pencroft,  after  having 
scrupulously  measured  his  treasure. 

“Five  bushels,”  replied  the  engineer;  “and  a hundred  and 
thirty  thousand  grains  a bushel  will  make  six  hundred  and 
fifty  thousand  grains.” 

“Well,  we  will  sow  them  all  this  time,”  said  the  sailor, 
“ except  a little  in  reserve.” 

“ Yes,  Pencroft,  and  if  the  next  crop  gives  a proportionate 
yield,  we  shall  have  four  thousand  bushels.” 

“ And  shall  we  eat  bread  ? ” 

“We  shall  eat  bread.” 

“ But  we  must  have  a mill.” 

“ We  will  make  one.” 

The  third  corn-field  was  very  much  larger  than  the  two  first, 
and  the  soil,  prepared  with  extreme  care,  received  the  precious 
seed.  That  done,  Pencroft  returned  to  his  work. 

During  this  time  Spilett  and  Herbert  hunted  in  the  neigh- 
borhood, and  they  ventured  deep  into  the  still  unknown  parts 
of  the  Far  West,  their  guns  loaded  with  ball,  ready  for  any 
dangerous  emergency.  It  was  a vast  thicket  of  magnificent 
trees,  crowded  together  as  if  pressed  for  room.  The  exploration 
of  these  dense  masses  of  wood  was  difficult  in  the  extreme, 
and  the  reporter  never  ventured  there  without  the  pocket- 
compass,  for  the  sun  scarcely  pierced  through  the  thick  foiiage, 
and  it  would  have  been  very  difficult  for  them  to  retrace  their 
way.  It  naturally  happened  that  game  was  more  rare  in  the  ie 
situations  where  there  was  hardly  sufficient  room  to  move , two 
or  three  large  herbivorous  animals  were  however  killed  during 
21 


822 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


the  last  fortnight  of  April.  These  were  koalas,  specimens  of 
which  the  settlers  had  already  seen  to  the  north  of  the  lake, 
and  which  stupidly  allowed  themselves  to  be  killed  among  the 
thick  branches  of  the  trees  in  which  they  took  refuge.  Their 
skins  were  brought  back  to  Granite  House,  and  there,  by  the 
help  of  sulphuric  acid,  they  were  subjected  to  a sort  of  tanning 
process  which  rendered  them  capable  of  being  used. 

On  the  30th  of  April,  the  two  sportsmen  were  in  the  depths 
of  the  Far  West,  when  the  reporter,  preceding  Herbert  a few 
paces,  arrived  in  a sort  of  clearing,  into  which  the  trees  more 
sparsely  scattered  had  permitted  a few  rays  to  penetrate. 
Gideon  Spilett  was  at  first  surprised  at  the  odor  which  exhaled 
from  certain  plants  with  slight  stalks,  round  and  branchy, 
bearing  grape-like  clusters  of  flowers  and  very  small  berries. 
The  reporter  broke  off  one  or  two  of  these  stalks  and  returned 
to  the  lad,  to  whom  he  said,— 

“ What  can  this  be,  Herbert  ? ” 

“Well,  Mr.  Spilett,”  said  Herbert,  “this  is  a treasure  which 
will  secure  you  Pencroft’s  gratitude  for  ever.” 

“ Is  it  tobacco  ? ” 

“Yes,  and  though  it  may  not  be  of  the  first  quality,  it  is 
none  the  less  tobacco  ! ” 

“ Oh,  good  old  Pencroft ! Won’t  he  be  pleased  ? But  we 
must  not  let  him  smoke  it  all,  he  must  give  us  our  share.” 

“Ah!  an  idea  occurs  to  me,  Mr.  Spilett,”  replied  Herbert. 
“ Don’t  let  us  say  any  thing  to  Pencroft  yet;  we  will  prepare 
these  leaves,  and  one  fine  day  we  will  present  him  with  a pipe 
already  filled ! ” 

“ All  right,  Herbert,  and  on  that  day  our  worthy  companion 
will  have  nothing  left  to  wish  for  in  this  world  ! ” 

The  reporter  and  the  lad  secured  a good  store  of  the  precious 
plant,  and  then  returned  to  Granite  House,  where  they 
smuggled  it  in  with  as  much  precaution  as  if  Pencroft  had 
been  the  most  vigilant  and  severe  of  custom-house  officers. 

Cyrus  Harding  and  Neb  were  taken  into  confidence,  and  the 
sailor  suspected  nothing  during  the  whole  time,  necessarily 
somewhat  long,  which  was  required  in  order  to  dry  the  small 
leaves,  chop  them  up,  and  subject  them  to  a certain  torrefac- 


THE  ABANDONED. 


tion  on  hot  stones.  This  took  two  months  ; but  all  these 
manipulations  were  successfully  carried  on  unknown  to  Pen- 
croft,  for,  occupied  with  the  construction  of  his  boat,  he  only 
returned  to  Granite  House  at  the  hoar  of  rest. 

For  some  days  they  had  observed  an  enormous  animal  two 
or  three  miles  out  in  the  open  sea  swimming  around  Lincoln 
Island.  This  was  a whale  of  the  largest  size,  which  apparently 
belonged  to  the  southern  species,  called  the  “ Cape  Whale.” 
“What  a lucky  chance  it  would  be  if  we  could  capture  it ! ” 
cried  the  sailor.  “ Ah ! if  we  only  had  a proper  boat  and  a 
good  harpoon,  I would  say,  ‘ After  the  beast ! ’ for  he  would  be 
well  worth  the  trouble  of  catching ! ” 

“ Well,  Pencroft,”  observed  Harding,  “ I should  much  like  to 
watch  you  handling  a harpoon.  It  would  be  very  interesting.” 
“ I am  astonished,”  said  the  reporter,  “ to  see  a whale  in  this 
comparatively  high  latitude.” 

“ Why  so,  Mr.  Spilett?  ” replied  Herbert.  “ WTe  are  exactly  in 
that  part  of  the  Pacific  which  English  and  American  whalemen 
call  the  whale  field,  and  it  is  here,  between  New  Zealand  and 
South  America,  that  the  whales  of  the  southern  hemisphere  are 
met  with  in  the  greatest  numbers.” 

And  Pencroft  returned  to  his  work,  not  without  uttering  a 
oigh  of  regret,  for  every  sailor  is  a born  fisherman,  and  if  the 
pleasure  of  fishing  is  in  exact  proportion  to  the  size  of  the 
animal,  one  can  judge  how  a whaler  feels  in  sight  of  a whale. 
And  if  this  had  only  been  for  pleasure ! But  they  could  not 
help  feeling  how  valuable  such  a prize  would  have  been  to  the 
colony,  for  the  oil,  the  fat,  and  the  bones  would  have  been  put 
to  many  uses. 

Now  it  happened  that  this  whale  appeared  to  have  no  wish 
to  leave  the  waters  of  the  island.  Therefore,  whether  from 
the  window  of  Granite  House,  or  from  Prospect  Heights,  Her- 
bert and  Gideon  Spilett,  when  they  were  not  hunting,  or  Neb 
unless  presiding  over  his  fires,  never  left  the  telescope,  but 
watched  all  the  animal’s  movements.  The  cetacean,  having 
entered  far  into  Union  Bay,  made  rapid  furrows  across  it  from 
Mandible  Cape  to  Claw  Cape,  propelled  by  its  enormously 
powerful  flukes,  on  which  it  supported  itself,  and  making  its 


824 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


way  through  the  water  at  a rate  little  short  of  twelve  knots  an 
hour.  Sometimes  also  it  approached  so  near  to  the  island  that 
it  could  be  clearly  distinguished.  It  was  the  southern  whale, 
which  is  completely  black,  the  head  being  more  depressed  than 
that  of  the  northern  whale. 

They  could  also  see  it  throwing  up  from  it3  air-holes  to  a 
great  height,  a cloud  of  vapor,  or  of  water,  for,  strange  as  it 
may  appear,  naturalists  and  whalers  are  not  agreed  on  this 
subject.  Is  it  air  or  is  it  water  which  is  thus  driven  out  ? It  is 
generally  admitted  to  be  vapor,  which,  condensing  suddenly  by 
contact  with  cold  air,  falls  again  as  rain. 

However,  the  presence  of  this  mammifer  preoccupied  the 
colonists.  It  irritated  Pencroft  especially,  as  he  could  think  of 
nothing  else  while  at  work.  He  ended  by  longing  for  it,  like  a 
child  for  a thing  which  it  has  been  denied.  At  night  he 
talked  about  it  in  his  sleep,  and  certainly  if  he  had  had  the 
means  of  attacking  it,  if  the  sloop  had  been  in  a fit  state  to  put 
to  sea,  he  would  not  have  hesitated  to  set  out  in  pursuit. 

But  what  the  colonists  could  not  do  for  themselves  chance 
did  for  them,  and  on  the  3rd  of  May,  shouts  from  Neb,  who  had 
stationed  himself  at  the  kitchen  window,  announced  that  the 
whale  was  stranded  on  the  beach  of  the  island. 

Herbert  and  Gideon  Spilett,  who  were  just  about  to  set  out 
hunting,  left  their  guns,  Pencroft  threw  down  his  axe,  and 
Harding  and  Neb  joining  their  companions,  all  rushed  towards 
the  scene  of  action. 

The  stranding  had  taken  place  on  the  beach  of  Flotsam 
Point,  three  miles  from  Granite  House,  and  at  high  tide.  It 
was  therefore  probable  that  the  cetacean  would  not  be  able  to 
extricate  itself  easily;  at  any  rate  it  was  best  to  hasten,  so  as  to 
cut  off  its  retreat  if  necessary.  They  ran  with  pickaxes  and 
iron-tipped  poles  in  their  hands,  passed  over  the  Mercy  bridge, 
descended  the  right  bank  of  the  river,  along  the  beach,  and  in 
les6  than  twenty  minutes  the  settlers  were  close  to  the 
enormous  animal,  above  which  flocks  of  birds  already  hovered. 

“ What  a monster ! ” cried  Neb. 

And  the  exclamation  was  natural,  for  it  was  a southern 
whale,  eighty  feet  long,  a giant  of  the  species,  probably  not 


THE  ABANDONED. 


325 


weighing  less  than  a hundred  and  fifty  thousand  pounds  r 
In  the  meanwhile,  the  monster  thus  stranded  did  not  move, 
nor  attempt  by  struggling  to  regain  the  water  whilst  the  tide 
was  still  high. 

It  was  dead,  and  a harpoon  was  sticking  out  of  its  left  side. 

“There  are  whalers  in  these  quarters,  then?”  said  Gideon 
Spilett  directly. 

“ Oh,  Mr.  Spilett,  that  doesn’t  prove  any  thing ! ” replied  Pen- 
croft.  “Whales  have  been  known  to  go  thousands  of  miles 
with  a harpoon  in  the  side,  and  this  one  might  even  have  been 
struck  in  the  north  of  the  Atlantic  and  come  to  die  in  the  south 
of  the  Pacific,  and  it  would  be  nothing  astonishing.” 

Pencroft,  having  torn  the  harpoon  from  the  animal’s  side, 
read  this  inscription  on  it 

“‘MARIA  STELLA,’ 

‘VINEYARD.’  ” 

“ A vessel  from  the  Vineyard ! A ship  from  my  country ! ” 
he  cried.  “ The  ‘ Maria  Stella ! ’ A fine  whaler,  ’pon  my  word  ; 
I know  her  well ! Oh,  my  friend,  a vessel  from  the  Vineyard ! 
— a whaler  from  the  Vineyard  ! ” * 

And  the  sailor  brandishing  the  harpoon,  repeated,  not  with- 
eit  emotion,  the  name  which  he  loved  so  well— the  name  of  his 
birthplace. 

But  as  it  could  not  be  expected  that  the  “Maria  Stella”  would 
come  to  reclaim  the  animal  harpooned  by  her,  they  resolved  to 
begin  cutting  it  up  before  decomposition  should  commence. 
The  birds,  who  had  watched  this  rich  prey  for  several  days,  had 
determined  to  take  possession  of  it  without  further  delay,  and 
it  was  necessary  to  drive  them  off  by  firing  at  them  repeatedly. 

The  whale  was  a female,  and  a large  quantity  of  milk  was 
taken  from  it,  which,  according  to  the  opinion  of  the  naturalist 
Duffenbach,  might  pass  for  cow’s  milk,  and,  indeed,  it  differs 
from  it  neither  in  taste,  color,  nor  density. 

Pencroft  had  formerly  served  on  board  a whaling-ship,  and 
he  could  methodically  direct  the  operation  of  cutting  up— a 
sufficiently  disagreeable  operation  lasting  three  days,  but  from 
* A port  in  the  State  of  Massachusetts. 


826 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


which  the  settlers  did  not  flinch,  not  even  Gideon  Spilett, 
who,  as  the  sailor  said,  would  end  by  making  a “ real  good 
castaway.” 

The  blubber,  cut  in  parallel  slices  of  two  feet  and  a half  in 
thickness,  then  divided  into  pieces  which  might  weigh  about 
a thousand  pounds  each,  was  melted  down  in  large  earthen 
pots  brought  to  the  spot,  for  they  did  not  wish  to  taint  the 
environs  of  Granite  House,  and  in  this  fusion  it  lost  nearly  a 
third  of  its  weight. 

But  there  was  an  immense  quantity  of  it ; the  tongue  alone 
yielded  six  thousand  pounds  of  oil,  and  the  lower  lip  four 
thousand.  Then,  besides  the  fat,  whi3h  would  insure  for  . a 
long  time  a store  of  stearine  and  glycerine,  there  were  still  the 
bones,  for  which  a use  could  doubtless  be  found,  although 
there  were  neither  umbrellas  nor  stays  used  at  Granite  House. 
The  upper  part  of  the  mouth  of  the  cetacean  was,  indeed, 
provided  on  both  sides  with  eight  hundred  horny  blades,  very 
elastic,  of  a fibrous  texture,  and  fringed  at  the  edge  like  great 
combs,  of  which  the  teeth,  six  feet  long,  served  to  retain  the 
thousands  of  animalculse,  little  fish,  and  molluscs,  on  which  the 
whale  fed. 

The  operation  finished,  to  the  great  satisfaction  of  the  oper- 
ators, the  remains  of  the  animal  were  left  to  the  birds,  who 
would  soon  make  every  vestige  of  it  disappear,  and  their 
usual  daily  occupations  were  resumed  by  the  inmates  of 
Granite  House. 

However,  before  returning  to  the  dockyard,  Cyrus  Harding 
conceived  the  idea  of  fabricating  certain  machines,  which 
greatly  excited  the  curiosity  of  his  companions.  He  took  a 
dozen  of  the  whale’s  bones,  cut  them  into  six  equal  parts,  and 
sharpened  their  ends. 

“ This  machine  is  not  my  own  invention,  and  it  is  frequently 
employed  by  the  Aleutian  hunters  in  Russian  America.  You 
see  these  bones,  my  friends;  well,  when  it  freezes,  I will  bend 
them,  and  then  wet  them  with  water  till  they  are  entirely 
covered  with  ice,  which  will  keep  them  bent,  and  I will  strew 
them  on  the  snow,  having  previously  covered  them  with  fat. 
Now,  what  will  happen  if  a hungry  animal  swallows  one  of 


THE  ABANDONED. 


327 


these  baits  ? Why,  the  heat  of  his  stomach  will  melt  the  ice, 
and  the  bone,  springing  straight,  will  pierce  him  with  its  sharp 
points.” 

‘‘Well ! I do  call  that  ingenious  !”  said  Pencroft. 

“And  it  will  spare  the  powder  and  shot,”  rejoined  Cyrus 
Harding. 

“ That  will  be  better  than  traps ! ” added  Neb. 

In  the  meanwhile  the  boat-building  progressed,  and  towards 
the  end  of  the  month  half  the  planking  was  completed.  It 
could  already  be  seen  that  her  shape  was  excellent,  and  that 
she  would  sail  well. 

Pencroft  worked  with  unparalleled  ardor,  and  only  a sturdy 
frame  could  have  borne  such  fatigue ; but  his  companions  were 
preparing  in  secret  a reward  for  his  labors,  and  on  the  31st  of 
May  he  was  to  meet  v/ith  one  of  the  greatest  joys  of  his  life. 

On  that  day,  after  .dinner,  just  as  he  was  about  to  leave  the 
table,  Pencroft  felt  a hand  on  his  shoulder. 

It  was  the  hand  of  Gideon  Spilett,  who  said,— 

“ One  moment,  Master  Pencroft,  you  mustn’t  sneak  off  like 
that ! You’ve  forgotten  your  dessert.” 

“Thank  you,  Mr.  Spilett,”  replied  the  sailor,  “I  am  going 
back  to  my  work.” 

“ Well,  a cup  of  coffee,  my  friend?” 

“ Nothing  more.” 

“A  pipe,  then?” 

Pencroft  jumped  up,  and  his  great  'good-natured  face  grew 
pale  when  he  saw  the  reporter  presenting  him  with  a ready- 
filled  pipe,  and  Herbert  with  a glowing  coal. 

The  sailor  endeavored  to  speak,  but  could  not  get  out  a 
word;  so,  seizing  the  pipe,  he  carried  it  to  his  lips,  then  apply- 
ing the  coal,  he  drew  five  or  six  great  whiffs.  A fragrant  blue 
cloud  soon  arose,  and  from  its  depths  a voice  was  heard 
repeating  excitedly,— 

“ Tobacco  ! real  tobacco  ! ” 

“Yes,  Pencroft,”  returned  Cyrus  Harding,  “and  very  good 
tobacco,  too ! ” 

“ 0,  Divine  Providence  ! sacred  Author  of  all  things  ! ” cried 
the  sailor.  “Nothing  more  is  now  wanting  on  our  island.” 


828  • THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 

And  Pencroft  smoked,  and  smoked,  and  smoked. 

“ And  who  made  this  discovery? 99  he  asked  at  length.  “ Yon, 
Herbert,  no  doubt  ?" 

“ No,  Pencroft,  it  was  Mr.  Spilett.” 

“Mr.  Spilett !”  exclaimed  the  sailor,  seizing  the  reporter,  and 
clasping  him  to  his  breast  with  such  a squeeze  that  he  had 
never  felt  any  thing  like  it  before. 

“Oh,  Pencroft,”  said  Spilett,  recovering  his  breath  at  last,  “a 
truce  for  one  moment.  You  must  share  your  gratitude  with 
Herbert,  who  recognized  the  plant,  with  Cyrus,  who  prepared 
it,  and  with  Neb,  who  took  a great  deal  of  trouble  to  keep  our 
secret.” 

“Well,  my  friends,  I will  repay  you  some  day,”  replied  the 
3aik>r.  “Now  we  are  friends  for  life,” 


CHAPTER  XI, 


WINTER — FELLING  WOOD— THE  MILL— PEN  CROFT’S  FIXED  IDEA 
—THE  BONES— TO  WHAT  USE  AN  ALBATROSS  MAY  BE  PUT- 
FUEL  FOR  THE  FUTURE— TOP  AND  JUP— STORMS— DAMAGE  TO 
THE  POULTRY-YARD  — EXCURSION  TO  THE  MARSH  — CYRUS 
HARDING  ALONE  — EXPLORING  THE  WELL. 

Winter  arrived  with  the  month  of  June,  which  is  the  Decem- 
ber of  the  northern  zones,  and  the  great  business  was  the 
making  of  warm  and  solid  clothing. 

The  musmons  in  the  corral  had  been  stripped  of  their  wool, 
and  this  precious  textile  material  was  now  to  be  transformed 
into  stuff. 

Of  course  Cyrus  Harding,  having  at  his  disposal  neither  card- 
ers, combers,  polishers,  stretchers,  twisters,  mule-jenny,  nor 
self-acting  machine  to  spin  the  wool,  nor  loom  to  weave  it, 
was  obliged  to  proceed  in  a simpler  way,  so  as  to  do  without 
spinning  and  weaving.  And  indeed  he  proposed  to  make  use 
of  the  property  which  the  filaments  of  wool  possess  when 
subjected  to  a powerful  pressure  of  mixing  together,  and  of 
manufacturing  by  this  simple  process  the  material  called  felt. 
This  felt  could  then  be  obtained  by  a simple  operation  which,  if 
it  diminished  the  flexibility  of  the  stuff,  increased  its  power  of 
retaining  heat  in  proportion.  Now  the  wool  furnished  by 
the  musmons  was  composed  of  very  short  hairs,  and  was  in  a 
good  condition  to  be  felted. 

The  engineer,  aided  by  his  companions,  including  Pencroft, 
who  was  once  more  obliged  to  leave  his  boat,  commenced  the 
preliminary  operations,  the  object  of  which  was  to  rid  the 
wool  of  that  fat  and  oily  substance  with  which  it  is  impregnated, 
and  which  is  called  grease.  This  cleaning  was  done  in  vats 
filled  with  water,  which  was  maintained  at  the  temperature 

829 


330 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


of  seventy  degrees,  and  in  which  the  wool  was  soaked  for  four- 
and- twenty  hours;  it  was  then  thoroughly  washed  in  baths  of 
soda,  and,  when  sufficiently  dried  by  pressure,  it  was  in  a state 
to  be  cono  pressed,  that  is  to  say,  to  produce  a solid  material, 
rough,  no  doubt,  and  such  as  would  have  no  value  in  a manu- 
facturing center  of  Europe  or  America,  but  which  would  be 
highly  esteemed  in  the  Lincoln  Island  markets. 

This  sort  of  material  must  have  been  known  from  the 
most  ancient  times,  and,  in  fact,  the  first  woollen  stuffs  were 
manufactured  by  the  process  which  Harding  was  now  about 
to  employ.  Where  Harding’s  engineering  qualifications  now 
came  into  play  was  in  the  construction  of  the  machine  for 
pressing  the  wool;  for  he  knew  how  to  turn  ingeniously  to 
profit  the  mechanical  force,  hitherto  unused,  which  the  water- 
fall on  the  beach  possessed  to  move  a fulling-mill. 

Nothing  could  be  more  rudimentary.  The  wool  was  placed 
in  troughs,  and  upon  it  fell  in  turns  heavy  wooden  mallets; 
such  was  the  machine  in  question,  and  such  it  had  been  for 
centuries  until  the  time  when*  the  mallets  were  replaced  by 
cylinders  of  compression,  and  the  material  was  no  longer 
subjected  to  beating,  but  to  regular  rolling. 

The  operation,  ably  directed  by  Cyrus  Harding,  was  a com- 
plete success.  The  wool,  previously  impregnated  with  a 
solution  of  soap,  intended  on  the  one  hand  to  facilitate  the 
interlacing,  the  compression,  and  the  softening  of  the  wool, 
and  on  the  other  to  prevent  its  diminution  by  the  beating, 
issued  from  the  mill  in  the  shape  of  thick  felt  cloth.  The 
roughnesses  with  which  the  staple  of  wool  is  naturally  filled 
were  so  thoroughly  entangled  and  interlaced  together  that  a 
material  as  formed  equally  suitable  either  for  garments  or 
bedclothes.  It  was  certainly  neither  merino,  muslin,  cashmere, 
rep,  satin,  alpaca,  cloth,  nor  flannel.  It  was  “Lincolnian 
felt,”  and  Lincoln  Island  possessed  yet  another  manufacture. 
The  colonists  had  now  warm  garments  and  thick  bed-clothes, 
and  they  could  without  fear  await  the  approach  of  the  winter 
of  1866-6;. 

The  severe  cold  began  to  be  felt  about  the  20th  of  June  and, 
to  his  great  regret,  Pencroft  was  obliged  tq  suspend  his 


THE  ABANDONED, 


831 


boat-building,  which  he  hoped  to  finish  in  time  for  next 
spring. 

The  sailor’s  great  idea  was  to  make  a voyage  of  discovery  t<? 
Tabor  Island,  although  Harding  could  not  approve  of  a voyage 
simply  for  curiosity’s  sake,  for  there  was  evidently  nothing  to  be 
found  on  this  desert  and  almost  arid  rock.  A voyage  of  a hun- 
dred and  fifty  miles  in  a comparatively  small  vessel,  over  urn 
known  seas,  could  not  but  cause  him  some  anxiety.  Suppose 
that  their  vessel,  once  out  at  sea,  should  be  unable  to  reach 
Tabor  Island,  and  could  not  return  to  Lincoln  Island,  what 
would  become  of  her  in  the  midst  of  the  Pacific,  so  fruitful  of 
disasters  ? 

Harding  often  talked  over  this  project  with  Pencroft,  and  he 
found  him  strangely  bent  upon  undertaking  this  voyage,  for 
which  determination  he  himself  could  give  no  sufficient  reason. 

“Now,”  said  the  engineer  one  day  to  him,  “I  must  observe, 
my  friend,  that  after  having  said  so  much  in  praise  of  Lincoln 
Island,  after  having  spoken  so  often  of  the  sorrow  you  would 
feel  if  you  were  obliged  to  forsake  it,  you  are  the  first  to  wish 
to  leave  it.” 

“ Only  to  leave  it  for  a few  days,”  replied  Pencroft,  “only  for 
a few  days,  captain.  Time  to  go  and  come  back,  and  see 
what  that  islet  is  like  ! ” 

“But  it  is  not  nearly  as  good  as  Lincoln  Island.” 

“ I know  that  beforehand.” 

“ Then  why  venture  there  ?” 

“ To  know  what  is  going  on  in  Tabor  Island.” 

“But  nothing  is  going  on  there;  nothing  could  happen  there.” 

“Who  knows  ?” 

“And  if  you  are  caught  in  a hurricane ? ” 

“ There  is  no  fear  of  that  in  the  fine  season,”  replied  Pencroft. 
“ But,  captain,  as  we  must  provide  against  every  thing,  I shall 
ask  your  permission  to  take  Herbert  only  with  me  on  this 
voyage.” 

“Pencroft,”  replied  the  engineer,  placing  his  hand  on  the 
sailor’s  shoulder,  “ if  any  misfortune  happens  to  you,  or  to  this 
lad,  whom  chance  has  made  our  child,  do  you  think  we  would 
ever  cease  to  blame  ourselves  ?” 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


832 

“ Captain  Harding,”  replied  Pencroft,  with  unshaken  confu 
dence,  “ we  shall  not  cause  you  that  sorrow.  Besides,  we  will 
speak  further  of  this  voyage,  when  the  time  comes  to  make  it. 
And  I fancy,  when  you  have  seen  our  tight-rigged  little  craft, 
when  you  have  observed  how  she  behaves  at  sea,  when  we  sail 
round  our  island,  for  we  will  do  so  together— I fancy,  I say,  that 
you  will  no  longer  hesitate  to  let  me  go.  I don’t  conceal  from 
you  that  your  boat  will  be  a masterpiece.” 

“Say  ‘our’  boat,  at  least,  Pencroft,”  replied  the  engineer,  sid- 
armed  for  the  moment.  The  conversation  ended  thus,  to  be 
resumed  later  on,  without  convincing  either  the  sailor  or  the 
engineer. 

The  first  snow  fell  towards  the  end  of  the  month  of  June. 
The  corral  had  previously  been  largely  supplied  with  stores,  so 
that  daily  visits  to  it  were  not  requisite;  but  it  was  decided 
that  more  than  a week  should  never  be  allowed  to  pass  without 
some  one  going,  to  it. 

Traps  were  again  set,  and  the  machines  manufactured  by 
Harding  were  tried.  The  bent  whalebones,  imprisoned  in  d 
case  of  ice,  and  covered  with  a tliiok  outer  layer  of  fat,  were 
placed  on  the  border  of  the  forest  at  a spot  where  animals 
usually  passed  on  their  way  to  the  lake. 

To  the  engineer’s  great  satisfaction,  this  invention,  copied 
from  the  Aleutian  fishermen,  succeeded  perfectly.  A dozen 
foxes,  a few  wild  boars,  and  even  a jaguar,  were  taken  in 
this  way,  the  animals  being  found  dead,  their  stomachs  pierced 
by  the  unbent  bones. 

An  incident  must  here  be  related,  not  only  as  interesting  in 
itself,  but  because  it  was  the  first  attempt  made  by  the  colo- 
nists to  communicate  with  the  rest  of  mankind. 

Gideon  Spiiett  had  already  several  times  pondered  whether 
to  throw  into  the  sea  a letter  enclosed  in  a bottle,  which  cur- 
rents might  perhaps  carry  to  an  inhabited  coast,  or  confide  it 
to  pigeons. 

But  how  could  it  be  seriously  hoped  that  either  pigeons  or 
bottles  could  cross  the  distance  of  twelve  hundred  miles  which 
separated  the  island  from  any  inhabited  land  ? It  would  have 
been  pure  folly. 


THE  ABANDONED. 


333 


But  on  the  30th  of  June  the  capture  was  effected,  not  without 
difficulty,  of  an  albatross,  which  a shot  from  Herbert’s  gun 
had  slightly  wounded  in  the  foot.  It  was  a magnificent  bird, 
measuring  ten  feet  from  wing  to  wing,  and  which  could 
traverse  seas  as  wide  as  the  Pacific. 

Herbert  would  have  liked  to  keep  this  superb  bird,  as  its 
wound  would  soon  heal,  and  he  thought  he  could  tame  it;  but 
Spilett  explained  to  him  that  they  should  not  neglect  this  op- 
portunity of  attempting  to  communicate  by  this  messenger 
with  the  lands  of  the  Pacific;  for  if  the  albatross  had  come 
from  some  inhabited  region,  there  was  no  doubt  but  that  it 
would  return  there  so  soon  as  it  was  set  free. 

Perhaps  in  his  heart  Gideon  Spilett,  in  whom  the  journalist 
some  times  came  to  the  surface,  was  not  sorry  to  have  the  op- 
portunity of  sending  forth  to  take  its  chance  an  exciting  article 
relating  the  adventures  of  the  settlers  in  Lincoln  Island.  What 
a success  for  the  authorized  reporter  of  the  New  York  Herald , 
and  for  the  number  which  should  contain  the  article,  if  it 
should  ever  nach  the  address  of  its  editor,  the  Honorable 
lames  Gordon  Bennett ! 

Gideon  Spilett  then  wrote  out  a concise  account,  which  was 
placed  in  a strong  waterproof  bag,  with  an  earnest  request 
io  whoever  might  find  it  to  forward  it  to  the  office  of  the  New 
York  Herald.  This  little  bag  was  fastened  to  the  neck  of  the 
albatross,  and  not  to  its  foot,  for  these  birds  are  in  the  habit  of 
resting  on  the  surface  of  the  sea;  then  liberty  was  given  to 
this  swift  courier  of  the  air,  and  it  was  not  without  some 
emotion  that  the  colonists  watched  it  disappear  in  the  misty 
west. 

“Where  is  he  going  to?”  asked  Pencroft. 

“ Towards  New  Zealand,”  replied  Herbert. 

“ A good  voyage  to  you,”  shouted  the  sailor,  who  himself  did 
not  expect  any  great  result  from  this  mode  of  correspondence. 

With  the  winter,  work  had  been  resumed  in  the  interior  of 
Granite  House,  mending  clothes  and  different  occupations, 
amongst  others  making  the  sails  for  their  vessel,  which  were 
cut  from  the  inexhaustible  balloon-case. 

During  the  month  of  July  the  cold  was  intense,  but  there 


m 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


was  no  lack  of  either  wood  or  coal.  Cyrus  Harding  had  estab- 
lished a second  fire-place  in  the  dining-room,  and  there  the 
long  winter  ev«iings  were  spent.  Talking  whilst  they  worked, 
reading  when  the  hands  remained  idle,  the  time  passed  with 
profit  to  alL 

It  was  real  enjoyment  to  the  settlers  when  in  their  room, 
well  lighted  with  candles,  well  warmed  with  coal,  after  a good 
dinner,  elder- berry  coffee  smoking  in  the  cups,  the  pipes  giving 
forth  an  odiferous  smoke,  they  could  hear  the  storm  howling 
without.  Their  comfort  would  have  been  complete,  if  com- 
plete comfort  could  ever  exist  for  those  who  are  far  from  their 
fellow  creatures,  and  without  any  means  of  communication 
with  them.  They  often  talked  of  their  country,  of  the  friends 
whom  they  had  left,  of  the  grandeur  of  the  American  Republic, 
whose  influence  could  not  but  increase,  and  Cyrus  Harding, 
who  had  been  much  mixed  up  with  the  affairs  of  the  Union, 
greatly  interested  his  auditors  by  his  recitals,  his  views,  and  his 
prognostics. 

L It  chanced  one  day  that  Spilett  was  led  to  say,— 

“ But  now,  my  dear  Cyrus,  all  this  industrial  and  commercial 
movement  to  which  you  predict  a continual  advance,  does 
it  not  run  the  danger  of  being  sooner  or  later  completely 
stopped?” 

“ Stopped ! And  by  what?” 

“ By  the  want  of  coal,  which  may  justly  be  called  the  most 
precious  of  minerals.” 

“Yes,  the  most  precious  indeed,”  replied  the  engineer;  “and 
it  would  seem  that  nature  wished  to  prove  that  it  was  so  by 
making  the  diamond,  which  is  simply  pure  carbon  crystallized.” 
“You  don’t  mean  to  say,  captain,”  interrupted  Pencroft, 
“ that  we  burn  diamonds  in  our  stoves  in  the  shape  of  coal?” 
“No,  my  friend,”  replied  Harding. 

“ However,”  resumed  Gideon  Spilett,  “ you  do  not  deny  that 
some  day  the  coal  will  be  entirely  consumed?” 

“ Oh ! the  veins  of  coal  are  still  considerable*  and  the  hundred 
thousand  miners  who  annually  extract  from  them  a hundred 
millions  of  hundred-weights  have  not  nearly  exhausted  them.” 
“With  the  increasing  consumption  of  coal,”  replied  Gideon 


THE  ABANDONED. 


336 


Spilett,  “ it  can  be  foreseen  that  the  hundred  thousand  work- 
men will  soon  become  two  hundred  thousand,  and  that  the  rate 
of  extraction  will  be  doubled.” 

“ Doubtless  ; but  after  the  European  mines,  which  will  be 
soon  worked  more  thoroughly  with  new  machines,  the  Amerh 
can  and  Australian  mines  will  for  a long  time  yet  provide  for 
the  consumption  in  trade.” 

“ For  how  long  a time  ?”  asked  the  reporter. 

“For  at  least  two  hundred  and  fifty  or  three  hundred 
years.” 

“ That  is  reassuring  for  us,  but  a bad  look  out  for  our  great 
grandchildren  ? ” observed  Pencroft. 

“ They  will  discover  something  else,”  said  Herbert. 

“It  is  to  be  hoped  so,”  answered  Spilett,  “for  without  coal 
-here  would  be  no  machinery,  and  without  machinery  there 
would  be  no  railways,  no  steamers,  no  manufactories,  nothing 
of  that  which  is  indispensable  to  modern  civilization ! ” 

“But  what  will  they  find?”  asked  Pencroft.  “Can  you 
guess,  captain  ?” 

“ Nearly,  my  friend.” 

“ And  what  will  they  burn  instead  of  coal  ? ” 

“ Water,”  replied  Harding. 

“ Water ! ” cried  Pencroft,  “ water  as  fuel  for  steamers  and 
engines ! water  to  heat  water ! ” 

“Yes,  but  water  decomposed  into  its  primitive  elements,” 
replied  Cyrus  Harding,  “and  decomposed  doubtless,  by  elec- 
tricity, which  will  then  have  become  a powerful  and  manage- 
able force,  for  all  great  discoveries,  by  some  inexplicable  law, 
appear  to  agree  and  become  complete  at  the  same  time.  Yes, 
my  friends,  I believe  that  water  will  one  day  be  employed  as 
fuel,  that  hydrogen  and  oxygen  which  constitute  it,  used  singly 
or  together,  will  furnish  an  inexhaustible  source  of  heat  and 
light,  of  an  intensity  of  which  coal  is  not  capable.  Some  day 
the  coal-rooms  of  steamers  and  the  tenders  of  locomotives  will, 
instead  of  coal,  be  stored  with  these  two  condensed  gases, 
which  will  burn  in  the  furnaces  with  enormous  caloric  power. 
There  is,  therefore,  nothing  to  fear.  As  long  as  the  earth  is 
inhabited  it  will  supply  the  wants  of  its  inhabitants,  and  there 


886 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


will  be  no  want  of  either  light  or  heat  as  long  as  the  produc- 
t*'*  of  the  vegetable,  mineral  or  animal  kingdoms  do  not 
fail  1 believe,  then,  that  when  the  deposits  of  coal  are 
exhausted,  we  shall  heat  and  warm  ourselves  with  water. 
Water  will  be  the  coal  of  the  future.” 

“ I should  like  to  see  that,”  observed  the  sailor. 

“You  were  born  too  soon,  Pencroft,”  returned  Neb,  who 
only  took  part  in  the  discussion  by  these  words. 

However,  it  was  not  Neb’s  speech  which  interrupted  the 
conversation,  but  Top’s  barking,  which  broke  out  again  with 
that  strange  intonation  which  had  before  perplexed  the  engi- 
neer. At  the  same  time  Top  began  to  run  round  the  mouth  of 
the  well,  which  opened  at  the  extremity  of  the  interior  passage. 

“ What  can  Top  be  barking  in  that  way  for  ? ” asked  Pencroft. 

“ And  Jup  be  growling  like  that?”  added  Herbert. 

In  fact  the  orang,  joining  the  dog,  gave  unequivocal  signs 
of  agitation,  and,  singular  to  say,  the  two  animals  appeared 
more  uneasy  than  angry. 

“ It  is  evident,”  said  Gideon  Spilett,  “ that  this  well  is  in 
direct  communication  with  the  sea,  and  that  some  marine 
animal  comes  from  time  to  time  to  breathe  at  the  bottom.” 

“ That’s  evident,”  replied  the  sailor,  “ and  there  can  be  no 
other  explanation  to  give.  Quiet  there,  Top ! ” added  Pencroft, 
turning  to  the  dog,  “and  you,  Jup,  be  otf  to  your  room !” 

The  ape  and  the  dog  were  silent.  Jup  went  off  to  bed,  but 
Top  remained  in  the  room,  and  continued  to  utter  low  growls 
at  intervals  during  the  rest  of  the  evening.  There  was  no 
further  talk  on  the  subject,  but  the  incident,  however,  clouded 
the  brow  of  the  engineer. 

During  the  remainder  of  the  month  of  July  there  was 
alternate  rain  and  frost.  The  temperature  was  not  so  low  as 
during  the  preceding  winter,  and  its  maximum  did  not  exceed 
eight  degrees  Fahrenheit.  But  although  this  winter  was  less 
cold,  it  was  more  troubled  by  storms  and  squalls ; the  sea 
besides  often  endangered  the  safety  of  the  Chimneys.  At 
times  it  almost  seemed  as  if  an  under-current  raised  these 
monstrous  billows  which  thundered  against  the  wall  of  Granite 
House. 


THE  ABANDONED. 


331 


'When  the  settlers,  leaning  from  their  windows,  gazed  on  the 
huge  watery  masses  breaking  beneath  their  eyes,  they  could 
not  but  admire  the  magnificent  spectacle  of  the  ocean  in  its 
impotent  fury.  The  waves  rebounded  in  dazzling  foam,  the 
beach  entirely  disappearing  under  the  raging  flood,  and  the 
cliff  appearing  to  emerge  from  the  sea  itself,  the  spray  rising 
to  n height  of  more  than  a hundred  feet. 

During  these  storms  it  was  difficult  and  even  dangerous  to 
venture  out,  owing  to  the  frequently  falling  trees  ; however, 
the  colonists  never  allowed  a week  to  pass  without  having 
paid  a visit  to  the  corral.  Happily  this  enclosure,  sheltered  by 
the  southeastern  spur  of  Mount  Franklin,  did  not  greatly 
suffer  from  the  violence  of  the  hurricanes,  which  spared  its 
trees,  sheds,  and  palisades  ; but  the  poultry-yard  on  Prospect 
Heights,  being  directly  exposed  to  the  gusts  of  wind  from  the 
east,  suffered  considerable  damage.  The  pigeon-house  was 
twice  unroofed  and  the  paling  blown  down.  All  this  required 
to  be  re-made  more  solidly  than  before,  for,  as  may  be  clearly 
seen,  Lincoln  Island  was  situated  in  one  of  the  most  danger- 
ous parts  of  the  Pacific.  It  really  appeared  as  if  it  formed  the 
central  point  of  vast  cyclones,  which  beat  it  perpetually  as 
the  whip  does  the  top,  only  here  it  was  the  top  which  was 
motionless  and  the  whip  which  moved.  During  the  first  week 
of  the  month  of  August  the  weather  became  more  moderate, 
and  the  atmosphere  recovered  the  calm  which  it  appeared  to 
have  lost  for  ever.  With  the  calm  the  cold  again  became 
intense,  and  the  thermometer  fell  to  eight  degrees,  Fahrenheit, 
below  zero. 

On  the  3rd  of  August  an  excursion  which  had  been  talked 
of  for  several  days,  was  made  into  the  southeastern  part  of  the 
island,  towards  Tadom  Marsh.  The  hunters  were  tempted  by 
the  aquatic  game  which  took  up  their  winter-quarters  there. 
Wild  duck,  snipe,  teal,  and  grebe,  abounded  there,  and  it  was 
agreed  that  a day  should  be  devoted  to  an  expedition  against 
these  birds.  Not  only  Gideon  Spilett  and  Herbert,  but  Pen- 
croft  and  Neb  also  took  part  in  this  excursion.  Cyrus  Harding 
alone,  alleging  some  work  as  an  excuse,  did  not  join  them,  but 
remained  at  Granite  House. 

22 


338 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


The  hunters  proceeded  in  the  direction  of  Port  Balloon,  i\ 
order  to  reach  the  marsh,  after  having  promised  to  be  back  by 
the  evening.  Top  and  Jup  accompanied  them.  As  soon  as 
they  had  passed  over  the  Mercy  Bridge,  the  engineer  raised  it 
and  returned,  intending  to  put  into  execution  a project  for  the 
performance  of  which  he  wished  to  be  alone. 

Now  this  project  was  to  minutely  explore  the  interior  well, 
the  mouth  of  which  was  on  a level  with  the  passage  of  Granite 
House,  and  which  communicated  with  the  sea,  since  it  formerly 
supplied  a way  to  the  waters  of  the  lake. 

Why  did  Top  so  often  run  round  this  opening  ? Why  did  he 
utter  such  strange  barks  when  a sort  of  uneasiness  seemed  to 
draw  him  towards  this  well  ? Why  did  Jup  join  Top  in  a sort 
of  common  anxiety  ? Had  this  well  branches  besides  the  com- 
munication with  the  sea  ? Did  it  spread  towards  other  parts  of 
the  island  ? This  is  what  Cyrus  Harding  wished  to  know 
He  had  resolved,  therefore,  to  attempt  the  exploration  of  the 
well  during  the  absence  of  his  companions,  and  an  opportunity 
for  doing  so  had  now  presented  itself. 

It  was  easy  to  descend  to  the  bottom  of  the  well  by  employ 
ing  the  rope-ladder  which  had  not  been  used  since  the  estab 
lishment  of  the  lift.  The  engineer  drew  the  ladder  to  the  hole 
the  diameter  of  which  measured  nearly  six  feet,  and  allowed  it 
to  unroll  itself  after  having  securely  fastened  its  upper 
extremity.  Then,  having  lighted  a lantern,  taken  a revolver, 
and  placed  a cutlass  in  his  belt,  he  began  the  descent. 

The  sides  were  every  where  entire;  but  points  of  rock  jutted 
out  here  and  there,  and  by  means  of  these  points  it  would 
have  been  quite  possible  for  an  active  creature  to  climb  to  the 
mouth  of  the  well. 

The  engineer  remarked  this;  but  although  he  carefully 
examined  these  points  by  the  light  of  his  lantern,  he  could  find 
no  impression,  no  fracture  which  could  give  any  reason  to 
suppose  that  they  had  either  recently  or  at  any  former  time 
been  used  as  a staircase.  Cyrus  Harding  descended  deeper, 
throwing  the  light  of  his  lantern  on  all  sides. 

He  saw  nothing  suspicious. 

When  the  engineer  had  reached  the  last  rounds  he  came 


THE  ABANDONED. 


339 


upon  the  water,  which  was  then  perfectly  calm.  Neither  at  its 
level  nor  in  any  other  part  of  the  well,  did  any  passage  open 
which  could  lead  to  the  interior  of  the  cliff.  The  wall  which 
Harding  struck  with  the  hilt  of  his  cutlass  sounded  solid.  It 
was  compact  granite,  through  which  no  living  being  could 
force  a way.  To  arrive  at  the  bottom  of  the  well  and  then 
climb  up  to  its  mouth  it  was  necessary  to  pass  through  the 
channel  under  the  rocky  sub-soil  of  the  beach  which  placed 
it  in  communication  with  the  sea,  and  this  was  only  possible 
for  marine  animals.  As  to  the  question  of  knowing  where 
this  channel  ended,  at  what  point  of  the  shore,  and  at  what 
depth  beneath  the  water,  it  could  not  be  answered. 

Then  Cyrus  Harding,  having  ended  his  survey,  re-ascended, 
drew  up  the  ladder,  covered  the  mouth  of  the  well,  and  re- 
turned thoughtfully  to  the  dining-room,  saying  to  J*mself  “I 
have  seen  nothing,  and  yet  there  is  something  ther#  1 f> 


CHAPTER  XII 


THE  RIGGING  OF  THE  VESSEL— AN  ATTACK  FROM  FOXES— JUP 
WOUNDED  — JUP  CURED  — COMPLETION  OF  THE  BOAT  — PEN- 
CROFT’S  TRIUMPH— THE  “ BONADVENTURE’S  ” TRIAL  TRIP  TO 
THE  SOUTH  OF  THE  ISLAND— AN  UNEXPECTED  DOCUMENT. 

In  the  evening  the  hunters  returned,  having  enjoyed  good 
sport, and  being  literally  loaded  with  game;  indeed,  they  had 
as  much  as  four  men  could  possibly  carry.  Top  wore  a 
necklace  of  teal  and  Jup  wreaths  of  snipe  round  his  body. 

“ Here,  master,”  cried  Neb ; “ here's  something  to  employ 
our  time ! Preserved  and  made  into  pies,  we  shall  have  a 
welcome  store ! But  I must  have  some  one  to  help  me.  I 
count  on  you,  Pencroft.” 

“No,  Neb,”  replied  the  sailor;  “I  have  the  rigging  of 
the  vessel  to  finish  and  to  look  after,  and  you  will  have  to  do 
without  me.” 

“And  you,  Mr.  Herbert  ?” 

“ I must  go  to  the  corral  to-morrow,  Neb,”  replied  the  lad. 

“ It  will  be  you  then,  Mr.  Spilett,  who  will  help  me  ? ” 

“To  oblige  you,  Neb,  I will,”  replied  the  reporter;  “hut  I 
warn  you  that  if  you  disclose  your  recipes  to  me,  I shall  publish 
them.” 

“Whenever  you  like,  Mr.  Spilett,”  replied  Neb;  “whenever 
you  like.” 

And  so  the  next  day  Gideon  Spilett  became  Neb’s  assistant 
and  was  installed  in  his  culinary  laboratory.  The  engineer 
had  previously  made  known  to  him  the  result  of  the  explora- 
tion which  he  had  made  the  day  before,  and  on  this  point  the 
reporter  shared  Harding’s  opinion,  that  although  he  had  found 
nothing,  a secret  still  remained  to  be  discovered ! 

The  frost  continued  for  another  week,  and  the  settlers  did 

840 


THE  ABANDONED. 


841 


not  leave  Granite  House  unless  to  look  after  the  poultry-yard. 
The  dwelling  was  filled  with  appetizing  odors,  which  were 
emitted  from  the  learned  manipulation  of  Neb  and  the  report- 
er. But  all  the  results  of  the  chase  were  not  made  into 
preserved  provisions;  and  as  the  game  kept  perfectly  in  the 
intense  cold,  wild  duck  and  other  fowl  were  eaten  fresh,  and 
declared  superior  to  all  other  aquatic  birds  in  the  known  world. 

During  this  week  Pencroft,  aided  by  Herbert,  who  handled 
the  sail-maker’s  needle  with  much  skill,  worked  with  such 
energy  that  the  sails  of  the  vessel  were  finished.  There  was  no 
want  of  cordage.  Thanks  to  the  rigging  which  had  been 
recovered  with  the  case  of  the  balloon,  the  ropes  and  cables 
from  the  net  were  all  of  good  quality,  and  the  sailor  turned 
them  all  to  account.  To  the  sails  were  attached  strong  bolt 
ropes,  and  there  still  remained  enough  from  which  to  make 
the  halliards,  shrouds,  and  sheets,  etc.  The  blocks  were 
manufactured  by  Cyrus  Harding  under  Pencroft’s  directions 
by  means  of  the  turning-lathe.  It  therefore  happened  that 
the  rigging  was  entirely  prepared  before  the  vessel  was  fin- 
ished. Pencroft  also  manufactured  a flag,  that  flag  so  dear  to 
every  true  American,  containing  the  stars  and  stripes  of  their 
glorious  Union.  The  colors  for  it  were  supplied  from  certain 
plants  used  in  dyeing,  and  which  were  very  abundant  in 
the  island;  only  to  the  thirty-seven  stars,  representing  the 
thirty-seven  States  of  the  Union,  which  shine  on  the  American 
flag,  the  sailor  added  a thirty-eighth,  the  star  of  “the  State 
of  Lincoln;”  for  he  considered  his  island  as  already  united 
to  the  great  republic.  “And,”  said  he,  “it  is  so  already  in 
heart,  if  not  in  deed ! ” 

In  the  meantime,  the  flag  was  hoisted  at  the  central  window 
of  Granite  House,  and  the  settlers  saluted  it  with  three  cheers. 

The  cold  season  was  now  almost  at  an  end,  and  it  appeared 
as  if  this  second  winter  was  to  pass  without  any  unusual 
occurrence,  when  on  the  night  of  the  11th  August,  the  plateau 
of  Prospect  Heights  was  menaced  with  complete  destruction. 

After  a busy  day  the  colonists  were  sleeping  soundly,  when 
towards  four  o’clock  in  the  morning  they  were  suddenly 
awakened  by  Top’s  barking. 


M2 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


The  dog  was  not  this  time  barking  near  the  mouth  or  the 
well,  but  at  the  threshold  of  the  door,  at  which  ne  was 
scratching  as  if  he  wished  to  burst  it  open.  Jup  was  also  utter- 
ing piercing  cries. 

“Hallo,  Top!”  cried  Neb,  who  was  the  first  awake.  But 
the  dog  continu  to  bark  more  furiously  than  ever. 

“What’s  the  matter  now  ? ” asked  Harding. 

And  all  dressing  in  haste  rushed  to  the  windows,  which  they 
opened. 

Beneath  their  eyes  was  spread  a sheet  of  snow  which  looked 
gray  in  the  dim  light.  The  settlers  could  see  nothing,  but  they 
heard  a singular  yelping  noise  away  in  the  darkness.  It  was 
evident  that  the  beach  had  been  invaded  by  a number  of 
animals  which  could  not  be  seen. 

“ What  are  they  ? ” cried  Pencrof t. 

“ Wolves,  jaguars,  or  apes,”  replied  Neb. 

“ They  have  nearly  reached  the  plateau,”  said  the  reporter. 

“And  our  poultry-yard,”  exclaimed  Herbert,  “and  our 
garden ! ” 

“ Where  can  they  have  crossed  ? ” asked  Pencrof t. 

“ They  must  have  crossed  the  bridge  on  the  shore,”  replied 
the  engineer,  “ which  one  of  us  must  have  forgotten  to  close. 

“ True,”  said  Spilett,  “ I remember  to  have  left  it  open.” 

“ A fine  job  you  have  made  of  it,  Mr.  Spilett,”  cried  the  sailor. 

“ What  is  done  can  not  be  undone,”  replied  Cyrus  Harding. 
“ We  must  consult  what  it  will  now  be  best  to  do.” 

Such  were  the  questions  and  answers  which  were  rapidly 
exchanged  between  Harding  and  his  companions.  It  was  cer- 
tain that  the  bridge  had  been  crossed,  that  the  shore  had  been 
invaded  by  animals,  and  that  whatever  they  might  be  they 
could  by  ascending  the  left  bank  of  the  Mercy  reach  Pros- 
pect Heights.  They  must  therefore  be  advanced  against 
quickly  and  fought  with  if  necessary. 

“ But  what  are  these  beasts  ? ” was  asked  a second  time,  as 
the  yelpings  were  again  heard  more  loudly  than  before.  These 
yelps  made  Herbert  start,  and  he  remembered  to  have  already 
heard  them  during  his  first  visit  to  the  sources  of  the  Red 
tffceek. 


THE  ABANDONED. 


m 


“ They  are  culpeux  foxes  !”  he  exclaimed. 

“ Forward  ! ” shouted  the  sailor. 

And  all  arming  themselves  with  hatchets,  carbines,  and  revoh 
vers,  threw  themselves  into  the  lift  and  soon  set  foot  on  the 
shore. 

Culpeux  are  dangerous  animals  when  in  great  numbers  and 
irritated  by  hunger,  nevertheless  the  colonists  did  not  hesitate 
to  throw  themselves  into  the  midst  of  the  troop,  and  their  first 
shots  vividly  lighting  up  the  darkness  made  their  assailants 
draw  back. 

The  chief  thing  was  to  hinder  these  plunderers  from  reach- 
ing the  plateau,  for  the  garden  and  the  poultry-yard  would 
then  nave  been  at  their  mercy,  and  immense,  perhaps,  irrepar- 
able, mischief  would  inevitably  be  the  result,  especially  with 
regard  to  the  corn-field.  But  as  the  invasion  of  the  plateau 
could  only  be  made  by  the  left  bank  of  the  Mercy,  it  was 
sufficient  to  oppose  the  culpeux  on  the  narrow  bank  between 
the  river  and  the  cliff  of  granite. 

This  was  plain  to  all,  and,  by  Cyrus  Harding’s  orders,  they 
reached  the  spot  indicated  by  him,  while  the  culpeux  rushed 
fiercely  "through  the  gloom.  Harding,  Gideon  Spilett,  Herbert, 
Pencroft  and  Neb,  posted  themselves  in  impregnable  line. 
Top,  his  formidable  jaws  open,  preceded  the  colonists,  and  he 
was  followed  by  Jup,  armed  with  knotty  cudgel,  which  he 
brandished  like  a club. 

The  night  was  extremely  dark ; it  was  only  by  the  flashes 
from  the  revolvers  as  each  person  fired  that  they  could*  see  their 
assailants,  who  were  at  least  a hundred  in  number,  and  whose 
eyes  were  glowing  like  hot  coals. 

“ They  must  not  pass  ! ” shouted  Pencroft. 

“ They  shall  not  pass ! ,J  returned  the  engineer. 

But  if  they  did  not  pass  it  was  not  for  want  of  having 
attempted  it.  Those  in  the  rear  pushed*  on  the  foremost 
assailants,  and  it  was  an  incessant  struggle  with  revolvers  and 
hatchets.  Several  culpeux  already  lay  dead  on  the  ground, 
but  their  number  did  not  appear  to  diminish,  and  it  might 
have  been  supposed  that  reinforcements  were  continually 
arriving  over  the  bridge. 


844 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


The  colonists  were  soon  obliged  to  fight  at  close  quarters,  not 
without  receiving  some  wounds,  though  happily  very  slight 
ones.  Herbert  had,  with  a shot  from  his  revolver,  rescued  Neb, 
on  whose  back  a culpeux  had  sprung  like  a tiger  cat.  Top 
fought  with  actual  fury,  flying  at  the  throats  of  the  foxes  and 
strangling  them  instantaneously.  Jup  wielded  his  weapon 
valiantly,  and  it  was  in  vain  that  they  endeavored  to  keep  him 
irf  the  rear.  Endowed  doubtless  with  sight  which  enabled  him 
to  pierce  the  obscurity,  he  was  always  in  the  thick  of  the  fight, 
uttering  from  time  to  time  a sharp  hissing  sound,  which  was 
with  him  the  sign  of  great  rejoicing. 

At  one  moment  he  advanced  so  far,  that  by  the  light  from 
a revolver  he  was  seen  surrounded  by  five  or  six  large  culpeux, 
with  whom  he  was  coping  with  great  coolness. 

However,  the  struggle  wTas  ended  at  last,  and  victory  was  on 
the  side  of  the  settlers,  but  not  until  they  had  fought  for  two 
long  hours ! The  first  signs  of  the  approach  of  day  doubtless 
determined  the  retreat  of  their  assailants,  who  scampered  away 
towards  the  North,  passing  over  the  bridge,  which  Neb  ran 
immediately  to  raise.  When  day  had  sufficiently  lighted  up  the 
field  of  battle,  the  settlers  counted  as  many  as  fifty  dead  bodies 
scattered  about  on  the  shore. 

“And  Jup !”  cried  Pencroft,  “ where  is  Jup  ? ” Jup  had  dis- 
appeared. His  friend  Neb  called  him,  and  for  the  first  time 
Jup  did  not  reply  to  his  friend’s  call. 

Every  one  set  out  in  search  of  Jup,  trembling  lest  he  should 
be  found  amongst  the  slain;  they  cleared  the  place  of  the 
bodies  which  stained  the  snow  with  their  blood,  Jup  was 
found  in  the  midst  of  a heap  of  culpeux,  whose  broken  jaws 
and  crushed  bodies  showed  that  they  had  to  do  with  the  ter- 
rible club  of  the  intrepid  animal. 

Poor  Jup  still  held  in  his  hand  the  stump  of  his  broken 
cudgel,  but  deprived  of  his  weapon  he  had  been  overpowered 
by  numbers,  and  his  chest  was  covered  with  severe  wounds. 

“ He  is  living,”  cried  Neb,  who  was  bending  over  him. 

“ And-  we  will  save  him,”  replied  the  sailor.  “ We  will  nurse 
him  as  if  he  was  one  of  ourselves.” 

It  appeared  as  if  Jup  understood,  for  he  leant  his  head 


THE  ABANDONED. 


345 


or  Pencroft’s  shoulder  as  if  to  thank  him.  The  sailor  was 
wounded  himself,  but  his  wound  was  insignificant,  as  were 
those  of  his  companions;  for  thanks  to  their  fire-arms  they  had 
been  almost  always  able  to  keep  their  assailants  at  a distance. 
It  was  therefore  only  the  orang  whose  condition  was  serious. 

Jup,  carried  by  Neb  and  Pencroft,  was  placed  in  the  lift,  and 
only  a slight  moan  now  and  then  escaped  his  lips.  He  was 
gently  drawn  up  to  Granite  House.  There  he  was  laid  on  a 
mattress  taken  from  one  of  the  beds,  and  his  wounds  were 
bathed  with  the  greatest  care.  It  did  not  appear  that  any  vital 
part  had  been  reached,  but  Jup  was  very  weak  from  loss  of 
blood,  and  a high  fever  soon  set  in  after  his  wounds  had  been 
dressed.  He  was  laid  down,  strict  diet  was  imposed,  “just 
like  a real  person,”  as  Neb  said,  and  they  made  him  swallow 
several  cups  of  a cooling  drink,  for  which  the  ingredients  were 
supplied  from  the  vegetable  medicine  chest  of  Granite  House. 
Jup  was  at  first  restless,  but  his  breathing  gradually  became 
more  regular,  and  he  was  left  sleeping  quietly.  From  time 
to  time  Top,  walking  on  tip-toe,  as  one  might  say,  came  to  visit 
his  friend,  and  seemed  to  approve  of  all  the  care  that  had  been 
taken  of  him.  One  of  Jup’s  hands  hung  over  the  side  of  his 
bed,  and  Top  licked  it  with  a sympathizing  air. 

They  employed  the  day  in  interring  the  dead,  who  were 
dragged  to  the  forest  of  the  Far  West,  and  there  buried  deep. 

This  attack,  which  might  have  had  such  serious  conse- 
quences, was  a lesson  to  the  settlers,  who  from  this  time  never 
went  to  bed  until  one  of  their  number  had  made  sure  that  all 
the  bridges  were  raised,  and  that  no  invasion  was  possible. 

However  Jup,  after  having  given  them  serious  anxiety  for 
several  days,  began  to  recover.  His  constitution  brought  him 
through,  the  fever  gradually  subsided,  and  Gideon  Spilett,  who 
was  a bit  of  a doctor,  pronounced  him  quite  out  of  danger* 
On  the  16th  of  August,  Jup  began  to  eat.  Neb  made  him 
nice  little  sweet  dishes,  which  the  invalid  discussed  with  great 
relish,  for  if  he  had  a pet  failing  it  was  that  of  being  some- 
what of  a gourmand,  and  Neb  had  never  done  any  thing  to 
cure  him  of  this  fault. 

“What  would  you  have?”  said  he  to  Gideon  Spilett,  who 


846 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


sometimes  expostulated  with  him  for  spoiling  the  ape.  “Poor 
Jup  has  no  other  pleasure  than  that  of  the  palate,  and  I am 
only  too  glad  to  be  able  to  reward  his  services  in  this  way ! ” 

Ten  days  after  having  taken  to  his  bed,  on  the  21st  of 
August,  Master  J up  arose.  His  wounds  were  healed,  and  it 
was  evident  that  he  would  not  be  long  in  regaining  his  usual 
strength  and  agility.  Like  all  convalescents,  he  was  tremend- 
ously hungry,  and  the  reporter  allowed  him  to  eat  as  much 
as  he  liked,  for  he  trusted  to  that  instinct,  which  is  too  often 
wanting  in  reasoning  beings,  to  keep  the  orang  from  any 
excess.  Neb  was  delighted  to  see  his  pupil’s  appetite  return- 
ing. 

“Eat  away  my  Jup,”  said  he,  “and  don’t  spare  anything  ; 
you  have  shed  your  blood  for  us,  and  it  is  the  least  I can  do  to 
make  you  strong  again ! ” 

On  the  25th  of  August  Neb’s  voice  was  heard  calling  to  liis 
companions. 

“ Captain,  Mr.  Spilett,  Mr.  Herbert,  Pencroft,  come ! come ! ” 

The  colonists,  who  were  together  in  the  dining-room,  rose  at 
Neb’s  call,  who  was  then  in  Jup’s  room. 

“What’s  the  matter  ?”  asked  the  reporter. 

“ Look,”  replied  Neb  with  a shout  of  laughter.  And  what 
did  they  see  ? Master  Jup  smoking  calmly  and  seriously,  sit- 
ting cross-legged  like  a Turk  at  the  entrance  to  Granite 
House ! 

“ My  pipe,”  cried  Pencroft.  “ He  has  taken  my  pipe ! Hallo, 
my  honest  Jup,  I make  you  a present  of  it ! Smoke  away,  old 
boy,  smoke  away  ! ” 

And  Jup  gravely  puffed  out  clouds  of  smoke  which  seemed 
to  give  him  great  satisfaction.  Harding  did  not  appear  to  bo 
much  astonished  at  this  incident,  and  he  cited  several  examples 
of  tame  apes,  to  whom  the  use  of  tobacco  had  become  quite 
familiar. 

But  from  this  day  Master  Jup  had  a pipe  of  his  own,  the 
sailor’s  ex-pipe,  which  was  hung  in  his  room  near  his  store  of 
tobacco.  He  filled  it  himself,  lighted  it  with  a glowing  coal, 
and  appeared  to  be  the  happiest  of  quadrumana.  It  may 
readily  be  understood  that  this  similarity  of  tastes  of  Jup  and 


THE  ABANDONED. 


W 

Pencroft  served  to  tighten  the  bonds  of  friendship  which 
already  existed  between  the  honest  ape  and  the  worthy  sailor. 

“Perhaps  he  is  really  a man,”  said  Pencroft  sometimes  to 
Neb.  “Should  you  be  surprised  to  hear  him  beginning  to 
speak  to  us  some  day  ? ” 

“ My  word,  no,”  replied  Neb.  “ What  astonishes  me  is  that 
he  hasn’t  spoken  to  us  before,  for  now  he  wants  nothing  but 
speech ! ” 

“ It  would  amuse  me  all  the  same,”  resumed  the  sailor,  “ if 
some  fine  day  he  said  to  me,  ‘Suppose  we  change  pipes,  Pen- 
croft.’” 

“Yes,”  replied  Neb,  “ what  a pity  he  was  born  dumb ! ” 

With  the  month  of  September  the  winter  ended,  and  the 
worto  were  again  eagerly  commenced.  The  building  of  the 
vessel  advanced  rapidly,  she  was  already  completely  decked 
over,  and  all  the  inside  parts  of  the  hull  were  firmly  united 
with  ribs  bent  by  means  of  steam,  which  answered  all  the 
purposes  of  a mould. 

As  there  was  no  want  of  wood,  Pencroft  proposed  to  the 
engineer  to  give  a double  lining  to  the  hull,  so  as  to  completely 
insure  the  strength  of  the  vessel. 

Harding,  not  knowing  what  the  future  might  have  in  store 
for  them,  approved  the  sailor's  idea  of  making  the  craft  as 
strong  as  possible.  The  interior  and  deck  of  the  vessel  was 
entirely  finished  towards  the  15th  of  September.  For  calking 
the  seams  they  made  oakum  of  dry  seaweed,  which  was  ham- 
mered in  between  the  planks  ; then  these  seams  were  covered 
with  boiling  tar,  which  was  obtained  in  great  abundance  from 
the  pines  in  the  forest. 

The  management  of  the  vessel  was  very  simple.  She  had 
from  the  first  been  ballasted  with  heavy  blocks  of  granite, 
walled  up  in  a bed  of  lime,  twelve  thousand  pounds  of 
which  they  stowed  away. 

A deck  was  placed  over  this  ballast,  and  the  interior  was 
divided  into  two  cabins ; two  benches  extended  along  them 
and  served  also  as  lockers.  The  foot  of  the  mast  supported 
the  partition  which  separated  the  two  cabins,  which  were 
reached  by  two  hatchways  let  into  the  deck. 


348 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


Pencroft  had  no  trouble  in  finding  a tree  suitable  for  the 
mast.  He  chose  a straight  young  fir,  with  no  knots,  and 
which  he  had  only  to  square  at  the  step,  and  round  off  at 
the  top.  The  ironwork  of  the  mast,  the  rudder  and  the  hull, 
had  been  roughly  but  strongly  forged  at  the  Chimneys.  Lastly, 
yards,  masts,  boom,  spars,  oars,  etc.,  were  all  finished  by  the 
first  week  in  October,  and  it  was  agreed  that  a trial  trip 
should  be  taken  round  the  island,  so  as  to  ascertain  how  the 
vessel  would  behave  at  sea,  and  how  far  they  might  depend 
upon  her. 

During  all  this  time  the  necessary  works  had  not  been 
neglected.  The  corral  was  enlarged,  for  the  flock  of  mus- 
mons  and  goats  had  been  increased  by  a number  of  young 
ones,  who  had  to  be  housed  and  fed.  The  colonists  had  paid 
visits  also  to  the  oyster  bed,  the  warren,  the  coal  and  iron 
mines,  and  to  the  till  then  unexplored  districts  of  the  Far 
West  forest,  which  abounded  in  game.  Certain  indigenous 
plants  were  discovered,  and  those  fit  for  immediate  use, 
contributed  to  vary  the  vegetable  stores  of  Granite  House. 

They  were  a species  of  ficoide,  some  similar  to  those  of  the 
Cape,  with  eatable  fleshy  leaves,  others  bearing  seeds  contain- 
ing a sort  of  flour. 

On  the  10th  of  October  the  vessel  was  launched.  Pencroft 
was  radiant  with  joy,  the  operation  was  perfectly  successful; 
the  boat  completely  rigged,  having  been  pushed  on  rollers  to 
the  water’s  edge,  was  floated  by  the  rising  tide,  amidst  the 
cheers  of  the  colonists,  particularly  of  Pencroft,  who  showed 
no  modesty  on  this  occasion.  Besides  his  importance  was  to 
last  beyond  the  finishing  of  the  vessel,  since,  after  having  built 
her,  he  was  to  command  her.  The  grade  of  captain  was 
bestowed  upon  him  with  the  approbation  of  all.  To  satisfy 
Captain  Pencroft,  it  was  now  necessary  to  give  a name  to  the 
vessel,  and,  after  many  propositions  had  been  discussed,  the 
votes  were  all  in  favor  of  the  “ Bonadventure.”  As  soon  as 
the  “ Bonadventure  ” had  been  lifted  by  the  rising  tide,  it  was 
seen  that  she  lay  evenly  in  the  water,  and  would  be  easily 
navigated.  However,  the  trial  trip  was  to  be  made  that  very 
day,  by  an  excursion  off  the  coast.  The  weather  was 


THE  ABANDONED. 


m 


the  breeze  fresh,  and  the  sea  smooth,  especially  toward  the 
south  coast,  for  the  wind  was  blowing  from  the  northwest. 

“ All  hands  on  board,”  shouted  Pencroft;  but  breakfast  was 
first  necessary,  and  it  was  thought  best  to  take  provisions  on 
board,  in  the  event  of  their  excursion  being  prolonged  until 
the  evening. 

Cyrus  Harding  was  equally  anxious  to  try  the  vessel,  the 
model  of  which  had  originated  with  him,  although  on  the 
sailor’s  advice  he  had  altered  some  parts  of  it,  but  he  did  not 
share  Pencroft’s  confidence  in  her,  and  as  the  latter  had  not 
again  spoken  of  the  voyage  to  Tabor  Island,  Harding  hoped 
he  had  given  it  up.  He  would  have  indeed  great  reluctance 
in  letting  two  or  three  of  his  companions  venture  so  far  in 
so  small  a boat,  which  was  not  of  more  than  fifteen  tons’ 
burden. 

At  half-past  ten  every  body  was  on  board,  even  Top  and  Jup, 
and  Herbert  weighed  the  anchor,  which  was  fast  in  the  sand 
near  the  mouth  of  the  Mercy.  The  sail  was  hoisted,  the 
Lincolnian  flag  floated  from  the  mast-head,  and  the  “ Bonad- 
venture,”  steered  by  Pencroft,  stood  out  to  sea. 

The  wind  blowing  out  of  Union  Bay  she  ran  before  it,  and 
thus  showed  her  owners,  much  to  their  satisfaction,  that  she 
possessed  a remarkably  fast  pair  of  heels,  according  to 
Pencroft’s  mode  of  speaking.  After  having  doubled  Flotsam 
Point,  and  Claw  Cape,  the  captain  kept  her  close  hauled,  so  as 
to  sail  along  the  southern  coast  of  the  island,  when  it  was 
found  she  sailed  admirably  within  five  points  of  the  wind. 
All  hands  were  enchanted;  they  had  a good  vessel,  which, 
in  case  of  need,  would  be  of  great  service  to  them,  and 
with  fine  weather  and  a fresh  breeze  the  voyage  promised  to 
be  charming. 

Pencroft  now  stood  off  the  shore,  three  or  four  miles  across 
from  Port  Balloon.  The  island  then  appeared  in  all  its  extent 
and  under  a new  aspect,  with  the  varied  panorama  of  its  shore 
from  Claw  Cape  to  Reptile  End,  the  forests* in  which  dark  firs 
contrasted  with  the  young  foliage  of  other  trees  and  over- 
looked the  whole,  and  Mount  Franklin  whose  lofty  head  was 
still  whitened  with  snow. 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION, 


&b0 

“ How  beautiful  it  is  ! ” cried  Herbert. 

“ Yes,  our  island  is  beautiful  and  good,”  replied  Pencroft 
“ I love  it  as  I loved  my  poor  mother.  It  received  us  poor  and 
destitute,  and  now  what  is  wanting  to  us  five  fellows  who  fell 
on  it  from  the  sky.” 

“ Nothing,”  replied  Neb ; “ nothing,  captain.” 

And  the  two  brave  men  gave  three  tremendous  cheers  in 
honor  of  their  island  ! 

During  all  this  time  Gideon  Spilett,  leaning  against  the 
mast  sketched  the  panorama  which  was  developed  before  his 
eyes. 

Cyrus  Harding  gazed  on  it  in  silence. 

“ Well,  Captain  Harding,”  asked  Pencroft,  “ what  do  you  think 
of  our  vessel  ? ” 

“ She  appears  to  behave  well,”  replied  the  engineer. 

“ Good ! And  do  you  think  now  that  she  could  undertake  a 
voyage  of  some  extent  ? ” 

“ What  voyage,  Pencroft  ? ” 

“ One  to  Tabor  Island,  for  instance.” 

“My  friend,”  replied  Harding,  “I  think  that  in  any  pressing 
emergency  we  need  not  hesitate  to  trust  ourselves  to  the 
“ Bonadventure  ” even  for  a longer  voyage ; but  you  know  I 
should  see  you  set  ofi  to  Tabor  Island  with  great  uneasiness, 
since  nothing  obliges  you  to  go  there.” 

“One  likes  to  know  one’s  neighbors,”  returned  the  sailor, 
who  was  obstinate  in  his  idea.  “ Tabor  Island  is  our  neighbor, 
and  the  only  one  ! Politeness  requires  us  to  go  at  least  to  pay 
a visit.” 

“By  Jove,”  said  Spilett;  “our  friend  Pencroft  has  become 
very  particular  about  the  proprieties  all  at  once ! ” 

“I  am  not  particular  about  any  thing  at  all,”  retorted  the 
sailor,  who  was  rather  vexed  by  the  engineer’s  opposition,  but 
who  did  not  wish  to  cause  him  anxiety. 

“Consider,  Pencroft,”  resumed  Harding,  “you  can  not  go 
alone  to  Tabor  Island.” 

“ One  companion  will  be  enough  for  me.” 

“Even  so,”  replied  the  engineer,  “you  will  risk  depriving 
the  colony  of  Lincoln  Island  of  two  settlers  out  of  five.” 


THE  ABANDONED. 


353 


“Out  of  six,”  answered  Pencroft;  “you  forget  Jup.” 

“ Out  of  seven,”  added  Neb;  “ Top  is  quite  worth  another.” 

“ There  is  no  risk  at  all  in  it,  captain,”  replied  Pencroft. 

“That  is  possible,  Pencroft;  but  I repeat  it  is  to  expose  ours 
selves  uselessly.” 

The  obstinate  sailor  did  not  reply,  and  let  the  conversation 
drop,  quite  determined  to  resume  it  again.  But  he  did  not 
suspect  that  an  incident  would  come  to  his  aid  and  change 
into  an  act  of  humanity  that  which  was  at  first  only  a doubtful 
whim. 

After  standing  off  the  shore  the  “ Bonadventure  ” again 
approached  it  in  the  direction  of  Port  Balloon.  It  was  im- 
portant to  ascertain  the  channels  between  the  sand  banks  and 
reefs,  that  buoys  might  be  laid  down,  since  this  little  creek  was 
to  be  the  harbor. 

They  were  not  more  than  half  , a mile  from  the  coast,  and  it 
was  necessary  to  tack  to  beat  against  the  wind.  The  “ Bonad- 
venture ” was  then  going  at  a very  moderate  rate,  a3  the  breeze, 
partly  intercepted  by  the  high  land,  scarcely  swelled  her  sails, 
and  the  sea,  smooth  as  glass,  was  only  rippled  now  and  then 
by  passing  gusts. 

Herbert  had  stationed  himself  in  the  bows  that  he  might 
indicate  the  course  to  be  followed  among  the  channels, 
when  all  at  once  he  shouted,— 

“Luff,  Pencroft,  luff!” 

“ What  is  the  matter  ? ” replied  the  sailor;  “ a rock  ? ” 

“ No — wait,”  said  Herbert ; “ I don’t  quite  see.  Luff  again 
—right— now.” 

So  saying,  Herbert  leaning  over  the  side,  plunged  his  arm 
into  the  water  and  pulled  it  out,  exclaiming,— 

“A  bottle!” 

He  held  in  his  hand  a corked  bottle  which  he  had  just  seized 
a few  cables’  length  from  the  shore. 

Cyrus  Harding  took  the  bottle.  Without  uttering  a single 
word  he  drew  the  cork,  and  took  from  it  a damp  paper,  on 
which  were  written  these  words:  “Castaway.  . . . Tabor 

Island  : 153°  W.  long.,  37°  11'  S.  lai” 

23 


CHAPTER  XIII. 


DEPARTURE  DECIDED  UPON  — CONJECTURES  — PREPARATIONS  — 
THE  THREE  PASSENGERS  — FIRST  NIGHT  — SECOND  NIGHT  — 
TABOR  ISLAND— SEARCHING  THE  SHORE  — SEARCHING  THE 
WOOD  — NO  ONE  — ANIMALS  — PLANTS  — A DWELLING  — 
DESERTED. 

“ A castaway  ! ” exclaimed  Pencroft ; “ left  on  this  Tabor 
Island  not  two  hundred  miles  from  us ! Ah,  Captain  Harding, 
you  won’t  now  oppose  my  going.” 

“ No,  Pencroft,”  replied  Cyrus  Harding  ; “ and  you  shall  set 
out  as  soon  as  possible.” 

“ To-morrow  ? ” 

“ To-morrow ! ” 

The  engineer  still  held  in  his  hand  the  paper  which  he 
had  taken  from  the  bottle.  He  contemplated  it  for  some 
instants,  then  resumed,— 

“From  this  document,  my  friends,  from  the  way  in  which  it 
is  worded,  we  may  conclude  this:  first,  that  the  castaway  on 
Tabor  Island  is  a man  possessing  a considerable  knowledge 
of  navigation,  since  he  gives  the  latitude  and  longitude  of  the 
island  exactly  as  we  ourselves  found  it,  and  to  a second  of 
approximation;  secondly,  that  he  is  either  English  or  American, 
as  the  document  is  written  in  the  English  language.” 

“ That  is  perfectly  logical,”  answered  Spilett ; “ and  the 
presence  of  this  castaway  explains  the  arrival  of  the  case  on 
the  shores  of  our  island.  There  must  have  been  a wreck, 
since  there  is  a castaway.  As  to  the  latter,  whoever  he  may  be, 
it  is  lucky  for  him  that  Pencroft  thought  of  building  this  boat 
and  of  trying  her  this  very  day,  for  a day  later  and  this  bottle 
might  have  been  broken  on  the  rocks.” 

“Indeed,”  said  Herbert,  “it  is  a fortunate  chance  that  the 

354 


TBB  ABANDONED. 


355 


Bonadventure  ’ passed  exactly  where  the  bottle  was  still  float- 
ing ! ” 

“ Does  not  this  appear  strange  to  you  ? ” asked  Harding  of 
Pencroft. 

“ It  appears  fortunate,  that’s  ail,”  answered  the  sailor.  “ Do 
you  see  any  thing  extraordinary  in  it,  captain  ? The  bottle  must 
go  somewhere,  and  why  not  here  as  well  as  any  where  else  ? ” 

“Perhaps  you  are  right,  Pencroft,”  replied  the  engineer; 
“ and  yet — ” 

“But,”  observed  Herbert,  “there’s  nothing  to  prove  that 
this  bottle  has  been  floating  long  in  the  sea.” 

“ Nothing,”  replied  Gideon  Spilett ; “ and  the  document 
appears  even  to  have  been  recently  written.  What  do  you 
think  about  it,  Cyrus  ? ” 

“It  is  difficult  to  say,  and  besides  we  shall  soon  know,” 
replied  Harding. 

During  this  conversation  Pencroft  had  not  remained  inactive. 
He  had  put  the  vessel  about,  and  the  “ Bonadventure,”  all  sails 
set,  was  running  rapidly  towards  Claw  Cape. 

Every  one  was  thinking  of  the  castaway  on  Tabor  Island. 
Should  they  be  in  time  to  save  him  ? This  was  a great  event 
in  the  life  of  the  colonists ! They  themselves  were  but  cast- 
aways, but  it  was  to  be  feared  that  another  might  not  have 
been  so  fortunate,  and  their  duty  was  to  go  to  his  succor. 

Claw  Cape  was  doubled,  and  about  four  o’clock  the  “Bonad- 
venture ” dropped  her  anchor  at  the  mouth  of  the  Mercy. 

That  same  evening  the  arrangements  for  the  new  expedition 
were  made.  It  appeared  best  that  Pencroft  and  Herbert,  who 
knew  how  to  work  the  vessel,  should  undertake  the  voyage 
alone.  By  setting  out  the  next  day,  the  10th  of  October,  they 
would  arrive  on  the  13th,  for  with  the  present  wind  it  would 
not  take  more  than  forty-eight  hours  to  make  this  passage 
of  a hundred  and  fifty  miles.  One  day  in  the  island,  three  or 
four  to  return,  they  might  hope  therefore  that  on  the  17th 
they  worM.  again  reach  Lincoln  Island.  The  weather  was 
fine,  the  barometer  was  rising,  the  wind  appeared  settled, 
every  thing  then  was  in  favor  of  these  brave  men  whom 
an  act  of  humanity  was  taking  far  from  their  island. 


356 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


Thus  it  had  been  agreed  that  Cyrus  Harding,  Neb,  and 
Gideon  Spilet,  should  remain  at  Granite  House,  but  an  objec- 
tion was  raised,  and  Spilett,  who  had  not  forgotten  his 
business  as  reporter  to  the  New  York  Herald,  having  declared 
that  he  would  go  by  swimming  rather  than  lose  such  an  op- 
portunity, he  was  admitted  to  take  a part  in  the  voyage. 
The  evening  was  occupied  in  transporting  on  board  the 
“ Bonadventure  ” articles  of  bedding,  utensils,  arms,  ammu- 
nition, a compass,  provisions  for  a week,  and  this  business 
being  rapidly  accomplished,  the  colonists  ascended  to  Granite 
House. 

The  next  day,  at  five  o’clock  in  the  morning,  the  farewells 
were  said,  not  without  some  emotion  on  both  sides,  and  Pen- 
croft  setting  sail  made  towards  Claw  Cape,  which  had  to  be 
doubled  in  order  to  proceed  to  the  southwest. 

The  “ Bonadventure  ” was  already  a quarter  of  a mile  from 
the  coast,  when  the  passengers  perceived  on  the  heights  of 
Granite  House  two  men  waving  their  farewells;  they  were 
Cyrus  Harding  and  Neb. 

“ Our  friends,”  exclaimed  Spilett,  “ this  is  our  first  separa- 
tion for  fifteen  months.” 

Pencroft,  the  reporter  and  Herbert,  waved  in  return,  and 
Granite  House  soon  disappeared  behind  he  high  rocks  of  the 
Cape. 

During  the  first  part  of  the  day  the  “Bonadventure”  was 
still  in  sight  of  the  southern  coast  of  Lincoln  Island,  which 
soon  appeared  just  like  a green  basket,  with  Mount  Franklin 
rising  from  the  center.  The  heights,  diminished  by  distance, 
did  not  present  an  appearance  likely  to  tempt  vessels  to 
touch  there.  Reptile  End  was  passed  in  about  an  hour, 
though  at  a distance  of  about  ten  miles. 

At  this  distance  it  was  no  longer  possible  to  distinguish  any 
thing  of  the  Western  Coast,  which  stretched  away  to  the  ridges 
of  Mount  Franklin,  and  three  hours  after  the  last  of  Lincoln 
Island  sank  below  the  horizon. 

The  “Bonadventure”  behaved  capitally.  Bounding  over 
the  waves  she  proceeded  rapidly  on  her  course.  Pencroft  had 
hoisted  the  foresail,  and  steering  by  the  compass  followed  a 


THE  ABANDONED. 


857 


rectilinear  direction.  From  time  to  time  Herbert  relieved 
him  at  the  helm,  and  the  lad’s  hand  Was  so  firm  that  the  sailor 
had  not  a point  to  find  fault  with. 

Gideon  Spilett  chatted  sometimes  with  one,  sometimes 
with  the  other,  if  wanted  he  lent  a hand  with  the  ropes, 
and  Captain  Pencroft  was  perfectly  satisfied  with  his  crew. 

In  the  evening  the  crescent  moon,  which  would  not  be  in 
its  first  quarter  until  the  16th,  appeared  in  the  twilight  and 
soon  set  again.  The  night  was  dark  but  starry,  and  the  next 
day  again  promised  to  be  fine. 

Pencroft  prudently  lowered  the  foresail,  not  wishing  to 
be  caught  by  a sudden  gust  while  carrying  too  much  canvas  ; 
it  was  perhaps  an  unnecessary  precaution  on  such  a calm 
night,  but  Pencroft  was  a prudent  sailor  and  can  not  be 
blamed  for  it. 

The  reporter  slept  part  of  the  night.  Pencroft  and  Herbert 
took  turns  for  a spell  of  two  hours  each  at  the  helm.  The 
sailor  trusted  Herbert  as  he  would  himself,  and  his  confidence 
was  justified  by  the  coolness  and  judgment  of  the  lad.  Pen- 
croft gave  him  his  directions  as  a commander  to  his  steers- 
man, and  Herbert  never  allowed  the  “ Bonadventure  ” to 
swerve  even  a point.  The  night  passed  quietly,  as  did  the  day 
of  the  12th  of  October.  A southeasterly  direction  was  strictly 
maintained,  unless  the  “Bonadventure”  fell  in  with  some 
unknown  current  she  would  come  exactly  within  sight  of 
Tabor  Island. 

As  to  the  sea  over  which  the  vessel  was  then  sailing,  it  was 
absolutely  deserted.  Now  and  then  a great  albatross  or  frigate 
bird  passed  within  gun-shot,  and  Gideon  Spilett  wondered  if  it 
was  to  one  of  them  that  he  had  confided  his  last  letter  ad- 
dressed to  the  New  York  Herald.  These  birds  were  the  only 
beings  that  appeared  to  frequent  this  part  of  the  ocean 
between  Tabor  and  Lincoln  Islands. 

“ And  yet,”  observed  Herbert,  “ this  is  the  time  that  whalers 
usually  proceed  towards  the  southern  part  of  the  Pacific.  In- 
deed I do  not  think  there  could  be  a more  deserted  sea  than 
this.” 

“ It  is  not  quite  so  deserted  as  all  that,”  replied  Pencroft 


368 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


44  What  do  you  mean  ? ” asked  the  reporter. 

“ We  are  on  it.  Do  you  take  our  vessel  for  a wreck  and  u§ 
for  porpoises  ? ” 

And  Pencroft  laughed  at  his  joke. 

By  the  evening,  according  to  calculation  it  was  thought  that 
the  “ Bonadventure  ” had  accomplished  a distance  of  a 
hundred  and  twenty  miles  since  her  departure  from  Lincoln 
Island,  that  is  to  say,  in  thirty- six  hours,  which  would  give  her 
a speed  of  between  three  and  four  knots  an  hour.  The  breeze 
was  very  slight  and  might  soon  drop  altogether.  However,  it 
was  hoped  that  the  next  morning  by  break  of  day,  if  the 
calculation  had  been  correct  and  the  course  true,  they  would 
sight  Tabor  Island. 

Neither  Gideon  Spilett,  Herbert,  nor  Pencroft  slept  that 
night.  In  th*  expectation  of  the  next  day  they  could  not  but 
feel  some  emotion.  There  was  so  much  uncertainty  in  their 
enterprise ! Were  they  near  Tabor  Island  ? Was  the  island 
still  inhabited  by  the  castaway  to  whose  succor  they  had  come. 
Who  was  this  man  ? Would  not  his  presence  disturb  the  little 
colony  till  then  so  united  ? Besides,  would  he  be  content  to 
exchange  his  prison  for  another  ? ” All  these  questions,  which 
would  no  doubt  be  answered  the  next  day,  kept  them  in  sus- 
pense, and  at  the  dawn  of  day  all  fixed  their  gaze  on  the 
western  horizon. 

“ Land ! ” shouted  Pencroft  at  about  six  o’clock  in  the  morn- 
ing. 

And  it  was  impossible  that  Pencroft  should  be  mistaken  ; it 
was  evident  that  land  was  there.  Imagine  the  joy  of  the  little 
crew  of  the  “Bonadventure.”  In  a few  hours  they  would 
land  on  the  beach  of  the  island ! 

The  low  coast  of  Tabor  Island,  secarcely  emerging  from  the 
sea,  was  not  more  than  fifteen  miles  distant. 

The  head  of  the  “ Bonadventure,”  which  was  a little  to  the 
south  of  the  island,  was  set  directly  towards  it,  and  as  the  sun 
mounted  in  the  east,  his  rays  fell  upon  one  or  two  headlands. 

“ This  is  a much  less  important  isle  than  Lincoln  Island,” 
observed  Herbert,  “and  is  probably  due  like  ours  to  some 
submarine  convulsion.” 


THE  ABANDONED. 


361 


At  eleven  o’clock  the  “ Bonadventure”  was  not  more  than 
two  miles  off,  and  Pencroft,  whilst  looking  for  a suitable  place 
at  which  to  land,  proceeded  very  cautiously  through  the  un- 
known waters.  The  whole  of  the  island  could  now  be  sur- 
veyed, and  on  it  could  be  seen  groups  of  gum  and  other  large 
trees,  of  the  same  species  as  those  growing  on  Lincoln  Islando 
But  the  astonishing  thing  was  that  no  smoke  arose  to  show 
that  the  island  was  inhabited,  not  a signal  appeared  on  any 
point  of  the  shore  whatever  ! 

And  yet  the  document  was  clear  enough;  there  was  a casta- 
way,  and  this  castaway  should  have  been  on  the  watch. 

In  the  mean  while  the  “ Bonadventure  ” entered  the  winding 
channels  among  the  reefs,  and  Pencroft  observed  every  turn 
with  extreme  care.  He  had  put  Herbert  at  the  helm,  posting 
himself  in  the  bows,  inspecting  the  water,  whilst  he  held  the 
halliard  in  his  hand,  ready  to  lower  the  sail  at  a moment’s 
notice.  Gideon  Spilett  with  his  glass  eagerly  scanned  the 
shore,  though  without  perceiving  any  thing. 

However,  at  about  twelve  o’clock  the  keel  of  the  “ Bonadven- 
ture ” grated  on  the  bottom.  The  anchor  was  let  go,  the  sails 
furled,  and  the  crew  of  the  little  vessel  landed. 

And  there  was  no  reason  to  doubt  that  this  was  Tabor  Island, 
since  according  to  the  most  recent  charts  there  was  no  island  in 
this  part  of  the  Pacific  between  New  Zealand  and  the  American 
Coast. 

The  vessel  was  securely  moored,  so  that  there  should  be  no 
danger  of  her  being  carried  away  by  the  receding  tide  ; then 
Pencroft  and  his  companions,  well  armed,  ascended  the  shore, 
so  as  to  gain  an  elevation  of  about  two  hundred  and  fifty  or 
three  hundred  feet  which  rose  at  a distance  of  half  a mile. 

“From  the  summit  of  that  hill,”  said  Spilett,  “we  can  no 
doubt  obtain  a complete  view  of  the  island,  which  will  greatly 
facilitate  our  search.” 

“So  as  to  do  here,”  replied  Herbert,  “that  which  Captain 
Harding  did  the  very  first  thing  on  Lincoln  Island,  by  climbing 
Mount  Franklin.” 

“ Exactly  so,”  answered  the  reporter;  “ and  it  is  the  best  plan 
of  proceeding.” 


362 


THE  LAKESIIFE  EUIM. 


Whilst  thus  talking  the  explorers  had  advanced  along  a cleav- 
ing which  terminated  at  the  foot  of  the  hill.  Flocks  of  rock- 
pigeons  and  sea-swallows,  similar  to  those  of  Lincoln  Island, 
fluttered  around  them.  Under  the  woods  which  skirted  the 
glade  on  the  left  they  could  hear  the  bushes  rustling  and  see 
the  grass  waving,  which  indicated  the  presence  of  timid 
animals,  but  still  nothing  to  show  that  the  island  was  inhabited. 

Arrived  at  the  foot  of  the  hill,  Pencroft,  Spilett,  and  Herbert 
climbed  it  in  a few  minutes,  and  gazed  anxiously  round  the 
hoiizon.  They  were  on  an  islet  which  did  not  measure  more 
than  six  miles  in  circumference,  its  shape  not  much  bordered 
by  capes  or  promontories,  bays  or  creeks,  being  a lengthened 
oval.  All  around,  the  lonely  sea  extended  to  the  limits  of  the 
horizon.  No  land  nor  even  a sail  was  in  sight.  This  woody 
islet  did  not  offer  the  varied  aspects  of  Lincoln  Island,  arid  and 
wild  in  one  part,  but  fertile  and  rich  in  the  other.  On  the 
contrary  this  was  a uniform  mass  of  verdure,  out  of  which 
rose  two  or  three  hills  of  no  great  height.  Obliquely  to  the 
vval  of  the  island  ran  a stream  through  a wide  meadow  falling 
into  the  sea  on  the  west  by  a narrow  mouth. 

“ The  domain  is  limited,”  said  Herbert. 

“Yes,”  rejoined  Pencroft.  “It  would  have  been  too  small 
for  us.” 

“ And  moreover,”  said  the  reporter,  “ it  appears  to  be  unin- 
habited.” 

“ Indeed,”  answered  Herbert,  “ nothing  here  betrays  the  pres- 
ence of  man.” 

“Let  us  go  down,”  said  Pencroft,  “and  search.” 

The  sailor  and  his  two  companions  returned  to  the  shore,  to 
the  place  where  they  had  left  the  “ Bonadventure.” 

They  had  decided  to  make  the  tour  of  the  island  on  foot, 
before  exploring  the  interior,  so  that  not  a spot  should  escape 
their  investigations.  The  beach  was  easy  to  follow,  and  only  in 
some  places  was  their  way  barred  by  large  rocks,  which,  how- 
ever, they  easily  passed  round.  The  explorers  proceeded 
towards  the  south,  disturbing  numerous  flocks  of  sea-birds 
and  herds  of  seals,  which  threw  themselves  into  the  sea  as 
soon  as  they  saw  the  strangers  at  a distance. 


THE  ABANDONED. 


36a 


“ Those  beasts  yonder,”  observed  the  reporter,  “ do  not  see 
men  for  the  first  time.  They  fear  them,  therefore  they  must 
know  them.” 

An  hour  after  their  departure  they  arrived  on  the  southern 
point  of  the  islet,  terminated  by  a sharp  cape,  and  proceeded 
towards  the  north  along  the  western  coast,  equally  formed  by 
sand  and  rocks,  the  background  bordered  by  thick  woods. 

There  was  not  a trace  of  an  habitation  in  any  part,  not  the 
print  of  a human  foot  on  the  shore  of  the  island,  which  after 
four  hours’  walking  had  been  gone  completely  round. 

It  was,  to  say  the  least,  very  extraordinary,  and  they  were 
compelled  to  believe  that  Tabor  Island  was  not  or  was  no 
longer  inhabited.  Perhaps,  after  all,  the  document  was  already 
several  months  or  several  years  old,  and  it  was  possible  in 
this  case,  either  that  the  castaway  had  been  unable  to  return 
to  his  country,  or  that  he  had  died  of  misery. 

Pencroft,  Spilett,  and  Herbert,  forming  more  or  less  probable 
conjectures,  dined  rapidly  on  board  the  “ Bonadventure  ” so  as 
to  be  able  to  continue  their  excursion  until  nightfall.  This 
was  done  at  five  o’clock  in  the  evening,  at  which  hour  they 
entered  the  wood.  Numerous  animals  fled  at  their  approach, 
being  principally,  one  might  say,  only  goats  and  pigs,  which 
it  was  easy  to  see  belonged  to  European  species.  Doubtless 
some  whaler  had  landed  them  on  the  island,  where  they  had 
rapidly  increased.  Herbert  resolved  to  catch  one  or  two  living, 
and  take  them  back  to  Lincoln  Island. 

It  was  no  longer  doubtful  that  men  at  some  period  or  other 
had  visited  this  islet,  and  this  became  still  more  evident  when 
paths  appeared  trodden  through  the  forest,  felled  trees,  and 
every  where  traces  of  the  hand  of  man;  but  the  trees  were 
becoming  rotten,  and  had  been  felled  many  years  ago;  the 
marks  of  the  axe  were  velveted  with  moss,  and  the  grass 
grew  long  and  thick  oe  the  paths,  so  that  it  was  difficult  to 
find  them. 

“ But,”  observed  Gideon  Spilett,  “ this  not  only  proves  that 
men  have  landed  on  the  island,  but  also  that  they  lived  on 
it  for  some  time.  Now,  who  were  these  men?  How  many 
©f  them  remain  ? ” 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


864 

“The  document,”  said  Herbert,  “only  spoke  of  one  cast- 
away.” 

“ Well,  if  he  is  still  on  the  island,”  replied  Pencroft,  “ it  is 
impossible  but  that  we  shall  find  him.” 

The  exploration  was  continued.  The  sailor  and  his  com- 
panions naturally  followed  the  route  which  cut  diagonally 
across  the  island,  and  they  were  thus  obliged  to  follow  the 
stream  which  flowed  towards  the  sea. 

If  the  animals  of  European  origin,  if  works  due  to  a human 
hand,  showed  incontestably  that  men  had  already  visited  the 
island,  several  specimens  of  the  vegetable  kingdom  did  not 
prove  it  less.  In  some  places,  in  the  midst  of  clearings,  it 
was  evident  that  the  soil  had  been  planted  with  culinary 
plants,  at  probably  the  same  distant  period. 

What,  then,  was  Herbert’s  joy,  when  he  recognized  potatoes, 
chicory,  sorrel,  carrots,  cabbages,  and  turnips,  of  which  it  was 
sufficient  to  collect  the  seed  to  enrich  the  soil  of  Lincoln  Island. 

“ Capital,  jolly ! ” exclaimed  Pencroft.  “That  will  suit  Neb 
as  well  as  us.  Even  if  we  do  not  find  the  castaway,  at  least 
our  voyage  will  not  have  been  useless,  and  God  will  have 
rewarded  us.” 

“Doubtless,”  replied  Gideon  Spilett;  “but  to  .see  the  state  in 
which  we  find  these  plantations,  it  is  to  be  feared  that  the 
island  has  not  been  inhabited  for  some  time.” 

“Indeed,”  answered  Herbert,  “an  inhabitant,  whoever  he 
was,  could  not  have  neglected  such  an  important  culture  ! ” 

“Yes,”  said  Pencroft,  “ the  castaway  has  gone.” 

“We  must  suppose  so.” 

“ It  must  then  be  admitted  that  the  document  has  already  a 
distant  date  ? ” 

“ Evidently.” 

“And  that  the  bottle  only  arrived  at  Lincoln  Island  after 
having  floated  in  the  sea  a long  time^’ 

“ Why  not,”  returned  Pencroft.  “ But  night  is  coming  on,” 
added  he,  “ and  I think  that  it  will  be  best  to  give  up  the  search 
for  the  present.” 

“Let  us  go  on  board,  and  to-morrow  we  will  begin  again,” 
said  the  reporter. 


THE  ABANDONED. 


865 


This  was  the  wisest  course,  and  it  was  about  to  be  followed 
when  Herbert,  pointing  to  a confused  mass  among  the  trees, 
exclaimed,— 

"A  hut!” 

All  three  immediately  ran  towards  the  dwelling.  In  the 
twilight  it  was  just  possible  to  see  that  it  was  built  of  planks 
and  covered  with  a thick  tarpaulin. 

The  half-closed  door  was  pushed  open  by  Pencraft,  who 
entered  with  a rapid  step. 

The  hut  was  empty  l 


CHAPTER  XIV, 


THE  INVENTORY  — NIGHT— A FEW  LETTERS  — CONTINUATION  OF 
THE  SEARCH  — PLANTS  AND  ANIMALS  — HERBERT  IN  GREAT 
DANGER— ON  BOARD  — THE  DEPARTURE  — BAD  WEATHER— A 
GLEAM  OF  REASON— LOST  ON  THE  SEA— A TIMELY  LIGHT. 

Pencroft,  Herbert,  and  Gideon  Spilett,  remained  silent  in 
the  midst  of  the  darkness. 

Pencroft  shouted  loudly. 

No  reply  was  made. 

The  sailor  then  struck  a light  and  set  fire  to  a twig.  This 
lighted  for  a minute  a small  room,  which  appeared  per- 
fectly empty.  At  the  back  was  a rude  fireplace,  with  a few 
cold  cinders,  supporting  an  armful  of  dry  wood.  Pencroft 
threw  the  blazing  twig  on  it,  the  wood  cracked  and  gave  forth 
a bright  light. 

The  sailor  and  his  two  companions  then  perceived  a dis- 
ordered bed,  of  which  the  damp  and  yellow  coverlets  proved 
that  it  had  not  been  used  for  a long  time.  In  the  corner  oi 
the  fireplace  were  two  kettles,  covered  with  rust,  and  an  over- 
thrown pot.  A cupboard,  with  a few  mouldy  sailor’s  clothes; 
on  the  table  a tin  plate  and  a Bible,  eaten  away  by  damp;  in  a 
comer  a few  tools,  a spade,  pick-axe,  two  fowling-pieces,  one 
of  which  was  broken;  on  a plank,  forming  a shelf,  stood  a 
barrel  of  powder,  still  untouched,  a barrel  of  shot,  and  several 
boxes  of  caps,  all  thickly  covered  with  dust,  accumulated,  per- 
haps, by  many  long  years. 

“ There  is  no  one  here,”  said  the  reporter. 

“No  one,”  replied  Pencroft. 

“It  is  a long  time  since  this  room  has  been  inhabited,” 
observed  Herbert. 

“Yeh,  a very  long  time ! ” answered  the  reporter. 


THE  ABANDONED. 


867 


*'1  Mr,  Spilett,”  then  said  Pencroft,  “ instead  of  returning  on 
board,  I think  that  it  would  be  well  to  pass  the  night  in  thib 
hut.” 

“You  are  right,  Pencroft,”  answered  Gideon  Spilett,  “and 
if  its  owner  returns,  well ! perhaps  he  will  not  be  sorry  to 
find  the  place  taken  possession  of.” 

“ He  will  not  return,”  said  the  sailor,  shaking  his  head. 

“You  think  that  he  has  quitted  the  island?”  asked  the 
reporter. 

“If  he  had  quitted  the  island  he  would  have  taken  away 
his  weapons  and  his  tools,”  replied  Pencroft.  “You  know  the 
value  which  castaways  set  on  such  articles  as  these,  the  last 
remains  of  a wreck  ? No  ! no ! ” repeated  the  sailor,  in  a tone 
of  conviction,  “ no,  he  has  not  left  the  island ! If  he  had 
escaped  in  a boat  made  by  himself,  he  would  still  less  have 
left  these  indispensable  and  necessary  articles.  No ! he  is  on 
the  island ! ” 

“ Living  ?”  asked  Herbert. 

“ Living  or  dead.  But  if  he  is  dead,  I suppose  he  has  not 
buried  himself,  and  so  we  shall  at  least  find  his  remains !” 

It  was  then  agreed  that  the  night  should  be  passed  in  the 
deserted  dwelling,  and  a store  of  wood  found  in  a comer  was 
sufficient  to  warm  it.  The  door  closed,  Pencroft,  Herbert,  and 
Spilett  remained  there,  seated  on  a bench,  talking  little  but 
wondering  much.  They  were  in  a frame  of  mind  to  imagine 
any  thing  or  expect  any  thing.  They  listened  eagerly  for  sounds 
outside.  The  door  might  have  opened  suddenly,  and  a man 
presented  himself  to  them  without  their  being  in  the  least 
surprised,  notwithstanding  all  that  the  hut  revealed  of  aban- 
donment, and  they  had  their  hands  ready  to  press  the  hands  of 
this  man,  this  castaway,  this  unknown  friend,  for  whom 
friends  were  waiting. 

But  no  voice  was  heard,  the  door  did  not  open.  The  hours 
tnus  passed  away. 

How  long  the  night  appeared  to  the  sailor  and  his  compan- 
ions ! Herbert  alone  slept  for  two  hours,  for  at  his  age  sleep 
is  a necessity.  They  were  all  three  anxious  to  continue  their 
exploration  of  the  day  before,  and  to  search  the  most  secret 


868 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


recesses  of  the  islet  I The  inferences  deduced  by  Pencroft  wer4 
nerfectly  reasonable,  and  it  was  nearly  certain  that,  as  the  hut 
was  deserted,  and  the  tools,  utensils,  and  weapons  were  still 
there,  the  owner  had  succumbed.  It  was  agreed,  therefore, 
that  they  should  search  for  his  remains,  and  give  them  at  least 
Christian  burial. 

Day  dawned ; Pencroft  and  his  companions  immediately  pro- 
ceeded to  survey  the  dwelling.  It  had  certainly  been  built  in 
a favorable  situation,  at  the  back  of  a little  hill,  sheltered  by 
five  or  six  magnificent  gum-trees.  Before  its  front  and 
through  the  trees  the  axe  had  prepared  a wide  clearing,  which 
allowed  the  view  to  extend  to  the  sea.  Beyond  a lawn,  sur- 
rounded by  a wooden  fence  falling  to  pieces,  was  the  shore,  on 
the  left  of  which  was  the  mouth  of  the  stream. 

The  hut  had  been  built  of  planks,  and  it  was  easy  to  see 
that  these  planks  had  been  obtained  from  the  hull  or  deck  of 
a ship.  It  was  probable  that  a disabled  vessel  had  been  cast  on 
the  coast  of  the  island,  that  one  at  least  of  the  crew  had  been 
saved,  and  that  by  means  of  the  wreck  this  man,  having  tools 
at  his  disposal,  had  built  the  dwelling. 

And  this  became  still  more  evident  when  Gideon  Spilett,  after 
having  walked  round  the  hut,  saw  on  a plank,  probably  one  of 
those  which  had  formed  the  armor  of  the  wrecked  vessel,  these 
letters  already  half  effaced: 

“ Br— tan— a.” 

“ Britamra,”  exclaimed  Pencroft,  whom  the  reporter  had 
called  ; “ it  is  a common  name  for  ships,  and  I could  not  say 
if  she  was  English  or  American ! ” 

“ It  matters  very  little,  Pencroft ! ” 

“Very  little  indeed,”  answered  the  sailor ; “and  we  will  save 
the  survivor  of  the  crew  if  he  is  still  living,  to  whatever 
country  he  may  belong.  But  before  beginning  our  search 
again  let  us  go  on  board  the  ‘ Bonadventure.’  ” 

A sort  of  uneasiness  had  seized  Pencroft  upon  the  subject  of 
his  vessel.  Should  the  island  be  inhabited  after  all,  and  should 
some  one  have  taken  possession  of  her  ? But  he  shrugged  his 
snonlders  at  such  an  unreasonable  supposition.  At  any  rate 
the  sailor  was  not  sorry  to  go  to  breakfast  on  board.  The 


THE  ABANDONED. 


road  already  trodden  was  not  long,  scarcely  a mile.  They  sat 
out  on  their  walk,  gazing  into  the  wood  and  thickets  through 
which  goats  and  pigs  fled  in  hundreds. 

Twenty  minutes  after  leaving  the  hut  Pencroft  and  his  com, 
panions  reached  the  western  coast  of  the  island,  and  saw  the 
“ Bonadventure  ” held  fast  by  her  anchor,  which  was  buried 
deep  in  the  sand. 

Pencroft  could  not  restrain  a sigh  of  satisfaction.  After  all 
this  vessel  was  his  child,  and  it  is  the  right  of  fathers  to  be 
often  uneasy  when  there  is  no  occasion  for  it. 

They  returned  on  board,  breakfasted,  so  that  it  should  not 
be  necessary  to  dine  until  very  late  ; then  the  repast  being 
ended,  the  exploration  was  continued  and  conducted  with  the 
most  minute  care.  Indeed,  it  was  very  probable  that  the  only 
inhabitant  of  the  island  had  perished.  It  was  therefore  more 
for  the  traces  of  a dead  than  of  a living  man  that  Pencroft  and 
his  companions  searched.  But  their  searches  were  vain,  and 
during  the  half  of  that  day  they  sought  to  no  purpose  among 
the  thickets  of  trees  which  covered  the  islet.  There  was  then 
scarcely  any  doubt  that,  if  the  castaway  was  dead,  no  trace 
of  his  body  now  remained,  but  that  some  wild  beast  had 
probably  devoured  it  to  the  last  bone. 

“We  will  set  off  to-morrow  at  daybreak,”  said  Pencroft  to 
his  two  companions,  as  about  two  o’clock  they  were  resting 
for  a few  minutes  under  the  shade  of  a clump  of  firs. 

“I  should  think  that  we  might  without  scruple  take  the 
utensils  which  belonged  to  the  castaway,”  added  Herbert. 

* I think  so  too,”  returned  Gideon  Spilett;  “and  these  arms 
and  tools  will  make  up  the  stores  of  Granite  House.  The 
supply  of  powder  and  shot  is  also  most  important.” 

“Yes,”  replied  Pencroft ; “ but  we  must  not  forget  to  capture 
a couple  or  two  of  those  pigs,  of  which  Lincoln  Island  is  destb 
tute— ” 

“Nor  to  gather  those  seeds,”  added  Herbert,  “which will  give 
us  all  the  vegetables  of  the  Old  and  the  New  Worlds.” 

“Then  perhaps  it  would  be  best,”  said  the  reporter,  “to 
remain  a day  longer  on  Tabor  Island,  so  as  to  collect  all  that 
may  be  useful  to  us.” 

U 


470 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


“ No,  Mr.  Spilett,”  answered  Pencroft,  “ I will  ask  you  to  set 
oft  to-morrow  at  daybreak.  The  wind  seems  to  me  to  be  likely 
to  shift  to  the  west,  and  after  having  had  a fair  wind  for  com- 
ing we  shall  have  a fair  wind  for  going  back.” 

“ Then  do  not  let  us  lose  time,”  said  Herbert,  rising. 

“ We  won't  waste  time,”  returned  Pencroft  “ You,  Herbert, 
go  and  gather  the  seeds,  which  you  know  better  than  we  do, 
Whilst  you  do  that,  Mr.  Spilett  and  I will  go  and  have  a pig 
hunt,  and  even  without  Top  I hope  We  shall  manage  to  catch  a 
few ! ” 

Herbert  accordingly  took  the  path  which  led  towards  the 
cultivated  part  of  the  islet,  whilst  the  sailor  and  the  reporter 
entered  the  forest. 

Many  specimens  of  the  porcine  race  fled  before  them,  and 
these  animals,  which  were  singularly  active,  did  not  appear  to 
be  in  a humor  to  allow  themselves  to  be  approached. 

However,  after  an  hour’s  chase,  the  hunters  had  just  man- 
aged to  get  hold  of  a couple  lying  in  a thicket,  when  criei 
tvere  heard  resounding  from  the  north  part  of  the  island. 
With  the  cries  were  mingled  terrible  yells,  in  which  there  was 
nothing  human. 

Pencroft  and  Gideon  Spilett  were  at  once  on  their  feet,  and 
the  pigs  by  this  movement  began  to  run  away,  at  the  moment 
when  the  sailor  was  getting  ready  the  rope  to  bind  them. 

“ That’s  Herbert’s  voice,”  said  the  reporter. 

“ Run  ! ” exclaimed  Pencroft. 

And  the  sailor  and  Spilett  immediately  ran  at  full  speed 
towards  the  spot  from  whence  the  cries  proceeded. 

They  did  well  to  hasten,  for  at  a turn  of  the  path  near  a clear- 
ing they  saw  the  lad  thrown  on  the  ground  and  in  the 
grasp  of  a savage  being,  apparently  a gigantic  ape,  who  was 
about  to  do  him  some  great  harm. 

To  rush  on  this  monster,  throw  him  on  the  ground  in  his 
turn,  snatch  Herbert  from  him,  then  bind  him  securely,  was  the 
work  of  a minute  for  Pencroft  and  Gideon  Spilett.  The 
sailor  was  of  Herculean  strength,  the  reporter  also  very 
powerful,  and  in  spite  of  the  monster’s  resistance  he  was  firmly 
tied  so  that  he  could  not  even  move. 


THE  ABANDONED. 


871 


“You  are  not  hurt,  Herbert,”  asked  Spilett. 

“No,  no !” 

“ Oh,  if  this  ape  had  wounded  him  ! ” exclaimed  Pencroft. 

“But  he  is  not  an  ape,”  answered  Herbert. 

At  these  words  Pencroft  and  Gideon  Spilett  looked  at 
the  singular  being  who  lay  on  the  ground.  Indeed  it  was 
not  an  ape,  it  was  a human  being,  a man.  But  what  a man  ! 
A savage  in  all  the  horrible  acceptation  of  the  word,  and  so 
much  the  more  frightful  that  he  seemed  fallen  to  the  lowest 
degree  of  brutishness ! 

Shaggy  hair,  untrimmed  beard  descending  to  the  chest, 
the  body  almost  naked  except  a rag  round  the  waist,  wild 
eyes,  enormous  hands  with  immensely  long  nails,  skin  the 
color  of  mahogany,  feet  as  hard  as  if  made  of  horn,— such 
was  the  miserable  creature  who  yet  had  a claim  to  be  called  a 
man.  But  it  might  justly  be  asked  if  there  were  yet  a soul  in 
this  body,  or  if  the  brute  instinct  alone  survived  in  it ! 

“ Are  you  quite  sure  that  this  is  a man,  or  that  he  has  ever 
been  one  ? ” said  Pencroft  to  the  reporter. 

“ Alas  I there  is  no  doubt  about  it,”  replied  Spilett. 

“ Then  this  must  be  the  castaway  ? ” asked  Herbert. 

“Yes,”  replied  Gideon  Spilett,  “ but  the  unfortunate  man  has 
no  longer  any  thing  human  about  him  ! ” 

The  reporter  spoke  the  truth.  It  was  evident  that  if  the 
castaway  had  ever  been  a civilized  being,  solitude  had  made 
him  a savage,  or  wTorse,  perhaps  a regular  man  of  the  woods. 
Hoarse  sounds  issued  from  his  throat  between  his  teeth, 
which  were  sharp  as  the  teeth  of  a wild  beast  made  to  tear 
raw  flesh. 

Memory  must  have  deserted  him  long  before  and  for  a 
long  time  also  he  had  forgotten  how  to  use  his  gun  and  tools, 
and  he  no  longer  knew  how  to  make  a fire ! It  could  be 
seen  that  he  was  active  and  powerful,  but  the  physical 
qualities  had  been  developed  in  him  to  the  injury  of  the 
moral  qualities.  Gideon  Spilett  spoke  to  him.  He  did  not 
appear  to  understand  or  even  to  hear.  And  yet  on  looking  into 
his  eyes,  the  reporter  thought  he  could  see  that  all  reason  was 
not  extinguished  in  him.  However,  the  prisoner  did  not 


872 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


struggle,  nor  even  attempt  to  break  his  bonds.  Was  he  over, 
whelmed  by  the  presence  of  men  whose  fellow  he  had  one# 
been  ? Had  he  found  in  some  corner  of  his  brain  a fleeting 
remembrance  which  recalled  him  to  humanity?  If  free,  would 
he  attempt  to  fly,  or  would  he  remain  ? They  could  not  tell, 
but  they  did  not  make  the  experiment;  and  after  gazing 
attentively  at  the  miserable  creature,— 

“Whoever  he  may  be,”  remarked  Gideon  Spilett;  “ whoever 
he  may  have  been,  and  whatever  he  may  become,  it  is  our 
duty  to  take  him  with  us  to  Lincoln  Island.” 

“Yes,  yes!”  replied  Herbert;  “and  perhaps  with  care  we 
may  arouse  in  him  some  gleam  of  intelligence.” 

“ The  soul  does  not  die,”  said  the  reporter;  “and  it  would  be 
a great  satisfaction  to  rescue  one  of  God’s  creatures  from 
brutishness.” 

Pencroft  shook  his  head  doubtfully. 

“ We  must  try  at  any  rate,”  returned  the  reporter;  “humanity 
'Commands  us.” 

It  was  indeed  their  duty  as  Christians  and  civilized  beings. 
All  three  felt  this,  and  they  well  knew  that  Cyrus  Harding 
would  approve  of  their  acting  thus. 

“ Shall  we  leave  him  bound  ? ” asked  the  sailor. 

“Perhaps  he  would  walk  if  his  feet  were  unfastened,”  said 
Herbert. 

“ Let  us  try,”  replied  Pencroft. 

The  cords  which  shackled  the  prisoner’s  feet  were  cut  off, 
but  his  arms  remained  securely  fastened.  He  got  up  by  him- 
self and  did  not  manifest  any  desire  to  run  away.  His  hard 
eyes  darted  a piercing  glance  at  the  three  men,  who  walked 
near  him,  but  nothing  denoted  that  he  recollected  being  their 
fellow,  or  at  least  having  been  so.  A continual  hissing  sound 
issued  from  his  lips,  his  aspect  was  wild,  but  he  did  not 
attempt  to  resist. 

By  the  reporter’s  advice  the  unfortunate  man  was  taken  to 
the  hut.  Perhaps  the  sight  of  the  things  that  belonged  to  him 
would  make  some  impression  on  him ! Perhaps  a spark 
Would  be  sufficient  to  revive  his  obscured  intellect,  to  rekindle 
his  dulled  soul.  The  dwelling  was  not  far  off.  In  a few  min- 


THE  ABANDONED!. 


878 


ntes  they  arrived  there,  but  the  prisoner  remembered  nothing, 
and  it  appeared  that  he  had  lost  consciousness  of  every  thing. 

What  could  they  think  of  the  degree  of  brutishness  into 
which  this  miserable  being  had  fallen,  unless  that  his  im- 
prisonment on  the  islet  dated  from  a very  distant  period  and 
after  having  arrived  there  a rational  being  solitude  had  reduced 
him  to  this  condition. 

The  reporter  then  thought  that  perhaps  the  sight  of  fire 
would  have  some  effect  on  him,  and  in  a moment  one  of  those 
beautiful  flames,  that  attract  even  animals,  blazed  up  on  the 
hearth.  The  sight  of  the  flame  seemed  at  first  to  fix  the 
attention  of  the  unhappy  object,  but  soon  he  turned  away  and 
the  Iook  of  intelligence  faded.  Evidently  there  was  nothing 
to  be  done,  for  the  time  at  least,  but  to  take  him  on  board  the 
“ Bonadventure.”  This  was  done,  and  he  remained  there 
in  Pencroft’s  charge. 

Herbert  and  Spilett  returned  to  finish  their  work;  and 
some  hours  after  they  came  back  to  the  shore,  carrying  the 
utensils  and  guns,  a store  of  vegetables,  of  seeds,  some  game, 
and  two  couple  of  pigs. 

All  was  embarked,  and  the  “Bonadventure”  was  ready  to 
weigh  anchor  and  sail  with  the  morning  tide. 

The  prisoner  had  been  placed  in  the  fore  cabin,  where  he 
remained  (iuiet,  silent,  apparently  deaf  and  dumb. 

Pencroft  offered  him  something  to  eat,  but  he  pushed  away 
the  cooked  meat  that  was  presented  to  him  and  which  doubt- 
less did  not  suit  him.  But  on  the  sailor  showing  him  one  of 
the  ducks  which  Herbert  had  killed,  he  pounced  on  it  like  a 
wild  beast,  and  devoured  it  greedily. 

“You  think  that  he  will  recover  his  senses?”  asked  Pen- 
croft. “ It  is  not  impossible  that  our  care  will  have  an  effect 
upon  him,  for  it  is  solitude  that  has  made  him  what  he  is,  and 
from  this  time  forward  he  will  be  no  longer  alone.” 

“ The  poor  man  must  no  doubt  have  been  in  this  state  for  a 
long  time,”  said  Herbert. 

“ Perhaps,”  answered  Gideon  Spilett. 

“ About  what  age  is  he  ? ” asked  the  lad. 

64 It  is  difficult  to  say,”  replied  the  reporter;  “for  it  is  irnpos- 


m 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


sible  to  see  his  features  under  the  thick  beard  which  eovera 
his  face  ; but  he  is  no  longer  young,  and  I suppose  he  might 
be  about  fifty.” 

“Have  you  noticed,  Mr.  Spilett,  how  deeply  sunt  his 
eyes  are  ? ” asked  Herbert. 

“Yes,  Herbert;  but  I must  add  that  they  are  more  human 
than  one  could  expect  from  his  appearance.” 

“However,  we  shall  see,”  replied  Pencroft;  “and  I am  anx- 
ious to  know  what  opinion  Captain  Harding  will  have  of  our 
savage.  We  went  to  look  for  a human  creature,  and  we  are 
bringing  back  a monster ! After  all  we  did  what  we  could.” 

The  night  passed,  and  whether  the  prisoner  slept  or  not  could 
not  be  known;  but  at  any  rate,  although  he  had  been  un- 
bound, he  did  not  move.  He  was  like  a wild  animal,  which 
appears  stunned  at  first  by  its  capture,  and  becomes  wild 
again  afterwards. 

At  daybreak  the  next  morning,  the  15th  of  October,  the 
change  of  weather  predicted  by  Pencroft  occurred.  The  wind 
having  shifted  to  the  northwest  favored  the  return  of  the 
“ Bonadventure,”  but  at  the  same  time  it  freshened,  which 
would  render  navigation  more  difficult. 

At  five  o’clock  in  the  morning  the  anchor  was  weighed. 
Pencroft  took  a reef  in  the  mainsail,  and  steered  towards 
the  northeast,  so  as  to  sail  straight  for  Lincoln  Island. 

The  first  day  of  the  voyage  was  not  marked  by  any  incident. 
The  prisoner  remained  quiet  in  the  fore-cabin,  and  as  he  had 
been  a sailor  it  appeared  that  the  motion  of  the  vessel  might 
produce  on  him  a salutary  reaction.  Bid  some  recollection  of 
his  former  calling  return  to  him  ? However  that  might  be  he 
remained  tranquil,  astonished  rather  than  depressed. 

The  next  day  the  wind  increased,  blowing  more  from  the 
north,  consequently  in  a less  favorable  direction  for  the 
“Bonadventure.”  Pencroft  was  soon  obliged  to  sail  close- 
hauled,  and  without  saying  any  thing  about  it  he  began  to  be 
uneasy  at  the  state  of  the  sea,  which  frequently  broke  over  the 
bows.  Certainly,  if  the  wind  did  not  moderate,  it  would  take  a 
longer  time  to  reach  Lincoln  Island  than  it  had  taken  to  make 
Tabor  Island. 


THE  ABANDONED. 


377 


Indeed,  on  the  morning  of  the  17th,  the  “ Bonadventure  ” 
had  been  forty-eight  hours  at  sea,  and  nothing  showed  that  she 
was  near  the  island.  It  was  impossible,  besides,  to  estimate 
the  distance  traversed,  or  to  trust  to  the  reckoning  for  the 
direction,  as  the  speed  had  been  very  irregular. 

Twenty-four  hours  after  there  was  yet  no  land  in  sight. 
The  wind  was  right  ahead  and  the  sea  very  heavy.  The  sails 
were  close-reefed,  and  they  tacked  frequently.  On  the  18th, 
a wave  swept  completely  over  the  “ Bonadventure  ” ; and  if 
the  crew  had  not  taken  the  precaution  of  lashing  themselves  to 
the  deck,  they  would  have  been  carried  away. 

On  this  occasion,  Pencroft  and  his  companions,  who  were 
occupied  with  loosing  themselves,  received  unexpected  aid 
from  the  prisoner,  who  emerged  from  the  hatchway  as  if  his 
sailor’s  instinct  had  suddenly  returned,  broke  a piece  out  of  the 
bulwarks  with  a spar,  so  as  to  let  the  water  which  filled  the 
deck  escape.  Then  the  vessel  being  clear,  he  descended  to  his 
cabin  without  having  uttered  a word.  Pencroft,  Gideon 
Spilett,  and  Herbert,  greatly  astonished,  let  him  proceed. 

Their  situation  was  truly  serious,  and  the  sailor  had  reason  to 
fear  that  he  was  lost  on  the  wide  sea  without  any  possibility 
of  recovering  his  course. 

The  night  was  dark  and  cold.  However,  about  eleven 
o’clock,  the  wind  fell,  the  sea  went  down,  and  the  speed  of  the 
vessel,  as  she  labored  less,  greatly  increased. 

Neither  Pencroft,  Spilett,  nor  Herbert  thought  of  taking 
an  hour’s  sleep.  They  kept  a sharp  look-out,  for  either 
Lincoln  Island  could  not  be  far  distant  and  would  be  sighted 
at  daybreak,  or  the  “ Bonadventure,”  carried  away  by  currents, 
had  drifted  so  much  that  it  would  be  impossible  to  rectify  her 
course.  Pencroft,  uneasy  to  the  last  degree,  yet  did  not 
despair,  for  he  had  a gallant  heart,  and  grasping  the  tiller 
he  anxiously  endeavored  to  pierce  the  darkness  which  sur- 
rounded them. 

About  two  o’clock  in  the  morning  he  started  forward,— 

“ A light ! a light ! ” he  shouted. 

Indeed,  a bright  light  appeared  twenty  miles  to  the  north- 
east. Lincoln  Island  was  there,  and  this  fire,  evidently  lighted 


878 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION, 


by  Cyrus  Harding,  showed  them  the  course  to  be  followed. 
Pencroft,  who  was  bearing  too  much  to  the  north,  altered  his 
course  and  steered  towards  the  fire,  which  burned  brightly 
abeve  the  horizon  like  a star  of  the  first  magnitude. 


CHAPTER  XV, 


IfiE  RETURN— DISCUSSION— CYRUS  HARDING  AND  THE  STRANGER 
—PORT  Balloon— THE  ENGINEER’S  devotion— a touching 
INCIDENT — TEARS  FLOW. 

The  next  day,  the  20th  of  October,  at  seven  o’clock  in  the 
morning,  after  a voyage  of  four  days,  the  “ Bonadventure  ” 
gently  glided  up  to  the  beach  at  the  mouth  of  the  Mercy. 

Cyrus  Harding  and  Neb,  who  had  become  very  uneasy  at  the 
bad  weather  and  the  prolonged  absence  of  their  companions, 
had  climbed  at  daybreak  to  the  plateau  of  Prospect  Heights, 
and  they  had  at  last  caught  sight  of  the  vessel  which  had  been 
so  long  in  returning. 

“God  be  praised!  there  they  are!”  exclaimed  Cyrus  Hard- 
ing. 

As  to  Neb  in  his  joy,  he  began  to  dance,  to  twirl  round,  clap- 
ping his  hands  and  shouting,  “ Oh ! my  master ! ” A more 
touching  pantomime  than  the  finest  discourse. 

The  engineer’s  first  idea,  on  counting  the  people  on  the  deck 
of  the  “ Bonadventure,”  was  that  Pencroft  had  not  found  the 
castaway  of  Tabor  Island,  or  at  any  rate  that  the  unfortunate 
man  had  refused  to  leave  his  island  and  change  one  prison 
for  another. 

Indeed  Pencroft,  Gideon  Spilett,  and  Herbert  were  alone  on 
the  deck  of  the  “Bonadventure.” 

The  moment  the  vessel  touched,  the  engineer  and  Neb  were 
waiting  on  the  beach,  and  before  the  passengers  had  time  to 
leap  on  to  the  sand,  Harding  said : “ We  have  been  very 
uneasy  at  your  delay,  my  friends ! Did  you  meet  with  any 
accident  ? ” 

“ No,”  replied  Gideon  Spilett ; “ on  the  contrary,  every  thing 
went,  wonderfully  well.  We  will  tell  you  all  about  it.” 

379 


880 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


“ However,”  returned  the  engineer,  “your  search  has  bee® 
unsuccessful,  since  you  are  only  three  just  as  you  went ! ” 

“ Excuse  me,  captain,”  replied  the  sailor,  “ we  are  four.” 

“ You  have  found  the  castaway  ? ” 

“Yes.” 

“ And  you  have  brought  him  ? 

“Yes.” 

“Living?” 

« Yes.” 

“ Where  is  he  ? Who  is  he  ? ” 

“ He  is,”  replied  the  reporter,  “ or  rather  he  was,  a man ! 
There,  Cyrus,  that  is  all  we  can  tell  you ! ” 

The  engineer  was  then  informed  of  all  that  had  passed  dur- 
ing the  voyage,  and  under  what  conditions  the  search  had  been 
conducted;  how  the  only  dwelling  in  the  island  had  long  been 
abandoned;  how  at  last  a castaway  had  been  captured,  who 
appeared  no  longer  to  belong  to  the  human  species. 

“And  that’s  just  the  point,”  added  Pencroft,  “I  don’t  know 
if  we  have  done  right  to  bring  him  here.” 

“ Certainly  you  have,  Pencroft,”  replied  the  engineer  quickly. 
“ But  the  wretched  creature  has  no  sense ! ” 

“ That  is  possible  at  present,”  replied  Cyrus  Harding  ; “ but 
only  a few  months  ago  the  wretched  creature  was  a man  like 
you  and  me.  And  who  knows  what  will  become  of  the  survivor 
of  us  after  a long  solitude  on  this  island?  It  is  a great 
misfortune  to  be  alone,  my  friends ; and  it  must  be  believed 
that  solitude  can  quickly  destroy  reason,  since  you  have  found 
this  poor  creature  in  such  a state  ! ” 

“ But,  captain,”  asked  Herbert,  “ what  leads  you  to  think  that 
the  brutishness  of  the  unfortunate  man  began  only  a few 
months  back  ? ” 

“ Because  the  document  we  found  had  been  recently  writ- 
ten,” answered  the  engineer,  “ and  the  castaway  alone  can  have 
written  it.” 

“ Always  supposing,”  observed  Gideon  Spilett,  “ that  it  had 
not  been  written  by  a companion  of  this  man,  since  dead.” 

“ That  is  impossible,  my  dear  Spilett.” 

“ Why  so  ? ” asked  the  reporter. 


THE  ABANDONED. 


“ Because  the  document  would  then  have  spoken  of  two  cast- 
aways,” replied  Harding,  “ and  it  mentioned  only  one.” 

Herbert  then  in  a few  words  related  the  incidents  of  th<* 
voyage,  and  dwelt  on  the  curious  fact  of  the  sort  of  passing 
gleam  in  the  prisoner’s  mind,  when  for  an  instant  in  tha 
height  of  the  storm  he  had  become  a sailor. 

“ Well,  Herbert,”  replied  the  engineer,  “ you  are  right  to 
attach  great  importance  to  this  fact.  The  unfortunate  man  can 
not  be  incurable,  and  despair  has  made  him  what  he  is;  but 
here  he  will  find  his  fellow-men,  and  since  there  is  still  a soul 
in  him,  this  soul  we  shall  save  ! ” 

The  castaway  of  Tabor  Island,  to  the  great  pity  of  the  engi- 
neer and  the  great  astonishment  of  Neb,  was  then  brought 
from  the  cabin  which  he  occupied  in  the  fore  part  of  the  “ Bon- 
adventure  ; ” when  once  on  land  he  manifested  a wish  to  run 
away. 

But  Cyrus  Harding  approaching,  placed  his  hand  on  his 
shoulder  with  a gesture  full  of  authority,  and  looked  at  him 
with  infinite  tenderness.  Immediately  the  unhappy  man,  sub- 
mitting to  a superior  will,  gradually  became  calm,  his  eyes 
fell,  his  head  bent,  and  he  made  no  more  resistance. 

“ Poor  fellow  ! ” murmured  the  engineer. 

Cyrus  Harding  had  attentively  observed  him.  To  judge  by 
his  appearance  this  miserable  being  had  no  longer  any  thing 
human  about  him,  and  yet  Harding,  as  had  the  reporter 
already,  observed  in  his  look  an  indefinable  trace  of  intelli- 
gence. 

It  was  decided  that  the  castaway,  or  rather  the  stranger,  as 
he  was  thenceforth  termed  by  his  companions,  should  live  in 
one  of  the  rooms  of  Granite  House,  from  which,  however,  he 
could  not  escape.  He  was  led  there  without  difficulty ; and 
with  careful  attention,  it  might,  perhaps,  be  hoped  that  some 
day  he  would  be  a companion  to  the  settlers  in  Lincoln  Island. 

Cyrus  Harding,  during  breakfast,  which  Neb  had  hastened  to 
prepare,  as  the  reporter,  Herbert,  and  Pencroft  were  dying  of 
hunger,  heard  in  detail  all  the  incidents  which  had  marked 
the  voyage  of  exploration  to  the  islet.  He  agreed  with  his 
friends  on  this  point,  that  the  stranger  must  be  either  English 


384 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


or  American,  the  name  Britannia  leading  them  to  suppose 
this,  and,  besides,  through  the  bushy  beard,  and  under  the 
shaggy,  matted  hair,  the  engineer  thought  he  could  recognize 
the  characteristic  features  of  the  Anglo  - Saxon. 

“But,  by-the-bye,”  said  Gideon  Spilett,  addressing  Herbert, 
“you  never  told  us  how  you  met  this  savage,  and  we  know 
nothing,  except  that  you  would  have  been  strangled,  if  we  had 
not  happened  to  come  up  in  time  to  help  you ! ” 

“ Upon  my  word,”  answered  Herbert,  “ it  is  rather  difficult 
to  say  how  it  happened.  I was,  I think,  occupied  in  collecting 
my  plants,  when  I heard  a noise  like  an  avalanche  falling 
from  a very  tall  tree.  I scarcely  had  time  to  look  round.  This 
unfortunate  man,  who  was  without  doubt  concealed  in  a tree, 
rushed  upon  me  in  less  time  than  I take  to  tell  you  about  it, 
and  unless  Mr.  Spilett  and  Pencroft-— ” 

“My boy!”  said  Cyrus  Harding,  “you  ran  a great  danger, 
but,  perhaps,  without  that,  the  poor  creature  would  still  have 
hidden  himself  from  your  search,  and  we  should  not  have  had 
a new  companion.” 

“You  hope,  then,  Cyrus,  to  succeed  in  reforming  the  man  ?” 
asked  the  reporter. 

“ Yes,”  replied  the  engineer. 

Breakfast  over,  Harding  and  his  companions  left  Granite 
House  and  returned  to  the  beach.  They  there  occupied  them- 
selves in  unloading  the  “ Bonadventure,”  and  the  engineer, 
having  examined  the  arms  and  tools,  saw  nothing  which  could 
help  them  to  establish  the  identity  of  the  stranger. 

The  capture  of  pigs,  made  on  the  islet,  was  looked  upon  as 
being  very  profitable  to  Lincoln  Island,  and  the  animals  were 
led  to  the  sty,  where  they  soon  became  at  home. 

The  two  barrels,  containing  the  powder  and  shot,  as  well  as 
the  box  of  caps,  were  very  welcome.  It  was  agreed  to  estab- 
lish a small  powder-magazine,  either  outside  Granite  House  or 
in  the  Upper  Cavern,  where  there  would  be  no  fear  of  explo- 
sion. However,  the  use  of  pyroxyle  was  to  be  continued,  for 
this  substance  giving  excellent  results,  there  was  no  reason  for 
substituting  ordinary  powder. 

When  the  unloading  of  the  vessel  was  finished,—- 


THE  ABANDONED. 


885 


“Captain,”  said  Pencroft,  “I  think  it  would  be  prudent  to 
put  our  ‘ Bonadventure  ’ in  a safe  place.” 

“ Is  she  not  safe  at  the  mouth  of  the  Mercy  ? ” asked  Cyrus 
Harding. 

“ No,  captain,”  replied  the  sailor.  “Half  of  the  time  she  is 
stranded  on  the  sand,  and  that  works  her.  She  is  a famous 
craft,  you  see,  and  she  behaved  admirably  during  the  squall 
which  struck  us  on  our  return.” 

“ Could  she  not  float  in  the  river  ? ” 

“No  doubt,  captain,  she  could  ; but  there  is  no  shelter  there, 
and  in  the  east  winds,  I think  that  the  4 Bonadventure ’ would 
suffer  much  from  the  surf.” 

“ Well,  where  would  you  put  her,  Pencroft  ?” 

“In  Port  Balloon,”  replied  the  sailor.  “That  little  creek, 
shut  in  by  rocks,  seems  to  me  to  be  just  the  harbor  we 
want.” 

“ Is  it  not  rather  far  ? ” 

“ Pooh ! it  is  not  more  than  three  miles  from  Granite  House, 
and  we  have  a fine  straight  road  to  take  us  there ! ” 

“ Do  it,  then,  Pencroft,  and  take  your  ‘ Bonadventure’  there,’' 
% replied  the  engineer,  “ and  yet  I would  rather  have  her  more 
under  our  immediate  protection.  When  we  have  time,  we 
must  make  a little  harbor  for  her.” 

“ Famous ! ” exclaimed  Pencroft.  “ A harbor  with  a light- 
house, a pier,  and  a dock  ! Ah  ! really  with  you,  captain,  every 
thing  becomes  easy.” 

“Yes,  my  brave  Pencroft,”  answered  the  engineer,  “but  on 
condition,  however,  that  you  help  me,  for  you  do  as  much  as 
three  men  in  all  our  work.” 

Herbert  and  the  sailor  then  embarked  on  board  the  “ Bonad- 
venture,”  the  anchor  was  weighed,  the  sail  hoisted,  and  the 
wind  drove  her  rapidly  towards  Claw  Cape.  Two  hours  after, 
she  was  reposing  on  the  tranquil  waters  of  Port  Balloon. 

During  the  first  days  passed  by  the  stranger  in  Granite  House, 
had  he  already  given  them  reason  to  think  that  his  savage 
nature  was  becoming  tamed?  Did  a brighter  light  burn  in 
the  depths,  of  that  obscured  mind?  In  short,  was  the  soul 
returning  to  the  body  ? 

25 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


Yes,  to  a eertainty,  and  to  such  a degree  that  Cyrus  Harding 
and  the  reporter  wondered  if  the  reason  of  the  unfortunate 
man  had  ever  been  totally  extinguished.  At  first,  accustomed 
to  the  open  air,  to  the  unrestrained  liberty  which  he  had 
enjoyed  on  Tabor  Island,  the  stranger  manifested  a sullen 
fury,  and  it  was  feared  that  he  might  throw  himself  on  the 
beach,  out  of  one  of  the  windows  of  Granite  House.  But 
gradually  he  became  calmer,  and  more  freedom  was  allowed  to 
his  movements. 

They  had  reason  to  hope,  and  to  hope  much.  Already,  for- 
getting his  carniverous  instincts,  the  stranger  accepted  a less 
bestial  nourishment  than  that  on  which  he  fed  on  the  islet,  and 
cooked  meat  did  not  produce  in  him  the  same  sentiment  of 
repulsion  which  he  had  showed  on  board  the  “Bonad  venture.” 
Cyrus  Harding  had  profited  by  a moment  when  he  was  sleeping, 
to  cut  his  hair  and  matted  beard,  wrhich  formed  a sort  of  mane, 
and  gave  him  such  a savage  aspect.  He  had  also  been  clothed 
more  suitably,  after  having  got  rid  of  the  rag  which  covered 
him.  The  result  was  that,  thanks  to  these  attentions,  the 
stranger  resumed  a more  human  appearance,  and  it  even 
seemed  as  if  his  eyes  had  become  milder.  Certainly,  when  * 
formerly  lighted  up  by  intelligence,  this  man’s  face  must  Jiave 
had  a sort  of  beauty. 

Every  day  Harding  imposed  on  himself  the  task  of  passing 
some  hours  in  his  company.  He  came  and  worked  near  him, 
and  occupied  himself  in  different  things,  so  as  to  fix  his 
attention.  A spark,  indeed,  would  be  sufficient  to  re-illumine 
that  soul,  a recollection  crossing  that  brain  to  recall  reason. 
That  had  been  seen,  during  the  storm,  on  board  the  “ Bonad- 
venture ! ” The  engineer  did  not  neglect  either  to  speak  aloud, 
so  as  to  penetrate  at  the  same  time  by  the  organs  of  hearing 
and  sight  the  depths  of  that  torpid  intelligence.  Sometimes 
one  of  his  companions,  sometimes  another,  sometimes  all, 
joined  him.  They  spoke  most  often  of  things  belonging  to  the 
navy,  which  must  interest  a sailor. 

At  times  the  stranger  gave  some  slight  attention  to  what  was 
said,  and  the  settlers  were  soon  convinced  that  he  partly 
understood  them.  Sometimes  the  expression  of  his  counte- 


THE  ABANDONED. 


887 


nance  was  deeply  sorrowful,  a proof  that  he  suffered  mentally, 
f®r  his  face  could  not  be  mistaken ; but  he  did  not  speak, 
although  at  different  times,  however,  they  almost  thought  that 
words  were  about  to  issue  from  his  lips.  At  all  events,  the 
poor  creature  was  quite  quiet  and  sad  ! 

But  was  not  his  calm  only  apparent  ? Was  not  his  sadness 
only  the  result  of  his  seclusion  ? Nothing  could  yet  be  ascer- 
tained. Seeing  only  certain  objects  and  in  a limited  space, 
always  in  contact  with  the  colonists,  to  whom  he  would  soon 
become  accustomed,  having  no  desires  to  satisfy,  better  fed, 
better  clothed,  it  was  natural  that  his  physical  nature  should 
gradually  improve;  but  was  he  penetrated  with  the  sense  of  a 
new  life  ? or  rather,  to  employ  a word,  which  would  be  exactly 
applicable  to  him,  was  he  not  becoming  tamed,  like  an  animal 
in  company  with  his  master?  This  was  an  important  question, 
which  Cyrus  Harding  was  anxious  to  answer,  and  yet  he  did 
not  wish  to  treat  his  invalid  roughly ! would  he  ever  be  a 
convalescent  ? 

How  the  engineer  observed  him  every  moment!  How  he 
was  on  the  watch  for  his  soul,  if  one  may  use  the  expression ! 
How  he  was  ready  to  grasp  it ! The  settlers  followed  with  real 
sympathy  all  the  phases  of  the  cure  undertaken  by  Harding. 
They  aided  him  also  in  this  work  of  humanity,  and  all,  except 
perhaps  the  incredulous  Pencroft,  soon  shared  both  his  hope 
and  his  faith. 

The  calm  of  the  stranger  was  deep,  as  has  been  said,  and  he 
even  showed  a sort  of  attachment  for  the  engineer,  whose 
influence  he  evidently  felt.  Cyrus  Harding  resolved  then  to 
try  him,  by  transporting  him  to  another  scene,  from  that 
ocean  which  formerly  his  eyes  had  been  accustomed  to  contem- 
plate, to  the  border  of  the  forest,  which  might  perhaps  recall 
- those  where  so  many  years  of  his  life  had  been  passed  ! 

“ But,”  said  Gideon  Spilett,  “ can  we  hope  that  he  will  not 
escape,  if  once  set  at  liberty  ?” 

“ The  experiment  must  be  tried,”  replied  the  engineer. 

“ Well !”  said  Pencroft.  “ When  that  fellow  is  outside,  and 
feels  the  fresh  air,  he  will  be  off  as  fast  as  his  legs  can  carry 
him!” 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION, 


“ I do  not  think  so,”  returned  Harding. 

“ Let  us  try ! ” said  Spilett. 

“We  will  try,”  replied  the  engineer. 

This  was  on  the  30th  of  October,  and  consequently  the 
castaway  of  Tabor  Island  had  been  a prisoner  in  Granite 
House  for  nine  days.  It  was  warm,  and  a bright  sun  darted 
his  rays  on  the  island.  Cyrus  Harding  and  Pencroft  went  to 
the  room  occupied  by  the  stranger,  who  was  found  lying  near 
the  window  and  gazing  at  the  sky. 

“ Come,  my  friend,”  said  the  engineer  to  him. 

The  stranger  rose  immediately.  His  eyes  were  fixed  on 
Cyrus  Harding,  and  he  followed  him,  whilst  the  sailor  marched 
behind  them,  little  confident  i\  s to  the  t ult  of  the  experiment. 

Arrived  at  the  door,  and  Pencroft  made  him  take  his 

place  in  the  lift,  whilst  Neb,  and  Gideon  Spilett  waited 

for  them  before  Granite  F The  lift  descended,  and  in  a 
few  moments  all  were  united  on  the  beach. 

The  settlers  went  a short  distance  from.  the  stranger,  so 
as  to  leave  him  at  liberty. 

He  then  made  a few  steps  towards  the  sea,  and  his 
look  brightened  with  extreme  animation,  but  he  did  Dot 
make  the  slightest  attempt  to  escape.  He  was  gazing 
at  the  little  waves,  which,  broken  by  the  islet,  ripplod 
on  the  sand. 

“This  is  only  the  sea,”  observed  Gideon  SpUett,  “r-r  1 
possibly  it  does  not  inspire  him  with  any  wish  to  escape  !'* 

“Yes,”  replied  Harding,  “we  must  take  him  to  tho 
plateau,  on  the  border  of  the  forest.  There  the  expert- 
ment  will  be  more  conclusive.” 

“Besides,  he  could  not  run  away,”  cud  Neb,’  “since  the 
bridge  is  raised.” 

“Oh  1”  rai  l Pencroft,  “that  isn’t  a man  to  be  troubled  by  a 
stream  * Creek  Gb  erine  ! He  could  cross  it  directly  at  a 
single  — ” 

“Wo  slot?  soon  see,”  Harding  contented  himself  with  reply- 
ing, hie  eyes  not  quitting  those  of  his  patient. 

fitter  was  then  led  towards  the  mouth  of  th.  Mercy, 
and  all  climbing  the  left  bank  of  tne  river,  reached  Prospect 


THE  ABANDONED. 


889 


Arrived  at  the  spot  on  which  grew  the  first  beautiful  trees  of 
he  forest,  their  foliage  slightly  agitated  by  the  breeze,  the 
stranger  appeared  greedily  to  drink  in  the  penetrating  odor 
which  filled  the  atmosphere,  and  a long  sigh  escaped  from 
his  chest. 

The  settlers  kept  behind  hhn,  ready  to  seize  him  if  he  made 
any  movement  to  escape  ! 

And,  indeed,  the  poor  creature  was  on  the  point  of  springing 
into  the  creek  which  separated  him  from  the  forest,  and  his 
legs  were  bent  for  an  instant  as  if  for  a spring,  but  almost 
immediately  he  stepped  back,  half  sank  down,  and  a large 
tear  fell  from  his  eyes. 

“ Ah ! ” exclaimed  Cyrus  Harding,  “ you  have  become  a 
man  again,  for  you  can  weep  I ” 


I 


CHAPTER  XVI. 

A MYSTERY  TO  BE  CLEARED  UP— THE  STRANGER’S  FIRST  WORDS—* 
TWELVE  YEARS  ON  THE  ISLET  — AVOWAL  WHICH  ESCAPEE 
HIM— THE  DISAPPEARANCE— CYRUS  HARDING’S  CONFIDENCE 
— CONSTRUCTION  OF  A MILL— THE  FIRST  BREAD— AN  ACT  OP 
DEVOTION— HONEST  HANDS. 

YES  I the  unfortunate  man  had  wept!  Some  recollection 
doubtless  had  flashed  across  his  brain,  and  to  use  Cyrus  Hard- 
ing’s expression,  by  those  tears  he  was  once  more  a man. 

The  colonists  left  him  for  some  time  on  the  plateau,  and 
withdrew  themselves  a short  distance,  so  that  he  might  feel 
himself  free;  but  he  did  not  think  of  profiting  by  this  liberty, 
and  Harding  soon  brought  him  back  to  Granite  House.  Twg 
days  after  this  occurrence,  the  stranger  appeared  to  wish 
gradually  to  mingle  with  their  common  life.  He  evidently 
heard  and  understood,  but  no  less  evidently  was  he  strangely 
determined  not  to  speak  to  the  colonists;  for  one  evening,  Pen- 
croft,  listening  at  the  door  of  his  room,  heard  these  words 
escape  from  his  lips  : — 

“No!  here!  I!  never!” 

The  sailor  reported  these  words  to  his  companions. 

“ There  is  some  painful  mystery  there  ! ” said  Harding. 

The  stranger  had  begun  to  use  the  laboring  tools,  and  he 
worked  in  the  garden.  When  he  stopped  in  his  work,  as  was 
often  the  case,  he  remained  retired  within  himself;  but  on  the 
engineer’s  recommendation,  they  respected  the  reserve  which 
he  apparently  wished  to  keep.  If  one  of  the  settlers  approached 
him,  he  drew  back,  and  his  chest  heaved  with  sobs,  as  if 
overburthened ! 

Was  it  remorse  that  overwhelmed  him  thus?  They  were 

390 


THE  ABANDONED. 


891 


compelled  to  believe  so,  and  Gideon  Spilett  could  not  help  one 
day  making  this  observation,— 

“ If  he  does  not  speak  it  is  because  he  has,  I fear,  things  too 
serious  to  be  told  ! ” 

They  must  be  patient  and  wait. 

A few  days  later,  on  the  3d  of  November,  the  stranger, 
working  on  the  plateau,  had  stopped,  letting  his  spade  drop 
to  the  ground,  and  Harding,  who  was  observing  him  from  a 
little  distance,  saw  that  tears  were  again  flowing  from  his 
eyes.  A sort  of  irresistible  pity  led  him  towards  the  unfortun- 
ate man,  and  he  touched  his  arm  lightly. 

“ My  friend ! ” said  he. 

The  stranger  tried  to  avoid  his  look,  and  Cyrus  Harding 
having  endeavored  to  take  his  hand,  he  drew  back  quickly. 

“ My  friend,”  said  Harding  in  a firmer  voice,  “ look  at  me,  I 
wish  it ! ” 

The  stranger  looked  at  the  engineer,  and  seemed  to  be  under 
his  power,  as  a subject  under  the  influence  of  a mesmerist.  He 
wished  to  run  away.  But  then  his  countenance  suddenly 
underwent  a transformation.  His  eyes  flashed.  Words 
struggled  to  escape  his  lips.  He  could  no  longer  contain  him- 
self ! ...  At  last  he  folded  his  arms:  then,  in  a hollow  voice,— 

“ Who  are  you?  ” he  asked  Cyrus  Harding. 

M Castaways,  like  you,”  replied  the  engineer,  whose  emotion 
was  deep.  “ We  have  brought  you  here,  among  your  fellow- 
men.” 

“ My  fellow-men ! . . I have  none  ! ” 

“ You  are  in  the  midst  of  friends.  ” 

“ Friends ! —for  me ! friends  ! ” exclaimed  the  stranger,  hid- 
ing his  face  in  his  hands.  “No  — never — leave  me!  leave 
me !" 

Then  he  rushed  to  the  side  of  the  plateau  which  overlooked 
the  sea,  and  remained  there  a long  time  motionless. 

Harding  rejoined  his  companions  and  related  to  them  what 
had  just  happened. 

“ Yes  ! there  is  some  mystery  in  that  man’s  life,”  said  Gideon 
Spilett,  “ and  it  appears  as  if  he  had  only  re-entered  society  by 
the  path  of  remorse.” 


m 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


“I  don’t  know  what  sort  of  a man  we  have  brought  here," 
said  the  sailor.  “ He  has  secrets—” 

“ Which  we  will  respect,”  interrupted  Cyrus  Harding  quickly. 
“ If  he  has  committed  any  crime,  he  has  most  fearfully  expi- 
ated it,  and  in  our  eyes  he  is  absolved.” 

For  two  hours  the  stranger  remained  alone  on  the  shore, 
evidently  under  the  influence  of  recollections  which  recalled 
all  his  past  life— a melancholy  life  doubtless— and  the  colonists, 
without  losing  sight  of  him,  did  not  attempt  to  disturb  his 
solitude.  However,  after  two  hours,  appearing  to  have  formed 
a resolution,  he  came  to  find  Cyrus  Harding.  His  eyes  were 
red  with  the  tears  he  had  shed,  but  he  wept  no  longer.  His 
countenance  expressed  deep  humility.  He  appeared  anxious, 
timorous,  ashamed,  and  his  eyes  were  constantly  fixed  on  the 
ground. 

“ Sir,”  said  he  to  Harding,  “ your  companions  and  you,  are 
you  English?” 

“No,”  answered  the  engineer,  “we  are  Americans.” 

“Ah!”  said  the  stranger,  and  he  murmured,  “I  prefer 
that!” 

“And  you,  my  friend?”  asked  the  engineer. 

“ English,”  replied  he  hastily. 

And  as  if  these  few  words  had  been  difficult  to  say,  he 
retreated  to  the  beach,  where  he  walked  up  and  down  between 
the  cascade  and  the  mouth  of  the  Mercy,  in  a state  of  extreme 
agitation. 

Then,  passing  one  moment  close  to  Herbert,  he  stopped,  and 
in  a stifled  voice,— 

“What  month?”  he  asked. 

“ December,”  replied  Herbert. 

“What  year?” 

“1866.” 

“ Twelve  years  ! twelve  years  ! ” he  exclaimed.  . 

Then  he  left  him  abruptly. 

Herbert  reported  to  the  colonists  the  questions  and  answers 
which  had  been  made. 

“ This  unfortunate  man,”  observed  Gideon  Spilett,  “was  no 
longer  acquainted  with  either  months  or  years  1 ” 


TSOS  AtfANDOTO), 


dm 

“Yes!”  added  Herbert,  wand  he  had  been  twelve  years 
already  on  the  islet  when  we  found  him  there  1 ” 

“ Twelve  years ! ” rejoined  Harding.  “ Ah ! twelve  years  of 
solitude,  after  a wicked  life,  perhaps,  may  well  impair  a 
man’s  reason ! ” 

“I  am  induced  to  think,”  said  Pencroft,  “that  this  man  was 
not  wrecked  on  Tabor  Island,  but  that  in  consequence  of 
some  crime  he  was  left  there.” 

“You  must  be  right  Pencroft,”  replied  the  reporter,  “and 
if  it  is  so  it  is  not  impossible  that  those  who  left  him  on  the 
island  may  return  to  fetch  him  some  day  ! ” 

“ And  they  will  no  longer  find  him,”  said  Herbert. 

“But  then,”  added  Pencroft,  “they  must  return,  and—” 

“My  friends,”  said  Cyrus  Harding,  “do  not  let  us  discuss 
this  question  until  we  know  more  about  it.  I believe  that  the 
unhappy  man  has  suffered,  that  he  has  severely  expiated  his 
faults,  whatever  they  may  have  been,  and  that  the  wish  to 
unburden  himself  stifles  him.  Do  not  let  us  press  him  to  tell 
us  his  history ! He  will  tell  it  to  us  doubtless,  and  when  we 
know  it,  we  shall  see  what  course  it  will  be  best  to  follow. 
He  alone  besides  can  tell  us,  if  he  has  more  than  a hope,  a 
certainty,  of  returning  some  day  to  his  country,  but  I doubt  it ! ” 

“And  why?”  asked  the  reporter. 

“ Because  that,  in  the  event  of  his  being  sure  of  being  deliv. 
ered  at  a certain  time,  he  would  have  waited  the  hour  of  his 
deliverance  and  would  not  have  thrown  this  document  into  the 
sea.  No,  it  is  more  probable  that  he  was  condemned  to  die  on 
that  islet,  and  that  he  never  expected  to  see  his  fellow-creatures 
again ! ” 

“ But,”  observed  the  sailor,  “ there  is  one  thing  which  I can 
not  explain.” 

“What  is  it!” 

“ If  this  man  had  been  left  for  twelve  years  on  Tabor  Island, 
one  may  well  suppose  that  he  had  been  several  years  already 
in  the  wild  state  in  which  we  found  him  ! ” 

“ That  is  probable,”  replied  Cj  rus  Harding. 

“It  must  then  be  many  years  since  he  wrote  that  docu- 
ment l ” 


m 


THE  IAKESIDE  EBITIONc 


“No  doubt,  and  yet  the  document  appears  to  have  been 
recently  written ! 99 

“Besides,  how  do  you  know  that  the  bottle  which  enclosed 
the  document  may  not  have  taken  several  years  to  come  from 
Tabor  Island  to  Lincoln  Island?  ” 

“That  is  not  absolutely  impossible,”  replied  the  reporter. 

“ Might  it  not  have  been  a long  time  already  on  the  coast  of 
the  island? 99 

“No,”  answered  Pencroft,  “ for  it  was  still  floating.  We 
could  not  even  suppose  that  after  it  had  stayed  for  any  length 
of  time  on  the  shore,  it  would  have  been  swept  off  by  the  sea, 
^ for  the  south  coast  is  all  rocks,  and  it  would  certainly  have 
been  smashed  to  pieces  there 

“That  is  true,”  rejoined  Cyrus  Harding  thoughtfully. 

“And  then,”  continued  the  sailor,  “if  the  document  was 
several  years  old,  if  it  had  been  shut  up  iirthat  bottle  for  sever- 
al years,  it  would  have  been  injured  by  damp.  Now,  there  is 
nothing  of  the  kind,  and  it  was  found  in  a perfect  state  of 
preservation.” 

The  sailor’s  reasoning  was  very  just,  and  pointed  out  an  in- 
comprehensible fact,  for  the  document  appeared  to  have  been 
recently  written,  when  the  colonists  found  it  in  the  bottle. 
Moreover,  it  gave  the  latitude  and  longitude  of  Tabor  Island 
correctly,  which  implied  that  its  author  had  a more  complete 
knowledge  of  hydrography  than  could  be  expected  of  a com- 
mon sailor. 

“ There  is  in  this,  again,  something  unaccountable,”  said  the 
engineer;  “but  we  will  not  urge  our  companion  to  speak. 
When  he  likes,  my  friends,  then  we  shall  be  ready  to  hear 
him ! ” 

During  the  following  days  the  stranger  did  not  speak  a word, 
and  did  not  once  leave  the  precincts  of  the  plateau.  He 
worked  away,  without  losing  a moment,  without  taking  a 
minute’s  rest,  but  always  in  a retired  place.  At  meal  times 
he  never  came  to  Granite  House,  although  invited  several 
times  to  do  so,  but  contented  himself  with  eating  a few  raw 
vegetables.  At  nightfall  he  did  not  return  to  the  room 
assigned  to  him,  but  remained  under  some  clump  of  trees,  or 


THE  ABANDONED, 


When  the  weather  was  bad  couched  in  some  cleft  of  the  rocks. 
Thus  he  lived  in  the  same  manner  as  when  he  had  no  other 
shelter  than  the  forests  of  Tabor  Island,  and  as  all  persuasion 
to  induce  [him  to  improve  his  life  was  in  vain,  the  colonists 
waited  patiently.  And  time  was  near,  when,  as  it  seemed, 
almost  involuntarily  urged  by  his  conscience,  a terrible  confes- 
sion escaped  him. 

On  the  10th  of  November,  about  eight  o’clock  in  the  evening, 
as  night  was  coming  on,  the  stranger  appeared  unexpectedly 
before  the  settlers,  who  were  assembled  under  the  verandah. 
His  eyes  burned  strangely,  and  he  had  quite  resumed  the 
wild  aspect  of  his  worst  days. 

Cyrus  Harding  and  his  companions  were  astounded  on 
seeing  that,  overcome  by  some  terrible  emotion,  his  teeth  chat- 
tered like  those  of  a in  a fever.  What  was  the  matter 

with  him  ? Was  the  his  fellow-creatures  insupportable 

to  him?  Was  he  weary  c l this  return  to  a civilized  mode  of 
existence  ? Was  he  pining  for  his  former  savage  life  ? It  ap- 
peared so,  as  soon  as  he  was  heard  to  express  himself  in 
these  incoherent  sentences:— 

“ Why  am  I here  ? ...  By  what  right  have  you  dragged 
me  from  my  islet  ? ...  Do  you  think  there  could  be  any 

tie  between  you  and  me  ? ...  Do  you  know  who  I am— 
what  I have  done— why  I was  there— alone  ? And  who  told 
you  that  I was  not  abandoned  there— that  I was  not  condemned 
to  die  there  ? ...  Do  you  know  my  past  ? . . . How 
do  you  know  that  I have  not  stolen,  murdered— that  I am  not 
a wretch — an  accursed  being — only  fit  to  live  like  a wild  beast 
far  from  all— speak — do  you  know  it  ?” 

The  colonists  listened  without  interrupting  the  miserable 
creature,  from  whom  these  broken  confessions  escaped,  as  it 
were,  in  spite  of  himself.  Harding  wishing  to  calm  him, 
approached  him,  but  he  hastily  drew  back. 

“No ! no  ! ” he  exclaimed;  “•one  word  only— am  I free  ?” 

“ You  are  free,”  answered  the  engineer. 

“ Farewell  then  ! ” he  cried,  and  fled  like  a madman. 

Neb,  Pencroft,  and  Herbert  ran  also  towards  the  edge  of  the 
wood  —but  they  returned  alone. 


THE  LAKESIDE  JB&TION. 


44  W©  must  let  him  alone ! ” said  Cyrus  Harding. 

“He  will  never  come  back  !”  exclaimed  Pencroft 

“ He  will  come  back,”  replied  the  engineer. 

Many  days  passed;  but  Harding— was  it 'a  sort  of  presents 
ment?— persisted  in  the  fixed  idea  that  sooner  or  later  the 
unhappy  man  would  return. 

“ It  is  the  last  revolt  of  his  wild  nature,”  said  he,  “ which 
remorse  has  touched,  and  which  renewed  solitude  will 
terrify.” 

In  the  meanwhile,  works  of  all  sorts  were  continued,  as 
well  on  Prospect  Heights  as  at  the  corral,  where  Harding 
intended  to  build  a farm.  It  is  unnecessary  to  say  that  the 
seeds  collected  by  Herbert  on  Tabor  Island  had  been  carefully 
sown.  The  plateau  thus  formed  one  immense  kitchen 
garden,  well  laid  out  and  carefully  tended,  so  that  the  arms  of 
the  settlers  were  never  in  want  of  work.  There  was  always 
something  to  be  done.  As  the  esculents  increased  in  number, 
it  became  necessary  to  enlarge  the  simple  beds,  which  threat- 
ened to  grow  into  regular  fields  and  replace  the  meadows. 
Put  grass  abounded  in  other  parts  of  the  island,  and  there 
was  no  fear  of  the  onagas  being  obliged  to  go  on  short  allow- 
ance. It  was  well  worth  while,  besides,  to  turn  Prospect 
Heights  into  a kitchen-garden,  defended  by  its  deep  belt  of 
creeks,  and  to  remove  them  to  the  meadows,  which  had  no 
need  of  protection  against  the  depredations  of  quadrumana 
and  quadrupeds. 

On  the  15th  of  November,  the  third  harvest  was  gathered  in. 
How  wonderfully  had  the  field  increased  in  extent,  since 
eighteen  months  ago,  when  the  first  grain  of  wheat  was 
sown  ! The  second  crop  of  six  hundred  thousand  grains  pro- 
duced this  time  four  thousand  bushels,  or  five  hundred 
millions  of  grains ! 

The  colony  was  rich  in  corn,  for  ten  bushels  alone  were 
sufficient  for  sowing  every  year  to  produce  an  ample  crop  for 
the  food  both  of  men  and  beasts.  The  harvest  was  completed, 
and  the  last  fortnight  of  the  month  of  November  was  devoted 
to  the  work  of  converting  it  into  food  for  man.  In  fact, 
they  had  com,  but  not  flour,  and  the  establishment  of  a mill 


THE  ABANDONED. 


89? 


*as  necessary.  Cyrus  Harding  could  have  utilized  the  second 
fall  whieh  flowed  into  the  Mercy  to  establish  his  motive  power, 
the  first  being  already  occupied  with  moving  the  felting  mill; 
but  after  some  consultation,  it  was  decided  that  a simple  wind- 
mill should  be  built  on  Prospect  Heights.  The  building  of 
this  presented  no  more  difficulty  than  the  building  of  the  for- 
mer, and  it  was  moreover  certain  that  there  would  be  no  want 
of  wind  on  the  plateau,  exposed  as  it  was  to  the  sea  breezes. 

“Not  to  mention,”  said  Pencroft,  “that  the  windmill  will  be 
more  lively  and  will  have  a good  effect  in  the  landscape  !” 

They  set  to  work  by  choosing  timber  for  the  frame  and 
machinery  of  the  mill.  Some  large  stones,  found  at  the 
north  of  the  lake,  could  be  easily  transformed  into  millstones ; 
and  as  to  the  sails,  the  inexhaustible  case  of  the  balloon  fur- 
nished the  necessary  material. 

Cyrus  Harding  made  his  model,  and  the  site  of  the  mill  was 
chosen  a little  to  the  right  of  the  poultry-yard,  near  the  shore 
of  the  lake.  The  frame  was  to  rest  on  a pivot  supported  with 
strong  timbers,  so  that  it  could  turn  with,  all  the  machinery 
it  contained  according  as  the  wind  required  it.  The  work 
advanced  rapidly.  Neb  and  Pencroft  had  become  very  skillful 
carpenters,  and  had  nothing  to  do  but  to  copy  the  models  pro- 
vided by  the  engineer. 

Soon  a sort  of  cylindrical  box,  in  shape  like  a pepper-pot, 
with  a pointed  roof,  rose  on  the  spot  chosen.  The  four  frames 
which  formed  the  sails,  had  been  firmly  fixed  in  the  center 
beam  so  as  to  form  a certain  angle  with  it,  and  secured  with 
iron  clamps.  As  to  the  different  parts  of  the  internal  mech- 
anism, the  box  destined  to  contain  the  two  millstones,  the  fixed 
stone  and  the  moving  stone,  the  hopper,  a sort  of  large  square 
trough,  wide  at  the  top,  narrow  at  the  bottom,  which  would 
allow  the  grain  to  fall  on  the  stones,  the  oscillating  spout 
intended  to  regulate  the  passing  of  the  grain,  and  lastly  the 
bolting  machine,  which  by  the  operation  of  sifting,  separates 
the  bran  from  the  flour,  were  made  without  difficulty.  The 
tools  were  good,  and  the  work  not  difficult,  for  in  reality,  the 
machinery  of  a mill  is  very  simple.  This  was  only  a question 
of  time* 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


Every  one  had  worked  at  the  construction  of  the  miU,  and  on 
the  1st  of  December  it  was  finished.  As  usual,  Pencraft  was 
delighted  with  his  work,  and  had  no  doubt  that  the  apparatus 
was  perfect. 

“Now  for  a good  wind,”  said  he,  “and  we  shall  grind  our 
first  harvest  splendidly  ! ” 

“ A good  wind,  certainly,”  answered  the  engineer,  “ but  not 
too  much,  Pencroft.” 

“ Pooh  ! our  mill  would  only  go  the  faster  ! ” 

“ There  is  no  need  for  it  to  go  so  very  fast,”  replied  Cyrus 
Harding.  “It  is  known  by  experience  that  the  greatest 
quantity  of  work  is  performed  by  a mill  when  the  number  of 
turns  made  by  the  sails  in  a minute  is  six  times  the  number  of 
feet  traversed  by  the  wind  in  a second.  A moderate  breeze, 
which  passes  over  twenty-four  feet  to  the  second,  will  give 
sixteen  turns  to  the  sails  during  a minute,  and  there  is  no  need 
af  more.” 

“.Exactly  ! ” cried  Herbert ; “ a fine  breeze  is  blowing  from 
the  northeast,  which  will  soon  do  our  business  for  us.” 

There  was  no  reason  for  delaying  the  inauguration  of  the 
mill,  for  the  settlers  were  eager  to  taste  the  first  piece  of 
bread  in  Lincoln  Island.  On  this  morning  two  or  three 
Dushels  of  wheat  were  ground,  and  the  next  day  at  breakfast  a 
. nagnificent  loaf,  a little  heavy  perhaps,  although  raised  with 
yeast,  appeared  on  the  table  at  Granite  House.  Every  one 
munched  away  at  it  with  a pleasure  which  may  be  easily 
understood.  > 

In  the  meanwhile  the  stranger  had  not  reappeared.  Several 
times  Gideon  Spilett  and  Herbert  searched  the  forest  in  the 
neighborhood  of  Granite  He  use,  without  meeting  or  finding 
any  trace  of  him.  They  became  seriously  uneasy  at  this  pro- 
longed absence.  Certainly,  the  former  savage  of  Tabor  Island 
could  not  be  perplexed  how  to  live  in  the  forest,  abounding  in 
game,  but  was  it  not  to  be  feared  that  he  had  resumed  his 
habits,  and  that  this  freedom  would  revive  in  him  his  wild  in- 
stincts ? However,  Harding,  by  a sort  of  presentiment,  doubt- 
less, always  persisted  in  saying  that  the  fugitive  would  return 

“Yes,  he  will  return  I”  he  repeated  with  a confidence  which 


THE  ABANDON®©. 


401 


mi  companions  could  not  share.  “When  this  unfortunate 
man  was  on  Tabor  Island,  he  knew  himself  to  be  alone! 
Here,  he  knows  that  fellow-men  are  awaiting  him  ! Since  he 
has  partially  spoken  of  his  past  life,  the  poor  penitent  will 
return  to  tell  the  whole,  and  from  that  day  he  will  belong 
to  us!” 

The  event  justified  Cyrus  Harding’s  predictions.  On  the  3rd 
of  December,  Herbert  had  left  the  plateau  to  go  and  fish  on 
the  southern  bank  of  the  lake.  He  was  unarmed,  and  till  then 
had  never  taken  any  precautions  for  defense,  as  dangerous 
animals  had  not  shown  themselves  on  that  part  of  the  island. 

Meanwhile,  Pencroft  and  Neb  were  working  in  the  poultry- 
yard,  whilst  Harding  and  the  reporter  were  occupied  at  the 
Chimneys  in  making  soda,  the  store  of  soap  being  exhausted. 

Suddenly  cries  resounded,— 

“Help!  help!” 

Cyrus  Harding  and  the  reporter,  being  at  too  great  a dis* 
iance,  had  not  been  able  to  hear  the  shouts.  Pencroft  and  Neb, 
leaving  the  poultry-yard  in  all  haste,  rushed  towards  the  lake. 

But  before  them,  the  stranger,  whose  presence  at  this  place 
no  one  had  suspected,  crossed  Creek  Glycerine,  which  sepa- 
rated the  plateau  from  the  forest,  and  bounded  up  the  opposite 
bank. 

Herbert  was  there  face  to  face  with  a fierce  jaguar,  similar 
to  the  one  which  had  been  killed  on  Reptile  End.  Suddenly 
surprised,  he  was  standing  with  his  back  against  a tree,  whilst 
the  animal  gathering  itself  together  was  about  to  spring. 

But  the  stranger,  with  no  other  weapon  than  a knife,  rushed 
on  the  formidable  animal,  who  turned  to  meet  this  new  adver- 
sary. 

The  struggle  was  short  The  stranger  possessed  immense 
strength  and  activity.  He  seized  the  jaguar’s  throat  with  one 
powerful  hand,  holding  it  as  in  a vise,  without  heeding  the 
beast’s  claws  which  tore  his  flesh,  and  with  the  other  he 
plunged  his  knife  into  its  heart. 

The  jaguar  fell.  The  stranger  kicked  away  the  body,  and 
was  about  to  fly  at  the  moment  when  the  settlers  arrived  op 
the  field  of  battle  ; but  Herbert,  clinging  to  him,  cried,— 

26 


m 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


“ No,  no  ! you  shall  not  go  ! ” 

Harding  advanced  towards  the  stranger,  who  frowned  when 
he  saw  him  approaching.  The  blood  flowed  from  hie  shoulder 
under  his  torn  shirt,  but  he  took  no  notice  of  it. 

“ My  friend,”  said  Cyrus  Harding,  “ we  have  just  contracted 
i debt  of  gratitude  to  you.  To  save  our  boy  you  have  risked 
your  life ! ” 

“My  life ! ” murmured  the  stranger,  “ What  is  that  worth  ? 
Less  than  nothing ! ” 

“ You  are  wounded  ? ” 

“ It  is  no  matter.” 

“ Will  you  give  me  your  hand  ? ” 

And  as  Herbert  endeavored  to  seize  the  hand  which  had 
just  saved  him,  the  stranger  folded  his  arms,  his  chest  heaved, 
his  look  darkened,  and  he  appeared  to  wish  to  escape ; but 
making  a violent  effort  over  himself,  and  in  an  abrupt  tone,— 

“ Who  are  you  ? ” he  asked  ; “ and  what  do  you  claim  to  be 
to  me  ? ” 

It  was  the  colonists’  history  which  he  thus  demanded,  and 
for  the  first  time.  Perhaps  this  history  recounted,  he  would 
tell  his  own. 

In  a few  words  Harding  related  all  that  had  happened  since 
their  departure  from  Richmond  ; how  they  had  managed,  and 
what  resources  they  now  had  at  their  disposal. 

The  stranger  listened  with  extreme  attention. 

Then  the  engineer  told  who  they  all  were,  Gideon  Spilett, 
Herbert,  Pencroft,  Neb,  himself ; and  he  added,  that  the  great- 
est happiness  they  had  felt  since  their  arrival  in  Lincoln 
Island,  was  on  the  return  of  the  vessel  from  Tabor  Island, 
when  they  had  been  able  to  include  amongst  them  a new 
companion. 

At  these  words  the  stranger’s  face  flushed,  his  head  sunk  on 
his  breast,  and  confusion  was  depicted  on  his  countenance. 

“ And  now  that  you  know  us,”  added  Cyrus  Harding,  “ will 
you  give  us  your  hand  ? ” 

“No,” replied  the  stranger  in  a hoarse  voice;  “no!  You 
are  honest  men,  you  1 And  I—” 


CHAPTER  XVII 


STILL  ALONE— THE  STRANGER’S  REQUEST— THE  FARM  ESTafi 
LISHED  AT  THE  CORRAL— TWELVE  YEARS  AGO— THE  BOAT- 
SWAIN’S MATE  OF  THE  “JBRITANNIA  ” — LEFT  ON  TABOR 
ISLAND  — CYRUS  HARDING’S  HAND— THE  MYSTERIOUS  DOCU- 
MENT. 

These  last  words  justified  the  colonists’  presentiment. 
There  had  been  some  mournful  past,  perhaps  expiated  in  the 
sight  of  men,  but  from  which  his  conscience  had  not  yet 
absolved  him.  At  any  rate  the  guilty  man  felt  remorse,  he 
repented,  and  his  new  friends  would  have  cordially  pressed 
the  hand  which  they  sought;  but  he  did  not  feel  himself 
worthy  to  extend  it  to  honest  men!  However,  after  the 
scene  with  the  jaguar,  he  did  not  return  to  the  forest,  and 
from  that  day  did  not  go  beyond  the  enclosure  of  Granite 
House.  • 

What  was  the  mystery  of  his  life?  Would  the  stranger  one 
day  speak  of  it?  Time  alone  could  show.  At  any  rate,  it  was 
agreed  that  his  secret  should  never  be  asked  from  him,  and 
that  they  would  live  with  him  as  if  they  suspected  nothing. 

For  some  days  their  fife  continued  as  before.  Cyrus  Harding 
and  Gideon  Spilett  worked  together,  sometimes  chemists, 
sometimes  experimentalists.  The  reporter  never  left  the  engi- 
neer except  to  hunt  with  Herbert,  for  it  would  not  have  been 
prudent  to  allow  the  lad  to  ramble  alone  in  the  forest;  and  it 
was  very  necessary  to  be  on  their  guard.  As  to  Neb  and  Pen- 
eroft,  one  day  at  the  stables  and  poultry-yard,  another  at 
the  corral,  without  reckoning  work  in  Granite  House,  they 
were  never  in  want  of  employment. 

The  stranger  worked  alone,  and  he  had  resumed  his  usual 
Me,  never  appearing  at  meals,  sleeping  under  the  trees  hi 

m 


m 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


the  plateau,  never  mingling  with  his  companions.  It  really 
seemed  as  if  the  society  of  those  who  had  saved  him  was 
insupportable  to  him ! 

“ But  then,”  observed  Pencrof t,  “ why  did  he  entreat  the 
help  of  his  fellow-creatures?  Why  did  he  throw  that  paper 
into  the  sea  ? ” 

“ He  will  tell  us  why,”  invariably  replied  Cyrus  Harding. 

“ When  ? ” 

“ Perhaps  sooner  than  you  think,  Pencroft.” 

And,  indeed,  the  day  of  confession  was  near. 

On  the  10th  of  December,  a week  after  his  return  to  Granite 
House,  Harding  saw  the  stranger  approaching,  who,  in  a 
calm  and  humble  tone,  said  to  him  : “ Sir,  I have  a request  to 
make  you.” 

“ Speak,”  answered  the  engineer;  “ but  first  let  me  ask  you  a 
question.” 

At  these  words  the  stranger  reddened,  and  was  on  the  point 
of  withdrawing.  Cyrus  Harding  understood  what  was  passing 
in  the  mind  of  the  guilty  man,  who  doubtless  feared  that  the 
engineer  would  interrogate  him  on  his  past  life. 

Harding  held  him  back. 

“ Comrade,”  said  he,  “ we  are  not  only  your  companions 
but  your  friends.  I wish  you  to  believe  that,  and  now  I will 
listen  to  you.” 

The  stranger  pressed  his  hand  over  his  eyes.  He  was  seized 
with  a sort  of  trembling,  and  remained  a few  moments  without 
being  able  to  articulate  a word. 

“ Sir,”  said  he  at  last,  “ I have  come  to  beg  you  to  grant  me 
a favor.” 

“What  is  it?” 

“ You  have,  four  or  five  miles  from  here,  a corral  for  your 
domesticated  animals.  These  animals  need  to  be  taken  care 
of.  Will  you  allow  me  to  live  there  with  them?” 

Cyrus  Harding  gazed  at  the  unfortunate  man  for  a few  mo< 
ments  with  a feeling  deep  of  commiseration  ; then,— 

“My  friend,”  said  he,  “the  corral  ha 3 only  stables  hardly  fit 
for  animals.” 

“It  will  be  good  enough  for  me,  sir.” 


THE  ABANDONED. 


401 


*My  friend,”  answered  Harding,  “we  will  not  constrain 
you  In  any  thing.  You  wish  to  live  at  the  corral,  so  be  it.  You 
will,  however,  be  always  welcome  at  Granite  House.  But  since 
you  wish  to  live  at  the  corral  we  will  make  the  necessary 
arrangements  for  your  being  comfortably  established  there.” 

“ Never  mind  that,  I shall  do  very  well.” 

“My  friend,”  answered  Harding,  who  always  intentionally 
made  use  of  this  cordial  appellation,  “you  must  let  us  judge 
what  it  will  be  best  to  do  in  this  respect.” 

“ Thank  you,  sir,”  replied  the  stranger  as  he  withdrew. 

The  engineer  then  made  known  to  his  companions  the 
proposal  which  had  been  made  to  him,  and  it  was  agreed 
that  they  should  build  a wooden  house  at  the  corral,  which 
they  would  make  as  comfortable  as  possible. 

That  very  day  the  colonists  repaired  to  the  corral  with  the 
necessary  tools,  and  a week  had  not  passed  before  the  house 
was  ready  to  receive  its  tenant.  It  was  built  about  twenty 
feet  from  the  sheds,  and  from  there  it  was  easy  to  overlook 
the  flock  of  sheep,  which  then  numbered  more  than  eighty. 
Some  furniture,  a bed,  table,  bench,  cupboard,  and  chest,  were 
manufactured,  and  a gun,  ammunition,  and  tools  were  carried 
to  the  corral. 

The  stranger,  however,  had  seen  nothing  of  his  new  dwell- 
ing, and  he  had  allowed  the  settlers  to  work  there  without  him, 
whilst  he  occupied  himself  on  the  plateau,  wishing,  doubtless, 
to  put  the  finishing  stroke  to  his  work.  Indeed,  thanks  to 
him,  all  the  ground  was  dug  up  and  ready  to  be  sowed  when 
the  time  came. 

It  was  on  the  20th  of  December  that  all  arrangements  at  the 
corral  were  completed.  The  engineer  announced  to  the 
stranger  that  his  dwelling  was  ready  to  receive  him,  and  the 
latter  replied  that  he  would  go  and  sleep  there  that  very  even- 
ing. 

On  this  evening  the  colonists  were  gathered  in  the  dining- 
room of  Granite  House.  It  was  then  eight  o’clock,  the  hour 
at  which  their  companion  was  to  leave  them.  Not  wishing  to 
trouble  him  by  their  presence,  and  thus  imposing  on  him  the 
necessity  of  saying  farewells  which  might  perhaps  be  painful 


408 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


to  him,  they  had  left  him  alone,  and  ascended  to  Granit* 
House. 

Now,  they  had  been  talking  in  the  room  for  a few  minutes, 
when  a light  knock  was  heard  at  the  door.  Almost  immediately 
the  stranger  entered,  and  without  any  preamble,— 

“Gentlemen,”  said  he,  “before  I leave  you  it  is  right  that 
you  should  know  my  history.  I will  tell  it  you.” 

These  simple  words  profoundly  impressed  Cyrus  Harding  and 
his  companions. 

The  engineer  rose. 

“ We  ask  you  nothing,  my  friend,”  said  he;  “it  is  your  right 
to  be  silent.” 

“ It  is  my  duty  to  speak.” 

“ Sit  down,  then.” 

“ No,  I will  stand.” 

“We  are  ready  to  hear  you,”  replied  Harding. 

The  stranger  remained  standing  in  a corner  of  the  room,  a 
little  in  the  shade.  He  was  bareheaded,  his  arms  folded  across 
his  chest,  and  it  was  in  this  posture  that  in  a hoarse  voice, 
speaking  like  some  one  who  obliges  himself  to  speak,  he 
gave  the  following  recital,  which  his  auditors  did  not  once 
interrupt : — 

“ On  the  20th  of  December,  1854,  a steam-yacht,  belonging  to  a 
Scotch  nobleman,  Lord  Glenarvan,  anchored  off  Cape  Bermou- 
illi,  on  the  western  coast  of  Australia,  in  the  thirty-seventh 
parallel.  On  board  this  yacht  were  Lord  Glenarvan  and  his 
wife,  a major  in  the  English  army,  a French  geographer*  a 
young  girl  and  a young  boy.  These  two  last  were  the  children 
of  Captain  Grant,  whose  ship,  the  ‘ Britannia,’  had  been  lost, 
crew  and  cargo,  a year  before.  The  ‘Duncan’  was  com- 
manded by  Captain  John  Mangles,  and  manned  by  a crew  of 
fifteen  men. 

“ This  is  the  reason  the  yacht  at  this  time  lay  off  the  coast  of 
Australia.  Six  months  before,  a bottle,  enclosing  a document 
written  in  English,  German,  and  French,  had  been  found  in  the 
Irish  Sea,  and  picked  up  by  the  4 Duncan.’  This  document 
stated  in  substance  that  there  still  existed  three  survivors 
from  the  wreck  of  the  ‘Britannia,’  that  these  survivors  wore 


T m ABANDONED. 


400 


Captain  Grant  and  two  of  his  men,  and  that  they  had  found 
refuge  on  some  land,  of  which  the  document  gave  the  latitude, 
but  of  which  the  longitude,  effaced  by  the  sea,  was  no  longer 
legible. 

“This  latitude  was  87°  11'  south;  therefore,  the  longitude 
being  unknown,  if  they  followed  the  thirty-seventh  parallel 
over  continents  and  seas,  they  would  be  certain  to  reach  the 
spot  inhabited  by  Captain  Grant  and  his  two  companions.  The 
English  Admiralty  having  hesitated  to  undertake  this  search, 
Lord  Glenarvan  resolved  to  attempt  every  thing  to  find  the 
captain.  He  communicated  with  Mary  and  Robert  Grant,  who 
joined  him.  The  ‘ Duncan  ’ yacht  was  equipped  for  the  distant 
voyage,  in  which  the  nobleman’s  family  and  the  captain’s 
children  wished  to  take  part ; and  the  ‘ Duncan,’  leaving  Glas- 
gow, proceeded  towards  the  Atlantic,  passed  through  the 
Straits  of  Magellan,  and  ascended  the  Pacific  as  far  as  Pata- 
gonia, where,  according  to  a previous  interpretation  of  the 
document,  they  supposed  that  Captain  Grant  was  a prisoner 
among  the  Indians. 

“ The  ‘ Duncan  ’ disembarked  her  passengers  on  the  western 
coast  of  Patagonia,  and  sailed  to  pick  them  up  again  on  the 
eastern  coast  at  Cape  Corrientes.  Lord  • Glenarvan  traversed 
Patagonia,  following  the  thirty-seventh  parallel,  and  having 
found  no  trace  of  the  Captain,  he  re-embarked  on  the  13th  of 
November,  so  as  to  pursue  his  search  through  the  Ocean. 

“After  having  unsuccessfully  visited  the  islands  of  Tristan 
d’Acunha  and  Amsterdam,  situated  in  her  course,  the  ‘ Duncan,’ 
as  I have  said,  arrived  at  Cape  Bermouilli,  on  the  Australian 
coast,  on  the  20th  of  December,  1854. 

“ It  was  Lord  Glenarvan’s  intention  to  traverse  Australia  as  he 
had  traversed  America,  and  he  disembarked.  A few  miles  from 
the  coast  was  established  a farm,  belonging  to  an  Irishman, 
who  offered  hospitality  to  the  travelers.  Lord  Glenarvan  made 
known  to  the  Irishman  the  cause  which  had  brought  him  to 
these  parts,  and  asked  if  he  knew  whether  a three-masted 
English  vessel,  the  ‘Britannia,’  had  been  lost  less  than  two 
years  before  on  the  west  coast  of  Australia. 

The  Irishman  had  never  heard  of  this  wreck  ; but,  to  the 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION, 


m 

great  surprise  of  the  bystanders,  one  of  his  servants  came  for- 
ward and  said,— 

‘“My  lord,  praise  and  thank  God!  If  Captain  Grant  is 
still  living,  he  is  living  on  the  Australian  shores.’ 

“ ‘ Who  are  you  ? ’ asked  Lord  Glenarvan. 

“‘A  Scotchman  like  yourself,  my  lord,’  replied  the  man;  ‘I 
am  one  of  Captain  Grant’s  crew— one  of  the  castaways  of  the 
Britannia.’  ” 

“ This  man  was  called  Ayrton.  He  was,  in  fact,  the  boat- 
swain’s mate  of  the  ‘Britannia,’  as  his  papers  showed.  But, 
separated  from  Captain  Grant  at  a moment  when  the  ship 
struck  upon  the  rocks,  he  had  till  then  believed  that  the  captain 
with  all  his  crew  had  perished,  and  that  he,  Ayrton,  was  the 
sole  survivor  of  the  ‘ Britannia.’ 

“ ‘ Only,’  added  he,  ‘ it  was  not  on  the  west  coast,  but  on  the 
east  coast  of  Australia  that  the  vessel  was  lost ; and  if  Captain 
Grant  is  still  living,  as  his  document  indicates,  he  is  a prisoner 
among  the  natives,  and  it  is  on  the  other  coast  that  he  must 
be  looked  for.’ 

“This  man  spoke  in  a frank  voice  and  with  a confident 
look  ; his  words  could  not  be  doubted.  The  Irishman,  in 
whose  service  te  had  been  for  more  than  a year,  answered 
for  his  trustworthiness.  Lord  Glenarvan,  therefore,  believed 
in  the  fidelity  of  this  man,  and,  by  his  advice,  resolved  to  cross 
Australia,  following  the  thirty-seventh  parallel.  Lord  Glenar- 
van, his  wife,  the  two  children,  the  major,  the  Frenchman, 
Captain  Mangles,  and  a few  sailors,  composed  the  little  band 
under  the  command  of  Ayrton,  whilst  the  ‘Duncan,’  under 
charge  of  the  mate,  Tom  Austin,  proceeded  to  Melbourne, 
there  to  await  Lord  Glenar van’s  instructions. 

“ They  set  out  on  the  23d  of  December,  1854. 

“ It  is  time  to  say  that  Ayrton  was  a traitor.  He  was,  indeed, 
the  boatswain’s  mate  of  the  ‘Britannia;’  but,  after  some  dispute 
with  his  captain,  he  had  endeavored  to  incite  the  crew  to 
mutiny  and  seize  the  ship,  and  Captain  Grant  had  landed  him 
on  the  8th  of  April,  1852,  on  the  west  coast  of  Australia, 
and  then  sailed,  leaving  him  there,  as  was  only  just. 

“ Therefore  this  wretched  man  knew  nothing  of  the  wreck 


THE  ABANDONED. 


411 


of  the ‘Britannia;’  he  had  just  heard  of  it  from  Glenarvan’s 
account.  Since  his  abandonment  he  had  become,  under  the 
name  of  Ben  Joyce,  the  leader  of  the  escaped  convicts;  and  if 
he  boldly  maintained  that  the  wreck  had  taken  place  on  the 
east  coast,  and  led  Lord  Glenarvan  to  proceed  in  that  direction, 
it  was  that  he  hoped  to  separate  him  from  his  ship,  seize 
the  ‘Duncan,’  and  make  the  yacht  a pirate  in  the  Pacific.” 

Here  the  stranger  stopped  for  a moment.  His  voice  trembled, 
but  he  continued:— 

“ The  expedition  set  out  and  proceeded  across  Australia.  It 
was  inevitably  unfortunate,  since  Ayrton,  or  Ben  Joyce,  as  he 
may  be  called,  guided  it,  sometimes  preceded,  sometimes  fol- 
lowed, by  his  band  of  convicts,  who  had  been  told  what  they 
had  to  do. 

“Meanwhile  the  ‘Duncan’  had  been  sent  to  Melbourne 
for  repairs.  It  was  necessary,  then,  to  get  Lord  Glenarvan 
k)  order  her  to  leave  Melbourne  and  go  to  the  east  coast  of 
Australia,  where  it  would  be  easy  to  seize  her.  After  having 
led  the  expedition  near  enough  to  the  coast,  in  the  midst  of 
vast  forests,  with  no  resources,  Ayrton  obtained  a letter,  which 
he  was  charged  to  carry  to  the  mate  of  the  ‘ Duncan’— a letter 
which  ordered  the  yacht  to  repair  immediately  to  the  east  coast, 
to  Twofold  Bay,  that  is  to  say,  a few  days’  journey  from  the 
place  where  the  expedition  had  stopped.  It  was  there  that 
Ayrton  had  agreed  to  meet  his  accomplices,  and  two  days 
after  gaining  possession  of  the  letter,  he  arrived  at  Melbourne. 

“ So  far  the  villain  had  succeeded  in  his  wicked  design.  He 
would  be  able  to  take  the  ‘Duncan  ’ into  Twofold  Bay,  where 
it  would  be  easy  for  the  convicts  to  seize  her,  and  her  crew 
massacred,  Ben  Joyce  would  become  master  of  the  seas.  . . . 
But  it  pleased  God  to  prevent  the  accomplishment  of  these 
terrible  projects. 

“Ayrton,  arrived  at  Melbourne,  delivered  the  letter  to  the 
mate,  Tom  Austin,  who  read  it,  and  immediately  set  sail;  but 
judge  of  Ayrton’s  rage  and  disappointment  when  the  next  day 
he  found  that  the  mate  was  taking  the  vessel,  not  to  the  east 
coast  of  Australia,  to  Twofold  Bay,  but  to  the  east  coast  of  Nevy 
Zealand.  He  wished  to  stop  him,,  but  Austin  showed  him  the 


412 


TOE  UKBSIDB  mmm. 


letter  ! . . . . And  indeed,  by  a providential  error  of  the  French 
geographer,  who  had  written  the  letter,  the  east  coast  of  New 
Zealand  was  mentioned  as  the  place  of  destination. 

“ All  Ayrton’s  plans  were  frustrated ! He  became  out- 
rageous. They  put  him  in  irons.  He  was  then  taken  to  the 
coast  of  New  Zealand,  not  knowing  what  would  become  of 
his  accomplices,  or  what  would  become  of  Lord  Glenarvan. 

“ The  ‘ Duncan’  cruised  about  on  this  coast  until  the  3d  of 
March.  On  that  day  Ayrton  heard  the  report  of  guns.  The 
guns  of  the  ‘ Duncan’  were  being  fired,  and  soon  Lord  Glen- 
arvan  and  his  companions  came  on  board. 

“ This  is  what  had  happened. 

“After  a thousand  hardships,  a thousand  dangers,  Lord 
Glenarvan  had  accomplished  his  journey,  and  arrived  on  the 
east  coast  of  Australia,  at  Twofold  Bay.  ‘No  “Duncan!”’ 
He  telegraphed  to  Melbourne.  They  answered,  Duncan  ” 
sailed  on  the  18th  instant.  Destination  unknown.’ 

“Lord  Glenarvan  could  only  arrive  at  one  conclusion;  that 
his  honest  yacht  had  fallen  into  the  hands  of  Ben  Joyce,  and 
had  become  a pirate  vessel ! 

“However,  Lord  Glenarvan  would  not  give  up.  He  was  a 
bold  and  generous  man.  He  embarked  in  a merchant  vessel, 
sailed  to  the  west  coast  of  New  Zealand,  traversed  it  along 
the  thirty-seventh  parallel,  without  finding  any  trace  of 
Captain  Grant;  but  on  the  other  side,  to  his  great  surprise,  and 
by  the  will  of  Heaven,  he  found  the  ‘ Duncan  ’ under  command 
of  the  mate,  who  had  been  waiting  for  him  for  five  weeks  ! 

“ This  was  on  the  3d  of  March,  1855.  Lord  Glenarvan  was 
now  on  board  the  ‘ Duncan,’  but  Ayrton  was  there  also.  He 
appeared  before  the  nobleman,  who  wished  to  extract  from 
him  all  the  villain  knew  about  Captain  Grant.  Ayrton  refused 
to  speak.  Lord  Glenarvan  then  told  him  that  at  the  first  port 
they  put  into  he  would  be  delivered  up  to  the  English  author- 
ities. Ayrton  remained  mute. 

“The  ‘Duncan’  continued  her  voyage  along  the  thirty- 
seventh  parallel.  In  the  meanwhile,  Lady  Glenarvan  under- 
took to  vanquish  the  resistance  of  the  ruffian. 

“At  last  her  influence  prevailed,  and  Ayrton,  in  exchange  for 


THE  ABANDONED. 


418 


what  he  could  tell,  proposed  that  Lord  Glenarvan  should  leave 
him  on  some  island  in  the  Pacific,  instead  of  giving  him  up 
to  the  English  authorities.  Lord  Glenarvan,  resolving  to  do 
any  thing  to  obtain  information  about  Captain  Grant,  con- 
sented. 

“ Ayrton  then  related  all  his  life,  and  it  was  certain  that  he 
knew  nothing  from  the  day  on  which  Captain  Grant  had 
landed  him  on  the  Australian  coast. 

“Nevertheless,  Lord  Glenarvan  kept  the  promise  which  he 
had  given.  The  ‘ Duncan  ’ continued  her  voyage  and  arrived 
at  Tabor  Island.  It  was  there  that  Ayrton  was  to  be  landed, 
and  it  was  there  also  that,  by  a veritable  miracle,  they  found 
Captain  Grant  and  two  men,  exactly  on  the  thirty-seventh 
parallel. 

“ The  convict,  then,  went  to  take  their  place  on  this  desert 
islet,  and  at  the  moment  he  left  the  yacht  these  words  were 
pronounced  by  Lord  Glenarvan  : — 

-“‘Here,  Ayrton,  you  will  be  far  away  from  any  land,  and 
without  any  possible  communication  with  your  fellow  crea- 
tures. You  can  not  escape  from  this  islet  on  which  the 
‘Duncan’  leaves  you.  You  will  be  alone,  under  the  eye  of  a 
£od  who  reads  the  depths  of  the  heart;  but  you  will  be  neither 
lost  nor  forgotten,  as  was  Captain  Grant.  Unworthy  as  you  are 
to  be  remembered  by  men,  men  will  remember  you.  I know 
where  you  are,  Ayrton,  and  I know  where  to  find  you.  I will 
never  forget  it !” 

“And  the  ‘Duncan,’  making  sail,  soon  disappeared.  This 
was  on  the  18th  of  March,  1855. 

“ Ayrton  was  alone,  but  he  had  no  want  of  either  ammuni- 
tion, weapons,  tools,  or  seeds. 

“ At  his,  the  convict’s,  disposal,  was  the  house  built  by  honest 
Captain  Grant.  He  had  only  to  five  and  expiate  in  solitude 
the  crimes  which  he  had  committed. 

“Gentlemen,  he  repented,  he  was  ashamed  of  his  crimes, 
and  was  very  miserable  ! He  said  to  himself,  that  if  men  came 
some  day  to  take  him  from  that  islet,  he  must  be  worthy  to 
return  amongst  them ! How  he  suffered,  that  wretched  man  I 
How  he  labored  to  recover  himself  by  work  I How  he  prayed 


m 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


to  be  reformed  by  prayer ! For  two  years,  three  years,  this 
went  on  ; but  Ayrton,  humbled  by  solitude,  always  looking  for 
some  ship  to  appear  on  the  horizon,  asking  himself  if  the  time 
of  expiation  would  soon  be  complete,  suffered  as  none  other 
ever  suffered ! Oh  ! how  dreadful  was  this  solitude  to  a heart 
tormented  by  remorse ! 

“But  doubtless  Heaven  had  not  sufficiently  punished  this 
unhappy  man,  for  he  felt  that  he  was  gradually  becoming  a 
savage ! He  felt  that  brutishness  was  gradually  gaining  on 
him  ! 

“He  could  not  say  if  it  was  after  two  or  three  years  of 
solitude;  bmt  at  last  he  became  the  miserable  creature  you 
found ! 

“I  have  no  need  to  tell  you,  gentlemen,  that  Ayrton,  Ben 
Joyce,  and  I,  are  the  same.” 

Cyrus  Harding  and  his  companions  rose  at  the  end  of  this 
account.  It  is  impossible  to  say  how  much  they  were  moved  ! 
What  misery,  grief,  and  despair  lay  revealed  before  them  ! 

“Ayrton,”  said  Harding,  rising,  “you  have  been  a great 
criminal,  but  Heaven  must  certainly  think  that  you  have  expi- 
ated your  crimes!  That  has  been  proved  by  your  having 
been  brought  again  among  your  fellow-creatures.  Ayrton  yov 
are  forgiven  ! And  now  you  will  be  our  companion  ? ” 

Ayrton  drew  back. 

“Here  is  my  hand ! ” said  the  engineer. 

Ayrton  grasped  the  hand  which  Harding  extended  to  him, 
and  great  tears  fell  from  his  eyes. 

“ Will  you  live  with  us  ? ” asked  Cyrus  Harding. 

“Captain  Harcling,  leave  me  some  time  longer,”  replied 
Ayrton;  “leave  me  alone  in  the  hut  in  the  corral ! ” 

“As  you  like,  Ayrton,”  answered  Cyrus  Harding.  Ayrton 
was  going  to  withdraw,  when  the  engineer  addressed  one 
more  question  to  him 

“ One  word  more,  my  friend.  Since  it  was  your  intention  to 
live  alone,  why  did  you  throw  into  the  sea  the  document  which 
put  us  on  your  tradt  ? ” 

“A  document?”  repeated  Ayrton,  who  did  not  appear  i» 
know  what  he  meant. 

% 


THE  ABANDONED. 


m 


M\es,  the  document  which  we  found  enclosed  in  a bottle* 
giving  us  the  exact  position  of  Tabor  Island ! ” 

Ayrton  passed  his  hand  over  his  brow,  then  after  having 
thought,  “I  never  threw  any  document  into  the  sea!”  he 
answered. 

“ Never,”  exclaimed  Pencroft. 

“ Never ! ” 

And  Ayrton,  bowing,  reached  the  door  and  departed. 


CHAPTER  XYTII 


CONVERSATION  — CYRUS  HARDING  AND  GIDEON  SPILETT— AN  IDEA 
OP  THE  ENGINEER’S— THE  ELECTRIC  TELEGRAPH— THE  WIRES 
—THE  BATTERY— THE  ALPHABET— FINE  SEASON— PROSPERITY 
OF  THE  COLONY— PHOTOGRAPHY— AN  APPEARANCE  OF  SNOW- 
TWO  YEARS  IN  LINCOLN  ISLAND, 

“Poor  man  ! ” said  Herbert,  who  had  rushed  to  the  door,  but 
returned,  having  seen  Ayrton  slide  down  the  rope  of  the  lift 
and  disappear  in  the  darkness, 

“ He  will  come  back,”  said  Cyrus  Harding. 

“Come  now,  captain,”  exclaimed  Pencroft,  “what  does  that 
mean  ? What ! wasn’t  it  Ayrton  who  threw  that  bottle  into 
the  sea  ? Who  was  it  then  Certainly,  if  ever  a question 
was  necessary  to  be  made,  it  was  that  one  ! 

“It  was  he,”  answered  Neb,  “only  the  unhappy  man  was 
half  mad.” 

“Yes!”  said  Herbert,  “and  he  was  no  longer  conscious  of 
what  he  was  doing.” 

“ It  can  only  be  explained  in  that  way,  my  friends,”  replied 
Harding  quickly,  “ and  I understand  now  how  Ayrton  was  able 
to  point  out  exactly  the  situation  of  Tabor  Island,  since  the 
events  which  had  preceded  his  being  left  on  the  Island  had 
made  it  known  to  him  ” 

“ However,”  observed  Pencroft,  “ if  he  was  not  yet  a brute 
when  he  wrote  that  document,  and  if  he  threw  it  into  the  sea 
seven  or  eight  years  ago,  how  is  it  that  the  paper  has  not  been 
injured  by  damp  ? ” 

“ That  proves,”  answered  Cyrus  Harding,  “ that  Ayrton  was 
deprived  of  intelligence  at  a more  recent  date  than  he  thinks.” 

“ Of  course,  it  must  be  so,”  replied  Pencroft,  “ without  that 
the  fact  would  b®  unaccountable.” 

m 


THE  ABANDONEE 


411 


*Untet5Countable  indeed/5  answered  the  engineer,  who  did 
not  appear  desirous  to  prolong  the  conversation. 

“ But  nas  Ayrton  told  the  truth  ?”  asked  the  sailor. 

“ Yes, 1 replied  the  reporter.  “ The  story  which  he  has  told 
Cs  true  in  every  point.  I remember  quite  well  the  account 
in  the  newspapers  of  the  yacht  expedition  undertaken  by  Lord 
Glenarvan,  and  its  result.” 

“ Ayrton  has  told  the  truth,”  added  Harding.  “ Do  not  doubt 
it,  Pencroft,  for  it  was  painful  to  him.  People  tell  the  truth 
when  they  accuse  themselves  like  that ! ” 

The  next  day— the  21st  of  December— the  colonists  descended 
to  the  beach,  and  having  climbed  the  plateau  they  found 
nothing  of  Ayrton.  He  had  reached  his  home  in  the  corral 
during  vne  night,  and  the  settlers  judged  it  best  not  to  agitate 
him  by  their  presence.  Time  would  doubtless  perform 
what  sympathy  had  been  unable  to  accomplish. 

Herbert,  Pencroft,  and  Neb  resumed  their  ordinary  occupa- 
tions. On  this  day  the  same  work  brought  Harding  and 
the  reporter  to  the  work-shop  at  the  Chimneys. 

“ Do  you  know,  my  dear  Cyrus,”  said  Gideon  Spilett,  “ that 
the  explanation  you  gave  yesterday  on  the  subject  of  the  bottle 
has  not  satisfied  me  at  all ! How  can  it  be  supposed  that  the 
unfortunate  man  was  able  to  write  that  document  and  throw 
the  bottie  into  the  sea  without  having  the  slightest  recollection 
of  it  ?* 

“ Nor  was  it  he  who  threw  it  in,  my  dear  Spilett.” 

“ You  think  then  . . .” 

“I  think  nothing,  I know  nothing ! ” interrupted  Cyrus  Hard- 
ing. “i  am  content  to  rank  this  incident  among  those  which 
I have  not  been  able  to  explain  to  this  day ! ” 

“ Indeed,  Cyrus,”  said  Spilett,  “ these  things  are  incredible  I 
Your  rescue,  the  case  stranded  on  the  sand,  Top’s  adventure, 
and  lastly  this  bottle.  . , . Shall  we  never  have  the  answer  to 
these  enigmas  ? ” 

“Yes  i*  replied  the  engineer  quickly,  “ yes,  even  if  I have  to 
penetrate  into  the  bowels  of  this  island  I ” 

“Chance  will,  perhaps,  give  us  the  key  to  this  mystery ! ” 

“ Chance ! Spilett ! I do  not  believe  in  chance,  any  more 
17 


418 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


than  I believe  in  mysteries  in  this  world.  There  is  a reason 
for  every  thing  unaccountable  which  has  happened  here,  and 
that  reason  I shall  discover.  But  in  the  mean  time  we  must 
work  and  observe.” 

The  month  of  January  arrived.  The  year  1867  commenced. 
The  summer  occupations  was  assiduously  continued.  During 
the  days  which  followed,  Herbert  and  Spilett  having  gone 
in  the  direction  of  the  corral,  ascertained  that  Ayrton  had 
taken  possession  of  the  habitation  which  had  been  prepared 
for  him.  He  busied  himself  with  the  numerous  flock  confided 
to  his  care,  and  spared  his  companions  the  trouble  of  coming 
every  two  or  three  days  to  visit  the  corral.  Nevertheless,  in 
order  not  to  leave  Ayrton  in  solitude  for  too  long  a time,  the 
settlers  often  paid  him  a visit. 

It  was  not  unimportant  either,  in  consequence  of  some  sus- 
picions entertained  by  the  engineer  and  Gideon  Spilett,  that 
this  part  of  the  island  should  be  subject  to  a surveillance  of 
some  sort,  and  that  Ayrton,  if  any  incident  occurred  unexpect- 
edly, should  not  neglect  to  inform  the  inhabitants  of  Granite 
House  of  it. 

Nevertheless,  it  might  happen  that  something  would  occur 
which  it  would  be  necessary  to  bring  rapidly  to  the  engi- 
neer’s knowledge.  Independently  of  facts  bearing  on  the  mys- 
tery of  Lincoln  Island,  many  others  might  happen  which 
would  call  for  the  prompt  interference  of  the  colonists— such 
as  the  sighting  of  a vessel,  a wreck  on  the  western  coast,  the 
possible  arrival  of  pirates,  etc. 

Therefore  Cyrus  Harding  resolved  to  put  -the  corral  in 
instantaneous  communication  with  Granite  House. 

It  was  on  the  10th  of  January  that  he  made  known  his 
project  to  his  companions. 

w Why ! how  are  you  going  to  manage  that,  captain  ? ” asked 
Pencroft.  “ Do  you  by  chance  happen  to  think  of  establishing 
a telegraph  ? ” 

“Exactly  so,”  answered  the  engineer. 

“ Electric  ? ” cried  Herbert. 

“ Electric,”  replied  Cyrus  Harding.  “ We  have  all  the  neces- 
sary materials  for  making  a battery,  and  the  most  difficult 


THE  ABANDONED. 


m 


thing  will  be  to  stretch  the  wires,  but  by  means  of  a draw- 
plate  I think  we  shall  manage  it.” 

“Well,  after  that,”  returned  the  sailor,  “I  shall  never  despair 
of  seeing  ourselves  some  day  rolling  along  on  a railway  ! ” 

They  then  set  to  work,  beginning  with  the  most  difficult 
thing,  for,  if  they  failed  in  that,  it  would  be  useless  to  manu- 
facture the  battery  and  other  accessories. 

The  iron  of  Lincoln  Island,  as  has  been  said,  was  of  excellent 
quality,  and  consequently  very  fit  for  being  drawn  out.  Hard- 
ing commenced  by  manufacturing  a draw-plate,  that  is  to  say,  a 
plate  of  steel,  pierced  with  conical  holes  of  different  sizes, 
which  would  successively  bring  the  wire  to  the  wished-for 
tenacity.  This  piece  of  steel,  after  having  been  tempered,  was 
fixed  in  as  firm  a way  as  possible  in  a solid  framework  planted 
in  the  ground,  only  a few  feet  from  the  great  fall,  the  motive 
power  of  which  the  engineer  intended  to  utilize.  In  fact,  as 
the  fulling-mill  was  there,  although  not  then  in  use,  its  beam 
moved  with  extreme  power  would  serve  to  stretch  out  the 
wire  by  rolling  it  round  itself.  It  was  a delicate  operation,  and 
required  much  care.  The  iron,  prepared  previously  in  long 
thin  rods,  the  ends  of  which  were  sharpened  with  the  file, 
having  been  introduced  into  the  largest  hole  of  the  draw-platq 
was  drawn  out  by  the  beam  which  wound  it  round  itself,  to  a 
length  of  twenty-five  or  thirty  feet,  then  unrolled,  and  the  same 
operation  was  performed  successively  through  the  holes  of  a 
lesssizeT  Finally,  the  engineer  obtained  wires  from  forty  to 
fifty  feet  long,  which  could  be  easily  fastened  together  and 
stretched  over  the  distance  of  five  miles,  which  separated  the 
corral  from  the  bounds  of  Granite  House. 

It  did  not  take  more  than  a few  days  to  perform  this  work, 
and  indeed  as  soon  as  the  machine  had  been  commenced,  Cyrus 
Harding  left  his  companions  to  follow  the  trade  of  wire-draw- 
ers, and  occupied  himself  with  manufacturing  his  battery. 

It  was  necessary  to  obtain  a battery  with  a constant  current. 
It  is  known  that  the  elements  of  modern  batteries  are  gener- 
ally composed  of  retort  coal,  zinc,  and  copper.  Copper  was 
absolutely  wanting  to  the  engineer,  who,  notwithstanding  all 
bis  researches,  had  never  been  able  to  find  any  trace  of  it  Id 


420 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


Lincoln  Island,  and  was  therefore  obliged  to  do  without  it 
Retort  coal,  that  is  to  say,  the  hard  graphyte  which  is  found 
in  the  retorts  of  gas  manufactories,  after  the  coal  has  been 
dehydrogenized,  could  have  been  obtained,  but  it  would  have 
been  necessary  to  establish  a special  apparatus,  involving 
great  labor.  As  to  zinc,  it  may  be  remembered  that  the  case 
found  at  Flotsam  Point  was  lined  with  this  metal,  which  could 
not  be  better  utilized  than  for  this  purpose. 

Cyrus  Harding,  after  mature  consideration,  decided  to  manu- 
facture a very  simple  battery,  resembling  as  nearly  as  possible 
that  invented  by  Recquerel  in  1820,  and  in  which  zinc  only  is 
employed.  The  other  substances,  azotic  acid  and  potash,  were 
all  at  his  disposal. 

The  way  in  which  the  battery  was  composed  was  as  follows, 
and  the  results  were  to  be  attained  by  the  reaction  of  acid  and 
potash  on  each  other.  A number  of  glass  bottles  were  made 
and  filled  with  azotic  acid.  The  engineer  corked  them  by 
means  of  a stopper  through  which  passed  a glass  tube,  bored  at 
its  lower  extremity,  and  intended  to  be  plunged  into  the  acid 
by  means  of  a clay  stopper  secured  by  a rag.  Into  this  tube, 
through  its  upper  extremity,  he  poured  a solution  of  potash, 
previously  obtained  by  burning  and  reducing  to  ashes  various 
plants,  and  in  this  way  the  acid  and  potash  could  act  on  each 
other  through  the  clay. 

Cyrus  Harding  then  took  two  slips  of  zinc,  one  of  which  was 
plunged  into  azotic  acid,  the  other  into  a solution  of~  potash. 
A current  was  immediately  produced,  which  was  transmitted 
from  the  slip  of  zinc  in  the  bottle  to  that  in  the  tube,  and  the 
two  slips  having  been  connected  by  a metallic  wire  the  slip  in 
the  tube  became  the  positive  pole,  and  that  in  the  bottle  the 
negative  pole  of  the  apparatus.  Each  bottle,  therefore,  pro- 
duced as  many  currents  as  united  would  be  sufficient  to  pro- 
duce all  the  phenomena  of  the  electric  telegraph.  Such  was 
the  ingenious  and  very  simple  apparatus  constructed  by  Cyrus 
Harding,  an  apparatus  which  would  allow  them  to  establish  a 
telegraphic  communication  between  Granite  House  and  the 
corral. 

On  the  6th  of  February  was  commenced  the  planting  along 


THE  ABANDONED. 


421 


the  road  to  the  corral,  of  posts,  furnished  with  glass  insulators, 
and  intended  to  support  the  wire.  A few  days  after,  the  wire 
was  extended,  ready  to  produce  the  electric  current  at  a rate  of 
twenty  thousand  miles  a second. 

Two  batteries  had  been  manufactured,  one  for  Granite 
House,  the  other  for  the  corral;  for  if  it  was  necessary  the 
corral  should  be  able  to  communicate  with  Granite  House,  it 
might  also  be  useful  that  Granite  House  should  be  able  to  com- 
municate with  the  corral. 

As  to  the  receiver  and  manipulator,  they  were  very  simple. 
At  the  two  stations  the  wire  was  wound  round  a magnet, 
that  is  to  say,  round  a piece  of  soft  iron  surrounded  with  a 
wire.  The  communication  was  thus  establ’shed  between  the 
two  poles  ; the  current,  starting  from  the  positive  pole,  trav- 
ersed the  wire,  passed  through  the  magnet  which  was 
temporarily  magnetized,  and  returned  through  the  earth  to  the 
negative  pole.  If  the  current  was  interrupted  the  magnet 
immediately  became  unmagnetized.  Jt  was  sufficient  to  place 
a plate  of  soft  iron  before  the  magnet,  which,  attracted  during 
the  passage  of  the.  current,  would  fall  back  when  the  current 
was  interrupted.  This  movement  of  the  plate  thus  obtained, 
Harding  could  easily  fasten  to  it  a needle  arranged  on  a dial, 
bearing  the  letters  of  the  alphabet,  and  in  this  way  commu- 
nicate from  one  station  to  the  other. 

All  was  completely  arranged  by  the  12th  of  February.  On 
this  day  Harding,  having  sent  the  current  through  the  wire, 
asked  if  all  was  going  on  well  at  the  corral,  and  received  in  a 
few  moments  a satisfactory  reply  from  Ayrton.  Pencroft  was 
wild  with  joy,  and  every  morning  and  evening  he  sent  a tele- 
gram to  the  corral,  which  always  received  an  answer. 

This  mode  of  communication  presented  two  very  real 
advantages  ; firstly,  because  it  enabled  them  to  ascertain  that 
Ayrton  was  at  the  corral ; and  secondly,  that  he  was  thus  not 
left  completely  isolated.  Besides,  Cyrus  Harding  never  allowed 
a week  to  pass  without  going  to  see  him,  and  Ayrton  came 
from  time  to  time  to  Granite  House,  where  he  always  found  a 
cordial  welcome. 

The  fine  season  nossed  away  in  the  midst  of  the  usual  worii. 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


The  resources  of  the  colony,  particularly  in  vegetables  and 
corn,  increased  from  day  to  day,  and  the  plants  brought  from 
Tabor  Island  had  succeeded  perfectly,, 

The  plateau  of  Prospect  Heights  p resented  an  encouraging 
aspect.  The  fourth  harvest  had  been  admirable,  and  it  may  be 
supposed  that  no  one  thought  of  counting  whether  the  four 
hundred  thousand  millions  of  grains  duly  appeared  in  the  crop. 
However,  Pencroft  had  thought  of  doing  so,  but  Cyrus  Harding 
having  told  him  that  even  if  he  managed  to  count  three 
hundred  grains  a minute,  or  nine  thousand  an  hour,  it  would 
take  him  nearly  five  thousand  five  hundred  years  to  finish  his 
task,  the  honest  sailor  considered  it  best  to  give  up  the  idea. 

The  weather  was  splendid,  the  temperature  very  warm  in  the 
day  time  ; but  in  the  evening  the  sea  breezes  tempered  the  heat 
of  the  atmosphere  and  procured  cool  nights  for  the  inhabitants 
of  Granite  House.  There  were,  however,  a few  storms,  which, 
although  they  were  not  of  long  duration,'  swept  over  Lincoln 
Island  with  extraordinary  fury.  The  lightning  blazed  and  the 
thunder  continued  to  roll  for  some  hours. 

At  this  period  the  little  colony  was  extremely  prosperous. 
The  tenants  of  the  poultry-yard  swarmed,  and  they  lived  on  the 
surplus,  but  it  became  necessary  to  reduce  the  population  to  a 
more  moderate  number.  The  pigs  had  already  produced 
young,  and  it  may  be  understood  that  their  care  for  these 
animals  absorbed  a great  part  of  Neb  and  PencrofPs  time. 
The  onagas,  who  had  two  pretty  colts,  were  most  often 
mounted  by  Gideon  Spilett  and  Herbert,  who  had  become  an 
excellent  rider  under  the  reporter’s  instruction,  and  they  also 
harnessed  them  to  the  cart  either  for  carrying  wood  and  coal  to 
Granite  House,  or  different  mineral  productions  required  by 
the  engineer. 

Several  expeditions  were  made  about  this  time  into  the 
depths  of  the  Far  West  Forests.  The  explorers  could  venture 
there  without  having  any  thing  to  fear  from  the  heat,  for 
the  sun’s  rays  scarcely  penetrated  through  the  thick  foliage 
spreading  above  their  heads.  They  thus  visited  all  the  left 
bank  of  the  Mercy,  along  which  ran  the  road  from  the  corral  to 
the  mouth  of  Falls  Biver. 


THE  ABANDONED. 


423 


But  in  these  excursions  the  settlers  took  care  to  be  well 
armed,  for  they  frequently  met  with  savage  wild  boars,  with 
which  they  often  had  a tussle.  They  also,  during  this  season, 
made  fierce  war  against  the  jaguars.  Gideon  Spilett  had 
vowed  a special  hatred  against  them,  and  his  pupil  Herbert 
seconded  him  well.  Armed  as  they  were,  they  no  longer  feared 
to  meet  one  of  those  beasts.  Herbert’s  courage  was  superb, 
and  the  reporter’s  sang  froid  astonishing.  Already  twenty 
magnificent  skins  ornamented  the  dining-room  of  Granite 
House,  and  if  this  continued,  the  jaguar  race  would  soon  be 
extinct  in  the  island,  the  object  aimed  at  by  the  hunters. 

The  engineer  sometimes  took  part  in  the  expeditions  made 
to  the  unknown  parts  of  the  island,  which  he  surveyed  with 
great  attention.  It  was  for  other  traces  than  those  of  ani- 
mals that  he  searched  the  thickest  of  the  vast  forest,  but  nothing 
suspicious  ever  appeared.  Neither  Top  nor  Jup,  who  accom- 
panied him,  ever  betrayed  by  their  behavior  that  there  was 
any  thing  strange  there,  and  yet  more  than  once  again  the 
dog  barked  at  the  mouth  of  the  well,  which  the  engineer 
had  before  explored  wthout  result. 

At  this  time  Gideon  Spilett,  aided  by  Herbert,  took  several 
views  of  the  most  picturesque  parts  of  the  island,  by  means  of 
the  photographic  apparatus  found  in  the  cases,  and  of  which 
they  had  not  as  yet  made  any  use. 

This  apparatus,  provided  with  a powerful  object-glass,  was 
very  complete.  Substances  necessary  for  the  photographic  re- 
production, collodion  for  preparing  the  glass  plate,  nitrate  of 
silver  to  render  it  sensitive,  hyposulphate  of  soda  to  fix  the 
prints  obtained,  chloride  of  ammonium  in  which  to  soak  the 
paper  destined  to  give  the  positive  proof,  acetate  of  soda  and 
chloride  of  gold  in  which  to  immerse  the  paper,  nothing  was 
wanting.  Even  the  papers  were  there,  all  prepared,  and  before 
laying  in  the  printing-frame  upon  the  negative,  it  was  suf- 
cient  to  soak  them  for  a few  minutes  in  the  solution  of  nitrate 
of  silver. 

The  reporter  and  his  assistant  became  in  a short  time  very 
skillful  operators,  and  they  obtained  fine  views  of  the  country, 
such  as  the  island,  taken  from  Prospect  Heights  with  Mount 


424 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


Franklin  in  the  distance,  the  mouth  of  the  Mercy,  so  pictu* 
esquely  framed  in  high  rocks,  the  glade  and  the  corral,  with 
the  spurs  of  the  mountain  in  the  back  ground,  the  curiou* 
development  of  Claw  Cape,  Flotsam  Point,  etc. 

Nor  did  the  photographers  forget  to  take  the  portraits  of  all 
the  inhabitants  of  the  island,  leaving  out  no  one. 

“ It  multiplies  us,”  said  Pencroft. 

And  the  sailor  was  enchanted  to  see  his  own  countenance, 
faithfully  reproduced,  ornamenting  the  walls  of  Granite 
House,  and  he  stopped  as  willingly  before  this  exhibition  as  he 
would  have  done  before  the  richest  shop- windows  in  Broad- 
way. 

But  it  must  be  acknowledged  that  the  most  successful 
portrait  was  incontestably  that  of  Master  Jup.  Master  Jup 
had  sat  with  a gravity  not  to  be  described,  and  his  portrait 
was  lifelike ! 

“ He  looks  as  if  he  was  just  going  to  grin ! ” exclaimed  Pen- 
croft. 

And  if  Master  Jup  had  not  been  satisfied,  he  would  have 
been  very  difficult  to  please;  but  he  was  quite  contented,  and 
contemplated  his  own  countenance  with  a sentimental  air 
which  expressed  some  small  amount  of  conceit. 

The  summer  heat  ended  with  the  month  of  March.  The 
weather  was  sometimes  rainy,  but  still  warm.  The  month  ol 
March,  which  corresponds  to  the  September  of  northern  lati- 
tudes, was  not  so  fine  as  might  have  been  hoped.  Perhaps  it 
announced  an  early  and  rigorous  winter. 

It  might  have  been  supposed  one  morning— the  21st— that 
the  first  snow  had  already  made  its  appearance.  In  fact 
Herbert,  looking  early  from  one  of  the  windows  of  Granite 
House,  exclaimed, — 

“ Hallo!  the  islet  is  covered  with  snow ! ” 

“Snow  at  this  time?”  answered  the  reporter,  joining  the 
boy. 

Their  companions  were  soon  beside  them,  but  could  only 
ascertain  one  thing,  that  not  only  the  islet,  but  all  the  beach 
below  Granite  House,  was  covered  with  one  uniform  she** 
white. 


THE  ABANDONED. 


425 


* It  must  be  snow  ! ” said  Pencroft. 

“ Or  rather  it’s  very  like  it ! ” replied  Neb. 

“ But  the  thermometer  marks  fifty-eight  degrees ! ” observed 
Gideon  Spilett. 

Cyrus  Harding  gazed  at  the  sheet  of  white  without  saying 
any  thing,  for  he  really  did  not  know  how  to  explain  this 
phenomenon,  at  this  time  of  the  year  and  in  such  a tempera- 
ture. 

“By  Jove!”  exclaimed  Pencroft;  “all  our  plants  will  be 
frozen ! ” 

And  the  sailor  was  about  to  descend,  when  he  was  preceded 
by  the  nimble  Jup,  who  slid  down  to  the  sand. 

But  the  orang  had  not  touched  the  ground,  when  the  snowy 
sheet  arose  and  dispersed  in  the  air  in  such  innumerable  flakes 
that  the  light  of  the  sun  was  obscured  for  some  minutes. 

“ Birds  ! ” cried  Herbert. 

They  were  indeed  swarms  of  sea-birds,  with  dazzling  white 
plumage.  They  had  perched  by  thousands  on  the  islet  and  on 
the  shore,  and  they  disappeared  in  the  distance,  leaving  the 
colonists  amazed  as  if  they  had  been  present  at  some  transfor- 
mation scene,  in  which  summer  succeeded  winter  at  the 
touch  of  a fairy’s  wand.  Unfortunately  the  change  had  been 
so  sudden,  that  neither  the  reporter  nor  the  lad  had  been  able 
to  bring  down  one  of  these  birds,  of  which  they  could  not 
recognize  the  species. 

A few  days  after  came  the  26th  of  March,  the  day  on 
which,  two  years  before,  the  castaways  from  the  air  had  been 
thrown  upon  Lincoln  Island, 


CHAPTER  XIX, 


RECOLLECTIONS  OF  THEIR  NATIVE  LAND— PROBABLE  FUTURE — * 
PROJECT  FOR  SURVEYING  THE  COASTS  OF  THE  ISLAND- 
DEPARTURE  ON  THE  16TH  OF  APRIL— SEA- VIEW  OF  REPTILE 
END— THE  BASALTIC  ROCKS  OF  THE  WESTERN  COAST— BAD 
WEATHER— NIGHT  COMES  ON— NEW  INCIDENT, 

T Two  years  already ! and  for  two  years  the  colonists  had 
had  no  communication  with  their  fellow-creatures ! They 
were  without  news  from  the  civilized  world,  lost  on  this  island, 
as  completely  as  if  they  had  been  on  the  most  minute  star  of 
the  celestial  hemisphere ! 

What  was  now  happening  in  their  country  ? The  picture 
of  their  native  land  was  always  before  their  eyes,  the  land 
torn  by  civil  war  at  the  time  they  left  it,  and  which"  the  South- 
ern rebellion  was  perhaps  still  staining  with  blood ! It  was  a 
great  sorrow  to  them,  and  they  often  talked  together  of  these 
things,  without  ever  doubting  however  that  the  cause  of  the 
North  must  triumph,  for  the  honor  of  the  American  Confedera 
tion. 

During  these  two  years  not  a vessel  had  passed  in  sight  of 
the  island  ; or,  at  least  not  a sail  had  been  seen.  It  was 
evident  that  Lincoln  Island  was  out  of  the  usual  track,  and 
also  that  it  was  unknown,— as  was  besides  proved  by  the 
maps,— for  though  there  was  no  port,  vessels  might  have 
visited  it  for  the  purpose  of  renewing  their  store  of  water.  But 
the  surrounding  ocean  was  deserted  as  far  as  the  eye  could 
reach,  and  the  colonists  must  rely  on  themselves  for  regaining 
their  native  land. 

However,  one  chance  of  rescue  existed,  and  this  chance  wae 
discussed  one  day  in  the  first  week  in  April,  when  the  colonists 
were  gathered  together  in  the  dining-room  of  Granite  House. 

426 


THE  ABANDONED. 


42T 


They  had  been  talking  of  America,  of  their  native  country, 
which  they  had  so  little  hope  of  ever  seeing  again. 

“Decidedly  we  have  only  one  way,”  said  Spilett,  “one  single 
Way  for  leaving  Lincoln  Island,  and  that  is,  to  build  a vessel, 
large  enough  to  sail  several  hundred  miles.  It  appears  to  me 
that  when  one  has  built  a boat  it  is  just  as  easy  to  build  a 
ship  ! ” 

“ And  in  which  we  might  go  to  the  Pomatous,”  added  Her- 
bert, “just  as  easily  as  we  went  to  Tabor  Island.” 

“ I do  not  say  no,”  replied  Pencroft,  who  had  always  the  cast- 
ing vote  in  maritime  questions  ; “ I do  not  say  no,  although  it 
js  not  exactly  the  same  thing  to  make  a long  as  a short  voy- 
age ! If  our  little  craft  had  been  caught  in  any  heavy  gale  of 
wind  during  the  voyage  to  Tabor  Island,  we  should  have 
known  that  land  was  at  no  great  distance  either  way ; but 
twelve  hundred  miles  is  a pretty  long  way,  and  the  nearest 
land  is  at  least  that  distance ! ” 

“ Would  you  not,  in  that  case,  Pencroft,  attempt  the  adven- 
ture ? ” asked  the  reporter. 

“ I will  attempt  any  thing  that  is  desired,  Mr.  Spilett,”  an- 
swered the  sailor,  “ and  you  know  well  that  I am  not  a man  to 
flinch!” 

“ Remember,  besides,  that  we  number  another  sailor  amongst 
us  now,”*  remarked  Neb. 

“ And  who  is  that  ? ” asked  Pencroft. 

“ Ayrton.” 

“ That  is  true,”  replied  Herbert. 

“ If  he  will  consent  to  come,”  said  Pencroft. 

“ Nonsense ! ” returned  the  reporter  ; “ do  you  think  that  if 
Lord  Glenarvan’s  yacht  had  appeared  at  Tabor  Island,  whilst 
he  was  still  living  there,  Ayrton  would  have  refused  to  de- 
part?” 

“You  forget,  my  friends,”  then  said  Cyrus  Harding,  “that 
Ayrton  was  not  in  possession  of  his  reason  during  the  last 
years  of  his  stay  there.  But  that  is  not  the  question.  The 
point  is  to  know  if  we  may  count  among  our  chances  of 
being  rescued,  the  return  of  the  Scotch  vessel.  Now,  Lord 
Glenarvan  promised  Ayrton  that  he  would  return  to  take  him 


428 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


off  from  Tabor  Island  when  he  considered  that  his  crimes 
were  expiated,  and  I believe  that  he  will  return.” 

“ Yes,”  said  the  reporter,  “ and  I will  add  that  he  will  return 
soon,  for  it  is  twelve  years  since  Ayrton  was  abandoned.” 

“ Well ! ” answered  Pencroft,  “ I agree  with  you  that  the 
nobleman  will  return,  and  soon  too.  But  where  will  he 
touch  ? At  Tabor  Island,  and  not  at  Lincoln  Island.” 

“That  is  the  more  certain,”  replied  Herbert,  “as  Lincoln 
Island  is  not  even  marked  on  the  map.” 

“Therefore,  my  friends,”  said  the  engineer,  “we  ought  to 
take  the  necessary  precautions  for  making  our  presence,  and 
that  of  Ayrton  on  Lincoln  Island  known  at  Tabor  Island.” 

“ Certainly,”  answered  the  reporter,  “ and  nothing  is  easier 
than  to  place  in  the  hut,  which  was  Captain  Grant’s  and 
Ayrton’s  dwelling,  a notice  which  Lord  Glenarvan  and  his  crew 
can  not  help  finding,  giving. the  position  of  our  island.” 

“ It  is  a pity,”  remarked  the  sailor,  “ that  we  forgot  to  take 
that  precaution  on  our  first  visit  to  Tabor  Island.” 

“ And  why  should  we  have  done  it  ? ” asked  Herbert.  “ At 
that  time  we  did  not  know  Ayrton’s  history  ; we  did  not  know 
that  any  one  was  likely  to  come  some  day  to  fetch  him  ; and 
when  we  did  know  Ins  history,  the  season  was  too  advanced  to 
allow  us  to  return  then  to  Tabor  Island.” 

“ Yes,”  replied  Harding,  “ it  was  too  late,  and  we  must  put  off 
the  voyage  until  next  spring.” 

“But  suppose  the  Scotch  yacht  comes  before  that,”  said 
Pencroft. 

“That  is  not  probable,”  replied  the  engineer,  “for  Lord 
Glenarvan  would  not  choose  the  winter  season  to  venture  into 
these  seas.  Either  he  has  already  returned  to  Tabor  Island, 
since  Ayrton  has  been  with  us,  that  is  to  say,  during  the  last 
five  months,  and  has  left  again  ; or  he  will  not  come  till  later, 
and  it  will  be  time  enough  in  the  first  fine  October  days  to  go 
to  Tabor  Island,  and  leave  a notice  there.” 

“We  must  allow,”  said  Neb,  “that  it  will  be  very  unfor- 
tunate if  the  ‘ Duncan  ’ has  returned  to  these  parts  only  a few 
months  ago ! ” 

“ I hope  that  it  is  not  so,”  replied  Cyrus  Harding,  “ and  that 


TWfe  ABANDONED. 


429 


Heaven  has  not  deprived  as  of  the  best  chance  which  remains 
to  us.” 

“I  think,”  observed  the  reporter,  “that  at  any  rate  we 
shall  know  what  we  have  to  depend  on  when  we  have  been  to 
Tabor  Island,  for  if  the  yacht  has  returned  there,  they  will 
necessarily  have  left  some  traces  of  their  visit.” 

“That  is  evident,”  answered  the  engineer.  “So  then,  my 
friends,  since  we  have  this  chance  of  returning  to  our  country, 
we  must  wait  patiently,  and  if  it  is  taken  from  us  we  shall 
see  what  will  be  best  to  do.” 

“At  any  rate,”  remarked  Pencroft,  “it  is  well  understood 
that  if  we  do  leave  Lincoln  Island  in  some  way  or  another,  it 
will  not  be  because  we  were  uncomfortable  there  ! ” 

“No,  Pencroft,”  replied  the  engineer,  “it  will  be  because 
we  are  far  from  all  that  a man  holds  dearest  in  this  world, 
his  family,  his  friends,  his  native  land ! ” 

Matters  being  thus  decided,  the  building  of  a vessel  large- 
enough  to  sail  either  to  the  Archipelagoes  in  the  north,  or  to 
New  Zealand  in  the  west,  was  no  longer  talked  of,  and  they 
busied  themselves  in  their  accustomed  occupations,  with  cwview 
to  wintering  a third  time  in  Granite  House. 

However,  it  agreed  that  before  the  stormy  weather 
a&-  ir  fittle  vessel  should  be  employed  in  making  a 
voyage  round  the  island.  A complete  survey  of  the  coast 
had  not  yet  been  made,  and  the  colonists  had  but  an  imperfect 
idea  of  the  shore  to  the  west  and  north,  from  the  mouth  of  Falls 
River  to  the  Mandible  Capes,  as  well  as  of  the  narrow  bay  be- 
tween them,  which  opened  like  a shark’s  jaws. 

The  plan  of  this  excursion  was  proposed  by  Pencroft,  and 
Cyrus  Harding  fully  acquiesced  in  it,  for  he  himself  wished  to 
see  this  part  of  his  domain.  The  weather  was  variable,  but  the 
barometer  did  not  fluctuate  by  sudden  movements,  and  they 
could  therefore  count  on  tolerable  weather.  However,  during 
the  first  week  of  April,  after  a sudden  barometrical  fall,  a 
renewed  rise  was  marked  by  a heavy  gale  of  wind,  lastin 
five  or  six  days  ; then  the  needle  of  the  instrument  remained 
stationary  at  a height  of  twenty-nine  inches  and  nine-tenths 
and  the  weather  appeared  propitious  for  an  excursion. 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITIOir 


The  departure  was  fixed  for  the  16th  of  April,  and  tha 
w Bonadventure,’’  anchored  m Port  Balloon,  was  provisioned 
for  a voyage  which  might  he  of  some  duration. 

Cyrus  Harding  informed  Ayrton  of  tho  projected  expedition, 
and  proposed  that  he  should  take  part  in  it;  but  Ayrton  pre- 
ferring to  remain  on  snore,  it  was  decided  that  he  should  come 
to  Granite  House  during  the  absence  of  his  companions. 
Master  Jup  was  ordered  to  keep  him  company,  and  made  no 
remonstrance. 

On  the  morning  of  the  16th  of  April,  all  the  colonists, 
including  Top,  embarked.  A fine  breeze  blew  from  the  south- 
west, and  the  “ Bonadventure  ” tacked  on  leaving  Port  Balloon 
so  as  to  reach  Reptile  End.  Of  the  ninety  miles  which  the 
perimeter  of  the  island  measured,  twenty  included  the  south 
coast  between  the  Port  and  the  promontory.  The  wind 
being  right  ahead  it  was  necessary  to  hug  the  shore. 

It  took  the  whole  day  to  reach  the  promontory,  for  the  vessel 
on  leaving  port  had  only  two  hours  of  the  ebb  tide,  and  had, 
therefore,  to  make  way  for  six  hours  against  the  flood.  It  was 
nightfall  before  the  promontory  was  doubled. 

The  sailor  then  proposed  to  the  engineer  that  they  should 
continue  sailing  slowly  with  two  reefs  in  the  sail.  But  Hard- 
ing preferred  to  anchor  a few  cable-lengths  from  the  s b02** 
so  as  to  survey  that  part  of  the  coast  during  the  day.  It  was 
agreed,  also,  that  as  they  were  anxious  for  a minute  exploration 
of  the  coast  they  should  not  sail  during  the  night,  but  would 
always,  when  the  weather  permitted  it,  be  at  anchor  near  the 
shore. 

The  night  was  passed  under  the  promontory,  and  the  wind 
having  fallen,  nothing  disturbed  the  silence.  The  passengers, 
with  the  exception  of  the  sailor,  scarcely  slept  as  well  on 
board  the  “ Bonadventure  ” as  they  would  have  done  in  their 
rooms  at  Granite  House,  but  they  did  sleep  however.  Pen- 
croft  set  sail  at  break  of  day,  and  by  going  on  the  larboard 
tack  they  could  keep  close  to  the  shore. 

The  colonists  knew  this  beautiful  wooded  coast  since  they 
•had  already  explored  it  on  foot,  and  yet  it  excited  their  admira- 
tion. They  coasted  along  as  close  in  as  possible,  so  as  to  notice 


THE  ABANDONED. 


431 


every  thing,  avoiding  always  the  trunks  of  trees  which  floated 
here  and  there.  Several  times  also  they  anchored,  and  Gideon 
Spilett  took  photographs  of  the  superb  scenery. 

About  noon  the  “ Bonadventure  ” arrived  at  the  mouth  of 
Falls’  River.  Beyond,  on  the  left  bank,  a few  scattered  trees 
appeared,  and  three  miles  further  even  these  dwindled  into 
solitary  groups  among  the  western  spurs  of  the  mountain, 
whose  arid  ridge  sloped  down  to  the  shore. 

What  a contrast  between  the  northern  and  southern  part  of 
the  coast ! In  proportion  as  one  was  woody  and  fertile  so  was 
the  other  rugged  and  barren  ! It  might  have  been  designated 
as  one  of  those  iron  coasts,  as  they  are  called  in  some  countries, 
and  its  wild  confusion  appeared  to  indicate  that  a sudden 
crystallization  had  been  produced  in  the  yet  liquid  basalt  of 
some  distant  geological  sea.  These  stupendous  masses  would 
have  terrified  the  settlers  if  they  had  been  cast  at  first  on  this 
part  of  the  island ! They  had  not  been  able  to  perceive  the  sin- 
ister aspect  of  this  shore  from  the  summit  of  Mount  Franklin, 
for  they  overlooked  it  from  too  great  a height,  but  viewed  from 
the  sea  it  presented  a wild  appearance  which  could  not  per- 
haps be  equaled  in  any  corner  of  the  globe. 

The  “ Bonadventure  ” sailed  along  this  coast  for  the  distance 
of  half  a mile.  It  was  easy  to  see  that  it  was  composed  of 
blocks  of  all  sizes,  from  twenty  to  three  hundred  feet  in 
height,  and  of  all  shapes,  round  like  towers,  prismatic  like 
steeples,  pyramidal  like  obelisks,  conical  like  factory  chimneys. 
An  iceberg  of  the  Polar  seas  could  not  have  more  capricious 
in  its  terrible  sublimity!  Here,  bridges  were  thrown  from 
one  rock  to  another;  there,  arches  like  those  of  a wave,  into 
the  depths  of  which  the  eye  could  not  penetrate;  in  one  place 
large  vaulted  excavations  presented  a monumental  aspect;  in 
another,  a crowd  of  columns,  spires,  and  arches,  such  as  no 
Gothic  cathedral  ever  possessed.  Every  caprice  of  nature, 
still  more  varied  than  those  of  the  imagination,  appeared  on 
this  grand  coast,  which  extended  over  a length  of  eight  or 
nine  miles. 

Cyrus  Harding  and  his  companions  gazed,  with  a feeling 
of  surprise  bordering  on  stupefaction.  But  although  they  re- 


432 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION, 


mained  silent,  Top,  not  being  troubled  with  feelings  of  thi* 
sort,  uttered  barks  which  were  repeated  by  the  thousand 
echoes  of  the  basaltic  cliff.  The  engineer  even  observed  that 
these  barks  had  something  strange  in  them,  like  those  the 
dog  had  uttered  at  the  mouth  of  the  well  in  Granite  House. 

“ Let  us  go  close  in,”  said  he% 

And  the  “ Bonadventure  ” sailed  as  near  as  possible  to  the 
rocky  shore.  Perhaps  some  cave,  which  it  would  be  advisable 
to  explore  existed  there  ? But  Harding  saw  nothing,  not  a 
cavern,  not  a cleft  which  could  serve  as  a retreat  to  any  being 
whatever,  for  the  foot  of  the  cliff  was  washed  by  the  surf. 
Soon  Top’s  barks  ceased,  and  the  vessel  continued  her  course 
at  a few  cables-lengths  from  the  coast. 

In  the  northwest  part  of  the  island  the  shore  became  again 
flat  and  sandy.  A few  trees  here  and  there  rose  above  a low 
marshy  ground,  which  the  colonists  had  already  surveyed;  and 
in  violent  contrast  to  the  other  desert  shore,  life  was  again 
manifested  by  the  presence  of  myriads  of  water-fowl.  That 
evening  the  “ Bonadventure  ” anchored  in  a small  bay  to  the 
north  of  the  island,  near  the  land,  such  was  the  depth  of  water 
there.  The  night  passed  quietly,  for  the  breeze  died  away 
with  the  last  light  of  day,  and  only  rose  again  with  the  first 
streaks  of  dawn.  As  it  was  easy  to  land,  the  usual  hunters  of 
the  colony,  that  is  to  say,  Herbert  and  Gideon  Spilett,  went  for 
a ramble  of  two  hours  or  so,  and  returned  with  several  strings 
of  wild  duck  and  snipe.  Top  had  done  wonders  and  not  a 
bird  had  been  lost,  thanks  to  his  zeal  and  cleverness. 

At  eight  o’clock  in  the  morning  the  “Bonadventure”  set 
sail,  and  ran  rapidly  towards  North  Mandible  Cape,  for  the 
wind  was  right  astern  and  freshening  rapidly. 

“ However,”  observed  Pencroft,  “ I should  not  be  surprised 
if  a gale  came  up  from  the  west.  Yesterday  the  sun  set  in  a 
very  red-looking  horizon,  and  now,  this  morning,  those  mares- 
tails  don’t  forebode  any  thing  good.” 

These  mares-tails  are  cirrus  clouds,  scattered  in  the  zenith, 
their  height  from  the  sea  being  less  than  five  thousand  feet. 
They  look  like  light  pieces  of  cotton  wool,  and  their  presence 
usually  announces  some  sudden  change  in  the  weather. 


THE  ABANDONED. 


433 


“Well,”  >,aid  Harding,  “let  us  carry  as  much  sail  as  pos- 
sible, and  run  for  shelter  into  Shark  Gulf.  I think  that  the 
* Bonadventure  ’ will  be  safe  there.” 

“ Perfectly,”  replied  Pencroft,  “ and,  besides,  the  north  coast 
is  merely  sand,  very  uninteresting  to  look  at.” 

“ I shall  not  be  sorry,”  resumed  the  engineer,  “ to  pass  not 
only  to-night  but  to-morrow  in  that  bay,  which  is  worth  being 
carefully  explored.” 

“I  think  that  we  shall  be  obliged  to  do  so,  whether  we 
like  it  or  not,”  answered  Pencroft,  “for  the  sky  looks  very 
threatening  towards  the  west.  Dirty  weather  is  coming  on ! ” 

“ At  any  rate  we  have  a favorable  wind  for  reaching  Cape 
Mandible,”  observed  the  reporter. 

“ A very  find  wind,”  replied  the  sailor;  “ but  we  must  tack  to 
enter  the  gulf,  and  I should  like  to  see  my  way  clear  in  these 
unknown  quarters.” 

“ Quarters  which  appear  to  be  filled  with  rocks,”  added  Her- 
bert, “ if  we  judge  by  what  we  saw  on  the  south  coast  of 
Shark  Gull” 

“ Pencroft,”  said  Cyrus  Harding,  “ do  as  you  think  best,  we 
will  leave  it  to  you.” 

“ Don’t  make  your  mind  uneasy,  captain,”  replied  the  sailor, 
“ I shall  not  expose  myself  needlessly  ! I would  rather  a knife 
were  run  into  my  ribs  than  a sharp  rock  into  those  of  my 
‘Bonadventure !’” 

That  which  Pencroft  called  ribs  was  the  part  of  his  vessel 
under  water,  and  he  valued  it  more  than  his  own  skin. 

“ What  o’clock  is  it  ?”  asked  Pencroft. 

“ Ten  o’clock,”  replied  Gideon  Spilett. 

“ And  what  distance  is  it  to  the  Cape,  captain  ? ” 

“About  fifteen  miles,”  replied  the  engineer. 

“ That’s  a matter  of  two  hours  and  a half,”  said  the  sailor, 
“ and  we  shall  be  off  the  Cape  between  twelve  and  one  o’clock. 
Unluckily,  the  tide  will  be  turning  at  that  moment,  and  will  be 
ebbing  out  of  the  gulf.  I am  afraid  it  will  be  very  difficult  to 
get  in,  having  both  wind  and  tide  against  us.” 

“And  the  more  so  that  it  is  a full  moon  to-day,”  remarked 
Herbert.,  “ and  these  April  tides  are  very  strong.” 

28 


484 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


“ Well,  Pencroft,”  asked  Cyrus  Harding,  “ can  you  not  anchor 
off  the  Cape  ? ” 

“Anchor  near  land,  with  bad  weather  coming  on!”  ex- 
claimed the  sailor.  t:  What  are  you  thinking  of,  captain?  We 
should  run  aground  to  a certainty  ! ” 

“ What  will  you  do  then  ? ” 

“I  shall  try  to  keep  in  the  offing  until  the  flood,  that  is  to  say, 
till  about  seven  in  the  evening,  and  if  there  is  still  light  enough 
I will  try  to  enter  the  gulf;  if  not,  we  must  stand  off  and  on 
during  the  night,  and  we  will  enter  to-morrow  at  sunrise.” 

“ As  I told  you,  Pencroft,  we  will  leave  it  to  you,”  answered 
Harding. 

“Ah  !”  said  Pencroft,  “if  there  was  only  a light-house  on  the 
eoast,  it  would  be  much  more  convenient  for  sailors.” 

“Yes,”  replied  Herbert,  “and  this  time  we  shall  have  no 
obliging  engineer  to  light  a fire  to  guide  us  into  port ! ” 

“ Why,  indeed,  my  dear  Cyrus,”  said  Spilett,  “ we  have  never 
thanked  you  for  it;  but  frankly,  without  that  fire  we  should 
never  have  been  able  to  reach—” 

“ A fire  ?”  asked  Harding,  much  astonished  at  the  reporter’s 
words. 

“We  mean,  captain,”  answered  Pencroft,  “ that  on  board  the 
‘Bonadventure  ’ we  were  very  anxious  during  the  few  hours 
before  our  return,  and  we  should  have  passed  to  windward  of 
the  island,  if  it  had  not  been  for  the  precaution  you  took  of 
lighting  a fire  in  the  night  of  the  19th  of  October,  on  Prospect 
Heights.” 

“ Yes,  yes ! That  was  a lucky  idea  of  mine ! ” replied  the 
engineer. 

“ And  this  time,”  continued  the  sailor,  “ unless  the  idea  occurs 
to  Ayrton,  there  will  be  no  one  to  do  us  that  little  service  ! ” 

“ No ! no  one  !”  answered  Cyrus  Harding. 

A few  minutes  after,  finding  himself  alone  in  the  bows  of 
the  vessel  with  the  reporter,  the  engineer  bent  down  and 
whispered,— “ If  there  is  one  thing  certain  in  this  world, 
Spilett,  it  is  that  I never  lighted  any  fire  during  the  night 
of  the  19th  of  October,  neither  on  Prospect  Heights  nor  on  any 
other  part  of  the  island ! ” 


CHAPTER  XX, 


A NIGHT  AT  SEA— SHARK  GULF— CONFIDENCES— PREPARATIONS 
FOR  WINTER— FORWARDNESS  OF  THE  BAD  SEASON— SEVERE 
COLD— WORK  IN  THE  INTERIOR— IN  SIX  MONTHS— A PHOTO- 
GRAPHIC NEGATIVE  — UNEXPECTED  INCIDENT. 

Things  happened  as  Pencroft  had  predicted,  he  being  seldom 
mistaken  in  his  prognostications.  The  wind  rose,  and  from  a 
fresh  breeze  it  soon  increased  to  a regular  gale  ; that  is  to  say, 
it  acquired  a speed  of  from  forty  to  forty-five  miles  an  hour, 
before  which  a ship  in  the  open  sea  would  have  run  under 
close-reefed  topsails.  Now,  as  it  was  nearly  six  o’clock  when 
the  “ Bonadventure  ” reached  the  gulf,  anff  as  at  that  moment 
the  tide  turned,  it  was  impossible  to  enter.  They  were  there- 
fore compelled  to  stand  off,  for  even  if  he  had  wished  to  do  so, 
Pencroft  could  not  have  gained  the  mouth  of  the  Mercy. 
Hoisting  the  jib  to  the  mainmast  by  way  of  a storm-sail,  he 
hove  to,  putting  the  head  of  the  vessel  towards  the  land. 

Fortunately,  although  the  wind  was  strong  the  sea,  being 
sheltered  by  the  land,  did  not  run  very  high.  They  had  then 
little  to  fear  from  the  waves,  which  always  endanger  small 
craft.  The  “Bonadventure”  would  doubtlessly  not  have  cap- 
sized, for  she  was  well  ballasted  ; but  enormous  masses  of 
water  falling  on  the  deck,  might  injure  her,  if  her  timbers 
could  not  sustain  them.  Pencroft,  as  a good  sailor,  was  pre- 
pared for  any  thing.  Certainly,  he  had  great  confidence  in 
his  vessel,  but  nevertheless  he  awaited  the  return  of  day 
with  some  anxiety. 

During  the  night,  Cyrus  Harding  and  Gideon  Spilett  had  no 
opportunity  for  talking  together,  and  yet  the  words  pro- 
nounced in  the  reporter’s  ear  by  the  engineer,  were  well  worth 
being  discussed,  together  with  the  mysterious  influence  which 

435 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


480 

appeared  to  reign  over  Lincoln  Island.  Gideon  Spilett  did  not 
cease  from  pondering  over  this  new  and  inexplicable  incident, 
—the  appearance  of  a fire  on  the  coast  of  the  island.  The 
fire  had  actually  been  seen ! His  companions,  Herbert  and 
Pencroft,  had  seen,  it  with  him ! The  fire  had  served  to 
signalize  the  position  of  the  island  during  that  dark  night, 
and  they  had  not  doubted  that  it  was  lighted  by  the  engineer’s 
hand ; and  here  was  Cyrus  Harding  expressly  declaring  that 
he  had  never  done  any  thing  of  the  sort ! Spilett  resolved  to 
recur  to  this  incident  as  soon  as  the  “ Bonad venture  *’  returned, 
and  to  urge  Cyrus  Harding  to  acquaint  their  companions  with 
these  strange  facts.-  Perhaps  it  would  be  decided  to  make  in 
common  a complete  investigation  of  every  part  of  Lincoln 
Island. 

However  that  might  be,  on  this  evening  no  fire  was  lighted 
on  these  yet  unknown  shores,  which  formed  the  entrance  to 
the  gulf,  and  the  little  vessel  stood  off  during  the  nigh* 

When  the  first  streaks  of  dawn  appeared  in  the  western 
horizon,  the  wind,  which  had  slightly  fallen,  shifted  two  points, 
and  enabled  Pencroft  to  enter  the  narrow  gulf  with  greater 
ease.  Towards  seven  o’clock  in  the  morning,  the  “ Bonadven- 
ture,”  weathering  the  North  Mandible  Cape,  entered  the  strait 
and  glided  on  to  the  waters,  so  strangely  enclosed  in  the  frame 
of  lava. 

“Well,”  said  Pencroft,  “this  bay  would  make  admirable 
roads,  in  which  a whole  fleet  could  lie  at  their  ease  ! ” 

“ What  is  especially  curious,”  observed  Harding,  “ is  that  the 
gulf  has  been  formed  by  two  rivers  of  lava,  thrown  out  by  the 
volcano,  and  accumulated  by  successive  eruptions.  The  result 
is  that  the  gulf  is  completely  sheltered  on  all  sides,  and  I 
believe  that  even  in  the  stormiest  weather,  the  sea  here  must 
be  as  calm  as  a lake.” 

“No  doubt,”  returned  the  sailor,  “since  the  wind  has  only 
that  narrow  entrance  between  the  two  capes  to  get  in  by ; 
and  besides,  the  north  cape  protects  that  of  the  south  in  a way 
which  would  make  the  entrance  of  gusts  very  difficult.  I 
declare  our  ‘ Bonadventure  ’ could  stay  here  from  one  end 
of  the  year  to  the  other,  without  even  dragging  at  her  anchor  I ” 


' THE  ABANDONED. 


437 


“ It  is  rather  large  for  her ! ” observed  the  reporter. 

“ Well ! Mr.  Spilett,”  replied  the  sailor,  “ I agree  that  it  is  too 
jarge  for  the  ‘ Bonadventure ; ’ but  if  the  fleets  of  the  Union 
were  in  want  of  a harbor  in  the  Pacific,  I don’t  think  they 
would  ever  find  a better  place  than  this  ! ” 

“ We  are  in  the  shark’s  mouth,”  remarked  Neb,  alluding  to 
the  foim  of  the  gulf. 

“ Right  into  its  mouth,  my  honest  Neb ! ” replied  Herbert ; 
“ but  you  wre  not  afraid  that  it  will  shut  upon  us,  are  you  ? ” 

“ No,  Mr.  Herbert,”  answered  Neb  ; “ and  yet  this  gulf  here 
doesn’t  please  me  much ! It  has  a wicked  look ! ” 

“ Hallo ! ” cried  Pencroft,  “ here  is  Neb  turning  up  his  nose 
at  my  gulf,  just  as  I was  thinking  of  presenting  it  to  America ! ” 
“ But,  at  any  rate,  is  the  water  deep  enough  ? ” asked  the 
engineer,  “for  a depth  sufficient  for  the  keel  of  the  '‘Bonad- 
venture,’ would  not  be  enough  for  those  of  our  iron-clads.” 

“ That  is  easily  found  out,”  replied  Pencroft. 

And  the  sailor  sounded  with  a long  cord,  which  served  him 
as  a lead-line,  and  to  which  was  fastened  a lump  of  iron. 
This  cord  measured  nearly  fifty  fathoms,  and  its  entire  length 
was  unrolled  without  finding  any  bottom. 

“There,”  exclaimed  Pencroft,  “our  iron-clads  can  come 
here  after  all ! They  would  not  run  aground  ! ” 

“Indeed,”  said  Gideon  Spilett,  “this  gulf  is  a regular  abyss; 
but,  taking  into  consideration  the  volcanic  origin  of  the  island, 
it  is  not  astonishing  that  the  sea  should  offer  similar  depres- 
sions.” 

“One  would  say  too,”  observed  Herbert,  “that  these  cliffs 
were  perfectly  perpendicular  ; and  I believe  that  at  their  foot, 
even  with  a fine  five  or  six  times  longer,  Pencroft  would  not 
find  the  bottom.” 

“That  is  all  very  well,”  then  said  the  reporter;  “but  I must 
point  out  to  Pencroft  that  his  harbor  is  wanting  in  one  very 
important  respect ! ” 

“And  what  is  that,  Mr.  Spilett  ?” 

“ An  opening,  a cutting  of  some  sort,  to  give  access  to  the 
interior  of  the  island.  I do  not  see  a spot  on  which  we  could 
land.” 


438 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


And,  in  fact,  the  steep  lava  cliffs  did  not  afford  a single  place 
suitable  for  landing.  They  formed  an  insuperable  barrier, 
recalling,  but  with  more  wildness,  the  fiords  of  Norway.  The 
“ Bonadventure,”  coasting  as  close  as  possible  along  the  cliffs, 
did  not  discover  even  a projection  which  would  allow  the  pas- 
sengers to  leave  the  deck. 

Peneroft  consoled  himself  by  saying  that  with  the  help  of  a 
mine  they  could  soon  open  out  the  cliff  when  that  was  neces- 
sary, and  then,  as  there  was  evidently  nothing  to  be  done  in 
the  gulf,  he  steered  his  vessel  towards  the  strait  and  passed  out 
at  about  two  o’clock  in  the  afternoon. 

“ Ah !”  said  Neb,  uttering  a sigh  of  satisfaction. 

One  might  really  say  that  the  honest  negro  did  not  feel  at 
his  ease  in  those  enormous  jaws. 

The  distance  from  Mandible  Cape  to  the  mouth  of  the  Mercy 
was  more  than  eight  miles.  The  head  of  the  “Bonadven- 
ture ” was  put  towards  Granite  House,  and  a fair  wind  filling 
her  sails,  she  ran  rapidly  along  the  coast. 

To  the  enormous  lava  rocks  succeeded  soon  those  capri- 
cious sand  dunes,  among  which  the  engineer  had  been  so 
singularly  recovered,  and  which  sea-birds  frequented  in  thou- 
sands. 

About  four  o’clock,  Peneroft,  leaving  the  point  of  the  islet  on 
his  left,  entered  the  channel  which  separated  it  from  the  coast, 
and  at  five  o’clock  the  anchor  of  the  “Bonadventure”  was 
buried  in  the  sand  at  the  mouth  of  the  Mercy. 

The  colonists  had  been  absent  three  days  from  their  dwell- 
ing. Ayrton  was  waiting  for  them  on  the  beach,  and  Jup 
came  joyously  to  meet  them,  giving  vent  to  deep  grunts  of 
satisfaction. 

A complete  exploration  of  the  coast  of  the  island  had  now 
been  made,  and  no  suspicious  appearances  had  been  observed. 
If  any  mysterious  being  resided  on  it,  it  could  only  be  under 
cover  of  the  impenetrable  forest  of  the  Serpentine  Peninsula,  to 
which  the  colonists  had  not  yet  directed  their  investigations. 

Gideon  Spilett  discussed  these  things  with  the  engineer, 
and  it  was  agreed  that  they  should  direct  the  attention  of 
their  companions  to  the  strange  character  of  certain  incidents 


THE  ABANDONED. 


which  had  occurred  on  the  island,  and  of  which  the  last  was 
the  most  unaccountable. 

However,  Harding,  returning  to  the  fact  of  a fire  having 
been  kindled  on  the  shore  by  an  unknown  hand,  could  not 
refrain  from  repeating  for  the  twentieth  time  to  the  reporter,— 
“ But  are  you  quite  sure  of  having  seen  it  ? Was  it  not 
partial  eruption  of  the  volcano,  or  perhaps  some  meteor  ? ” 
“No,  Cyrus,”  answered  the  reporter;  “it  was  certainly  a fire 
lighted  by  the  hand  of  man.  Besides,  question  Pencroft  anf 
Herbert.  They  saw  it  as  I saw  it  myself,  and  they  will  con- 
firm my  words.” 

In  consequence,  therefore,  a few  days  after,  on  the  25th  of 
April,  in  the  evening,  when  the  settlers  were  all  collected  on 
Prospect  Heights,  Cyrus  Harding  began  by  saying:— 

“ My  friends,  I think  it  my  duty  to  call  your  attention  to  cer- 
tain incidents  which  have  occurred  in  the  island,  on  the  sub- 
ject of  which  I shall  be  happy  to  have  your  advice.  These 
incidents  are,  so  to  speak,  supernatural — ” 

“ Supernatural ! ” exclaimed  the  sailor,  emitting  a volume  of 
smoke  from  his  mouth.  “ Can  it  be  possible  that  our  island  is 
supernatural  ? ” 

“No,  Pencroft,  but  mysterious,  most  certainly,”  replied  the 
engineer ; “ unless  you  can  explain  that  which  Spilett  and  I 
have  until  now  failed  to  understand.” 

“ Speak  away,  captain,”  answered  the  sailor. 

“Well,  have  you  understood,”  then  said  the  engineer,  “how 
was  it  that  after  falling  into  the  sea,  I was  found  a quarter  of  a 
mile  into  the  interior  of  the  island,  and  that,  without  my 
having  any  consciousness  of  my  removal  there  ? ” 

(i  Unless,  being  unconscious—”  said  Pencroft. 

“ That  is  not  admissible,”  replied  the  engineer.  “ But  to  con- 
tinue. Have  you  understood  how  Top  was  able  to  discover 
your  retreat  five  miles  from  the  cave  in  which  I was  lying  ?” 
“ The  dog’s  instinct—”  observed  Herbert. 

“Singular  instinct ! ” returned  the  reporter;  “ since  notwith- 
standing the  storm  of  rain  and  wind  which  was  raging  during 
that  night,  Top  arrived  at  the  Chimneys,  dry  and  without  a 
speck  of  mud ! ” 


440 


THE  ABANDONED. 


“Let  us  continue,”  resumed  the  engineer.  “Have  you  urn 
derstood  how  our  dog  was  so  strangely  thrown  up  out  ot 
the  waters  of  the  lake,  after  his  struggle  with  the  dugong  ? ” 
“No!  I confess,  not  at  all,”  replied  Pencroft;  “and  the 
wound  which  the  dugong  had  in  its  side,  a wound  which 
seemed  to  have  been  made  with  a sharp  instrument;  that  can’t 
be  understood  either.” 

“ Let  us  continue  again,”  said  Harding.  “Have  you  under- 
stood, my  friends,  how  that  bullet  got  into  the  body  of  the 
young  peccary  ; how  that  case  happened  to  be  so  fortunately 
stranded,  without  there  being  any  trace  of  a wreck ; how  that 
bottle  containing  the  document  presented  itself  so  oppor- 
tunely, during  our  first  sea-excursion  ; how  our  canoe,  having 
broken  its  moorings,  floated  down  the  current  of  the  Mercy 
and  rejoined  us  precisely  at  the  very  moment  we  needed  it ; 
how  after  the  ape  invasion  the  ladder  was  so  obligingly  thrown 
down  from  Granite  House  ; and  lastly,  how  the  document, 
which  Ayrton  asserts  was  never  written  by  him,  fell  into  oui 
hands  ? ” 

As  Cyrus  Harding  thus  enumerated,  without  forgetting  one, 
the  singular  incidents  which  had  occurred  in  the  island,  Her- 
bert, Neb,  and  Pencroft  stared  at  l^Lch  other,  not  knowing 
what  to  reply,  for  this  succession  of  incidents,  grouped  thus 
for  the  first  time;  could  not  but  excite  their  surprise  to  the 
highest  degree. 

“ ’Pon  my  word,”  said  Pencroft  at  last,  “ you  are  right,  cap- 
tain, and  it  is  difficult  to  explain  all  these  things  !” 

“Well,  my  friends,”  resumed  the  engineer,  “a  last  fact  has 
just  been  added  to  these,  and  it  is  no  less  incomprehensible 
than  the  others!” 

“ What  is  it,  captain  ?”  asked  Herbert  quickly. 

“When  you  were  returning  from  Tabor  Island,  Pencroft,” 
continued  the  engineer,  “you  said  that  a fire  appeared  on 
Lincoln  Island  ? ” 

“ Certainly,”  answered  the  sailor. 

“ And  you  are  quite  certain  of  having  seen  this  fire  I ” 

“ As  sure  as  I see  you  now.” 

“You  also,  Herbert  ?” 


THE  ABANDONED. 


441 


“Why,  captain,”  cried  Herbert,  “that  fire  was  blazing  like  a 
star  of  the  first  magnitude  ! ” 

“ But  was  it  not  a star  ?”  urged  the  engineer. 

“No,”  replied  Pencroft,  “for  the  sky  was  c vered  with 
thick  clouds,  and  at  any  rate  a star  would  not  have  been  so  low 
on  the  horizon.  But  Mr.  Spilett  saw  it  as  well  as  we,  and  he 
will  confirm  our  words.” 

“I  will  add,”  said  the  reporter,  “that  the  fire  was  very 
bright  and  that  it  shot  up  like  a sheet  of  lightning.” 

“Yes,  yes!  exactly,”  added  Herbert,  “and  it  was  certainly 
placed  on  the  heights  of  Granite  House.” 

“ Well,  my  friends,”  replied  Cyrus  Harding,  “ during  the 
night  of  the  19th  of  October,  neither  Neb  nor  I lighted  any  fire 
on  the  coast.” 

“ You  did  not !— ” exclaimed  Pencroft,  in  the  height  of  his 
astonishment,  not  being  able  to  finish  his  sentence. 

“We  did  not  leave  Granite  House,”  answered  Cyrus  Hard- 
ing, “and  if  a fire  appeared  on  the  coast,  it  was  lighted  by 
another  hand  than  ours ! ” 

Pencroft,  Herbert  and  Neb  were  stupefied.  No  illusion  could 
be  possible,  and  a fire  had  actually  met  their  eyes  during  the 
night  of  the  19th  of  October. 

Yes ! they  were  obliged  to  acknowledge  it,  a mystery  existed ! 
An  inexplicable  influence,  evidently  favorable  to  the  colonists, 
but  very  irritating  to  their  curiosity,  was  executed  always  in  the 
nick  of  time  on  Lincoln  Island.  Could  there  be  some  being 
hidden  in  its  profoundest  recesses  ? It  was  necessary  at  any 
cost  to  ascertain  this. 

Harding  also  reminded  his  companions  of  the  singular  be- 
havior of  Top  and  Jup  when  they  prowled  round  the  mouth 
of  the  well,  which  placed  Granite  House  in  communication 
with  the  sea,  and  he  told  them  that  he  had  explored  the  well, 
without  discovering  any  thing  suspicious.  The  final  resolve 
taken,  in  consequence  of  this  conversation,  by  all  the  members 
of  the  colony,  \\^s  that  as  soon  as  the  fine  season  returned  they 
would  thoroughly  search  the  whole  of  the  island. 

But  from  that  day,  Pencroft  appeared  to  be  anxious.  He  felt 
as  if  the  island  which  he  had  made  his  own  personal  property, 


442 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


belonged  to  him  entirely  no  longer,  and  that  he  shared  it  with 
another  master,  to  whom,  whether  willing  or  not,  he  relt  sub- 
ject. Neb  and  he  often  talked  of  those  unaccountable  things, 
and  both,  their  natures  inclining  them  to  the  marvelous,  were 
not  far  from  believing  that  Lincoln  Island  was  under  the  do- 
minion of  some  supernatural  power. 

In  the  meanwhile,  the  bad  weather  came  with  the  month  of 
May,  the  November  of  the  Northern  zones.  It  appeared  that 
the  winter  would  be  severe  and  forward.  The  preparations 
for  the  winter  season  were  therefore  commenced  without 
delay. 

Nevertheless  the  colonists  were  well  prepared  to  meet  the 
winter,  however  hard  it  might  be.  They  had  plenty  of  felt 
clothing,  and  the  musmons,  very  numerous  by  this  time,  had 
furnished  an  abundance  of  the  wool  necessary  for  the  manu- 
facture of  this  warm  material. 

It  is  unnecessary  to  say  that  Ayrton  had  been  provided  with 
this  comfortable  clothing.  Cyrus  Harding  proposed  that  he 
should  come  to  spend  the  bad  season  with  them  in  Granite 
House,  where  he  would  be  better  lodged  than  at  the  corral,  and 
Ayrton  promised  to  do  so,  as  soon  as  the  last  work  at  the  corral 
was  finished.  He  did  this  towards  the  middle  of  April. 
From  that  time  Ayrton  shared  the  common  life,  and  made  him- 
self useful  on  all  occasions;  but  still  humble  and  sad,  he 
never  took  part  in  the  pleasures  of  his  companions. 

For  the  greater  part  of  this,  the  third  winter  which  the 
settlers  passed  in  Lincoln  Island,  they  were  confined  to  Granite 
House.  There  were  many  violent  storms  and  frightful  temp- 
ests, which  appeared  to  shake  the  rocks  to  their  very  founda- 
tions. Immense  waves  threatened  to  overwhelm  the  island, 
and  certainly  any  vessel  anchored  near  the  shore  would  have 
been  dashed  to  pieces.  Twice,  during  one  of  these  hurricanes, 
the  Mercy  swelled  to  such  a degree  as  to  give  reason  to  fear 
that  the  bridges  would  be  swept  away,  and  it  was  necessary  to 
strengthen  those  on  the  shore,  which  disappeared  under  the 
foaming  waters,  when  the  sea  beat  against  the  beach. 

It  may  well  be  supposed  that  such  storms,  comparable  to 
water  spouts  in  which  were  mingled  rain  and  snow,  would 


THE  ABANDONED. 


443 


cause  great  havoc  on  the  plateau  of  Prospect  Heights.  The 
mill  and  the  poultry-yard  particularly  suffered.  The  colonists 
were  often  obliged  to  make  immediate  repairs,  without  which 
the  safety  of  the  birds  would  have  been  seriously  threatened 

During  the  worst  weather,  several  jaguars  and  troops  of 
quadrumana  ventured  to  the  edge  of  the  plateau,  and  it  was 
always  to  be  feared  that  the  most  active  and  audacious  would, 
urged  by  hunger,  manage  to  cross  the  stream,  which  besides, 
When  frozen,  offered  them  an  easy  passage.  Plantations  and 
domestic  animals  would  then  have  been  infallibly  destroyed, 
Without  a constant  watch,  and  it  was  often  necessary  to  make 
use  of  the  guns  to  keep  those  dangerous  visitors  at  a respectful 
distance.  Occupation  was  not  wanting  to  the  colonists,  for 
without  reckoning  their  out-door  cares,  they  had  always  a 
thousand  plans  for  the  fitting  up  of  Granite  House. 

They  had  also  some  fine  sporting  excursions,  which  were 
made  during  the  frost  in  the  vast  Tadorn  marsh.  Gideon 
Spilett  and  Herbert,  aided  by  Jup  and  Top,  did  not  miss  a shot 
m the  midst  of  the  myriads  of  wild-duck,  snipe,  teal,  and 
others.  The  access  to  these  hunting-grounds  was  easy ; be- 
sides, whether  they  reached  them  by  the  road  to  Port  Balloon, 
after  having  passed  the  Mercy  Bridge,  or  by  turning  the  rocks 
from  Flotsan  Point,  the  hunters  were  never  distant  from 
Granite  House  more  than  two  or  three  miles. 

Thus  passed  the  four  winter  months,  which  were  really 
rigorous,  that  is  to  say,  June,  July,  August,  and  September. 
But,  in  short,  Granite  House  did  not  suffer  much  from  the 
inclemency  of  the  weather,  and  it  was  the  same  with  the 
corral,  which,  less  exposed  than  the  plateau,  and  sheltered 
partly  by  Mount  Franklin,  only  received  the  remains  of  the  hur- 
ricanes, already  broken  by  the  forests  and  the  high  rocks  of  the 
shore.  The  damages  there  were  consequently  of  small  im- 
portance, and  the  activity  and  skill  of  Ayrton  promptly  repaired 
them,  when  some  time  in  October  he  returned  to  pass  a few 
days  in  the  corral. 

During  this  winter,  no  fresh  inexplicable  incident  occurred. 
Nothing  strange  happened,  although  Pencroft  and  Neb  were 
on  the  watch  for  the  most  insignificant  facts  to  which  they 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


444 

attached  any  mysterious  cause.  Top  and  Jup  themselves  no 
longer  growled  round  the  well  or  gave  any  signs  of  uneasiness. 

It  appeared,  therefore,  as  if  the  series  of  supernatural  inci- 
dents was  interrupted,  although  they  often  talked  of  them 
during  the  evenings  in  Granite  House,  and  they  remained 
thoroughly  resolved  that  the  island  should  be  searched,  even 
in  those  parts  the  most  difficult  to  explore.  But  an  event  of 
the  highest  importance,  and  of  which  the  consequences  might 
be  terrible,  momentarily  diverted  from  their  projects  Cyrus 
Harding  and  his  companions. 

It  was  the  month  of  October.  The  fine  season  was  swiftly 
returning.  Nature  was  reviving;  and  among  the  evergreen 
foliage  of  the  conifers  which  formed  the  border  of  the  wood, 
already  appeared  the  young  leaves  of  the  banksias,  deodars 
and  other  trees. 

It  may  be  remembered  that  Gideon  Spilett  and  Herbert  had, 
at  different  times,  taken  photographic  views  of  Lincoln  Island. 

Now,  on  the  17th  of  this  month  of  October,  towards  three 
o’clock  in  the  afternoon,  Herbert,  enticed  by  the  charms  of  the 
sky,  thought  of  reproducing  Union  Bay,  which  was  opposite 
to  Prospect  Heights,  from  Cape  Mandible  to  Claw  Cape. 

The  horizon  was  beautifully  clear,  and  the  sea,  undulating 
under  a soft  breeze,  was  as  calm  as  the  waters  of  a lake,  spark- 
ling here  and  there  under  the  sun’s  rays. 

The  apparatus  had  been  placed  at  one  of  the  windows  of 
the  dining-room  at  Granite  House,  and  consequently  over 
looked  the  shore  and  the  bay.  Herbert  proceeded  as  he  was 
accustomed  to  do,  and  the  negative  obtained,  he  went  away 
to  fix  it  by  means  of  the  chemicals  deposited  in  a dark  nook 
of  Granite  House. 

Returning  to  the  bright  light,  and  examining  it  well,  Her- 
bert perceived  on  his  negative  an  almost  imperceptible  little 
spot  on  the  sea  horizon.  He  endeavored  to  make  it  disappear 
by  reiterated  washing,  but  could  not  accomplish  it. 

. “It  is  a flaw  in  the  glass,”  he  thought. 

And  then  he  had  the  curiosity  to  examine  this  flaw  with  a 
strong  magnifier  which  he  unscrewed  from  one  of  the  tele- 
scopes. 


THE  ABANDONED. 


445 


Bat  he  had  scarcely  looked  at  it,  when  he  uttered  a cry,  and 
the  glass  fell  from  his  hands. 

Immediately  running  to  the  room  in  which  Cyrus  Harding 
then  was,  he  extended  the  negative  and  magnifier  towards 
the  engineer,  pointing  out  the  little  spot.  Harding  examined 
it ; then  seizing  his  telescope  he  rushed  to  the  window. 

The  telescope,  after  having  slowly  swept  the  horizon,  at 
last  stopped  on  the  looked-for  spot,  and  Cyrus  Harding  lower- 
ing it,  pronounced  one  word  only,— “ A vessel ! ” 

And,  in  fact,  a vessel  was  in  sight,  off  Lincoln  Island ! 


END  OF  “THE  ABANDONED.” 


The  Secret  of  the  Island, 


CHAPTER  I.  • 


LOST  OR  SAVED— AYRTON  SUMMONED— IMPORTANT  DISCUSSION — 
IT  IS  NOT  THE  “ DUNO  'i'T  ” SUSPICIOUS  VESSEL  — PRECAU- 
TIONS TO  BE  TAKEN— THE  SHIP  APPROACHES— A CANNON  SHOT 
—THE  BRIG  ANCHORS  IN  SIGHT  OF  THE  ISLAND  — NIGHT 
COMES  ON. 

It  was  now  two  years  and  a half  since  the  castaways  from 
the  balloon  had  been  thrown  on  Lincoln  Island,  and  during 
that  period  there  had  been  no  communication  between  them 
and  their  fellow-creatures.  Once  the  reporter  had  attempted  to 
communicate  with  the  inhabited  world  by  confiding  to  a bird  a 
letter  which  contained  the  secret  of  their  situation,  but  that 
was  a chance  on  which  it  was  impossible  to  reckon  seriously. 
Ayrton,  alone,  under  the  circumstances  which  have  been  re- 
lated, had  come  to  join  the  little  colony.  Now,  suddenly,  on 
this  day,  the  17th  of  October,  other  men  had  unexpectedly 
appeared  in  sight  of  the  island,  on  that  deserted  sea  ! 

There  could  be  no  doubt  about  it ! A vessel  was  there  ! But 
would  she  pass  on,  or  would  she  put  into  port  ? In  a few 
hours  the  colonists  would  definitely  know  what  to  expect. 

Cyrus  Harding  and  Herbert  having  immediately  called 
Gideon  Spilett,  Pencroft,  and  Neb  into  the  dining-room  of 
Granite  House,  told  them  what  had  happened.  Pencroft, 
seizing  the  telescope,  rapidly  swept  the  horizon,  and  stopping 
on  the  indicated  point,  that  is  to  say,  on  that  which  had 
made  the  almost  imperceptible  spot  on  the  photographic 
negative,— 

“I’m  blessed  but  it  is  really  a vessel ! ” he  exclaimed,  in  a 
voice  which  did  not  express  any  great  amount  of  satisfaction. 

“Is  she  coming  here?”  asked  Gideon  Spilett. 

“Impossible  to  say  any  thing  yet,”  answered  Pencroft,  “for 


450 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


her  rigging  alone  is  above  the  horizon  and  not  a bit  of  her 
hull  can  be  seen.” 

“What  is  to  be  done  ? ” asked  the  lad. 

“ Wait,”  replied  Harding. 

And  for  a considerable  time  the  settlers  remained  silent, 
given  up  to  all  the  thoughts,  all  the  emotions,  all  the  fears,  all 
the  hopes,  which  were  aroused  by  this  incident— the  most  im- 
portant which  had  occurred  since  their  arrival  in  Lincoln 
Island.  Certainly,  the  colonists  were  not  in  the  situation  of 
castaways  abandoned  on  a sterile  islet,  constantly  contending 
against  a cruel  nature  for  their  miserable  existence,  and  inces- 
santly tormented  by  the  longing  to  return  to  inhabited  count- 
ries. Pencroft  and  Neb,  especially,  who  felt  themselves  at 
once  so  happy  and  so  rich,  would  not  have  left  their  island 
without  regret.  They  were  accustomed,  besides,  to  this  new 
life  in  the  midst  of  the  domain  which  their  intelligence  had 
as  it  were  civilized.  But  at  any  rate  this  ship  brought  news 
from  the  world,  perhaps  even  from  their  native  land.  It  was 
bringing  fellow-creatures  to  them,  and  it  may  be  conceived 
how  deeply  their  hearts  were  moved  at  the  sight ! 

From  time  to  time  Pencroft  took  the  glass  and  rested  him- 
self at  the  window.  From  thence  he  very  attentively  examined 
the  vessel,  which  was  at  a distance  of  twenty  miles  to  the 
east.  The  colonists  had  as  yet,  therefore,  no  means  of  signal- 
izing their  presence.  A flag  would  not  have  been  perceived; 
a gun  would  not  have  been  heard;  a fire  would  not  have 
been  visible.  However,  it  was  certain  that  the  island,  over- 
topped by  Mount  Franklin,  could  not  have  escaped  the  notice  of 
the  vessel’s  look-out.  But  why  was  this  ship  coming  there? 
Was  it  simple  chance  which  brought  it  to  that  part  of  the 
Pacific,  where  the  maps  mentioned  no  land  except  Tabor  Islet, 
which  itself  was  out  of  the  route  usually  followed  by  vessels 
from  the  Polynesian  Archipelagos,  from  New  Zealand,  and 
from  the  American  coast  ? To  this  question,  which  each  one 
asked  himself,  a reply  was  suddenly  made  by  Herbert. 

“ Can  it  be  the  ‘ Duncan?’  ” he  cried. 

The  “ Duncan,”  as  has  been  said,  was  Lord  Glenarvan’s 
yacht,  which  had  left  Ayrton  on  the  islet,  and  which  was  to 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND^ 


451 


return  there  some  day  to  fetch  him.  Now,  the  islet  was  not  so 
far  distant  from  Lincoln  Island,  hut  that  a vessel,  standing  for 
the  one,  could  pass  in  sight  of  the  other.  A hundred  and  fifty 
miles  only  separated  them  in  longitude,  and  seventy  in  latitude. 

“We  must  tell  Ayrton,”  said  Gideon  Spilett,  “and  send 
for  him  immediately.  He  alone  can  say  if  it  is  the  4 Duncan.’  ’’ 
This  was  the  opinion  of  all,  and  the  reporter,  going  to  the 
telegraphic  apparatus  which  placed  the  corral  in  communica- 
tion with  Granite  House,  sent  this  telegram  : — “ Come  with 
all  possible  speed.” 

In  a few  minutes  the  bell  sounded. 

44 1 am  coming,”  replied  Ayrton. 

Then  the  settlers  continued  to  watch  the  vessel. 

44  If  it  is  the  4 Duncan,’  ” said  Herbert, 44  Ayrton  will  recognize 
her  without  difficulty,  since  he  sailed  on  board  her  for  some 
time.” 

44  And  if  he  recognizes  her,”  added  Pencroft,  “it  will  agitate 
him  exceedingly  ! ” 

44  Yes,”  answered  Cyrus  Harding;  “but  now  Ayrton  is  worthy 
to  return  on  board  the  ‘Duncan,’  and  pray  Heaven  that  it 
is  indeed  Lord  Glenarvan’s  yacht,  for  I should  be  suspicious  ot 
any  other  vessel.  These  are  ill-famed  seas,  and  I have  always 
feared  a visit  from  Malay  pirates  to  our  island.” 

44  We  could  defend  it,”  cried  Herbert. 

“No  doubt,  my  boy,”  answered  the  engineer  smiling, 44 but 
it  would  be  better  not  to  have  to  defend  it.” 

“A  useless  observation,”  said  Spilett.  “Lincoln  Island  is 
unknown  to  navigators,  since  it  is  not  marked  even  on  the  most 
recent  maps.  Do  you  not  think,  Cyrus,  that  that  is  a sufficient 
motive  for  a ship,  finding  herself  unexpectedly  in  sight  of  new 
land,  to  try  and  visit  rather  than  avoid  it  ?” 

44  Certainly,”  replied  Pencroft. 

44 1 think  so  too,”  added  the  engineer.  44  It  may  even  be  said 
that  it  is  the  duty  of  a captain  to  come  and  survey  any  land  or 
island  not  yet  known,  and  Lincoln  Island  is  in  this  position.” 
“Well,”  said  Pencroft,  “suppose  this  vessel  comes  and 
anchors  there  a few  cables-lengths  from  our  island,  what  shall 
We  do  ?” 


452 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


This  sudden-question  remained  at  first  without  any  reply. 
But  Cyrus  Harding,  after  some  moments,  thought,  replied  in 
the  calm  tone  which  was  usual  to  him, — 

“ What  shall  we  do,  my  friends  ? What  we  ought  to  do,  is 
this  we  will  communicate  with  the  ship,  we  will  take  our 
passage  on  hoard  her,  and  we  will  leave  our  island,  after  hav- 
ing taken  possession  of  it  in  the  name  of  the  United  States. 
Then  we  will  return  with  any  who  may  wish  to  follow  us  to 
colonize  it  definitely,  and  endow  the  American  Republic  with  a 
useful  station  in  this  part  of  the  Pacific  Ocean  ! ” 

“ Hurrah !”  exclaimed  Pencroft,  “ and  that  will  be  no  small 
present  which  we  shall  make  to  our  country  ! The  coloniza- 
tion is  already  almost  finished  ; names  are  given  to  every  part 
of  the  island ; there  is  a natural  port,  fresh  water,  roads,  a 
telegraph,  a dockyard,  and-  manufactories  ; and  there  will  be 
nothing  to  be  done  but  to  inscribe  Lincoln  Island  on  the  maps !” 
“ But  if  any  one  seizes  it  in  our  absence  ? ” observed  Gideon 
Spilett. 

“Hang  it!”  cried  the  sailor.  “I  would  rather  remain  all 
alone  to  guard  it;  and  trust  to  Pencroft,  they  shouldn’t  steal 
it  from  him,  like  a watch  from  the  pocket  of  a swell !” 

For  an  hour  it  was  impossible  to  say  with  any  certainty 
whether  the  vessel  was  or  was  not  standing  towards  Lincoln 
Island.  She  was  nearer,  but  in  what  direction  was  she  sailing? 
This  Pencroft  could  not  determine.  However,  as  the  wind  was 
blowing  from  the  northeast,  in  all  probability  the  vessel  was 
sailing  on  the  starboard  track.  BesideSj  the  wind  was  favor- 
able for  bringing  her  towards  the  island,  and,  the  sea  being 
calm,  she  would  not  be  afraid  to  approach  although  the  shal- 
lows were  not  marked  on  the  chart. 

Towards  four  o’clock— an  hour  after  he  had  been  sent  for— 
Ayrton  arrived  at  Granite  House.  He  entered  the  dining-room, 
saying,— 

“ At  your  service,  gentlemen.” 

Cyrus  Harding  gave  him  his  hand,  as  was  his  custom  to 
do,  and,  leading  him  to  the  window,— 

“ Ayrton,”  said  he,  “ we  have  begged  you  to  come  here 
for  an  important  reason.  A ship  is  in  sight  off  the  island.” 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


453 


Ayrton  at  first  paled  slightly,  and  for  a moment  his  eyes 
became  dim;  then,  leaning  out  of  the  window  he  surveyed 
the  horizon,  but  could  see  nothing. 

“ Take  this  telescope,”  said  Spilett,  “ and  look  carefully,  Ayr- 
ton, for  it  is  possible  that  this  ship  may  be  the  ‘ Duncan  ’ come 
to  these  seas  for  the  purpose  of  taking  you  home  again.” 

“The  ‘Duncan!’”  murmured  Ayrton.  “Already?”  This 
last  word  escaped  Ayrton’s  lips  as  if  involuntarily,  and  his 
head  drooped  upon  his  hands. 

Did  not  twelve  years’  solitude  on  a desert  island  appear  to 
him  a sufficient  expiation  ? Did  not  the  penitent  yet  feel  him- 
self pardoned,  either  in  his  own  eyes  or  in  the  eyes  of  others  ? 

“ No,”  said  he,  “ no  ! it  can  not  he  the  ‘Duncan  ! ’ ” 

“Look,  Ayrton,”  then  said  the  engineer,  “for  it  is  necessary 
that  we  should  know  beforehand  what  to  expect.” 

Ayrton  took  the  glass  and  pointed  it  in  the  direction  in- 
dicated. During  some  minutes  he  examined  the  horizon 
without  moving,  without  uttering  a word.  Then, — 

“ It  is  indeed  a vessel,”  said  he,  “ but  I do  not  think  she  is  the 
‘ Duncan.’  ” 

“ Why  do  you  not  think  so  ? ” asked  Gideon  Spilett. 

“ Because  the  ‘ Duncan  ’ is  a steam  yacht,  and  I can  not  per 
ceive  any  trace  of  smoke  either  above  or  near  that  vessel.” 
“Perhaps  she  is  simply  sailing,”  observed  Pencroft.  “The 
wind  is  favorable  for  the  direction  which  she  appears  to  be 
taking,  and  she  may  be  anxious  to  economize  her  coal,  being 
so  far  from  land.” 

“ It  is  possible  that  you  may  be  right,  Pencroft,”  answered 
Ayrton,  “ and  that  the  vessel  has  extinguished  her  fires.  We 
must  wait  until  she  is  nearer,  and  then  we  shall  soon  know 
what  to  expect.” 

So,  saying,  Ayrton  sat  down  in  a corner  of  the  room  and 
remained  silent.  The  colonists  again  discussed  the  strange 
ship,  but  Ayrton  took  no  part  in  the  conversation.  All  were 
in  such  a mood  that  they  found  it  impossible  to  continue 
their  work.  Gideon  Spilett  and  Pencroft  were  particularly 
nervous,  going,  coming,  not  able  to  remain  still  in  one  place, 
Herbert  felt  more  curiosity.  Neb  alone  maintained  his 


454 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


calm  manner.  Was  not  his  country  that  where  his  master 
was  ? As  to  the  engineer,  he  remained  plunged  in  deep 
thought,  and  in  his  heart  feared  rather  t'  .an  desired  the 
arrival  of  the  ship.  In  the  meanwhile,  the  vessel  was  a little 
nearer  the  island.  VvTth  the  aid  of  the  glass,  it  was  ascertained 
that  she  was  a hrig,  and  not  one  of  those  Malay  proas,  which 
are  generally  used  by  the  pirates  of  the  Pacific.  It  was,  there- 
fore, reasonable  to  believe  that  the  engineer’s  apprehensions 
would  not  be  justified,  and  that  the  presence  of  this  vessel  in 
the  vicinity  of  the  island  was  fraught  with  no  danger.  Pen- 
croft,  after  a minute  examination,  was  able  positively  to  affirm 
that  the  vessel  was  rigged  as  a brig,  and  that  she  was  stand- 
ing obliquely  towards  the  coast,  on  the  starboard  track,  under 
her  topsails  and  top-gallant-sails.  This  was  confirmed  by  Ayr- 
ton. But  by  continuing  in  this  direction  she  must  soon  dis- 
appear behind  Claw  Cape,  as  the  wind  was  from  the  southwest, 
and  to  watch  her  it  would  be  then  necessary  to  ascend  the 
heights  of  Washington  Bay,  near  Port  Balloon— a provoking 
circumstance,  for  it  was  already  five  o’clock  in  the  evening, 
and  the  twilight  would  soon  make  any  observation  extremely 
difficult. 

“ What  shall  we  do  when  night  comes  on  ? ” asked  Gideon 
Spilett.  “ Shall  we  light  a fire,  so  as  to  signal  our  presence,  on 
the  coast  ? ” 

This  was  a serious  question,  and  yet,  although  the  engineer 
still  retained  some  of  his  presentiments,  it  was  answered  in 
the  affirmative.  During  the  night  the  ship  might  disappear 
and  leave  for  ever,  and,  this  ship  gone,  would  another  ever 
return  to  the  waters  of  Lincoln  Island  ? Who  could  foresee 
what  the  future  would  then  have  in  store  for  the  colonists  ? 

“ Yes,”  said  the  reporter,  “ we  ought  to  make  known  to  that 
vessel,  whoever  she  may  be,  that  the  island  is  inhabited.  To 
neglect  the  opportunity  which  is  offered  to  us  might  be  to 
create  everlasting  regrets.” 

It  was,  therefore,  decided  that  Neb  and  Pencroft,  should  go 
to  Port  Balloon,  and  that  there,  at  night-fall,  they  should  light 
an  immense  fire,  the  blaze  of  which  would  necessarily  attract 
the  attention  of  the  brig. 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND, 


455 


• But  at  the  moment  when  Neb  and  the  sailor  were  preparing 
to  leave  Granite  House,  the  vessel  suddenly  altered  her  course, 
and  stood  directly  for  Union  Bay.  The  brig  was  a good  sailer, 
for  she  approached  rapidly.  Neb  and  Pencroft  put  off  their 
departure,  therefore,  and  the  glass  was  put  into  Ayrton’s 
hands,  that  he  might  ascertain  for  certain  whether  the  ship 
was  or  was  not  the  “Duncan.”  The  Scotch  yacht  was  also 
rigged  as  a brig.  The  question  was,  whether  a chimney 
could  be  discerned  between  the  two  masts  of  the  vessel,  which 
was  now  at  a distance  of  only  five  miles. 

The  horizon  was  still  very  clear.  The  examination  was  easy, 
and  Ayrton  soon  let  the  glass  fall  again,  saying, — 

“ It  is  not  the  ‘ Duncan ’ ! It  could  not  be  her ! ” 

Pencroft  again  brought  the  brig  within  range  of  the  tele- 
scope, and  could  see  that  she  was  of  between  three  and  four 
hundred  tons  burden,  wonderfully  narrow,  well-masted,  admir- 
ably built,  and  must  be  a very  rapid  sailer.  But  to  what 
hation  did  she  belong  ? That  was  difficult  to  say. 

“And  yet,”  added  the  sailor,  “a  flag  is  floating  from  her 
peak,  but  I can  not  distinguish  the  colors  of  it.” 

“In  half  an  hour  we  shall  be  certain  about  that,” 
answered  the  reporter.  “Besides,  it  is  very  evident  that  the 
intention  of  the  captain  of  this  ship  is  to  land,  and,  conse- 
quently, if  not  to-day,  to-morrow  at  the  latest,  we  shall  make 
his  acquaintance.” 

“ Never  mind ! ” said  Pencroft.  “ It  is  best  to  know  whom 
we  have  to  deal  with,  and  I shall  not  be  sorry  to  recognize  that 
fellow’s  colors ! ” And,  while  thus  speaking,  the  sailor  never 
left  the  glass.  The  day  began  to  fade,  and  with  the  day  the 
breeze  fell  also.  The  brig’s  ensign  hung  in  folds,  and  it  became 
more  and  more  difficult  to  observe  it. 

“ It  is  not  the  American  flag,”  said  Pencroft  from  time  to 
time,  “ nor  the  English,  the  red  of  which  could  be  easily  seen, 
~ or  the  French  or  German  colors,  nor  the  white  flag  of  Russia, 
nor  the  yellow  of  Spain.  One  would  say  it  was  all  one  color. 
Let’s  see:  in  these  seas,  what  do  we  generally  meet  with  ? The 
Chilian  flag  ?— but  that  is  tri-color.  Brazilian  ? — it  is  groom 
Japanese  ?— it  is  yellow  and  black,  whilst  this—” 


456 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


At  that  moment  the  breeze  blew  out  the  unknown  flag* 
Ayrton,  seizing  the  telescope  which  the  sailor  had  put  down, 
put  it  to  his  eye,  and  in  a hoarse  voice,— 

“ The  black  flag ! ” he  exclaimed. 

And  indeed  the  somber  bunting  was  floating  from  the  mast 
of  the  brig,  and  they  had  now  good  reason  for  considering  her 
to  be  a suspicious  vessel ! 

Had  the  engineer,  then,  been  right  in  his  presentiments  ? 
Was  this  a pirate  vessel  ? Did  she  scour  the  Pacific,  competing 
with  the  Malay  proas  which  still  infest  it  ? For  what  had  she 
come  to  look  at  the  shores  of  Lincoln  Island  ? Was  it  to 
them  an  unknown  island,  ready  to  become  a magazine  for 
stolen  cargoes  ? Had  she  come  to  find  on  the  coast  a sheltered 
port  for  the  winter  months?  Was  the  settlers’  honest  domain 
destined  to  be  transformed  into  an  infamous  refuge  — the 
headquarters  of  the  piracy  of  the  Pacific  ? 

All  these  ideas  instinctively  presented  themselves  to  the  colon- 
ists’ imaginations.  There  was  no  doubt,  besides,  of  the  signifi- 
cation which  must  be  attached  to  the  color  of  the  hoisted  flag. 
It  was  that  of  the  pirates ! It  was  that  which  the  “Duncan” 
would  have  carried,  had  the  convicts  succeeded  in  their  crimi- 
nal design  ! No  time  was  lost  before  discussing  it. 

“ My  friends,”  said  Cyrus  Harding,  “ perhaps  this  vessel  only 
wishes  to  survey  the  coast  of  the  island.  Perhaps  her  crew 
will  not  land.  There  is  a chance  of  it.  However  that  may  be, 
we  ought  to  do  every  thing  we  can  to  hide  our  presence 
here.  The  windmill  on  Prospect  Heights  is  too  easily  seen. 
Let  Ayrton  and  Neb  go  and  take  down  the  sails.  We  must  also 
conceal  the  windows  of  Granite  House  with  thick  branches. 
All  the  fires  must  be  extinguished,  so  that  nothing  may  betray 
the  presence  of  men  on  the  island.” 

“ And  our  vessel  ? ” said  Herbert. 

“ Oh,”  answered  Pencrof t,  “ she  is  sheltered  in  Port  Balloon, 
and  I defy  any  of  those  rascals  there  to  find  her  ! ” 

The  engineer’s  orders  were  immediately  executed.  Neb 
and  Ayrton  ascended  the  plateau,  and  took  the  necessary  pre- 
cautions to  conceal  any  indications  of  a settlement.  Whilst 
they  were  thus  occupied,  their  companions  went  to  the  border 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


457 


of  Jacamar  Wood,  and  brought  back  a large  quantity  of 
branches  and  creepers,  which  would  at  some  distance  appear 
as  natural  foliage,  and  thus  disguise  the  windows  of  granite 
cliff.  At  the  same  time,  the  ammunition  and  guns  were  placed 
ready  so  as  to  be  at  hand  in  case  of  an  unexpected  attack. 

When  all  these  precautions  had  been  taken,— 

“My  friends,”  said  Harding,  and  his  voice  betrayed  some 
emotion,  “ if  these  wretches  endeavor  to  seize  Lincoln  Island, 
we  shall  defend  it— shall  we  not  ? ” 

“Yes,  Cyrus,”  replied  the  reporter,  “ and  if  necessary  we  will 
die  to  defend  it ! ” 

The  engineer  extended  his  hand  to  his  companions,  who 
pressed  it  warmly. 

Ayrton  alone  remained  in  his  corner,  not  joining  the  colonists. 
Perhaps  he,  the  former  convict,  still  felt  himself  unworthy  to 
do  so  ! 

Cyrus  Harding  understood  what  was  passing  in  Ayrton’s 
mind,  and  going  to  him— 

“ And  you,  Ayrton,”  he  asked,  “ what  will  you  do  ? ” 

“ My  duty,”  answered  Ayrton.  He  then  took  up  his  station 
near  the  window  and  gazed  through  the  foliage. 

It  was  now  half-past  seven.  The  sun  had  disappeared 
twenty  minutes  ago  behind  Granite  House.  Consequently 
the  Eastern  horizon  was  becoming  gradually  obscured.  In  the 
meanwhile  the  brig  continued  to  advance  towards  Union  Bay. 
She  was  now  not  more  than  two  miles  off,  and  exactly  opposite 
the  plateau  on  Prospect  Heights,  for  after  having  tacked  off 
Claw  Cape,  she  had  drifted  towards  the  north  in  the  current  of 
the  rising  tide.  One  might  have  said  that  at  this  distance  she 
had  already  entered  the  vast  bay,  for  a straight  line  drawn 
from  Claw  Cape  to  Cape  Mandible  would  have  rested  on  her 
starboard  quarter. 

Was  the  brig  about  to  penetrate  far  into  the  bay  ? That  was 
the  first  question.  When  once  in  the  bay,  would  she  anchor 
there  ? That  was  the  second.  Would  she  not  content  herself 
with  only  surveying  the  coast,  and  stand  out  to  sea  again  with- 
out landing  her  crew  ? They  would  know  this  in  an  hour- 
The  colonists  could  do  nothing  but  wait. 


458 


the  lakeside  edition. 


Cyrus  Harding  had  not  seen  the  suspected  vessel  hoist  the 
black  flag  without  deep  anxiety.  Was  it  not  a direct  menace 
against  the  work  which  he  and  his  companions  had  till  now 
conducted  so  successfully?  Had  these  pirates— for  the  sailors 
of  the  brig  could  be  nothing  else— already  visited  the  island, 
since  on  approaching  it  they  had  fioisted  their  colors.  Had 
they  formerly  invaded  it,  so  that  certain  unaccountable  peculi- 
arities might  be  explained  in  this  way?  Did  there  exist  in  the 
as  yet  unexplored  parts  some  accomplice  ready  to  enter  into 
communication  with  them? 

To  all  these  questions  which  he  mentally  asked  himself,  Hard- 
ing knew  not  what  to  reply;  but  he  felt  that  the  safety  of  the 
colony  could  not  but  be  seriously  threatened  by  the  arrival  of 
the  brig. 

However,  he  and  his  companions  were  determined  to  fight 
to  the  last  gasp.  It  would  have  been  very  important  to  know 
if  the  pirates  were  numerous  and  better  armed  than  the  colon- 
ists. But  how  was  this  information  to  be  obtained  ? 

Night  fell.  The  new  moon  had  disappeared.  Profound 
darkness  enveloped  the  island  and  the  sea.  No  light  could 
pierce  through  the  heavy  piles  of  clouds  on  the  horizoa 
The  wind  had  died  away  completely  with  the  twilight.  Not  3 
leaf  rustled  on  the  trees,  not  a ripple  murmured  on  the  shork. 
Nothing  could  be  seen  of  the  ship,  all  her  lights  being  ex- 
tinguished, and  if  she  was  still  in  sight  of  the  island,  her 
whereabouts  could  not  be  discovered. 

“Well!  who  knows?”  said  Pencroft.  “Perhaps  that  cursed 
craft  will  stand  off  during  the  night,  and  we  shall  see  nothing 
of  her  at  daybreak.” 

As  if  in  reply  to  the  sailor’s  observation,  a bright  light  flashed 
in  the  darkness,  and  a cannon  shot  was  heard. 

The  vessel  was  still  there  and  had  guns  on  board. 

Six  seconds  elapsed  between  the  flash  and  the  report. 

Therefore  the  brig  was  about  a mile  and  a quarter  from  the 
coast. 

At  the  same  time,  the  chains  were  heard  rattling  through  the 
hawse-holes. 

The  vessel  had  just  anchored  in  sight  of  Granite  House ! 


CHAPTER  XX 


DISCUSSIONS— PRESENTIMENTS— AYRTON’S  PROPOSAL— IT  IS  AC- 
CEPTED — AYRTON  AND  PENCROFT  ON  GRANT  ISLET  — 
CONVICTS  FROM  NORFOLK  ISLAND— AYRTON’S  HEROIC  ATTEMPT 
—HIS  RETURN — SIX  AGAINST  FIFTY. 

There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  as  to  the  pirates’  intentions. 
They  had  dropped  anchor  at  a short  distance  from  the 
island,  and  it  was  evident  that  the  next  day  by  means  of 
their  boats  they  purposed  to  land  on  the  beach  ! 

Cyrus  Harding  and  his  companions  were  ready  to  act,  but, 
determined  though  they  were,  they  must  not  forget  to  be 
prudent.  Perhaps  their  presence  might  still  be  concealed  in 
the  event  of  the  pijates  contenting  themselves  with  landing 
on  the  shore  without  examining  the  interior  of  the  island. 
It  might  be,  indeed,  that  their  only  intention  was  to  obtain 
fresh  water  from  the  Mercy,  and  it  was  not  impossible 
that  the  bridge,  thrown  across  a mile  and  a half  from  the 
mouth,  and  the  manufactory  at  the  Chimneys  might  escape 
their  notice. 

But  why  was  that  flag  hoisted  at  the  brig’s  peak?  What  was 
that  shot  fired  for?  Pure  bravado,  doubtless,  unless  it  was  a 
sign  of  the  act  of  taking  possession.  Harding  knew  now  that 
the  vessel  was  well  armed.  And  what  had  the  colonists  of 
Lincoln  Island  to  reply  to  the  pirates’  guns  ? A few  muskets 
only. 

“ However,”  observed  Cyrus  Harding,  “ here  we  are  in  an 
impregnable  position.  The  enemy  can  not  discover  the  mouth 
of  the  outlet,  now  that  it  is  hidden  under  reeds  and  grass, 
and  consequently  it  would  be  impossible  for  them  to  penetrate 
into  Granite  House.” 

“But  our  plantations,  our  poultry-yard,  our  corral,  all,  every 

459 


460 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


thing  ! ” exclaimed  Pencroft,  stamping  his  foot.  “ They  may 
spoil  every  thing,  destroy  every  thing  in  a few  hours  ! ” 

“ Every  thing,  Pencroft,”  answered 'Harding,  “and  we  have 
no  means  of  preventing  them.” 

.“  Are  they  numerous?  that  is  the  question,”  said  the  reporter. 
“ If  they  are  not  more  than  a dozen  we  shall  be  able  to  stop 
them,  but  forty,  fifty,  more  perhaps ! ” 

“ Captain  Harding,”  then  said  Ayrton,  advancing  towards  the 
engineer,  “ will  you  give  me  leave.” 

“ For  what,  my  friend  ? ” 

“ To  go  to  that  vessel  to  find  out  the  strength  of  her  crew.” 
“But  Ayrton—”  answered  the  engineer,  hesitating,  “you 
will  risk  your  life—” 

“Why  not,  sir  ?” 

“ That  is  more  than  your  duty.” 

“I  have  more  than  my  duty  to  do,”  replied  Ayrton. 

“ Will  you  go  to  the  ship  in  a boat  ? ” asked  Gideon  Spilett. 
“No,  sir,  but  I will  swim.  A boat  would  be  seen  where  a 
man  may  glide  between  wind  and  water.” 

“Do  you  know  that  the  brig  is  a mile  and  a quarter  from 
the  shore  ? ” said  Herbert. 

“lama good  swimmer,  Mr.  Herbert.” 

“ I tell  you  it  is  risking  your  life,”  said  the  engineer. 

“ That  is  no  matter,”  answered  Ayrton.  “ Captain  Harding, 
I ask  this  as  a favor.  Perhaps  it  will  be  a means  of  raising 
me  in  my  own  eyes  ! ” 

“Go,  Ayrton,”  replied  the  engineer,  who  felt  sure  that  a 
refusal  would  have  deeply  wounded  the  former  convict,  now 
become  an  honest  man. 

“ I will  accompany  you,”  said  Pencroft. 

“ You  mistrust  me  !”  said  Ayrton,  quickly. 

Then  more  humbly— 

“Alas  !” 

“ No  ! no  !”  exclaimed  Harding,  with  animation,  “ no,  Ayrton, 
Pencroft  does  not  mistrust  you.  You  interpret  his  words 
wrongly.” 

“ Indeed,”  returned  the  sailor,  “ I only  propose  to  accompany 
Ayrton  as  far  as  the  islet.  It  may  be,  although  it  is  scarcely 


THE  SfiUfiXBT  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


possible,  that  one  of  these  villains  has  landed,  and  in  that  ca«o 
two  men  will  not  be  too  many  to  hinder  him  from  giving  to* 
alarm.  I will  wait  for  Ayrton  on  the  islet,  and  he  shall  go 
alone  to  the  vessel,  since  he  has  proposed  to  do  so.”  Tneso 
tilings  agreed  to,  Ayrton  made  preparations  for  his  departure. 
His  plan  was  bold,  but  it  might  succeed,  thanks  to  the  darkness 
of  the  night.  Once  arrived  at  the  vessel’s  side,  Ayrton,  hold- 
ing on  to  the  main  chains,  might  reconnoiter  the  number  and 
perhaps  overhear  the  intentions  of  the  pirates. 

Ayrton  and  Pencroft,  followed  by  their  companions,  de- 
scended to  the  beach.  Ayrton  undressed  and  rubbed  himself 
with  grease,  so  as  to  suffer  less  from  the  temperature  of  the 
water,  which  was  still  cold.  He  might,  indeed,  be  obliged  to 
remain  in  it  for  several  hours. 

Pencroft  and  Neb,  during  this  time,  had  gone  to  fetch  the 
boat,  moored  a few  hundred  feet  higher  up,  on  the  bank  of 
the  Mercy,  and  by  the  time  they  returned  Ayrton  was  ready  to 
start.  A coat  was  thrown  over  his  shoulders,  and  the  settlers 
all  came  round  him  to  press  his  hand. 

Ayrton  then  shoved  off,  with  Pencroft  in  the  boat. 

It  was  half-past  ten  in  the  evening  when  the  two  adventurers 
disappeared  in  the  darkness.  Them  companions  returned  to 
wait  at  the  Chimneys. 

The  channel  was  .easily  traversed,  and  the  boat  touched  the 
opposite  shore  of  the  islet.  This  was  not  done  without  precau- 
tion, for  fear  lest  the  pirates  might  be  roaming  about  there. 
But  after  a careful  survey,  it  was  evident  that  the  islet  was 
deserted.  Ayrton  then,  followed  by  Pencroft,  crossed  it  with  a 
rapid  step,  scaring  the  birds  nestled  in  the  holes  of  the  rocks  ; 
then,  without  hesitating,  he  plunged  into  the  sea,  and  swam 
noiselessly  in  the  direction  of  the  ship,  in  which  a few  lights 
had  recently  appeared,  showing  her  exact  situation.  As  to 
Pencroft,  he  crouched  down  in  a cleft  of  the  rock  and  awaited 
the  return  of  his  companion. 

In  the  meanwhile,  Ayrton,  swimming  with  a vigorous  stroke, 
glided  through  the  sheet  of  water  without  producing  the 
slightest  ripple.  His  head  just  emerged  above  it,  and  his  eyes 
were  fixed  on  the  dark  hull  of  the  brig,  from  which  the  lights 


m 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


Ytv  :e  reflected  in  the  water.  He  thought  only  of  the  duty 
which  he  had  promised  to  accomplish,  and  nothing  of  the 
danger  which  he  ran,  not  only  on  hoard  the  ship,  hut  in  the 
sea,  often  frequented  hy  sharks.  The  current  bore  him  along 
and  he  rapidly  receded  from  the  shore. 

Half  an  hour  afterwards,  Ayrton,  without  having  been  either 
seen  or  heard,  arrived  at  the  ship  and  caught  hold  of  the  main 
chains.  He  took  breath,  then,  hoisting  himself  up,  he  man- 
aged  to  reach  the  extremity  of  the  cutwater.  There  were 
drying  several  pairs  of  sailors’  trousers.  He  put  on  a 'pair. 
Then  settling  himself  firmly,  he  listened.  They  were  not  sleep- 
ing on  board  the  brig.  On  the  contrary,  they  were  talking, 
singing,  laughing.  And  these  were  the  sentences,  accompanied 
with  oaths,  which  principally  struck  Ayrton  : 

“ Our  brig  is  a famous  acquisition.” 

44  She  sails  well,  and  merits  her  name  of  the  4 Speedy.’  ” 

“She  would  show  all  the  navy  of  Norfolk  a clean  pair  of 
heels.” 

“ Hurrah  fcr  her  captain  ! ” 

“ Hurrah  for  Bob  Harvey  ! ” 

What  Ayrton  felt  when  he  overheard  this  fragment  of  con- 
versation may  be  understood  when  it  is  known  that  in  this 
Bob  Harvey  he  recognized  one  of  his  old  Australian  com- 
panions, a daring  sailor,  who  had  continued  his  criminal 
career.  Bob  Harvey  had  seized,  on  the  shores  of  Norfolk 
Island,  this  brig,  which  was  loaded  with  arms,  ammunition, 
utensils,  and  tools  of  all  sorts,  destined  for  one  of  the  Sand- 
wich Islands.  All  his  gang  had  gone  on  board,  and  pirates 
after  having  been  convicts,  these  wretches,  more  ferocious  than 
the  Malays  themselves,  scoured  the  Pacific,  destroying  vessels, 
and  massacring  their  crews. 

The  convicts  spoke  loudly,  they  recounted  their  deeds,  drink- 
ing deeply  at  the  same  time,  and  this  is  what  Ayrton  gathered. 
The  actual  crew  of  the  44  Speedy”  was  composed  solely  of  Eng- 
fish  prisoners,  escaped  from  Norfolk  Island. 

Here  it  may  be  well  to  explain  what  this  island  was.  In  29° 
2'  south  latitude,  and  165°  42'  east  longitude,  to  the  east  of 
Australia,  is  found  a little  island,  six  miles  in  circumference, 


m 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 

overlooked  by  Mount  Pitt,  which  rises  to  a height  of  1,100  feet 
above  the  level  of  the  sea.  This  is  Norfolk  Island,  once  the  seat 
of  an  establishment  in  which  were  lodged  the  most  intractable 
convicts  from  the  English  penitentiaries.  They  numbered  500, 
under  an  iron  discipline,  threatened  with  terrible  punishments, 
and  were  guarded  by  150  soldiers,  and  150  employed  under  the 
orders  of  the  governor.  It  would  be  difficult  to  imagine  a col- 
lection of  greater  ruffians.  Sometimes— although  very  rarely— 
notwithstanding  the  extreme  surveillance  of  which  they  were 
the  object,  many  managed  to  escape,  and  seizing  vessels  which 
they  surprised,  they  infested  the  Polynesian  Archipelagos.* 

Thus  had  Bob  Harvey  and  his  companions  done.  Thus  had 
Ayrton  formerly  wished  to  do.  Bob  Harvey  had  seized  the  brig 
“ Speedy,”  anchored  in  sight  of  Norfolk  Island  ; the  crew  had 
been  massacred ; and  for  a year  this  ship  had  scoured  the 
Pacific,  under  the  command  of  Harvey,  now  a pirate,  and  well 
known  to  Ayrton ! 

The  convicts  were,  for  the  most  part,  assembled  under  the 
poop  ; but  a few,  stretched  on  the  deck,  were  talking  loudly. 

The  conversation  still  continued  amidst  shouts  and  libations. 
Ayrton  learned  that  chance  alone  had  brought  the  “Speedy” 
in  sight  of  Lincoln  Island  : Bob  Harvey  had  never  yet  set  foot 
on  it ; but,  as  Cyrus  Harding  had  conjectured,  finding  this 
unknown  land  in  his  course,  its  position  being  marked  on  no 
chart,  he  had  formed  the  project  of  visiting  it,  and,  if  he  found 
it  suitable,  of  making  it  the  brig’s  headquarters. 

As  to  the  black  flag  hoisted  at  the  “ Speedy’s  ” peak,  and  the 
gun  which  had  been  fired,  in  imitation  of  men- of -war  when 
they  lower  their  colors,  it  was  pure  piratical  bravado.  It  was 
in  no  way  a signal,  and  no  communication  yet  existed  be- 
tween the  convicts  and  Lincoln  Island. 

The  settlers’  domain  was  now  menaced  with  terrible  danger. 
Evidently  the  island,  with  its  water,  its  harbor,  its  resources 
of  all  kinds  so  increased  in  value  by  the  colonists,  and  the 
concealment  afforded  by  Granite  House,  could  not  but  be  con- 
venient for  the  convicts;  in  their  hands  it  would  become  an 

♦Norfolk  Island  Las  long  since  been  abandoned  as  a penal  settle- 
ment. 

80 


m 


THE  LAKESIDE  ^SSTION. 


excallent  place  of  refuge,  and,  being  unknown,  it  would  assure 
them,  for  a long  time  perhaps.  Impunity  and  security. 
Evidently,  also,  the  lives  of  the  settlers’  would  not  be  respected, 
and  Bob  Harvey  and  his  accomplices’  first  care  would  be  to 
massacre  them  without  mercy.  Harding  and  his  companions 
had,  therefore,  not  even  the  choice  of  flying  and  hiding  them- 
selves in  the  island,  since  the  convicts  intended  to  reside  there, 
and  since,  in  the  event  of  the  “ Speedy  ” departing  on  an  ex- 
pedition, it  was  probable  that  some  of  the  crew  would  remain 
on  shore,  so  as  to  settle  themselves  there.  Therefore,  it  would 
be  necessary  to  fight,  to  destroy  every  one  of  these  scoundrels, 
unworthy  of  pity,  and  against  whom  any  means  would  be 
right.  So  thought  Ayrton,  and  he  well  knew  that  Cyrus  Hard- 
ing would  be  of  his  way  of  thinking. 

But  was  resistance  and,  in  the  last  place,  victory  possible  ? 
That  would  depend  on  the  equipment  of  the  brig,  and  the 
number  of  men  which  she  carried. 

This  Ayrton  resolved  to  learn  at  any  cost,  and  as  an  hour  after 
his  arrival  the  vociferations  had  begun  to  die  away,  and  as  a 
large  number  of  the  convicts  were  already  buried  in  a drunken 
sleep,  Ayrton  did  not  hesitate  to  venture  on  to  the  “ Speedy’s  ” 
deck,  which  the  extinguished  lanterns  now  left  in  total  dark- 
ness. He  hoisted  himself  on  to  the  cutwater,  and  by  the  bow- 
sprit arrived  at  the  forecastle.  Then,  gliding  among  the  con- 
victs stretched  here  and  there,  he  made  the  round  of  the  ship, 
and  found  that  the  “ Speedy  ” carried  four  guns,  which  would 
throw  shot  of  from  eight  to  ten  pounds  in  weight.  He  found 
also,  on  touching  them,  that  these  guns  were  breech-loaders. 
They  were,  therefore,  of  modern  make,  easily  used,  and  of 
terrible  effect. 

As  to  the  men  lying  on  the  deck,  they  were  about  ten  in  num- 
ber, but  it  was  to  be  supposed  that  more  were  sleeping  down 
below.  Besides,  by  listening  to  them,  Ayrton  had  understood 
that  there  were  fifty  on  board.  That  was  a large  number  for 
the  six  settlers  of  Lincoln  Island  to  contend  with ! But  now, 
thanks  to  Ayrton’s  devotion,  Cyrus  Harding  would  not  be  sur- 
prised, he  would  know  the  strength  of  his  adversaries,  and 
would  make  his  arrangements  accordingly. 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


461 


There  was  nothing  more  for  Ayrton  to  do  but  to  return, 
and  render  to  his  companions  an  account  of  the  mission  with 
which  he  had  charged  himself,  and  he  prepared  to  regain  the 
bows  of  the  brig,  so  that  he  might  let  himself  down  into 
the  water. 

But  to  this  man,  whose  wish  was,  as  he  had  said,  to  do  more 
than  his  duty,  there  came  an  heroic  thought.  This  was  to 
sacrifice  his  own  life,  but  save  the  island  and  the  colonists. 
Cyrus  Harding  evidently  could  not  resist  fifty  ruffians,  all  well 
armed,  who,  either  by  penetrating  by  main  force  into  Granite 
House,  or  by  starving  out  the  besieged,  could  obtain  from 
them  what  they  wanted.  And  then  he  thought  of  his  preservers 
—those  who  had  made  him  again  a man,  and  an  honest  man, 
those  to  whom  he  owed  all— murdered  without  pity,  their 
works  destroyed,  their  island  turned  into  a pirate’s  den  \ He 
said  to  himself  that  he,  Ayrton,  was  the  principal  cause  of  so 
many  disasters,  since  his  old  companion,  Bob  Harvey,  had 
but  realized  his  own  plans,  and  a feeling  of  horror  took  posses- 
sion of  him.  Then,  he  was  seized  with  an  irresistible  desire  to 
blow  up  the  brig,  and  with  her,  all  whom  she  had  on  board. 
He  would  perish  in  the  explosion,  but  he  would  have  done  his 
duty. 

Ayrton  did  not  hesitate.  To  reach  the  powder-room,  which 
is  always  situated  in  the  after-part  of  a vessel,  was  easy.  There 
would  be  no  want  of  powder  in  a vessel  which  followed  such  a 
trade,  and  a spark  would  be  enough  to  destroy  it  in  an  instant. 

Ayrton  stole  carefully  along  the  between-decks,  strewn  with 
numerous  sleepers,  overcome  more  by  drunkenness  than  sleep. 
A lantern  was  lighted  at  the  foot  of  the  mainmast,  round 
which  was  hung  a gun-rack,  furnished  with  weapons  of  all 
sorts. 

Ayrton  took  a revolver  from  the  rack,  and  assured  himself 
that  it  was  loaded  and  primed.  Nothing  more  was  needed 
to  accomplish  the  work  of  destruction.  He  then  glided  towards 
the  stern,  so  as  to  arrive  under  the  brig’s  poop  at  the  powder- 
magazine. 

It  was  difficult  to  proceed  along  the  dimly-lighted  deck  with- 
out stumbling  over  some  half-sleeping  convict,  who  retorted 


468 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


by  oaths  and  lacks.  Ayrton  was,  therefore,  more  than  once 
obliged  to  halt.  But  at  last  he  arrived  at  the  partition  dividing 
the  after-cabin,  and  found  the  door  opening  into  the  magazine 
itself. 

Ayrton,  compelled  to  force  it  open,  set  to  work.  It  was  a 
difficult  operation  to  perform  without  noise,  for  he  had  to 
break  a padlock.  But  under  his  vigorous  hand,  the  padlock 
broke,  and  the  door  was  open. 

At  that  moment  a hand  was  laid  on  Ayrton’s  shoulder. 

“What  are  you  doing  here?”  asked  a tall  man,  in  a harsh 
voice,  who,  standing  in  the  shadow,  quickly  threw  the  light 
of  a lantern  on  Ayrton’s  face. 

Ayrton  drew  back.  In  the  rapid  flash  of  the  lantern,  he 
had  recognized  his  former  accomplice,  Bob  Harvey,  who  could 
not  have  known  him,  as  he  must  have  thought  Ayrton  long 
since  dead. 

“What  are  you  doing  here  ?”  again  said  Bob  Harvey,  seizing 
Ayrton  by  the  waistband. 

But  Ayrton,  without  replying,  wrenched  himself  from  his 
grasp  and  attempted  to  rush  into  the  magazine.  A shot 
fired  into  the  midst  of  the  powder-casks,  and  all  would  be  over  I 

“ Help,  lads  ! ” shouted  Bob  Harvey. 

At  his  shout  two  or  three  pirates  awoke,  jumped  up,  and, 
rushing  on  Ayrton,  endeavored  to  throw  him  down.  He  soon 
extricated  himself  from  their  grasp.  He  fired  his  revolver, 
and  two  of  the  convicts  fell;  but  a blow  from  a knife  which  he 
could  not  ward  off  made  a gash  in  his  shoulder. 

Ayrton  perceived  that  he  could  no  longer  hope  to  carry  out 
his  project.  Bob  Harvey  had  reclosed  the  door  of  the  powder- 
magazine,  and  a movement  on  the  deck  indicated  a general 
awakening  of  the  pirates.  Ayrton  must  reserve  himself  to 
fight  at  the  side  of  Cyrus  Harding.  There  was  nothing 
for  him  but  flight ! 

But  was  flight  still  possible  ? It  was  doubtful,  yet  Ayrton 
resolved  to  dare  every  thing  in  order  to  rejoin  his  companions. 

Four  barrels  of  the  revolver  were  still  undischarged.  Two 
were  fired— one,  aimed  at  Bob  Harvey,  did  not  wound  him, 
or  at  any  rate  only  slightly;  and  Ayrton,  profiting  by  the  mo 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


471 


mentary  retreat  of  his  adversaries,  rushed  towards  the  com- 
panion-ladder to  gain  the  deck.  Passing  before  the  lantern, 
he  smashed  it  with  a blow  from  the  butt  of  his  revolver.  A 
profound  darkness  ensued,  which  favored  his  flight.  Two 
or  three  pirates,  awakened  by  the  noise,  were  descending  the 
ladder  at  the  same  moment.  A fifth  shot  from  Ayrton  laid  one 
low,  and  the  others  drew  back,  not  understanding  what  was 
going  on.  Ayrton  was  on  deck  in  two  bounds,  and  three 
seconds  later,  having  discharged  his  last  barrel  in  the  face  of  a 
pirate  who  was  about  to  seize  him  by  the  throat,  he  leapt  over 
the  bulwarks  into  the  sea. 

Ayrton  had  not  made  six  strokes  before  shots  were  splashing 
around  him  like  hail. 

What  were  Pencroft’s  feelings,  sheltered  under  a rock  on 
the  islet ! what  were  those  of  Harding,  the  reporter,  Herbert, 
and  Neb,  crouched  in  the  ‘Chimneys,  when  they  heard  the  re- 
ports on  board  the  brig ! They  rushed  out  on  to  the  beach, 
and,  their  guns  shouldered,  they  stood  ready  to  repel  any 
attack. 

They  had  no  doubt  about  it  themselves ! Ayrton,  surprised 
by  the  pirates,  had  been  murdered,  and,  perhaps,  the  wretches 
would  profit  by  the  night  to  make  a descent  on  the  island! 

Half  an  hour  was  passed  in  terrible  anxiety.  The  firing 
had  ceased,  and  yet  neither  Ayrton  nor  Pencraft  had  reap- 
peared. Was  the  islet  invaded?  Ought  they  not  to  fly  to  the 
help  of  Ayrton  and  Pencroft?  But  how?  The  tide  being  high 
at  that  time,  rendered  the  channel  impassable.  The  boat  was 
not  there!  We  may  imagine  the  horrible  anxiety  which  took 
possession  of  Harding  and  his  companions  J 

At  last,  towards  half -past  twelve,  a boat,  carrying  two  men. 
touched  the  beach.  It  was  Ayrton,  slightly  wounded  in  the 
shoulder,  and  Pencroft,  safe  and  sound,  whom  their  friends 
received  with  open  arms. 

All  immediately  took  refuge  in  the  Chimneys.  There  Ayrton 
recounted  all  that  had  passed,  even  to  his  plan  for  blowing  up 
the  brig,  which  he  had  attempted  to  put  into  execution. 

All  hands  wTere  extended  to  Ayrton,  who  did  not  conceal 
from  them  that  their  situation  was  serious.  The  pirates  had 


m 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


been  alarmed.  They  knew  that  Lincoln  Island  was  inhabited, 
They  would  land  upon  it  in  numbers  and  well  armed.  They 
would  respect  nothing.  Should  the  settlers  fall  into  their 
hands,  they  must  expect  no  mercy  ! 

“ Well,  we  shall  know  how  to  die!  ” said  the  reporter. 

“Let  us  go  in  and  watch,”  answered  the  engineer. 

“ Have  we  any  chance  of  escape,  captain  ? ” asked  the  sailo* 
“ Yes,  Pencroft.” 

“ Hum  ! six  against  fifty!  ” 

“Yes!  six ! without  counting—” 

“Who  ?”  asked  Pencroft. 

Cyrus  did  not  reply,  but  pointed  upwards* 


CHAPTER  III 


FHE  MIST  RISES— THE  ENGINEER’S  PREPARATION S — THREE  POSTS 
—AYRTON  AND  PENCROFT  — THE  FIRST  BOAT  — TWO  OTHER 
BOATS— ON  THE  ISLET  — SIX  CONVICTS  LAND  — THE  BRIG 
WEIGHS  ANCHOR— THE  “SPEEDY’S”  GUNS  — A DESPERATE 
SITUATION  — UNEXPECTED  CATASTROPHE. 

The  night  passed  without  incident.  The  colonists  were  on 
the  qui  w,  and  did  not  leave  their  post  at  the  Chimneys. 
The  pirates,  on  their  side,  did  not  appear  to  have  made  any 
attempt  to  land.  Since  the  last  shots  fired  at  Ayrton  not  a 
\eport,  not  even  a sound,  had  betrayed  the  presence  of  the 
trig  in  the  neighborhood  of  the  island.  It  might  have  been 
fancied  that  she  had  weighed  anchor,  thinking  that  she  had  to 
deal  with  her  match,  and  had  left  the  coast. 

But  it  was  no  such  thing,  and  when  day  began  to  dawn  the 
settlers  could  see  a confused  mass  through  the  morning 
mist.  It  was  the  “ Speedy.” 

“These,  my  friends,”  said  the  engineer,  “are  the  arrange- 
ments which  appear  to  me  best  to  make  before  the  fog  com- 
pletely clears  away.  It  hides  us  from  the  eyes  of  the  pirates, 
and  we  can  act  without  attracting  their  attention.  The  most 
important  thing  is,  that  the  convicts  should  believe  that  the 
inhabitants  of  the  island  are  numerous,  and  consequently  cap- 
able of  resisting  them.  I therefore  propose  that  we  divide  into 
three  parties,  the  first  of  which  shall  be  posted  at  the  Chim- 
neys, the  second  at  the  mouth  of  the  Mercy.  As  to  the  third,  I 
think  it  would  be  best  to  place  it  on  the  islet,  so  as  to  prevent, 
or  at  all  events  delay,  any  attempt  at  landing.  We  have  the 
use  of  two  rifles  and  four  muskets.  Each  of  us  will  be  armed, 
and,  as  we  are  amply  provided  with  powder  and  shot,  we  need 
not  spare  our  fire.  We  have  nothing  to  fear  from  the  muskets 

m 


474 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


nor  even  from  the  guns  of  the  brig.  What  can  they  do 
against  these  rocks?  And,  as  we  shall  not  fire  from  the 
windows  of  Granite  House,  the  pirates  will  not  think  of 
causing  irreparable  damage  by  throwing  shell  against  it. 
What  is  to  be  feared  is,  the  necessity  of  meeting  hand-to-hand, 
since  the  convicts  have  numbers  on  their  side.  We  must, 
therefore,  try  to  prevent  them  from  landing,  but  without  dis- 
covering  ourselves.  Therefore,  do  not  economize  the  ammuni- 
tion. Fire  often,  but  with  a sure  aim.  We  have  each  eight 
or  ten  enemies  to  kill,  and  they  must  be  killed ! ” 

Cyrus  Harding  nad  clearly  represented  their  situation, 
although  he  spoke  in  the  calmest  voice,  as  if  it  was  a question 
of  directing  a piece  of  work,  and  not  ordering  a battle.  His 
companions  approved  these  arrangements  without  even  utter- 
ing a word.  There  was  nothing  more  to  be  done  but  for  each 
to  take  his  place  before  the  fog  should  be  completely  dis- 
sipated. Neb  and  Peneroft  immediately  ascended  to  Granite 
House  and  brought  back -a  sufficient  quantity  of  ammunition. 
Gideon  Spilett  and  Ayrton,  both  very  good  marksmen,  were 
armed  with  the  two  rifles,  which  carried  nearly  a mile.  The 
four  other  muskets  were  divided  amongst  Harding,  Neb,  Pen- 
croft  and  Herbert. 

The  posts  were  arranged  in  the  following  manner 

Cyrus  Harding  and  Herbert  remained  in  ambush  at  the 
Chimneys,  thus  commanding  the  shore  to  the  foot  of  Granite 
House. 

Gideon  Spilett  and  Neb  crouched  among  the  rocks  at  the 
mouth  of  the  Mercy,  from  which  the  drawbridges  had  been 
raised,  so  as  to  prevent  any  one  from  crossing  in  a boat  or  land- 
ing on  the  opposite  shore. 

As  to  Ayrton  and  Peneroft,  they  shoved  off  in  the  boat,  and 
prepared  to  cross  the  channel  and  to  take  up  two  separate 
stations  on  the  islet.  In  this  way,  shots  being  fired  from  four 
different  points  at  once,  the  convicts  would  be  led  to  believe 
that  the  island  was  both  largely  peopled  and  strongly  de- 
fended. 

In  the  event  of  a landing  being  effected  without  their  having 
been  able  to  prevent  it,  and  also  if  they  saw  that  they  were  on 


THE  SECRET  OF  rl^E  ISLAND. 


475 


the  point  of  being  cut  off  by  the  brig’s  boat,  Ayrton  and  Pen- 
croft  were  to  return  in  their  boat  to  the  shore  and  proceed 
towards  the  threatened  spot. 

Before  starting  to  occupy  their  posts,  the  colonists  for  the  last 
time  wrung  each  other’s  hands. 

Pen  croft  succeeded  in  controlling  himself  sufficiently  to 
suppress  his  emotion  when  he  embraced  Herbert,  his  boy  I 
and  then  they  separated. 

In  a few  moments  Harding  and  Herbert  on  one  side,  the 
reporter  and  Neb  on  the  other,  had  disappeared  behind  the 
rocks,  and  five  minutes  later  Ayrton  and  Pencroft,  having 
without  difficulty  crossed  the  channel,  disembarked  on  the  islet 
and  concealed  themselves  in  the  clefts  of  its  eastern  shore. 

None  of  them  could  have  been  seen,  for  they  themselves 
could  scarcely  distinguish  the  brig  in  the  fog. 

It  was  half-past  six  in  the  morning. 

Soon  the  fog  began  to  clear  away,  and  the  top-masts  of  the 
brig  issued  from  the  vapor.  For  some  minutes  great  masses 
rolled  over  the  surface  of  the  sea,  then  a breeze  sprang  up, 
which  rapidly  dispelled  the  mist. 

The  “ Speedy  ” now  appeared  in  full  view,  with  a spring  on 
her  cable,  her  head  to  the  north,  presenting  her  larboard  side 
to  the  island.  Just  as  Harding  had  calculated,  she  was  not 
more  than  a mile  and  a quarter  from  the  coast. 

The  sinister  black  dag  floated  from  the  peak. 

The  engineer,  with  his  telescope,  could  see  that  the  four  guns 
on  board  were  pointed  at  the  island.  They  were  evidently 
ready  to  fire  at  a moment’s  notice. 

In  the  meanwhile  the  “Speedy”  remained  silent.  About 
thirty  pirates  could  be  seen  moving  on  the  deck.  A few  were 
on  the  poop ; two  others  posted  in  the  shrouds,  and  armed 
with  spy-glasses,  were  attentively  surveying  the  island. 

Certainly,  Bob  Harvey  and  his  crew  would  not  be  able  easily 
to  give  an  account  of  what  had  happened  during  the  night  on 
board  the  brig.  Had  this  half-naked  man,  who  had  forced  the 
door  of  the  powder-magazine,  and  with  whom  they  had 
struggled,  who  had  six  times  discharged  his  revolver  at  them, 
who  had  killed  one  and  wounded  two  others,  escaped  their 


476 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


shot  ? Had  he  been  able  to  swim  to  shore  ? Whence  did 
he  come  ? What  had  been  his  object  ? Had  his  design  really 
been  to  blow  up  the  brig,  as  Bob  Harvey  had  thought?  All 
this  must  be  confused  enough  to  the  convicts’  minds.  But 
what  they  could  no  longer  doubt  was  that  the  unknown  island 
before  which  the  “ Speedy”  had  cast  anchor  was  inhabited,  and 
that  there  was,  perhaps,  a numerous  colony  ready  to  defend  it. 
And  yet  no  one  was  to  be  seen,  neither  on  the  shore,  nor  on 
the  heights.  The  beach  appeared  to  be  absolutely  deserted. 
At  any  rate,  there  was  no  trace  of  dwellings.  Had  the  inhab- 
itants fled  into  the  interior  ? Thus  probably  the  pirate  captain 
reasoned,  and  doubtless,  like  a prudent  man,  he  wished  to  recon- 
noitre the  locality  before  he  allowed  his  men  to  venture  there. 

During  an  hour  and  a half  no  indication  of  attack  or  land- 
ing could  be  observed  on  board  the  brig.  Evidently  Bob 
Harvey  was  hesitating.  Even  with  his  strongest  telescopes  he 
could  not  have  perceived  one  of  the  settlers  crouched  among 
the  rocks.  It  was  not  even  probable  that  his  attention  had 
been  awakened  by  the  screen  of  green  branches  and  creepers 
hiding  the  windows  of  Granite  House,  and  showing  rather 
conspicuously  on  the  bare  rock.  Indeed,  how  could  he  imagine 
that  a dwelling  was  hollowed  out,  at  that  height,  in  the  solid 
granite.  From  Claw  Cape  to  the  Mandible  Capes,  in  all  the 
extent  of  Union  Bay,  there  was  nothing  to  lead  him  to  suppose 
that  the  island  was  or  could  be  inhabited. 

At  eight  o’clock,  however,  the  colonists  observed  a movement 
on  board  the  “ Speedy.”  A boat  was  lowered,  and  seven  men 
jumped  into  her.  They  were  armed  with  muskets  : one  took 
the  yoke-lines,  four  others  the  oars,  and  the  two  others,  kneel- 
ing in  the  bows,  ready  to  fire,  reconnoitered  the  island.  Their 
object  was  no  doubt  to  make  an  examination  but  not  to  land, 
for  in  the  latter  case  they  would  have  come  in  larger  num- 
bers. The  pirates  from  their  look-out  could  have  seen  that 
the  coast  was  sheltered  by  an  islet,  separated  from  it  by  a chan~ 
nel  half  a mile  in  width.  However,  it  was  soon  evident  to 
Cyrus  Harding,  on  observing  the  direction  followed  by  the  boat, 
that  they  would  not  attempt  to  penetrate  into  the, channel, 
but  would  iand  on  the  islet. 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


477 


Fencroft  and  Ayrton,  each  hidden  in  a narrow  cleft  of  the 
rock,  saw  them  coming  directly  towards  them,  and  waited 
till  they  were  within  range. 

The  boat  advanced  with  extreme  caution.  The  oars  only 
dipped  into  the  water  at  long  intervals.  It  could  now  be  seen 
that  one  of  the  convicts  held  a lead-line  in  his  hand,  and  that 
he  wished  to  fathom  the  depth  of  the  channel  hollowed  out  by 
the  current  of  the  Mercy.  This  showed  that  it  was  Bob 
Harvey’s  intention  to  bring  his  brig  as  near  as  possible  to  the 
coast.  About  thirty  pirates,  scattered  in  the  rigging,  followed 
every  movement  of  the  boat,  and  took  the  bearings  of  certain 
landmarks  which  would  allow  them  to  approach  without 
danger.  The  boat  was  not  more  than  two  cables-lengths  off 
the  islet  when  she  stopped.  The  man  at  the  tiller  stood  up 
and  looked  for  the  best  place  at  which  to  land. 

At  that  moment  two  shots  were  heard.  Smoke  curled  up 
from  among  the  rocks  of  the  islet.  The  man  at  the  helm  and 
the  man  with  the  lead-line  fell  backwards  into  the  boat.  Ayr- 
ton’s and  Pencroft’s  balls  had  struck  them  both  at  the  same 
moment. 

Almost  immediately  a louder  report  was  heard,  a cloud  of 
smoke  issued  from  the  brig’s  side,  and  a ball,  striking  the 
summit  of  the  rock  which  sheltered  Ayrton  and  Pen  croft,  made 
it  fly  in  splinters,  but  the  two  marksmen  remained  unhurt. 

Horrible  imprecations  burst  from  the  boat,  which  im- 
mediately continued  its  way.  The  man  who  had  been  at  the 
tiller  was  replaced  by  one  of  his  comrades,  and  the  oars  were 
rapidly  plunged  into  the  water.  However,  instead  of  return- 
ing on  board  as  might  have  been  expected,  the  boat  coasted 
along  the  islet,  so  as  to  round  its  southern  point.  The  pirates 
pulled  vigorously  at  their  oars  that  they  might  get  out  of  range 
of  the  bullets. 

They  advanced  to  within  five  cables-lengths  of  that  part  of 
the  shore  terminated  by  Flotsam  Point,  and  after  having 
rounded  it  in  a semi-circular  line,  still  protected  by  the 
brig’s  guns,  they  proceeded  towards  the  mouth  of  the  Mercy. 

Their  evident  intention  was  to  penetrate  into  the  channel, 
and  cut  off  the  colonists  posted  on  the  islet,  in  such  a way 


478 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


that  whatever  their  number  might  be,  being  placed  between 
the  fire  from  the  boat  and  the  fire  from  the  brig,  they  would 
find  themselves  in  a very  disadvantageous  position. 

A quarter  of  an  hour  passed  whilst  the  boat  advanced  in  this 
direction.  Absolute  silence,  perfect  calm  reigned  in  the  air 
and  on  the  water. 

Pencroft  and  Ayrton,  although  they  knew  they  ran  the  risk 
of  being  cut  off,  had  not  left  their  post,  both  that  they  did 
not  wish  to  show  themselves  as  yet  to  their  assailants,  and 
expose  themselves  to  the  “ Speedy’s  ” guns,  and  that  they  relied 
on  Neb  and  Gideon  Spilett,  watching  at  the  mouth  of  the  river, 
and  on  Cyrus  Harding  and  Herbert  in  ambush  among  the 
rock3  at  the  Chimneys. 

Twenty  minutes  after  the  first  shots  were  fired,  the  boat  was 
less  than  two  cables-lengths  off  the  Mercy.  As  the  tide  was 
beginning  to  rise  with  its  accustomed  violence,  caused  by  the 
narrowness  of  the  straits,  the  pirates  were  drawn  towards  the 
river,  and  it  was  only  by  dint  of  hard  rowing  that  they  were 
able  to  keep  in  the  middle  of  the  channel.  But,  as  they  were 
passing  within  good  range  of  the  mouth  of  the  Mercy,  two  balls 
saluted  them,  and  two  more  of  their  number  were  laid  in  the 
bottom  of  the  boat.  Neb  and  Spilett  had  not  missed  their  aim. 

The  brig  immediately  sent  a second  ball  on  the  post  betrayed 
by  the  smoke,  but  without  any  other  result  than  that  of 
splintering  the  rock. 

The  boat  now  contained  only  three  able  men.  Carried  on  by 
the  current,  it  shot  through  the  channel  with  the  rapidity  of 
an  arrow,  passed  before  Harding  and  Herbert,  who,  not  think- 
ing it  within  range,  withheld  their  fire,  then,  rounding  the 
northern  point  of  the  islet  with  the  two  remaining  oars,  they 
pulled  towards  the  brig. 

Hitherto  the  settlers  had  nothing  to  complain  of.  Their  ad- 
versaries had  certainly  had  the  worst  of  it.  The  latter  already 
counted  four  men  seriously  wounded  if  not  dead;  they,  on 
the  contrary,  unwounded,  had  not  missed  a shot.  If  the  pirates 
continued  to  attack  them  in  this  way,  if  they  renewed  their 
attempt  to  land  by  means  of  a boat,  they  could  be  destroyed 
one  by  one, 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


m 


It  was  now  seen  how  advantageous  the  engineer’s  arrange- 
ments had  been.  The  pirates  would  think  that  they  had  to 
deal  with  numerous  and  well  armed  adversaries,  whom  they 
could  not  easily  get  the  better  of. 

Half  an  hour  passed  before  the  boat,  having  to  pull  against 
the  current,  could  get  alongside  the  “ Speedy.”  Frightful  cries 
were  heard  when  they  returned  ’on  board  with  the  wounded, 
and  two  or  three  guns  were  fired  with  no  result. 

But  now  about  a dozen  other  convicts,  maddened  with  rage, 
and  possibly  by  the  effects  of  the  evening’s  potations,  threw 
themselves  into  the  boat.  A second  boat  was  also  lowered, 
in  which  eight  men  took  their  places,  and  whilst  the  first 
pulled  straight  for  the  islet,  to  dislodge  the  colonists  from 
thence,  the  second  manceuvered  so  as  to  force  the  entrance  of 
the  Mercy. 

The  situation  was  evidently  becoming  very  dangerous  for 
Pencroft  and  Ayrton,  and  they  saw  that  they  must  regain  the 
mainland. 

However,  they  waited  till  the  first  boat  was  within  range, 
when  two  well-directed  balls  threw  its  crew  into  disorder. 
Then,  Pencroft  and  Ayrton,  abandoning  their  posts,  under  fire 
from  the  dozen  muskets,  ran  across  the  islet  at  full  speed, 
jumped  into  their  boat,  crossed  the  channel  at  the  moment  the 
other  boat  reached  the  southern  end,  and  ran  to  hide  them- 
selves in  the  Chimneys. 

They  had  scarcely  rejoined  Cyrus  Hardings  and  Herbert, 
before  the  islet  was  overrun  with  pirates  in  every  direction. 
Almost  at  the  same  moment,  fresh  reports  resounded  from 
the  Mercy  station,  to  which  the  second  boat  was  rapidly  ap- 
proaching. Two,  out  of  the  eight  men  who  manned  her,  were 
mortally  wounded  by  Gideon  Spilett  and  Neb,  and  the  boat  her- 
self carried  irresistibly  on  to  the  reefs,  was  stove  in  at  the 
mouth  of  the  Mercy.  But  the  six  survivors,  holding  their 
muskets  above  their  heads  to  preserve  them  from  contact 
with  the  water,  managed  to  land  on  the  right  bank  of  the 
river.  Then,  finding  they  were  exposed  to  the  fire  of  the  am- 
bush there,  they  fled  in  the  direction  of  F]otsam  Point,  out  of 
range  of  the  balls. 


480 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION, 


The  actual  situation  was  this  : on  the  islet  were  a dozen  con- 
victs, of  whom  some  were  no  doubt  wounded,  but  who  had 
still  a boat  at  their  disposal;  on  the  island  were  six,  but  who 
could  not  by  any  possibility  reach  Granite  House,  as  they  could 
not  cross  the  river,  all  the  bridges  being  raised. 

“ Hallo,”  exclaimed  Pencroft  as  he  rushed  into  the  Chimneys, 
“ hallo,  captain  ! What  do  you  think  of  it  n$jv  ? ” 

“I  think,”  answered  the  engineer,  “that  the  combat  will 
now  take  a new  form,  for  it  can  not  be  supposed  that  the 
convicts  will  be  so  foolish  as  to  remain  in  a position  so  unfavor- 
able for  them ! ” 

“They  won’t  cross  the  channel,”  said  the  sailor.  “Ayrton 
and  Mr.  Spilett’s  rifles  are  there  to  prevent  them.  You  know 
that  they  carry  more  than  a mile ! ” 

“No  doubt,”  replied  Herbert;  “but  what  can  two  rifles 
do  against  the  brig’s  guns  ? ” 

“ Well,  the  brig  isn’t  in  the  channel  yet,  I fancy ! ” said  Pen- 
roft. 

“But  suppose  she  does  come  there?”  said  Harding. 

“That’s  impossible,  for  she  would  risk  running  aground 
and  being  lost ! ” 

“It  is  possible,”  said  Ayrton.  “The  convicts  might  profit 
by  the  high  tide  to  enter  the  channel,  with  the  risk  of  ground- 
ing at  low  tide,  it  is  true;  but  then,  under  the  fire  from  her 
guns,  our  posts  would  be  no  longer  tenable.” 

“ Confound  them  ! ” exclaimed  Pencroft.  “ It  really  seems 
as  if  the  blackguards  were  preparing  to  weigh  anchor.” 

“Perhaps  we  shall  be  obliged  to  take  refuge  in  Granito 
House  ! ” observed  Herbert. 

“We  must  wait ! ” answered  Cyrus  Harding. 

“ But  Mr.  Spilett  and  Neb  ? ” said  Pencroft. 

“They  will  know  when  it  is  best  to  rejoin  us.  Be  ready, 
Ayrton.  It  is  yours  and  Spilett’s  rifles  which  must  speak  now.” 

It  was  only  too  true.  The  “ Speedy  ” was  beginning  to  weigh 
her  anchor,  and  her  intention  was  evidently  to  approach  the 
islet.  The  tide  would  be  rising  for  an  hour  and  a half,  and  the 
ebb  current  being  already  weakened,  it  would  be  easy  for  the 
brig  to  advance.  But  as  to  entering  the  channel,  Pencroft, 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


481 


contrary  to  Ayrton’s  opinion,  could  not  believe  that  she  would 
dare  to  attempt  it. 

In  the  meanwhile  the  pirates  who  occupied  the  islet  had 
gradually  advanced  to  the  opposite  shore,  and  were  now  only 
separated  from  the  mainland  by  the  channel. 

Being  armed  with  muskets  alone  they  could  do  no  harm  to 
the  settlers  in  ambush  at  the  Chimneys  and  the  mouth  of  the 
Mercy;  but,  not  knowing  the  latter  to  be  supplied  with  long 
range  rifles,  they,  on  their  side,  did  not  believe  themselves  to  be 
exposed.  Quite  uncovered,  therefore,  they  surveyed  the  islet, 
and  examined  the  shore. 

Their  illusion  .was  of  short  duration.  Ayrton’s  and  Gideon 
Spilett’s  rifles  then  spoke,  and  no  doubt  imparted  some  very 
disagreeable  intelligence  to  two  of  the  convicts,  for  they  fell 
backwards.  Then  there  was  a general  helter-skelter.  The  fen 
others,  not  even  stopping  to  pick  up  their  dead  or  wounded 
companions,  fled  to  the  other  side  of  the  islet,  tumbled  into 
the  boat  which  had  brought  them,  and  pulled  away  with  all 
their  strength. 

“Eight  less!”  exclaimed  Pencroft.  “Really,  one  would 
have  thought  that  Mr.  Spilett  and  Ayrton  had  given  the  word 
to  fire  together ! ” 

“ Gentlemen,”  said  Ayrton,  as  he  reloaded  his  gun,  “ this  is 
becoming  more  serious.  The  brig  is  making  sail ! ” 

“The  anchor  is  weighed  ! ” exclaimed  Pencroft. 

“ Yes;  and  she  is  already  moving.” 

In  fact,  they  could  distinctly  hear  the  creaking  of  the  wind- 
lass. The  “Speedy”  was  at  first  held  by  her  anchor;  then, 
when  that  had  been  raised,  she  began  to  drift  towards  the 
shore.  The  wind  was  blowing  from  the  sea;  the  jib  and  the 
foretopsail  were  hoisted,  and  the  vessel  gradually  approached 
the  island. 

From  the  two  posts  of  the  Mercy  and  the  Chimneys  they 
watched  her  without  giving  a sign  of  life;  but  not  without 
some  emotion.  What  could  be  more  terrible  for  the  colonists 
than  to  be  exposed  at  a short  distance  to  the  brig’s  guns, 
without  being  able  to  reply  with  any  effect  ? How  could 
they  then  prevent  the  pirates  from  landing  ? 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


482 

Cyrus  Harding  felt  this  strongly,  and  he  asked  himself  wha* 
it  would  be  possible  to  do.  Before  long  he  would  be  called 
upon  for  his  determination.  But  what  was  it  to  be?  To  shut 
themselves  up  in  Granite  House,  to  be  besieged  there,  to  re- 
main there  for  weeks,  for  months  even,  since  they  had  an 
abundance  of  provisions  ? So  far  good  ! But  after  that  ? The 
pirates  would  not  the  less  be  masters  of  the  island,  which  they 
would  ravage  at  their  pleasure,  and  in  time,  they  would  end 
by  having  their  revenge  on  the  prisoners  in  Granite  House. 

However,  one  chance  yet  remained;  it  was  that  Bob  Harvey, 
after  all,  would  not  venture  his  ship  into  the  channel,  and  that 
he  would  keep  outside  the  islet.  He  would  be  still  separated 
from  the  coast  by  half  a mile,  and  at  that  distance  his  shot 
could  not  be  very  destructive. 

“ Never  ! ” repeated  Pencroft,  “ Bob  Harvey  will  never,  if  he 
be  a good  seaman,  enter  that  channel ! He  knows  well  that  it 
would  risk  the  brig,  if  the  sea  got  up  ever  so  little ! And  what 
would  become  of  him  without  his  vessel  ? ” 

In  the  meanwhile  the  brig  approached  the  islet,  and  it  could 
be  seen  that  she  was  endeavoring  to  make  the  lower  end. 
The  breeze  was  light,  and  as  the  current  had  then  lost  muck 
of  its  force,  Bob  Harvey  had  absolute  command  over  his  vessel. 

The  route  previously  followed  by  the  boats  had  allowed  her 
to  reconnoitre  the  channel,  and  she  boldly  entered  it. 

The  pirate’s  design  was  now  only  too  evident : he  wished  to 
bring  her  broadside  to  bear  on  the  Chimneys  and  from  there 
to  reply  with  shell  and  ball  to  the  shot  which  had  till  then 
decimated  her  crew. 

Soon  the  “Speedy”  reached  the  point  of  the  islet;  she 
rounded  it  with  ease,  the  mainsail  was  braced  up,  and  the 
brig,  hugging  the  wind,  stood  across  the  mouth  of  the  Mercy. 

“ The  scoundrels ! they  are  coming ! ” said  Pencroft 

At  that  moment,  Cyrus  Harding,  Ayrton,  the  sailor,  and 
Herbert,  were  rejoined  by  Neb  and  Gideon  Spilett. 

The  reporter  and  his  companion  had  judged  it  best  to  aban- 
don the  post  at  the  Mercy,  from  which  they  could  do  nothing 
against  the  ship,  and  they  had  acted  wisely.  It  was  better  that 
the  colonists  should  be  together  at  the  moment  when  they  were 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


48* 

about  to  engage  in  a decisive  action.  Gideon  Spilett  and  Neb 
had  arrived  by  dodging  behind  the  rocks,  though  not  without 
attracting  a shower  of  bullets,  which  had  not,  however,  reached 
them. 

“ Spilett ! Neb ! ” cried  the  engineer,  “You  are  not  wounded?” 

“No,”  answered  the  reporter;  “a  few  bruises  only  from 
the  ricochet ! But  that  cursed  brig  has  entered  the  channel ! ” 

*'  Yes,”  replied  Pencroft,  “ and  in  ten  minutes  she  will  have 
anchored  before  Granite  House ! ” 

“ Have  you  formed  any  plan,  Cyrus  ?”  asked  the  reporter. 

“ We  must  take  refuge  in  Granite  House  whilst  there  is  still 
time,  and  the  convicts  can  not  see  us.”  “ That  is  my  opinion, 
too,”  replied  Gideon  Spilett;  “but  once  shut  up—” 

“ We  must  be  guided  by  circumstances,”  said  the  engineer. 

“Let  us  be  off,  then,  and  make  haste !”  said  the  reporter. 

“Would  you  not  wish,  captain,  that  Ayrton  and  I should 
remain  here?  ” asked  the  sailor. 

“What  would  be  the  use  of  that,  Pencroft?”  replied  Harding. 
"No.  We  will  not  separate ! ” 

There  was  not  a moment  to  be  lost.  The  colonists  left  the 
Chimneys.  A bend  of  the  cliff  prevented  them  from  being 
seen  by  those  in  the  brig;  but  two  or  three  reports,  and  the 
crash  of  bullets  on  the  rock,  tqjd  them  that  the  “ Speedy  ” was 
at  no  great  distance. 

To  spring  into  the  lift,  hoist  themselves  up  to  the  door  of 
Granite  House,  where  Top  and  Jup  had  been  shut  up  since  the 
evening  before,  to  rush  into  the  large  room,  was  the  work  of  a 
minute  only. 

It  was  quite  time,  for  the  settlers,  through  the  branches, 
could  see  the  “ Speedy,”  surrounded  with  smoke,  gliding  up  the 
channel.  The  firing  was  incessant,  and  shots  from  the  four 
guns  struck  blindly,  both  on  Mercy  post,  although  it  was  not 
occupied,  and  on  the  Chimneys.  The  rocks  were  splintered,  and 
cheers  accompanied  each  discharge.  However,  they  were 
hoping  that  Granite  House  would  be  spared,  thanks  to  Hard- 
ing’s precaution  of  concealing  the  windows,  when  a shot, 
piercing  the  door,  penetrated  into  the  passage. 

^ We  are  discovered  l ” exclaimed  Pencroft. 


m 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


The  colonists  had  not,  perhaps,  been  seen;  but  it  was  certain 
that  Bob  Harvey  had  thought  proper  to  send  a ball  through  the 
suspected  foliage  which  concealed  that  part  of  the  cliff.  Soon 
he  redoubled  his  attack,  when  another  ball  having  torn  away 
the  leafy  screen,  disclosed  a gaping  aperture  in  the  granite. 

The  colonists’  situation  was  desperate.  Their  retreat  was 
discovered.  They  could  not  oppose  any  obstacle  to  these 
missiles,  nor  protect  the  stone,  which  flew  in  splinters  around 
them.  There  was  nothing  to  be  done  but  to  take  refuge  in  the 
upper  passage  of  Granite  House,  and  leave  their  dwelling  to 
be  devastated,  when  a deep  roar  was  heard,  followed  by  fright- 
ful cries ! 

Cyrus  Harding  and  his  companions  rushed  to  one  of  the 
windows— 

The  brig,  irresistibly  raised  on  a sort  of  waterspout  ha* 
just  split  in  two,  and  in  less  than  ten  seconds  she  war  av**’ 
lowed  up  with  all  her  criminal  crew  I 


CHAPTER  IV. 


THE  COLONISTS  ON  THE  BEACH  — AYRTON  AND  PENCROFT  WORK 
AMID  THE  WRECK— CONVERSATION  DURING  BREAKFAST  — 
PENCROFT’S  ARGUMENTS  — MINUTE  EXAMINATION  OF  THE 
BRIG’S  HULL  — THE  POWDER-MAGAZINE  UNTOUCHED  — NEW 
RICHES— THE  LAST  OF  THE  WRECK  — A BROKEN  PIECE  OF 
CYLINDER. 

“ She  has  blown  up  ! ” cried  Herbert. 

“Yes ! blown  up,  just  as  if  Ayrton  had  set  fire  to  the 
powder ! ” returned  Pencroft,  throwing  himself  into  the  lift 
together  with  Neb  and  the  lad. 

“But  what  has  happened?”  asked  Gideon  Spilett,  quite 
Btunned  by  this  unexpected  catastrophe. 

“ Oh ! this  time,  we  shall  know—”  answered  the  engineer 
quickly. 

“ What  shall  we  know  ? — ” 

“ Later ! later  ! Come  Spilett.  The  main  point  is  that  these 
pirates  have  been  exterminated.” 

And  Cyrus  Harding,  hurrying  away  the  reporter  and  Ayrton, 
joined  Pencroft,  Neb,  and  Herbert  on  the  beach. 

Nothing  could  be  seen  of  the  brig,  not  even  her  masts.  After 
having  been  raised  by  the  waterspout,  she  had  fallen  on  her 
side,  and  had  sunk  in  that  position,  doubtless  in  consequence 
of  some  enormous  leak.  But  as  in  that  place  the  channel  was 
not  more  than  twenty  feet  in  depth,  it  was  certain  that  the 
sides  of  the  submerged  brig  would  reappear  at  low  water. 

A few  things  from  the  wreck  floated  on  the  surface  of 
tiie  water.  A raft  could  be  seen  consisting  of  spare  spars, 
coops  of  poultry  with  their  occupants  still  living,  boxes  and 
barrels,  whicn  gradually  came  to  the  surface,  after  having  es- 
caped through  the  hatchways,  but  no  pieces  of  the  wreck 

487 


488 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


appeared,  neither  planks  from  the  deck,  nor  timber  from  the 
hull,  — which  rendered  the  sudden  disappearance  of  the 
“ Speedy  ” perfectly  inexplicable. 

However,  the  two  masts,  which  had  been  broken  and  escaped 
from  the  shrouds  and  stays,  came  up,  with  their  sails,  some 
furled  and  the  others  spread.  But  it  was  not  necessary  U 
wait  for  the  tide  to  bring  up  these  riches,  and  Ayrton  and  Pen 
croft  jumped  into  the  boat  with  the  intention  of  towing  the 
pieces  of  wreck  either  to  the  beach  or  to  the  islet.  But  just  as. 
they  were  shoving  off,  an  observation  from  Gideon  Spile tt 
arrested  them. 

“What  about  those  six  convicts  who  disembarked  on  the 
right  bank  of  the  Mercy?”  said  he. 

In  fact,  it  would  not  do  to  forget  that  the  six  men  whose 
boat  had  gone  to  pieces  on  the  rocks,  had  landed  at  Flotsam 
Point. 

They  looked  in  that  direction.  None  of  the  fugitives  were 
visible.  It  was  probable  that,  having  seen  their  vessel  engulfed 
in  the  channel,  they  had  fled  into  the  interior  of  the  island. 

“We  will  deal  with  them  later,”  said  Harding.  “As  they  are 
armed,  they  will  still  be  dangerous ; but  as  it  is  six  against 
six,  the  chances  are  equal.  To  the  most  pressing  business 
first.” 

Ayrton  and  Pencroft  pulled  vigorously  towards  the  wreck. 

The  sea  was  calm  and  the  tide  very  high,  as  there  had  been 
a new  moon  but  two  days  before.  A whole  hour  at  least  would 
elapse  before  the  hull  of  the  brig  could  emerge  from  the  water 
of  the  channel. 

Ayrton  and  Pencroft  were  able  to  fasten  the  masts  and  spar? 
by  means  of  ropes,  the  ends  of  which  were  carried  to  the 
beach.  There,  by  the  united  efforts  of  the  settlers  the  pieces 
of  wreck  were  hauled  up.  Then  the  boat  picked  up  all  that 
was  floating,  coops,  barrels,  and  boxes,  which  were  immedi- 
ately carried  to  the  Chimneys. 

Several  bodies  floated  also.  Amongst  them,  Ayrton  recog» 
nized  that  of  Bob  Harvey,  which  he  pointed  out  to  his 
companion,  saying  with  some  emotion,— 

“That  is  what  I have  been,  Pencroft,” 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


489 


“But  what  you  are  no  longer,  brave  Ayrton !”  returned  the 
sailor  warmly. 

It  was  singular  enough  that  so  few  bodies  floated.  Only  five 
or  six  weie  counted,  which  were  already  being  carried  by  the 
current  towards  the  open  sea.  Very  probably  the  convicts  had 
not  had  time  to  escape,  and  the  ship  lying  over  on  her  side,  the 
greater  number  of  them  had  remained  below.  Now  the  cur- 
rent, by  carrying  the  bodies  of  these  miserable  men  out  to  sea, 
would  spare  the  colonists  the  sad  task  of  burying  them  in 
some  corner  of  their  island. 

For  two  hours,  Cyrus  Harding  and  his  companions  were 
solely  occupied  in  hauling  up  the  spars  on  to  the  sand,  and 
then  in  spreading  the  sails,  which  were  perfectly  uninjured, 
to  dry.  They  spoke  little,  for  they  were  absorbed  in  their  work, 
but  what  thoughts  occupied  their  minds  ? 

The  possession  of  this  brig,  or  rather  all  that  she  contained, 
was  a perfect  mine  of  wealth.  In  fact,  a ship  is  like  a little 
world  in  miniature,  and  the  stores  of  the  colony  would  be 
increased  by  a large  number  of  useful  articles.  It  would  be, 
on  a large  scale,  equivalent  to  the  chest  found  at  Flotsam 
Point. 

* And  besides,”  thought  Peiicroft,  “ why  should  it  be  impos- 
sible to  refloat  the  brig  ? If  she  has  only  a leak  that  may  be 
stopped  up;  a vessel  from  three  to  four  hundred  tons,  why  she 
is  a regular  ship  compared  to  our  ‘ Bonadventure ! ’ And  we 
could  go  a long  distance  in  her ! We  could  go  any  where  we 
liked ! Captain  Harding,  Ayrton  and  I must  examine  her ! 
She  will  be  well  worth  the  trouble !” 

In  fact,  if  the  brig  was  still  fit  to  navigate,  the  colonists’ 
chances  of  returning  to  their  native  land  was  singularly  in- 
creased But,  to  decide  this  important  question,  in  was  neces- 
sary to  wait  until  the  tide  was  quite  low,  so  that  every  part  of 
the  brig’s  hull  might  be  examined. 

When  their  treasures  had  been  safely  conveyed  on  shore, 
Harding  and  his  companions  agreed  to  devote  some  minutes 
to  breakfast.  They  were  almost  famished:  fortunately,  the 
larder  was  not  far  off,  and  Neb  was  noted  for  being  an  expedi» 
tious  cook.  They  breakfasted,  therefore,  near  the  Chimneys, 


490 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


and  during  their  repast,  as  may  be  supposed,  nothing  was 
talked  of  but  the  unexpected  event  which  had  so  miraculously 
saved  the  colony. 

“ Miraculous  is  the  word,”  repeated  Pencroft,  “for  it  must  be 
acknowledged  that  those  rascals  blew  up  just  at  the  right 
moment ! Granite  House  was  beginning  to  be  uncomfortable 
as  a habitation ! ” 

“And  can  you  guess,  Pencroft,”  asked  the  reporter,  “how 
it  happened,  or  what  can  have  occasioned  the  explosion?” 

“ Oh  ! Mr.  Spilett,  nothing  is  more  simple,”  answered  Pencroft. 
“ A convict  vessel  is  not  disciplined  like  a man-of-war  ! Con- 
victs are  not  sailors.  Of  course  the  powder-magazine  was 
open,  and  as  they  were  firing  incessantly,  some  careless  or 
clumsy  fellow  just  blew  up  the  vessel ! ” 

“Captain  Harding,”  said  Herbert,  “what  astonishes  me  is 
that  tffe  explosion  has  not  produced  more  effect.  The  report 
was  not  loud,  and  besides  there  are  so  few  planks  and  timbers 
torn  out.  It  seems  as  if  the  ship  had  rather  foundered  than 
blown  up.” 

“ Does  that  astonish  you,  my  boy  ? ” asked  the  engineer. 

“ Yes,  captain.” 

“ And  it  astonishes  me  also,  Herbert,”  replied  he ; “ but 
when  we  visit  the  hull  of  the  brig,  we  shall  no  doubt  find 
the  explanation  of  the  matter.” 

“ Why,  captain,”  said  Pencroft,  “ you  don’t  suppose  that  the 
‘ Speedy’  simply  foundered  like  a ship  which  has  struck  on  a 
rock  ? ” 

“Why  not,”  observed  Neb,  “if  there  are  rocks  in  the  chan- 
nel?” 

“ Nonsense,  Neb,”  answered  Pencroft,  “ you  did  not  look  at 
the  right  moment.  An  instant  before  she  sank,  the  brig,  as  I 
saw  perfectly  well,  rose  on  an  enormous  wave,  and  fell  back  on 
her  larboard  side.  Now,  if  she  had  only  struck,  she  would 
have  sunk  quietly  and  gone  to  the  bottom  like  an  honest  vessel.” 

“It  was  just  because  she  was  not  an  honest  vessel !”  returned 
Neb. 

“ Well,  we  shall  soon  see,  Pencroft,”  said  the  engineer. 

“We  shall  soon  see,”  rejoined  the  sailor,  “ but  I would  wager 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND, 


m 


my  head  there  are  no  rocks  in  the  channel.  Look  here,  cap- 
tain, to  speak  candidly,  do  you  mean  to  say  that  there  is  any 
thing  marvellous  in  the  occurrence  ? ” 

Cyrus  Harding  did  not  answer. 

“At  any  rate,”  said  Gideon  Spilett,  “whether  rock  or  ex- 
plosion, you  will  agree,  Pencroft,  that  it  occurred  just  in  the 
nick  of  time  ! ” 

“ Yes  ! yes ! ” replied  the  sailor,  “ but  that  is  not  the  ques- 
tion. I ask  Captain  Harding  if  he  sees  any  thing  supernatural 
in  all  this.” 

“ I can  not  say,  Pencroft,”  said  the  engineer.  “ That  is  all 
the  answer  I can  make.” 

A reply  which  did  not  satisfy  Pencroft  at  all.  He  stuck  to 
an  “explosion,”  and  did  not  wish  to  give  it  up.  He  would 
never  consent  to  admit  that  in  that  channel,  with  its  fine  sandy 
bed,  just  like  the  beach,  which  he  had  often  crossed  at  low 
water,  there  could  be  an  unknown  rock. 

And  besides,  at  the  time  the  brig  foundered,  it  was  high 
water,  that  is  to  say,  there  was  enough  water  to  carry  the  ves- 
sel clear  over  any  rocks  which  would  not  be  uncovered  at  low 
tide.  Therefore,  there  could  not  have  been  a collision.  There- 
fore, the  vessel  had  not  struck.  Therefore,  she  had  blown  up. 

And  it  must  be  confessed  that  the  sailor’s  arguments  were 
not  without  reason. 

Towards  half-past  one,  the  colonists  embarked  in  the  boat  to 
visit  the  wreck.  It  was  to  be  regretted  that  the  brig’s  two 
boats  had  not  been  saved;  but  one,  as  has  been  said,  had  gone 
to  pieces  at  the  mouth  of  the  Mercy,  and  was  absolutely  use- 
less; the  other  had  disappeared  when  the  brig  went  down, 
and  had  not  again  been  seen,  having  doubtless  been  crushed. 

The  hull  of  the  ‘ Speedy’  was  just  beginning  to  issue  from 
the  water.  The  brig  was  lying  right  over  on  her  side^  for 
her  masts  being  broken,  pressed  down  by  the  weight  of  the 
ballast  displaced  by  the  shock,  the  keel  was  visible  along  hei 
whole  length.  SJie  had  been  regularly  turned  over  by  the  in* 
explicable  but  frightful  submarine  action,  which  had  been  at 
the  same  time  manifested  by  an  enormous  water-spout. 

The  settlers  rowed  round  the  hull,  and,  in  proportion  as  tha 


492 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION, 


tide  went  down,  they  could  ascertain,  if  not  the  cause  which 
had  occasioned  the  catastrophe,  at  least  the  effect  produced. 

Towards  the  bows,  on  both  sides  of  the  keel,  seven  or 
eight  feet  from  the  beginning  of  the  stem,  the  sides  of  the 
brig  were  frightfully  torn.  Over  a length  of  at  least  twenty 
feet  there  opened  two  large  leaks,  which  it  would  be  impossible 
to  stop  up.  Not  only  had  the  copper  sheathing  and  the  planks 
disappeared,  reduced,  no  doubt,  to  powder,  but  also  the  ribs, 
the  iron  bolts,  and  tree-nails  which  united  them.  From  the 
entire  length  of  the  hull  to  the  stem  the  false  keel  had  been 
separated  with  unaccountable  violence,  and  the  keel  itself,  torn 
from  the  carline  in  several  places,  was  split  in  all  its  length. 

I’ve  a notion,”  exclaimed  Pencroft, 44  that  this  vessel  will  be 
difficult  to  get  afloat  again  ! ” 

“It  will  be  impossible,”  said  Ayrton. 

44  At  any  rate,”  observed  Gideon  Spilett  to  the  sailor,  “ the  ex- 
plosion, if  there  has  been  one,  has  produced  singular  effects  ! 
It  has  split  the  lower  part  of  the  hull,  instead  of  blowing  up 
the  deck  and  topsides ! These  great  rents  appear  rather  to 
have  been  made  by  a rock  than  by  the  explosion  of  a powder- 
magazine.” 

44  There  is  not  a rock  in  the  channel  I”  answered  the  sailor. 
“I  will  admit  any  thing  you  like,  except  the  rock.” 

44  Let  us  try  to  penetrate  into  the  interior  of  the  brig,”  said 
the  engineer;  “perhaps  we  shall  then  know  what  to  think  of 
the  cause  of  her  destruction.” 

This  was  the  best  thing  to  be  done,  and  it  was  agreed, 
besides,  to  take  an  inventory  of  all  the  treasures  on  board, 
and  to  arrange  for  their  preservation. 

Access  to  the  interior  of  the  brig  was  now  easy.  The 
tide  was  still  going  down,  and  the  deck  was  practicable.  The 
ballast-  composed  of  heavy  masses  of  iron,  had  broken  through 
in  several  places.  The  noise  of  the  sea  could  be  heard  as  it 
rushed  out  at  the  holes  in  the  hull. 

Cyrus  Harding  and  his  companions,  hatchets  in  hand,  ad- 
vanced along  the  shattered  deck.  Cases  of  all  sorts  encumbered 
it,  and,  as  they  had  been  but  a very  short  time  in  the  water, 
their  contents  were  perhaps  uninjured. 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


They  then  busied  themselves  in  placing  all  this  cargo  in 
safety.  The  water  would  not  return  for  several  hours,  and 
these  hours  must  be  employed  in  the  most  profitable  way.  Ayr- 
ton and  Fencroft  had,  at  the  entrance  made  in  the  hull,  dis- 
covered tacMe,  which  would  serve  to  hoist  up  the  barrels  and 
chests.  The  Doat  received  them  and  transported  them  to  the 
shore.  They  took  the  articles  as  they  came,  intending  to  sort 
them  afterwards. 

At  any  rate,  the  settlers  saw  at  once,  with  extreme  satisfac- 
tion, that  the  brig  possessed  a very  varied  cargo— an  assortment 
of  all  sorts  of  articles,  utensils,  manufactured  goods  and  tools 
—such  as  the  ships  which  make  the  great  coasting-trade  of 
Polynesia  are  usually  laden  with.  It  was  probable  that  they 
would  find  a little  of  every  thing,  and  they  agreed  that  it 
Was  exactly  what  was  necessary  for  the  colony  of  Lincoln 
Island. 

However— and  Cyrus  Harding  observed  it  in  silent  aston- 
ishment, not  only,  as  has  been  said,  had  the  hull  of  the  brig 
enormously  suffered  from  the  shock,  whatever  it  was,  that 
had  occasioned  the  catastrophe,  but  the  interior  arrangements 
had  been  destroyed,  especially  towards  the  bows.  Partitions 
and  staunchions  were  smashed,  as  if  some  tremendous  shell 
had  burst  in  the  interior  of  the  brig.  The  colonists  could 
easily  go  fore  and  aft,  after  having  removed  the  cases  as  they 
were  extricated.  They  were  not  heavy  bales, ^ which  would 
have  been  difficult  to  remove,  but  simple  packages,  of  which 
the  stowage,  besides,  was  no  longer  recognizable. 

The  colonists  then  reached  the  stern  of  the  brig— the  part 
formerly  surmounted  by  the  poop.  It  was  there  that,  following 
Ayrton’s  directions,  they  must  look  for  the  powder-magazine. 
Cyrus  Harding  thought  that  it  had  not  exploded;  that  it  was 
possible  some  barrels  might  be  saved,  and  that  the  powder, 
which  is  usually  enclosed  in  metal  coverings,  might  not  have 
suffered  from  contact  with  the  water. 

This,  in  fact,  was  just  what  had  happened.  They  extricated 
from  amongst  a large  number  of  shot  twenty  barrels,  the 
insides  of  which  were  lined  with  copper.  Pencroft  was  con- 
vinced by  the  evidence  of  his  own  eyes,  that  the  destruction  of 


m 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION* 


the  “ Speedy  ” could  not  be  attributed  to  an  explosion.  That 
part  of  the  hull  in  which  the  magazine  was  situated  was, 
moreover,  that  which  had  suffered  least. 

“ It  may  be  &»,”  said  the  obstinate  sailor,  “ but  as  to  a rock, 
there  is  not  one  in  the  channel  ! ” 

“ Then,  how  did  it  happen  ? ” asked  Herbert. 

“I  don’t  know,”  answered  Pencroft,  “Captain  Harding 
doesn’t  know,  and  nobody  knows  or  ever  will  know  ! ” 

Several  hours  had  passed  during  these  researches,  and  the 
tide  began  to  flow.  Work  must  be  suspended  for  the  present. 
There  was  no  fear  of  the  brig  being  carried  away  by  the  sea, 
for  she  was  already  fixed  as  firmly  as  if  moored  by  her  anchors. 

They  could,  therefore,  without  inconvenience,  wait  until  the 
next  day  to  resume  operations;  but,  as  to  the  vessel  herself,  she 
was  doomed,  and  it  would  be  best  to  hasten  to  save  the  re- 
mains of  her  hull,  as  she  would  not  be  long  in  disappearing  in 
the  quicksands  of  the  channel. 

It  was  now  five  o’clock  in  the  evening.  It  had  been  a hard 
day’s  work  for  the  men.  They  ate  with  good  appetite,  and, 
notwithstanding  their  fatigue,  they  could  not  resist,  after 
dinner,  their  desire  of  inspecting  the  cases  which  composed 
the  cargo  of  the  “ Speedy.” 

Most  of  them  contained  clothes,  which,  as  may  be  believed, 
were  well  received.  There  were  enough  to  clothe  a whole 
colony — linen  for  every  one’s  use,  shoes  for  every  one’s  feet. 

“ We  are  too  rich  !”  exclaimed  Pencroft.  “ But  what  are  we 
going  to  do  with  all  this  ? ” 

And  every  moment  burst  forth  the  hurrahs  of  the  delighted 
sailor  when  he  caught  sight  of  the  barrels  of  gunpowder,  fire- 
arms and  side-arms,  balls  of  cotton,  implements  of  husbandry, 
carpener’s,  joiner’s  and  blacksmith’s  tools,  and  boxes  of  all 
kinds  of  seeds,  not  in  the  least  injured  by  their  short  sojourn 
in  the  water.  Ah,  two  years  before,  how  these  things  would 
have  been  prized  ! And  now,  even  although  the  industrious 
colonists  had  provided  themselves  with  tools,  these  treasures 
would  find  their  use. 

There  was  no  want  of  space  in  the  store-rooms  of  Granite 
Honse,  but  that  day  time  would  not  allow  them  to  stow  away 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


m 


the  whole,  It  would  not  do  also  to  forget  that  the  six 
survivors  of  the  “ Speedy’s”  crew  had  landed  on  the  island,  for 
they  were  in  all  probability  scoundrels  of  the  deepest  dye,  and 
it  was  necessary  that  the  colonists  should  be  on  their  guard 
against  them.  Although  the  bridges  over  the  Mercy  were 
raised,  the  convicts  would  not  be  stopped  by  a river  or  a stream, 
and,  rendered  desperate,  these  wretches  would  be  capable  of 
any  thing. 

They  would  see  later  what  plan  it  would  be  best  to  follow  ; 
but  in  the  meantime  it  was  necessary  to  mount  guard  over 
cases  and  packages  heaped  up  near  the  Chimneys,  and  thus  the 
settlers  employed  themselves  in  turn  during  the  night. 

The  morning  came,  however,  without  the  convicts  having 
attempted  any  attack.  Master  Jup  and  Top,  on  guard  at  the 
foot  of  Granite  House,  would  have  quickly  given  the  alarm. 
The  three  following  days— the  19th,  20th,  and  21st  of  October— 
were  employed  in  saving  every  thing  of  value,  or  of  any  use 
whatever,  either  from  the  cargo  or  rigging  of  the  brig.  At  low 
tide  they  overhauled  the  hold— at  high  tide  they  stowed  away 
the  rescued  articles.  A great  part  of  the  copper  sheathing  had 
been  torn  from  the  hull,  which  every  day  sank  lower.  But 
before  the  sand  had  swallowed  the  heavy  things  which  had 
fallen  through  the  bottom,  Ayrton  and  Pencroft,  diving  to  the 
bed  of  the  channel,  recovered  the  chains  and  anchors  of  the 
brig,  the  iron  of  her  ballast,  and  even  four  guns,  which,  floated 
by  means  of  empty  casks,  were  brought  to  shore. 

It  may  be  seen  that  the  arsenal  of  the  colony  had  gained  by 
the  wreck,  as  well  as  the  store-rooms  of  Granite  House.  Pen- 
croft,  always  enthusiastic  in  his  projects,  already  spoke  of  con- 
structing a battery  to  command  the  channel  and  the  mouth  of 
the  river.  With  four  guns,  he  engaged  to  prevent  any  fleet, 
“however  powerful  it  might  be,”  from  venturing  into  the 
waters  of  Lincoln  Island ! 

In  the  meantime,  when  nothing  remained  of  the  brig  but  a 
useless  hulk,  bad  weather  came  on,  which  soon  finished  her. 
Cyrus  Harding  had  intended  to  blow  her  up,  so  as  to  collect 
the  remains  on  the  shore,  but  a strong  gale  from  the  northeast 
and  a heavy  sea  compelled  him  to  economize  his  powder. 

82 


m 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION, 


In  fact,  on  the  night  of  the  23rd,  the  hull  entirely  broke  hr 
and  some  of  the  wreck  was  cast  up  on  the  beach. 

As  to  the  papers  on  board,  it  is  useless  to  say  that,  although 
he  carefully  searched  the  lockers  of  the  poop,  Harding  did  not 
discover  any  trace  of  them.  The  pirates  had  evidently  destroyed 
every  thing  that  concerned  either  the  captain  or  the  owners  of 
the  “ Speedy,”  and,  as  the  name  of  her  port  was  not  painted  on 
her  counter,  there  was  nothing  which  would  tell  them  hesr 
nationality.  However,  by  the  shape  of  her  boats  Ayrton  and 
Pencroft  believed  that  the  brig  was  of  English  build. 

A week  after  the  catastrophe— or,  rather,  after  the  fortunate, 
though  inexplicable,  event  to  which  the  colony  owed  its  pre- 
servation-nothing more  could  be  seen  of  the  vessel,  even  at 
low  tide.  The  wreck  had  disappeared,  and  Granite  House  was 
enriched  by  nearly  all  it  had  contained. 

However,  the  mystery  which  enveloped  its  strange  destruc- 
tion would  doubtless  never  have  been  cleared  away  if,  on  the 
30th  of  November,  Neb,  strolling  on  the  beach,  had  not  found  a 
piece  of  a thick  iron  cylinder,  bearing  traces  of  explosion.  The 
edges  of  this  cylinder  were  twisted  and  broken,  as  if  they  ha4 
been  subjected  to  the  action  of  some  explosive  substance. 

Neb  brought  this  piece  of  metal  to  his  master,  who  was  then 
occupied  with  his  companions  in  the  workshop  of  the  Chim- 
neys. 

Cyrus  Harding  examined  the  cylinder  attentively,  then,  turn- 
ing to  Pencroft,— 

“You  persist,  my  friend,”  said  he,  “in  maintaining  that  the 
4 Speedy’  was  not  lost  in  consequence  of  a collision  ? ” 

“ Yes,  captain,”  answered  the  sailor.  44  You  know  as  well  as 
I do  that  there  are  no  rocks  in  the  channel.” 

44  But  suppose  she  had  run  against  this  piece  of  iron  ? ” said 
the  engineer,  showing  the  broken  cylinder. 

44  What,  that  bit  of  pipe ! ” exclaimed  Pencroft  in  a tone  of 
perfect  incredulity. 

“My  friends,”  resumed  Harding, 44 you  remember  that  before 
she  foundered  the  brig  rose  on  the  summit  of  a regular  water* 
spout  ? ” 

44  Yes.  captain,”  replied  Herbert 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


499 


“ Well,  would  you  like  to  know  what  occasioned  that  water- 
Bpout  ? It  was  this,”  said  the  engineer,  holding  up  the  broken 
tube. 

“ That  ?”  returned  Pencroft. 

“ Yes ! This  cylinder  is  all  that  remains  of  a torpedo  ! ” 

“ A torpedo !”  exclaimed  the  engineer’s  companions. 

“ And  who  put  the  torpedo  there  ? ” demanded  Pencroft, 
who  did  not  like  to  yield. 

“ All  that  I can  tell  you  is,  that  it  was  not  I,”  answered  Cyrua 
Harding;  “but  it  was  there,  and  you  have  been  able  to  judge 
ff  its  incomparable  power  I » 


CHAPTER  V, 


THE  ENGINEER’S  declaration— pencroft’s  grand  hypothesis 
—AN  AERIAL  battery— the  four  cannons  — the  surviv- 
ing CONVICTS  — AYRTON’S  HESITATION  — CYRUS  HARDING’S 
GENEROUS  SENTIMENTS— PENCROFT’S  REGRET. 

So,  then,  all  was  explained  by  the  submarine  explosion  of 
this  torpedo.  Cyrus  Harding  could  not  be  mistaken,  as,  during 
the  war  of  the  Union,  he  had  had  occasion  to  try  these  terrible 
engines  of  destruction.  It  was  under  the  action  of  this  cyl- 
inder, charged  with  some  explosive  substance,  nitro-glycerine, 
picrate,  or  some  other  material  of  the  same  nature,  that  the 
water  of  the  channel  had  been  raised  like  a dome,  the  bottom 
of  the  brig  crushed  in,  and  she  had  sunk  instantly,  the  damage 
done  to  her  hull  being  so  considerable  that  it  was  impossible  to 
refloat  her.  The  “ Speedy”  had  not  been  able  to  withstand  a 
torpedo  that  would  have  destroyed  an  ironclad  as  easily  as  a 
fishing-boat ! 

Yes ! all  was  explained,  every  thing— except  the  presence  of 
the  torpedo  in  the  waters  of  the  channel ! 

“ My  friends,  then,”  said  Cyrus  Harding,  “ we  can  no  longer 
be  in  doubt  as  to  the  presence  of  a mysterious  being,  a cast- 
away like  us,  perhaps,  abandoned  on  our  island,  and  I say  this 
in  order  that  Ayrton  may  be  acquainted  with  all  the  strange 
events  which  have  occurred  during  these  two  years.  Who 
this  beneficent  stranger  is,  whose  intervention  has,  so  for- 
tunately for  us,  been  manifested  on  many  occasions,  I can  not 
imagine.  What  his  object  can  be  in  acting  thus,  in  concealing 
himself  after  rendering  us  so  many  services,  I can  not  under- 
stand. But  his  services  are  not  the  less  real,  and  are  of  such  a 
nature  that  only  a man  possessed  of  prodigious  power,  could 
tender  them.  Ayrton  is  indebted  to  him  as  much  as  we  axe, 

500 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


SOI 


for,  if  it  was  the  stranger  who  saved  me  from  the  waves 
after  the  fall  from  the  balloon,  evidently  it  was  he  who  wrote 
the  document,  who  placed  the  bottle  in  the  channel,  and  who 
has  made  known  to  us  the  situation  of  our  companion.  I will 
add  that  it  was  he  who  guided  that  chest,  provided  with  every 
thing  we  wanted,  and  stranded  it  on  Flotsam  Point;  that  it 
was  he  who  lighted  that  fire  on  the  heights  of  the  island,  which 
permitted  you  to  land;  that  it  was  he  who  fired  that  bullet 
found  in  the  body  of  the  peccary;  that  it  was  he  who  immersed 
that  torpedo  in  the  channel,  which  destroyed  the  brig;  in  a 
word,  that  all  those  inexplicable  events,  for  which  we  could 
not  assign  a reason,  are  due  to  this  mysterious  being.  There* 
fore,  whoever  he  may  be,  whether  shipwrecked,  or  exiled  on 
our  island,  we  shall  be  ungrateful,  if  we  think  ourselves  freed 
from  gratitude  towards  him.  We  have  contracted  a debt,  and 
I hope  that  we  shall  one  day  pay  it.” 

“You  are  right  in  speaking  thus,  my  dear  Cyrus,”  replied 
Gideon  Spilett.  “ Yes,  there  is  an  almost  all-powerful  being, 
hidden  in  some  part  of  the  island,  and  whose  influence  has 
been  singularly  useful  to  our  colony.  I will  add  that  the  un- 
known appears  to  possess  means  of  action  which  border  on  the 
supernatural  if,  in  the  events  of  practical  life,  the  super- 
natural were  recognizable.  Is  it  he  who  is  in  secret  communi- 
cation with  us  by  the  well  in  Granite  House,  and  has  he  thus  a 
knowledge  of  all  our  plans  ? Was  it  he  who  threw  us  that 
bottle,  when  the  vessel  made  her  first  cruise  ? Was  it  he  who 
threw  Top  out  of  the  lake,  and  killed  the  dugong  ? Was  it  he, 
who  as  every  thing  leads  us  to  believe,  saved  you  from  the 
waves,  and  that  under  circumstances  in  which  any  one  else 
would  not  have  been  able  to  act  ? If  it  was  he,  he  possesses  a 
power  which  renders  him  master  of  the  elements.” 

The  reporter’s  reasoning  was  just,  and  every  one  felt  it  to  be 
so. 

“Yes,”  rejoined  Cyrus  Harding,  “if  the  intervention  of  a 
human  being  is  not  more  questionable  for  us,  I agree  that 
he  has  at  his  disposal  means  of  action  beyond  those  possessed 
by  humanity.  There  is  a mystery  still,  but  if  we  discover  the 
man,  the  mystery  will  be  discovered  also.  The  question,  then, 


502 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


is,  ought  we  to  respect  the  incognito  of  this  generous  being; 
or  ought  we  to  do  every  thing  to  find  him  out  ? What  is  your 
opinion  on  the  matter  ? ” 

“My  opinion,”  said  Pencroft,  “is  that,  whoever  he  may  be% 
he  is  a brave  man,  and  he  has  my  esteem ! ” 

“ Be  it  so,”  answered  Harding,  “but  that  is  not  an  answei 
Pencroft.” 

“Master,”  then  said  Neb,  “my  idea  is,  that  we  may  seared 
as  long  as  we  like  for  this  gentleman  whom  you  are  talking 
about,  but  that  we  shall  not  discover  him  till  he  pleases/’ 

“ That’s  not  bad,  what  you  say,  Neb,”  observed  Pencroft. 

“I  am  of  Neb’s  opinion,”  said  Gideon  Spilett,  “but  that  is  no 
reason  for  not  attempting  the  adventure.  Whether  we  find 
this  mysterious  being  or  not,  we  shall  at  least  have  fulfilled  our 
duty  towards  him.” 

“ And  you,  my  boy,  give  us  your  opinion,  * said  the  engineer, 
Aiming  to  Herbert. 

“Oh,”  cried  Herbert,  his  countenance  full  of  animation, 
4 how  I should  like  to  thank  him,  ho  who  saved  you  first,  and 
who  has  now  saved  us ! ” 

“ Of  course,  my  boy,”  replied  Pencroft,  “ so  would  I and  all 
of  us.  I am  not  inquisitive,  but  I would  give  one  of  my  eyes 
to  see  this  individual  face  to  face  I It  seems  to  me  that  he 
must  be  handsome,  tall,  strong,  witn  a splendid  beard,  radiant 
hair,  and  that  he  must  be  seated  on  the  clouds,  a great  ball  in 
his  hands !” 

“But,  Pencroft,”  answered  Spilett,  “you  are  describing  a 
picture  of  the  Creator.” 

“ Possibly,  Mr.  Spilett,”  replied  the  sailor,  “but  that  is  how 
I imagine  him  ! ” 

“ And  you,  Ayrton  ? ” asked  the  engineer. 

“Captain  Harding,”  replied  Ayrton,  “ I can  give  you  no  better 
advice  in  this  matter.  Whatever  you  do  will  be  best,  when 
you  wish  me  to  join  you  in  your  researches,  I am  ready  to  fol- 
low you.” 

“I  thank  you,  Ayrton,”  answered  Cyrus  Harding,  “but  I 
should  like  a more  direct  answer  to  the  question  I put  to  you. 
You  are  our  companion;  you  have  already  endangered  your 


rXHE  SECKE71’  OF  THE  ISLAND^ 


60S 


life  several  times  for  us,  and  you,  as  well  as  the  rest,  ought  to 
be  consulted  in  the  matter  of  any  important  decision.  Speak, 
therefore.” 

“ Captain  Harding,”  replied  Ayrton,  “ I think  that  we  ought 
to  do  every  thing  to  discover  this  unknown  benefactor.  Per- 
haps he  is  alone.  Perhaps  he  is  suffering.  Perhaps  he  has  a 
life  to  be  renewed.  I,  too,  as  you  said,  have  a debt  of  gratitude 
to  pay  him.  It  was  he,  it  could  be  only  he  who  must  have 
come  to  Tabor  Island,  who  found  there  the  wretch  you  knew, 
and  who  made  known  to  you  that  there  was  an  unfortunate 
man  there  to  be  saved  ! Therefore  it  is,  thanks  to  him,  that  I 
have  become  a man  again.  No,  I will  never  forget  him!” 

“ That  is  settled,  then,”  said  Cyrus  Harding.  “We  will  begin 
our  researches  as  soon  as  possible.  We  will  not  leave  a corner 
of  the  island  unexplored.  We  will  search  into  its  most  secret 
recesses,  and  will  hope  that  our  unknown  friend  will  pardon 
us  in  consideration  of  our  intentions ! ” 

For  several  days  the  colonists  were  actively  employed  in  hay- 
making and  the  harvest.  Before  putting  their  project  of  ex- 
ploring the  yet  unknown  parts  of  the  island  into  execution, 
they  wished  to  get  all  possible  work  finished.  It  was  also  the 
time  for  collecting  the  various  vegetables  from  the  Tabor  Island 
plants.  All  was  stowed  away,  and  happily  there  was  no  want 
of  room  in  Granite  House,  in  which  they  might  have  housed 
all  the  treasures  of  the  island.  The  products  of  the  colony 
were  there,  methodically  arranged,  and  in  a safe  place,  as  may 
be  believed,  sheltered  as  much  from  animals  as  from  man. 

There  was  no  fear  of  damp  in  the  middle  of  that  thick  mass 
of  granite.  Many  natural  excavations  situated  in  the  upptr 
passage  were  enlarged  either  by  pick-axe  or  mine,  and  Granite 
House  thus  became  a general  warehouse,  containing  all  the 
provisions,  arms,  tools,  and  spare  utensils— in  a word,  all  the 
stores  of  the  colony. 

As  to  the  guns  obtained  from  the  brig,  they  were  pretty 
pieces  of  ordnance,  which,  at  Pencroft’s  entreaty,  were  hoisted 
by  means  of  tackle  and  pulleys,  right  up  into  Granite  House; 
embrasures  were  made  between  the  windows,  aiid  the  shining 
muzzles  of  the  guns  could  soon  be  seen  through  the  granite 


504 


THE  LAKESIDB  BUJTION. 


eliff.  From  this  height  they  commanded  all  Union  Bay.  It 
was  like  a little  Gibraltar,  and  any  vessel  anchored  off  the 
islet  would  inevitably  be  exposed  to  the  fire  of  this  aerial 
battery. 

“ Captain,’’  said  Pencroft  one  day,  it  was  the  8th  of  November, 
64  now  that  our  fortifications  are  finished,  it  would  be  a good 
thing  if  we  tried  the  range  of  our  guns.” 

“ Do  you  think  that  is  useful  ? ” asked  the  engineer. 

“ It  is  more  than  useful,  it  is  necessary ! Without  that  how 
are  we  to  know  to  what  distance  we  can  send  one  of  those 
pretty  shot  with  which  we  are  provided  ? ” 

“ Try  them,  Pencroft,”  replied  the  engineer.  “ However,  I 
think  that  in  making  the  experiment,  we  ought  to  employ, 
not  the  ordinary  powder,  the  supply  of  which,  I think,  should 
remain  untouched,  but  the  pyroxile  which  will  never  fail  us.” 

“ Can  the  cannon  support  the  shock  of  the  pyroxile  ? ” 
asked  the  reporter,  who  was  not  less  anxious  than  Pencroft  to 
try  the  artillery  of  Granite  House. 

“I  believe  so.  However,”  added  the  engineer,  “we  will  be 
prudent.” 

The  engineer  was  right  in  thinking  that  the  guns  were 
of  excellent  make.  Made  of  forged  steel,  and  breech-loaders, 
they  ought  consequently  to  be  able  to  bear  a considerable 
charge,  and  also  have  an  enormous  range.  In  fact,  as  re- 
gards practical  effect,  the  transit  described  by  the  ball  ought 
to  be  as  extended  as  possible,  and  this  tension  could  only  be 
obtained  under  the  condition  that  the  projectile  should  be  im- 
pelled with  a very  great  initial  velocity. 

“ Now,”  said  Harding  to  his  companions,  “ the  initial  velocity 
is  in  proportion  to  the  quantity  of  powder  used.  In  the  fabri- 
cation of  these  pieces,  every  thing  depends  on  employing  a 
metal  with  the  highest  possible  power  of  resistance,  and  steel 
is  incontestably  that  metal  of  all  others  which  resists  the  best. 
I have,  therefore,  reason  to  believe  that  our  guns  will  bear 
without  risk  the  expansion  of  the  pyroxile  gas,  and  will  give 
excellent  results.” 

“ We  shall  be  a great  deal  more  certain  of  that  when  we 
have  tried  them  I ” answered  Pencroft, 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


505 


It  is  unnecessary  to  say  that  the  four  cannons  were  in  per- 
fect order.  Since  they  had  been  taken  from  the  water,  the 
sailor  had  bestowed  great  care  upon  them.  How  many  hours 
he  had  spent  in  rubbing,  greasing,  and  polishing  them,  and  in 
cleaning  the  mechanism ! And  now  the  pieces  were  as 
brilliant  as  if  they  had  been  on  board  a frigate  of  the  United 
States  Navy. 

On  this  day,  therefore,  in  presence  of  all  the  members  of  the 
colony,  including  Master  Jup  and  Top,  the  four  cannon  were 
successively  tried.  They  were  charged  with  pyroxile,  taking 
into  consideration  its  explosive  power,  which,  as  has  been  said, 
is  four  times  that  of  ordinary  powder;  the  projectile  to  be  fired 
was  cylindroconic. 

Pencroft,  holding  the  end  of  the  quick-match,  stood  ready 
to  fire. 

At  Harding’s  signal,  he  fired.  The  shot,  passing  over  the 
islet,  fell  into  the  sea  at  a distance  which  could  not  be  calcu- 
lated with  exactitude. 

The  second  gun  was  pointed  at  the  rock3  at  the  end  of  Flot- 
sam Point,  and  the  shot,  striking  a sharp  rock  nearly  three 
miles  from  Granite  House,  made  it  fly  into  splinters.  It  was 
Herbert  who  had  pointed  this  gun  and  fired  it,  and  very  proud 
he  was  of  his  first  shot.  Pencroft  only  was  prouder  than  he  ! 
Such  a shot,  the  honor  of  which  belonged  to  his  dear  boy. 

The  third  shot,  aimed  this  time  at  the  downs  forming  the 
upper  side  of  Union  Bay,  struck  the  sand  at  a distance  of 
four  miles,  then  having  ricocheted,  was  lost  in  the  sea  in  a 
cloud  of  spray. 

For  the  fourth  piece  Cyrus  Harding  slightly  increased  the 
charge,  so  as  to  try  its  extreme  range.  Then,  all  standing 
aside  for  fear  of  its  bursting,  the  match  was  lighted  by  means 
of  a long  cord. 

A tremendous  report  was  heard,  but  the  piece  had  held 
good,  and  the  colonists  rushing  to  the  windows,  saw  the  shot 
graze  the  rocks  of  Mandible  Cape,  nearly  five  miles  from  Gran- 
ite House,  and  disappear  in  Shark  Gulf. 

“Well,  captain,”  exclaimed  Pencroft,  whose  cheers  might 
have  rivalled  the  reports  themselves,  “ what  do  you  say  of  our 


506 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


battery  ? All  the  pirates  in  the  Pacific  have  only  to  present 
themselves  before  Granite  House ! Not  one  can  land  there  now 
Without  our  permission  ! ” 

“Believe  me,  Pencroft,”  replied  the  engineer,  “it  would  be 
better  not  to  have  to  make  the  experiment.” 

“ Well,”  said  the  sailor,  “ what  ought  to  be  done  with  regard 
to  those  six  villains  who  are  roaming  about  the  island  ? Are 
we  to  leave  them  to  overrun  our  forests,  our  fields,  our  planta- 
tions. These  pirates  are  regular  jaguars,  and  it  seems  to  me 
we  ought  not  to  hesitate  to  treat  them  as  such  ! What  do  you 
think,  Ayrton?”  added  Pencroft,  turning  to  his  companions. 

Ayrton  hesitated  at  first  to  reply,  and  Cyrus  Harding  regretted 
that  Pencroft  had  so  thoughtlessly  put  this  question.  And 
he  was  much  moved  when  Ayrton  replied  in  a humble  tone, — 

“I  have  been  one  of  those  jaguars,  Mr.  Pencroft.  I have  no 
right  to  speak.” 

And  with  a slow  step  he  walked  away. 

Pencroft  understood. 

“ What  a brute  I am!”  he  exclaimed.  “ Poor  Ayrton ! He 
aas  as  much  right  to  speak  here  as  any  one!  ” 

“ Yes,”  said  Gideon  Spilett,  “ but  his  reserve  does  him  honor, 
and  it  is  right  to  respect  the  feeling  which  he  has  about  his 
sad  past.” 

“ Certainly,  Mr.  Spilett,”  answered  the  sailor,  “ and  there  is  no 
fear  of  my  doing  so  again.  I would  rather  bite  my  tongue 
off  than  cause  Ayrton  any  pain!  But  to  return  to  the  question. 
It  seems  to  me  that  these  ruffians  have  no  right  to  any  pity, 
and  that  we  ought  to  rid  the  island  of  them  as  soon  as  possible.” 

“ Is  that  your  opinion,  Pencroft  ? * asked  the  engineer. 

“ Quite  my  opinion.” 

“And  before  hunting  them  down  mercilessly,  you  would  not 
wait  until  they  had  committed  some  fresh  act  of  hostility 
against  us  ” 

“Isn’t  what  they  have  done  already  enough?”  asked  Pen- 
croft, who  did  not  understand  these  scruples. 

“They  may  adopt  other  sentiments!”  said  Harding,  “and 
perhaps  repent.” 

“ They  repent!  ” exclaimed  the  sailor,  shrugging  his  shoulders. 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


50? 


“ Pencroft,  think  of  Ayrton!”  said  Herbert,  taking  the 
jailor’s  hand.  “ He  becapie  an  honest  man  again  ! ” 

Pencroft  looked  at  his  companions  one  after  the  other.  He 
had  never  thought  of  his  proposal  being  met  with  any  objec- 
tion. His  rough  nature  could  not  allow  that  they  ought  to 
come  to  terms  with  the  rascals  who  had  landed  on  the  island 
with  Bob  Harvey’s  accomplices,  the  murderers  of  the  crew  of 
the  “Speedy;”  and  he  looked  upon  them  as  wild  beasts  which 
ought  to  be  destroyed  without  delay  and  without  remorse. 

“Come! ’’said  he.  “Every  body  is  against  me!  You  wish 
to  be  generous  to  those  villains ! Very  well;  I hope  we  mayn’t 
repent  it ! ” 

“ What  danger  shall  we  run,”  said  Herbert,  “ if  we  take  care 
to  be  always  on  our  guard  ? ” 

“Hum,”  observed  the  reporter,  who  had  not  given  any 
decided  opinion.  “They  are  six  and  well  armed.  If  they  each 
lay  hid  in  a corner,  and  each  fired  at  one  of  us,  they  would  soon 
be  masters  of  the  colony  ! ” 

“ Why  have  they  not  done  so?  ” said  Herbert.  “ No  doubt 
because  it  was  not  their  interest  to  do  it.  Besides,  we  are  six, 
also.” 

“ Well,  well ! ” replied  Pencroft,  whom  no  reasoning  could 
■have  convinced.  “ Let  us  leave  these  good  people  to  do  what 
they  like,  and  don’t  think  any  thing  more  about  them ! ” 

“Come,  Pencroft,”  said  Neb,  “don’t  make  yourself  out  so 
bad  as  all  that ! Suppose  one  of  these  unfortunate  men  were 
here  before  you,  within  good  range  of  your  gun,  you  would 
not  fire.” 

“I  would  fire  on  him  as  I would  on  a mad  dog,  Neb,”  replied 
Pencroft  coldlyt 

“Pencroft,”  said  the  engineer,  “you  have  always  shown  much 
deference  to  my  advice;  will  you,  in  this  matter,  yield  to  me?  ” 

“I  will  do  as  you  please,  Captain  Harding,”  answered  the 
sailor,  who  was  not  at  all  convinced. 

“ Very  well,  wait,  and  we  will  not  attack  them  unless  we  are 
attacked  first.” 

Thus  their  behavior  towards  the  pirates  was  agreed  upon 
although  Pencroft  argued  nothing  good  from  it.  They  were 


508 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


not  to  attack  them,  but  were  to  be  on  their  guard.  After  all, 
the  island  was  large  and  fertile.  IJ^  any  sentiment  of  honesty 
yet  remained  in  the  bottom  of  their  hearts,  these  wretches 
might  perhaps  be  reclaimed.  Was  it  not  their  interest  in  the 
situation  in  which  they  found  themselves  to  begin  a new  life  ? 
At  any  rate,  for  humanity’s  sake  alone,  it  would  be  right  to 
wait.  The  colonists  would  no  longer,  as  before,  be  able  to  go 
and  come  without  fear.  Hitherto  they  had  only  wild  beasts  to 
guard  against,  and  now  six  convicts  of  the  worst  description, 
perhaps,  were  roaming  over  their  island.  It  was  serious,  cer- 
tainly, and  to  less  brave  men,  it  would  have  been  security  lost ! 
No  matter!  At  present,  the  colonists  had  reason  on  their  side 
against  Pencroft.  Would  they  be  right  in  the  future  ? That 
remained  to  be  seen. 


CHAPTER  VI 


EXPEDITIONS  PLANNED  — AYRTON  AT  THE  CORRAL  — VISIT  TO 
PORT  BALLOON— PENCROFT’S  OBSERVATIONS  ON  BOARD  THE 
“BONADVENTURE”— DISPATCH  SENT  TO  THE  CORRAL— NO 
REPLY  FROM  AYRTON  — DEPARTURE  THE  NEXT  DAY— THE 
REASON  WHY  THE  WIRE  DID  NOT  WORK— A REPORT. 

However,  the  chief  business  of  the  colonists  was  to  make 
that  complete  exploration  of  the  island  which  had  been  decided 
upon,  and  which  would  have  two  objects  : to  discover  the 
mysterious  being  whose  existence  was  now  indisputable,  and 
at  the  same  time  to  find  out  what  had  become  of  the  pirates, 
what  retreat  they  had  chosen,  what  sort  of  life  they  were 
leading,  and  what  was  to  be  feared  from  them.  Cyrus  Harding 
wished  to  set  out  without  delay ; but  as  the  expedition  would 
be  of  some  days’  duration,  it  appeared  best  to  load  the  cart 
with  different  materials  and  tools  in  order  to  facilitate  the 
organization  of  the  encampments.  One  of  the  onagas,  how- 
ever, having  hurt  its  leg,  could  not  be  harnessed  at  present, 
and  a few  days’  rest  was  necessary.  The  departure  was,  there- 
fore, put  off  for  a week,  until  the  20th  of  November.  The 
month  of  November  in  this  latitude  corresponds  to  the  month 
of  May  in  the  northern  zones.  It  was,  therefore,  the  fine  sea- 
son. The  sun  was  entering  the  tropic  of  Capricorn,  and  gave 
the  longest  days  in  the  year.  The  time  was,  therefore,  very 
favorable  for  the  projected  expedition,  which,  if  it  did  not 
accomplish  its  principal  object,  would  at  any  rate  be  fruitful 
in  discoveries,  especially  of  natural  productions,  since  Hard- 
ing proposed  to  explore  those  dense  forests  of  the  Far  West, 
which  stretched  to  the  extremity  of  the  Serpentine  Peninsula. 

During  the  nine  days  which  preceded  their  departure,  it  w 

509 


510 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


agreed  that  the  work  on  Prospect  Heights  should  be  finished 

off. 

Moreover,  it  was  necessary  for  Ayrton  to  return  to  the  corral, 
where  the  domesticated  animals  required  his  care.  It  was 
decided  that  he  should  spend  two  days  there,  and  return  to 
Granite  House  after  having  liberally  supplied  the  stables. 

As  he  was  about  to  start,  Harding  asked  him  if  he  would 
not  like  one  of  them  to  accompany  him,  observing  that  the 
island  was  less  safe  than  formerly.  Ayrton  replied  that  this 
was  unnecessary,  as  he  was  enough  for  the  work,  and  that 
besides  he  apprehended  no  danger.  If  any  thing  occurred  at 
the  corral,  or  in  the  neighborhood,  he  could  instantly  warn  the 
colonists  by  sending  a telegram  to  Granite  House. 

Ayrton  departed  at  dawn  on  the  9th,  taking  the  cart  drawn 
by  one  onaga,  and  two  hours  after  the  electric  wire  announced 
that  he  had  found  all  in  order  at  the  corral. 

During  these  two  days  Harding  busied  himself  in  executing 
a project  which  would  completely  guard  Granite  House  against 
any  surprise.  It  was  necessary  to  completely  conceal  the  open- 
ing of  the  old  outlet,  which  was  already  walled  up  and  partly 
hidden  under  grass  and  plants,  at  the  southern  angle  of  Lake 
Grant.  Nothing  was  easier,  since  if  the  level  of  the  lake  was 
raised  two  or  three  feet,  the  opening  would  be  quite  beneath 
it.  Now,  to  raise  this  level  they  had  only  to  establish  a dam  at 
the  two  openings  made  by  the  lake,  and  by  which  were  fed 
Creek  Glycerine  and  Falls  River. 

The  colonists  worked  with  a will,  and  the  two  dams  which 
besides  did  not  exceed  eight  feet  in  width  by  three  in  height, 
were  rapidly  erected  by  means  of  well-cemented  blocks  of 
stone. 

This  work  finished,  it  would  have  been  impossible  to  guess 
that  at  that  part  of  the  lake  there  existed  a subterranean 
passage  through  which  the  overflow  of  the  lake  formerly  es- 
caped. 

Of  course  the  little  stream  which  fed  the  reservoir  of  Granite 
House  and  worked  the  lift,  had  been  carefully  preserved,  and 
the  water  could  not  fail.  The  lift  once  raised,  this  sure  and 
comfortable  retreat  would  be  safe  from  any  surprise. 


THE  SECRET  0^  THE  ISLAND. 


511 


This  work  had  been  so  quickly  done,  that  Pencroft,  Gideon 
Spilett,  and  Herbert  found  time  to  make  an  expedition  to  Port 
Balloon.  The  sailor  was  very  anxious  to  know  if  the  little 
creek  in  which  the  “ Bonadventure  ” was  moored,  had  been 
visited  by  the  convicts. 

“These  gentlemen,”  he  observed,  “landed  on  the  south 
coast,  and,  if  they  followed  the  shore,  it  is  to  be  feared  that  they 
may  have  discovered  the  little  harbor,  and  in  that  case,  I 
wouldn’t  give  half  a dollar  for  our  ‘Bonadventure.’  ” 

Pencroft’s  apprehensions  were  not  without  foundation,  and 
a visit  to  Port  Balloon  appeared  to  be  very  desirable.  The 
sailor  and  his  companions  set  off  on  the  10th  of  November, 
after  dinner,  well  armed.  Pencroft,  ostentatiously  slipping  two 
bullets  into  each  barrel  of  his  rifle,  shook  his  head  in  a way 
which  betokened  nothing  good  to  any  one  who  approached 
too  near  to  him,  whether  “ man  or  beast,”  as  he  said.  Gideon 
Spilett  and  Herbert  also  took  their  guns,  and  about  three 
o’clock  all  three  left  Granite  House. 

Neb  accompanied  them  to  the  turn  of  the  Mercy,  and  after 
they  had  crossed,  he  raised  the  bridge.  It  was  agreed  that  a 
gun-shot  should  announce  the  colonists’  return,  and  that  at 
the  signal  Neb  should  return  and  re-establish  the  communica- 
tion between  the  two  banks  of  the  river. 

The  little  band  advanced  directly  along  the  road  which  led 
to  the  southern  coast  of  the  island.  This  was  only  a distance 
of  three  miles  and  a half,  but  Gideon  Spilett  and  his  compan- 
ions took  two  hours  to  traverse  it.  They  examined  all  the 
border  of  the  road,  the  thick  forest,  as  well  as  Tadorn  Marsh. 
They  found  no  trace  of  the  fugitives  who,  no  doubt,  not  having 
yet  discovered  the  number  of  colonists,  or  the  means  of  defense 
which  they  had  at  their  disposal,  had  gained  the  less  accessible 
parts  of  the  island. 

Arrived  at  Port  Balloon,  Pencroft  saw  with  extreme  satisfaC' 
tion  that  the  “Bonadventure”  was  tranquilly  floating  in  the 
narrow  creek.  However,  Port  Balloon  was  so  well  hidden 
amongst  high  rocks,  that  it  could  scarcely  be  discovered  either 
from  the  land  or  the  sea. 

4 ; Come,”  said  Pencroft,  “the  blackguards  have  not  been 


512 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


there  yet.  Long  grass  suits  reptiles  best,  and  evidently 
shall  find  them  in  the  Far  West.” 

“ And  it’s  very  lucky,  for  if  they  had  found  the  ‘ Bonadven* 
ture,”’  added  Herbert,  “they  would  have  gone  off  in  her, 
and  we  should  have  been  prevented  from  returning  to  Tabor 
Island.” 

“Indeed,”  remarked  the  reporter,  “it  will  be  important  to 
take  a document  there  which  will  make  known  the  situation 
of  Lincoln  Island,  and  Ayrton’s  new  residence,  in  case  the 
Scotch  yacht  returns  to  fetch  him.” 

“Well,  the  ‘ Bonadventure ’ is  always  there,  Mr.  Spilett,” 
answered  the  sailor.  “ She  and  her  crew  are  ready  to  start  at  a 
moment’s  notice !” 

“I  think,  Pencroft,  that  that  is  a thing  to  be  done  after 
our  exploration  of  the  island  is  finished.  It  is  possible  after  all 
that  the  stranger,  if  we  manage  to  find  him,  may  know  as  much 
about  Tabor  Island  as  about  Lincoln  Island.  Bo  not  forget 
that  he  is  certainly  the  author  of  the  document,  and  he  may, 
perhaps,  know  how  far  we  may  count  on  the  return  of  the  yacht!” 
“ But ! ” exclaimed  Pencroft,  “ who  in  the  world  can  he  be  ? 
The  fellow  knows  us  and  we  know  nothing  about  him ! If 
he  is  a simple  castaway,  why  should  he  conceal  himself  ? We 
are  honest  men.  I suppose,  and  the  society  of  honest  men  isn’t 
unpleasant  to  any  one.  Bid  he  come  here  voluntarily,?  Can 
he  leave  the  island  if  he  likes  ? Is  he  here  still  ? Will  he 
remain  any  longer  ? ” 

Chatting  thus,  Pencroft,  Gideon  Spilett,  and  Herbert  got  on 
board  and  looked  about  the  deck  of  the  “Bonadventure.” 
All  at  once,  the  sailor  having  examined  the  bitts  to  which 
the  cable  of  the  anchor  was  secured,— 

“ Hallo  ! ” he  cried,  “ this  is  queer  ! ” 

“ What  is  the  matter,  Pencroft  ?”  asked  the  reporter. 

“The  matter  is,  that  it  was  not  I who  made  this  knot ! ” 

And  Pencroft  showed  a rope  which  fastened  the  cable  to  the 
bitt  itself. 

“ What,  it  was  not  you  ? ” asked  Gideon  Spilett. 

“ No ! I can  swear  to  it.  This  is  a reef  knot,  and  I always 
make  a running  bowline.” 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


513 


“ You  must  be  mistaken,  Pencroft.” 

“ I am  not  mistaken  ! ” declared  the  sailor.  “My  hand  does  it 
so  naturally,  and  one's  hand  is  never  mistaken ! ” 

“ Then  can  the  convicts  have  been  on  board  ? ” asked  Herbert. 

“ I know  nothing  about  that,”  answered  Pencroft,  “ but  what 
is  certain,  is  that  some  one  has  weighed  the  ‘ Bonadventure’s  ’ 
anchor  and  dropped  it  again ! And  look  here,  here  is  another 
proof ! The  cable  of  the  anchor  has  been  run  out,  and  its 
service  is  no  longer  at  the  hawse-hole.  I repeat  that  some 
one  has  been  using  our  vessel ! ” 

“ But  if  the  convicts  had  used  her,  they  would  have  pillaged 
her,  or  rather  gone  off  with  her.” 

“ Gone  off ! where  to— to  Tabor  Island  ? ” replied  Pencroft. 
“ Do  you  think  they  would  risk  themselves  in  a boat  of  such 
small  tonnage  ? ” 

“ We  must,  besides,  be  sure  that  they  know  of  the  islet,”  re- 
joined the  reporter. 

“ However  that  may  be,”  said  the  sailor,  “ as  sure  as  my  name 
is  Bonadventure  Pencroft,  of  the  Vineyard,  our  ‘ Bonadventure1 
has  sailed  without  us  ! ” 

The  sailor  was  so  positive  that  neither  Gideon  Spilett  nor 
Herbert  could  dispute  his  statement.  It  was  evident  that  the 
vessel  had  been  moved,  more  or  less,  since  Pencroft  had 
brought  her  to  Port  Balloon.  As  to  the  sailor,  he  had  not  the 
slightest  doubt  that  the  anchor  had  been  raised  and  then 
dropped  again.  Now,  what  was  the  use  of  these  two  manoeu- 
vres, unless  the  vessel  had  been  employed  in  some  expedition? 
“ But  how  was  it  we  did  not  see  the  ‘ Bonadventure J pass  in 
sight  of  the  island  ? ” observed  the  reporter,  who  was  anxious 
to  bring  forward  every  possible  objection. 

“Why,  Mr.  Spilett,”  replied  the  sailor,  “they  would  only 
have  to  start  in  the  night  with  a good  breeze,  and  they  would 
be  out  of  sight  of  the  island  in  two  hours.” 

“ Well,”  resumed  Gideon  Spilett,  “ I ask  again,  what  object 
could  the  convicts  have  had  in  using  the  ‘ Bonadventure  ’ an ( 
why,  after  they  had  made  use  of  her,  should  they  have  brought 
her  back  to  port  ? ” 

“ Why,  Mr.  Spilett,”  replied  the  sailor,  “ we  must  put  that 


514 


THJ6  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


among  the  unaccountable  things,  and  not  think  any  thing 
more  about  it.  The  chief  thing  is  that  the  ‘ Bonad venture  ’ 
was  there,  and  she  is  there  now.  Only,  unfortunately,  if  the 
convicts  take  her  a second  time,  we  shall  very  likely  not  find 
her  again  in  her  place ! ” 

“Then,  Pencroft,”  said  Herbert,  “would  it  not  be  wisest  to 
bring  the  ‘ Bonadventure  ’ off  to  Granite  House  ? ” 

“Yes  and  no,”  answered  Pencroft,  “or  rather  no.  The 
mouth  of  the  Mercy  is  a bad  place  for  a vessel,  and  the  sea  is 
heavy  there.” 

“ But  by  hauling  her  up  on  the  sand,  to  the  foot  of  the  Chim- 
neys ? ” 

“Perhaps  yes,”  replied  Pencroft.  “At  any  rate,  since’ we 
must  leave  Granite  House  for  a long  expedition,  I think  the 
‘Bonadventure  ’ will  be  safer  here  during  our  absence,  and  we 
shall  do  best  to  leave  her  here  until  the  island  is  rid  of  these 
blackguards.”  ^ 

“ That  is  exactly  my  opinion,”  said  the  reporter.  “ At  any 
rate  in  the  event  of  bad  weather,  she  will  not  be  exposed  here 
as  she  would  be  at  the  mouth  of  the  Mercy.” 

“But  suppose  the  convicts  pay  her  another  visit,”  said  Her- 
bert. 

“Well,  my  boy,”  replied  Pencroft,  “not  finding  her  here, 
they  would  not  be  long  in  finding  her  on  the  sands  of  Granite 
House,  and,  during  our  absence,  nothing  could  hinder  them 
from  seizing  her ! I agree,  therefore,  with  Mr.  Spilett,  that  she 
must  be  left  in  Port  Balloon.  But,  if  on  our  return  we  have 
not  rid  the  island  of  those  rascals,  it  will  be  prudent  to  bring 
our  boat  to  Granite  House,  until  the  time  when  we  need  not 
fear  any  unpleasant  visits.” 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


515 


Bonadventure’  would  be  always  within  reach,  under  the  eyes 
of  the  colonists,  and  if  necessary,  under  lock  and  key. 

That  evening  a telegram  was  sent  to  Ayrton,  requesting  him 
to  bring  from  the  corral  a couple  of  goats,  which  Neb  wished 
to  acclimatize  to  the  plateau.  Singularly  enough,  Ayrton  did 
not  acknowledge  the  receipt  of  the  dispatch,  as  he  wa3 
accustomed  to  do.  This  could  not  but  astonish  the  engineer. 
But  it  might  be  that  Ayrton  was  not  at  that  moment  in  the 
corral,  or  even  that  he  was  on  his  way  back  to  Granite  House. 
In  fact,  two  days  had  already  passed  since  his  departure,  and 
it  had  been  decided  that  on  the  evening  of  the  10th  or  at  the 
latest  the  morning  of  the  11th,  he  should  return.  The  colonists 
waited,  therefore,  for  Ayrton  to  appear  on  Prospect  Heights. 
Neb  and  Herbert  even  watched  at  the  bridge  so  as  to  be  ready 
to  lower  it  the  moment  their  companion  presented  himself. 

But  up  to  ten  in  the  evening,  there  were  no  signs  of  Ayrton. 
It  was,  therefore,  judged  best  to  send  a fresh  dispatch,  requir- 
ing an  immediate  reply. 

The  bell  of  the  telegraph  at  Granite  House  remained  mute. 

The  colonists’  uneasiness  was  great.  What  had  happened  ? 
Was  Ayrton  no  longer  at  the  corral,  or  if  he  was  still  there, 
had  he  no  longer  control  over  his  movements  ? Could  they  go 
to  the  corral  in  this  dark  night  ? 

They  consulted.  Some  wished  to  go,  the  others  to  remain. 

“ But,”  said  Herbert,  “ perhaps  some  accident  had  happened 
to  the  telegraphic  apparatus,  so  that  it  works  no  longer.” 

‘‘That  may  be,”  said  the  reporter. 

“Wait  till  to-morrow,”  replied  Cyrus  Harding.  “ It  is  pos- 
sible,  indeed,  that  Ayrton  has  not  received  our  dispatch,  or 
even  that  we  have  not  received  his.” 

They  waited,  of  course  not  without  some  anxiety. 

At  dawn  of  day,  the  11th  of  November,  Harding  again  sent 
the  electric  current  along  the  wire  and  received  no  reply. 

He  tried  again  : the  same  result. 

u Off  to  the  corral,”  said  he. 

“ And  well  armed ! ” added  Pencroft. 

It  was  immediately  decided  that  Granite  House  should  not 
be  left  alone,  and  that  Neb  should  remain  there.  After  having 


515 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


accompanied  his  friends  to  Creek  Clycerine,  he  raised  the 
bridge;  and  waiting  behind  a tree  he  watched  for  the  return 
of  either  of  his  companions  or  Ayrton. 

In  the  event  of  the  pirates  presenting  themselves  and  at- 
tempting to  force  the  passage,  he  was  to  endeavor  to  stop  them 
by  firing  on  them,  and  as  a last  resource  he  was  to  take  refuge 
in  Granite  House,  where,  the  lift  once  raised,  he  would  be  in 
safety. 

Cyrus  Harding,  Gideon  Spilett,  Herbert,  and  Pencroft  were 
to  repair  to  the  corral,  and  if  they  did  not  find  Ayrton,  search 
the  neighboring  woods. 

At  six  o’clock  in  the  morning,  the  engineer  and  his  three 
companions  had  passed  Creek  Glycerine,  and  Neb  posted  him- 
self behind  a small  mound  crowned  by  several  dragonniers,  on 
the  left  bank  of  the  stream. 

The  colonists,  after  leaving  the  plateau  of  Prospect  Heights, 
immediately  took  the  road  to  the  corral.  They  shouldered  their 
guns,  ready  to  fire  on  the  smallest  hostile  demonstration.  The 
two  rifles  and  the  two  guns  had  been  loaded  with  ball. 

The  wood  was  thick  on  each  side  of  the  road  and  might  easily 
have  concealed  the  convicts,  who  owing  to  their  weapons 
would  have  been  really  formidable. 

The  colonists  walked  rapidly  and  in  silence.  Top  preceded 
them,  sometimes  running  on  the  road,  sometimes  taking  a 
ramble  into  the  wood,  but  always  quiet  and  not  appearing  to 
fear  any  thing  unusual.  And  they  could  be  sure  that  the  faith- 
ful dog  would  not  allow  them  to  be  surprised  but  would  bark 
at  the  least  appearance  of  danger. 

Cyrus  Harding  and  his  companions  followed  beside  the  road 
the  wire  which  connected  the  corral  with  Granite  House. 
After  walking  for  nearly  two  miles,  they  had  not  as  yet  dis- 
covered any  explanation  of  the  difficulty.  The  posts  were  in 
good  order,  the  wire  regularly  extended.  However,  at  that 
moment  the  engineer  observed  that  the  wire  appeared  to  be 
slack,  and  on  arriving  at  post  No.  74,  Herbert,  who  was  in 
advance  stopped,  exclaiming,— 

“ The  wire  is  broken ! ” 

His  companions  hurried  forward  and  arrived  at  the  spot 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND,, 


517 


Where  the  lad  was  standing.  The  post  was  rooted  up  and 
lying  across  the  path.  The  unexpected  explanation  of  the 
difficulty  was  here,  and  it  was  evident  that  the  dispatches  from 
Granite  House  had  not  been  received  at  the  corral,  nor  those 
from  the  corral  at  Granite  House. 

44  It  wasn't  the  wind  that  blew  down  this  post,”  observed  Pen. 
croft. 

44  No,”  replied  Gideon  Spilett.  44  The  earth  has  been  dug  up 
round  its  foot,  and  it  has  been  torn  up  by  the  hand  of  man.” 

44  Besides,  the  wire  is  broken,”  added  Herbert,  showing  that 
the  wire  had  been  snapped. 

44Is  the  fracture  recent  ?”  asked  Harding. 

44  Yes,”  answered  Herbert, 44  it  has  certainly  been  done  quite 
lately.” 

“To  the  corral ! to  the  corral ! ” exclaimed  the  sailor. 

The  colonists  were  now  half-way  between  Granite  House 
and  the  corral,  having  still  two  miles  and  a half  to  go.  They 
pressed  forward  with  redoubled  speed. 

Indeed,  it  was  to  be  feared  that  some  serious  accident  had 
occurred  in  the  corral.  No  doubt,  Ayrton  might  have  sent  a 
telegram  which  had  not  arrived,  but  this  was  not  the  reason 
why  his  companions  were  so  uneasy,  for,  a more  unaccount- 
able circumstance,  Ayrton,  who  had  promised  to  return  the 
evening  before,  had  not  reappeared.  In  short,  it  was  not  with- 
out a motive  that  all  communication  had  been  stopped  between 
the  corral  and  Granite  House,  and  who  but  the  convicts 
could  have  any  interest  in  interrupting  this  communication  ? 

The  settlers  hastened  on,  their  hearts  oppressed  with  anxiety. 
They  were  sincerely  attached  to  their  new  companion.  Were 
they  to  find  him  struck  down  by  the  hands  of  those  of  whom 
he  was  formerly  the  leader  ? 

Soon  they  arrived  at  the  place  where  the  road  lod  along  the 
side  of  the  little  stream  which  flowed  from  the  Red  Creek  and 
watered  the  meadows  of  the  corral.  They  the"  moderated 
their  pace  so  that  they  should  not  be  out  of  breath  at  the  mo- 
ment when  a struggle  might  be  necessary.  Then  guns  were 
in  their  hands  ready  cocked.  The  forest  was  watched  on  every 
side.  Top  uttered  sullen  groans  which  were  rather  ominous. 


618 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


At  last  the  palisade  appeared  through  the  trees.  No  trace  o f 
any  damage  could  he  seen.  The  gate  was  shut  as  usual.  Deep 
silence  reigned  in  the  corral.  Neither  the  accustomed  bleating 
of  the  sheep  nor  Ayrton’s  voice  could  be  heard. 

“ Let  us  enter,”  said  Cyrus  Harding. 

And  the  engineer  advanced,  whilst  his  companions,  keeping 
watch  about  twenty  paces  behind  him,  were  ready  to  fire  at  a 
moment’s  notice. 

Harding  raised  the  inner  latch  of  the  gate  and  was  about  to 
push  it  back,  when  Top  barked  loudly.  A report  sounded 
and  was  responded  to  by  a cry  of  pain. 

Herbert,  struck  by  a bullet,  lay  stretched  on  the  ground. 


CHAPTER  VII. 


THE  REPORTER  AND  PENCROFT  IN  THE  CORRAL  — HERBERT’S 
WOUND— THE  SAILOR’S  DESPAIR— CONSULTATION  BETWEEN 
THE  REPORTER  AND  THE  ENGINEER— MODE  OF  TREATMENT- 
HOPE  NOT  ABANDONED— HOW  IS  NEB  TO  BE  WARNED— A SURE 
AND  FAITHFUL  MESSENGER— NEE’S  REPLY. 

At  Herbert’s  cry,  Pencroft  letting  his  gun  fall,  rushed 
towards  him. 

- “They  have  killed  him!”  he  cried.  “My  boy!  They  have 
killed  him!” 

Cyrus  Harding  and  Gideon  Spilett  ran  to  Herbert. 

The  reporter  listened  to  ascertain  if  the  poor  lad’s  heart 
was  still  beating. 

“ He  lives,”  said  he;  “ but  he  must  be  carried—” 

“To  Granite  House  ? that  is  impossible  !”  replied  the  engi- 
neer. 

“ Into  the  corral,  then ! ” said  Pencroft. 

“In  a moment,”  said  Harding. 

And  he  ran  round  the  left  corner  of  the  palisade.  There  he 
found  a convict,  who  aiming  at  him,  sent  a ball  through  his 
hat.  In  a few  seconds,  before  he  had  even  time  to  fire  his 
second  barrel,  he  fell,  struck  to  the  heart  by  Harding’s  dagger, 
more  sure  even  than  his  gun. 

During  this  time,  Gideon  Spilett  and  the  sailor  hoisted  them- 
selves over  the  palisade,  leapt  into  the  enclosure,  threw  down 
the  props  which  supported  the  inner  door,  ran  into  the  empty 
house,  and  soon  poor  Herbert  was  lying  on  Ayrton’s  bed.  In  a 
few  moments  Harding  was  by  his  side. 

On  seeing  Herbert  senseless,  the  sailor’s  grief  was  terrible. 
He  sobbed,  he  cried,  he  tried  to  beat  his  head  against  the  wall. 
Neither  the  engineer  nor  the  reporter  could  calm  him.  They 

521 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


JW2 

themselves  were  choked  with  emotion.  They  could  not  speak. 
However,  they  knew  that  it  depended  on  them  to  rescue  from 
death  the  poor  boy  who  was  suffering  beneath  their  eyes. 
Gideon  Spilett  had  not  passed  through  the  many  incidents  by 
which  his  life  had  been  chequered  without  acquiring  some 
slight  knowledge  of  medicine.  He  knew  a little  of  every 
thing,  and  several  times  he  had  been  obliged  to  attend  to 
wounds  produced  either  by  a sword-bayonet  or  shot.  Assisted 
by  Cyrus  Harding,  he  proceeded  to  render  the  aid  Herbert  re- 
quired. 

The  reporter  was  immediately  struck  by  the  complete  stupor 
in  which  Herbert  lay,  a stupor  owing  either  to  the  haemorrhage, 
or  to  the  shock,  the  baft  having  struck  a bone  with  sufficient 
force  to  produce  a violent  concussion. 

Herbert  was  deadly  pale,  and  his  pulse  so  feeble  that  Spilett 
only  felt  it  beat  at  long  intervals,  as  if  it  was  on  the  point  of 
stopping. 

These  symptoms  were  very  serious. 

Herbert’s  chest  was  laid  bare,  and  the  blood  having  been 
staunched  with  handkerchiefs,  it  was  bathed  with  cold  water. 

The  contusion,  or  rather  the  contused  wound  appeared— an 
oval  below  the  chest  between  the  third  and  fourth  ribs.  It  was 
there  that  Herbert  had  been  hit  by  the  bullet. 

Cyrus  Harding  and  Gideon  Spilett  then  turned  the  poor  boy 
over:  as  they  did  so  he  uttered  a moan  so  feeble  that  they 
almost  thought  it  was  his  last  sigh. 

Herbert’s  back  was  covered  with  blood  from  another 
contused  wound,  by  which  the  ball  had  immediately  escaped. 

“ God  be  praised  ! ” said  the  reporter,  “ the  ball  is  not  in  the 
body,  and  we  shall  not  have  to  extract  it.” 

“But  the  heart  ? ” asked  Harding. 

“ The  heart  has  not  been  touched ; if  it  had  been  Herbert 
would  be  dead ! ” 

“ Dead  ! ” exclaimed  Pencroft,  with  a groan. 

The  sailor  had  only  heard  the  last  words  uttered  by  the 
reporter. 

“ No,  Pencroft,”  replied  Cyrus  Harding,  ““no ! He  is  not 
dead.  His  pulse  still  beats.  He  has  even  uttered  a moan. 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


523 


But,  for  your  boy’s  sake,  calm  yourself.  We  have  need  of  all 
our  self-possession.  Do  not  make  us  lose  it,  my  friend.” 

Peneroft  was  silent,  but  a reaction  set  in,  and  great  tears 
rolled  down  his  cheeks. 

In  the  meanwhile  Gideon  Spilett  endeavored  to  collect  his 
ideas,  and  proceed  methodical': y.  After  tiis  examination  he 
had  no  doubt  that  the  ball,  entering  in  front,  between  the 
seventh  and  eighth  ribs,  had  issued  behind  between  the  third 
and  fourth.  But  what  mischief  had  the  ball  committed  in  its 
passage  ? What  important  organs  had  been  reached  ? A pro- 
fessional surgeon  would  have  had  difficulty  in  determining  this 
at  once,  and  still  more  so  the  reporter. 

However,  he  knew  one  thing,  this  was  that  he  would  have  to 
prevent  the  inflammatory  strangulation  of  the  injured  parts, 
then  to  contend  with  the  local  inflammation  and  fever  which 
would  result  from  the  wound,  perhaps  mortal!  Now,  what 
stiptics,  what  antiphlogistics  ought  to  be  employed  ? By  what 
means  could  inflammation  be  prevented  ? 

At  any  rate  the  most  important  thing  was  that  the  two 
wounds  should  be  dressed  without  delay.  It  did  not  appear 
necessary  to  Gideon  Spilett  that  a fresh  flow  of  blood  should  be 
caused  by  bathing  them  in  tepid  water,  and  compressing  their 
lips.  The  haemorrhage  had  been  very  abundant,  and  Herbert 
was  already  too  much  enfeebled  by  the  loss  of  blood. 

The  reporter,  therefore,  thought  it  best  to  simply  bathe  the 
two  wounds  with  cold  water. 

Herbert  was  placed  on  his  left  side,  and  was  maintained  in 
that  position. 

“He  must  not  be  moved,”  said  Gideon  Spilett.  “He  is  in 
the  most  favorable  position  for  the  wounds  in  his  back  and 
chest  to  suppurate  easily,  and  absolute  rest  is  necessary.” 

“What ! can’t  we  carry  him  to  Granite  House  ?”  asked  Pen- 
croft. 

“ No,  Peneroft,”  replied  the  reporter. 

‘ I’ll  pay  the  villains  off  ! ” cried  the  sailor,  shaking  his  fist  in 
a menacing  manner. 

“ Peneroft ! ” said  Cyrus  Harding. 

Gideon  Spilett  had  resumed  his  examination  of  the  wounded 


m 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


boy.  Herbert  was  still  so  frightfully  pale,  that  the  reporter  felt 
anxious. 

“ Cyrus,”  said  he,  “ I am  not  a surgeon.  I am  in  terrible  per- 
plexity. You  must  aid  me  with  your  advice,  your  experience 

“ Take  courage,  my  friend,”  answered  the  engineer,  pressing 
the  reporter’s  hand.  “ Judge  coolly.  Think  only  of  this  : 
Herbert  must  be  saved  ! ” 

These  words  restored  to  Gideon  Spilett  that  self-possession 
which  he  had  lost  in  a moment  of  discouragement  on  feeling 
his  great  responsibility.  He  seated  himself  close  to  the  bed. 
Cyrus  Harding  stood  near.  Pencroft  had  torn  up  his  shirt,  and 
was  mechanically  making  lint. 

Spilett  then  explained  to  Cyrus  Harding  that  he  thought  he 
ought  first  of  all  to  stop  the  haemorrhage,  but, not  close  the 
two  wounds,  or  cause  their  immediate  cicatrization,  for  there 
had  been  internal  perforation,  and  suppuration  must  not  be 
allowed  to  accumulate  in  the  chest. 

Harding  approved  entirely,  and  it  was  decided  that  the  two 
wounds  should  be  dressed  without  attempting  to  close  them  by 
immediate  coaptation. 

And  now  did  the  colonists  possess  an  efficacious  agent  to  act 
against  the  inflammation  which  might  occur  ? 

Yes.  They  had  one,  for  nature  had  generously  lavished  it. 
They  had  cold  water,  that  is  to  say,  the  most  powerful  sedative 
that  can  be  employed  against  inflammation  of  wounds,  the 
most  efficacious  therapeutic  agent  in  grave  cases,  and  the  one 
which  is  now  adopted  by  all  physicians.  Cold  water  has,  more- 
over, the  advantage  of  leaving  the  wound  in  absolute  rest,  and 
preserving  it  from  all  premature  dressing,  a considerable 
advantage,  since  it  has  been  found  by  experience  that  contact 
with  the  air  is  dangerous  during  the  first  days. 

Gideon  Spilett  and  Cyrus  Harding  reasoned  thus  with  their 
simple  good  sense,  and  they  acted  as  the  best  surgeon  would 
have  done.  Compresses  of  linen  were  applied  to  poor  Her- 
bert’s two  wounds,  and  were  kept  constantly  wet  with  cold 
water. 

The  sailor  had  at  first  lighted  a fire  in  the  hut,  which  was 
not  wanting  in  things  necessary  for  life.  Maple  sugar, 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


525 


medicinal  plants,  the  same  which  the  lad  had  gathered  on  the 
banks  of  Lake  Grant,  enabled  them,  to  make  some  refreshing 
drinks,  which  they  gave  him  without  his  taking  any  notice  of 
it.  His  fever  was  extremely  high,  and  all  that  day  and  night 
passed  without  his  becoming  conscious. 

Herbert’s  life  hung  on  a thread,  and  this  thread  might  break 
at  any  moment.  The  next  day,  the  12th  of  November,  the 
hopes  of  Harding  and  his  companions  slightly  revived.  Her- 
bert had  come  out  of  his  long  stupor.  He  opened  his  eyes, 
he  recognized  Cyrus  Harding,  the  reporter,  and  Pencroft.  He 
uttered  two  or  three  words.  He  did  not  know  what  had  hap- 
pened. They  told  him,  and  Spilett  begged  him  to  remain 
perfectly  still,  telling  him  that  his  life  was  not  in  danger,  and 
that  his  wounds  would  heal  in  a few  days.  However,  Herbert 
scarcely  suffered  at  all,  and  the  cold  water  with  which  they 
were  constantly  bathed,  prevented  any  inflammation  of  the 
wounds.  The  suppuration  was  established  in  a regular  way, 
the  fever  did  not  increase,  and  it  might  now  be  hoped  that  this 
terrible  wound  would  not  involve  any  catastrophe.  Pencroft 
felt  the  swelling  of  his  heart  gradually  subside.  He  was  like  a 
sister  of  mercy,  like  a mother  by  the  bed  of  her  child. 

Herbert  dozed  again,  but  his  sleep  appeared  more  natural 
“ Tell  me  again  that  you  hope,  Mr.  Spilett,”  said  Pencroft. 
“ Tell  me  again  that  you  will  save  Herbert ! ” 

“ Yes,  we  will  save  him  ! ” replied  the  reporter.  “ The 
wound  is  serious,  and,  perhaps,  even  the  ball  has  traversed 
the  lungs,  but  the  perforation  of  this  organ  is  not  fatal.” 

“ God  bless  you  ! ” answered  Pencroft. 

As  may  be  believed,  during  the  four  and  twenty  hours  they 
had  been  in  the  corral,  the  colonists  had  no  other  thought  than 
that  of  nursing  Herbert.  They  did  not  think  either  of  the 
danger  which  threatened  them  should  the  convicts  return,  01 
of  the  precautions  to  be  taken  for  the  future. 

But  on  this  day,  whilst  Pencroft  watched  by  the  sick-bed, 
Cyrus  Harding  and  the  reporter  consulted  as  to  what  it  would 
be  best  to  do. 

First  of  all  they  examined  the  corral.  There  was  not  a 
trace  of  Ayrton.  Had  the  unhappy  man  been  dragged  away  by 


526 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


his  former  accomplices  ? Had  he  resisted,  and  been  overcome 
in  the  struggle  ? This  last  supposition  was  only  too  probable. 
Gideon  Spilett,  at  the  moment  he  scaled  the  palisade,  had 
clearly  seen  some  one  of  the  convicts  running  along  the  south- 
ern spur  of  Mount  Franklin,  towards  whom  Top  had  sprung. 
It  was  one  of  those  whose  object  had  been  so  completely 
defeated  by  the  rocks  at  the  mouth  of  the  Mercy.  Besides,  the 
one  killed  by  Harding,  and  whose  body  was  found  outside  the 
enclosure,  of  course  belonged  to  Bob  Harvey’s  crew.  As  to  the 
corral,  it  had  not  suffered  any  damage.  The  gates  were  closed, 
and  the  animals  had  not  been  able  to  disperse  in  the  forest. 
Nor  could  they  see  traces  of  any  struggle,  any  devastation,  eithei 
in  the  hut,  or  in  the  palisade.  The  ammunition  only,  with 
which  Ayrton  had  been  supplied,  had  disappeared  with  him. 

“ The  unhappy  man  has  been  surprised,”  said  Harding,  “ and 
as  he  was  a man  to  defend  himself,  he  must  have  been  over- 
powered.” 

“ Yes,  that  is  to  be  feared ! ” said  the  reporter.  “ Then,  doubt- 
less, the  convicts  installed  themselves  in  the  corral  where  they 
found  plenty  of  every  thing,  and  only  fled  when  they  saw  us 
coming.  It  is  very  evident;  too,  that  at  this  moment  Ayrton, 
whether  living  or  dead,  is  not  here  ! ” 

“ We  shall  have  to  beat  the  forest,”  said  the  engineer,  “ and 
rid  the  island  of  these  wretches.  Pencroft’s  presentiments  were 
not  mistaken,  when  he  wished  to  hunt  them  as  wild  beasts. 
That  would  have  spared  us  all  these  misfortunes ! ” 

“Yes,”  answered  the  reporter,  “but  now  we  have  the  right 
to  be  merciless  ! ” 

“ At  any  rate,”  said  the  engineer,  “we  are  obliged  to  wait 
some  time,  and  to  remain  at  the  corral  until  we  can  carry 
Herbert  without  danger  to  Granite  House.” 

“ But  Neb?”  asked  the  reporter. 

“ Neb  is  in  safety.” 

“ But  if,  uneasy  at  our  absence,  he  would  venture  to  come  ? ” 

“ He  must  not  come !”  returned  Cyrus  Harding  quickly. 
“ He  would  be  murdered  on  the  road  ! ” 

“ It  is  very  probable,  however,  that  he  will  attempt  to  rejoin 
us!” 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


52T 


“Ah,  if  the  telegraph  still  acted,  he  might  he  warned  ! But 
tnat  is  impossible  now  ! As  to  leaving  Pencrof t and  Herbert 
here  alone,  we  could  not  do  it ! Well,  I will  go  alone  to  Gran- 
ite House.” 

“ No,  no ! Cyrus,”  answered  the  reporter,  “ you  must  not 
expose  yourself!  Your  courage  would  be  of  no  avail.  The 
villains  are  evidently  watching  the  corral,  they  are  hidden  in 
the  thick  woods  which  surround  it,  and  if  you  go  we  shall 
soon  have  to  regret  two  misfortunes  instead  of  one ! ” 

“ But  Neb  ? ” repeated  the  engineer.  “ It  is  now  four-and- 
twenty  hours  since  he  has  had  any  news  of  us ! He  will  be 
sure  to  come ! ” 

“ And  as  he  will  be  less  on  his  guard  than  we  should  be  our- 
selves,” added  Spilett,  “ he  will  be  killed  ! ” 

“ Is  there  really  no  way  of  warning  him  ? ” 

Whilst  the  engineer  thought,  his  eyes  fell  on  Top,  who, 
going  backwards  and  forwards,  seemed  to  say,— 

“Am  not  I here  ?” 

“ Top  ! ” exclaimed  Cyrus  Harding. 

The  animal  sprang  at  his  master’s  call. 

“ Yes,  Top  will  go,”  said  the  reporter,  who  had  understood 
the  engineer. 

“ Top  can  go  where  we  can  not ! He  will  carry  to  Granite 
House  the  news  of  the  corral,  and  he  will  bring  back  to  us  that 
from  Granite  House  ! ” 

“ Quick ! ” said  Harding.  “ Quick  ! ” 

Spilett  rapidly  tore  a leaf  from  his  note-book,  and  wrote 
these  words 

“Herbert  wounded.  We  are  at  the  corral.  Be  on  your 
guard.  Do  not  leave  Granite  House.  Have  the  convicts 
appeared  in  the  neighborhood  ? Reply  by  Top.” 

This  laconic  note  contained  all  that  Neb  ought  to  know,  and 
at  the  same  time  asked  all  that  the  colonists  wished  to  know. 
It  was  folded  and  fastened  to  Top’s  collar  in  a conspicuous 
position. 

“ Top,  my  dog,”  said  the  engineer,  caressing  the  animal,  “ Neb, 
Top ! Neb  ! Go,  go ! ” 

Top  bounded  at  these  words.  He  understood,  he  knew  what 


528 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


was  expected  of  him.  The  road  to  the  corral  was  familiar  to 
him.  In  less  than  an  hour  he  could  clear  it,  and  it  might  be 
hoped  that  where  neither  Cyrus  Harding  nor  the  reporter 
could  have  ventured  without  danger,  Top,  running  amongst 
the  grass  or  in  the  wood,  would  pass  unperceived. 

The  engineer  went  to  the  gate  of  the  corral  and  opened  it. 

“ Neb,  Top  ! Neb  ! ” repeated  the  engineer,  again  pointing  in 
the  direction  of  Granite  House. 

Top  sprang  forward,  and  almost  immediately  disappeared. 

“He  will  get  there ! ” said  the  reporter. 

“ Yes,  and  he  will  come  back,  the  faithful  animal ! ” 

“What  o’clock  is  it  ?”  asked  Gideon  Spilett. 

“ Ten.” 

“ In  an  hour  he  may  be  here.  We  will  watch  for  his  return.” 

The  gate  of  the  corral  was  closed.  The  engineer  and  the  re- 
porter re-entered  the  house.  Herbert  was  still  in  a sleep.  Pen- 
croft  kept  the  compresser  always  wet.  Spilett,  seeing  there 
was  nothing  he  could  do  at  that  moment,  busied  himself  in 
preparing  some  nourishment,  whilst  attentively  watching  that 
part  of  the  enclosure  against  the  hill,  at  which  an  attack 
might  be  expected. 

The  settlers  awaited  Top’s  return  with  much  anxiety.  A 
little  before  eleven  o’clock,  Cyrus  Harding  and  the  reporter, 
rifie  in  hand,  were  behind  the  gate,  ready  to  open  it  at  the  first 
bark  of  their  dog.  They  did  not  doubt  that  if  Top  had  arrived 
safely  at  Granite  House,  Neb  would  have  sent  him  back  im- 
mediately. They  had  both  been  there  for  about  ten  minutes, 
when  a report  was  heard,  followed  by  repeated  barks. 

The  engineer  opened  the  gate,  and  seeing  smoke  a hundred 
feet  off  in  the  wood,  he  fired  in  that  direction. 

Almost  immediately  Top  bounded  into  the  corral,  and  the 
gate  was  quickly  shut. 

“ Top,  Top  !”  exclaimed  the  engineer,  taking  the  dog’s  great 
honest  head  between  his  hands. 

A note  was  fastened  to  his  neck,  and  Cyrus  Harding  read 
these  words,  traced  in  Neb’s  large  writing 

“No  pirates  in  the  neighborhood  of  Granite  House  I will 
not  stir.  Poor  Mr.  Herbert ! ” 


CHAPTER  VIII 


THE  CONVICTS  IN  THE  NEIGHBORHOOD  OF  THE  CORRAL— PR®. 
VISIONAL  ESTABLISHMENT— CONTINUATION  OF  THE  TREAT- 
MENT OF  HERBERT  — PENCROFT’S  FIRST  REJOICINGS— CON- 
VERSATION ON  PAST  EVENTS— WHAT  THE  FUTURE  HAS  IN 
RESERVE — CYRUS  HARDING’S  IDEAS  ON  THE  SUBJECT. 

So  the  convicts  were  still  there,  watching  the  corral,  and 
determined  to  kill  the  settlers  one  after  the  other.  There  was 
nothing  to  be  done  but  to  treat  them  as  wild  beasts.  But  great 
precautions  must  be  taken,  for  just  now  the  wretches  had 
the  advantage  on  their  side,  seeing,  and  not  being  seen,  being 
able  to  surprise  by  the  suddenness  of  their  attack,  yet  not  to 
be  surprised  themselves.  Harding  made  arrangements,  there- 
fore, for  living  in  the  corral,  of  which  the  provisions  would  last 
for  a tolerable  length  of  time.  Ayrton’s  house  had  been  pro- 
vided with  all  that  was  necessary  for  existence,  and  the  con- 
victs, scared  by  the  arrival  of  the  settlers,  had  not  had  time  to 
pillage  it.  It  was  probable,  as  Gideon  Spnett  observed,  that 
things  had  occurred  as  follows  :— The  six  convicts, -disembarking 
on  the  island,  had  followed  the  southern  shore,  and  after  having 
traversed  the  double  shore  of  the  Serpentine  Peninsula,  not 
being  inclined  to  venture  into  the  Far  West  woods,  they  had 
reached  the  mouth  of  Falls  River.  From  this  point,  by  follow- 
ing the  right  bank  of  the  watercourse,  they  would  arrive  at 
the  spurs  of  Mount  Franklin,  among  which  they  would  natu- 
rally seek  a retreat,  and  they  could  not  have  been  long  in  dis- 
covering the  corral,  then  uninhabited.  There  they  had 
regularly  installed  themselves,  awaiting  the  moment  to  put 
their  abominable  schemes  into  execution.  Ayrton’s  arrival  had 
surprised  them,  but  they  had  managed  to  overpower  the  unfor- 
tunate man,  and— the  rest  may  be  easily  imagined  l 
M 529 


630 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


Now,  the  convicts— reduced  to  five,  it  is  true,  but  well  armed 
—were  roaming  the  woods,  and  to  venture  there  was  to 
expose  themselves  to  their  attacks,  which  could  be  neither 
guarded  against  nor  prevented. 

“ Wait ! There  is  nothing  else  to  be  done ! ” repeated  Cyrus 
Harding.  “ When  Herbert  is  cured,  we  can  organize  a general 
battue  of  the  island,  and  have  satisfaction  of  these  convicts. 
That  will  be  the  object  of  our  grand  expedition  at  the  same 
time — ” 

“ As  the  search  for  our  mysterious  protector,”  added  Gideon 
Spilett,  finishing  the  engineer’s  sentence.  “ Ah,  it  must  be 
acknowledged,  my  dear  Cyrus,  that  this  time  his  protection 
was  wanting  at  the  very  moment  when  it  was  most  necessary 
to  us  P 

“ Who  knows  ? ” replied  the  engineer. 

“ What  do  you  mean  ? ” asked  the  reporter. 

“ That  we  are  not  at  the  end  of  our  trouble  yet,  my  dear 
Spilett,  and  that  his  powerful  invention  may,  perhaps,  have 
another  opportunity  of  exercising  itself.  But  that  is  not  the 
question  now.  Herbert’s  life  before  every  thing.” 

This  was  the  colonists’  saddest  thought.  Several  days  passed, 
and  the  poor  boy’s  state  was  happily  no  worse.  Cold  water, 
always  kept  at  a suitable  temperature,  had  completely  pre- 
vented the  inflammation  of  the  wounds.  It  even  seemed  to  the 
reporter  that  this  water,  being  slightly  sulphurous— which  was 
explained  by* the  neighborhood  of  the  volcano— had  a more 
direct  action  on  the  healing.  The  suppuration  was  much  less 
abundant,  and— thanks  to  the  incessant  care  by  which  he  was 
surrounded— Herbert  returned  to  life,  and  his  fever  abated.  He 
was  besides  subjected  to  a severe  diet,  and  consequently  his 
weakness  was  and  would  be  extreme  ; but  there  was  no  want 
of  refreshing  drinks,  and  absolute  rest  was  of  the  greatest 
benefit  to  him.  Cyrus  Harding,  Gideon  Spilett,  and  Pencroft 
had  become  very  skillful  in  dressing  the  lad’s  wounds.  All  the 
linen  in  the  house  had  been  sacrificed.  Herbert’s  wounds, 
covered  with  compresses  and  lint,  were  pressed  neither  too 
much  nor  too  little,  so  as  to  cause  their  cicatrization  without 
determining  on  inflammatory  reaction.  The  reporter  used 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


531 


extreme  care  in  the  dressing,  knowing  well  the  importance  of 
it,  and  repeating  to  his  companions  that  which  most  surgeons 
willingly  admit,  that  it  is  perhaps  rarer  to  see  a dressing  well 
done  than  an  operation  well  performed. 

In  ten  days,  on  the  22d  of  November,  Herbert  was  con- 
siderably better.  He  had  begun  to  take  some  nourishment. 
The  color  was  returning  to  his  cheeks,  and  his  bright  eyes 
smiled  at  his  nurses.  He  talked  a little,  notwithstanding  Pen- 
croft’s  efforts,  who  talked  incessantly  to  prevent  him  from 
beginning  to  speak,  and  told  him  the  most  improbable  stories. 
Herbert  had  questioned  him  on  the  subject  of  Ayrton,  whom 
he  was  astonished  not  to  see  near  him,  thinking  that  he  was 
at  the  corral.  But  the  sailor,  not  wishing  to  distress  Herbert, 
contented  himself  by  replying  that  Ayrton  had  rejoined  Neb, 
so  as  to  defend  Granite  House. 

“ Humph,”  said  Pencroft,  “ these  pirates ! they  are  gentle- 
men who  have  no  right  to  any  consideration ! And  the  captain 
wanted  to  win  them  by  kindness  ! I?ll  send  them  some  kind- 
ness, but  in  the  shape  of  a good  bullet ! ” 

“ And  have  they  not  been  seen  again  ? ” asked  Herbert. 

“ No,  my  boy,”  answered  the  sailor,  “ but  we  shall  find 
them,  and  when  you  are  cured  we  shall  see  if  the  cowards, 
who  strike  us  from  behind,  will  dare  to  meet  us  face  to 
face ! ” 

“ I am  still  very  weak,  my  poor  Pencroft ! ” 

“ Well ! your  strength  will  return  gradually ! What’s  a ball 
through  the  chest  ? Nothing  but  a joke ! I’ve  seen  many,  and 
I don’t  think  much  of  them  !” 

At  last  things  appeared  to  be  going  on  well,  and  if  no  com- 
plication occurred,  Herbert’s  recovery  might  be  regarded  as  * 
certain.  But  what  would  have  been  the  condition  of  the 
colonists  if  his  state  had  been  aggravated  — if,  for  example, 
the  ball  had  remained  in  his  body,  if  his  arm  or  his  leg  had 
had  to  be  amputated  ? 

“ No,”  said  Spilett  more  than  once,  “ I have  never  thought 
of  such  a contingency  without  shuddering  ! ” 

“ And  yet,  if  it  had  been  necessary  to  operate,”  said  Harding 
one  day  to  him,  “ you  would  not  have  hesitated  ? ” 


532 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


“ No,  Cyrus  ! ” said  Gideon  Spilett,  “ but  thank  God  that  we 
have  been  spared  this  complication  ! ” 

As  in  so  many  other  conjectures,  the  colonists  had  appealed 
to  the  logic  of  that  simple  good  sense  of  which  they  had 
made  use  so  often,  and  once  more,  thanks  to  their  general 
knowledge,  it  had  succeeded ! But  might  not  a time  come 
when  all  their  science  would  be  at  fault  ? They  were  alone 
on  the  island.  Now.  men  in  all  states  of  society  are  necessary 
to  each  other.  Cyrus  Harding  knew  this  well,  and  sometimes 
he  asked  himself  if  some  circumstance  might  not  occur  which 
they  would  be  powerless  to  surmount.  It  appeared  to  him,  be- 
sides, that  he  and  his  companions,  till  then  so  fortunate,  had 
entered  into  an  unlucky  period.  During  the  three  years  and  a 
half  which  had  elapsed  since  their  escape  from  Richmond,  it 
might  be  said  they  had  every  thing  their  own  way.  The  island 
had  abundantly  supplied  them  with  minerals,  vegetables, 
animals,  and  as  Nature  had  constantly  loaded  them,  their 
science  had  known  how  to  take  advantage  of  what  she  offered 
them.  The  well  being  of  the  colony  was  therefore  complete. 
Moreover,  in  certain  occurrences  an  inexplicable  influence  had 
come  to  their  aid ! ...  But  all  that  could  only  be  for  a time. 

In  short,  Cyrus  Harding  believed  that  fortune  had  turned 
against  them. 

In  fact,  the  convicts’  ship  had  appeared  in  the  waters  of  the 
island,  and  if  the  pirates  had  been,  so  to  speak,  miraculously 
destroyed,  six  of  them,  at  least,  had  escaped  the  catastrophe. 
They  had  disembarked  on  the  island,  and  it  was  almost  im- 
possible to  get  at  the  five  who  survived.  Ayrton  had  no  doubt 
been  murdered  by  these  wretches,  who  possessed  fire-arms, 
and  at  the  first  use  they  had  made  of  them,  Herbert  had  fallen, 
wounded  almost  mortally.  Were  these  the  first  blows  aimed  by 
adverse  fortune  at  the  colonists?  This  was  often  asked  by 
Harding.  This  was  often  repeated  by  the  reporter ; and  it 
appeared  to  him  also  that  the  intervention,  so  strange,  yet  so 
efficacious,  which  till  then  had  served  them  so  well,  had  now 
failed  them.  Had  this  mysterious  being,  what  ever  he  was, 
whose  existence  could  not  be  denied,  abandoned  the  island  ? 
Had  he  in  his  turn  succumbed  ? 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


533 


No  reply  was  possible  to  these  questions.  But  it  must  not  be 
imagined  that  because  Harding  and  his  companions  spoke  of 
these  things,  they  were  men  to  despair.  Far  from  that.  They 
looked  their  situation  in  the  face,  they  analyzed  the  chances, 
they  prepared  themselves  for  any  event,  they  stood  firm  and 
straight  before  the  future,  and  if  adversity  was  at  last  to  strike 
them.it  would  find  in  them  men  prepared  to  struggle  against  it 


CHAPTER  IX. 


&Q  NEWS  OF  NEB  — A PROPOSAL  FROM  PENCROFT  AND  THIS 
REPORTER,  WHICH  IS  NOT  ACCEPTED  — SEVERAL  SORTIES  BY 
GIDEON  SPILETT  — A RAG  OF  CLOTH  — A MESSAGE —HASTY 
DEPARTURE  — ARRIVAL  ON  THE  PLATEAU  OF  PROSPECT 
HEIGHT'S. 

The  convalescence  of  the  young  invalid  was  regularly 
progressing.  One  thing  only  was  now  to  he  desired,  that  his 
state  would  allow  him  to  be  brought  to  Granite  House.  How- 
ever well  built  and  supplied  the  corral  house  was,  it  could  not 
be  so  comfortable  as  the  healthy  granite  dwelling.  Besides,  it 
did  not  offer  the  same  security,  and  its  tenants,  notwithstand- 
ing their  watchfulness,  were  here  always  in  fear  of  some  shot 
from  the  convicts.  There,  on  the  contrary,  in  the  middle  of 
that  impregnable  and  Inaccessible  cliff,  they  would  have  noth- 
ing to  fear,  and  any  attack  on  their  persons  would  certainly 
fail.  They  therefore  waited  impatiently  for  the  moment  when 
Herbert  might  be  moved  witnout  danger  from  his  wound,  and 
they  were  determined  to  make  this  move,  although  the  com- 
munication through  Jacamar  Wood  was  very  difficult. 

They  had  no  news  from  Neb,  but  were  not  uneasy  on  that 
account.  The  courageous  negro,  well  intrenched  in  the  depths 
of  Granite  House,  would  not  allow  himself  to  be  surprised. 
Top  had  not  been  sent  again  to  him,  as  it  appeared  useless  to 
expose  the  faithful  dog  to  some  shot  which  might  deprive  the 
settlers  of  their  most  useful  auxiliary. 

They  waited,  therefore,  although  they  were  anxious  to  be 
reunited  at  Granite  House.  It  pained  the  engineer  to  see  his 
forces  divided,  for  it  gave  great  advantage  to  the  pirates.  Since 
Ayrton’s  disappearance  they  were  only  four  against  five,  for 
Herbert  could  not  yet  be  counted,  and  this  was  not  the  least 

m 


TH25  KBOfflfP  OF  TECS  TSLASUX, 


m 


^are  of  the  brave  boy,  wfto  we!!  understood  the  trouble  of  which 
he  was  the  cause. 

The  question  of  knowing  how,  in  their  condition,  they  were 
to  act  against  the  pirates,  was  thoroughly  discussed  on  the 
29th  of  November  by  Cyrus  Harding,  Gideon  Spillet,  and  Pen- 
croft,  at  a moment  when  Herbert  was  asleep  and  could  not  hear 
them.  “My  friends,”  said  the  reporter,  after  they  had  talked 
of  Neb  and  of  the  impossibility  of  communicating  with  him, 
“ I think,  like  you,  that  to  venture  on  the  road  to  the  corral 
Would  be  to  risk  receiving  a gun-shot  without  being  able  to 
return  it.  But  do  you  not  think  that  the  best  thing  to  be  done 
now  is  to  openly  give  chase  to  these  wretches  ? ” 

“That  is  just  what  I was  thinking,”  answered  Pencroft. 
“ I believe  we’re  not  fellows  to  be  afraid  of  a bullet,  and  as  for 
me,  if  Captain  Harding  approves,  I’m  ready  to  dash  into  the 
forest ! Why,  hang  it,  one  man  is  equal  to  another ! ” 

“ But  is  he  equal  to  five?”  asked  the  engineer. 

“I  will  join  Pencroft,”  said  the  reporter,  “and  both  of  us, 
well-armed  and  accompanied  by  Top—” 

“ My  dear  Spilett,  and  you,  Pencroft,  ” answered  Harding, 
“ let  us  reason  cooly.  If  the  convicts  were  hid  in  one  spot  of 
the  island,  if  we  knew  that  spot,  and  had  only  to  dislodge 
them,  I would  undertake  a direct  attack;  but  is  there  not 
occasion  to  fear,  on  the  contrary,  that  they  are  sure  to  fire  the 
first  shot.” 

“Well,  Captain,”  cried  Pencroft,  “a  bullet  does  not  always 
reach  i'  s mark.” 

“ That  which  struck  Herbert  did  not  miss,  Pencroft,”  replied 
the  engineer.  “Besides,  observe  that  if  both  of  you  left  the 
corral  I should  remain  here  alone  to  defend  it.  I)o  you  imagine 
that  the  convicts  will  not  see  you  leave  it,  that  they  will  not 
allow  you  to  enter  the  forest,  and  that  they  will  not  attack  it 
during  your  absence,  knowing  that  there  is  no  one  here  but  a 
wounded  boy  and  a man?  ” 

“ You  are  right,  captain,”  replied  Pencroft,  his  chest  swell- 
ing with  sullen  anger.  “You  are  right;  they  will  do  all  they 
can  to  retake  the  corral,  which  they  know  to  be  well  stored^ 
and  alone  you  could  not  hold  it  against  them.” 


636 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


“ Oh,  if  we  were  only  at  Granite  House  ! ” 

“If  we  were  at  Granite  House,”  answered  the  engineer 
“the  case  would  he  very  different.  There  I should  not  ho 
afraid  to  leave  Herbert  with  one,  whilst  the  other  three  went 
to  search  the  forests  of  the  island.  But  we  are  at  the  corral, 
and  it  is  best  to  stay  here  until  we  can  leave  it  together.” 

Cyrus  Harding’s  reasoning  was  unanswerable,  and  his  com- 
panions understood  it  well. 

“ If  only  Ayrton  was  still  one  of  us ! ” said  Gideon  Spillet. 
“ Poor  fellow ! his  return  to  social  life  will  have  been  but  of 
short  duration.” 

“ If  he  is  dead,”  added  Pencrof t,  in  a peculiar  tone. 

“ Bo  you  hope,  then,  Pencroft,  that  the  villains  have  spared 
him  ? ” asked  Gideon  Spilett. 

“ Yes,  if  they  had  any  interest  in  doing  so.” 

“ What ! you  suppose  that  Ayrton,  finding  his  old  com- 
panions, forgetting  all  that  he  owes  us—” 

“Who  knows?”  answered  the  sailor,  who  did  not  hazard 
this  shameful  supposition  without  hesitating. 

“Pencroft,”  said  Harding,  taking  the  sailor’s  arm,  “that  is  a 
wicked  idea  of  yours,  and  you  will  distress  me  much  if  you 
persist  in  speaking  thus.  I will  answer  for  Ayrton’s  fidelity.” 
“ And  I also,”  added  the  reporter  quickly. 

“Yes,  yes,  captain,  I was  wrong,”  replied  Pencroft;  “it  was  a 
wicked  idea  indeed  that  I had,  and  nothing  justifies  it.  But 
what  can  I do?  I’m  not  in  my  senses.  This  imprisonment  in 
the  corral  wearies  me  horribly,  and  I have  never  felt  so  excited 
as  I do  now.” 

“Be  patient,  Pencroft,”  replied  the  engineer.  “How  long 
will  it  be,  my  dear  Spilett,  before  you  think  Herbert  may  be 
carried  to  Granite  House. 

“That  is  difficult  to  say,  Cyrus,”  answered  the  reporter,  “for 
any  imprudence  might  involve  terrible  consequences.  But  his 
convalesence  is  progressing,  and  if  he  continues  to  gain 
strength,  in  eight  days  from  now— well,  we  shall  see.” 

Eight  days ! That  would  put  off  the  return  to  Granite  House 
until  the  first  days  of  December.  At  this  time  two  months  of 
spring  had  already  passed.  The  weather  w^  fine,  and  the  heat 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


53* 

began  to  be  isjreat.  The  forests  oi!  the  island  were  in  full  leaf, 
and  the  time  was  approaching  v/hon  the  usual  crops  ought  to 
he  gathered.  Tho  return  to  the  - Heights 

would,  therefore,  be  followed  by  extensive  - * labors, 

interrupted  only  by  the  projected  expedition  through  the 
island. 

It  can,  therefore,  be  well  understood  how  injurious  this 
seclusion  in  the  corral  must  be  to  the  colonists. 

But  if  they  were  compelled  to  bow  before  necessity,  they  did 
not  do  so  without  impatience. 

Once  or  twice  the  reporter  ventured  out  into  the  road  and 
made  the  tour  of  the  palisade.  Top  accompanied  him,  and 
Gideon  Spilett,  his  gun  cocked,  was  ready  for  any  emergency. 

He  met  with  no  misadventure  and  found  no  suspicious 
traces.  His  dog  would  have  warned  him  of  any  danger,  and, 
as  Top  did  not  bark,  it  might  be  concluded  that  there  was 
nothing  to  fear  at  that  moment  at  least,  and  that  the  con- 
victs were  occupied  in  another  part  of  the  island. 

However,  on  his  second  sortie,  on  the  27th  of  November, 
Gideon  Spilett,  who  had  ventured  a quarter  of  mile  into  the 
wood,  toward  the  south  of  the  mountain,  remarked  that  Top 
scented  something.  The  dog  had  no  longer  his  unconcerned 
manner;  he  went  backwards  and  forwards,  ferreting  amongst 
the  grass  and  bushes  as  if  his  smell  had  revealed  some  sus- 
picious object  to  him. 

Gideon  Spilett  followed  Top,  encouraged  him,  excited  him 
by  his  voice,  whilst  keeping  a sharp  look-out,  his  gun  ready  to 
fire,  and  sheltering  himself  behind  the  trees.  It  was  not 
probable  that  Top  scented  the  presence  of  man,  for  in  that 
case,  he  would  have  annodneed  it  by  half-uttered,  sullen,  angry 
barks.  Now,  as  he  did  not  growl,  it  was  because  danger  was 
neither  near  nor  approaching. 

Nearly  five  minutes  passed  thus,  Top  rummaging,  the  re- 
porter following  him  prudently,  when,  all  at  once,  the  dog 
rushed  towards  a thick  bush,  and  drew  out  a rag. 

It  was  a piece  of  cloth,  stained  and  torn,  which  Spilett  im- 
mediately brought  back  to  the  corral.  There  it  was  examined 
by  the  colonists.,  who  found  that  it  was  a fragment  of  4yr- 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


ton’8  waistcoat,  a piece  of  that  Mi,  manufactured  solely  by 
the  Granite  House  factory. 

“You  see,  Pencroft,”  observed  Harding,  “there  has  been 
resistance  on  the  part  of  the  unfortunate  Ayrton.  The  convicts 
have  dragged  him  away  in  spite  of  himself ! Do  you  still 
doubt  his  honesty  ? ” 

“ No,  captain,”  answered  the  sailor,  “ and  I repented  of  my 
suspicion  a long  time  ago  ! But  it  seems  to  me  that  something 
may  be  learned  from  the  incident.” 

“ What  is  that  ? ” asked  the  reporter. 

“ It  is  that  Ayrton  was  not  killed  at  the  corral ! That  they 
dragged  him  away  living,  since  he  has  resisted.  Therefore, 
perhaps,  he  is  still  living ! ” 

“Perhaps,  indeed,”  replied  the  engineer,  who  remained 
thoughtful. 

This  was  a hope,  to  which  Ayrton’s  companions  could  still 
hold.  Indeed,  they  had  before  believed  that,  surprised  in  the 
corral,  Ayrton  had  fallen  by  a bullet,  as  Herbert  had  fallen. 
But  if  the  convicts  had  not  killed  him  at  first,  if  they  had 
brought  him  living  to  another  part  of  the  island,  might  it  not 
be  admitted  that  he  was  still  their  prisoner?  Perhaps,  even, 
one  of  them  had  found  in  Ayrton  his  old  Australian  companion 
Ben  Joyce,  the  chief  of  the  escaped  convicts.  And  who  knows 
but  that  they  had  conceived  the  impossible  hope  of  bringing 
back  Ayrton  to  themselves?  He  would  have  been  very  useful 
to  them  if  they  had  been  able  to  make  him  turn  traitor ! 

This  incident  was,  therefore,  favorably  interpreted  at  the 
corral,  and  it  no  longer  appeared  impossible  that  they  should 
find  Ayrton  again.  On  his  side,  if  he  was  only  a prisoner, 
Ayrton  would  no  doubt  do  all  he  could  to  escape  from  the 
hands  of  the  villains,  and  this  would  be  a powerful  aid  to  the 
settlers ! 

“At  any  rate,”  observed  Gideon  Spilett,  “if  happily  Ayrton 
did  manage  to  escape,  he  would  go  directly  to  Granite  House, 
for  he  could  not  know  of  the  attempt  of  assassination  of  which 
Herbert  has  been  a victim,  and  consequently  would  never  think 
pf  our  being  imprisoned  in  the  corral.” 

u Oh  1 I wish  that  he  was  there,  at  Granite  House  I”  cried  Pen- 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


croft,  “ and  that  we  were  there,  too  ! For,  although  the  rascals 
can  do  nothing  to  our  house,  they  may  plunder  the  plateau,  our 
plantations,  our  poultry-yard ! ” 

Pencroft  had  become  a thorough  farmer,  heartily  attached  to 
his  crops.  But  it  must  be  said  that  Herbert  was  more  anxious 
than  any  to  return  to  Granite  House,  for  he  knew  how  much 
the  presence  of  the  settlers  was  needed  there.  And  it  was  he 
who  was  keeping  them  at  the  corral.  Therefore,  one  idea 
occupied  his  mind— to  leave  the  corral,  and  when ! He  be^ 
lieved  he  could  bear  removal  to  Granite  House.  He  was  sure 
his  strength  would  return  more  quickly  in  his  room,  with  the 
air  and  sight  of  the  sea ! 

Several  times  he  pressed  Gideon  Spilett,  but  the  latter,  fear- 
ing, with  good  reason,  that  Herbert’s  wounds,  half  healed, 
might  reopen  on  the  way,  did  not  give  the  order  to  start. 

However,  something  occurred  which  compelled  Cryus  Hard- 
ing and  his  two  friends  to  yield  to  the  lad’s  wish,  and  Giod 
alone  knew  that  this  determination  might  cause  them  grief 
and  remorse. 

It  was  the  29th  of  November,  seven  o’clock  in  the  evening. 
The  three  settlers  were  talking  in  Herbert’s  room,  when  they 
heard  Top  utter  quick  barks. 

Harding,  Pencroft,  and  Spillet  seized  their  guns  and  ran  out 
of  the  house.  Top,  at  the  foot  of  the  palisade,  was  jumping, 
barking,  but  it  was  with  pleasure,  not  anger. 

“Some  one  is  coming.” 

“Yes.” 

“It  is  not  an  enemy  !” 

“ Or  Ayrton?” 

These  words  had  hardly  been  exchanged  between  the 
engineer  and  his  two  companions  when  a body  leapt  over  the 
palisade  and  fell  on  the  ground  inside  the  corral. 

It  was  Jup,  Master  Jup  in  person,  to  whom  Top  im- 
mediately gave  a most  cordial  reception. 

“ Jup !”  exclaimed  Pencroft. 

“ Neb  has  sent  him  to  us,”  said  the  reporter. 

“ Then,”  replied  the  engineer,  “ he  must  have  sbme  note  on 
him.” 


540 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


Pencrofi  rushed  up  to  the  orang.  Certainly  if  Neb  had  any 
important  matter  to  communicate  to  his  master  he  could  not 
employ  a more  sure  or  more  rapid  messenger,  who  could  pass 
where  neither  of  the  colonists  could,  not  even  Top  himself. 

Cyrus  Harding  was  not  mistaken.  At  Jup’s  neck  hung  a 
small  hag,  and  in  this  bag  was  found  a little  note  traced  by 
Neb’s  hand. 

The  despair  of  Harding  and  his  companions  may  be  imagined 
when  they  read  these  words  : 

“ Friday,  six  o’clock  in  the  morning. 

“ Plateau  invaded  by  convicts. 

“Neb.” 

They  gazed  at  each  other  without  uttering  a word,  then  they 
re-entered  the  house.  What  were  they  to  do  ? The  convicts 
dn  Prospect  Heights ! that  was  disaster,  devastation,  ruin. 

Herbert,  on  seeing  the  engineer,  the  reporter,  and  Pencroft 
re-enter,  guessed  that  their  situation  was  aggravated,  and  when 
he  saw  Jup,  he  no  longer  doubted  that  some  misfortune 
menaced  Granite  House. 

“Captain  Harding,”  said  he,  “I  must  go;  I can  bear  the 
journey.  I must  go.” 

Gideon  Spilett  approached  Herbert ; then,  having  looked  at 
him,— 

“ Let  us  go,  then ! ” said  he. 

The  question  was  quickly  decided  whether  Herbert  should  be 
carried  on  a litter  or  in  the  cart  which  had  brought  Ayrton  to 
the  corral.  The  motion  of  the  litter  would  have  been  more 
easy  for  the  wounded  lad,  but  it  would  have  necessitated  two 
bearers,  that  is  to  say,  there  would  been  two  guns  less  for 
defense  if  an  attack  was  made  on  the  road.  Would  they 
not,  on  the  contrary,  by  employing  the  cart,  leave  every  arm 
free?  Was  it  impossible  to  place  the  mattress  on  which  Her- 
bert was  lying  in  it,  and  to  advance  with  so  much  care  that 
any  jolt  would  be  avoided  ? It  could  be  done. 

The  cart  was  brought.  Pencroft  harnessed  the  onaga. 
Cyrus  Harding  and  the  reporter  raised  Herbert’s  mattress  and 
placed  it  on  the  bottom  of  the  cart.  The  weather  was  fine, 
The  sun’s  bright  rays  glanced  through  the  trees. 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


541 


“Are  the  guns  ready  ?”  asked  Cyrus  Harding. 

They  were.  The  engineer  and  Pencroft,  each  armed  with  a 
double-barrelled  gun,  and  Gideon  Spilett  carrying  his  rifle, 
had  nothing  to  do  but  start. 

“Are  you  comfortable,  Herbert?”  asked  the  engineer. 

“ Ah,  captain,”  replied  the  lad,  “ don’t  be  uneasy,  I shall  not 
die  on  the  road ! ” 

Whilst  speaking  thus,  it  could  be  seen  that  the  poor  boy  had 
called  up  all  his  energy,  and  by  the  energy  of  a powerful  will 
had  collected  his  failing  strength. 

The  engineer  felt  his  heart  sink  painfully.  He  still  hesitated 
to  give  the  signal  for  departure  ; but  that  would  have  driven 
Herbert  to  despair— killed  him  perhaps. 

“ Forward ! ” said  Harding. 

The  gate  of  the  corral  was  opened.  Jup  and  Top,  who 
knew  when  to  be  silent,  ran  in  advance.  The  cart  came  out, 
the  gate  was  reclosed,  and  the  onaga,  led  by  Pencroft,  advanced 
at  a slow  pace. 

Certainly,  it  would  have  been  safer  to  have  taken  a different 
road  than  that  which  led  straight  from  the  corral  to  Granite 
House,  but  the  cart  would  have  met  with  great  difficulties  in 
moving  under  the  trees.  It  was  necessary,  therefore,  to  follow 
this  way,  although  it  was  well  known  to  the  convicts. 

Cyrus  Harding  and  Gideon  Spilett  walked  one  on  each  side 
of  the  cart,  ready  to  answer  to  any  attack.  However,  it  was 
not  probable  that  the  convicts  would  have  yet  left  the  plateau 
of  Prospect  Heights. 

Neb’s  note  had  evidently  been  written  and  sent  as  soon  as 
the  convicts  had  shown  themselves  there.  Now,  this  note  was 
dated  six  o’clock  in  the  morning,  and  the  active  orang,  ac- 
customed to  come  frequently  to  the  corral,  had  taken  scarcely 
three-quarters  of  an  hour  to  cross  the  five  miles  which  separated 
it  from  Granite  House.  They  would,  therefore,  be  safe  at  that 
time,  and  if  there  was  any  occasion  for  firing,  it  would  prob- 
ably not  be  until  they  were  in  the  neighborhood  of  Granite 
House.  However,  the  colonists  kept  a strict  watch.  Top  and 
Jup,  the  latter  armed  with  his  club,  sometimes  in  front,  some- 
times beating  the  wood  at  the  sides  of  the  road,  signalized  no 


542 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


danger.  The  cart  advanced  slowly  under  Pencroft’s  guidance. 
It  had  left  the  corral  at  half-past  seven.  An  hour  after,  four 
out  of  the  five  miles  had  been  cleared,  without  any  incident 
having  occurred.  The  road  was  as  deserted  as  all  that  part  of 
the  Jacamar  Wood  which  lay  between  the  Mercy  and  the  lake. 
There  was  no  occasion  for  any  warning.  The  wood  appeared 
as  deserted  as  on  the  day  when  the  colonists  had  first  landed  on 
the  island. 

They  approached  the  plateau.  Another  mile  and  they  would 
see  the  bridge  over  Creek  Glycerine.  Cyrus  Harding  expected 
to  find  it  in  its  place;  supposing  that  the  convicts  would  have 
crossed  it,  and  that,  after  having  passed  one  of  the  streams 
which  enclosed  the  plateau,  they  would  have  taken  the  pre~ 
caution  to  lower  it  again,  so  as  keep  open  a retreat. 

At  length  an  opening  in  the  trees  allowed  the  sea-horizon  to 
be  seen.  But  the  cart  continued  its  .progress,  for  not  one  of 
its  defenders  thought  of  abandoning  it. 

At  that  moment  Pencroft  stopped  the  onaga,  and  in  a hoarse 
voice,— 

“Oh ! the  villains ! ” he  exclaimed. 

And  he  pointed  to  a thick  smoke  rising  from  the  mill,  the 
sheds,  and  the  buildings  at  the  poultry-yard. 

A man  was  moving  about  in  the  midst  of  the  smoke.  It 
was  Neb. 

His  companions  uttered  a shout.  He  heard,  and  ran  to  meet 
them. 

The  convicts  had  left  the  plateau  nearly  half -an -hour 
before,  having  devastated  it ! 

“ And  Mr.  Herbert  ?”  asked  Neb. 

Gideon  Spilett  returned  to  the  cari 

Herbert  had  lost  consciousness  l 


CHAPTER  X 


HERBERT  CARRIED  TO  GRANITE  HOUSE— NEB  RELATES  ALL  THAT 
HAS  HAPPENED— HARDING’S  VISIT  TO  THE  PLATEAU  — RUIN 
AND  DEVASTATION— THE  COLONISTS  BAFFLED  BY  HERBERT’S 
ILLNESS  — WILLOW  BARK— A DEADLY  FEVER  — TOP  BARKS 
AGAIN  ! 

Of  the  convicts,  the  dangers  which  menaced  Granite  House, 
the  ruins  with  which  the  plateau  was  covered,  the  colonists 
thought  no  longer.  Herbert’s  critical  state  outweighed  all 
other  considerations.  Would  the  removal  prove  fatal  to  him 
by  causing  some  internal  injury?  The  reporter  could  not 
affirm  it,  but  he  and  his  companions  almost  despaired  of  the 
result.  The  cart  was  brought  to  the  bend  of  the  river. 
There  some  branches,  disposed  as  a litter,  received  the  mattress 
on  which  lay  the  unconscious  Herbert.  Ten  minutes  after, 
Cyrus  Harding,  Spilett,  and  Pencroft  were  at  the  foot  of  the 
cliff,  leaving  Neb  to  take  the  cart  on  to  the  plateau  of  Prospect 
Heights.  The  lift  was  put  in  motion,  and  Herbert  was  soon 
stretched  on  his  bed  in  Granite  House. 

What  cares  were  lavished  on  him  to  bring  him  back  to  life  ! 
He  smiled  for  a moment  on  finding  himself  in  his  room,  but 
could  scarcely  even  murmur  a few  words,  so  great  was  his 
weakness.  Gideon  Spilett  examined  his  wounds.  He  feared 
to  find  them  reopened,  having  been  imperfectly  healed. 
There  was  nothing  of  the  sort.  From  whence,  then,  came  this 
prostration?  Why  was  Herbert  so  much  worse?  The  lad  then 
fell  into  a kind  of  feverish  sleep,  and  the  reporter  and  Pencroft 
remained  near  the  bed.  During  tins  time,  Harding  told  Neb 
all  that  had  happened  at  the  corral,  and  Neb  recounted  to 
his  master  the  events  of  which  the  plateau  had  just  been  the 
theater. 

m 


544 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


It  was  only  during  the  preceding  night  that  the  convicts  had 
appeared  on  the  edge  of  the  forest,  at  the  approaches  to  Creek 
Glycerine.  Neb,  who  was  watching  near  the  poultry-yard,  had 
not  hesitated  to  fire  at  one  of  the  pirates,  who  was  about  to 
cross  the  stream;  but  in  the  darkness  he  could  not  tell  whether 
the  man  had  been  hit  or  not.  At  any  rate,  it  was  not  enough 
to  frighten  away  the  band,  and  Neb  had  only  just  time  to 
get  up  to  Granite  House,  where  at  least  he  was  in  safety. 

But  what  was  he  to  do  there?  How  prevent  the  devastations 
with  which  the  convicts  threatened  the  plateau?  Had  Neb 
any  means  by  which  to  warn  his  master?  And,  besides,  in 
what  situation  were  the  inhabitants  of  the  corral  themselves  ? 
Cyrus  Harding  and  his  companions  had  left  on  the  11th  of 
November,  and  it  was  now  the  29th.  It  was,  therefore,  nine- 
teen days  since  Neb  had  other  news  than  that  brought  by  Top 
—disastrous  news:  Ayrton  disappeared,  Herbert  severely  wound- 
ed, the  engineer,  reporter,  and  sailor,  as  it  were,  imprisoned  in 
the  corral ! 

“ What  was  he  to  do  ? ” asked  poor  Neb.  Personally  he  had 
nothing  to  fear,  for  the  convicts  could  not  reach  him  in  Granite 
House.  But  the  buildings,  the  plantations,  all  their  arrange- 
ments at  the  mercy  of  the  pirates ! Would  it  not  be  best  to  let 
Cyrus  Harding  judge  of  what  he  ought  to  do,  and  to  warn  him, 
at  least,  of  the  danger  which  threatened  him? 

Neb  then  thought  of  employing  Jup,  and  confiding  a note 
to  him.  He  knew  the  orang’s  great  intelligence,  which  had 
been  often  put  to  the  proof.  Jup  understood  the  word  corral, 
which  had  been  frequently  pronounced  before  him,  and  it  may 
be  remembered,  too,  that  he  had  often  driven  the  cart  thither 
in  company  with  Pencroft.  Day  had  not  yet  dawned.  The 
active  orang  would  know  how  to  pass  unperceived  through  the 
woods,  of  which  the  convicts,  besides,  would  think  he  was  a 
native. 

Neb  did  not  hesitate.  He  wrote  the  note,  he  tied  it  to  Jup's 
neck,  he  brought  the  ape  to  the  door  of  the  Granite  Houses 
from  which  he  let  down  a long  cord  to  the  ground;  then* 
several  times,  he  repeated  these  words,— 

“Jup,  Jup ! corral,  corral ! ” 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


545 


The  creature  understood,  seized  the  cord,  glided  rapidly  down 
to  the  beach,  and  disappeared  in  the  darkness  without  the 
convicts’  attention  having  been  in  the  least  excited. 

“You  did  well,  Neb,”  said  Harding;  “but  perhaps  in  not 
warning  us  you  would  have  done  still  better ! ” 

And,  in  speaking  thus,  Cyrus  Harding  thought  of  Herbert, 
whose  recovery  the  removal  had  so  seriously  checked. 

Neb  ended  his  account.  The  convicts  had  not  appeared  at 
all  on  the  beach.  Not  knowing  the  number  of  the  island’s 
inhabitants,  they  might  suppose  that  Granite  House  was 
defended  by  a large  party.  They  must  have  remembered 
that  during  the  attack  by  the  brig  numerous  shot  had  been 
fired  both  from  the  lower  and  upper  rocks,  and  no  doubt  they 
did  not  wish  to  expose  themselves.  But  the  plateau  of  Prospect 
Heights  was  open  to  them,  and  not  covered  by  the  fire  of  Gran- 
ite House.  They  gave  themselves  up,  therefore,  to  their  instinct 
of  destruction, — plundering,  burning,  devastating  every  thing, 
—and  only  retiring  half  an  hour  before  the  arrival  of  the 
colonists,  whom  they  believed  still  confined  in  the  corral. 

On  their  retreat  Neb  hurried  out.  He  climbed  the  plateau 
at  the  risk  of  being  perceived  and  fired  at,  tried  to  extinguish 
the  fire  which  was  consuming  the  buildings  of  the  poultry- 
yard,  and  had  struggled,  though  in  vain,  against  it  until  the 
cart  appeared  at  the  edge  of  the  wood. 

Such  had  been  these  serious  events.  The  presence  of  the 
convicts  constituted  a permanent  source  of  danger  to  the 
settlers  in  Lincoln  Island,  until  then  so  happy,  and  who  might 
now  expect  still  greater  misfortunes. 

Spilett  remained  in  Granite  House  with  Herbert  and  Pen- 
croft,  while  Cyrus  Harding,  accompanied  by  Neb,  proceeded  to 
judge  for  himself  of  the  extent  of  the  disaster. 

It  was  fortunate  that  the  convicts  had  not  advanced  to  the 
foot  of  Granite  House.  The  work-shop  at  the  Chimneys  would 
in  that  case  not  have  escaped  destruction.  But  after  all,  this 
evil  would  have  been  more  easily  reparable  than  the  ruins 
accumulated  on  the  plateau  of  Prospect  Heights.  Harding 
and  Neb  proceeded  towards  the  Mercy,  and  ascended  its  left 
bank  without  meeting  with  any  trace  of  the  convicts;  nor  on 
85 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


546 

the  other  side  of  the  river,  in  the  depths  of  the  wood,  could 
they  perceive  any  suspicious  indications. 

Besides,  it  might  be  supposed  that  in  all  probability  either 
the  convicts  knew  of  the  return  of  the  settlers  to  Granite  House, 
by  having  seen  them  pass  on  the  road  from  the  corral,  or, 
after  the  devastation  of  the  plateau,  they  had  penetrated  into 
Jacamar  Wood,  following  the  course  of  the  Mercy,  and  were 
thus  ignorant  of  their  return. 

In  the  former  case,  they  must  have  returned  towards  the 
corral,  now  without  defenders,  and  which  contained  valuable 
stores. 

In  the  latter,  they  must  have  regained  their  encampment, 
and  would  wait  an  opportunity  to  recommence  the  attack. 

It  was,  therefore,  possible  to  prevent  them,  but  any  enter- 
prise to  clear  the  island  was  now  rendered  difficult  by  reason  of 
Herbert’s  condition.  Indeed,  their  whole  force  would  have 
been  barely  sufficient  to  cope  with  the  convicts,  and  just  now 
no  one  could  leave  Granite  House. 

The  engineer  and  Neb  arrived  on  the  plateau.  Desolation 
reigned  every  where.  The  fields  had  been  trampled  over  ; the 
ears  of  wheat,  which  were  nearly  full  grown,  lay  on  the 
ground.  The  other  plantations  had  not  suffered  less. 

The  kitchen-garden  was  destroyed.  Happily,  Granite  House 
possessed  a store  of  seed  which  would  enable  them  to  repair 
these  misfortunes. 

As  to  the  wall  and  buildings  of  the  poultry-yard  and  the 
onagas’  stable,  the  fire  had  destroyed  all.  A few  terrified 
creatures  roamed  over  the  plateau.  The  birds,  which  during 
the  fire  had  taken  refuge  on  the  waters  of  the  lake,  had  already 
returned  to  their  accustomed  spot,  and  were  dabbling  on  the 
banks.  Every  thing  would  have  to  be  reconstructed. 

Cyrus  Harding’s  face,  which  was  paler  than  usual,  expressed 
an  internal  anger  which  he  commanded  with  difficulty,  but 
he  did  not  utter  a word.  Once  more  he  looked  at  his  devastated 
fields,  and  at  the  smoke  which  still  rose  from  the  ruins,  then 
he  returned  to  Granite  House. 

The  following  days  were  the  saddest  of  any  that  the  colonists 
had  passed  on  the  island ! Herbert’s  weakness  visibly  in- 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND.  Ml 

creased.  It  appeared  that  a more  serious  malady,  the  con- 
sequence of  the  profound  physiological  disturbance  he  had 
gone  through,  threatened  to  declare  itself,  and  Gideon  Spilett 
feared  such  an  aggravation  of  his  condition  that  he  would  be 
powerless  to  fight  against  it ! 

In  fact,  Herbert  remained  in  an  almost  continuous  state  of 
drowsiness,  and  symptoms  of  delirium  began  to  manifest 
themselves.  Refreshing  drinks  were  the  only  remedies  at 
the  colonists’  disposal.  The  fever  was  not  as  yet  very  high,  but 
it  soon  appeared  that  it  would  probably  recur  at  regular 
intervals.  Gideon  Spilett  first  recognized  this  on  the  6th  of 
December. 

The  poor  boy,  whose  fingers,  nose,  and  ears  had  become 
extremely  pale,  was  at  first  seized  with  slight  shiverings,  hor- 
ripilations and  tremblings.  His  pulse  was  weak  and  irregular, 
his  skin  dry,  his  thirst  intense.  To  this  soon  succeeded  a hot 
fit ; his  face  became  flushed  ; his  skin  reddened  ; his"  pulse 
quick ; then  a profuse  perspiration  broke  out,  after  which  the 
fever  seemed  to  diminish.  The  attack  had  lasted  nearly  five 
hours. 

Gideon  Spilett  had  not  left  Herbert,  who,  it  was  only  too 
certain  was  now  seized  by  an  intermittent  fever,  and  this  fever 
must  be  cured  at  any  cost  before  it  should  assume  a more 
serious  aspect. 

“And  in  order  to  cure  it,”  said  Spilett  to  Cyrus  Harding,  “we 
need  a febrifuge.” 

“ A febrifuge—”  answered  the  engineer.  “ We  have  neither 
Peruvian  bark,  nor  sulphate  of  quinine.” 

“No,”  said  Gideon  Spilett,  “but  there  are  willows  on  the 
border  of  the  lake,  and  the  bark  of  the  willow  might,  perhaps, 
prove  to  be  a substitute  for  quinine.” 

“Let  us  try  it  without  losing  a moment,”  replied  Cyrus 
Harding. 

The  bark  of  the  willow  has,  indeed,  been  justly  considered  as 
a succedaneum  for  Peruvian  bark,  as  has  also  that  of  the  horse- 
chestnut  tree,  the  leaf  of  the  holly,  the  snake  root,  etc.  It  was 
evidently  necessary  to  make  trial  of  this  substance,  although 
not  so  valuable  as  Peruvian  bark,  and  to  employ  it  in  its 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 

natural  state,  since  they  had  no  means  for  extracting  its 
essence. 

Cyrus  Harding  went  himself  to  cut  from  the  trunk  of  a 
species  of  black  willow,  a few  pieces  of  bark  ; he  brought 
them  back  to  Granite  House,  and  reduced  them  to  a powder, 
which  was  administered  that  same  evening  to  Herbert. 

The  night  passed  without  any  important  change.  Herbert 
was  somewhat  delirious,  but  the  fever  did  not  reappear  in  the 
night,  and  did  not  return  either  during  the  following  day. 

Pencroft  again  began  to  hope.  Gideon  Spilett  said  nothing. 
It  might  be  that  the  fever  was  not  quotidian,  but  tertian,  and 
that  it  would  return  next  day.  Therefore,  he  awaited  the 
next  day  with  the  greatest  anxiety. 

It  might  have  been  remarked  besides  that  during  this  period 
Herbert  remained  utterly  prostrate,  his  head  weak  and  giddy. 
Another  symptom  alarmed  the  reporter  to  the  highest  degree. 
Herbert’s  liver  became  congested,  and  soon  a more  intense 
delirium  showed  that  his  brain  was  also  affected. 

Gideon  Spilett  was  overwhelmed  by  this  new  complication. 
He  took  the  engineer  aside. 

“ It  is  a malignant  fever,”  said  he. 

“ A malignant  fever!  ” cried  Harding.  “ You  are  mistaken, 
Spilett.  A malignant  fever  does  not  declare  itself  spontane- 
ously; its  germ  must  previously  have  existed.” 

“I  am  not  mistaken,”  replied  the  reporter.  “Herbert  no 
doubt  contracted  the  germ  of  this  fever  in  the  marshes  of  the 
island.  He  has  already  had  one  attack  ; should  a second  come 
on  and  should  we  not  be  able  to  prevent  a third,  he  is  lost.” 

“ But  the  willow  bark  ? ” 

“ That  is  insufficient,”  answered  the  reporter  ; “ and  the 
third  attack  of  a malignant  fever,  which  is  not  arrested  by 
means  of  quinine,  is  always  fatal.” 

Fortunately,  Pencroft  heard  nothing  of  this  conversation  or 
he  would  have  gone  mad. 

It  may  be  imagined  what  anxiety  the  engineer  and  the 
reporter  suffered  during  the  day  of  the  7th  of  December  and 
the  following  night. 

Towards  the  middle  of  the  day  the  second  attack  came  on, 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


549 


The  crisis  was  terrible.  Herbert  felt  himself  sinking.  He 
stretched  his  arms  towards  Cyrus  Harding,  towards  Spilett, 
towards  Pencroft.  He  was  so  young  to  die ! The  scene  was 
heart-rending.  They  were  obliged  to  send  Pencroft  away. 

The  fit  lasted  five  hours.  It  was  evident  that  Herbert  could 
not  survive  a third. 

The  night  was  frightful.  In  his  delirium  Herbert  uttered 
words  which  went  to  the  hearts  of  his  companions.  He 
struggled  with  the  convicts,  He  called  to  Ayrton,  he  poured 
forth  entreaties  to  that  mysterious  being, — that  powerful  un- 
known protector,— whose  image  was  stamped  upon  his  mind  ; 
then  he  again  fell  into  a deep  exhaustion  which  completely 
prostrated  him.  Several  times  Gideon  Spilett  thought  that  the 
poor  boy  was  dead. 

The  next  day,  the  8th  of  December,  was  but  a succession  of 
the  fainting  fits.  Herbert’s  thin  hands  clutched  the  sheets. 
They  had  administered  further  doses  of  pounded  bark,  but  the 
reporter  expected  no  result  from  it. 

“If  before  to-morrow  morning  we  have  not  given  him  a 
more  energetic  febrifuge,”  said  the  reporter,  “ Herbert  will  be 
dead.” 

Night  arrived— the  last  night,  it  was  too  much  to  be  feared,  of 
the  good,  brave,  intelligent  boy,  so  far  in  advance  of  his  years, 
and  who  was  loved  by  all  as  their  own  child.  The  only  remedy 
which  existed  against  this  terrible  malignant  fever,  the  only 
specific  which  could  overcome  it,  was  not  to  be  found  in 
Lincoln  Island. 

During  the  night  of  the  8th  of  December,  Herbert  was  seized 
by  a more  violent  delirium.  His  liver  was  fearfully  congested, 
his  brain  affected,  and  already  it  was  impossible  for  him  to 
recognize  any  one. 

Would  he  live  until  the  next  day,  until  that  third  attack 
which  must  infallibly  carry  him  off?  It  was  not  probable. 
His  strength  was  exhausted,  and  in  the  intervals  of  fever  he  lay 
as  one  dead. 

Towards  three  o’clock  in  the  morning  Herbert  uttered  a 
piercing  cry.  He  seemed  to  be  tom  by  a supreme  convulsion. 
Neb,  who  was  near  him,  terrified,  ran  into  the  next  room 


560 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION, 


where  his  companions  were  watching.  Top,  at  that  moment 
barked  in  a strange  manner. 

All  rushed  in  immediately  and  managed  to  restrain  the  dying 
boy,  who  was  endeavoring  to  throw  himself  out  of  his  bed, 
whilst  Spilett,  taking  his  arm,  felt  his  pulse  gradually  quicken. 

It  was  five  in  the  morning.  The  rays  of  the  rising  sun  began 
to  shine  in  at  the  windows  of  Granite  House.  It  promised  to 
be  a fine  day,  and  this  day  was  to  be  poor  Herbert’s  last ! 

A ray  glanced  on  the  table  placed  near  the  bed. 

Suddenly  Pencroft,  uttering  a cry,  pointed  to  the  table. 

On  it  lay  a little  oblong  box,  of  which  the  cover  bore  these 
words 

“ Sulphate  of  Quinine,,” 


CHAPTER  %I. 

jdnSXPLlCABfcB  MYSTERY  — HERBERT'S  CONVALESCENCE  — THE 
PARTS  OT  THE  ISLAND  TO  BE  EXPLORED  — PREPARATIONS 
FOR  DEPARTURE  — FIRST  DAY  — NIGHT  — SECOND  DAY  — 
KAURIES — -A  COUPLE  OF  CASSOWARIES— FOOT- PRINTS  IN  THE 
* FOREST— ARRIVAL  AT  REPTILE  POINT. 

Gideon  Spilett  took  the  box  and  opened  it.  It  contained 
nearly  two  hundred  grains  of  a white  powder,  a few  particles 
of  which  he  carried  to  his  Ups.  The  extreme  bitterness  of  the 
substance  precluded  all  doubt ; it  was  certainly  the  precious 
extract  of  quinine,  that  pre-eminent  antifebrile. 

This  powder  must  be  administered  to  Herbert  without  delay. 
How  it  came  there  might  be  discussed  later. 

“ Some  coffee  ! ” said  Spilett. 

In  a few  moments  Neb  brought  a cup  of  the  warm  infusion. 
Gideon  Spilett  threw  into  it  about  eighteen  grains  of  quinine, 
and  they  succeeded  in  making  Herbert  drink  the  mixture. 

There  was  stiff  time,  for  the  third  attack  of  the  malignant 
fever  had  not  yet  shown  itself.  How  they  longed  to  be  able 
to  add  that  it  would  not  return ! 

Besides,  it  must  be  remarked,  the  hopes  of  all  had  now 
revived.  The  mysterious  influence  had  been  again  exerted, 
and  in  a critical  moment,  when  they  had  despaired  of  it. 

In  a few  hours  Herbert  was  much  calmer.  The  colonists 
could  now  discuss  this  incident.  The  intervention  of  th© 
stranger  was  more  evident  than  ever.  But  how  had  he  been 
able  to  penetrate  during  the  night  into  Granite  House  ? It  was 
inexplicable,  and,  in  truth,  the  proceedings  of  the  genius  of  the 
island  were  not  less  mysterious  than  was  that  genius  himself. 
During  this  day  the  sulphate  of  quinine  was  administered  to 
Herbert  every  three  hours. 


552 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


The  next  day  some  improvement  in  Herbert’s  condition  was 
apparent.  Certainly,  he  was  not  out  of  danger,  intermittent 
fevers  being  subject  to  frequent  and  dangerous  relapses,  but 
the  most  assiduous  care  was  bestowed  on  him.  And  besides, 
the  specific  was  at  hand  ; nor,  doubtless,  was  he  who  had 
brought  it  far  distant;  and  the  hearts  of  all  were  animated  by 
returning  hope. 

This  hope  was  not  disappointed.  Ten  days  after,  on  t^e 
20th  of  December,  Herbert’s  convalescence  was  commenced. 

He  was  still  weak,  and  strict  diet  had  been  imposed  upon  him, 
but  no  access  of  fever  supervened.  And  then,  the  poor  boy 
submitted  with  such  docility  to  all  the  prescriptions  ordered 
him ! He  longed  so  to  get  well ! 

Pencroft  was  as  a man  who  has  been  drawn  up  from  the 
bottom  of  an  abyss.  Fits  of  joy  approaching  to  delirium 
seized  him.  When  the  time  for  the  third  attack  had  passed  by, 
he  nearly  suffocated  the  reporter  in  his  embrace.  Since  then, 
he  always  called  him  Dr.  Spilett. 

The  real  doctor,  however,  remained  undiscovered.  “We  will 
find  him  ! ” repeated  the  sailor. 

Certainly,  this  man,  whoever  he  was,  might  expect  a some- 
what too  energetic  embrace  from  the  worthy  Pencroft ! 

The  month  of  December  ended,  and  with  it  the  year  1867, 
during  which  the  colonists  of  Lincoln  Island  had  of  late  been 
so  severely  tried.  They  commenced  the  year  1868  with  magnifi- 
cent weather,  great  heat,  and  a tropical  temperature,  delight- 
fully cooled  by  the  sea-breeze.  Herbert’s  recovery  progressed, 
and  from  his  bed,  placed  near  one  of  the  windows  of  Granite 
House,  he  could  inhale  the  fresh  air,  charged  with  ozone, 
which  could  not  fail  to  restore  his  health.  His  appetite  re- 
turned, and  what  numberless  delicate,  savory  little  dishes  Neb 
prepared  for  him ! 

“ It  is  enough  to  make  one  wish  to  have  a fever  oneself ! ” 
said  Pencroft. 

During  all  this  time,  the  convicts  did  not  once  appear  in  the 
vicinity  of  Granite  House.  There  was  no  news  of  Ayrton,  and 
though  the  engineer  and  Herbert  still  had  some  hopes  of  find- 
ing him  again,  their  companions  did  not  doubt  but  that  tbft 


THJB  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND, 


m 


unfortunate  man  had  perished.  However,  this  uncertainty 
could  not  last,  and  when  once  the  lad  should  have  recovered, 
the  expedition,  the  result  of  which  must  be  so  important, 
would  he  undertaken.  But  they  would  have  to  wait  a month, 
perhaps,  for  all  the  strength  of  the  colony  must  be  put  into 
requisition  to  obtain  satisfaction  from  the  convicts. 

However,  Herbert’s  convalescence  progressed  rapidly.  The 
congestion  of  the  liver  had  disappeared,  and  his  wounds 
might  be  considered  completely  healed. 

During  the  month  of  January,  important  work  was  done  on 
the  plateau  of  Prospect  Heights;  but  it  consisted  solely  in 
saving  as  much  as  was  possible  from  the  devastated  crops, 
either  of  com  or  vegetables.  The  grain  and  the  plants  were 
gathered,  so  as  to  provide  a new  harvest  for  the  approaching 
half-season.  With  regard  to  rebuilding  the  poultry-yard, 
wall,  or  stables,  Cyrus  Harding  preferred  to  wait.  Whilst  he 
and  his  companions  were  in  pursuit  of  the  convicts,  the  latter 
might  very  probably  pay  another  visit  to  the  plateau,  and 
it  would  be  useless  to  give  them  an  opportunity  of  recom- 
mencing their  work  of  destruction.  When  the  island  should 
be  cleared  of  these  miscreants,  they  would  set  about  rebuild- 
ing. The  young  convalescent  began  to  get  up  in  the  second 
week  of  January,  at  first  for  one  hour  a day,  then  two,  then 
three.  His  strength  visibly  returned,  so  vigorous  was  his  con- 
stitution. He  was  now  eighteen  years  of  age.  He  was  tall, 
and  promised  to  become  a man  of  noble  and  commanding 
presence.  From  this  time  his  recovery,  while  still  requiring 
care,— and  Dr.  Spilett  was  very  strict,— made  rapid  progress. 
Towards  the  end  of  the  month,  Herbert  was  already  walking 
about  on  Prospect  Heights,  and  the  beach. 

He  derived,  from  several  sea-baths,  which  he  took  in  com- 
pany with  Pencroft  and  Neb,  the  greatest  possible  benefit, 
Cyrus  Harding  thought  he  might  now  settle  the  day  for 
their  departure,  for  which  the  15th  of  February  was  fixed.  The 
nights,  very  clear  at  this  time  of  year,  would  be  favorable  to  the 
researches*  they  intended  to  make  all  over  the  island. 

The  necessary  preparations  for  this  exploration  were  now 
commenced,  and  were  important,  for  the  colonists  had  sworn 


THE  LAJEB3IDB  EDITION 


554 

not  to  return  to  Granite  House  until  their  twofold  object  had 
been  achieved;  on  the  one  hand,  to  exterminate  the  convicts, 
and  rescue  Ayrton,  if  he  was  still  living;  on  the  other,  to  dis- 
cover who  it  was  that  presided  so  effectually  over  the  fortune* 
of  the  colony. 

Of  Lincoln  Island,  the  settlers  knew  thoroughly  all  the  east' 
ern  coast  from  Claw  Cape  to  the  Mandible  Capes,  the  extern 
sive  Tadorn  Marsh,  the  neighborhood  of  Lake  Grant,  Jacamar 
Wood,  between  the  road  to  the  corral  and  the  Mercy,  the 
courses  of  the  Mercy  and  Red  Creek,  and  lastly,  the  spurs  of 
Mount  Franklin,  among  which  the  corral  had  been  estab- 
lished. 

They  had  explored;  though  only  in  an  imperfect  manner,  the 
vast  shore  of  Washington  Bay  from  Claw  Cape  to  Reptile  End, 
the  woody  and  marshy  border  of  the  west  coast,  and  the 
interminable  downs,  ending  at  the  open  mouth  of  Shark  Gulf. 
But  they  had  in  no  way  surveyed  the  woods  which  covered  the 
Serpentine  Peninsula,  all  to  the  right  of  the  Mercy,  the  left 
bank  of  Falls  River,  and  the  wilderness  of  spurs  and  valleys 
Which  supported  three  quarters  of  the  base  of  Mount  Frank- 
lin, to  the  east,  the  north,  and  the  west,  and  where  doubtless 
many  secret  retreats  existed.  Consequently,  many  millions  of 
acres  of  the  island  had  still  escaped  ther  investigations. 

It  was,  therefore,  decided  that  the  exposition  should  be 
carried  through  the  Far  West,  so  as  to  include  all  that  region 
situated  on  the  right  of  the  Mercy. 

It  might,  perhaps,  be  better  worth  while  to  go  direct  to  the 
corral,  where  it  might  be  supposed  that  the  convicts  had  again 
taken  refuge,  either  to  pillage  or  to  establish  themselves  there. 
But  either  the  devastation  of  the  corral  would  have  been  an 
accomplished  fact  by  tills  time,  and  it  would  be  too  late  to  pre- 
vent it;  or  it  had  been  the  convicts’  interest  to  intrench  them- 
selves there,  and  there  would  be  still  time  to  go  and  turn 
them  out  on  their  return. 

Therefore,  after  some  discussion,  the  first  plan  was  adhered 
to,  and  the  settlers  resolved  to  proceed  through  the  wood 
to  Reptile  End.  They  would  make  their  way  with  their 
hatchets,  and  thus  lay  the  first  draft  of  a road  which  would 


TEE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


555 


place  Granite  House  in  communication  with  the  end  of  the 
peninsula  for  a length  of  from  sixteen  to  seventeen  miles. 

The  cart  was  in  good  condition.  The  onagas,  well  rested, 
could  go  on  a long  journey.  Provisions,  camp  effects,  a port- 
able stove,  and  various  utensils  were  packed  in  the  cart,  as 
also  weapons  and  ammunition,  carefully  chosen  from  the  now 
complete  arsenal  of  Granite  House.  But  it  was  necessary  to 
remember  that  the  convicts  were,  perhaps,  roaming  about  the 
woods,  and  that  in  the  midst  of  these  thick  forests  a shot  might 
quickly  be  fired  and  received.  It  was  therefore  resolved  that 
the  little  band  of  settlers  should  remain  together  and  not 
separate  under  any  pretext  whatever. 

It  was  also  decided  that  no  one  should  remain  at  Granite 
House.  Top  and  Jup  themselves  were  to  accompany  the 
expedition  ; the  inaccessible  dwelling  needed  no  guard.  The 
14th  of  February,  eve  of  the  departure,  was  Sunday.  It  was 
consecrated  entirely  to  repose,  and  thanksgivings  addressed 
by  the  colonists  to  the  Creator.  A place  in  the  cart  was 
reserved  for  Herbert,  who,  though  thoroughly  convalescent, 
was  still  a little  weak.  The  next  morning,  at  daybreak,  Cyrus 
Harding  took  the  necessary  measures  to  protect  Granite  House 
from  any  invasion.  The  ladders,  which  were  formerly  used  for 
the  ascent,  were  brought  to  the  Chimneys  and  buried  deep 
in  the  sand,  so  that  they  might  be  available  on  the  return  of 
the  colonists,  for  the  machinery  of  the  lift  had  been  taken  to 
pieces,  and  nothing  of  the  apparatus  reremained.  Pencroft 
stayed  the  last  in  Granite  House  in  order  to  finish  this  work, 
and  he  then  lowered  himself  down  by  means  of  a double  rope 
held  below,  and  which,  when  once  hauled  down,  left  no  com- 
munication between  the  upper  landing  and  the  beach. 

The  weather  was  magnificent. 

“ We  shall  have  a warm  day  of  it,”  said  the  reporter,  laugh- 
ing. 

“Pooh!  Dr.  Spilett,”  answered  Pencroft,  “we  shall  walk 
under  the  shade  of  the  trees  and  shan’t  even  see  the  sun  ! ” 

“ Forward ! ” said  the  engineer. 

The  cart  was  waiting  on  the  beach  before  the  Chimneys. 
The  reporter  made  Herbert  take  his  place  in  it  during  the 


556 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


first  hours  at  least  of  the  journey,  and  the  lad  was  obliged  to 
submit  to  his  doctors  orders. 

Neb  placed  himself  at  the  onagas’  heads.  Cyrus  Harding,  the 
reporter,  and  the  sailor,  walked  in  front.  Top  bounded 
joyfully  along.  Herbert  offered  a seat  in  his  vehicle  to  Jup, 
who  accepted  it  without  ceremony.  The  moment  for  depart* 
ure  had  arrived,  and  the  little  band  set  out. 

The  cart  first  turned  the  angle  of  the  mouth  of  the  Mercy, 
then,  having  ascended  the  left  bank  for  a mile,  crossed  the 
bridge,  at  the  other  side  of  which  commenced  the  road  to 
Port  Balloon,  and  there  the  explorers,  leaving  this  road  on  their 
left,  entered  the  cover  of  the  immense  woods  which  formed 
the  region  of  the  Far  West. 

For  the  first  two  miles  the  widely-scattered  trees  allowed  the 
cart  to  pass  witlnease;  from  time  to  time  it  became  necessary 
to  cut  away  a few  creepers  and  bushes,  but  no  serious  obstacle 
impeded  the  progress  of  the  colonists. 

The  thick  foliage  of  the  trees  threw  a grateful  shade  on  the 
ground.  Deodars,  douglas-firs,  casuarinas,  banksias,  gum-trees, 
dragon-trees,  and  other  well-known  species,  succeeded  each 
other  as  far  as  the  eye  could  reach.  The  feathered  tribes  of  the 
island  were  all  represented— tetras,  jacamars,  pheasants,  lories, 
as  well  as  the  chattering  cockatoos,  parrots,  and  paroquets. 
Agouties,  kangaroos,  and  capybaras  fled  swiftly  at  their  ap- 
proach ; and  all  this  reminded  the  settlers  of  the  first  excur- 
sions they  had  made  on  their  arrival  at  the  island. 

“Nevertheless,”  observed  Cyrus  Harding,  “I  notice  that 
these  creatures,  both  bipeds  and  quadrupeds,  are  more  timid 
than  formerly.  These  woods  have,  therefore,  been  recently 
traversed  by  the  convicts,  and  we  shall  certainly  find  some 
traces  of  them.” 

And,  in  fact,  in  several  places  they  could  distinguish  traces, 
more  or  less  recent,  of  the  passage  of  a band  of  men — here 
branches  broken  off  the  trees,  perhaps  to  mark  out  the  way  ; 
there  the  ashes  of  a fire,  and  footprints  in  clayey  spots  ; but 
nothing  which  appeared  to  belong  to  a settled  encampment. 

The  engineer  had  recommended  his  companions  to  refrain 
from  hunting.  The  reports  of  the  fire-arms  might  give  the 


OTE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


551 


alarm  to  the  convicts,  who  were,  perhaps,  roaming  through 
the  forest.  Moreover,  the  hunters  would  necessarily  ramble 
some  distance  from  the  cart,  which  it  was  dangerous  to  leave 
unguarded. 

In  the  after-part  of  the  day,  when  about  six  miles  from 
Granite  House,  their  progress  became  much  more  difficult.  In 
order  to  make  their  way  through  some  tliickets,  they  were 
obliged  to  cut  down  trees.  Before  entering  such  places  Hard- 
ing was  careful  to  send  in  Top  and  Jup,  who  faithfully  accom- 
plished their  commissions,  and  when  the  dog  and  orang  re- 
turned without  giving  any  warning,  there  was  evidently 
nothing  to  fear,  either  from  convicts  or  wild  beasts,  two 
varieties  of  the  animal  kingdom,  whose  ferocious  instincts 
placed  them  on  the  same  level.  On  the  evening  of  the  first  day 
the  colonists  encamped  about  nine  miles  from  Granite  House, 
on  the  border  of  a little  stream  falling  into  the  Mercy,  and  of 
the  existence  of  which  they  had  till  then  been  ignorant;  it 
evidently,  however,  belonged  to  the  hydrographical  system  to 
which  the  soil  owed  its  astonishing  fertility.  The  settlers  made 
a hearty  meal,  for  their  appetites  were  sharpened,  and  meas- 
ures were  then  taken  that  the  night  might  be  passed  in 
safety.  If  the  engineer  had  had  only  to  deal  with  wild  beasts, 
jaguars,  or  others,  he  would  have  simply  lighted  fires  all  round 
his  camp,  which  would  have  sufficed  for  its  defense  ; but  the 
convicts  wouM  be  rather  attracted  than  terrified  by  the  flames, 
and  it  wa3,  therefore,  better  to  be  surrounded  by  the  profound 
darkness  of  night. 

The  watch  was,  however,  carefully  organized.  Two  of  the 
settlers  were  to  watch  together,  and  every  two  hours  it  was 
agreed  that  they  should  be  relieved  by  their  comrades.  And  so, 
notwithstanding  his  wish  to  the  contrary,  Herbert  was  ex- 
empted from  guard,  Pencroft  and  Gideon  Spilett  in  one  party, 
the  engineer  and  Neb  in  another,  mounted  guard  in  turns  over 
the  camp. 

The  night,  however,  was  but  of  few  hours.  The  darkness 
was  due  rather  to  the  thickness  of  the  foliage  than  to  the  dis- 
appearance of  the  sun.  The  silence  was  scarcely  disturbed  by 
the  howling  of  jaguars  and  the  chattering  of  the  monkeys,  tha 


558 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


♦ 

latter  appearing  to  particularly  irritate  master  Jup.  The  night 
passed  without  incident,  and  on  the  next  day,  the  15th  oi 
February,  the  journey  through  die  forest,  rather  tedious  than 
difficult,  was  continued.  This  day  they  could  not  accomplish 
more  than  six  miles,  for  every  moment  they  were  obliged  to  cut 
a road  with  their  hatchets. 

Like  true  settlers,  the  colonists  spared  the  largest  and  most 
beautiful  trees,  which  would  besides  have  cost  immense  labor 
to  fell,  and  the  small  ones  only  were  sacrificed,  but  the  result 
was  that  the  road  took  a very  winding  direction,  and  length- 
ened itself  by  numerous  detours . 

During  the  day  Herbert  discovered  several  new  specimens 
not  before  met  with  in  the  island,  such  as  the  tree-fern,  with 
its  leaves  spread  out  like  the  waters  of  a fountain,  locust-trees, 
on  the  long  pods  of  which  the  onagas  browsed  greedily,  and 
which  ‘"applied  a sweet  pulp  of  excellent  flavor.  There,  too, 
the  colonists  again  found  groups  of  magnificent  kauries,  their 
cylindrical  trunks,  crowned  with  a cone  of  verdure,  rising  to  a 
height  of  two  hundred  feet.  These  were  the  tree-kings  of 
New  Zealand,  as  celebrated  as  the  cedars  of  Lebanon. 

As  to  the  fauna,  there  was  no  addition  to  those  species 
already  kno  wn  to  the  hunters.  Nevertheless,  they  saw,  though 
unable  to  get  near  them,  a couple  of  those  large  birds  peculiar 
to  Australia,  a sort  of  cassowary,  called  emu,  five  feet  in  height, 
and  with  brown  plumage,  which  belong  to  the  tribe  of  waders. 
Top  darted  after  them  as  fast  as  his  four  legs  could  carry  him, 
but  the  emus  distanced  him  with  ease,  so  prodigious  was 
their  speed. 

As  to  the  traces  left  by  the  convicts,  a few  more  were  dis- 
covered. Some  footprints  found  near  an  apparently  recently- 
extinguished  fire  were  attentively  examined  by  the  settlers. 
By  measuring  them  one  after  the  other,  according  to  their 
length  and  breadth,  the  marks  of  five  men’s  feet  were  easily 
distinguished.  The  five  convicts  had  evidently  camped  on  this 
spot ; but, — and  this  was  the  object  of  so  minute  an  examina- 
tion,—a sixth  foot-print  could  not  be  discovered,  which  in  that 
sase  would  have  been  that  of  Ayrton. 

“Ayrton  was  not  with  them ! ” said  Herbert 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


“No,”  answered  Pencroft,  “and  if  he  was  not  with  them,  it 
was  because  the  wretches  had  already  murdered  him  I but 
then  these  rascals  have  not  a den  to  which  they  may  be 
tracked  liked  tigers  I ” 

“ No,”  replied  the  reporter  ; “ it  is  more  probable  that  they 
wander  at  random,  and  it  is  their  interest  to  rove  about  until 
the  time  when  they  will  be  masters  of  the  island !” 

“The  masters  of  the  .island !”  exclaimed  the  sailor;  “the 
masters  of  the  island ! . . .”  he  repeated,  and  his  voice  was 
choked,  as  if  his  throat  was  seized  in  an  iron  grasp.  Then  in 
a calmer  tone,  “Do  you  know,  Captain  Harding,”  said  he, 
“what  the  ball  is  which  I have  rammed  into  my  gun  ?” 

“No,  Pencroft!” 

“It  is  the  ball  that  went  through  Herbert’s  chest,  and  I 
promise  you  it  won’t  miss  its  mark  ! ” 

But  this  just  retaliation  would  not  bring  Ayrton  back  to  life, 
and  from  the  examination  of  the  footprints  left  in  the  ground, 
they  must,  alas ! conclude  that  all  hopes  of  ever  seeing  him 
again  must  be  abandoned. 

That  evening  they  encamped  fourteen  miles  from  Granite 
House,  and  Cyrus  Harding  calculated  that  they  could  not  be 
more  than  five  miles  from  Reptile  Point. 

And,  indeed,  the  next  day  the  extremity  of  the  peninsula 
was  reached,  and  the  whole  length  of  the  forest  had  been 
traversed ; but  there  was  nothing  to  indicate  the  retreat  in 
which  the  convicts  had  taken  refuge,  nor  that,  no  less  seeret* 
which  sheltered  the  mysterious  unknown. 


CHAPTER  XII, 


jaXPLORATION  OF  THE  SERPENTINE  PENINSULA  — ENCAMPMENT 
AT  THE  MOUTH  OF  FALLS  RIYER— GIDEON  SPILETT  AND  PEN- 
CROFT  RECONNOITRE— THEIR  RETURN— FORWARD  ALL  ! — AN 
OPEN  DOOR— A LIGHTED  WINDOW— BY  THE  LIGHT  OF  THE 
MOON! 

The  next  day,  the  18th  of  February,  was  devoted  to  the  ex- 
ploration of  all  that  wooded  region  forming  the  shore  from 
Reptile  End  to  Falls  River.  The  colonists  were  able  to 
search  this  forest  thoroughly,  for,  as  it  was  comprised  between 
the  two  shores  of  the  Serpentine  Peninsula,  it  was  only  from 
«hree  to  four  miles  in  breadth.  The  trees,  both  by  their  height 
and  their  thick  foliage,  bore  witness  to  the  vegetative  power  of 
the  soil,  more  astonishing  here  than  in  any  other  part  of  the 
island.  One  might  have  said  that  a corner  from  the  virgin 
forests  of  America  or  Africa  had  been  transported  into  this 
temperate  zone.  This  led  them  to  conclude  that  the  superb 
vegetation  found  a heat  in  this  soil,  damp  in  its  upper  layer, 
but  warmed  in  the  interior  by  volcanic  fires,  which  could  not 
belong  to  a temperate  climate.  The  most  frequently-occurring 
^rees  were  kauries  and  eucalypti  of  gigantic  dimensions. 

But  the  colonists’  object  was  not  simply  to  admire  the  mag- 
nificent vegetation.  They  knew  already  that  in  this  respect 
Lincoln  Island  would  have  been  worthy  to  take  the  first  rank 
in  the  Canary  group,  to  which  the  first  name  given  was  that  of 
the  Happy  Isles.  Now,  alas ! their  island  no  longer  belonged 
to  them  entirely;  others  had  taken  possession  of  it,  miscreants 
polluted  its  shores,  and  they  must  be  destroyed  to  the  last  man. 

No  traces  were  found  on  the  western  coast,  although  they 
were  carefully  sought  for.  No  more  footprints,  no  morj 
broken  branches,  no  more  deserted  camps. 

660 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


56J 


“ This  does  not  surprise  me,”  said  Cyrus  Harding  to  his  com- 
panions. “ The  convicts  first  landed  on  the  island  in  the  neighs 
borhood  of  Flotsam  Point,  and  they  immediately  plunged  into 
the  Far  West  forests,  after  crossing  Tadorn  Marsh.  They  then 
followed  almost  the  same  route  that  we  took  on  leaving  Gran- 
ite House.  This  explains  the  traces  we  found  in  the  wood. 
But,  arriving  on  the  shore,  the  convicts  saw  at  once  that  they 
would  discover  no  suitable  retreat  there,  and  it  was  then  that, 
going  northwards  again,  they  came  upon  the  corral.” 

04  Where  they  have  perhaps  returned,”  said  Pencroft 

“I  do  not  think  so,”  answered  the  engineer,  “for  they 
would  naturally  suppose  that  our  researches  would  be  in  that 
direction.  The  corral  is  only  a store-house  to  them,  and  not  a 
definite  encampment.” 

“ I am  of  Cyrus’  opinion,”  said  the  reporter,  “ and  I think 
that  it  is  among  the.  spurs  of  Mount  Franklin  that  the  convicts 
mil  have  made  their  lair.” 

“Then,  captain,  straight  to  the  corral,”  cried  Pencroft. 
“We  must  finish  them  off,  and  till  now  we  have  only  lost  time  ! ” 

“ No,  my  friend,  replied  the  engineer;  “you  forget  that  we 
nave  a reason  for  wishing  to  know  if  the  forests  of  the  Far 
West  do  not  contain  some  habitation.  Our  exploration  has  a 
double  object,  Pencroft.  If,  on  the  one  hand,  we  have  to  chas- 
tise crime,  we  have,  on  the  other,  an  act  of  gratitude  to 
perform.” 

“ That  was  well  said,  captain,”  replied  the  sailor,  “ but,  all  the 
aame,  it  is  my  opinion  that  we  shall  not  find  that  gentleman 
until  he  pleases.” 

And  truly  Pencroft  only  expressed  the  opinion  of  all.  It  was 
probable  that  the  stranger’s  retreat  was  not  less  mysterious 
than  was  he  himself. 

That  evening  the  cart  halted  at  the  mouth  of  Falls  River. 
The  camp  was  organized  as  usual,  and  the  customary  pre- 
cautions were  taken  for  the  night.  Herbert,  become  again 
the  healthy  and  vigorous  lad  he  was  before  his  illness,  derived 
great  benefit  from  this  life  in  the  open  air,  between  the  sea 
breezes  and  the  vivifying  air  from  the  forests.  His  place  was 
no  longer  in  the  cart,  but  at  the  head  of  the  troop. 

36 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION 


302 

The  next  day,  the  19th  of  February,  the  colonists,  leaving 
the  shore,  where,  beyond  the  mouth,  basalts  of  every  shape 
were  so  picturesquely  piled  up,  ascended  the  river  by  its  left 
bank.  The  road  had  been  already  partially  cleared  in  theft 
former  excursions  made  from  the  corral  to  the  west  coast. 
The  settlers  were  now  about  six  miles  from  Mount  Franklin. 

The  engineer’s  plan  was  this:  — To  minutely  survey  the 
valley  forming  the  bed  of  the  river,  and  to  cautiously  approach 
the  neighborhood  of  the  corral;  if  the  corral  was  occupied,  to 
seize  it  by  force;  if  it  was  not,  to  intrench  themselves  there 
and  make  it  the  center  of  the  operations  which  had  for  their 
object  the  exploration  of  Mount  Franklin. 

This  plan  was  unanimously  approved  by  the  colonists,  for 
they  were  impatient  to  regain  entire  possession  of  their  island. 

They  made  their  way  then  along  the  narrow  valley  separat- 
ing two  of  the  largest  spurs  of  Mount  Franklin.  The  trees, 
crowded  on  the  river’s  bank,  became  rare  on  the  upper  slopes 
of  the  mountain.  The  ground  was  hilly  and  rough,  very  suit- 
able for  ambushes,  and  over  which  they  did  not  venture  with- 
out extreme  precaution.  Top  and  Jup  skirmished  on  the 
flanks,  springing  right  and  left  through  the  thick  brushwood, 
and  emulating  each  other  in  intelligence  and  activity.  But 
nothing  showed  that  the  banks  of  the  stream  had  been  re- 
cently frequented— nothing  announced  either  the  presence  or 
the  proximity  of  the  convicts.  Towards  five  in  the  evening 
the  cart  stopped  nearly  600  feet  from  the  palisade.  A semi- 
circular screen  of  trees  still  hid  it. 

It  was  necessary  to  reconnoiter  the  corral,  in  order  to  ascer- 
tain if  it  was  occupied.  To  go  there  openly,  in  broad  daylight, 
when  the  convicts  were  probably  in  ambush,  would  be  to 
expose  themselves,  as  poor  Herbert  had  done,  to  the  fire-arms 
of  the  ruffians.  It  was  better,  then,  to  wait  until  night  came 
on. 

However,  Gideon  Spilett  wished  without  further  delay  to 
reconnoiter  the  approaches  to  the  corral,  and  Pencroft,  who 
was  quite  out  of  patience,  volunteered  to  accompany  him. 

“ No,  my  friends,”  said  the  engineer,  “ wait  till  night.  I will 
not  allow  one  of  you  to  expose  himself  in  open  day.” 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


5t>3 


But,  captain—”  answered  the  sailor,  little  disposed  to  obey 

“ I beg  you,  Pencroft,”  said  the  engineer. 

“ Very  well,”  replied  the  sailor,  who  vented  his  anger  in  an- 
other way,  by  bestowing  on  the  convicts  the  worst  names  m 
his  maritime  vocabulary. 

The  colonists  remained,  therefore,  near  the  cart,  and  care- 
fully watched  the  neighboring  parts  of  the  forest. 

Three  hours  passed  thus.  The  wind  had  fallen,  and  absolute 
silence  reigned  under  the  great  trees.  The  snapping  of  the 
smallest  twig,  a footstep  on  the  dry  leaves,  the  gliding  of  a body 
amongst  the  grass,  would  have  been  heard  without  difficulty. 
All  was  quiet.  Besides,  Top,  lying  on  the  grass,  his  head 
stretched  out  on  his  paws,  gave  no  sign  of  uneasiness.  At 
eight  o’clock  the  day  appeared  far  enough  advanced  for  the 
reconnoissance  to  be  made  under  favorable  conditions.  Gideon 
Spilett  declared  himself  ready  to  set  out,  accompanied  by  Pen- 
croft.  Cyrus  Harding  consented.  Top  and  Jup  were  to  re- 
main with  the  engineer,  Herbert  and  Neb,  for  a bark  or  a cry 
at  a wrong  moment  would  give  the  alarm. 

“ Do  not  be  imprudent,”  said  Harding  to  the  reporter  and 
Pencroft ; M you  have  not  to  gain  possession  of  the  corral,  but 
only  to  find  out  whether  it  is  occupied  or  not.” 

“ All  right,”  answered  Pencroft. 

And  the  two  departed. 

JQnder  the  trees,  thanks  to  the  thickness  of  their  foliage,  the 
obscurity  rendered  any  object  invisible  beyond  a radius  of  from 
thirty  to  forty  feet.  The  reporter  and  Pencroft,  halting  at 
any  suspicious  sound,  advanced  with  great  caution. 

They  walked  a little  distance  apart  from  each  other  so  as  to 
offer  a less  mark  for  a shot.  And,  to  tell  the  truth,  they 
expected  every  moment  to  hear  a report.  Five  minutes  after 
leaving  the  cart,  Gideon  Spilett  and  Pencroft  arrived  at  the 
edge  of  the  wood  before  the  clearing  beyond  which  rose  they 
palisade. 

They  stopped.  A few  straggling  beams  still  fell  on  the  field 
clear  of  trees.  Thirty  feet  distant  was  the  gate  of  the  corral, 
which  appeared  to  be  closed.  This  thirty  feet,  which  it  was 
necessary  to  cross  from  the  border  of  the  wood  to  the  palisade! 


564 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION, 


constituted  the  dangerous  zone,  to  coin  a term  ; in  fact,  one 
or  more  bullets  fired  from  behind  the  palisade  might  knock 
over  any  one  who  ventured  on  to  this  zone.  Gideon  Spilett 
and  the  sailor  were  not  men  to  draw  back,  but  they  knew  that 
any  imprudence  on  their  part,  of  which  they  would  be  the 
first  victims,  would  fall  afterwardson  their  companions.  If 
they  themselves  were  killed,  what  would  become  of  Harding, 
Neb  and  Herbert  ? 

But  Pencroft,  excited  at  feeling  himself  so  near  the  corral 
where  he  supposed  the  convicts  had  taken  refuge,  was  about 
to  press  forward,  when  the  reporter  held  him  back  with  a 
grasp  of  iron. 

“In  a few  minutes  it  will  be  quite  dark,”  whispered  Spilett 
in  the  sailor’s  ear  ; “ then  it  will  be  the  time  to  act.” 

Pencroft,  convulsively  clasping  the  butt-end  of  his  gun, 
restrained  his  eagerness,  and  waited,  swearing  to  himself. 

Soon  the  last  of  the  twilight  faded  away.  Darkness,  which 
seemed  as  if  it  issued  from  the  dense  forest,  covered  the  clear* 
ing.  Mount  Franklin  rose  like  an  enormous  screen  before  the 
western  horizon  and  night  spread  rapidly  over  all,  as  it  does 
in  regions  of  low  latitudes.  Now  was  the  time. 

The  reporter  and  Pencroft,  since  posting  themselves  on  the 
edge  of  the  wood,  had  not  once  lost  sight  of  the  palisade.  The 
corral  appeared  to  be  absolutely  deserted.  The  top  of  the 
palisade  formed  a line,  a little  darker  than  the  surrounding 
shadow,  and  nothing  disturbed  its  distinctness.  Nevertheless, 
if  the  convicts  were  there,  they  must  have  posted  one  of  their 
number  to  guard  against  any  surprise. 

Spilett  grasped  his  companion’s  hand,  and  both  crept 
towards  the  corral,  their  guns  ready  to  fire. 

They  reached  the  gate  without  the  darkness  being  illumin- 
ated by  a single  ray  of  light. 

Pencroft  tried  to  push  open  the  gate,  which,  as  the  reporter 
and  he  had  supposed,  was  closed.  However,  the  sailor  was 
able  to  ascertain  that  the  outer  bars  had  not  been  put  up.  It 
might,  then,  be  concluded  that  the  convicts  were  there  in  the 
corral,  and  that  very  probably  they  had  fastened  the  gate  in 
such  a way  that  it  could  not  be  forced  open. 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND* 


m 


Jftdeon  Spilett  and  Pencroft  listened. 

Not  a sound  could  be  heard  inside  the  palisade.  The 
musmons  and  the  goats,  sleeping  no  doubt  in  their  huts,  in  no 
way  disturbed  the  calm  of  night. 

The  reporter  and  the  sailor  hearing  nothing,  asked  them- 
selves whether  they  had  not  better  scale  the  palisades  and 
penetrate  into  the  corral.  This  would  have  been  contrary  to 
Cyrus  Harding’s  instructions. 

It  is  true  that  the  enterprise  might  succeed,  but  it  might 
also  fail.  Now,  if  the  convicts  were  suspecting  nothing,  if  they 
knew  nothing  of  the  expedition  against  them,  if,  lastly,  there 
now  existed  a chance  of  surprising  them,  ought  this  chance 
to  be  lost  by  inconsiderately  attempting  to  cross  the  palisade  ? 

This  was  not  the  reporter’s  opinion.  He  thought  it  better  to 
wait  until  all  the  settlers  were  collected  together  before  at- 
tempting to  penetrate  into  the  corral.  One  thing  was  certain, 
that  it  was  possible  to  reach  the  palisade  without  being  seen, 
and  also  that  it  did  not  appear  to  be  guarded.  This  point  set- 
tled, there  was  nothing  to  be  done  but  to  return  to  the  cart, 
where  they  would  consult. 

Pencroft  probably  agreed  with  this  decision,  for  he  followed 
the  reporter  without  making  any  objection  when  the  latter 
turned  back  to  the  wood. 

In  a few  minutes  the  engineer  was  made  acquainted  witr 
the  state  of  affairs. 

“Well,”  said  he,  after  a little  thought,  “I  now  have  reason 
to  believe  that  the  convicts  are  not  in  the  corral.” 

“ We  shall  soon  know,”  said  Pencroft,  “ when  we  have  scaled 
the  palisade.” 

“To  the  corral,  my  friends !”  said  Cyrus  Harding. 

“ Shall  we  leave  the  cart  in  the  wood  ? ” asked  Neb. 

“No,”  replied  the  engineer;  “ it  is  our  wagon  of  ammunition 
and  provisions,  and,  if  necessary,  it  would  serve  as  an  in- 
trenchment.” 

“ Forward,  then ! ” said  Gideon  Spilett. 

The  cart  emerged  from  the  wood  and  began  to  roll  noise- 
lessly towards  the  palisade.  The  darkness  was  now  profound, 
the  silence  as  complete  as  when  Pencroft  and  the  reporter 


m 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


crept  over  the  ground  The  thick  grass  completely  muffled 
iheir  footsteps. 

The  colonists  held  themselves  ready  to  fire.  Jup,  at  Pen- 
croft’s  orders,  kept  behind.  Neb  led  Top  in  a leash,  to  pre- 
vent him  from  bounding  forward. 

The  clearing  soon  came  in  sight.  It  was  deserted.  Without 
hesitating,  the  little  band  moved  towards  the  palisade.  In  a 
short  space  of  time  the  dangerous  zone  was  passed.  Not  a 
shot  had  been  fired.  When  the  cart  reached  the  palisade  it 
stopped.  Neb  remained  at  the  onagas’  heads  to  hold  them. 
The  engineer,  the  reporter,  Herbert,  and  Pencroft,  proceeded 
to  the  door,  in  order  to  ascertain  if  it  was  barricaded  inside. 

It  was  open ! 

“What  do  you  say  now?”  asked  the  engineer,  turning  to 
the  sailor  and  Spilett. 

Both  were  stupefied. 

“lean  swear,”  said  Pencroft,  “that  this  gate  was  shut  just 
now ! ” 

The  colonists  now  hesitated.  Were  the  convicts  in  the 
corral  when  Pencroft  and  the  reporter  made  their  reconnois* 
sance  ? It  could  not  be  doubted,  as  the  gate  then  closed  could 
only  have  been  opened  by  them.  Were  they  still  there,  or  had 
one  of  their  number  just  gone  out  ? 

All  these  questions  presented  themselves  simultaneously  to 
the  minds  of  the  colonists,  but  how  could  they  be  answered  ? 

At  that  moment,  Herbert,  who  had  advanced  a few  steps 
into  the  enclosure,  drew  back  hurriedly,  and  seized  Harding’s 
hand. 

“ What’s  the  matter  ? ” asked  the  engineer. 

“Alight!” 

“In  the  house?” 

“Yes!” 

All  five  advanced,  and  indeed,  through  the  window  fronting 
them,  they  saw  glimmering  a feeble  light.  Cyrus  Harding 
made  up  his  mind  rapidly.  “ It  is  our  only  chance,”  said  he  to 
his  companions,  “of  finding  the  convicts  collected  in  this 
house,  suspecting  nothing ! They  are  in  our  power ! For- 
ward ! ” The  colonists  crossed  through  the  enclosure,  holding 


THE  SECKS5T  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


567 


their  guns  ready  in  their  hands.  The  cart  had  been  left  outside 
under  the  charge  of  Jup  and  Top,  who  had  been  prudently 
tied  to  it. 

Cyrus  Harding,  Penoroft,  and  Gideon  Spilett  on  one  side, 
Herbert  and  Neb  on  the  other,  going  along  by  the  palisade, 
surveyed  the  absolutely  dark  and  deserted  corral. 

In  a few  moments  they  were  near  the  closed  door  of  the 
house. 

Harding  signed  to  his  companions  not  to  stir,  and  approached 
the  window,  then  feebly  lighted  by  the  inner  light. 

He  gazed  into  the  apartment. 

On  the  table  burned  a lantern.  Near  the  table  was  the  bed 
formerly  used  by  Ayrton. 

On  the  bed  lay  the  body  of  a man. 

Suddenly  Cyrus  Harding  drew  back,  and  in  a hoarse  voice,— 
“Ayrton!”  he  exclaimed. 

Immediately  the  door  was  forced  rather  than  opened,  and 
the  colonists  rushed  into  the  room. 

Ayrton  appeared  to  be  asleep.  His  countenance  showed  that 
he  had  long  and  cruelly  suffered.  On  his  wrists  and  ankles 
could  be  seen  great  bruises. 

Harding  bent  over  him. 

“ Ayrton ! ” cried  the  engineer,  seizing  me  arm  of  the  man 
whom  he  had  just  found  again  under  sucn  unexpected  circum- 
stances. At  this  exclamation  Ayrton  opened  his  eyes,  and 
gazing  at  Harding,  then  at  the  others,— 

“ You  ! ” he  cried  ; “ you ! ” 

“ Ayrton ! Ayrton ! ” repeated  Harding 
“ Where  ami?” 

“ In  the  house  in  the  corral  I ” 

“Alone?” 

“Yes  !” 

“But  they  will  come  back!”  cried  Ayrton.  “Defend  your- 
selves ! defend  yourselves ! ” 

And  he  fell  back  exhausted, 

“Spilett,”  exclaimed  the  engineer,  “we  maybe  attacked  at 
any  moment.  Bring  the  cart  into  the  corral.  Then  barricade 
the  door,  and  all  come  back  here.” 


568 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


Pencroft,  Neb,  and  the  reporter  hastened  to  execute  the 
engineer’s  orders.  There  was  not  a moment  to  be  lost.  Per- 
haps even  now  the  cart  was  in  the  hands  of  the  convicts ! 

In  a moment  the  reporter  and  his  two  companions  had 
crossed  the  corral  and  reached  the  gate  of  the  palisade  behind 
which  Top  was  heard  growling  sullenly. 

The  engineer,  leaving  Ayrton  for  an  instant,  came  out  ready 
to  fire.  Herbert  was  at  his  side.  Both  surveyed  the  crest  of 
the  spur  overlooking  the  corral.  If  the  convicts  were  lying  in 
ambush  there,  they  might  knock  the  settlers  over  one  after  the 
other. 

At  that  moment  the  moon  appeared  in  the  east,  above  the 
black  curtain  of  the  forest,,  and  a white  sheet  of  light  spread 
over  the  interior  of  the  enclosure.  The  corral,  with  its  clumps 
of  trees,  the  little  stream  which  watered  it,  and  its  wide  carpet 
of  gr^ss,  was  suddenly  illuminated.  From  the  side  of  the 
mountain,  the  house  and  a part  of  the  palisade  stood  out  white 
in  the  moonlight.  On  the  opposite  side  towards  the  door,  the 
enclosure  remained  dark. 

A black  mass  soon  appeared.  This  was  the  cart  entering  the 
circle  of  light,  and  Cyrus  Harding  could  hear  the  noise  made 
by  the  door  as  his  companions  shut  it  and  fastened  the  interior 
bars. 

But,  at  that  moment,  Top,  breaking  loose,  began  to  bark 
furiously  and  rush  to  the  back  of  the  corral,  to  the  right  of  the 
house. 

“ Be  ready  to  fire,  my  friends ! ” cried  Harding. 

The  colonists  raised  their  pieces  and  waited  the  moment  to 
fire. 

Top  still  barked,  and  Jup,  running  towards  the  dbg,  uttered 
shrill  cries. 

The  colonists  followed  him,  and  reached  the  borders  of  the 
little  stream,  shaded  by  large  trees.  And  there  in  the  bright 
moonlight,  what  did  they  see  ? Five  corpses,  stretched  on  the 
bank ! 

They  were  those  of  the  convicts  who,  four  months  previ- 
ously, had  landed  on  Lincoln  Island ! 


CHAPTER  XIII 


&YBTQN’S  STORY— PLANS  OF  HIS  FORMER  ACCOMPLICES  — THEIR 
INSTALLATION  IN  THE  CORRAL— THE  AVENGING  JUSTICE  OF 
LINCOLN  ISLAND  — THE  “ BONADVENTURE  ” — RESEARCHES 
AROUND  MOUNT  FRANKLIN  — THE  UPPER  VALLEYS  — A SUB- 
TERRANEAN VOLCANO  — PENCROFT’S  OPINION  — AT  THE  BOT- 
TOM OF  THE  CRATER— RETURN. 

How  had  it  happened  ? Who  had  killed  the  convicts  ? Was 
it  Ayrton  ? No,  for  a moment  before  he  was  dreading  their 
return. 

But  Ayrton  was  now  in  a profound  Etupor,  from  which  it 
was  no  longer  possible  to  rouse  him.  After  uttering  those  few 
words  he  had  again  become  unconscious,  and  had  fallen  back 
motionless  on  the  bed. 

The  colonists,  a prey  to  a thousand  confused  thoughts 
under  the  influence  of  violent  excitement,  waited  all  night, 
without  leaving  Ayrton’s  house,  or  returning  to  the  spot 
where  lay  the  bodies  of  the  convicts.  It  was  very  probable  that 
Ayrton  would  not  be  able  to  throw  any  light  on  the  circum- 
stances under  which  the  bodies  had  been  found,  since  he 
himself  was  not  aware  that  he  was  in  the  corral.  But  at  any 
rate  he  would  be  in  a position  to  give  an  account  of  what  had 
taken  place  before  this  terrible  execution.  The  next  day 
Ayrton  awoke  from  his  torpor,  and  his  companions  cordially 
manifested  all  the  joy  they  felt,  on  seeing  him  again,  almost 
safe  and  sound,  after  a hundred  and  four  days’  separation. 

Ayrton  then  in  a few  words  recounted  what  had  happened, 
or  at  least,  as  much  as  he  knew. 

The  day  after  his  arrival  at  the  corral,  on  the  10th  of  last 
November,  at  nightfall,  he  was  surprised  by  ihe  convicts,  who 
had  scaled  the  palisade.  They  bound  and  gagged  him  ; that 

m 


570 


THE  LAKESIDS  8KTEON. 


he  was  led  to  a dark  cavern,  at  the  loot  of  Mount  Franklin, 
where  the  convicts  had  taken  refuge* 

His  death  had  been  decided  upon,  and  the  next  day  the  con- 
victs were  about  to  kill  him,  when  one  of  them  recognized  him 
and  called  him  by  the  name  which  he  bore  in  Australia.  The 
wretches  had  no  scruples  as  to  murdering  Ayrton!  They 
spared  Ben  Joyce ! 

But  from  that  moment  Ayrton  was  exposed  to  the  impor- 
tunities of  his  former  accomplices.  They  wished  him  to  join 
them  again,  and  relied  upon  his  aid  to  enable  them  to  gain  pos- 
session of  Granite  House,  to  penetrate  into  that  hitherto  inac- 
cessible dwelling,  and  to  become  masters  of  the  island,  after 
murdering  the  colonists ! 

Ayrton  remained  firm.  The  once  convict,  now  repentant 
and  pardoned,  would  rather  die  than  betray  his  companions. 
Ayrton  — bound,  gagged,  and  closely  watched  — lived  in  this 
cave  for  four  months. 

Nevertheless  the  convicts  had  discovered  the  corral  a short 
time  after  their  arrival  in  the  island,  and  since  then  they  had 
subsisted  on  Ayrton’s  stores,  but  did  not  live  at  the  corral. 

On  the  11th  of  November,  two  of  the  villains,  surprised  by 
the  colonists’  arrival,  fired  at  Herbert,  and  one  of  them  re- 
turned, boasting  of  having  killed  one  of  the  inhabitants  of 
the  island  ; but  he  returned  alone.  His  companion,  as  is 
known,  fell  by  Cyrus  Harding’s  dagger. 

Ayrton’s  anxiety  and  despair  may  be  imagined  when  he 
heard  the  news  of  Herbert’s  death.  The  settlers  were  now  only 
four,  and,  as  it  seemed,  at  the  mercy  of  the  convicts.  After 
this  event,  and  during  all  the  time  that  the  colonists,  detained 
by  Herbert’s  illness,  remained  in  the  corral,  the  pirates  did  not 
leave  their  cavern,  and  even  after  they  had  pillaged  the  plateau 
of  Prospect  Heights,  they  did  not  think  it  prudent  to  aban- 
don it. 

The  ill-treatment  inflicted  on  Ayrton  was  now  redoubled. 
His  hands  and  feet  still  bore  the  bloody  marks  of  the  cords 
which  bound  him  night  and  day.  Every  moment  he  expected 
to  be  put  to  death,  nor  did  it  appear  possible  that  he  could 
escape. 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


571 


Matters  remained  thus  until  the  third  week  of  February. 
The  convicts,  still  watching  for  a favorable  opportunity, 
rarely  quitted  their  retreat,  and  only  made  a few  hunting 
excursions  either  to  the  interior  of  the  island,  or  the  south 
coast. 

Ayrton  had  no  further  news  of  his  friends,  and  relinquished 
all  hope  of  ever  seeing  them  again.  At  last,  the  unfortunate 
man,  weakened  by  ill  treatment,  fell  into  a prostration  so  pro- 
found that  sight  and  hearing  failed  him.  From  that  moment, 
that  is  to  say,  since  the  last  two  days,  he  could  give  no  in* 
formation  whatever  of  what  had  occurred. 

“But,  Captain  Harding,”  he  added,  “since  I was  imprisoned 
in  that  cavern,  how  is  it  that  I find  myself  in  the  corral  ? ” 

“ How  is  it  that  the  convicts  are  lying  yonder  dead,  in  the 
middle  of  the  enclosure  ?”  answered  the  engineer. 

“Dead!”  cried  Ayrton,  half  rising  from  his  bed,  notwith- 
standing his  weakness. 

His  companions  supported  him.  He  wished  to  get  up,  and 
with  their  assistance  he  did  so.  They  then  proceeded  together 
towards  the  little  stream. 

It  was  now  broad  daylight. 

There,  on  the  bank,  in  the  position  in  which  they  had  been 
stricken  by  death  in  its  most  instantaneous  form,  lay  the 
corpses  of  the  five  convicts. 

Ayrton  was  astounded.  Harding  and  his  companions  looked 
at  him  without  uttering  a word.  On  c sign  from  the  engi- 
neer, Neb  and  Pencroft  examined  the  bodies,  already  stiffened 
by  the  cold. 

They  bore  no  apparent  trace  of  any  wound. 

Only,  after  carefully  examining  them,  Pencroft  found  on  the 
forehead  of  one,  on  the  chest  of  another,  on  the  back  of  tills 
one,  on  the  shoulder  of  that,  a little  red  spot,  a sort  oi  scarcely 
visible  bruise,  the  cause  of  which  it  was  impossible  to  con 
jecture. 

“ It  is  there  that  they  have  been  struck ! ” said  Cyrus  Harding. 

“But  with  what  weapon?”  cried  the  reporter. 

“A  weapon,  lightning-like  in  its  effects,  and  of  which  we 
nave  not  the  secret  I ” 


672 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


“ And  who  has  struck  the  blow?  ” asked  Pencroft. 

“ The  avenging  power  of  the  island,”  replied  Harding,  “ha 
Who  brought  you  here,  Ayrton,  whose  influence  has  once 
more  manifested  itself,  who  does  for  us  all  that  which  we  can 
not  do  for  ourselves,  and  who,  his  will  accomplished,  conceals 
himself  from  us.” 

“ Let  us  make  search  for  him,  then ! ” exclaimed  Pencroft. 

“ Yes,  we  will  search  for  him,”  answered  Harding  ; “ but  we 
shall  not  discover  this  powerful  being  who  performs  such 
wonders,  until  he  pleases  to  call  us  to  him  ! ” 

This  invisible  protection,  which  rendered  their  own  action 
unavailing,  both  irritated  and  piqued  the  engineer.  The 
relative  inferiority  which  it  proved  was  of  a nature  to  wound 
the  haughty  spirit.  A generosity  evinced  in  such  a manner  as 
to  elude  all  tokens  of  gratitude,  implied  a sort  of  disdain  for 
those  on  whom  the  obligation  was  conferred,  which  in  Cyrus 
Harding’s  eyes  marred,  in  some  degree,  the  worth  of  the  bene- 
fit. 

“Let  us  search,”  he  resumed,  “and  God  grant  that  we  may 
Some  day  be  permitted  to  prove  to  this  haughty  protector  that 
ie  has  not  to  deal  with  ungrateful  people  ! What  would  1 
not  give  could  we  repay  him,  by  rendering  him  in  our  turn, 
although  at  the  price  of  our  lives,  some  signal  service!  ” 

From  this  day,  the  thoughts  of  the  inhabitants  of  Lincoln 
Island  were  solely  occupied  with  the  intended  search.  Every 
thing  incited  them  to  discover  the  answer  to  this  enigma,  an 
answer  which  could  only  be  the  name  of  a man  endowed  with 
a truly  inexplicable,  and  in  some  degree  superhuman,  power. 

In  a few  minutes  the  settlers  re-entered  the  house,  where 
their  influence  soon  restored  to  Ayrton  his  moral  and  physical 
energy. 

Neb  and  Pencroft  carried  the  corpses  of  the  convicts  into  the 
forest,  some  distance  from  the  corral,  and  buried  them  deep  in 
the  ground. 

Ayrton  was  then  made  acquainted  with  the  facts  which  had 
occurred  during  his  seclusion.  He  learnt  Herbert’s  adventures, 
and  through  what  various  trials  the  colonists  had  passed.  As 
to  the  settlers,  they  had  despaired  of  ever  seeing  Ayrton 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


m 

togatn  and  had  been  convinced  that  the  convicts  had  ruthlessly 
murdered  him. 

“ And  now,”  said  Cyrus  Harding,  as  he  ended  his  recital,  “ a 
duty  remains  for  us  to  perform.  Half  of  our  task  is  accom- 
plished, but  although  the  convicts  are  no  longer  to  be  feared, 
it  is  not  owing  to  ourselves  that  we  are  once  more  masters 
of  the  island.” 

“Well!”  answered  Gideon  Spilett,  “let  us  search  all  this 
labyrinth  of  the  spurs  of  Mount  Franklin.  We  will  not  leave 
a hollow,  not  a hole  unexplored ! Ah  ! if  ever  a reporter  found 
himself  face  to  face  with  a mystery,  it  is  I who  now  speak  to 
you,  my  friends ! ” 

“And  we  will  not  return  to  Granite  House  until  we  have 
found  our  benefactor,”  said  Herbert. 

“ Yes,”  said  the  engineer,  “ we  will  do  all  that  it  is  humanly 
possible  to  do,  but  I repeat  we  shall  not  find  him  until  he  him- 
self permits  us.” 

“Shall  we  stay  at  the  corral?”  asked  Pencroft. 

“ We  shall  stay  here,”  answered  Harding.  “ Provisions  are 
abundant,  and  we  are  here  in  the  very  center  of  the  circle  we 
have  to  explore.  Besides,  if  necessary,  the  cart  will  take  U3 
rapidly  to  Granite  House.” 

“ Good  I ” answered  the  sailor.  “ Only  I have  a remark  to 
make.” 

“What is  it?” 

“ Here  is  the  fine  season  getting  on,  and  we  must  not  for- 
get that  we  have  a voyage  to  make.” 

“ A voyage  ? ” said  Gideon  Spilett. 

“ Yes,  to  Tabor  Island,”  answered  Pencroft.  “It  is  necessary 
to  carry  a notice  there  to  point  out  the  position  of  our  island 
and  say  that  Ayrton  is  here  in  case  the  Scotch  yacht  should 
come  to  take  him  off.  Who  knows  if  it  is  not  already  too 
late?” 

“ But,  Pencroft,”  asked  Ayrton,  “ how  do  you  intend  to  make 
this  voyage?” 

“In  the  ‘Bonadventure?  ” 

“ The  ‘ Bonad venture  I ’ exclaimed  Ayrton.  “ She  no  longest 
exists.” 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


44  My  ‘Bonadventure’  exists  no  longer ! ” shouted  Pencroft 
bounding  from  his  seat. 

“ No,”  answered  Ayrton.  44  The  convicts  discovered  her  in  her 
little  harbor  only  eight  days  ago,  they  put  to  sea  in  her,  and—” 

44  And?  ” said  Pencroft,  his  heart  beating. 

44And  not  having  Bob  Harvey  to  steer  her,  they  ran  on  the 
rocks,  and  the  vessel  went  to  pieces.” 

44  Oh,  the  villains,  the  cut-throats,  the  infamous  scoundrels  I ” 
exclaimed  Pencroft. 

44  Pencroft,”  said  Herbert,  taking  the  sailor’s  hand,  “ we 
will  build  another  4 Bonadventure  ’—a  larger  one.  We  have  all 
the  iron-work— all  the  rigging  of  the  brig  at  our  disposal.” 

“But  do  you  know,”  returned  Pencroft,  44  that  it  will  take  at 
least  five  or  six  months  to  build  a vessel  of  from  thirty  to  forty 
tons  ? ” 

44  We  can  take  our  time,”  said  the  reporter,  “ and  we  must 
give  up  the  voyage  to  Tabor  Island  for  this  year.” 

“Oh,  my  ‘Bonadventure!’  my  poor  ‘Bonadventure!’”  cried 
Pencroft,  almost  broken-hearted  at  the  destruction  of  the  vessel 
of  which  he  was  so  proud. 

The  loss  of  the  4 Bonadventure  ’ was  certainly  a thing  to  be 
lamented  by  the  colonists,  and  it  was  agreed  that  this  loss 
should  be  repaired  as  soon  as  possible.  This  settled,  they  now 
occupied  themselves  with  bringing  their  researches  to  bear  on 
the  most  secret  parts  of  the  island. 

The  exploration  was  commenced  at  daybreak  on  the  19th  of 
February,  and  lasted  an  entire  week.  The  base  of  the  moun- 
tain, with  its  spurs  and  their  numberless  ramifications,  formed 
a labyrinth  of  valleys  and  elevations.  It  was  evident  that 
there,  in  the  depths  of  these  narrow  gorges,  perhaps  even  in 
the  interior  of  Mount  Franklin  itself,  was  the  proper  place  to 
pursue  their  researches.  No  part  of  the  island  could  have 
been  more  suitable  to  conceal  a dwelling  whose  occupant 
wished  to  remain  unknown.  But  so  irregular  was  the  forma- 
tion of  the  valleys  that  Cyrus  Harding  was  obliged  to  conduct 
the  exploration  in  a strictly  methodical  manner. 

The  colonists  first  visited  the  valley  opening  to  the  south  of 
the  volcano,  and  which  first  received  the  waters  of  Falls  Riven 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


575 


There  Ayrton  showed  them  the  cavern  where  the  convicts  had 
taken  refuge,  and  in  which  he  had  been  imprisoned  until  his 
removal  to  the  corral.  This  cavern  was  just  as  Ayrton  had  left 
it.  They  found  there  a considerable  quantity  of  ammunition 
and  provisions,  conveyed  thither  by  the  convicts  in  order  to 
form  a reserve. 

The  whole  of  the  valley  bordering  on  the  cave,  shaded  by  fir 
and  other  trees,  was  thoroughly  explored,  and  on  turning  the 
point  of  the  southwestern  spur,  the  colonists  entered  a nar- 
rower gorge  similar  to  the  picturesque  columns  of  basalt  on 
the  coast.  Here  the  trees  were  fewer.  Stones  took  the  place 
of  grass.  Goats  and  musmons  gambolled  among  the  rocks. 
Here  began  the  barren  part  of  the  island.  It  could  already  be 
seen  that,  of  the  numerous  valleys  branching  off  at  the  base 
of  Mount  Franklin,  three  only  were  wooded  and  rich  in  pastur- 
age like  that  of  the  corral,  which  bordered  on  the  west  on  the 
Falls  River  valley,  and  on  the  east  on  the  Red  Creek  valley. 
These  two  streams,  which  lower  down  became  rivers  by  the 
absorption  of  several  tributaries,  were  formed  by  all  the  springs 
of  the  mountain  and  thus  caused  the  fertility  of  its  southern 
part.  As  to  the  Mercy,  it  was  more  directly  fed  from  ample 
springs  concealed  under  the  cover  of  Jacamar  Wood,  and  it 
was  by  springs  of  this  nature,  spreading  in  a thousand 
streamlets,  that  the  soil  of  the  Serpentine  Peninsula  was 
watered.  Now,  of  these  three  well-watered  valleys,  either 
might  have  served  as  a retreat  to  some  solitary  who  would 
have  found  there  every  thing  necessary  for  life.  But  the  set- 
tlers had  already  explored  them,  and  in  no  part  had  they  dis- 
covered the  presence  of  man. 

Was  it  then  in  the  depths  of  those  barren  gorges,  in  the  midst 
of  the  piles  of  rock,  in  the  rugged  northern  ravines,  among 
the  streams  of  lava,  that  this  dwelling  and  its  occupant  would 
be  found  ? 

The  northern  part  of  Mount  Franklin  was  at  its  base  com- 
posed solely  of  two  valleys,  wide,  not  very  deep,  without  any 
appearance  of  vegetation,  strewn  with  masses  of  rock,  paved 
with  lava,  and  varied  with  great  blocks  of  mineral.  This 
region  required  a long  and  careful  exploration.  It  contained 


576 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


a thousand  cavities,  comfortless  no  doubt,  but  perfectly  con* 
cealed  and  difficult  of  access. 

The  colonists  even  visited  dark  tunnels,  dating  from  the  vol- 
canic period,  still  black  from  the  passage  of  the  fire,  and  pene- 
trated into  the  depths  of  the  mountain.  They  traversed  these 
sombre  galleries,  waving  lighted  torches  ; they  examined  the 
smallest  excavations  ; they  sounded  the  shallowest  depths,  but 
all  was  dark  and  silent.  It  did  not  appear  that  the  foot  of  man 
had  ever  before  trodden  these  ancient  passages,  or  that  his  arm 
had  ever  displaced  one  of  these  blocks,  which  remained  as 
the  volcano  had  cast  them  up  above  the  waters,  at  the  time  of 
the  submersion  of  the  island. 

However,  although  these  passages  appeared  to  be  absolutely 
deserted,  and  the  obscurity  was  complete,  Cyrus  Harding  was 
obliged  to  confess  that  absolute  silence  did  not  reign  there. 

On  arriving  at  the  end  of  one  of  these  gloomy  caverns, 
extending  several  hundred  feet  into  the  interior  of  the  moun- 
tain, he  was  surprised  to  hear  a deep  rumbling  noise,  increased 
in  intensity  by  the  sonorousness  of  the  rocks. 

Gideon  Spilett,  who  accompanied  him,  also  heard  these 
distant  mutterings,  which  indicated  a revivication  of  the  sub- 
terranean fires.  Several  times  both  listened,  and  they  agreed 
that  some  chemical  process  was  taking  place  in  the  bowels  of 
the  earth. 

“ Then  this  volcano  is  not  totally  extinct  ? ” said  the  re- 
porter. 

“It  is  possible  that  since  our  exploration  of  the  crater,” 
replied  Cyrus  Harding,  “ some  change  has  occurred.  Any  vol- 
cano, although  considered  extinct,  may  evidently  again  burst 
forth.” 

“But  if  an  eruption  of  Mount  Franklin  occurred,”  asked 
Spilett,  “ would  there  not  be  some  danger  to  Lincoln  Island  ? ” 

“I  do  not  think  so,”  answered  the  engineer.  “The  crater, 
that  is  to  say,  the  safety-valve,  exists,  and  the  overflow  ol 
smoke  and  lava,  would  escape,  as  it  did  formerly,  by  its  custoiu- 
ary  outlet.” 

“ Unless  the  lava  opened  a new  way  for  itself  toward  the 
fertile  parts  of  the  island  I ” 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


577 


“And  why,  my  dear  Spilett,”  answered  Cyrus  Harding, 
“ should  it  not  follow  the  road  naturally  traced  out  for  it?  ” 

“ Well,  volcanoes  are  capricious,”  returned  the  reporter. 

“Notice,”  answered  the  engineer,  “that  the  inclination  of 
Mount  Franklin  favors  the  flow  of  water  toward  the  valleys 
which  we  are  exploring  just  now.  To  turn  aside  this  flow,  an 
earthquake  would  be  necessary  to  change  the  mountain’s 
center  of  gravity.” 

“ But  an  earthquake  is  always  to  be  feared  at  these  times,” 
observed  Gideon  Spilett. 

“ Always,”  replied  the  engineer,  “ especially  when  the 
subterranean  forces  begin  to  awake,  as  they  risk  meeting  with 
some  obstruction,  after  a long  rest.  Thus,  my  dear  Spilett, 
an  eruption  would  be  a serious  thing  for  us,  and  it  would  be 
better  that  the  volcano  should  not  have  the  slightest  desire  to 
wake  up.  But  we  could  not  prevent  it,  could  we?  At  any 
rate,  even  if  it  should  occur,  I do  not  think  Prospect  Heights 
would  be  seriously  threatened.  Between  them  and  the 
mountain,  the  ground  is  considerably  depressed,  and  if  the 
lava  should  ever  take  a course  toward  the  lake,  it  would  be  cast 
on  the  downs  and  the  neighboring  parts  of  Shark  Gulf.” 

“We  have  not  yet  seen  any  smoke  at  the  top  of  the  mount- 
ain, to  indicate  an  approaching  eruption,”  said  Gideon  Spilett. 

“No,”  answered  Harding,  “not  a vapor  escapes  from  the 
crater,  for  it  was  only  yesterday  that  I attentively  surveyed  the 
summit.  But  it  is  probable  that  at  the  lower  part  of  the 
chimney,  time  may  have  accumulated  rocks,  cinders,  hardened 
lava,  and  that  this  valve  of  which  I spoke  may  at  any  time 
become  overcharged.  But  at  the  first  serious  effort,  every 
obstacle  will  disappear,  and  you  may  be  certain,  my  dear 
Spilett,  that  neither  the  island,  which  is  the  boiler,  nor  the 
volcano,  which  is  the  chimney,  will  burst  under  the  pressure 
of  gas.  Nevertheless,  I repeat,  it  would  be  better  that  there 
should  not  be  an  eruption.” 

“And  yet  we  are  not  mistaken,”  remarked  the  reporter. 
“Mutterings  can  be  distinctly  heard  in  the  very  bowels  of  the 
volcano ! ” 

“ You  are  right,”  said  the  engineer,  again  listening  attentively. 
87 


578 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


“ There  can  be  no  doubt  of  it.  A commotion  is  going  on  there, 
of  which  we  can  neither  estimate  the  importance  nor  the  ulti- 
mate result.” 

Cyrus  Harding  and  Spilett  on  coming  out,  rejoined  their 
companions,  to  whom  they  made  known  the  state  of  affairs. 

“ Very  well ! ” cried  Pencroft,  “ the  volcano  wants  to  play  his 
pranks ! Let  him  try,  if  he  likes ! He  will  find  his  master  ! ” 

“Who  ?”  asked  Neb. 

“ Our  good  genius,  Neb,  our  good  genius,  who  will  shut  his 
mouth  for  him  if  lie  so  much  as  pretends  to  open  it ! ” 

As  may  be  seen,  the  sailor’s  confidence  in  the  tutelary  deity 
of  his  island  was  absolute,  and,  certainly,  the  occult  power, 
manifested  until  now  in  so  many  inexplicable  ways,  appeared 
to  be  unlimited;  but  also  it  knew  how  to  escape  the  colonists’ 
most  minute  researches,  for,  in  spite  of  all  their  efforts, 
in  spite  of  the  more  than  zeal  — the  obstinacy  — with  which 
they  carried  on  their  exploration,  the  retreat  of  the  mysterious 
being  could  not  be  discovered. 

From  the  19th  to  the  25th  of  February  the  circle  of  investiga- 
tion was  extended  to  all  the  northern  region  of  Lincoln  Island, 
whose  most  secret  nooks  were  explored.  The  colonists  even 
went  to  the  length  of  tapping  every  rock.  The  search  was 
extended  to  the  extreme  verge  of  the  mountain.  It  was 
explored  thus  to  the  very  summit  of  the  truncated  cone  ter- 
minating the  first  row  of  rocks,  then  to  the  upper  ridge  of  the 
enormous  hat,  at  the  bottom  of  which  opened  the  crater. 

They  did  more;  they  visited  the  gulf,  now  extinct,  but  in 
whose  depths  the  rumbling  could  be  distinctly  heard.  How- 
ever, no  sign  of  smoke  or*  vapor,  no  heating  of  the  rock 
indicated  an  approaching  eruption.  But  neither  there,  nor 
in  any  other  part  of  Mount  Franklin,  did  the  colonists  find  any 
traces  of  him  of  whom  they  were  in  search. 

Their . investigations  were  then  directed  to  the  downs. 
They  carefully  examined  the  high  lava-cliffs  of  Shark  Gulf 
from  the  base  to  the  crest,  although  it  was  extremely  difficult 
to  reach  even  the  level  of  the  gulf.  No  one ! — nothing ! 

In  short,  in  these  two  words  were  summed  up  so  much 
fatigue  uselessly  expended,  so  much  energy  producing  no 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


579 


result,  that  somewhat  of  anger  mingled  with  the  discomfiture 
of  Cyrus  Harding  and  his  companions. 

It  was  now  time  to  think  of  returning,  for  these  researches 
could  not  be  prolonged  indefinitely.  The  colonists  were 
certainly  right  in  believing  that  the  mysterious  being  did 
not  reside  on  the  surface  of  the  island,  and  the  wildest 
fancies  haunted  their  excited  imaginations.  Pencroft  and  Neb, 
particularly,  were  not  contented  with  the  mystery,  but  allowed 
their  imaginations  to  wander  into  the  domain  of  the  super- 
natural. 

On  the  25th  of  February  the  colonists  re-entered  Granite 
House,  and  by  means  of  the  double  cord,  carried  by  an  arrow 
to  the  threshold  of  the  door,  they  re-established  communication 
between  their  habitation  and  the  ground. 

A month  later  they  commemorated,  on  the  ^5th  ot  March* 
the  third  anniversary  of  their  arrival  on  Lincoln  Inland 


CHAPTER  XIV. 


THREE  TEARS  HAVE  PASSED— THE  NEW  VESSEL— WHAT  IS  AGREED 
ON  — PROSPERITY  OF  THE  COLONY  — THE  DOCKYARD  — COLD 
OF  THE  SOUTHERN  HEMISPHERE— WASHING  LINEN— MOUNT 
FRANKLIN, 

Three  years  had  passed  away  since  the  escape  of  the  prison- 
ers from  Richmond,  and  how  often  during  those  three  years 
had  they  spoken  of  their  country,  always  present  in  their 
thoughts ! 

They  had  no  doubt  that  the  civil  war  was  at  an  end,  and  to 
them  it  appeared  impossible  that  the  just  cause  of  the  North 
had  not  triumphed.  But  what  had  been  the  incidents  of  this 
terrible  war  ? How  much  blood  had  it  not  cost  ? How  many 
of  their  friends  must  have  fallen  in  the  struggle  ? They  often 
spoke  of  these  things,  without  as  yet  being  able  to  foresee  the 
day  when  they  would  be  permitted  once  more  to  see  their 
country.  To  return  thither,  were  it  but  for  a few  days,  to 
renew  the  social  link  with  the  inhabited  world,  to  establish  a 
communication  between  their  native  land  and  their  island, 
then  to  pass  the  longest,  perhaps  the  best,  portion  of  their 
existence  in  this  colony,  founded  by  them,  and  which  would 
then  be  dependent  on  their  country,  was  this  a dream  impossi- 
ble to  realize  ? 

There  were  only  two  ways  of  accomplishing  it  — either  a 
ship  must  appear  off  Lincoln  Island,  or  the  colonists  must 
themselves  build  a vessel  strong  enough  to  sail  to  the  nearest 
land. 

“ Unless,”  said  Pencroft,  “ our  good  genius  himself  provides 
us  with  the  means  of  returning  to  our  country.” 

And,  really,  had  any  one  told  Pencroft  and  Neb  that  a ship 
of  300  tons  was  waiting  for  them  in  Shark  Gulf  or  at  Pch 

580 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


58i 


Balloon,  they  would  not  even  have  made  a gesture  of  surprise. 
In  their  state  of  mind  nothing  appeared  improbable. 

But  Cyrus  Harding,  less  confident,  advised  them  to  confine 
themselves  to  fact,  and  more  especially  so  with  regard  to  the 
building  a vessel— a really  urgent  work,  since  it  was  for  the  pur- 
pose of  depositing,  as  soon  as  possible,  at  Tabor  Island  a docu- 
ment indicating  Ayrton’s  new  residence. 

As  the  “ Bon  adventure  ” no  longer  existed,  six  months  at 
least  would  be  required  for  the  construction  of  a new  vessel 
Now  winter  was  approaching,  and  the  voyage  could  not  be 
made  before  the  following  spring. 

“ We  have  time  to  get  every  thing  ready  for  the  fine  season,” 
remarked  the  engineer,  who  was  consulting  with  Pencroft 
about  these  matters.  “ I think,  therefore,  my  friend,  that  since 
we  have  to  rebuild  our  vessel  it  will  be  best  to  give  her  larger 
dimensions.  The  arrival  of  the  Scotch  yacht  at  Tabor  Island 
js  very  uncertain.  It  may  even  be  that,  having  arrived  several 
months  ago,  she  has  again  sailed  after  having  vainly  searched 
for  some  trace  of  Ayrton.  Will  it  not  then  be  best  to  build  a 
ship  which,  if  necessary,  could  take  us  either  to  the  Polynesian 
Archipelago  or  to  New  Zealand  ? What  do  you  think  ? ” 

“I  think,  Captain,”  answered  the  sailor;  “I  think  that 
vou  are  as  capable  of  building  a large  vessel  as  a small  one. 
Neither  the  wood  nor  the  tools  are  wanting.  It  is  only  a 
question  of  time.” 

“And  how  many  months  would  be  required  to  build  a vessel 
«f  from  250  to  300  tons  ? ” asked  Harding. 

“ Seven  or  eight  months  at  least,”  replied  Pencroft.  “ But  it 
must  not  be  forgotten  that  winter  is  drawing  near,  and  that  in 
severe  frost  wood  is  difficult  to  work.  We  must  calculate  on 
several  weeks’  delay,  and  if  our  vessel  is  ready  by  next  Novem- 
ber we  may  think  ourselves  very  lucky.” 

“Well,”  replied  Cyrus  Harding,  “that  will  be  exactly  the 
most  favorable  time  for  undertaking  a voyage  of  any  import- 
ance, either  to  Tabor  Island  or  to  a more  distant  land.” 

“ So  it  will,  captain,”  answered  the  sailor.  “ Make  out  your 
plans  then;  the  workmen  are  ready,  and  I imagine  that  Ayrton 
can  lend  us  a good  helping  hand.” 


582 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION* 


The  colonists,  having  been  consulted,  approved  the  engi 
neer’s  plan,  and  it  was,  indeed,  the  best  thing  to  be  done.  It 
is  true  that  the  construction  of  a ship  of  from  two  to  three 
hundred  tons  would  be  great  labor,  but  the  colonists  had  con- 
fidence in  themselves,  justified  by  their  previous  success. 

Cyrus  Harding  then  busied  himself  in  drawing  the  plan  of 
the  vessel  and  making  the  model.  During  this  time  his  com- 
panions employed  themselves  in  felling  and  carting  trees  to 
furnish  the  ribs,  timbers,  and  planks.  The  forest  of  the  Far 
West  supplied  the  best  oaks  and  elms.  They  took  advantage 
of  the  opening  already  made  on  their  last  excursion  to  form  a 
practicable  road,  which  they  named  the  Far  West  Road,  and 
the  trees  were  carried  to  the  Chimneys,  where  the  dockyard 
was  established.  As  to  the  road  in  question,  the  choice  of  trees 
had  rendered  its  direction  somewhat  capricious,  but  that  at 
the  same  time  facilitated  the  access  to  a large  part  of  the 
Serpentine  Peninsula. 

It  was  important  that  the  trees  should  be  quickly  felled  and 
cut  up,  for  they  could  not  be  used  while  yet  green,  and  some 
time  was  necessary  to  allow  them  to  get  seasoned.  The 
carpenters,  therefore,  worked  vigorously  during  the  month  of 
April,  which  was  troubled  only  by  a few  equinoctial  gales  of 
some  violence.  Master  Jup  aided  them  dexterously,  either  by 
climbing  to  the  top  of  a tree  to  fasten  the  ropes  or  by  lending 
his  stout  shoulders  to  carry  the  lopped  trunks. 

All  this  timber  was  piled  up  under  a large  shed,  built  near 
the  Chimneys,  and  there  awaited  the  time  for  use. 

The  month  of  April  was  tolerably  fine,  as  October  often  is  in 
the  northern  zone.  At  the  same  time  other  work  was  actively 
continued,  and  soon  all  trace  of  devastation  disappeared 
from  the  plateau  of  Prospect  Heights.  The  mill  was  rebuilt, 
and  new  buildings  rose  in  the  poultry-yard.  It  had  appeared 
necessary  to  enlarge  their  dimensions,  for  the  feathered  popu- 
lation had  increased  considerably.  The  stable  now  contained 
five  onagas,  four  of  which  were  well  broken,  and  allowed 
themselves  to  be  either  driven  or  ridden,  and  a little  colt. 
The  colony  now  possessed  a plow,  to  which  the  onagas 
were  yoked  like  regular  Yorkshire  or  Kentucky  oxen.  The 


' THE  SECftET  OE  THE  ISLAND. 


colonists  divided  their  work,  and  their  arms  never  tired 
Then  who  could  have  enjoyed  better  health  than  these  workers, 
and  what  good  humor  enlivened  the  evenings  in  Granite  House 
as  they  formed  a thousand  plans  for  the  future  ! 

As  a matter  of  course  Ayrton  shared  the  common  lot  in  every 
respect,  and  there  was  no  longer  any  talk  of  his  going  to  live 
at  the  corral.  Nevertheless  he  was  still  sad  and  reserved,  and 
joined  more  in  the  work  than  in  the  pleasures  of  his  com- 
panions. But  he  was  a valuable  workman  at  need— strong, 
skillful,  ingenious,  intelligent.  He  was  esteemed  and  loved  by 
all,  and  he  could  not  be  ignorant  of  it. 

In  the  meanwhile  the  corral  was  not  abandoned.  Every 
other  day  one  of  the  settlers,  driving  the  cart  or  mounted 
on  an  onaga,  went  to  look  after  the  flock  of  musmons  and 
goats  and  bring  back  the  supply  of  milk  required  by  Neb. 
These  excursions  at  the  same  time  afforded  opportunities  for 
hunting.  Therefore  Herbert  and  Gideon  Spilett,  with  Top  in 
front,  traversed  more  often  than  their  companions  the  road  to 
the  corral,  and  with  the  capital  guns  which  they  carried,  capy- 
baras,  agouties,  kangaroos,  and  wild  pigs  for  large  game, 
ducks,  tetras,  grouse,  jacamars,  and  snipe  for  small,  were  never 
wanting  in  the  house.  The  produce  of  the  warren,  of  the 
oyster-bed,  several  turtles  which  were  taken,  excellent  salmon 
which  came  up  the  Mercy,  vegetables  from  the  plateau,  wild 
fruit  from  the  forest,  were  riches  upon  riches,  and  Neb,  the 
head  cook,  could  scarcely  by  himself  store  them  away. 

The  telegraphic  wire  between  the  corral  and  Granite  House 
had  of  course  been  repaired,  and  it  was  worked  whenever  one 
or  other  of  the  settlers  was  at  the  corral  and  found  it  necessary 
to  spend  the  night  there.  Besides,  the  island  was  safe  now 
and  no  attacks  were  to  be  feared,  at  any  rate  from  men. 

However,  that  which  had  happened  .might  happen  again. 
A descent  of  pirates,  or  even  of  escaped  convicts,  was  always 
to  be  feared.  It  was  possible  that  companions  or  accomplices 
of  Bob  Harvey  had  been  in  the  secret  of  his  plans,  and  might 
be  tempted  to  imitate  him.  The  colonists,  therefore,  were  care- 
ful to  observe  the  sea  around  the  island,  and  every  day  their 
telescope  swept  the  horizon  enclosed  by  the  Union  and  Wash* 


584: 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


ington  Bays.  When  they  went  to  the  corral  they  examined  the 
sea  to  the  west  with  no  less  attention,  and  by  climbing  the  spur 
their  gaze  extended  over  a large  section  of  the  western 
horizon. 

Nothing  suspicious  was  discerned,  but  still  it  was  necessary 
for  them  to  be  on  their  guard. 

The  engineer  one  evening  imparted  to  his  friends  a plan 
which  he  had  conceived  for  fortifying  the  corral.  It  appeared 
prudent  to  him  to  heighten  the  palisade  and  to  flank  it  with  a 
sort  of  block-house,  which,  if  necessary,  the  settlers  could  hold 
against  the  enemy.  Granite  House  might,  by  its  very  position, 
be  considered  impregnable  ; therefore  the  corral  with  its  build- 
ings, its  stores,  and  the  animals  it  contained,  would  always  be 
the  object  of  pirates,  whoever  they  were,  who  might  land  on 
the  island,  and  should  the  colonists  be  obliged  to  shut  them- 
selves up  there  they  ought  also  to  be  able  to  defend  themselves 
without  any  disadvantage.  This  was  a project  which  might  be 
left  for  consideration,  and  they  were,  besides,  obliged  to  put 
ofl  its  execution  until  the  next  spring. 

About  the  15th  of  May  the  keel  of  the  new  vessel  lay  along 
the  dockyard,  and  soon  the  stern  and  stern-post,  mortised  at 
each  of  its  extremities,  rose  almost  perpendicularly.  The  keel, 
of  good  oak,  measured  110  feet  in  length,  thus  allowing  a width 
of  five-and-twenty  feet  to  the  midship  beam.  But  this  was 
all  the  carpenters  could  do  before  the  arrival  of  the  frosts  and 
bad  weather.  During  the  following  week  they  fixed  the  first 
of  the  stern  timbers,  but  were  then  obliged  to  suspend  work. 

During  the  last  days  of  the  month  the  weather  was  extremely 
bad.  The  wind  blew  from  the  east,  sometimes  with  the  vio- 
lence of  a tempest.  The  engineer  was  somewhat  uneasy  on 
account  of  the  dockyard  sheds— which  besides,  he  could  not 
have  established  in  any  other  place  near  — Granite  House— for 
the  islet  only  imperfectly  sheltered  the  shore  from  the  fury  of 
the  open  sea,  and  in  great  storms  the  waves  beat  against  the 
very  foot  of  the  granite  cliff. 

But,  very  fortunately,  these  fears  were  not  realized.  The 
wind  shifted  to  the  southeast,  and  there  the  beach  of  Granite 
House  was  completely  covered  by  Flotsam  Point. 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


585 


Pencroft  and  Ayrton,  the  most  zealous  workmen  at  the  new 
vessel,  pursued  their  labor  as  long  as  they  could.  They  were 
not  men  to  mind  the  wind  tearing  at  their  hair,  nor  the  rain 
wetting  them  to  the  skin,  and  a blow  from  a hammer  is  worth 
Just  as  much  in  bad  as  in  fine  weather.  But  when  a severe 
frost  succeeded  this  wet  period,  the  wood,  its  fibers  acquiring 
the  hardness  of  iron,  became  extremely  difficult  to  work,  and 
about  the  10th  of  June.'  ship-building  was  obliged  to  be  entirely 
discontinued. 

Cyrus  Harding  and  his  companions  had  not  omitted  to 
observe  how  severe  was  the  temperature  during  the  winters  of 
Lincoln  Island.  The  cold  was  comparable  to  that  experienced 
in  the  States  of  New  England,  situated  at  almost  the  same 
distance  from  the  equator.  In  the  northern  hemisphere,  or  at 
any  rate  in  the  part  occupied  by  British  America  and  the  north 
Df  the  United  States,  this  phenomenon  is  explained  by  the  flat 
conformation  of  the  territories  bordering  on  the  pole,  and  on 
which  there  Is  no  intumescence  of  the  soil  to  oppose  any 
obstacle  to  the  north  winds  ; here,  in  Lincoln  Island,  this 
explanation  would  not  suffice. 

“It  has  even  been  observed,”  remarked  Harding  one  day  to 
his  companions,  “ that  in  equal  latitudes  the  islands  and  coast 
regions  are  less  tried  by  the  cold  than  inland  countries.  I have 
often  heard  it  asserted  that  the  winters  of  Lombardy,  for  ex- 
ample, are  not  less  rigorous  than  those  of  Scotland,  which 
results  from  the  sea  restoring  during  the  winter  the  heat  which 
it  received  during  the  summer.  Islands  are,  therefore,  in  a 
better  situation  for  benefiting  by  this  restitution.” 

“But  then,  Captain  Harding,”  asked  Herbert,  “why  does 
Lincoln  Island  appear  to  escape  the  common  law  ? ” 

“That  is  difficult  to  explain,”  answered  the  engineer. 
* However,  I should  be  disposed  to  conjecture  that  this  peculi- 
arity results  from  the  situation  of  the  island  in  the  southern 
hemisphere,  which,  as  you  know,  my  boy,  is  colder  than  the 
northern  hemisphere.” 

“ Yes,”  said  Herbert,  “ and  icebergs  are  met  with  in  lower 
latitudes  in  the  south  than  in  the  north  of  the  Pacific.” 

“ That  is  true,”  remarked  Pencroft,  “ and  when  I have  been 


586 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION* 


serving  on  board  whalers  I have  seen  icebergs  off  Cape 
Horn.” 

“ The  severe  cold  experienced  in  Lincoln  Island,”  said  Gideon 
Spilett,  “ may  then  perhaps . be  explained  by  the  presence  of 
floes  or  icebergs  comparatively  near  to  Lincoln  Island.” 

“ Your  opinion  is  very  admissible  indeed,  my  dear  Spilett,” 
answered  Cyrus  Harding,  “ and  it  is  evidently  to  the  proximity 
of  icebergs  that  we  owe  our  rigorous  winters.  I would  draw 
your  attention  also  to  an  entirely  physical  cause,  which  ren- 
ders the  southern  colder  than  the  northern  hemisphere.  In 
fact,  since  the  sun  is  nearer  to  this  hemisphere  during  the  sum- 
mer, it  is  necessarily  more  distant  during  the  winter.  This 
explains  then  the  excess  of  temperature  in  the  two  seasons,  for, 
if  we  find  the  winters  very  cold  in  Lincoln  Island,  we  must  not 
forget  that  the  summers  here,  on  the  contrary,  are  very  hot.” 
“But  why,  if  you  please,  captain,”  asked  Pencroft,  knitting 
his  brows,  “ why  should  our  hemisphere,  as  you  say,  be  so  badly 
divided  ? It  isn’t  just,  that ! ” 

“Friend  Pencroft,”  answered  the  engineer,  laughing, 
“whether  just  or  not,  we  must  submit  to  it,  and  here  lies  the 
reason  for  this  peculiarity.  The  earth  does  not  describe  a circle 
round  the  sun,  but  an  ellipse,  as  it  must  by  the  laws  of  rational 
mechanics.  Now,  the  earth  occupies  one  of  the  centers  of  the 
ellipse,  and  consequently,  at  the  time  of  its  transfer,  it  is 
further  from  the  sun,  that  is  to  say,  at  its  apogee,  and  at  an- 
other time  nearer,  that  is  to  say,  at  its  perigee.  Now  it  happens 
that  it  is  during  the  winter  of  the  southern  countries  that  it  is 
at  its  most  distant  point  from  the  sun,  and  consequently,  in  a 
situation  for  those  regions  to  feel  the  greatest  cold.  Nothing 
can  be  done  to  prevent  that,  and  men,  Pencroft,  however 
learned  they  may  be,  can  never  change  any  thing  of  the 
cosmographical  order  established  by  God  Himself.” 

“And  yet,”  added  Pencroft,  persisting,  “the  world  is  very 
learned.  What  a big  bcok,  captain,  might  be  made  with  all 
that  is  known ! ” 

“ And  what  a much  bigger  book  still  with  all  that  is  not 
known ! ” answered  Harding. 

At  last,  for  one  reason  or  another,  the  month  of  June 


THE  SECEET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


587 


brought  the  cold  with  its  accustomed  intensity,  and  the  settlers 
were  often  confined  to  Granite  House.  Ah ! how  wearisome 
this  Imprisonment  was  to  them,  and  more  particularly  to 
Gideon  Spllett. 

“ Look  here,”  said  he  to  Neb  one  day,  “ I would  give  you  by 
notarial  deed  all  the  estates  which  will  come  to  me  some  day,  if 
you  were  a good  enough  fellow  to  go,  no  matter  where,  and 
subscribe  to  some  newspaper  for  me ! Decidedly  the  thing  that 
is  most  essential  to  my  happiness  is  the  knowing  every  morn- 
ing what  has  happened  the  day  before  in  other  places  than 
this!” 

Neb  began  to  laugh. 

“ Ton  my  word,”  he  replied,  “ the  only  thing  I think  about 
is  my  daily  worx ! ” 

The  truth  was  that  indoors  as  well  as  out  there  was  no  wan'o 
of  work. 

The  colony  of  Lincoln  Island  was  now  at  its  highest  point 
of  prosperity,  acnleved  by  three  years  of  continued  hard  work. 
The  destruction  or  the  brig  had  been  a new  source  of  riches. 
Without  speaking  of  the  complete  rig  which  would  serve  for 
the  vessel  now  on  tne  stocks,  utensils  and  tools  of  all  sorts, 
weapons  and  ammunition,  clothes  and  instruments,  were  now 
piled  in  the  store-rooms  of  Granite  House.  It  had  not  even 
been  necessary  to  resort  again  to  the  manufacture  of  the  coarse 
felt  materials.  Though  the  colonists  had  suffered  from  cold 
during  their  first  winter,  the  bad  season  might  now  come 
without  their  having  any  reason  to  dread  its  severity.  Linen 
was  plentiful  also,  and  besides,  they  kept  it  with  extreme  care. 
From  chloride  of  sodium,  which  is  nothing  else  than  sea  salt, 
Cyrus  Harding  easily  extracted  the  soda  and  chlorine.  The 
soda,  which  it  was  easy  to  change  into  carbonate  of  soda,  and 
Ihe  chlorine,  of  which  he  made  chloride  of  lime,  were  employed 
for  various  domestic  purposes,  and  especially  in  bleaching 
linen.  Besides,  they  did  not  wash  more  than  four  times  a year, 
ns  was  done  by  families  in  the  olden  times,  and  it  may  be 
added,  that  Pencroft  and  Gideon  Spilett,  whilst  waiting  for  the 
postman  to  bring  him  his  newspaper,  distinguished  them- 
selves as  washermen. 


588 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


So  passed  the  winter  months,  June,  July,  and  August.  They 
were  very  severe,  and  the  average  observations  of  the  ther- 
mometer did  not  give  more  than  eight  degrees  of  Fahrenheit. 
It  was  therefore  lower  in  temperature  than  the  preceding 
winter.  But  then,  what  splendid  fires  blazed  continually  on 
the  hearths  of  Granite  House,  the  smoke  marking  the  granite 
wall  with  long,  zebra-like  streaks ! Fuel  was  not  spared,  as 
it  grew  naturally  a few  steps  from  them.  Besides,  the  chips  of 
the  wood  destined  for  the  construction  of  the  ship  enabled 
them  to  economize  the  coal,  which  required  more  trouble  to 
transport. 

Men  and  animals  were  all  well.  Master  Jup  was  a little 
chilly,  it  must  be  confessed.  This  was  perhaps  his  only  weak- 
ness, and  it  was  necessary  to  make  him  a well- wadded  dressing- 
gown.  But  what  a servant  he  was,  clever,  zealous,  indefatiga- 
ble, not  indiscreet,  not  talkative,  and  he  might  have  been  with 
reason  proposed  as  a model  for  all  his  biped  brothers  in  the 
Old  and  the  New  World ! 

“ As  for  that,”  said  Pencrof t,  “ when  one  has  four  hands  at 
one’s  service,  of  course  one’s  work  ought  to  be  done  so  much 
the  better !” 

And  indeed  the  intelligent  creature  did  it  well. 

During  the  seven  months  which  had  passed  since  the  last 
researches  made  round  the  mountain,  and  during  the  month  of 
September,  which  brought  back  fine  weather,  nothing  was 
heard  of  the  genius  of  the  island.  His  power  was  not  mani- 
fested in  any  way.  It  is  true  that  it  would  have  been  inutile, 
for  no  incident  occurred  to  put  the  colonists  to  any  painful 
trial. 

Cyrus  Harding  even  observed  that  if  by  chance  the  com- 
munication between  the  unknown  and  the  tenants  of  Granite 
House  had  ever  been  established  through  the  granite,  and  if 
Top’s  instinct  had  as  it  were  felt  it,  there  was  no  further  sign 
of  it  during  this  period.  The  dog’s  growling  had  entirely 
ceased,  as  well  as  the  uneasiness  of  the  orang.  The  two 
friends — for  they  were  so — no  longer  prowled  round  the  open- 
ing of  the  inner  well,  nor  did  they  bark  or  whine  in  that 
singular  way  which  from  the  first  the  engineer  had  noticed. 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


689 


But  could  he  be  sure  that  this  was  all  that  was  to  be  said 
about  this  enigma,  and  that  he  should  never  arrive  at  a solu- 
tion? Could  he  be  certain  that  some  conjuncture  would  not 
occur  which  would  bring  the  mysterious  personage  on  the 
scene?  Who  could  tell  what  the  future  might  have  in  reserve? 

At  last  the  winter  was  ended,  but  an  event,  the  consequences 
of  which  might  be  serious,  occurred  in  the  first  days  of  the 
returning  spring. 

On  the  7th  of  September,  Cyrus  Harding,  having  observed  the 
crater,  saw  smoke  curling  round  the  summit  of  the  mountain, 
its  first  vapors  rising  in  the  air. 


CHAPTER  XT 


THE  AWAKENING  OF  THE  VOLCANO  — THE  *iNB  SEASON  — CON- 
TINUATION OF  WORK— THE  EVENING  OF  THE  loTH  OF  OCTO- 
BER—A TELEGRAM— A QUESTION— AN  ANSWER— DEPARTURE 
FOR  THE  CORRAL  — THE  NOTICE  — THE  ADDITIONAL  WIRE— 
THE  BASALT  COAST  — AT  HIGH  TIDE  — AT  LOW  TIDE— THE 
CAVERN— A DAZZLING  LIGHT. 

The  colonists,  warned  by  the  engineer,  left  their  work  and 
gazed  in  silence  at  the  summit  of  Mount  Franklin. 

The  volcano  had  awoke,  and  the  vapor  had  penetrated  the 
mineral  layer  heaped  up  at  the  bottom  of  the  crater.  But 
would  the  subterranean  hres  provoke  any  violent  eruption? 
This  was  an  event  which  could  not  be  foreseen.  However, 
even  while  admitting  the  possibility  of  an  eruption,  it  was  not 
probable  that  the  whole  of  Lincoln  Island  would  suffer  from 
it.  The  flow  of  volcanic  matter  is  not  always  disastrous,  and 
the  island  had  already  undergone  this  trial,  as  was  shown  by 
the  streams  of  lava  hardened  on  the  northern  slopes  of  the 
mountains.  Besides,  from  the  shape  of  the  crater  — the  open- 
ing broken  in  the  upper  edge— the  matter  would  be  thrown  to 
the  side  opposite  the  fertile  regions  of  the  island. 

However,  the  past  did  not  necessarily  answer  for  the  future. 
Often,  at  the  summit  of  volcanoes,  the  old  craters  close  and 
new  ones  open.  This  has  occurred  in  the  two  hemispheres  — 
at  Etna,  Popocatepetl,  at  Orizaba — and  on  the  eve  of  an  eruption 
there  is  every  thing  to  be  feared.  In  fact,  an  earthquake  — a 
phenomenon  which  often  accompanies  volcanic  eruptions  — is 
enough  to  change  the  interior  arrangement  of  a mountain, 
and  to  open  new  outlets  for  the  burning  lava. 

Cyrus  Harding  explained  these  things  to  his  companions, 
and,  without  exaggerating  the  state  of  things,  he  told  them 

590 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


591 


all  the  pros  and  cons.  After  all  they  could  not  prevent  it.  It 
did  not  appear  likely  that  Granite  House  would  be  threatened 
unless  the  ground  was  shaken  by  an  earthquake.  But  the  cor- 
ral would  be  in  great  danger  should  a new  crater  open  in  the 
southern  side  of  Mount  Franklin. 

From  that  day  the  smoke  never  disappeared  from  the  top 
of  the  mountain,  and  it  could  even  be  perceived  that  it  increased 
in  height  and  thickness,  without  any  flame  mingling  in  its 
heavy  volumes.  The  phenomenon  was  still  concentrated  in  the 
lower  part  of  the  central  crater. 

However,  with  the  fine  days  work  had  been  continued.  The 
building  of  the  vessel  was  hastened  as  much  as  possible,  and, 
by  means  of  the  water-fall  on  the  shore,  Cyrus  Harding 
managed  to  establish  an  hydraulic  saw-mill,  which  rapidly  out 
up  the  trunks  of  trees  in'o  planks  and  joists.  The  mechanism 
of  this  apparatus  was  as  simple  as  those  used  in  the  rustic  saw- 
mills of  Norway.  A first  horizontal  movement  to  move  the 
piece  of  wood,  a second  vertical  movement  to  move  the  saw— 
this  was  all  that  was  wanted;  and  the  engineer  succeeded 
by  means  of  a wheel,  two  cylinders,  and  pulleys  properly 
arranged.  Towards  the  end  of  the  month  of  September  the 
skeleton  of  the  vessel,  which  was  to  be  rigged  as  a schooner,  lay 
in  the  dockyard.  The  ribs  were  almost  entirely  completed, 
and,  all  the  timbers  having  been  sustained  by  a provisional 
band,  the  shape  of  the  vessel  could  already  be  seen.  This 
schooner,  sharp  in  the  bows,  very  slender  in  the  after-part, 
would  evidently  be  suitable  for  a long  voyage,  if  wanted;  but 
laying  the  planking  would  still  take  a considerable  time. 
Very  fortunately,  the  iron-work  of  the  pirate  brig  had  been 
saved  after  the  explosion.  From  the  planks  and  injured  ribs 
Pencroft  and  Ayrton  had  extracted  the  bolts  and  a large 
quantity  of  copper  nails.  It  was  so  much  work  saved  for 
the  smiths,  but  the  carpenters  had  much  to  do. 

Ship-building  was  interrupted  for  a week  for  the  harvest, 
the  haymaking,  and  the  gathering  in  of  the  different  crops  on 
the  plateau.  This  work  finished,  every  moment  was  devoted 
to  finishing  the  schooner.  When  night  came  the  workmen 
were  really  quite  exhausted.  So  as  not  to  lose  any  time 


592 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


they  had  changed  the  hours  for  their  meals;  they  dined  at 
twelve  o’clock,  and  only  had  their  supper  when  daylight  failed 
them.  They  then  ascended  to  Granite  House,  when  they  were 
always  ready  to  go  to  bed. 

Sometimes,  however,  when  the  conversation  bore  on  some 
interesting  subject  the  hour  for  sleep  wa3  delayed  for  a time. 
The  colonists  then  spoke  of  the  future,  and  talked  willingly 
of  the  changes  which  a voyage  in  the  schooner  to  inhabited 
lands  would  make  in  their  situation.  But  always  in  the  midst 
of  these  plans  prevailed  the  thought  of  a subsequent  return 
to  Lincoln  Island.  Never  would  they  abandon  this  colony, 
founded  with  so  much  labor  and  with  such  success,  and  to 
which  a communication  with  America  would  afford  a fresn 
impetus.  Pencroft  and  Neb  especially  hoped  to  end  their  days 
there. 

“ Herbert,”  said  the  sailor,  “ you  will  never  abandon  Lincoln 
Island?” 

“Never,  Pencroft,  and  especially  if  you  make  up  your  mind 
to  stay  there.” 

“ That  was  made  up  long  ago,  my  boy,”  answered  Pencroft 
“ I shall  expect  you.  You  will  bring  me  your  wife  and  chil- 
dren, and  I shall  make  jolly  little  chaps  of  your  youngsters ! ” 

“ That’s  agreed,”  replied  Herbert,  laughing  and  blushing  at 
the  same  time. 

“And  you,  Captain  Harding,”  resumed  Pencroft  enthusiastic- 
ally, “ you  will  be  still  the  governor  of  the  island ! Ah ! how 
many  inhabitants  could  it  support  ? Ten  thousand  at  least ! ” 

They  talked  in  this  way,  allowing  Pencroft  to  run  on,  and 
at  last  the  reporter  actually  started  a newspaper— the  New 
Lincoln  Herald  ! 

So  is  man’s  heart.  The  desire  to  perform  a work  which  will 
endure,  which  will  survive  him,  is  the  origin  of  his  superiority 
over  all  other  living  creatures  here  below.  It  is  this  which 
has  established  his  dominion,  and  this  it  is  which  justifies  it 
over  all  the  world.  After  that  who  knows  if  Jup  and  Top  had 
not  themselves  their  little  dream  of  tne  future.  Ayrton  silently 
said  to  himself  that  he  would  lixe  to  see  Lord  Glenarvau 
again  and  show  himself  to  all  restored. 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


One  evening,  on  the  15th  of  October,  the  conversation  pro- 
longed later  than  usual.  It  was  nine  o’clock.  Already  long 
badly  concealed  yawns  gave  warning  of  the  hour  of  rest,  and 
Pencroft  was  proceeding  towards  his  bed,  when  the  electric 
bell,  placed  in  the  dining-room,  suddenly  rang. 

All  were  there,  Cyrus  Harding,  Gideon  Spilett,  Herbert, 
Ayrton,  Pencroft,  Neb.  Therefore  none  of  the  colonists  were 
at  the  corral. 

Cyrus  Harding  rose.  His  companions  stared  at  each  other, 
scarcely  believing  their  ears. 

“What  does  that  mean?”  cried  Neb.  “Was  it  the  devil 
who  rang  it  ? ” 

No  one  answered. 

“The  weather  is  stormy,”  observed  Herbert.  “Might  not 
its  influence  of  electricity—” 

Herbert  did  not  finish  his  phrase.  The  engineer,  towards 
whom  all  eyes  were  turned,  shook  his  head  negatively. 

“We  must  wait,”  said  Gideon  Spilett.  “If  it  is  a signal, 
whoever  it  may  be  who  has  made  it,  he  will  renew  it.” 

“ But  who  do  you  think  it  is  ? ” cried  Neb. 

“ Who  ? ” answered  Pencroft,  “ but  he—” 

The  sailor’s  sentence  was  cut  short  by  a new  tinkle  of  the 
bell. 

Harding  went  to  the  apparatus,  and  sent  this  question  to  the 
corral : 

“ What  do  you  want  ?” 

A few  moments  later  the  needle,  moving  on  the  alphabetic 
dial,  gave  this  reply  to  the  tenants  of  Granite  House  * 

“ Come  to  the  corral  immediately.” 

“At  last ! ” exclaimed  Harding. 

Yes ! At  last ! The  mystery  was  about  to  be  unveiled. 
The  colonists’  fatigue  had  disappeared  before  the  tremendous 
interest  which  was  about  to  urge  them  to  the  corral,  and  all 
wish  for  rest  had  ceased.  Without  having  uttered  a word,  in  a 
few  moments  they  had  left  Granite  House,  and  were  standing 
on  the  beach.  Jup  and  Top  alone  were  left  behind.  They 
could  do  without  them. 

The  night  was  black.  The  new  moon  had  disappeared  at 


594 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


the  same  time  as  the  sun.  As  Herbert  had  observed,  great 
stormy  clouds  formed  a lowering  and  heavy  vault,  preventing 
any  star  rays.  A few  lightning  flashes,  reflections  from  a 
distant  storm,  illuminated  the  horizon. 

It  was  possible  that  a few  hours  later  the  thunder  would  roll 
over  the  island  itself.  The  night  was  very  threatening. 

But  however  deep  the  darkness  was,  it  would  not  prevent 
them  from  finding  the  familiar  road  to  the  corral. 

They  ascended  the  left  bank  of  the  Mercy,  reached  the 
plateau,  passed  the  bridge  over  Creek  Glycerine,  and  advanced 
through  the  forest. 

They  walked  at  a good  pace,  a prey  to  the  liveliest  emotions. 

There  was  no  doubt  but  that  they  were  now  going  to  learn 
the  long-searched-for  answer  to  the  enigma,  the  name  of  that 
mysterious  being  so  deeply  concerned  in  their  life,  so  generous 
in  his  influence,  so  powerful  in  his  action  ! Must  not  this 
stranger  have  indeed  mingled  with  their  existence,  have  known 
the  smallest  details,  have  heard  all  that  was  said  in  Granite 
House,  to  have  been  able  always  to  act  in  the  very  nick  of 
time  ? 

Every  one,  wrapped  up  in  his  own  reflections,  pressed  for- 
ward. Under  the  arch  of  trees  the  darkness  was  such  that 
the  edge  of  the  road  even  could  not  be  seen.  Not  a sound  in 
the  forest.  Both  animals  and  birds,  influenced  by  the  heavi- 
ness of  the  atmosphere,  remained  motionless  and  silent.  Not 
a breath  disturbed  the  leaves.  The  footsteps  of  the  colonists 
alone  resounded  on  the  hardened  ground. 

During  the  first  quarter  of  an  hour  the  silence  was  only 
interrupted  by  this  remark  from  Pencroft : — 

“ We  ought  to  have  brought  a torch.” 

And  by  this  reply  from  the  engineer 

“ We  shall  find  one  at  the  corral.” 

Harding  and  his  companions  had  left  Granite  House  at 
twelve  minutes  past  nine.  At  forty-seven  minutes  past  nine 
they  had  traversed  three  out  of  the  five  miles  which  separated 
the  mouth  of  the  Mercy  from  the  corral. 

At  that  moment  sheets  of  lightning  spread  over  the  island 
and  illumined  the  dark  trees.  The  flashes  dazzled  and  almost 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


595 


blinded  them.  Evidently  the  storm  would  not  be  long  in 
bursting  forth. 

The  flashes  gradually  became  brighter  and  more  rapid.  Dis- 
tant thunder  growled  in  the  sky.  The  atmosphere  was  stifling. 

The  colonists  proceeded  as  if  they  were  urged  onwards  by 
some  irresistible  force. 

At  ten  o’clock  a vivid  flash  showed  them  the  palisade,  and 
as  they  reached  the  gate  the  storm  burst  forth  with  tremendous 

fury. 

In  a minute  the  corral  was  crossed,  and  Harding  stood  before 
the  hut. 

Probably  the  house  was  occupied  by  the  stranger,  since  it 
was  from  thence  that  the  telegram  had  been  sent.  However, 
no  light  shone  through  the  window. 

The  engineer  knocked  at  the  door. 

No  answer. 

Cyrus  Harding  opened  the  door,  and  the  settlers  entered  the 
toom,  which  was  perfectly  dark.  A light  was  struck  by  Neb, 
and  in  a few  moments  the  lantern  was  lighted  and  the  light 
thrown  into  every  corner  of  the  room. 

There  was  no  one  there.  Every  thing  was  in  the  state  in 
Which  it  had  been  left. 

“ Have  we  been  deceived  by  an  illusion  ? ” murmured  Cyrus 
Harding. 

No  ! that  was  not  possible ! The  telegram  had  clearly  said,— 

“ Come  to  the  corral  immediately.” 

They  approached  the  table  specially  devoted  to  the  use  of 
the  wire.  Every  thing  was  in  order— the  pile  and  the  box  con- 
taining it,  as  well  as  all  the  apparatus. 

“ Who  came  here  the  last  time  ? ” asked  the  engineer. 

“ I did,  captain,”  answered  Ayrton. 

“ And  that  was — ” 

“ Four  days  ago.” 

“ Ah ! a note  !”  cried  Herbert,  pointing  to  a paper  lying 
on  the  table. 

On  this  paper  were  written  these  words  in  English  :— 

“ Follow  the  new  wire.” 

“ Forward ! ” cried  Harding,  who  understood  that  the  die- 


596 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


patch  had  not  been  sent  from  the  corral,  but  from  the  mys, 
terious  retreat,  communicating  directly  with  Granite  House  by 
means  of  a supplementary  wire  joined  to  the  old  one. 

Neb  took  the  lighted  lantern,  and  all  left  the  corral.  The 
storm  then  burst  forth  with  tremendous  violence.  The  interval 
between  each  lightning-flash  and  each  thunder-clap  diminished 
rapidly.  The  summit  of  the  volcano,  with  its  plume  of  vapor, 
could  be  seen  by  occasional  flashes. 

There  was  no  telegraphic  communication  in  any  part  of  the 
corral  between  the  house  and  the  palisade;  but  the  engineer, 
running  straight  to  the  first  post,  saw  by  the  light  of  a flash  a 
new  wire  hanging  from  the  insulator  to  the  ground. 

“ There  it  is  ! ” said  he. 

This  wire  lay  along  the  ground,  and  was  surrounded  with 
an  insulating  substance  like  a submarine  cable,  so  as  to  assure 
the  free  transmission  of  the  current.  It  appeared  to  pass 
through  the  wood  and  the  southern  spurs  of  the  mountain 
and  consequently  it  ran  towards  the  west. 

“ Follow  it ! ” said  Cyrus  Harding.  And  the  settlers  immedi- 
ately pressed  forward,  guided  by  the  wire. 

The  thunder  continued  to  roar  with  such  violence  that  not  a 
word  could  be  heard.  However,  there  was  no  occasion  for 
.speaking,  but  to  get  forward  as  fast  as  possible. 

Cyrus  Harding  and  his  companions  then  climbed  the  spur 
rising  between  the  corral  valley  and  that  of  Falls  River,  which 
they  crossed  at  its  narrowest  part.  The  wire,  sometimes 
stretched  over  the  lower  branches  of  the  trees,  sometimes 
lying  on  the  ground,  guided  them  surely.  The  engineer  had 
supposed  that  the  wire  would  perhaps  stop  at  the  bottom  of 
the  valley,  and  that  the  stranger’s  retreat  would  be  there. 

Nothing  of  the  sort.  They  were  obliged  to  ascend  the 
southwestern  spur,  and  re-descend  on  that  arid  plateau  ter- 
minated by  the  strangely- wild  basalt  cliff.  From  time  to  time 
one  of  the  colonists  stooped  down  and  felt  for  the  wire  with 
his  hands;  but  there  was  now  no  doubt  that  the  wire  was  rum 
ning  directly  towards  the  sea.  There,  to  a certainty,  in  *he 
depths  of  those  rocks,  was  the  dwelling  so  long  sought  fa? 
vain. 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


The  sky  was  literally  on  fire.  Flash  succeeded  flash.  Several 
truck  the  summit  of  the  volcano  in  the  midst  of  the  thick 
rfmoke.  It  appeared  there  as  if  the  mountain  was  vomiting 
flame.  At  a few  minutes  to  eleven  the  colonists  arrived  on 
the  high  cliff  overlooking  the  ocean  to  the  west.  The  wind  had 
risen.  The  surf  roared  500  feet  below. 

Harding  calculated  that  they  had  gone  a mile  and  a half 
from  the  corral. 

At  this  point  the  wire  entered  among  the  rocks,  following 
the  steep  side  of  a narrow  ravine.  The  settlers  followed  it  at 
the  risk  of  occasioning  a fall  of  the  slightly-balanced  rocks, 
and  being  dashed  into  the  sea.  The  descent  was  extremely 
perilous,  but  they  did  not  think  of  the  danger ; they  were  no 
longer  masters  of  themselves,  and  an  irresistible  attraction 
drew  them  towards  this  mysterious  place  as  the  magnet  draws 
iron. 

Thus  they  almost  unconsciously  descended  this  ravine,  which 
even  in  broad  daylight  would  have  been  considered  impractic- 
able. 

The  stones  rolled  and  sparkled  like  fiery  balls  when  they 
crossed  through  the  gleams  of  light.  Harding  was  first— Ayr- 
ton  last.  On  they  went,  step  by  step.  Now  they  slid  over  the 
slippery  rock;  then  they  struggled  to  their  feet  and  scrambled 
on. 

At  last  the  wire  touched  the  rocks  on  the  beach.  The  colon- 
ists had  reached  the  bottom  of  the  basalt  cliff. 

There  appeared  a narrow  ridge,  running  horizontally  and 
parallel  with  the  sea.  The  settlers  followed  the  wire  along  it. 
They  had  not  gone  a hundred  paces  when  the  ridge  by  a 
moderate  incline  sloped  down  to  the  level  of  the  sea. 

The  engineer  seized  the  wire  and  found  that  it  disappeared 
beneath  the  waves. 

His  companions  were  stupefied. 

A cry  of  disappointment,  almost  a cry  of  despair,  escaped 
them ! Must  they  then  plunge  beneath  the  water  and  seek 
there  for  some  submarine  cavern  ? In  their  excited  state  they 
would  not  have  hesitated  to  do  it. 

The  engineer  stopped  them. 


598 


EHE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


He  led  his  companions  to  a hollow  in  the  rocks,  and  there— 

“We  must  wait,”  said  he.  “ The  tide  is  high.  At  low  water 
the  way  will  he  open.” 

“ But  what  can  make  you  think—”  asked  Pencroft. 

“ He  would  not  have  called  us  if  the  means  had  been  want- 
ing to  enable  us  to  reach  him  !” 

Cyrus  Harding  spoke  in  a tone  of  such  thorough  conviction 
that  no  objection  was  raised.  His  remark,  besides,  was  logical. 
It  was  quite  possible  that  an  opening,  practicable  at  low  water, 
though  hidden  now  by  the  high  tide,  opened  at  the  foot  of  the 
cliff. 

There  was  some  time  to  wait.  The  colonists  remained  silently 
crouching  in  a deep  hollow.  Rain  now  began  to  fall  in  tor- 
rents. The  thunder  was  re-echoed  among  the  rocks  with  a 
grand  sonorousness. 

The  colonists’  emotion  was  great.  A thousand  strange  and 
extraordinary  ideas  crossed  their  brains,  and  they  expected 
some  grand  and  super-human  apparition,  which  alone  could 
come  up  to  the  notion  they  had  formed  of  the  mysterious 
genius  of  the  island. 

At  midnight,  Harding,  carrying  the  lantern,  descended  to  the 
beach  to  reconnoiter. 

The  engineer  was  not  mistaken.  The  beginning  of  an  im- 
mense excavation  could  be  seen  under  the  water.  There  the 
wire,  bending  at  a right  angle,  entered  the  yawning  gulf. 

Cyrus  Harding  returned  to  his  companions,  and  said  simply: 

“ In  an  hour  the  opening  will  be  practicable.” 

“It  is  there,  then  ? ” said  Pencroft. 

“Did  you  doubt  it  ?”  returned  Harding. 

“But  this  cavern  must  be  filled  with  water  to  a certain 
height,”  observed  Herbert. 

“ Either  the  cavern  will  be  completely  dry,”  replied  Harding, 
“ and  in  that  case  we  can  traverse  it  on  foot,  or  it  will  not  be 
dry,  and  some  means  of  transport  will  be  put  at  our  disposal.” 

An  hour  passed.  All  climbed  down  through  the  rain  to  the 
level  of  the  sea.  There  was  now  eight  feet  of  the  opening 
above  the  water.  It  was  like  the  arch  of  a bridge,  under 
which  rushed  the  foaming  water. 


SFCftiSt  OF  TOE  ISLAND. 


Leaning  forward,  the  engineer  saw  a black  object  floating 
on  the  water.  He  drew  it  towards  him.  It  was  a boat,  moored 
to  some  interior  projection  of  the  cave.  This  boat  was  iron- 
plated.  Two  oars  lay  at  the  bottom. 

“Jump  in !”  said  Harding. 

In  a moment  the  settlers  were  in  the  boat.  Neb  and  Ayrton 
took  the  oars,  Pencroft  the  rudder.  Cyrus  Harding  in  the 
bows,  with  the  lantern,  lighted  the  way. 

The  elliptical  roof,  under  which  the  boat  at  first  passed,  sud- 
denly rose;  but  the  darkness  was  too  deep,  and  the  light  of 
the  lantern  too  slight,  for  either  the  extent,  length,  height  or 
depth  of  the  cave  to  be  ascertained.  Solemn  silence  reigned 
in  this  basaltic  cavern.  Not  a sound  could  penetrate  into  it, 
even  the  thunder  peals  could  not  pierce  its  thick  sides. 

Such  immense  caves  exist  in  various  parts  of  the  world, 
natural  crypts  dating  from  the  geological  epoch  of  the  globe. 
Some  are  filled  by  the  sea;  others  contain  entire  lakes  in 
their  sides.  Such  is  Fingal’s  Cave,  in  the  island  of  Staffa,  one 
of  the  Hebrides;  such  are  the  caves  of  Morgat,  in  the  Bay  of 
Douarucuez,  in  Brittany,  the  caves  of  Bonifacior,  in  Corsica, 
those  of  Lyse-Fjord  in  Norway;  such  are  the  immense  Mam- 
moth caverns  in  Kentucky,  500  feet  in  height,  and  more  than 
twenty  miles  in  length ! In  many  parts  of  the  globe  nature 
has  excavated  these  caverns,  and  preserved  them  for  the  admir- 
ation of  man. 

Did  the  cavern  which  the  settlers  were  now  exploring  extend 
to  the  center  of  the  island?  For  a quarter  of  an  hour  the  boat 
had  been  advancing,  making  detours , indicated  to  Pencroft 
by  the  engineer  in  short  sentences,  when  all  at  once, — 

“ More  to  the  right ! ” he  commanded. 

The  boat,  altering  its  course,  came  up  alongside  the  right 
wall.  The  engineer  wished  to  see  if  the  wire  still  ran  along 
the  side. 

The  wire  was  there  fastened  to  the  rock. 

“ Forward  ! ” said  Harding. 

And  the  two  oars,  plunging  into  the  dark  waters,  urged  the 
boat  onward. 

On  they  went  for  another  quarter  of  an  horn',  and  a distance 


&Q0 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


of  half-a-mile  must  have  been  cleared  from  the  mouth  of 
the  cave  when  Harding’s  voice  was  again  heard. 

“ Stop ! ” said  he. 

The  boat  stopped,  and  the  colonists  perceived  a bright  light 
illuminating  the  vast  cavern,  so  deeply  excavated  in  the 
bowels  of  the  island,  of  which  nothing  had  ever  led  them  to 
suspect  the  existence. 

At  a height  of  a hundred  feet  rose  the  vaulted  roof,  sup- 
ported on  basalt  shafts.  Irregular  arches,  strange  mouldings, 
appeared  on  the  columns  erected  by  nature  in  thousands 
from  the  first  epochs  of  the  formation  of  the  globe.  The  basalt 
pillars,  fitted  one  into  the  other,  measured  from  forty  to  fifty 
feet  in  height,  and  the  water,  calm  in  spite  of  the  tumult  out- 
side, washing  their  base.  The  brilliant  focus  of  light,  pointed 
out  by  the  engineer,  touched  every  point  of  the  rock,  and 
flooded  the  walls  with  light. 

By  reflection  the  water  reproduced  the  brilliant  sparkles,  so 
that  the  boat  appeared  to  be  floating  between  two  glittering 
zones.  ^ 

They  could  not  be  mistaken  in  the  nature  of  the  irradiation 
thrown  from  the  center  light,  whose  clear  rays  broke  all  the 
angles,  all  the  projections  of  the  cavern.  This  light  proceeded 
from  an  electric  source,  and  its  white  color  betrayed  its  origin. 
It  was  the  sun  of  this  cave,  and  it  filled  it  entirely. 

At  a sign  from  Cyrus  Harding  the  oars  again  plunged  into 
the  water,  causing  a regular  shower  of  gems,  and  the  boat  was 
urged  forward  toward  the  light,  which  was  now  not  more 
than  half  a cable’s  length  distant. 

At  this  place  the  breadth  of  the  sheet  of  water  measured 
nearly  350  feet,  and  beyond  the  dazzling  center  could  be  seen 
an  enormous  basaltic  wall,  blocking  up  any  issue  on  that  side. 
The  cavern  widened  here  considerably,  the  sea  forming  a little 
lake.  But  the  roof,  the  side  wralls,  the  end  cliff,  all  the  prisms, 
all  the  peaks,  were  flooded  with  the  electric  fluid,  so  that  the 
brilliancy  belonged  to  them,  and  as  if  the  light  issued  from 
them. 

In  the  center  of  the  lake  a long  cigar-shaped  object  floated 
on  the  surface  of  the  water,  silent,  motionless.  The  brilliancy 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


603 


which  issued  from  it  escaped  from  its  sides  as  from  two  kilns 
heated  to  a white  heat.  This  apparatus,  similar  in  shape  to  an 
enormous  whale,  was  about  250  feet  long,  and  rose  about  ten 
or  twelve  above  the  water. 

The  boat  slowly  approached  it.  Cyrus  Harding  stood  up  in 
the  bows.  He  gazed,  a prey  to  violent  excitement.  Then,  all 
at  once,  seizing  the  reporter’s  arm,— 

“It  is  he  ! It  can  only  be  he  ! ” he  cried  ; “ he ! — ” 

Then,  falling  back  on  the  seat,  he  murmured  a name  which 
Gideon  Spilett  alone  could  hear. 

The  reporter  evidently  knew  this  name,  for  it  had  a wonder- 
ful effect  upon  him,  and  he  answered  in  a hoarse  voice,— 

“ He ! an  outlawed  man ! ” 

“ He ! ” said  Harding. 

At  the  engineer’s  command  the  boat  approached  this  singular 
floating  apparatus.  The  boat  touched  the  left  side,  from  which 
escaped  a ray  of  light  through  a thick  glass. 

Harding  and  his  companions  mounted  on  the  platform.  An 
open  hatchway  was  there.  All  darted  down  the  opening. 

At  the  bottom  of  the  ladder  was  a deck,  lighted  by  electricity. 
At  the  end  of  this  deck  was  ardoor,  which  Harding  opened. 

A richly-ornamented  room,  quickly  traversed  by  the  colonists, 
was  joined  to  a library,  over  which  a luminous  ceiling  shed  a 
flood  of  light. 

At  the  end  of  the  library  a large  door  also  shut,  was  opened 
by  the  engineer. 

An  immense  saloon— a sort  of  museum,  in  which  were 
heaped  up,  with  all  the  treasures  of  the  mineral  world,  works 
of  art,  marvels  of  industry— appeared  before  the  eyes  of  the 
colonists,  who  almost  thought  themselves  suddenly  trans- 
ported into  a land  of  enchantment. 

Stretched  on  a rich  sofa  they  saw  a man,  who  did  not  appear 
to  notice  their  presence. 

Then  Harding  raised  his  voice,  and  to  the  extreme  surprise 
of  his  companions,  he  uttered  these  words,— 

“ Captain  Nemo,  you  asked  for  us ! We  are  here.” 


CHAPTER  XVI. 


CAPTAIN  NEMO  — HIS  FIRST  WORDS  — THE  HISTORY  OF  THE 
RECLUSE  — HIS  ADVENTURES  — HIS  SENTIMENTS  — HIS  COM- 
RADES—SUBMARINE  LIFE  — ALONE  — THE  LAST  REFUGE  OF 
THE  “NAUTILUS”  IN  LINCOLN  ISLAND  — THE  MYSTERIOUS 
GENIUS  OF  THE  ISLAND. 

At  these  words  the  reclining  figure  rose,  and  the  electric 
light  fell  upon  his  countenance ; a magnificent  head,  the 
forehead  high,  the  glance  commanding,  beard  white,  hair 
abundant  and  falling  over  the  shoulders. 

His  hand  rested  upon  the  cushion  of  the  divan  from  which 
he  had  just  risen.  He  appeared  perfectly  calm.  It  was 
evident  that  his  strength  had  been  gradually  undermined  by 
illness,  but  his  voice  seemed  yet  powerful,  as  he  said  in  Eng- 
lish, and  in  a tone  which  evinced  extreme  surprise,— 

“ Sir,  I have  no  name.” 

“ Nevertheless,  I know  you ! ” replied  Cyrus  Harding. 

Captain  Nemo  fixed  his  penetrating  gaze  upon  the  engineer, 
as  though  he  were  about  to  annihilate  him. 

Then,  falling  back  amid  the  pillows  of  the  divan,— 

“After  all,  what  matters  now,”  he  murmured  ; “I  am 
dying ! ” 

Cyrus  Harding  drew  near  the  captain  and  Gideon  Spilett 
took  his  hand— it  was  of  a feverish  heat.  Ayrton,  Pencroft, 
Herbert,  and  Neb,  stood  respectfully  apart  in  an  angle  of  the 
magnificent  saloon,  whose  atmosphere  was  saturated  with  the 
electric  fluid. 

Meanwhile  Captain  Nemo  withdrew  his  hand,  and  motioned 
the  engineer  and  the  reporter  to  be  seated. 

All  regarded  him  with  profound  emotion.  Before  them  they 
beheld  that  being  whom  they  had  styled  the  “genius  at  the 

604 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISULNTX 


m 


island,”  the  powerful  protector  whose  intervention,  in  so  many 
circumstances,  had  been  so  efficacious,  the  benefactor  to  whom 
they  owed  such  a debt  of  gratitude  ! Their  eyes  beheld  a man 
only,  and  a man  at  the  point  of  death,  where  Pencroft  and  Neb 
had  expected  to  find  an  almost  supernatural  being  ! 

But  how  happened  it  that  Cyrus  Harding  had  recognized 
Captain  Nemo?  Why  had  the  latter  so  suddenly  risen  on  hear- 
ing his  name  uttered,  a name  which  he  had  believed  known  to 
none  ? 

The  captain  had  resumed  his  position  on  the  divan,  and 
leaning  on  his  arm,  he  regarded  the  engineer,  seated  near  him. 

“ You  know  the  name  I formerly  bore,  sir  ? ” he  asked. 

“I  do,”  answered  Cyrus  Harding,  “and  also  that  of  this 
wonderful  submarine  vessel—” 

“ The  ‘ Nautilus  ? ’ ” said  the  captain,  with  a faint  smile. 

“The  ‘Nautilus  ?”’ 

“But  do  you— do  you  know  who  lam?” 

“Ido” 

“It  is  nevertheless  many  years  since  I have  held  any  com- 
munication with  the  inhabited  world  ; three  long  years  have  I 
passed  in  the  depths  of  the  sea,  the  only  place  where  I have 
found  liberty ! Who  then  can  have  betrayed  my  secret  ? ” 

“ A man  who  was  bound  to  you  by  no  tie,  Captain  Nemo,  and 
who,  consequently,  can  not  be  accused  of  treachery.” 

“The  Frenchman  who  was  cast  on  board  my  vessel  by 
chance  sixteen  years  since  ? ” 

“The  same.” 

“He  and  his  two  companions  did  not  then  perish  in  the 
Maelstrom,  in  the  midst  of  which  the  4 Nautilus  ’ was  strug- 
gling ?” 

“ They  escaped,  and  a book  has  appeared  under  the  title  of 
‘ Twenty  Thousand  Leagues  under  the  Seas,’  which  contains 
your  history.” 

“ The  history  of  a few  months  only  of  my  life ! ” interrupted 
the  captain  impetuously. 

“ It  is  true,”  answered  Cyrus  Harding,  “ but  a few  months  of 
that  strange  life  have  sufficed  to  make  you  known—” 

“ As  a great  criminal,  doubtless ! ” said  Captain  Nemo,  a 


m 


THIS  LAKESiSK  EDIXIOtf. 


haughty  smile  curling  his  lips.  “Yes,  a rebel,  perhaps  m 
outlaw  against  humanity  ! ” 

The  engineer  was  silent. 

“ Well,  sir?” 

“It  is  not  for  me  to  judge  you,  Captain  Nemo,”  answered 
Cyrus  Harding,  “ at  any  rate  as  regards  your  past  life.  I am, 
with  the  rest  of  the  world,  ignorant  of  the  motives  which 
induced  you  to  adopt  this  strange  mode  of  existence,  and  I 
can  not  judge  of  effects  without  knowing  their  causes;  but  what 
I do  know  is,  that  a beneficent  hand  has  constantly  protected 
us  since  our  arrival  on  Lincoln  Island,  that  we  all  owe  our 
lives  to  a good,  generous,  and  powerful  being,  and  that  this 
being  so  powerful,  good  and  generous,  Captain  Nemo,  is  your- 
self ! » 

“ It  is  I,”  answered  the  captain,  simply. 

The  engineer  and  reporter  rose.  Their  companions  had 
drawn  near,  and  the  graitude  with  which  their  hearts  were 
charged  was  about  to  express  itself  in  their  gestures  and  words. 

Captain  Nemo  stopped  them  by  a sign,  and  in  a voice  which 
betrayed  more  emotion  than  he  doubtless  intended  to  show. 

“ Wait  till  you  have  heard  all,”  he  said.* 

And  the  captain,  in  a few  concise  sentences,  ran  over  the 
events  of  his  life. 

His  narrative  was  short,  yet  he  was  obliged  to  summon  up 
his  whole  remaining  energy  to  arrive  at  the  end.  He  was 
evidently  contending  against  extreme  weakness.  Several 
times  Cyrus  Harding  entreated  him  to  repose  for  a while,  but 
he  shook  his  head  as  a man  to  whom  the  morrow  may  never 
come,  and  when  the  reporter  offered  his  assistance, — 

“ It  is  useless,”  he  said,  “ my  hours  are  numbered.” 

Captain  Nemo  was  an  Indian,  the  Prince  Dakkar,  son  of  a 
rajah  of  the  then  independent  territory  of  Bundelkund.  His 
father  sent  him,  when  ten  years  of  age,  to  Europe,  in  order  that 
he  might  receive  an  education  in  all  respects  complete,  and 

* The  history  of  Captain  Nemo  has,  in  fact,  been  published  under 
the  title  of  “Twenty  Thousand  Leagues  Under  the  Seas,”  together 
with  his  equally  famous  “Tour  of  the  World  in  80  Days,”  the  two 
making  one  handsome  volume  of  600  pages,  16  illustrations.  See  ad- 
vertisement at  end  of  this  volume. 


TILE  SECliEr  OF  THE  ISLAND, 


607 


in  the  hopes  that  by  his  talents  and  knowledge  he  might  one 
day  take  a leading  part  in  raising  his  long  degraded  and 
heathen  country  to  a level  with  the  nations  of  Europe. 

From  the  age  of  ten  years  to  that  of  thirty  Prince  Pakkar, 
endowed  by  Nature  with  her  richest  gifts  of  intellect,  accumu- 
lated knowledge  of  every  kind,  and  in  science,  literature,  and 
art  his  researches  were  extensive  and  profound. 

He  traveled  over  the  whole  of  Europe.  His  rank  and  fortune 
caused  him  to  be  every  where  sought  after;  but  the  pleasures 
of  ' the  world  had  for  him  no  attractions.  Though  young  and 
possessed  of  every  personal  advantage,  he  was  ever  grave — 
sombre  even—  devoured  by  an  unquenchable  thirst  for  knowl- 
edge, and  cherishing  in  the  recesses  of  his  heart  the  hope  that 
he  might  become  a great  and  powerful  ruler  of  a free  and 
enlightened  people. 

Still,  for  long  the  love  of  science  triumphed  over  all  other 
feelings.  He  became  an  artist  deeply  impressed  by  the  marvels 
of  art,  a philosopher  to  whom  no  one  of  the  higher  sciences 
was  unknown,  a statesman  versed  in  the  policy  of  European 
courts.  To  the  eyes  of  those  who  observed  him  superficially 
he  might  have  passed  for  one  of  those  cosmopolitans,  curious 
of  knowledge,  but  disdaining  action;  one  of  those  opulent 
travelers,  haughty  and  cynical,  who  move  incessantly  from 
place  to  place,  and  are  of  no  country. 

This  artist,  this  philosopher,  this  man  was,  however,  still 
cherishing  the  hope  instilled  into  him  from  his  earliest  days. 

Prince  Dakkar  returned  to  Bundelkund  in  the  year  1849.  He 
married  a noble  Indian  lady,  who  was  imbued  with  an  am- 
bition not  less  ardent  than  that  by  which  he  was  inspired.  Two 
children  were  born  to  them,  whom  they  tenderly  loved.  But 
domestic  happiness  did  not  prevent  him  from  seeking  to  carry 
out  the  object  at  which  he  aimed.  He  waited  an  opportunity. 
At  length,  as  he  vainly  fancied,  it  presented  itself. 

Instigated  by  princes'  equally  ambitious  and  less  sagacious 
and  more  unscrupulous  than  he  was,  the  people  of  India 
were  persuaded  that  they  might  successfully  rise  against  their 
English  rulers,  who  had  brought  them  out  of  a state  of  anarchy 
and  constant  warfare  and  misery,  and  had  established  peace 


608 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


and  prosperity  in  their  country.  Their  ignorance  and  gross 
superstition  made  them  the  facile  tools  of  their  designing  chiefs, 

In  1857  the  great  sepoy  revolt  broke  out.  Prince  Dakkai. 
under  the  belief  that  he  should  thereby  have  the  opportunity 
of  attaining  the  object  of  his  long-cherished  ambition,  was 
easily  drawn  into  it.  He  forthwith  devoted  his  talents  and 
wealth  to  the  service  of  this  cause.  He  aided  it  in  person;  he 
fought  in  the  front  ranks;  he  risked  his  life  equally  with 
the  humblest  of  the  wretched  and  misguided  fanatics;  he 
was  ten  times  wounded  in  twenty  engagements,  seeking  death 
but  finding  it  not,  when  at  length  the  sanguinary  rebels  were 
utterly  defeated,  and  the  atrocious  mutiny  was  brought  to 
an  end. 

Never  before  had  the  British  power  in  India  been  exposed 
to  such  danger,  and  if,  as  they  had  hoped,  the  sepoys  had 
received  assistance  from  without,  the  influence  and  supremacy 
in  Asia  of  the  United  Kingdom  would  have  been  a thing  of 
the  past. 

The  name  of  Prince  Dakkar  was  at  that  time  well  known. 
He  had  fought  openly  and  without  concealment.  A price  was 
set  upon  his  head,  but  he  managed  to  escape  from  his  pursuers. 

Civilization  never  recedes;  the  law  of  necessity  ever  forces  it 
onwards.  The  sepoys  were  vanquished,  and  the  land  of  the 
rajahs  of  old  fell  again  under  the  rule  of  England. 

Prince  Dakkar,  unable  to  find  that  death  he  courted  returned 
to  the  mountain  fastnesses  of  Bundelkund.  There,  alone  in 
the  world,  overcome  by  disappointment  at  the  destruction  of 
all  of  his  vain  hopes,  a prey  to  profound  disgust  for  all  human 
beings,  filled  with  hatred  of  the  civilized  world,  he  realized 
the  wreck  of  his  fortune,  assembled  some  score  of  his  most 
faithful  companions,  and  one  day  disappeared,  leaving  no  trace 
behind. 

Where,  then,  did  he  seek  that  liberty  denied  him  upon  the 
inhabited  earth  ? Under  the  waves,  in  the  depths  of  the  ocean, 
where  none  could  follow. 

The  warrior  became  the  man  of  science.  Upon  a deserted 
island  of  the  Pacific  he  established  his  dockyard,  and  there  a 
submarine  vessel  was  constructed  from  his  designs.  By 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND* 


@09 


U&ethods  which  will  at  some  future  day  be  revealed  he  had 
rendered  subservient  the  illimitable  forces  of  electricity, 
which,  extracted  from  inexhaustible  sources,  was  employed 
for  all  the  requirements  of  his  floating  equipage,  as  a moving, 
lighting,  and  heating  agent.  The  sea,  with  its  countless 
treasures,  its  myriads  of  fish,  its  numberless  wrecks,  its  enor- 
mous mammalia,  and  not  only  all  that  nature  supplied,  but  also 
all  that  man  had  lost  in  its  depths,  sufficed  for  every  want  of 
the  prince  and  his  crew— and  thus  was  his  most  ardent  desire 
accomplished,  never  again  to  hold  communication  with  the 
earth.  He  named  his  submarine  vessel  the  “ Nautilus,”  called 
himself  simply  Captain  Nemo,  and  disappeared  beneath  the  seas. 

During  many  years  this  strange  being  visited  every  ocean, 
from  pole  to  pole.  Outcast  of  the  inhabited  earth  in  these  un- 
known worlds  he  gathered  incalculable  treasures.  The  mill- 
ions lost  in  the  Bay  of  Vigo,  in  1702,  by  the  galleons  of  Spain, 
furnished  him  with  a mine  of  inexhaustible  riches  which  he 
devoted  always,  anonymously,  in  favor  of  those  nations  who 
fought  for  the  independence  of  their  country.* 

For  long,  however,  he  had  held  no  communication  with  his 
fellow-creatures,  when,  during  the  night  of  the  6th  of  Novem- 
ber, 1866,  three  men  were  cast  on  board  his  vessel.  They  were 
a French  professor,  his  servant,  and  a Canadian  fisherman. 
These  three  men  had  been  hurled  overboard  by  a collision 
which  had  taken  place  between  the  “ Nautilus”  and  the  United 
States’  frigate  “ Abraham  Lincoln,”  which  had  chased  her. 

Captain  Nemo  learnt  from  this  professor  that  the  “ Nautilus,” 
taken  now  for  a gigantic  mammal  of  the  whale  species,  now 
for  a submarine  vessel  carrying  a crew  of  pirates,  was  sought 
for  in  every  sea. 

He  might  have  returned  these  three  men  to  the  ocean,  from 
whence  chance  had  brought  them  in  contact  with  his  mys- 
terious existence.  Instead  of  doing  this  he  kept  them  pris- 
eners,  and  during  seven  months  they  were  enabled  to  behold 
all  the  wonders  of  a voyage  of  twenty  thousand  leagues  under 
the  seas. 

* This  refers  to  the  insurrection  of  the  Candiotes,  who  wore,  in 
tact,  largely  assisted  by  Captain  Nemo. 


610 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


One  day,  the  22d  of  June,  1867,  these  three  men,  who 
knew  nothing  of  the  past  history  of  Captain  Nemo,  succeeded 
in  escaping  in  one  of  the  “ Nautilus’s  ” boats.  But  as  at  this 
time  the  “ Nautilus”  was  drawn  into  the  vortex  of  the  Mael- 
strom, off  the  coast  of  Norway,  the  captain  naturally  believed 
that  the  fugitives,  engulfed  in  that  frightful  whirlpool,  found 
their  death  at  the  bottom  of  the  abyss.  He  was  ignorant 
that  the  Frenchman  and  his  two  companions  had  been 
miraculously  cast  on  shore,  that  the  fishermen  of  the  Loffoden 
Islands  had  rendered  them  assistance,  and  that  the  professor, 
on  his  return  to  France,  had  published  that  work  in  which 
seven  months  of  the  strange  and  eventful  navigation  of  the 
“ Nautilus”  were  narrated  and  exposed  to  the  curiosity  of  the 
public. 

For  a long  time  after  this,  Captain  Nemo  continued  to  live 
thus,  traversing  every  sea.  But  one  by  one  his  companions 
died,  and  found  their  last  resting-place  in  their  cemetery  of 
coral,  in  the  bed  of  the  Pacific.  At  last  Captain  Nemo  re- 
mained the  solitary  survivor  of  all  those  who  had  taken  refuge 
with  him  in  the  depths  of  the  ocean. 

He  was  now  sixty  years  of  age.  Although  alone,  he  suc- 
ceeded in  navigating  the  “Nautilus”  towards  one  of  those 
submarine  caverns  which  had  sometimes  served  him  as  a 
harbor. 

One  of  these  ports  was  hollowed  beneath  Lincoln  Island,  and 
at  this  moment  furnished  an  asylum  to  the  “Nautilus.” 

The  captain  had  now  remained  there  six  years,  navigating 
the  ocean  no  longer,  but  awaiting  death,  and  that  moment 
when  he  should  rejoin  his  former  companions,  when  by  chance 
he  observed  the  descent  of  the  balloon  which  carried  the  pris- 
oners of  the  Confederates.  Clad  in  his  diving-dress  he  was 
walking  beneath  the  water  at  a few  cables’  length  from  the 
shore  of  the  island,  when  the  engineer  had  been  thrown  into 
the  sea.  Moved  by  a feeling  of  compassion  the  captain  saved 
Cyrus  Harding. 

His  first  impulse  was  to  fly  from  the  vicinity  of  the  five  cast- 
aways; but  his  harbor  of  refuge  was  closed,  for  in  conse- 
quence of  an  elevation  of  the  basalt,  produced  by  the  influence 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


611 


of  volcanic  action,  he  could  no  longer  pass  through  the  en- 
trance of  the  vault.  Though  there  was  sufficient  depth  of 
water  to  allow  a light  craft  to  pass  the  bar,  there  was  not 
enough  for  the  “ Nautilus,”  whose  draught  of  water  was  con- 
siderable. 

Captain.  Nemo  was  compelled,  therefore,  to  remain.  He 
observed  these  men  thrown  without  resources  upon  a desert 
island,  but  had  no  wish  to  be  himself  discovered  by  them.  By 
degrees  he  became  interested  in  their  efforts  when  he  saw 
them  honest,  energetic,  and  bound  to  each  other  by  the  ties  of 
friendship.  As  if  despite  his  wishes,  he  penetrated  all  the 
secrets  of  their  existence.  By  means  of  the  diving-dress  he 
could  easily  reach  the  well  in  the  interior  of  Granite  House, 
and  climbing  by  the  projections  of  rock  to  its  upper  orifice  he 
heard  the  colonists  as  they  recounted  the  past,  and  studied  the 
present  and  future.  He  learnt  from  them  the  tremendous 
conflict  of  America  with  America  itself,  for  the  abolition  of 
slavery.  Yes,  these  men  were  worthy  to  reconcile  Captain 
Nemo  with  that  humanity  which  they  represented  so  nobly  in 
the  island. 

Captain  Nemo  had  saved  Cyrus  Harding.  It  was  he  also  who 
nad  brought  back  the  dog  to  the  Chimneys,  who  rescued  Top 
from  the  waters  of  the  lake,  who  caused  to  fall  at  Flotsam 
Point  the  case  containing  so  many  things  useful  to  the  col- 
onists, who  conveyed  the  canoe  back  into  the  stream  of  the 
Mercy,  who  cast  the  cord  from  the  top  of  Granite  House  at 
the  time  of  the  attack  by  the  baboons,  who  made  known  the 
presence  of  Ayrton  upon  Tabor  Island,  by  means  of  the  docu- 
ment enclosed  in  the  bottle,  who  caused  the  explosion  of  the 
brig  by  the  shock  of  a torpedo  placed  at  the  bottom  of  the 
canal,  who  saved  Herbert  from  a certain  death  by  bringing  the 
sulphate  of  quinine  ; and  finally,  it  was  he  who  had  killed  the 
convicts  with  the  electric  balls,  of  which  he  possessed  the 
secret,  and  which  he  employed  in  the  chase  of  submarine 
creatures.  Thus  were  explained  so  many  apparently  super- 
natural occurrences,  and  which  all  proved  the  generosity  and 
power  of  the  captain. 

Nevertheless,  this  noble  misanthrope  longed  to  benefit  his 


612 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


proteges  still  further.  There  yet  remained  much  useful  advice 
to  give  them,  and,  his  heart  being  softened  by  the  approach  of 
death,  he  invited,  as  we  are  aware,  the  colonists  of  Granite 
House  to  visit  the  “ Nautilus,”  by  means  of  a wire  which  con- 
nected it  with  the  corral.  Possibly  he  would  not  have  done 
this  had  he  been  aware  that  Cyrus  Harding  was  sufficiently 
acquainted  with  his  history  to  address  him  by  the  name  of 
Nemo. 

The  captain  concluded  the  narrative  of  his  life.  Cyrus  Hard- 
ing then  spoke ; he  recalled  all  the  incidents  which  had 
exercised  so  beneficent  an  influence  upon  the  colony,  and  in 
the  names  of  his  companions  and  himself  thanked  the  gener- 
ous being  to  whom  they  owed  so  much. 

But  Captain  Nemo  paid  little  attention ; his  mind  appeared 
to  be  absorbed  by  one  idea,  and  without  taking  the  proffered 
hand  of  the  engineer,— 

“ Now,  sir,”  said  he,  “ now  that  you  know  my  history,  your 
judgment ! ” 

In  saying  this,  the  captain  evidently  alluded  to  an  important 

iJ  G 

incident  witnessed  by  the  three  strangers  thrown  on  board  his 
vessel,  and  which  the  French  professor  had  related  in  his 
work,  causing  a profound  and  terrible  sensation.  Some  days 
previous  to  the  flight  of  the  professor  and  his  two  companions, 
the  “ Nautilus,”  being  chased  by  a frigate  in  the  north  of  the 
Atlantic,  had  hurled  herself  as  a ram  upon  this  frigate,  and 
sunk  her  without  mercy. 

Cyrus  Harding  understood  the  captain’s  allusion,  and  was 
silent. 

“ It  was  an  enemy’s  frigate,”  exclaimed  Captain  Nemo,  trans- 
formed for  an  instant  into  the  Prince  Dakkar,  “an  enemy’s 
frigate ! It  was  she  who  attacked  me— I was  in  a narrow  and 
shallow  bay— the  frigate  barred  my  way— and  I sank  her  I” 

A few  moments  of  silence  ensued  ; then  the  captain  de- 
manded,— 

“ What  think  you  of  my  life,  gentlemen  ? ” 

Cyrus  Harding  extended  his  hand  to  the  cbdevant  prince 
and  replied  gravely,  “ Sir,  your  error  was  in  supposing  that  the 
past  can  be  resuscitated,  and  in  contending  against  inevitable 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


SIS 

progress.  It  is  one  of  those  errors  which  some  admire,  others 
blame  ; which  God  alone  can  judge.  He  who  is  mistaken  in 
an  action  which  he  sincerely  believes  to  be  right  may  be  an 
enemy,  but  retains  our  esteem.  Your  error  is  one  that  we 
may  admire,  and  your  name  has  nothing  to  fear  from  the  judg- 
ment of  history,  which  does  not  condemn  heroic  folly,  but  its 
results.” 

The  old  man’s  breast  swelled  with  emotion,  and  raising  his 
hand  to  heaven,— 

“ Was  I wrong,  or  in  the  right  ? ” he  murmured. 

Cyrus  Harding  replied,  “All  great  actions  return  to  God, 
from  whom  they  are  derived.  Captain  Nemo,  we,  whom  you 
have  succored,  shall  ever  mourn  your  loss.” 

Herbert,  who  had  drawn  near  the  captain,  fell  on  his  knees 
and  kissed  his  hand. 

A tear  glistened  in  the  eyes  of  the  dying  man,  “ My  child/ 
he  said,  “ may  God  bless  you  I” 


CHAPTER  XVII, 


BAST  MOMENTS  OF  CAPTAIN  NEMO— WISHES  OF  THE  DYING  MAN— 
A PARTING  GIFT  TO  HIS  FRIENDS  OF  A DAY— CAPTAIN  NEMO’S 
COFFIN— ADVICE  TO  THE  COLONISTS— THE  SUPREME  MOMENT 
—AT  THE  BOTTOM  OF  THE  SEA. 

Day  had  returned.  No  ray  of  light  penetrated  into  the  pro- 
fundity of  the  cavern.  It  being  high-water,  the  entrance  was 
closed  by  the  sea.  But  the  artificial  light,  which  escaped  in 
long  streams  from  the  skylights  of  the  “ Nautilus,”  was  as  vivid 
as  before,  and  the  sheet  of  water  shone  around  the  floating 
vessel. 

An  extreme  exhaustion  now  overcame  Captain  Nemo,  who 
had  fallen  back  upon  the  divan.  It  was  useless  to  contemplate 
removing  him  to  Granite  House,  for  he  had  expressed  his  wish 
to  remain  in  the  midst  of  those  marvels  of  the  “ Nautilus  ” 
which  millions  could  not  have  purchased,  and  to  await  there 
for  that  death  which  was  swiftly  approaching. 

During  a long  interval  of  prostration,  which  rendered  him 
almost  unconscious,  Cyrus  Harding  and  Gideon  Spilett  atten- 
tively observed  the  condition  of  the  dying  man.  It  was  apparent 
that  his  strength  was  gradually  diminishing.  That  frame, 
once  so  robust,  was  now  but  the  fragile  tenement  of  a depart- 
ing soul.  All  of  life  was  concentrated  in  the  heart  and  head. 

The  engineer  and  reporter  consulted  in  whispers.  Was  it 
possible  to  render  any  aid  to  the  dying  man  ? Might  his  life, 
if  not  saved,  be  prolonged  for  some  days  ? He  himself  had 
said  that  no  remedy  could  avail,  and  he  awaited  with  tranquil* 
ity  that  death  which  had  for  him  no  terrors. 

“ We  can  do  nothing,”  said  Gideon  Spilett. 

44  But  of  what  is  he  dying?  ” asked  Pencroft. 

“Life  is  simply  fading  out,”  replied  the  reporter. 

614 


THE  SECRET  QJF  THE  ISLAND. 


015 


“ Nevertheless,”  said  the  sailor,  “ if  we  moved  him  into  the 
epen  air,  and  the  light  of  the  sun,  he  might  perhaps  recover.” 

“No,  Pencroft,”  answered  the  engineer,  “it  is  useless  to 
attempt  it.  Besides,  Captain  Nemo  would  never  consent  t« 
leave  his  vessel.  He  has  lived  for  a dozen  years  on  board  the 
f Nautilus,’  and  on  board  the  ‘Nautilus ’ he  desires  to  die.” 

Without  doubt  Captain  Nemo  heard  Cyrus  Harding’s  reply, 
for  he  raised  himself  slightly,  and  in  a voice  more  feeble,  but 
always  intelligible,— 

“ You  are  right,  sir,”  he  said.  “ I shall  die  here — it  is  my 
wish;  and  therefore  I have  a request  to  make  of  you.” 

Cyrus  Harding  and  his  friends  had  drawn  near  the  divan, 
and  now  arranged  the  cushions  in  such  a manner  as  to  better 
support  the  dying  man. 

They  saw  his  eyes  wander  over  all  the  marvels  of  this  saloon, 
lighted  by  the  electric  rays  which  fell  from  the  arabesques  of 
the  luminous  ceiling.  He  surveyed,  one  after  the  other,  the 
pictures  hanging  from  the  splendid  tapestries  of  the  partitions, 
the  chef -d?  oeuvres  of  the  Italian,  Flemish,  French,  and  Spanish 
masters;  the  statues  of  marble  and  bronze  on  their  pedestals; 
the  magnificent  organ,  leaning  against  the  after-partition;  the 
aquarium,  in  which  bloomed  the  most  wonderful  productions 
of  the  sea— marine  plants,  zoophytes,  chaplets  of  pearls  of 
inestimable  value;  and,  finally,  his  eyes  rested  on  this  device, 
inscribed  over  the  pediment  of  the  museum— the  motto  of  the 
“ Nautilus  ” 

“ Mobilis  in  mobile .” 

His  glance  seemed  to  rest  fondly  for  the  last  time  on  these 
masterpieces  of  art  and  of  nature,  to  which  he  had  limited  his 
horizon  during  a sojourn  of  so  many  years  in  the  abysses  of  the 
seas. 

Cyrus  Harding  respected  the  captain’s  silence,  and  waited 
till  he  should  speak. 

After  some  minutes,  during  which,  doubtless,  he  passed  in 
review  the  whole  of  his  life,  Captain  Nemo  turned  to  the  col- 
onists and  said, — 

“ You  consider  yourselves,  gentlemen,  under  some  obligation 
to  me  ? ” 


ma  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


m 

64  Captain,  believe  us  that  we  would  give  our  lives  to  prolong 
yours.” 

“ Promise,  then,”  continued  Captain  Nemo, 44  to  carry  out  my 
last  wishes,  and  I shall  be  repaid  for  all  I have  done  for  you.” 

“ We  promise,”  said  Cyrus  Harding. 

And  by  this  promise  he  bound  both  himself  and  his  com- 
panions. 

“Gentlemen,”  resumed  the  captain,  “to-morrow  I shall  be 
dead.” 

Herbert  was  about  to  utter  an  exclamation,  but  a sign 
from  the  captain  arrested  him. 

“ To-morrow  I shall^lie,  and  I desire  no  other  tomb  than  the 
‘Nautilus.’  It  is  my  grave!  All  my  friends  repose  in  the 
depths, of  the  ocean;  their  resting  place  shall  be  mine.” 

These  words  were  received  with  profound  silence. 

“ Pay  attention  to  my  wishes,”  he  continued.  “ The  ‘ Nautilus  ’ 
is  imprisoned  in  this  grotto,  the  entrance  of  which  is  blocked 
up;  but,  although  egress  is  impossible  the  vessel  may  at  least 
sink  in  the  abyss,  and  there  bury  my  remains.” 

The  colonists  listened  reverently  to  the  words  of  the  dying 
man. 

“To-morrow,  after  my  death,  Mr.  Harding,”  continued  the 
captain,  “yourself  and  companions  will  leave  the  ‘Nautilus,’ 
for  all  the  treasures  it  contains  must  perish  with  me.  One 
token  alone  will  remain  with  you  of  Prince  Dakkar,  with  whose 
history  you  are  now  acquainted.  That  coffer  yonder  contains 
diamonds  of  the  value  of  many  millions,  most  of  them  memen- 
toes of  the  time  when,  husband  and  father,  I thought  happi- 
ness possible  for  me,  and  a collection  of  pearls,  gathered  by  my 
friends  and  myself  in  the  depths  of  the  ocean.  Of  this  treasure, 
at  a future  day,  you  may  make  good  use.  In  the  hands  of 
such  men  as  yourself  and  your  comrades,  Captain  Harding, 
money  will  never  be  a source  of  danger.  Prom  on  high  I shall 
still  participate  in  your  enterprises,  and  I fear  not  but  that 
they  will  prosper.” 

After  a few  moments’  repose,  necessitated  by  his  extreme 
weakness,  Captain  Nemo  continued,— 

To-morrow  you  will  take  the  coffer;  you  will  leave  the 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


m 


saloon,  of  which  you  will  close  the  door;  then  you  will  aseend 
on  to  the  deck  of  the  ‘Nautilus,’  and  you  will  lower  the  main- 
hatch  so  as  entirely  to  close  the  vessel.” 

“ It  shall  be  done,  captain,”  answered  Cyrus  Harding. 

“ Good.  You  will  then  embark  in  the  canoe  which  brought 
you  hither;  but,  before  leaving  the  ‘Nautilus,’  go- to  the  stern 
and  there  open  two  large  stop-cocks  which  you  will  find  upon 
the  water-line.  The  water  will  penetrate  into  the  reservoirs, 
and  the  ‘ Nautilus  ’ will  gradually  sink  beneath  the  water  to 
repose  at  the  bottom  of  the  abyss.” 

And,  comprehending  a gesture  of  Cyrus  Harding,  the  captain 
added,— 

“ Fear  nothing  ! You  will  but  bury  a corpse  ! ” 

Neither  Cyrus  Harding  nor  his  companions  ventured  to  offer 
any  observation  to  Captain  Nemo.  He  had  expressed  his  last 
wishes,  and  they  had  nothing  to  do  but  to  conform  to  them, 

“ I have  your  promise,  gentlemen  ? ” added  Captain  Nemo. 

“ You  have,  captain,”  replied  the  engineer. 

The  captain  thanked  the  colonists  by  a sign,  and  requested 
them  to  leave  him  for  some  hours.  Gideon  Spilett  wished  to 
remain  near  him,  in  the  event  of  a crisis  coming  on,  but  the 
dying  man  refused,  saying,  “ I shall  live  until  to-morrow,  sir.” 
All  left  the  saloon,  passed  through  the  library  and  the  dining- 
room, and  arrived  forward,  in  the  machine-room,  where  the 
electrical  apparatus  was  established,  which  supplied  not  only 
heat  and  light,  but  the  mechanical  power  of  the  “ Nautilus.” 
The  “ Nautilus  ” was  a masterpiece,  containing  masterpieces 
within  itself,  and  the  engineer  was  struck  with  astonishment. 

The  colonists  mounted  the  platform,  which  rose  seven  or 
eight  feet  above  the  water.  There  they  beheld  a thick  glass 
lenticular  covering,  which  protected  a kind  of  large  eye,  from 
which  flashed  forth  light.  Behind  this  eye  was  apparently  a 
cabin  containing  the  wheels  of  the  rudder,  and  in  which  was 
stationed  the  helmsman,  when  he  navigated  the  “ Nautilus  ” 
over  the  bed  of  the  ocean,  which  the  electric  rays  would  evi- 
dently light  up  to  a considerable  distance. 

Cyrus  Harding  and  his  companions  remained  for  a time 
silent,  for  they  were  vividly  impressed  by  what  they  had  just 


618 


THE  [LAKESIDE  EDITIONo 


seen  and  heard,  and  their  hearts  were  deeply  touched  by  the 
thought  that  he  whose  arm  had  so  often  aided  them,  the  pro- 
tector whom  they  had  known  but  a few  hours,  was  at  the 
point  of  death.  Whatever  might  be  the  judgment  pro- 
nounced by  posterity  upon  the  events  of  this,  so  to  speak,  extra- 
human existence,  the  character  of  Prince  Dakkar  would  ever 
remain  as  one  of  those  whose  memory  time  can  never  efface. 

“ What  a man  ! ” said  Pencroft.  “ Is  it  possible  that  he  can 
have  lived  at  the  bottom  of  the  sea  ? And  it  seems  to  me  that 
perhaps  he  has  not  found  peace  there  any  more  than  else- 
where ! ” 

“ The  ‘ Nautilus,’  ” observed  Ayrton,  “ might  have  enabled  us 
to  leave  Lincoln  Island  and  reach  some  inhabited  country.” 

“ Good  Heavens  ! ” exclaimed  Pencroft,  “ I for  one  would 
never  risk  myself  in  such  a craft.  To  sail  on  the  seas,  good  ; 
but  under  the  seas,  never ! ” 

“I  believe,  Pencroft,”  answered  the  reporter,  “that  the 
navigation  of  a sub-marine  vessel  such  as  the  ‘ Nautilus  ’ ought 
to  be  very  easy,  and  that  we  should  soon  become  accustomed  to 
it.  There  would  be  no  storms,  no  lee-shore  to  fear.  At  some 
feet  beneath  the  surface  the  waters  of  the  ocean  are  as  calm 
as  those  of  a lake.” 

“ That  may  be,”  replied  the  sailor  ; “ but  I prefer  a gale  of 
wind  on  board  a well-found  craft.  A vessel  is  built  to  sail  on 
the  sea,  and  not  beneath  it.” 

“ My  friends,”  said  the  engineer,  “ it  is  useless,  at  any  rate 
as  regards  the  ‘Nautilus,’  to  discuss  the  question  of  sub-marine 
vessels.  The  ‘ Nautilus  ’ is  not  ours,  and  we  have  not  the  right 
to  dispose  of  it.  Moreover,  we  could  in  no  case  avail  ourselves 
of  it.  Independently  of  the  fact  that  it  would  be  impossible  to 
get  it  out  of  this  cavern,  whose  entrance  is  now  closed  by  the 
uprising  of  the  basaltic  rocks,  Captain  Nemo’s  wish  is  that  it 
shall  be  buried  with  him.  His  wish  is  our  law,  and  we  will 
‘ fulfil  it.” 

After  a somewhat  prolonged  conversation,  Cyrus  Harding 
and  his  companions  again  descended  to  the  interior  of  the 
“ Nautilus.”  There  they  took  some  refreshment  and  returned 
to  the  saloon. 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


m 

Captain  Nemo  had  somewhat  rallied  from  the  prostration 
which  had  overcome  him,  and  his  eyes  shone  with  their  wonted 
tire.  A faint  smile  even  curled  his  lips. 

The  colonists  drew  around  him. 

“ Gentlemen,”  said  the  captain,  “ you  are  brave  and  honest 
men.  You  have  devoted  yourselves  to  the  common  weal 
Often  have  I observed  your  conduct.  I have  esteemed  you— I 
esteem  you  still ! Your  hand,  Mr.  Harding  ! ” 

Cyrus  Harding  gave  his  hand  to  the  captain,  who  clasped  it 
affectionately. 

“ It  is  well ! ” he  murmured.  He  resumed,— 

“But  enough  of  myself.  I have  to  speak  concerning  your- 
selves, and  this  Lincoln  Island,  upon  which  you  have  taken 
refuge.  You  desire  to  leave  it  ? ” 

“ To  return,  captain  ! ” answered  Pencroft,  quickly. 

“ To  return,  Pencroft?”  said  the  captain  with  a smile.  “I 
know,  it  is  true,  your  love  for  this  island.  You  have  helped  to 
make  it  what  it  now  is,  and  it  seems  to  you  a paradise ! ” 

“Our  project,  captain,”  interposed  Cyrus  Haramg,  “is  to 
annex  it  to  the  United  States,  and  to  establish  for  our  shipping 
a port  so  fortunately  situated  in  this  part  of  the  Facrnc.7* 

“Your  thoughts  are  with  your  country,  gentlemen,”  con- 
tinued the  captain ; “ your  toils  are  for  her  prosperity  and 
glory.  You  are  right.  One’s  native  land!— there  snould  one 
live ! there  die ! And  I ! I die  far  from  all  I loved ! * 

“You  have  some  last  wish  to  transmit,”  said  the  engineer 
with  emotion,  “ some  souvenir  to  send  to  those  friends  you 
have  left  in  the  mountains  of  India  ? ” 

“No,  Captain  Harding;  no  friends  remain  to  me  \ I am 
the  last  of  my  race,  and  to  all  whom  I have  known  I have  long 
been  as  are  the  dead.  But  to  return  to  yourselves.  Solitude, 
isolation,  are  painful  things,  and  beyond  human  endurance.  I 
die  of  having  thought  it  possible  to  live  alone!  You  should, 
therefore,  dare  all  in  the  attempt  to  leave  Lincoln  Island,  and 
gee  once  more  the  land  of  your  birth.  I am  aware  that  those 
wretches  have  destroyed  the  vessel  you  had  built.” 

“We  propose  to  construct  a vessel,”  said  Gideon  Spilett* 
U®ufficientiy  large  to  convey  us  to  the  nearest  land ; but  if 


m 


vm  lakesid©  mmsohb 


we  should  succeed,  sooner  or  later  we  shall  return  to  Lincoln 
Island.  We  are  attached  to  It  by  too  many  recollections  ever  to 
forget  it.” 

14  It  Is  here  that  we  have  known  Captain  Nemo,”  said  Cyrua 
Harding. 

44  It  is  here  only  that  we  can  make  our  home ! ” added  Hen 
berk 

44  And  here  shall  I sleep  the  sleep  of  eternity,  if  — ” replied 
the  captain. 

He  paused  for  a moment,  and,  instead  of  completing  the 
sentence,  said  simply,— 

“ Mr.  Harding,  I wish  to  speak  with  you— alone  I ” 

The  engineer’s  companions,  respecting  the  wish  of  the  dying 
man,  retired. 

Cyrus  Harding  remained  but  a few  minutes  alone  with 
Captain  Nemo,  and  soon  recalled  his  companions  ; but  he  said 
nothing  to  them  of  the  private  matters  which  the  dying  man 
had  confided  to  him. 

Gideon  Spilett  now  watched  the  captain  with  extreme  care. 
It  was  evident  that  he  was  no  longer  sustained  by  his  moral 
energy,  which  had  lost  the  power  of  reaction  against  hi s 
physical  weakness. 

The  day  closed  without  change.  The  colonists  did  not  quit 
the 14  Nautilus  ” for  a moment.  Night  arrived,  although  it  was 
impossible  to  distinguish  it  from  day  in  the  cavern. 

Captain  Nemo  suffered  no  pain,  but  he  was  visibly  sinking. 
His  noble  features,  paled  by  the  approach  of  death,  were  per- 
fectly calm.  Inaudible  words  escaped  at  intervals  from  his  lips, 
bearing  upon  various  incidents  of  his  chequered  career.  Life 
was  evidently  ebbing  slowly,  and  his  extremities  were  already 
cold. 

Once  or  twice  more  he  spoke  to  the  colonists  who  stood 
around  him,  and  smiled  on  them  with  that  last  smile  which 
continues  after  death. 

At  length,  shortly  after  midnight,  Captain  Nemo  by  a 
supreme  effort  succeeded  in  folding  his  arms  across  his  breast, 
as  if  wishing  in  that  attitude  to  compose  himself  for  death. 

By^ae  o’clock  his  glance  alone  showed  signs  of  life.  A dying 


TH“E  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


623 


gleamed  in  those  eyes  once  so  brilliant.  Then,  mom  nr, 
ing  the  words,  “ God  and  my  country  !”  he  quietly  expired. 

Cyrus  Harding,  bending  low,  closed  the  eyes  of  him  who  had 
once  been  the  Prince  Dakkar,  and  was  now  not  even  Captain 

Nemo. 

Herbert  and  Pencroft  sobbed  aloud.  Tears  fell  from 
Ayrton’s  eyes.  Neb  was  on  his  knees  by  the  reporter’s  side4 
motionless  as  a statue. 

Then  Cyrus  Harding,  extending  his  hand  over  the  forehead 
of  the  dead,  said  solemnly— 

“ May  his  soul  be  with  God  ! Let  us  pray  ! ” 

Some  hours  later  the  colonists  fulfilled  the  promise  made  t-o 
the  captain  by  carrying  out  his  dying  wishes. 

Cyrus  Harding  and  his  companions  quitted  the  “ Nautilus,* 
taking  with  them  the  only  memento  left  them  by  their  bene- 
factor, that  coder  which  contained  wealth  amounting  to 
millions. 

The  marvellous  saloon,  still  flooded  with  light,  had  been 
carefully  closed.  The  iron  door  leading  on  deck  was  then 
securely  fastened  in  such  a manner  as  to  prevent  even  a drop 
of  water  from  penetrating  to  the  interior  of  the  “Nautilus.” 

The  colonists  then  descended  into  the  canoe,  which  was 
moored  to  the  side  of  the  submarine  vessel. 

The  canoe  was  now  brought  round  to  the  stern.  There,  at 
the  water  line,  were  two  large  stop-cocks,  communicating  with 
the  reservoirs  employed  in  the  submersion  of  the  vessel. 

The  stop-cocks  were  opened,  the  reservoirs  filled,  and  the 
“ Nautilus,”  slowly  sinking,  disappeared  beneath  the  surface  of 
the  lake. 

But  the  colonists  were  yet  able  to  follow  its  descent  through 
the  waves.  The  powerful  light  it  gave  forth  lighted  up  the 
translucent  water,  while  the  cavern  became  gradually  obscure. 
At  length  this  vast  effusion  of  electric  light  faded  away,  and 
soon  after  the  “Nautilus,”  now  the  tomb  of  Captain  Nemot, 
reposed  in  its  ocean  heck 


CHAPTER  XVIII 


REFLECTIONS  OF  THE  COLONISTS— THEIR  LABORS  OF  RECONSTRUC- 
TION RESUMED— THE  1ST  OF  JANUARY,  1869— A CLOUD  OYER 
THE  SUMMIT  OF  THE  VOLCANO  — FIRST  WARNINGS  OF  AN 
ERUPTION— AYRTON  AND  CYRUS  HARDING  AT  THE  CORRAL- 
EXPLORATION  OF  THE  DAKKAR  GROTTO— WHAT  CAPTAIN  NEMO 
HAD  CONFIDED  TO  THE  ENGINEER. 

At  break  of  day  the  colonists  regained  in  silence  the  entrance 
of  the  cavern,  to  which  they  gave  the  name  of  “ Dakkar  Grotto,” 
in  memory  of  Captain  Nemo.  It  was  now  low  water,  and 
they  passed  without  difficulty  under  the  arcade,  washed  on  the 
right  by  the  sea. 

The  canoe  was  left  here,  carefully  protected  from  the  waves. 
As  an  excess  of  precaution,  Pencroft,  Neb  and  Ayrton  drew  it 
up  on  a little  beach  which  bordered  one  of  the  sides  of  the 
grotto,  in  a spot  where  it  could  run  no  risk  of  harm. 

The  storm  had  ceased  during  the  night.  The  last  low  mut- 
terings  of  the  thunder  died  away  in  the  west.  Rain  fell  no 
longer,  but  the  sky  was  yet  obscured  by  clouds.  On  the  whole, 
this  month  of  October,  the  first  of  the  southern  spring,  was 
not  ushered  in  by  satisfactory  tokens,  and  the  wind  had  a 
tendency  to  shift  from  one  point  of  the  compass  to  another, 
which  rendered  it  impossible  to  count  upon  settled  weather. 

Cyrus  Harding  and  his  companions,  on  leaving  Dakkar 
Grotto,  had  taken  the  road  to  the  corral.  On  their  way  Neb 
and  Herbert  were  careful  to  preserve  the  wire  which  had  been 
laid  down  by  the  captain  between  the  corral  and  the  grotto, 
and  which  might  at  a future  time  be  of  service. 

The  colonists  spoke  but  little  on  the  road.  The  various  inci- 
dents of  the  night  of  the  15th  of  October  had  left  a profound 
impression  on  their  minds.  The  unknown  being  whose  influ- 

621 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


ence  had  so  effectually  protected  them,  the  man  whom  their 
imagination  had  endowed  with  supernatural  powers,  Captain 
Nemo,  was  no  more.  His  “ Nautilus  ” and  he  were  buried  in 
the  depths  of  the  abyss.  To  each  one  of  them  their  existence 
seemed  even  more  isolated  than  before.  They  had  been  accus- 
tomed to  count  upon  the  intervention  of  that  power  which 
existed  no  longer,  and  Gideon  Spilett,  and  even  Cyrus  Harding, 
could  not  escape  this  impression.  Thus  they  maintained  a 
profound  silence  during  their  journey  to  the  corral. 

Towards  nine  in  the  morning  the  colonists  arrived  at 
Granite  House. 

It  had  been  agreed  that  the  construction  of  the  vessel  should 
be  actively  pushed  forward,  and  Cyrus  Harding  more  than  ever 
devoted  his  time  and  labor  to  this  object.  It  was  impossible  to 
divine  what  future  lay  before  them.  Evidently  the  advantage 
to  the  colonists  would  be  great  of  having  at  their  disposal  a 
substantial  vessel,  capable  of  keeping  the  sea  even  in  heavy 
weather,  and  large  enough  to  attempt,  in  case  of  need,  a 
voyage  of  some  duration.  Even  if,  when  their  vessel  should  be 
completed,  the  colonists  should  not  resolve  to  leave  Lincoln 
Island  as  yet,  in  order  to  gain  either  one  of  the  Polynesian 
archipelagos  of  the  Pacific  or  the  shores  of  New  Zealand,  they 
might  at  least,  sooner  or  later,  proceed  to  Tabor  Island,  to  leave 
the  notice  relating  to  Ayrton.  This  was  a precaution  rendered 
indispensable  by  the  possibility  of  the  Scotch  yacht  reappear- 
ing in  those  seas,  and  it  was  of  the  highest  importance  that 
nothing  should  be  neglected  on  this  point. 

The  works  were  then  resumed.  Cyrus  Harding,  Pencroft 
and  Ayrton,  assisted  by  Neb,  Gideon  Spilett  and  Herbert,  except 
when  unavoidably  called  off  by  other  necessary  occupations, 
worked  without  cessation.  It  was  important  that  the  new 
vessel  should  be  ready  in  five  months— that  is  to  say,  by  the 
beginning  of  March— if  they  wished  to  visit  Tabor  Island  before 
the  equinoctial  gales  rendered  the  voyage  impracticable. 
Therefore  the  carpenters  lost  not  a moment.  Moreover,  it 
was  unnecessary  to  manufacture  rigging,  that  of  the  “Speedy” 
having  been  saved  entire,  so  that  the  hull  only  of  the  vessel 
needed  to  be  constructed. 

40 


626 


THE  DA  RESIDE  EDITION. 


The  end  of  the  year  1868  found  them  occupied  by  these  in* 
portant  labors,  to  the  exclusion  of  almost  all  others.  At  the 
expiration  of  two  months  and  a half  the  rib3  had  been  set  up 
and  the  first  planks  adjusted.  It  was  already  evident  that  the 
plans  made  by  Cyrus  Harding  were  admirable,  and  that  the  ves- 
sel would  behave  well  at  sea. 

Pencroft  brought  to  the  task  a devouring  energy,  and 
scrupled  not  to  grumble  when  one  or  the  other  abandoned  the 
carpenter’s  axe  for  the  gun  of  the  hunter.  It  was  nevertheless 
necessary  to  keep  up  the  stores  of  Granite  House,  in  view  of 
the  approaching  winter.  But  this  did  not  satisfy  Pencroft. 
The  brave,  honest  sailor  was  not  content  when  the  workmen 
were  not  at  the  dock-yard.  When  this  happened  he  grumbled 
vigorously,  and,  by  way  of  venting  his  feelings,  did  the  work  of 
six  men. 

The  weather  was  very  unfavorable  during  the  whole  of  the 
summer  season.  For  some  days  the  heat  was  overpowering, 
and  the  atmosphere,  saturated  with  electricity,  was  only  cleared 
by  violent  storms.  It  was  rarely  that  the  distant  growling  of 
the  thunder  could  not  be  heard,  like  a low  but  incessant  mur- 
mur, such  as  is  produced  in  the  equatorial  regions  of  the  globe. 

The  1st  of  January,  1869,  was  signalized  by  a storm  of 
extreme  violence,  and  the  thunder  burst  several  times  over  the 
island.  Large  trees  were  struck  by  the  electric  fluid  and  shat- 
tered, and  among  others  one  of  those  gigantic  micoclouiers 
which  shaded  the  poultry  yard  at  the  southern  extremity  of 
the  lake.  Had  this  meteor  any  relation  to  the  phenomena 
going  on  in  the  bowels  of  the  earth  ? Was  there  any  connec- 
tion between  the  commotion  of  the  atmosphere  and  that  of  the 
interior  of  the  earth  ? Cyrus  Harding  was  inclined  to  think 
that  such  was  the  case,  for  the  development  of  these  storms 
was  attended  by  the  renewal  of  volcanic  symptoms. 

It  was  on  the  8d  of  January  that  Herbert,  having  ascended 
at  daybreak  to  the  plateau  of  Prospect  Heights  to  harness  one 
of  the  onagas,  perceived  an  enormous  liat-shaped  cloud  rolling 
from  the  summit  of  the  volcano. 

Herbert  immediately  apprised  the  colonists,  who  at  one© 
joined  him  in  watching  the  summit  of  Mount  Franklin. 


THEE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAM).  6&1 

“Ah  I ” exlaimed  Peneroft,  “those  are  not  vapors  this  tlmei 
It  seems  to  me  that  the  giant  is  not  content  with  breathing,’ 
he  must  smoke  I " 

This  figure  of  speech  employed  by  the  sailor  exactly  ex- 
pressed the  changes  going  on  at  the  mouth  of  the  volcano. 
Already  for  three  months  had  the  crater  emitted  vapors  more 
or  less  dense,  but  which  were  as  yet  produced  only  by  an 
internal  ebullition  of  mineral  substances.  But  now  the  vapors 
were  replaced  by  a thick  smoke,  rising  in  the  form  of  a grayish 
column,  more  than  three  hundred  feet  in  width  at  its  base,  and 
which  spread  like  an  immense  mushroom  to  a height  of  from 
seven  to  eight  hundred  feet  above  the  summit  of  the  mountain. 

“The  fire  is  in  the  chimney,”  observed  Gideon  Spilett. 

“ And  we  can’t  put  it  out ! ” replied  Herbert. 

“ The  volcano  ought  to  be  swept,”  observed  Neb,  who  spoke 
as  if  perfectly  serious. 

“Well  said,  Neb ! ” cried  Peneroft,  with  a shout  of  laughter; 
“and  you’ll  undertake  the  job,  no  doubt  ?” 

Cyrus  Harding  attentively  observed  the  dense  smoke  emitted 
by  Mount  Franklin,  and  even  listened,  as  if  expecting  to  hear 
some  distant  muttering.  Then,  turning  toward  his  compan- 
ions, from  whom  he  had  gone  somewhat  apart,  he  said,— 

“ The  truth  is,  my  friends,  we  must  not  conceal  from  our 
selves  that  an  important  change  is  going  forward.  The  volcanic 
substances  are  no  longer  in  a state  of  ebullition,  they  have 
caught  fire,  and  we  are  undoubtedly  menaced  by  an  approach- 
ing eruption. 

“ Well,  captain,”  said  Peneroft,  “ we  shall  witness  the  erup* 
tion ; and  if  it  is  a good  one,  we’ll  applaud  it.  I don’t  see  that 
we  need  concern  ourselves  further  about  the  matter.” 

“It  may  be  so,”  replied  Cyrus  Harding,  “for  the  ancient 
track  of  the  lava  is  still  open;  and  thanks  to  this,  the  crater  has 
hitherto  overflowed  towards  the  north.  And  yet—” 

“ And  yet,  as  we  can  derive  no  advantage  from  an  eruption, 
it  might  be  better  it  should  not  take  place,”  said  the  reporter. 

“ Who  knows  ? ” answered  the  sailor.  “ Perhaps  there  may 
be  some  valuable  substance  in  this  volcano,  which  it  will  spout 
forth,  and  which  we  may  turn  to  good  account ! ” 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


Cyrus  Harding  shook  his  head  with  the  air  of  a man  wha 
augured  no  good  from  the  phenomenon  whose  development 
had  been  so  sudden.  He  did  not  regard  so  lightly  as  Pencroft 
the  results  of  an  eruption.  If  the  lava,  in  consequence  of  the 
position  of  the  crater,  did  not  directly  menace  the  wooded  and 
cultivated  parts  of  the  island,  other  complications  might  pre- 
sent themselves.  In  fact,  eruptions  are  not  unfrequently 
accompanied  by  earthquakes ; and  an  island  of  the  nature  of 
Lincoln  Island  formed  of  substances  so  varied,  basalt  on  one 
side,  granite  on  the  other,  lava  on  the  north,  rich  soil  on  the 
south,  substances  which  consequently  could  not  be  firmly 
attached  to  each  other,  would  be  exposed  to  the  risk  of  disin- 
tegration. Although,  therefore,  the  spreading  of  the  volcanic 
matter  might  not  constitute  a serious  danger,  any  movement  of 
the  terrestrial  structure  which  should  shake  the  island  mighi 
entail  the  gravest  consequences. 

“It  seems  to  me,”  said  Ayrton,  who  had  reclined  so  as  to 
place  his  ear  to  the  ground,  “ it  seems  to  me  that  I can  hear  a 
dull,  rumbling  sound,  like  that  of  a wagon  loaded  with  bars  of 
kon.” 

The  colonists  listened  with  the  greatest  of  attention,  and 
were  convinced  that  Ayrton  was  not  mistaken.  The  rumbling 
was  mingled  with  a subterranean  roar,  which  formed  a sort  of 
rinforzando,  and  died  slowly  away,  as  if  some  violent  storm 
had  passed  through  the  profundities  of  the  globe.  But  no 
explosion,  properly  so  termed,  could  be  heard.  It  might  there- 
fore be  concluded  that  the  vapors  and  smoke  found  a free 
passage  through  the  central  shaft ; and  that  the  safety-valve 
being  sufficiently  large,  no  convulsion  would  be  produced,  no 
explosion  was  to  be  apprehended. 

“ Well,  then ! ” said  Pencroft,  “ are  we  not  going  back  to 
work  ? Let  Mount  Franklin  smoke,  groan,  bellow,  or  spout 
forth  fire  and  flame  as  much  as  it  pleases,  that  is  no  reason 
why  we  should  be  idle  ! Come,  Ayrton,  Neb,  Herbert,  Captain 
Harding,  Mr.  Spilett,  every  one  of  us  must  turn  to  at  our  work 
to-day!  We  are  going  to  place  the  keelson,  and  a dozen  pair  of 
hands  would  not  be  too  many.  Before  two  months  I want  our 
new  ‘ Bonadventure  ’—for  we  shall  keep  the  old  name,  shall  we 


THU  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND, 


629 


not  ? — to  float  on  the  waters  of  Port  Balloon ! Therefore  there 
is  not  an  hour  to  lose  ! ” 

All  the  colonists,  their  services  thus  requisitioned  by  Pen- 
croft,  descended  to  the  dockyard,  and  proceeded  to  place  the 
keelson,  a thick  mass  of  wood  which  forms  the  lower  portion 
of  a ship  and  unites  firmly  the  timbers  of  the  hull.  It  was  an 
arduous  undertaking,  in  which  all  took  part. 

They  continued  their  labors  during  the  whole  of  this  day,  the 
3d  of  January,  without  thinking  further  of  the  volcano,  which 
could  not,  besides,  be  seen  from  the  shore  of  Granite  House. 
But  once  or  twice,  large  shadows,  veiling  the  sun,  which 
described  its  diurnal  arc  through  an  extremely  clear  sky, 
indicated  that  a thick  cloud  of  smoke  passed  between  its  disc 
and  the  island.  The  wind,  blowing  on  the  shore,  carried  all 
these  vapors  to  the  westward.  Cyrus  Harding  and  Gideon 
Spilett  remarked  these  sombre  appearances,  and  from  time  to 
time  discussed  the  evident  progress  of  the  volcanic  phenomena, 
but  their  work  went  on  without  interruption.  It  was,  besides, 
of  the  first  importance  from  every  point  of  view,  that  the  vessel 
should  be  finished  with  the  least  possible  delay.  In  presence 
of  the  eventualities  which  might  arise,  the  safety  of  the 
colonists  wouid  be  tfl  a great  extent  secured  by  their  ship. 
Who  could  tell  that  it  might  not  prove  some  day  their  only 
refuge  ? 

In  the  evening,  after  supper,  Cyrus  Harding,  Gideon  Spilett, 
and  Herbert,  again  ascended  the  plateau  of  Prospect  Heights. 
It  was  already  dark,  and  the  obscurity  would  permit  them  to 
ascertain  if  the  flames  or  incandescent  matter  thrown  up  by  the 
volcano  were  mingled  with  the  vapor  and  smoke  accumu- 
lated at  the  mouth  of  the  crater. 

“ The  crater  is  on  fire ! ” said  Herbert,  who,  more  active 
than  his  companions,  first  reached  the  plateau. 

Mount  Franklin,  distant  about  six  miles,  now  appeared  like  a 
gigantic  torch,  around  the  summit  of  which  turned  fuliginous 
flames.  So  much  smoke,  and  possibly  scoriae  and  cinders 
were  mingled  with  them,  that  their  light  gleamed  but  faintly 
amid  the  gloom  of  the  night.  But  a kind  of  lurid  brilliancy 
spread  over  the  island,  against  which  stood  out  confusedly  the 


680 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


wooded  masses  of  the  heights.  Immense  whirlwinds  of  vapor 
obscured  the  sky,  through  which  glimmered  a few  stars. 

“The  change  is  rapid  !”  said  the  engineer. 

“That  is  not  surprising,”  answered  the  reporter.  “The 
re-awakening  of  the  volcano  already  dates  back  some  time. 
You  may  remember,  Cyrus,  that  the  first  vapors  appeared  about 
the  time  we  searched  the  sides  of  the  mountain  to  discover  Cap- 
tain Nemo’s  retreat.  It  was,  if  I mistake  not,  about  the  15th 
of  October.” 

“ Yes,”  replied  Herbert,  “ two  months  and  a half  ago  ! ” 

“The  subterranean  fires  have  therefore  been  smouldering 
for  ten  weeks,”  resumed  Gideon  Spilett,  “and  it  is  not  tube 
wondered  at  that  they  now  break  out  with  such  violence  ! ” 
“Do  not  you  feel  a certain  vibration  of  the  soil?”  asked 
Cyrus  Harding. 

“ Yes,”  replied  Gideon  Spilett,  “ but  there  is  a great  differ- 
ence between  that  and  an  earthquake.” 

“I  do  not  affirm  that  we  are  menaced  with  an  earthquake,” 
answered  Cyrus  Harding,  “ May  God  preserve  us  from  that ! 
No  ; these  vibrations  are  due  to  the  effervescence  of  the  central 
fire.  The  crust  of  the  earth  is  simply  the  shell  of  a boiler, 
and  you  know  that  such  a shell,  under  the  pressure  of  steam, 
vibrates  like  a sonorous  plate.  It  is  this  effect  which  is  being 
produced  at  this  moment.” 

“ What  magnificent  flames ! ” exclaimed  Herbert. 

At  this  instant  a kind  of  bouquet  of  flames  shot  forth  from 
the  crater,  the  brilliancy  of  which  was  visible  even  through  the 
vapors.  Thousands  of  luminous  sheets  and  barbed  tongues  of 
fire  were  cast  in  various  directions.  Some,  extending  beyond 
the  dome  of  smoke,  dissipated  it,  leaving  behind  an  incadeseent 
powder.  This  was  accompanied  by  successive  explosions, 
resembling  the  discharge  of  a battery  of  mitrailleuses. 

Cyrus  Harding,  the  reporter,  and  Herbert,  after  spending  an 
hour  upon  the  plateau  of  Prospect  Heights,  again  descended  to 
the  beach,  and  returned  to  Granite  House.  The  engineer  was 
thoughtful  and  preoccupied,  so  much  so,  indeed,  that  Gideon 
Spilett  inquired  if  he  apprehended  any  immediate  danger,  of 
Which  the  eruption  might  directly  or  indirectly  be  th*  causa 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


631 


* Yes,  and  no,”  answered  Cyrus  Harding. 

“Nevertheless,”  continued  the  reporter,  “would  not  the 
greatest  misfortune  which  could  happen  to  U3  be  an  earth- 
quake which  would  overturn  the  island  ? Now,  I do  not  sup- 
pose that  this  is  to  be  feared,  since  the  vapors  and  lava  have 
found  a free  outlet.” 

“ True,”  replied  Cyrus  Harding,  “ and  I do  not  fear  an  earth- 
quake in  the  sense  in  which  the  term  is  commonly  applied  to 
convulsions  of  the  soil,  provoked  by  the  expansion  of  subter- 
ranean gases.  But  other  causes  may  produce  great  disasters.” 
“ How  so,  my  dear  Cyrus  ? ” 

“ I am  not  certain.  I must  consider.  I must  visit  the  moun- 
tain. In  a few  days  I shall  learn  more  on  this  point.” 

Gideon  Spilett  said  no  more,  and  soon,  in  spite  of  the  explo- 
sions of  the  volcano,  whose  intensity  increased,  and  which 
were  repeated  by  the  echoes  of  the  island,  the  inhabitants  of 
Granite  House  were  sleeping  soundly. 

Three  days  passed  by — the  4th,  5th,  and  6th  of  January.  The 
construction  of  the  vessel  was  diligently  continued,  and  with- 
out offering  further  explanations  the  engineer  pushed  forward 
the  work  with  all  his  energy.  Mount  Franklin  was  now 
hooded  by  a sombre  cloud  of  sinister  aspect,  and,  amid  the 
flames,  vomited  forth  incandescent  rocks,  some  of  which  fell 
back  into  fhe  crater  itself.  This  caused  Pencroft,  who  would 
only  look  at  the  matter  in  the  light  of  a joke,  to  exclaim,— 

“Ah ! the  giant  is  playing  at  cup  and  ball;  he  is  a conjuror.” 
In  fact,  the  substances  thrown  up  fell  back  again  into  the 
abyss,  and  it  did  not  seem  that  the  lava,  though  swollen  by  the 
internal  pressure,  had  yet  risen  to  the  orifice  of  the  crater.  At 
any  rate,  the  opening  on  the  northeast,  which  was  partly 
visible,  poured  out  no  torrent  upon  the  northern  slope  of  the 
mountain. 

Nevertheless,  however  pressing  was  the  construction  of  the 
vessel  other  duties  demanded  the  presence  of  the  colonists  oil 
various  portions  of  the  island.  Before  every  thing  it  was 
necessary  to  go  to  the  corral,  where  the  flocks  of  musmons  and 
goats  were  enclosed,  and  replenish  the  provision  of  forage 
for  those  animals.  It  was  accordingly  arranged  that  Ayrton 


632 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


should  proceed  thither  the  next  day,  the  7th  of  January;  and 
as  he  was  sufficient  for  the  task,  to  which  he  was  accustomed, 
Pencroft  and  the  rest  were  somewhat  surprised  on  hearing 
the  engineer  say  to  Ayrton,— 

“ As  you  are  going  to-morrow  to  the  corral  I will  accompany 
you.” 

“But,  Captain  Harding,”  exclaimed  the  sailor,  “our  working 
days  will  not  be  many,  and  if  you  go  also  we  shall  be  two 
pair  of  hands  short ! ” 

“ We  shall  return  to-morrow,”  replied  Cyrus  Harding,  “ but 
it  is  necessary  that  I should  go  to  the  corral.  I must  learn 
how  the  eruption  is  progressing.” 

“ The  eruption  ! always  the  eruption  ! ” answered  Pencroft, 
With  an  air  of  discontent.  “An  important  thing,  truly,  this 
Eruption  ! I trouble  myself  very  little  about  it.” 

Whatever  might  be  the  sailor’s  opinion,  the  expedition  pro- 
jected by  the  engineer  was  settled  for  the  next  day.  Herbert 
Wished  to  accompany  Cyrus  Harding,  but  he  would  not  vex 
Pencroft  by  his  absence. 

The  next  day,  at  dawn,  Cyrus  Harding  and  Ayrton,  mounting 
the  cart  drawn  by  two  onagas,  took  the  road  to  the  corral,  and 
set  off  at  a round  trot. 

Above  the  forest  were  passing  large  clouds,  to  which  the 
crater  of  Mount  Franklin  incessantly  added  fuliginous  matter. 
These  clouds,  which  rolled  heavily  in  the  air,  were  evidently 
composed  of  heterogeneous  substances.  It  was  not  alone  from 
the  volcano  that  they  derived  their  strange  opacity  and  weight. 
Scoriae,  in  a state  of  dust,  like  powdered  pumice-stone,  and 
grayish  ashes,  as  small  as  the  finest  feculae,  we  held  in  suspen- 
sion in  the  midst  of  their  thick  folds.  These  ashes  are  so  fine 
that  they  have  been  observed  in  the  air  for  whole  months. 
After  the  eruption  of  1783  in  Iceland  for  upward  of  a year  the 
atmosphere  was  thus  charged  with  volcanic  dust  through 
which  the  rays  of  the  sun  were  only  with  difficulty  discernible. 

But  more  often  this  pulverized  matter  falls,  and  this  hap- 
pened on  the  present  occasion.  Cyrus  Harding  and  Ayrton 
had  scarcely  reached  the  corral  when  a sort  of  black  snow  like 
fine  gunpowder  fell,  and  instantly  changed  the  appearance  of 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


683 


the  soil.  Trees,  meadows,  all  disappeared  beneath  a covering 
several  inches  in  depth.  But,  very  fortunately,  the  wind  blew 
from  the  northeast,  and  the  greater  part  of  the  cloud  dissolved 
itself  over  the  sea. 

“ This  is  very  singular,  Captain  Harding,”  said  Ayrton. 

“It  is  very  serious,”  replied  the  engineer.  “This  powdered 
pumice-stone,  all  this  mineral  dust,  proves  how  grave  is  the 
convulsion  going  forward  in  the  lower  depths  of  the  volcano.” 

“ But  can  nothing  be  done  ? ” 

“Nothing,  except  to  note  the  progress  of  the  phenomenon. 
Do  you,  therefore,  Ayrton,  occupy  yourself  with  the  necessary 
work  at  the  corral.  In  the  meantime  I will  ascend  just  beyond 
the  source  of  Bed  Creek  and  examine  the  condition  of  the 
mountain  upon  its  northern  aspect.  Then—” 

“Well,  Captain  Harding  ? ” 

“ Then  we  will  pay  a visit  to  Dakkar  Grotto.  I wish  to  in- 
spect it.  At  any  rate  I will  come  back  for  you  in  two  hours.” 

Ayrton  then  proceeded  to  enter  the  corral,  and,  while  waiting 
the  engineer’s  return,  busied  himself  with  the  musmons  and 
goats,  which  seemed  to  feel  a certain  uneasiness  in  presence 
of  these  first  signs  of  an  eruption. 

Meanwhile  Cyrus  Harding  ascended  the  crest  of  the  eastern 
spur,  passed  Red  Creek,  and  arrived  at  the  spot  where  he  and 
his  companions  had  discovered  a sulphureous  spring  at  the 
time  of  their  first  exploration. 

How  changed  was  every  thing ! Instead  of  a single  column 
of  smoke  he  counted  thirteen  forced  through  the  soil  as  if 
violently  propelled  by  some  piston.  It  was  evident  that  the 
crust  of  the  earth  was  subjected  in  this  part  of  the  globe  to  a 
frightful  pressure.  The  atmosphere  was  saturated  with  gases 
and  carbonic  acid,  miiigled  with  aqueous  vapors.  Cyrus  Hard- 
ing felt  the  volcanic  tufa  with  which  the  plain  was  strewn,  and 
which  were  but  pulverized  cinders  hardened  into  solid  blocks 
by  time,  tremble  beneath  him,  but  he  could  discover  no  traces 
of  fresh  lava. 

The  engineer  became  more  assured  of  this  when  he  observed 
all  the  northern  part  of  Mount  Franklin.  Pillars  of  smoke 
and  flame  escaped  from  the  crater  ; a hail  of  scorise  fell  on  the 


m 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


ground  ; but  no  current  of  lava  burst  from  the  mouth  of  the 
volcano,  which  proved  that  the  volcanic  matter  had  not  yet 
attained  the  level  of  the  superior  orifice  of  the  central  shaft. 

“But  I would  prefer  that  it  were  so,”  said  Cyrus  Harding  to 
himself.  “ At  any  rate,  I should  then  know  that  the  lava  had 
followed  its  accustomed  track.  Who  can  say  that  they  may 
not  take  a new  course  ? But  the  danger  does  not  consist  in 
that ! Captain  Nemo  foresaw  it  clearly ! No,  the  danger  does 
not  lie  there ! ” 

Cyrus  Harding  advanced  towards  the  enormous  causeway 
whose  prolongation  enclosed  the  narrow  Shark  Gulf.  He  could 
not  sufficiently  examine  on  this  side  the  ancient  channels  of 
the  lava.  There  was  no  doubt  in  his  mind  that  the  most 
recent  eruption  had  occurred  at  a far-distant  epoch. 

He  then  returned  by  the  same  way,  listening  attentively  to 
the  subterranean  mutterings  which  rolled  like  long-continued 
thunder,  interrupted  by  deafening  explosions.  At  nine  in  the 
morning  he  reached  the  corral. 

Ayrton  awaited  him. 

“ The  animals  are  cared  for,  Captain  Harding,”  said  Ayrton. 

“Good,  Ayrton.” 

“ They  seem  uneasy,  Captain  Harding.” 

“Yes,  instinct  speaks  through  them,  and  instinct  is  never 
deceived.” 

“Are  you  ready?” 

“Take  a lamp,  Ayrton,”  answered  the  engineer;  “we  will 
start  at  once.” 

Ayrton  did  as  desired.  The  onagas,  unharnessed,  roamed  in 
the  corral.  The  gate  was  secured  on  the  outside,  and  Cyrus 
Harding,  preceding  Ayrton,  took  the  narrow  path  which  led 
westward  to  the  shore. 

The  soil  they  walked  upon  was  choked  with  the  pulverized 
matter  fallen  from  the  cloud.  No  quadruped  appeared  in 
the  woods.  Even  the  birds  had  fled.  Sometimes  a passing 
breeze  raised  the  covering  of  ashes,  and  the  two  colonists,  en- 
veloped in  a whirlwind  of  dust,  lost  sight  of  each  other.  They 
were  then  careful  to  cover  their  eyes  and  mouths  with  hand- 
kerchiefs, for  thfty  ran  the  risk  of  being  blinded  and  suffocated. 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


It  was  impossible  for  Cyrus  Harding  and  Ayrton,  with  these 
impediments,  to  make  rapid  progress.  Moreover,  the  atmo- 
sphere was  close,  as  if  the  oxygen  had  been  partly  burnt  up, 
and  had  become  unfit  for  respiration.  At  every  hundred 
paces  they  were  obliged  to  stop  to  take  breath.  It  was  there- 
fore past  ten  o’clock  when  the  engineer  and  his  companion 
reached  the  crest  of  the  enormous  mass  of  rocks  of  basalt  and 
porphyry  which  composed  the  northwest  coast  of  the  island. 

Ayrton  and  Cyrus  Harding  commenced  the  descent  of  this 
abrupt  declivity,  following  almost  step  for  step  the  difficult 
path  which,  during  that  stormy  night,  had  led  them  to  Dakkar 
Grotto.  In  open  day  the  descent  was  less  perilous,  and,  be- 
sides, the  bed  of  ashes  which  covered  the  polished  surface  of 
the  rock  enabled  them  to  make  their  footing  more  secure. 

The  ridge  at  the  end  of  the  shore,  about  forty  feet  in  height, 
was  soon  reached.  Cyrus  Harding  recollected  that  this  eleva- 
tion gradually  sloped  towards  the  level  of  the  sea.  Although 
the  tide  was  at  present  low,  no  beach  could  be  seen,  and  the 
waves,  thickened  by  the  volcanic  dust,  beat  upon  the  basaltic 
rocks..  Cyrus  Harding  and  Ayrton  found  without  difficulty  tho 
entrance  to  Dakkar  Grotto,  and  paused  for  a moment  at  the 
last  rock  before  it. 

“ The  iron  boat  should  be  there,”  said  the  engineer. 

“It  is  here,  Captain  Harding,”  replied  Ayrton,  drawing 
towards  him  the  fragile  craft,  which  was  protected  by  the  arch 
of  the  vault. 

“ On  board,  Ayrton  ! ” 

The  two  colonists  stepped  into  the  boat.  A slight  undula- 
tion of  the  waves  carried  it  farther  under  the  low  arch  of -the 
crypt,  and  there  Ayrton,  with  the  aid  of  flint  and  steel,  lighted 
the  lamp.  He  then  took  the  oars,  and  the  lamp  having  been 
placed  in  the  bow  of  the  boat,  so  that  its  rays  fell  before 
them,  Cyrus  Harding  took  the  helm  and  steered  through  the 
shades  of  the  grotto. 

The  “Nautilus”  was  there  no  longer  to  illuminate  the 
cavern  with  its  electric  light.  Possibly  it  might  not  yet  be 
extinguished,  but  no  ray  escaped  from  the  depths  of  the  abyss 
in  which  reposed  ail  that  was  mortal  of  Captain  Nemo. 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


The  light  afforded  by  the  lamp,  although  feeble,  neverthe- 
less enabled  the  engineer  to  advance  slowly,  following  the  wall 
of  the  cavern.  A deathlike  silence  reigned  under  the  vaulted 
roof,  or  at  least  in  the  anterior  portion,  for  soon  Cyrus  Harding 
distinctly  heard  the  rumbling  which  proceeded  from  the  bowels 
of  the  mountain. 

“ That  comes  from  the  volcano,”  he  said. 

Besides  these  sounds,  the  presence  of  chemical  combinations 
was  soon  betrayed  by  their  powerful  odor,  and  the  engineer 
and  his  companion  were  almost  suffocated  by  sulphurous 
vapors. 

“ This  is  what  Captain  Nemo  feared,”  murmured  Cyrus  Hard- 
ing, changing  countenance.  “We  must  go  to  the  end,  not- 
withstanding.” 

“ Forward  ! ” replied  Ayrton,  bending  to  his  oars  and  direct- 
ing the  boat  towards  the  head  of  the  cavern. 

Twenty-five  minutes  after  entering  the  mouth  of  the  grotto 
the  boat  reached  the  extreme  end. 

Cyrus  Harding  then,  standing  up,  cast  the  light  of  the  lamp 
upon  the  walls  of  the  cavern  which  separated  it  from  the 
central  shaft  of  the  volcano.  What  was  the  thickness  of  this 
wall  ? It  might  be  ten  feet  or  a hundred  feet— it  was  impos- 
sible to  say.  But  the  subterranean  sounds  were  too  perceptible 
to  allow  of  the  supposition  that  it  was  of  any  great  thickness. 

The  engineer,  after  having  explored  the  wall  at  a certain 
height  horizontally,  fastened  the  lamp  to  the  end  of  an  oar,  and 
again  surveyed  the  basaltic  wall  at  a greater  elevation. 

There,  through  scarcely  visible  clefts  and  joinings,  escaped  a 
pungent  vapor,  which  infected  the  atmosphere  of  the  cavern. 
The  wall  was  broken  by  large  cracks,  some  of  which  extended 
to  within  two  or  three  feet  of  the  water’s  edge. 

Cyrus  Harding  thought  for  a brief  space.  Then  he  said  in  a 
low  voice,— 

“>Zes ! the  captain  was  right ! The  danger  lies  there,  and  a 
terrible  danger ! ” 

Ayrton  said  not  a word,  but,  upon  a sign  from  Cyrus  Hard- 
ing, resumed  the  oars,  and  half  an  hour  later  the  engineer  and 
h®  reached  the  entrance  of  Dakkar  Grotto. 


CHAPTER  XIX, 


CTMfS  HARDING  GIVES  AN  ACCOUNT  OF  HIS  EXPLORATION— THB 
CONSTRUCTION  OF  THE  SHIP  PUSHED  FORWARD  — A LAST 
VISIT  TO  THE  CORRAL  — THE  BATTLE  BETWEEN  FIRE  AND 
WATER  — ALL  THAT  REMAINED  OF  THE  ISLAND  — IT  IS  DE- 
CIDED TO  LAUNCH  THE  VESSEL — THE  NIGHT  OF  THE  8TH  OF 
MARCH. 

The  next  day,  the  8th  of  January,  after  a day  and  night 
passed  at  the  corral,  where  they  left  all  in  order,  Cyrus  Harding 
and  Ayrton  arrived  at  Granite  House. 

The  engineer  immediately  called  his  companions  together,  and 
informed  them  of  the  imminent  danger  which  threatened  Lin- 
coln Island,  and  from  which  no  human  power  could  deliver 
them. 

“ My  friends,”  he  said,  and  his  voice  betrayed  the  depth  of 
his  emotion,  “ our  island  is  not  among  those  which  will  endure 
while  this  earth  endures.  It  is  doomed  to  more  or  less  speedy 
destruction,  the  cause  of  which  it  bears  within  itself,  and  from 
which  nothing  can  save  it.” 

The  colonists  looked  at  each  other,  then  at  the  engineer. 
They  did  not  clearly  comprehend  him. 

“ Explain  yourself,  Cyrus ! ” said  Gideon  Spilett. 

“ I will  do  so,”  replied  Cyrus  Harding,”  or  rather  I will  simply 
afford  you  the  explanation  which,  during  our  few  minutes  of 
private  conversation,  was  given  me  by  Captain  Nemo.” 

“ Captain  Nemo ! ” exclaimed  the  colonists. 

“Yes,  and  it  was  the  last  service  he  desired  to  render  us 
before  his  death ! ” 

“ The  last  service !”  exclaimed  Pencroft,  “ the  last  service  ! 
You  will  see  that  though  he  is  dead  he  will  render  us  others 
yet  I ” 


687 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


“ ]5ut  what  did  the  captain  say  ?”  inquired  the  reporter. 

“ I will  tell  you,  my  friends,”  said  the  engineer.  “ Lincoln 
Island  does  not  resemble  the  other  islands  of  the  Pacific,  and  a 
fact  of  which  Captain  Nemo  has  made  me  cognizant  must 
sooner  or  later  bring  about  the  subversion  of  its  foundation.” 
Nonsense ! Lincoln  Island,  it  can’t  be  ! ” cried  Pencroft, 
who,  in  spite  of  the  respect  he  felt  for  Cyrus  Harding,  could 
not  prevent  a gesture  of  incredulity. 

“ Listen,  Pencroft,”  resumed  the  engineer,  “ I will  tell  you 
what  Captain  Nemo  communicated  to  me,  and  which  I myself 
confirmed  yesterday,  during  the  exploration  of  Dakkar  Grotto. 
This  cavern  stretches  under  the  island  as  far  as  the  volcano,  and 
is  only  separated  from  its  central  shaft  by  the  wall  which 
terminates  it.  Now,  this  wall  is  seamed  with  fissures  and  clefts 
which  already  allow  the  sulphureous  gases  generated  in  the 
interior  of  the  volcano  to  escape. 

44  Well  ?”  said  Pencroft,  his  brow  suddenly  contracting. 

“Well,  then,  I saw  that  these  fissures  widen  under  the 
Internal  pressure  from  within,  that  the  wall  of  basalt  is  gradu- 
ally giving  way,  and  that  after  a longer  or  shorter  period  it 
will  afford  a passage  to  the  waters  of  the  lake  which  fill  the 
cavern.” 

“ Good ! ” replied  Pencroft,  with  an  attempt  at  pleasantry. 
“The  sea  will  extinguish  the  volcano,  and  there  will  be  an  end 
of  the  matter ! ” 

“Not  so!”  said  Cyrus  Harding,  “should  a day  arrive  when 
the  sea,  rushing  through  the  wall  of  the  cavern,  penetrates  by 
the  central  shaft  into  the  interior  of  the  island  to  the  boiling 
lava,  Lincoln  Island  will  that  day  be  blown  into  the  air— just  as 
would  happen  to  the  island  of  Sicily  were  the  Mediterranean 
to  precipitate  itself  into  Mount  Etna.” 

The  colonists  made  no  answer  to  these  significant  words  of 
the  engineer.  They  now  understood  the  danger  by  which  they 
were  menaced. 

It  may  be  added  that  Cyrus  Harding  had  in  no  way  exagger- 
ated the  danger  to  be  apprehended.  Many  persons  have  formed 
an  idea  that  it  would  be  possible  to  extinguish  volcanoes,  which 
are  almost  always  situated  on  the  shores  of  a sea  or  lake,  by 


THE  SECRET  OE  THE  ISLAND.  680 

opening  a passage  for  the  admission  of  the  water.  But  they 
are  not  ware  that  this  would  be  to  incur  the  risk  of  blowing 
ap  a portion  of  the  globe,  like  a boiler  whose  steam  is  suddenly 
expanded  by  intense  heat.  The  water,  rushing  into  a cavity 
whose  temperature  might  be  estimated  at  thousands  of  degrees, 
would  be  converted  into  steam  with  a sudden  energy  which 
no  enclosure  cou?d  resist. 

It  was  n«t  therefore  doubtful  that  the  island,  menaced  by  a 
frightful  and  approaching  convulsion,  would  endure  only  so 
long  as  the  wall  of  Dakkar  Grotto  itself  should  endure.  It  was 
not  even  a question  of  mouths,  nor  of  weeks;  but  of  days,  it 
might  be  of  hours. 

The  first  sentiment  which  the  colonists  felt  was  that  of  pro- 
found sorrow.  They  thought  not  so  much  of  the  peril  which 
menaced  themselves  personally  but  of  the  destruction  of  the 
island  which  had  sheltered  them  which  they  had  cultivated, 
which  they  loved  so  well,  and  had  hoped  to  render  so  flourish- 
ing. So  much  effort  ineffectually  expended,  so  much  labor ^ 
lost. 

Pencroft  could  not  prevent  a large  tear  from  rolling  down 
his  cheek,  nor  did  he  attempt  to  conceal  it. 

Some  further  conversation  now  took  place.  The  chances  yet 
in  favor  of  the  colonists  were  discussed;  hut  finally  it  was 
agreed  that  there  was  not  an  hour  to  be  lost,  that  the  building 
and  fitting  of  the  vessel  should  be  pushed  forward  with  theii 
utmost  energy,  and  that  this  was  the  sole  chance  of  safety  foi 
the  inhabitants  of  Lincoln  Island. 

All  hands,  therefore,  set  to  work  on  the  vessel.  What  could 
it  now  avail  to  sow,  to  reap,  to  hunt,  to  increase  the  stores  01 
Granite  House  ? The  contents  of  the  storehouse  and  outbuild- 
ings contained  more  than  sufficient  to  provide  the  ship  for  a 
voyage,  however  long  might  be  its  duration.  But  it  was  imper- 
ative that  the  ship  should  be  ready  to  receive  them  before  the 
inevitable  catastrophe  should  arrive. 

Their  labors  were  now  carried  on  with  feverish  ardor.  By 
the  28d  of  January  the  vessel  was  half -decked  over.  Up  to  this 
time  no  change  had  taken  place  in  the  summit  of  the  volcano. 
Vapor  and  smoke  mingled  with  flames  and  incandescent 


640 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


stones  wfere  thrown  up  from  the  crater.  But  during  the  night 
of  the  23d,  in  consequence  of  the  lava  attaining  the  level  of 
the  first  stratum  of  the  volcano,  the  hat-sliaped  cone  which 
formed  over  the  latter  disappeared.  A frightful  sound  was 
heard.  The  colonists  at  first  thought  the  island  was  rent 
asunder,  ind  rushed  out  of  Granite  House. 

This  occurred  about  two  o’clock  in  the  morning. 

The  sky  appeared  on  fire.  The  superior  cone,  a mass  of  rock 
a thousand  feet  in  height,  and  weighing  thousands  of  millions 
of  pounds,  had  been  thrown  down  upon  the  island,  making  it 
tremble  to  its  foundation.  Fortunately,  this  cone  inclined  to 
the  north,  and  had  fallen  upon  the  plain  of  sand  and  tufa 
stretching  between  the  volcano  and  the  sea.  The  aperture  of 
the  crater  being  thus  enlarged  projected  towards  the  sky  a 
glare  so  intense  that  by  the  simple  effect  of  reflection  the  at- 
mosphere appeared  red-hot.  At  the  same  time  a torrent  of 
iava,  bursting  from  the  new  summit,  poured  out  in  long 
cascades,  like  water  escaping  from  a vase  too  full,  and  a 
thousand  tongues  of  fire  crept  over  the  sides  of  the  volcano. 

“ The  corral ! the  corral ! ” exclaimed  Ayrton. 

It  was,  in  fact,  towards  the  corral  that  the  lava  was  rushing, 
as  the  new  crater  faced  the  east,  and  consequently  the  fertile 
portions  of  the  island,  the  springs  of  Red  Creek  and  Jacamar 
Wood,  were  menaced  with  instant  destruction. 

At  Ayrton’s  cry  the  colonists  rushed  to  the  onagas’  stables. 
The  cart  was  at  once  harnessed.  All  were  possessed  by  the 
same  thought— to  hasten  to  the  corral  and  set  at  liberty  the 
animals  it  enclosed. 

Before  three  in  the  morning  they  arrived  at  the  corral.  The 
cries  of  the  terrified  musmons  and  goats  indicated  the  alarm 
which  possessed  them.  Already  a torrent  of  burning  matter 
and  liquefied  minerals  fell  from  the  side  of  the  mountain  upon 
the  meadows  as  far  as  the  side  of  the  palisade.  The  gate 
was  burst  open  by  Ayrton,  and  the  animals,  bewildered  with 
terror,  fled  in  all  directions. 

An  hour  afterwards  the  boiling  lava  filled  the  corral,  con- 
verting into  vapor  the  waters  of  the  little  rivulet  which  ran 
through  it,  burning  up  the  house  like  dry  grass,  and  leaving 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


641 


tfot  even  a post  of  the  palisade  to  mark  the  spot  where  the 
corral  once  stood. 

To  contend  against  this  disaster  would  have  been  folly- 
nay,  madness.  In  presence  of  Nature’s  grand  convulsions  man 
is  powerless. 

It  was  now  daylight  — the  24th  of  January.  Cyrus  Harding 
and  his  companions,  before  returning  to  Granite  House,  desired 
to  ascertain  the  probable  direction  this  inundation  of  lava  was 
about  to  take.  The  soil  sloped  gradually  from  Mount  Franklin 
to  the  east  coast,  and  it  was  to  be  feared  that,  in  spite  of  the 
thick  Jacamar  Wood,  the  torrent  would  reach  the  plateau  of 
Prospect  Heights. 

“ The  lake  will  cover  us,”  said  Gideon  Spilett. 

“ I hope  so ! ” was  Cyrus  Harding’s  only  reply. 

The  colonists  were  desirous  of  reaching  the  plain  upon 
which  the  superior  cone  of  Mount  Franklin  had  fallen,  but 
the  lava  arrested  their  progress.  It  had  followed,  on  one  side, 
the  valley  of  Red  Creek,  and  on  the  other  that  of  Falls  River, 
evaporating  those  watercourses  in  its  passage.  There  was  no 
possibility  of  crossing  the  torrent  of  lava  ; on  the  contrary,  the 
colonists  were  obliged  to  retreat  before  it.  The  volcano,  with- 
out its  crown,  was  no  longer  recognizable,  terminated  as  it 
was  by  a sort  of  flat  table  which  replaced  the  ancient  crater. 
From  two  openings  in  its  southern  and  eastern  sides  an  un- 
ceasing flow  of  lava  poured  forth,  thus  forming  two  distinct 
streams.  Above  the  new  crater  a cloud  of  smoke  and  ashes, 
mingled  with  those  of  the  atmosphere,  massed  over  the  island. 
Loud  peals  of  thunder  broke,  and  could  scarcely  be  dis- 
tinguished from  the  rumblings  of  the  mountain,  whose  mouth 
vomited  forth  ignited  rocks,  which,  hurled  to  more  than  a 
thousand  feet,  burst  in  the  air  like  shells.  Flashes  of  lightning 
rivalled  in  intensity  the  volcano’s  eruption. 

Towards  seven  in  the  morning  the  position  was  no  longer 
tenable  by  the  colonists,  who  accordingly  took  shelter  in  the 
borders  of  Jacamar  Wood.  Not  only  did  the  projectiles  begin 
to  rain  around  them,  but  the  lava,  overflowing  the  bed  of  Red 
Creek,  threatened  to  cut  off  the  road  to  the  corral.  The  near- 
est rows  of  trees  caught  fire,  and  their  sap,  suddenly  trans* 
U 


642 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


formed  into  vapor,  caused  them  to  explode  with  loud  reports, 
whilst  others,  less  moist,  remained  unhurt  in  the  midst  of  tha 
inundation. 

The  colonists  had  again  taken  the  road  to  the  corral.  They 
proceeded  hut  slowly,  frequently  looking  back ; but,  in  con- 
sequence of  the  inclination  of  the  soil,  the  lava  gained  rapidly 
in  the  east,  and  as  its  lower  waves  became  solidified  others  at 
boiling  heat  covered  them  immediately. 

Meanwhile,  the  principal  stream  of  Red  Creek  valley  became 
more  and  more  menacing.  All  this  portion  of  the  forest  was 
on  fire,  and  enormous  wreaths  of  smoke  rolled  over  the  trees, 
whose  trunks  were  already  consumed  by  the  lava. 

The  colonists  halted  near  the  lake,  about  half  a mile  from  the 
mouth  of  Red  Creek.  A question  of  life  or  death  was  now  to 
be  decided.  Cyrus  Harding , accustomed  to  the  consideration, 
of  important  crises,  and  aware  that  he  was  addressing  men 
capable  of  hearing  the  truth,  whatever  it  might  be,  then  said, — 

“Either  the  lake  will  arrest  the  progress  of  the  lava,  and  a 
part  of  the  island  will  be  preserved  from  utter  destruction, 
or  the  stream  will  overrun  the  forests  of  the  Far  West,  and  not 
a tree  or  plant  will  remain  on  the  surface  of  the  soil.  We  shall 
have  no  prospect  but  that  of  starvation  upon  these  barren 
rocks— a death  which  will  probably  be  anticipated  by  the 
explosion  of  the  island.” 

“ In  that  case,”  replied  Pencrof t,  folding  his  arms  and  stamp* 
ing  his  foot,  “ what’s  the  use  of  working  any  longer  on  the 
vessel  ? ” 

* Pencroft,”  answered  Cyrus  Harding,  “ we  must  do  our  duty 
to  the  last!” 

At  this  instant  the  river  of  lava,  after  having  broken  a pass- 
age through  the  noble  trees  it  devoured  in  its  course,  reached 
the  borders  of  the  lake.  At  this  point  there  was  an  elevation  of 
the  soil  which,  had  it  been  greater,  might  have  sufficed  to  arrest 
the  torrent. 

“ To  work!  ” cried  Cyrus  Harding. 

The  engineer’s  thought  was  at  once  understood.  It  might  be 
possible  to  dam,  as  it  were,  the  torrent,  and  thus  compel  it  to 
pour  itself  into  the  lake. 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


643 


The  colonists  hastened  to  the  dockyard.  Thej  returned 
with  shovels,  picks,  axes,  and  by  means  of  banking  the  earth 
with  the  aid  of  fallen  trees  they  succeeded  in  a few  hours  in 
raising  an  embankment  three  feet  high  and  some  hundreds  of 
paces  in  length.  It  seemed  to  them,  when  they  had  finished, 
as  if  they  had  scarcely  been  working  more  than  a few  minutes. 

It  was  not  a moment  too  soon.  The  liquefied  substances 
soon  after  reached  the  bottom  of  the  barrier.  The  stream  of 
lava  swelled  like  a river  about  to  overflow  its  banks,  and  threat- 
ened to  demolish  the  sole  obstacle  which  could  prevent  it 
from  overrunning  the  whole  Far  West.  But  the  dam  held 
firm,  and  after  a moment  of  terrible  suspense  the  torrent 
precipitated  itself  into  Grant  Lake  from  a height  of  twenty 
feet. 

The  colonists,  without  moving  or  uttering  a word;  breath 
lessly  regarded  this  strife  of  the  two  elements. 

What  a spectacle  was  this  conflict  between  water  and  fire  I 
What  pen  could  describe  the  marvellous  horror  of  this  scene— 
what  pencil  could  depict  it  ? The  water  hissed  as  it  evaporated 
by  contact  with  the  boiling  lava.  The  vapor  whirled  in  the  air 
to  an  immeasurable  height,  as  if  the  valves  of  an  immense 
boiler  had  been  suddenly  opened.  But,  however  considerable 
might  be  the  volume  of  water  contained  in  the  lake,  it  must 
eventually  be  absorbed,  because  it  was  not  replenished  whilst 
the  stream  of  lava,  fed  from  an  inexhaustible  source,  rolled  on 
without  ceasing  new  waves  of  incandescent  matter. 

The  first  waves  of  lava  which  fell  into  the  lake  immediately 
solidified  and  accumulated  so  as  speedily  to  emerge  from  it. 
Upon  their  surface  fell  other  waves,  which  in  their  turn 
became  stone,  but  a step  nearer  the  center  of  the  lake.  In  this 
manner  was  formed  a pier  which  threatened  to  gradually  fill 
up  the  lake,  which  could  not  overflow,  the  water  displaced  by 
the  lava  being  evaporated.  The  hissing  of  the  water  rent  the 
air  with  a deafening  sound,  and  the  vapor,  blown  by  the  wind, 
fell  in  rain  upon  the  sea.  The  pier  became  longer  and  longer, 
and  the  blocks  of  lava  piled  themselves  one  on  another.  Where 
formerly  stretched  the  calm  waters  of  the  lake  now  appeared 
an  enormous  mass  of  smoking  rocks,  as  if  an  upheaving  of  the 


844 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


soil  had  formed  immense  shoals.  Imagine  the  waters  of  the 
lake  aroused  by  a hurricane,  then  suddenly  solidified  by  am 
intense  frost,  and  some  conception  may  be  formed  of  the 
aspect  of  the  lake  three  hours  after  the  eruption  of  this  irresist- 
ible torrent  of  lava. 

This  time  water  would  be  vanquished  by  fire. 

Nevertheless  it  was  a fortunate  circumstance  for  the  colonists 
that  the  effusion  of  lava  should  have  been  in  the  direction  of 
Lake  Grant.  They  had  before  them  some  days5  respite.  The 
plateau  of  Prospect  Heights,  Granite  House,  and  the  dock-yard 
were  for  the  moment  preserved.  And  these  few  days  it  was 
necessary  to  employ  them  in  planking,  carefully  caulking  the 
vessel,  and  launching  her.  The  colonists  would  then  take 
refuge  on  board  the  vessel,  content  to  rig  her  after  she 
should  be  afloat  on  the  waters.  With  the  danger  of  an  explo- 
sion which  threatened  to  destroy  the  island  there  could  be  no 
security  on  shore.  The  walls  of  Granite  House,  once  so  sure 
a retreat,  might  at  any  moment  fall  in  upon  them. 

During  the  six  following  days,  from  the  25th  to  the  30th  of 
January,  the  colonists  accomplished  as  much  of  the  construc- 
tion of  their  vessel  as  twenty  men  could  have  done.  They 
hardly  allowed  themselves  a moment’s  repose,  and  the  glare 
of  the  flames  which  shot  from  the  crater  enabled  them  to  work 
night  and  day.  The  flow  of  lava  continued,  but  perhaps  less 
abundantly.  This  was  fortunate,  for  Lake  Grant  was  almost 
entirely  choked  up,  and  if  more  lava  should  accumulate  it 
would  inevitably  spread  over  the  plateau  of  Prospect  Heights, 
and  thence  upon  the  beach. 

But  if  the  island  was  thus  partially  protected  on  this  side,  it 
was  not  so  with  the  western  part. 

In  fact,  the  second  stream  of  lava,  which  had  followed  the 
valley  of  Falls  River,  a valley  of  great  extent,  the  land  on  both 
sides  of  the  creek  being  flat,  met  with  no  obstacle.  The  burn- 
ing liquid  had  then  spread  through  the  forest  of  the  Far  West. 
At  this  period  of  the  year,  when  the  trees  were  dried  up  by  a 
tropical  heat,  the  forest  caught  fire  instantaneously,  in  such  a 
manner  that  the  conflagration  extended  itself  both  by  the 
trunks  of  the  trees  and  by  their  higher  branches,  whose  inter* 


THE  SECKET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


645 


"acement  favored  its  progress.  It  even  appeared  that  the  cur- 
rent of  flame  spread  more  rapidly  among  the  summits  of  the 
trees  than  the  current  of  lava  at  their  bases. 

Thus  it  happened  that  the  wild  animals,  jaguars,  wild  boars, 
capybaras,  koulas,  and  game  of  every  kind,  mad  with  terror, 
had  fled  to  the  banks  of  the  Mercy  and  to  the  Tadorn  Marsh, 
beyond  the  road  to  Port  Balloon.  But  the  colonists  were  too 
much  occupied  with  their  task  to  pay  any  attention  to  even 
the  most  formidable  of  these  animals.  They  had  abandoned 
Granite  House,  and  would  not  even  take  shelter  at  the 
Chimneys,  but  encamped  under  a tent,  near  the  mouth  of  the 
Mercy. 

Each  day  Cyrus  Harding  and  Gideon  Spilett  ascended  the 
plateau  of  Prospect  Heights.  Sometimes  Herbert  accompanied 
them,  but  never  Pencroft,  who  could  not  bear  to  look 
upon  the  prospect  of  the  island  now  so  utterly  devastated. 

It  was,  in  truth,  a heart-rending  spectacle.  All  the  wooded 
part  of  the  island  was  now  completely  bare.  One  single  clump 
of  green  trees  raised  their  heads  at  the  extremity  of  Serpentine 
Peninsula.  Here  and  there  were  a few  grotesque  blackened 
and  branchless  stumps.  The  site  of  the  devastated  forest  was 
even  more  barren  than  Tadorn  Marsh.  The  irruption  of  the 
lava  had  been  complete.  Where  formerly  sprang  up  that 
charming  verdure,  the  soil  was  now  nothing  but  a savage 
mass  of  volcanic  tufa.  In  the  valleys  of  the  Falls  and  Mercy 
rivers  no  drop  of  water  now  flowed  towards  the  sea,  and  should 
Lake  Grant  be  entirely  dried  up,  the  colonists  would  have  no 
means  of  quenching  their  thirst.  But,  fortunately/  the  lava 
had  spared  the  southern  corner  of  the  lake,  containing  all  that 
remained  of  the  drinkable  water  of  the  island.  Towards 
the  northwest  stood  out  the  rugged  and  well-defined  outlines 
of  the  sides  of  the  volcano,  like  a gigantic  claw  hovering  over 
the  island.  What  a sad  and  fearful  sight,  and  how  painful 
to  the  colonists,  who,  from  a fertile  domain  covered  with 
forests,  irrigated  by  watercourses,  and  enriched  by  the  produce 
of  their  toils,  found  themselves,  as  it  were,  transported  to  a 
desolate  rock,  upon  which,  but  for  their  reserves  of  provisions, 
they  could  not  even  gather  the  means  of  subsistence  I 


m 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


“It  is  enough  to  break  one’s  heart ! ” said  Gideon  Spilett,  ons 
day. 

“ Yes,  Spilett,”  answered  the  engineer.  “ May  God  grant  us 
the  time  to  complete  this  vessel,  now  our  sole  refuge ! ” 

“ Do  not  you  think,  Cyrus,  that  the  violence  of  the  eruption 
has  somewhat  lessened?  The  volcano  still  vomits  forth  lava, 
but  somewhat  less  abundantly,  if  I mistake  not.” 

“It  matters  little,”  answered  Cyrus  Harding  “The  fire  is 
still  burning  in  the  interior  of  the  mountain,  and  the  sea  may 
break  in  at  any  moment.  We  are  in  the  condition  of  pas- 
sengers whose  ship  is  devoured  by  a conflagration  which  they 
can  not  extinguish,  and  who  know  that  sooner  or  later  the 
flames  must  reach  the  powder-magazine.  To  work,  Spilett,  to 
work,  and  let  us  not  lose  an  hour  ! ” 

During  eight  days  more,  that  is  to  say  until  the  7th  of 
February,  the  lava  continued  to  flow,  but  the  eruption  was 
confined  within  the  previous  limits.  Cyrus  Harding  feared 
above  all  lest  the  liquefied  matter  should  overflow  the  shore, 
for  in  that  event  the  dockyard  could  not  escape.  Moreover, 
about  this  time  the  colonists  felt  in  the  frame  of  the  island 
vibrations  which  alarmed  them  to  the  highest  degree. 

It  was  the  20th  of  February.  Yet  another  month  must  elapse 
before  the  vessel  would  be  ready  for  sea.  Would  the  island 
hold  together  till  then  ? The  intention  of  Pencroft  and  Cyrus 
Harding  was  to  launch  the  vessel  as  soon  as  the  hull  should  be 
complete.  The  deck,  the  upper-works,  the  interior  woodwork 
and  the  rigging,  might  be  finished  afterwards,  but  the  essential 
point  was  that  the  colonists  should  have  an  assured  refuge 
away  from  the  island.  Perhaps  it  might  be  even  better  to 
conduct  the  vessel  to  Port  Balloon,  that  is  to.  say,  as  far  as  pos- 
sible from  the  center  of  eruption,  for  at  the  mouth  of  the 
Mercy,  between  the  islet  and  the  wall  of  granite,  it  would  run 
the  risk  of  being  crushed  in  the  event  of  any  convulsion.  All 
the  exertions  of  the  voyagers  were  therefore  concentrated  upon 
the  completion  of  the  hull. 

Thus  the  3rd  of  March  arrived,  and  they  might  calculate 
upon  launching  the  vessel  in  ten  days. 

Hope  revived  in  the  hearts  of  the  calanists,  who  had,  in  this 


THE  SECHiST  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


647 


fourth  year  of  their  sojourn  on  Lincoln  Island,  suffered  so 
many  trials.  Even  Pencroft  lost  in  some  measure  the  sombre 
taciturnity  occasioned  by  the  devastation  and  ruin  of  his  do- 
main. His  hopes,  it  is  true,  were  concentrated  upon  his  vessel, 
“We  shall  finish  it,” he  said  to  the  engineer,  “we  shall  finish 
it,  captain,  and  it  is  time,  for  the  season  is  advancing  and  the 
equinox  will  soon  be  here.  Well,  if  necessary,  we  must  put  in 
to  Tabor  Island  to  spend  the  winter.  But  think  of  Tabor 
Island  after  Lincoln  Island.  Ah,  how  unfortunate  I Who 
could  have  believed  it  possible  ? ” 

“ Let  us  get  on,”  was  the  engineer’s  invariable  reply. 

And  they  worked  away  without  losing  a moment. 

“ Master,”  asked  Neb,  a few  days  later,  “ do  you  think  all  this 
could  have  happened  if  Captain  Nemo  had  been  still  alive?  ” 

“ Certainly,  Neb,”  answered  Cyrus  Harding. 

“ I,  for  one,  don’t  believe  it !”  whispered  Pencroft  to  Neb, 
“ Nor  I !”  answered  Neb  seriously. 

During  the  first  week  of  March  appearances  again  became 
menacing.  Thousands  of  threads  like  glass,  formed  of  fluid 
lava,  fell  like  rain  upon  the  island.  The  crater  was  again 
boiling  with  lava  which  overflowed  the  back  of  the  volcano. 
The  torrent  flowed  along  the  surface  of  the  hardened  tufa,  and 
destroyed  the  few  meager  skeletons  of  trees  which  had  with- 
stood the  first  eruption.  The  stream  flowing  this  time  towards 
the  southwest  shore  of  Lake  Grant,  stretched  beyond  Creek 
Glycerine,  and  invaded  the  plateau  of  Prospect  Heights.  This 
last  blow  to  the  work  of  the  colonists  was  terrible.  The  mill, 
the  buildings  of  the  inner  court,  the  stables,  were  all  destroyed. 
The  affrighted  poultry  fled  in  all  directions.  Top  and  Jup 
showed  signs  of  the  greatest  alarm,  as  if  their  instinct  warned 
them  of  an  impending  catastrophe.  A large  number  of  the 
animals  of  the  island  had  perished  in  the  first  eruption. 
Those  which  survived  found  no  refuge  but  Tadorn  Marsh,  save 
a few  to  which  the  plateau  of  Prospect  Heights  afforded  an 
asylum.  But  even  this  last  retreat  was  now  closed  to  them, 
and  the  lava-torrent,  flowing  over  the  edge  of  the  granite  wall, 
began  to  pour  down  upon  the  beach  its  cataracts  or  fire.  The 
sublime  horror  of  this  spectacle  passed  all  description.  During 


648 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


the  night  it  could  only  be  compared  to  a Niagara  of  molten 
fluid,  with  its  incandescent  vapors  above  and  its  boiling  masses 
below. 

The  colonists  were  driven  to  their  last  entrenchment,  and 
although  the  upper  seams  of  the  vessel  were  not  yet  caulked, 
they  decided  to  launch  her  at  once. 

Pencroft  and  Ayrton  therefore  set  about  the  necessary  pre- 
parations for  the  launch,  which  was  to  take  place  the  morning 
of  the  next  day,  the  9th  of  March. 

But,  during  the  night  of  the  8th  an  enormous  column  of 
vapor  escaping  from  the  crater  rose  with  frightful  explosions 
to  a height  of  more  than  three  thousand  feet.  The  wall  of 
Dakkar  Grotto  had  evidently  given  way  under  the  pressure  of 
the  gases,  and  the  sea,  rushing  through  the  central  shaft  into 
the  igneous  gulf,  was  at  once  converted  into  vapor.  But  the 
crater  could  not  afford  a sufficient  outlet  for  this  vapor.  An 
explosion,  which  might  have  been  heard  at  a distance  of  a 
hundred  miles,  shook  the  air.  Fragments  of  mountains  fell 
into  the  Pacific,  and,  in  a few  minutes,  the  ocean  rolled  over 
the  spot  where  Lincoln  Island  once  stood. 


CHAPTER  XX. 


AN  ISOLATED  ROCK  IN  THE  PACIFIC  — THE  LAST  REFUGE  OF 
THE  COLONISTS  OF  LINCOLN  ISLAND— DEATH  THEIR  ONLY 
PROSPECT— UNEXPECTED  SUCCOR— WHY  AND  HOW  IT  ARRIVES 
—A  LAST  KINDNESS  — AN  ISLAND  ON  TERRA  FIRMA  — THE 
TOMB  OF  CAPTAIN  PRINCE  DAKKAR  NEMO. 

An  isolated  rock,  thirty  feet  in  length,  twenty  in  breadth, 
scarcely  ten  from  the  water’s  edge,  such  was  the  only  solid 
point  which  the  waves  of  the  Pacific  had  not  engulfed. 

It  was  all  that  remained  of  the  structure  of  Granite  House ! 
.The  wall  had  fallen  headlong  and  been  then  shattered  to 
fragments,  and  a few  of  the  rocks  of  the  large  room  were 
piled  one  above  another  to  form  this  point.  All  around  had 
disappeared  in  the  abyss  ; the  inferior  cone  of  Mount  Franklin, 
rent  asunder  by  the  explosion  ; the  lava  jaws  of  Shark  Gulf,  the 
plateau  of  Prospect  Heights,  Safety  Islet,  the  granite  rocks  of 
Port  Balloon,  the  basalts  of  Dakkar  Grotto,  the  long  Serpentine 
Peninsula,  so  distant  nevertheless  from  the  center  of  the  erup- 
tion. All  that  could  now  be  seen  of  Lincoln  Island  was  the 
narrow  rock  which  now  served  as  a refuge  to  the  six 
colonists  and  their  dog  Top. 

The  animals  had  also  perished  in  the  catastrophe ; the  birds, 
as  well  as  those  representing  the  fauna  of  the  island— all  either 
crushed  or  drowned,  and  the  unfortunate  Jup  himself  had, 
alas ! found  his  death  in  some  crevice  of  the  soil. 

If  Cyrus  Heading,  Gideon  Spilett,  Herbert,  Pencroft,  Neb,  and 
Ayrton  had  survived,  it  was  because,  assembled  under  their 
tent,  they  had  been  hurled  into  the  sea  at  the  instant  when 
the  fragments  of  the  island  rained  down  on  every  side. 

When  they  reached  the  surface  they  could  only  perceive,  at 
half  a cable’s  length,  this  mass  of  rocks,  towards  which  they 

651 


tf62 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


swam,  and  on  which  they  found  footing.  On  this  barren  rock 
they  had  now  existed  for  nine  days.  A few  provisions  taken 
from  the  magazine  of  Granite  House  before  the  catastrophe,  a • 
littie  fresh  water  from  the  rain  which  had  fallen  in  a hollow  of 
the  rock,  was  all  that  the  unfortunate  colonists  possessed. 
Their  last  hope,  the  vessel,  had  been  shattered  to  pieces.  They 
had  no  means  of  quitting  the  reef  ; no  fire,  nor  any  means  of 
obtaining  it.  It  seemed  that  they  must  inevitably  perish. 

This  day,  the  18th  of  March,  there  remained  only  provisions 
for  two  days,  although  they  limited  their  consumption  to  the 
bare  necessaries  of  life.  All  their  science  and  intelligence 
could  avail  them  nothing  in  their  present  position.  They  were 
in  the  hand  of  God. 

Cyrus  Harding  was  calm,  Gideon  Spilett  more  nervous,  and 
Pencroft,  a prey  to  sullen  anger,  walked  to  and  fro  on  the 
rock.  Herbert  did  not  for  a moment  quit  the  engineer’s  side, 
as  if  demanding  from  him  that  assistance  he  had  no  power  to 
give.  Neb  and  Ayrton  were  resigned  to  their  fate. 

“ Ah  ! what  a misfortune!  what  a misfortune ! ” often  repeat- 
ed Pencroft.  “If  we  had  but  a walnut-shell  to  take  us  to 
Tabor  Island  ! But  we  have  nothing,  nothing ! ” 

“ Captain  Nemo  did  right  to  die,”  said  Neb. 

During  the  five  ensuing  days  Cyrus  Harding  and  his  unfortu- 
nate companions  husbanded  their  provisions  with  the  most 
extreme  care,  eating  only  what  would  prevent  them  from 
succumbing  to  starvation.  Their  weakness  was  extreme. 
Herbert  and  Neb  began  to  show  symptoms  of  delirium. 

Under  these  circumstances  was  it  possible  for  them  to  retain 
even  the  shadow  of  a hope  ? No  ! What  was  their  sole  re- 
maining chance?  That  a vessel  should  appear  in  sight  off 
the  rock ! But  they  knew  only  too  well  from  experience  that 
no  ships  ever  visited  this  part  of  the  Pacific.  Could  they  cal- 
culate that,  by  a truly  providential  coincidence,  the  Scotch 
yacht  would  arrive  precisely  at  this  time  in  search  of  Ayrton  at 
Tabor  Island?  It  was  scarcely  probable;  and,  besides,  sup- 
posing she  should  come  there,  as  the  colonists  had  not  been 
able  to  deposit  a notice  pointing  out  Ayrton’s  change  of  abode, 
the  commander  of  the  yacht,  after  having  explored  Tabor 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


653 


Island  without  result,  would  again  set  sail  and  return  to  lower 
latitudes. 

No ! no  hope  of  being  saved  could  be  retained,  and  a horrible 
death,  death  from  hunger  and  thirst,  awaited  them  upon  this 
rock. 

Already  they  were  stretched  on  the  rock,  inanimate,  and  no 
longer  conscious  of  what  passed  around  them.  Ayrton  alone, 
by  a supreme  effort,  from  time  to  time  raised  his  head,  and 
cast  a despairing  glance  over  the  desert  ocean. 

But  on  the  morning  of  the  24th  of  March,  Ayrton’s  arms 
were  extended  towards  a point  in  the  horizon;  he  raised 
himself,  at  first  on  his  knees,  then  upright,  and  his  hand 
seemed  to  make  a signal. 

A sail  was  in  sight  off  the  rock.  She  was  evidently  not  with- 
out an  object.  The  reef  was  the  mark  for  which  she  was 
making  in  a direct  line,  under  all  steam,  and  the  unfortunate 
colonists  might  have  made  her  out  some  hours  before  if  they 
kad  had  the  strength  to  watch  the  horizon. 

“ The  ‘Duncan ’ ! ” murmured  Ayrton— and  fell  back  without 
sign  of  life.” 

******** 

When  Cyrus  Harding  and  his  companions  recovered  con- 
sciousness, thanks  to  the  attention  lavished  upon  them,  they 
found  themselves  in  the  cabin  of  a steamer,  without  being  able 
to  comprehend  how  they  had  escaped  death. 

A word  from  Ayrton  explained  every  thing. 

“ The  ‘ Duncan  ’ ! ” he  murmured. 

“ The  ‘ Duncan  ’ ! ” exclaimed  Cyrus  Harding.  And  raising 
his  hand  to  Heaven,  he  said,  “ Oh  ! Almighty  God ! mercifully 
hast  Thou  preserved  us  ! ” It  was,  in  fact,  the  “ Duncan,”  Lord 
Glenarvan’s  yacht,  now  commanded  by  Robert,  son  of  Captain 
Grant,  who  had  been  despatched  to  Tabor  Island  to  find  Ayr^ 
ton,  and  bring  him  back  to  his  native  land  after  twelve  years, 
of  expiation. 

The  colonists  were  not  only  saved,  but  already  on  the  way 
to  their  native  country. 

“ Captain  Grant,”  asked  Cyrus  Harding,  “ who  can  have  sug- 
gested. to  you  the  idea,  after  having  left  Tabor  Island,  where 


m 


THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION. 


you  did  not  find  Ayrton,  of  coming  a hundred  miles  farther 
northeast  ? ” 

“ Captain  Harding,”  replied  Robert  Grant,  “it  was  in  order 
to  find,  not  only  Ayrton,  but  yourself  and  your  companions.” 

“ My  companions  and  myself  ? ” 

“Doubtless,  at  Lincoln  Island.” 

“ At  Lincoln  Island  ! ” exclaimed  in  a breath  Gideon  Spilett, 
Herbert,  Neb,  and  Pencroft  in  the  highest  degree  astonished. 

“How  could  you  be  aware  of  the  existence  of  Lincoln 
Island  ?”  inquired  Cyrus  Harding,  “it  is  not  even  named  in  the 
charts.” 

“ I knew  of  it  from  a document  left  by  you  on  Tabor  Island,” 
answered  Robert  Grant. 

“ A document  ? ” cried  Gideon  Spilett. 

“ Without  doubt,  and  here  it  is,”  answered  Robert  Grant,  pro* 
ducing  a paper  which  indicated  the  longitude  and  latitude  of 
Lincoln  Island,  “ the  present  residence  of  Ayrton  and  five 
American  colonists.” 

“It  is  Captain  Nemo!”  cried  Cyrus  Harding,  after  having 
read  the  notice,  and  recognized  that  the  handwriting  was  simi- 
lar to  that  of  the  paper  found  at  the  corral. 

“ Ah ! ” said  Pencroft,  “ it  was  then  he  who  took  our  ‘ Bonad- 
venture  ’ and  hazarded  himself  alone  to  go  to  Tabor  Island !” 

“ In  order  to  leave  this  notice,”  added  Herbert. 

“I  was  then  right  in  saying,”  exclaimed  the  sailor,  “that 
even  after  his  death  the  captain  would  render  us  a last 
service.” 

“My  friends,”  said  Cyrus  Harding,  in  a voice  of  the  pro- 
foundest  emotion,  “ may  the  God  of  mercy  have  had  pity  on 
the  soul  of  Captain  Nemo  our  benefactor  ! ” 

The  colonists  uncovered  themselves  at  these  last  words  of 
Cyrus  Harding,  and  murmured  the  name  of  Captain  Nemo. 

Then  Ayrton,  approaching  the  engineer,  said  simply,  “ Where 
should  this  coffer  be  deposited  ? ” 

It  was  the  coffer  which  Ayrton  had  saved  at  the  risk  of  his 
ffe,  at  the  very  instant  that  the  island  had  been  engulfed,  and 
which  he  now  faithfully  handed  to  the  engineer. 

“Ayrton!  Ayrton!”  said  Cyrus  Harding,  deeply  touched. 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  ISLAND. 


655 


Then,  addressing  Robert  Grant,  “Sir,”  he  added,  “you  left 
behind  you  a criminal ; you  find  in  his  place  a man  who  has 
become  honest  by  penitence,  and  whose  hand  I am  proud  to 
clasp  in  mine.” 

Robert  Grant  was  now  made  acquainted  with  the  strange 
history  of  Captain  Nemo  and  the  colonists  of  Lincoln  Islandc 
Then,  observations  being  taken  of  what  remained  of  this  shoal, 
which  must  hence  forward  figure  on  the  charts  of  the  Pacific, 
the  order  was  given  to  make  all  sail. 

A few  weeks  afterwards  the  colonists  landed  in  America, 
and  found  their  country  once  more  at  peace  after  the  ter- 
rible conflict  in  which  right  and  justice  had  triumphed. 

Of  the  treasures  contained  in  the  coffer  left  by  Captain  Nemo 
to  the  colonists  of  Lincoln  Island,  the  larger  portion  was 
employed  in  the  purchase  of  a vast  territory  in  the  State  of 
Iowa.  One  pearl  alone,  the  finest,  was  reserved  from  the 
treasure  and  sent  to  Lady  Glenarvan  in  the  name  of  the  casta- 
ways restored  to  their  country  by  the  “ Duncan.” 

There,  upon  this  domain,  the  colonists  invited  to  labor,  that 
is  to  say,  to  wealth  and  happiness,  all  those  to  whom  they  had 
hoped  to  offer  the  hospitality  of  Lincoln  Island.  There  was 
founded  a vast  colony  to  which  they  gave  the  name  of  that 
island  sunk  beneath  the  waters  of  the  Pacific.  A river  was 
there  called  the  Mercy,  a mountain  took  the  name  of  Mount 
Franklin,  a small  lake  was  named  Lake  Grant,  and  the  forests 
became  the  forests  of  the  Far  West.  It  might  have  been  an 
island  on  terra  firma. 

There,  under  the  intelligent  hands  of  the  engineer  and  his 
companions,  every  thing  prospered.  Not  one  of  the  former 
colonists  of  Lincoln  Island  was  absent,  for  they  had  sworn  to 
live  always  together.  Neb  was  with  his  master  ; Ayrton  was 
there  ready  to  sacrifice  himself  for  all ; Pencroft  was  more  a 
farmer  than  he  had  even  been  a sailor ; Herbert,  who  com- 
pleted his  studies  under  the  superintendence  of  Cyrus  Hard- 
ing; and  Gideon  Spilett,  who  founded  the  New  Lincoln 
Herald , the  best-informed  journal  in  the  world. 

There  Cyrus  Harding  and  his  companions  received  at 
intervals  visits  from  Lord  and  Lady  Glenarvan,  Captain  John 


556  THE  LAKESIDE  EDITION,, 

Mangles  and  his  wife,  the  sister  of  Robert  Grant,  Robert  Grant 
himself,  Major  McNab,  and  all  those  who  had  taken  part  in 
the  history  both  of  Captain  Grant  and  Captain  Nemo. 

There,  to  conclude,  all  were  happy,  united  in  the  present  as 
they  had  been  in  the  past ; but  never  could  they  forget  that 
island  upon  which  they  had  arrived  poor  and  friendless,  that 
island  which,  during  four  years,  had  supplied  all  their  wants, 
and  of  which  there  remained  but  a fragment  of  granite 
washed  by  the  waves  of  the  Pacific,  the  tomb  of  him  wh*>  had 
borao  name  of  Captain  Nemo. 


ISE  BNR 


Magnet  handbooks, 


3E*rie©  ?25  ©eixts  ea-eli 


AMERICAN  BCOKOPC^ 
VS  EL  BEHAVIOR-— A complete  nandbook 
•f  modern  etiquette  lor  ladies  and  gentlemen.  A 
perusal  of  this  book  will  enable  every  one  to  rub 
off  theTough  husks  of  ill-breeding  and  neglected, 
education,  and  substitute  for  them  gentlemanly 
case  and  graceful  ladylike  deportment  (as  the  case 
may  be),  so  that  their  presence  will  be  sought  for, 
and  they  will  learn  the  art  of  being  not  only  thor- 
oughly at  home  in  all  societies,  but  will  have  the 
rarer  gift  of  making  everybody  around  them  feel 
easy,  contented,  and  happy.  This  work  is  fully 
op  to  the  requirements  of 'the  times : it  describes 
the  etiquette  of  our  very  best  society. 

: THE  BOOK  OF  KNOWLEDGE, 
nd  Sure  Quids. to  Rapid  Wealth* 

he  secrets  of  the  different  trades  are  fully  de- 
tailed, and  the  choicest  Tecipes  and  formulas  are 
given  for  the  making  of  different  kinds  of  liquors, 
Including  the  new  method  of  making  cider  with- 
out apples.  It  is  arranged  for  the  use  of  liquor- 
dealers,  druggists,  manufacturers,  farmers,  med- 
ical men,  the  household,  confectioners,  hunters, 
trappers,  perfumers,  artists,  &c.  Many  of  the  re- 
cipes have  been  advertised  and  sold  at  sums  rang- 
ing from  25  cents  to  $500;  and  there  are  many 
new  and  highly  valuable  recipes  never  before  pub- 
lished. 

L PARLOR  PASTIMES;  or,  Whole 

<^1*  Of  AmUSlng0~A  uew  work,  by  Prof. 
Raymond,  on  magic,  conjuring,  legerdemain,  and 
prestidigitation.  It  is  a complete  expose  of  the 
Wizard’s  Art.  No  trick  or  illusion  of  importance 
Je  left  unnoticed ; and  the  instruction:*  and  expla- 
nations are  so  simple  and  exhaustive  that  a child 
«ould  perform  the  tricks.  A study  of  this  inter- 
esting work  would  make  any  one  thoroughly  ex- 
fpert  in  amusing  either  a public  or  private  audience. 

THE  HORSE-OWNER’S  GUIDE: 

end  Complete  Horse-doctor,— The 

ist  work  on  the  horse  ever  published.  It  should 
foe  in  the  hands  of  every  one  who  owns,  works,  or 
cares  for  a horse.  It  is  a book  that  is  needed,—- 
simple,  concise,  comprehensive,  reliable,  and  prac- 
tical,—giving  the  fullest  and  best  information  on 
ell  matters  that  relate  to  this  useful  animal 

THE  TAXIDERMIST’S GUIDE.- A 

complete  mstructer  m the  art  of  collecting,  pre- 
paring, mounting,  and  preserving  all  kinds  of  an- 
imals, birds,  fishes,  reptiles,  and  insects.  Adapted 
for  the  use  of  amateurs,  travelers,  and  practical 
workers.  A number  of  the  best  recipes  are  given, 
os  used  by  the  best  taxidermists,  for  articles  used 
In  the  preservation  and  the  setting  up  of  animals. 
Illustrated. 


READY- ft?  ADS  AUTOGfS&PW:* 

ALBUFt/3  VERSEi,  expressive  of  almesj 
every  human  feeling  and  sentiment,  such  as  Love, 
Friendship,  Bcspect,  Admiration,  Good  Wishes, 
&c.,  including  a great  number  of  acrostics  fay 
proper  names,  all  entirely  original.  Here  all  may 
find  something  to  write  be  once  eloquent  and  ap* 
propriate,  to  suit  every  phase  of  feeling,  sentiment^ 
or  humor. 

HOW  TO  WRITE  A LETTER-— A 

complete  letter-writer  for  ladies  and  gentlemen. 
It  tells  how  to  write  a letter  upon  any  subject  out 
of  the  writer’s  “own  head.”  It  also  contains  the; 
“Art  of  Bapid "Writing ” by  the  abbreviation  of 
longhand,  and  a “Dictionary  of  Abbreviations.” 
This  book  contains  all  the  points  and  features  tha* 
are  in  other  letter-writers,  with  very  much  that  is 
new,  original,  and  very  important,  and  which  caa 
not  be  found  in  any  other  book. 

HOW  TO  WRITE  SHORTHAND, 

Without  a teacher-— A practical  element* 
ary  guide  to  Stenographic  Wilting  and  Deporting; 
A boy  of  twelve  can  by  this  method  learn  in  a 
week  what  it  would  take  an  adult  a yearto  lean* 
by  any  other  method. 


for  the  ordinary  ills  of  life,  this  book  should  be  iis 
the  hands  of  every  person  who  is  liable  to  an  acci* 
dent  or  subject  to  a disease.  It  tells  what  to  do 
and  how  to  do  it  in  the  plainest  possible  manneR. 

THE  PRACTICAL  MAGICIANS 
and.  Ventriloquist’s  .Guide-  By  a se- 

ries  of  systematic  lessons  the  learner  is  conducted 
through  the  whole  field  of  magic,  conjuring,  and 


mexcial  ana  mercantile  transactions,  including 
dictionary  of  all  the  terms  and  technicalities  used 
in  commerce  and  in  business  houses.  Correct 
legal  forms  are  given  of  bills,  deeds,  notes,  drafts, 
cheques,  agreements,  receipts,  contracts, and  other 
Instruments  of  writing  constantly  necessary  to  all 

GILBERT’S  BOOK  OF  PANTO- 
Acting  Charades,  Parlor 
Theatricals,,  and  Tableaux-  It  also 

contains  uhy  tableaux  Vivants,  or  Animated  Pic- 
fcv.Tea  Persons  who  have  never  seen  any  of  these 
things  noted  can  easily  arrange  and  perform  them. 
For  church  fairs,  school  exhibitions,  and  parlor 
entertainments,  they  are  just  the  thing,  b< 
easily  produced  ar  j 


legerdemain.  There  are  also  given  complete  iiv 
structions  for  acquiring  the  art  of  ventriloquisra 
The  instructions  are  so  very  simple  and  practical 
that  no  one  can  fail  to  acquire  this  amusing  art, 
and  become  a proficient  ventriloquist  aad  poiypii* 
cnist.  Illustrated. 

TRICKS  AND  DIVERSIONS  WITH 

C5AI2DO- — An  entirely  new  work,  containing 
all  the  tricks  and  deceptions  with  cards  ever  in- 
vented, including  the  latest  tricks  of  the  most  cel® 
ebrated  conjurers,  magicians,  and  prestidigitators, 
popularly  cxx>!ained,  simplified,  and  adapted  for 
home  amusements  and  social  entertainments.  To 
lovers  of  the  marvelous  and  ingenious  this  book, 
will  be  a perpetual  source  of  delight.  Handsomely/ 
illustrated.  { 

The  HUNTER’S  AND  TRAPPER’S' 
COMPLETE  .CUIB  ga— A practical  man- 
ual of  instruction  in  the  art  of  hunting,  trapping, 
and  fishing.  The  instructions  will  enable  any  one 
to  become  thoroughly  expert  in  the  sports  and 
pastimes  of  the  river,  field,  or  forest.  Illustrated. 

OFFENBACH’S  DANCING  WITH* 
OUT  A MASTER-— All  the  popular  dauces 
are  given,  ana  the  whole  illustrated  by  numerous 
cuts  and  diagrams,  making  the  art  so  simple  that* 
the  most  ignorant  can  become  expert  in  it. 

, PERSONAL  BEAUTY?  or,  the  Who!® 

Art  ot  Attaining  Bodily  Vigor,  Physical  Devalop- 
ment,  Beauty  of  Feature,  and  Symmetry  of  Form, 
With  the  Science  of  .Dressing  with  Taste, 
gance,  and  Economy.  Illustrated. 

THE  AMATEUR  PA^TERa-Aman* 


just  the  thing,  being  f ual  of  instructions  in  the  arts  of  painting,  varnish- 
_ id  giving  excellent  opportunities  i Jug,  and  gilding,  with  plain  rales  for  the  practise 

Cor  both  young  and  oid  to  participate.  « of  every  department  ex  house  and  sign  pahati^j. 

PB2C3  TWEyjfy.FIVE  CENTS 

A&dysa*  60>»  Stew  YorSb 


MAGNET  A A N^D  BOOKS. 

PRICE  TWEfi  r-FIVE  CENTS  EACH. 


lessor  Johnson. — £or  conciseness,  reliability,  and 
cheapness,  this  work  is  superior  to  any  published. 
,Noi  only  docs  it  contain  a vast  number  of  reliable 
and  practical  recipes  and  processes  relating  to  the 
fine  arts,  trades,  and  general  manufactures,  but  it 
gives  full  and  explicit  instructions  for  acquiring 


chromatic  and  Crayon  Painting,  Vitremaine,  and 
many  others  of  equal  value  and  importance, 

A SCIENTdFvG  Y wJEATJSE  ON 
Stammering  and  Stuttering  atid 
Its  cure.-we  have  here  this  difficult  subject 
.treated  so  intelligently  and  plainly  that  any  person 
(interested  can  read  and  learn  the  causes  of  the 
peculiar  and  distressing  impediments  in  his 
speech.  It  thoroughly  explains  the  different 
-.auses  that  produce  stammering,  and  then  pro- 
ceeds to  make  plain  the  means  of  cure,  so  that  any 
person  with  a determination  to  succeed,  by  follow- 
ing the  instructions  given,  can  cure  himself  of  this 
most  unhappy  affliction,  and  at  no  expense  but 
the  cost  of  the  book. 

THE  REAL  SECRET  ART  AND 
Philosophy  of  Wooing,  Winning, 

and  WeddTng.'-Showmg  how  maidens  may 
become  happy  wives,  and  bachelors  become  happy 
husbands,  in  a brief  space  of  time  and  by  easy 
methods.  Also  containing  complete  directions  for 
declaring  intentions,  accepting  vows,  and  retain- 
ing affections,  both  before  and  after  marriage. 

CHOICE  VERSES  FOR  VALEN- 
tlnes,  Albums,  and  Wedding  Cele- 
bration**.—Containing  original  ancr  selected 
verses  applicable  to  wooden,  tin,  silvei%  golden, 
and  diamond  wedding  anniversaries ; bouquet  and 
jirtbday  presentations,  autograph-albwm  verses 
and  acrostics,  and  a variety  of  verses  and  poems 
adapted  to  social  anniversaries  and  rejoicings. 

THE  AMERICAN  REFERENCE- 

BOOK.  —A  manual  of  tacts,  containing  a chron- 
ological history  of  the  United  States;  the  public 
Innas;  everything  about  the  constitution,  debts, 
revenues,  productions,  wealth,  population,  rail- 
roads, exemption,  interest,  insolvent  and  assign- 
ment statutes  of  the  United  States,  &c. 


KEY  TO  COMPOSITIONS  or,How 
to  Write  a Book.— a complete  guide  to  au- 
thorship,and  practical  instructer  in  all  kinds  of  lit- 
erary labor.  As  an  aid  and  instructer  to  those  who 


ftesire  to  follow  literary  pursuits  permanently  for 
coiit,  or  to  those  who  write  for  recreation  and 
ieaaure,  this  book  is  indispensable. 

GYMNASTICS  , WITHOUT  A 

TEACHER.— This  book  plainly  explains  to 
you  how  to  go  about  learning  all  the  popular 
tranches  of  gymnastics,  Every  man  and  boy 
uught  to  learn  the  different  exercises  described  in 
this  book,  if  he  wishes  to  live  a healthy  life,  and 
preserve  a sound  and  vigorous  hodv,  a sharp  eye, 
and  simple  Knobs. 


pective  marriage,  your  business  prospects,  your 
Sve-affairs.  The  book  is  a perfect  oracle  of  fate. 


of.  the  Parisian  tongue, 

9 r cent,  grammar,  mid  pronunciation. 


INCIDENTS  OF.  AMERICAN 

CAMP- LIFE,  — A collection  of  tragic,  pathet- 
l( , and  humorous  events,  which  actually  occurred 
during  the  late  civil  war. 

OUR  KNOWLEDCE-BOXg  or,  old 

-ttwret*  arid  new  discoveries. 


valuable  ^marnial 
y how  to  buy,  dress,  cook,  serve,  and 
carve  every  kind  of  fish.  fowl,  meat,  game,  and 
vegetable.  Also,  how  to  preserve  fruitb  and  vege- 
tables, and  how  to  make  pastry. 

THE  FAMILY  CYCLOPEDIA,— A 

complete  and  practical  domestic  manual  for  p’j 
classes.  This  valuable  and  comprehensive  work  ia 
needed  in  every  house. 


showing  all  the  different  posx 
tions,  blows,  stops,  and  guards.  By  Ned  Donelly, 
Professor  of  Boxing  to  the  London  Athletic  Club. 

THE  ART  OF  BEAUTIFYING  AND 
Preserving:  the  Hair;  or,  How  to 
Make  the  Hair  Crow.— This  is  the  only 
exhaustive  scientific  work  on  the  huir  published. 

HAWTHORNE’S  COPTIC  AND 
TRAGIC  DIALOGUES.— -Including  many 
oi  the  most  affecting,  amusing,  and  spirited  dia> 
loguea  ever  written, — affording  opportunities  fofl 
the  display  of  every  different  quality  of  action, 
voice,  and  delivery,—  suitable  for  schools,  acade- 
mies, anniversaries,  and  parlor  presentations. 


mressly  and  caretuhy  tor  me  use  ot  young 
dren.  Containing  a large  number  of  pieces,  some 
simple  enough  to  please  infants,  while  all  are  sura 
to  delight  and  improve  children  of  every  age. 

HAWTHORNE’S  TRAGIC  RE- 
CITER.—Containing  the  very  best  pieces  ever 
written  expressive  of  Love,  Hate,  Fear,  Page,  Re- 
venge, Jealousy,  and  the  other  most  melting,  stir- 
ring, and  startling  passions  of  the  human  heart. 

HAWTHORNE’S  COMIC  RECITER 

Filled  with  the  liveliest,  jolliest,  laughter-jprovok- 
ing  stories,  lectures,  and  other  humorous  pieces. 

Hawthorne’s  Book  of  Ready- 
made Speeches  on  ad  subjects  that  can 
occur,  whether  on  serious,  sentimental,  or  humor- 
ous occasions.  Including  speeches  ai  1 replies 
at  dinners,  receptions,  festivals,  political  meetings, 
military  reviews,  firemen’s  gatherings,  and  indeed 
wherever  and  whenever  any  party,  large  or  small, 
is  gathered  to  dine,  to  mourn,  to  congratulate,  or 
to  rejoice.  Appended  to  which  are  forms  of  all 
kinds  of  resolutions,  &c.,  with  a great  number  oi 
sentiments  and  toasts. 

„ Theatricals  at  Homes  or,  Plays 

for  the  Parlor.  Plainly  teaching  how  to  dress, 
make  up,  study,  and  perform  at  private  theatrical 
parties.  To  which  ace  added  how  to  arrange  an 4 
display  tableaux  vivants,  shadow  pantomime^ 
drawing-room  magic,  acting  charades,  conurt, 
drums,  enigmas, &c., with  explanatory  engravings. 

Snip,  Snap,  Snorum,  and  nearly 

Cne  hundred  other  parlor  games,  such  as  j uvenile 
card-games,  games  of  forfeits,  games  of  action, 
games  with  pen  and  pencil.  Including  many  nev? 
and  all  the  old  favorite  amusements  calculated  t?s 
make  home  happy  and  set  the  youngsters  scream- 
ing wild  with  innocent  delight. 

The  Art  of  Canning, PIckHng.and 

smoking  the  various  kinds  of  Meat,  r :sh,  and 
Game.  Also,  how  to  preserve  and  keep,  fresh  ami 
full  of  flavor,  fruits,  berries,  and  vegetables.  Tt 
which  is  added  complete  directions  tor  making 
candies  and  choice  confections. 

Fishing;  with  Hock  and  Line.  -Tjiis 

hook  gives  plain  and  lull  direction.',  for  .’utclimg 
all  the  different  kinds  of  fish  found  in  American 
waters;  the  proper  season  for  fishing  for  them* 
and  the  bait,  tackle,  &c.,  to  be  used. 

Honest  Abe’s  Jokes. —-A  collection  <4 
authentic  jokes  and  squibs  w*  4 brausuw  Lmctda. 


